diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore index 8c583f5..6c83190 100644 --- a/.gitignore +++ b/.gitignore @@ -1 +1 @@ -SOURCES/thermald-2.4.6.tar.gz +SOURCES/thermald-2.5.tar.gz diff --git a/.thermald.metadata b/.thermald.metadata index ea72509..ca84850 100644 --- a/.thermald.metadata +++ b/.thermald.metadata @@ -1 +1 @@ -1b5f2aab3b231ebcae292813424f4a54561caa12 SOURCES/thermald-2.4.6.tar.gz +24d6d30a68a9c313800dcdc45b3da2b2431b1a3b SOURCES/thermald-2.5.tar.gz diff --git a/SOURCES/qcustomplot.patch b/SOURCES/qcustomplot.patch new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb8fa9f --- /dev/null +++ b/SOURCES/qcustomplot.patch @@ -0,0 +1,37658 @@ +commit 796e69aa3f54992bb980a7dffee3c93b41c5e7aa +Author: Benjamin Berg +Date: Thu Jul 7 16:50:53 2022 +0200 + + Use internal copy of qcustomplot + +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/ThermalMonitor.pro b/tools/thermal_monitor/ThermalMonitor.pro +index c46f530..bb40208 100644 +--- a/tools/thermal_monitor/ThermalMonitor.pro ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/ThermalMonitor.pro +@@ -14,10 +14,9 @@ CONFIG(release): DEFINES += QT_NO_DEBUG_OUTPUT + TARGET = ThermalMonitor + TEMPLATE = app + +-LIBS += -lqcustomplot +- + SOURCES += main.cpp\ + mainwindow.cpp \ ++ qcustomplot/qcustomplot.cpp \ + thermaldinterface.cpp \ + pollingdialog.cpp \ + sensorsdialog.cpp \ +@@ -25,6 +24,7 @@ SOURCES += main.cpp\ + tripsdialog.cpp + + HEADERS += mainwindow.h \ ++ qcustomplot/qcustomplot.h \ + thermaldinterface.h \ + pollingdialog.h \ + sensorsdialog.h \ +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/mainwindow.h b/tools/thermal_monitor/mainwindow.h +index 41381d0..b5d3f0f 100644 +--- a/tools/thermal_monitor/mainwindow.h ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/mainwindow.h +@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ + #include + #include + #include +-#include ++#include "qcustomplot/qcustomplot.h" + #include "thermaldinterface.h" + + typedef struct { +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/GPL.txt b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/GPL.txt +new file mode 100644 +index 0000000..94a9ed0 +--- /dev/null ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/GPL.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@ ++ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE ++ Version 3, 29 June 2007 ++ ++ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. ++ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies ++ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. ++ ++ Preamble ++ ++ The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for ++software and other kinds of works. ++ ++ The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed ++to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, ++the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to ++share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free ++software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the ++GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to ++any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to ++your programs, too. ++ ++ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not ++price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you ++have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for ++them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you ++want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new ++free programs, and that you know you can do these things. ++ ++ To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you ++these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have ++certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if ++you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. ++ ++ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether ++gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same ++freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive ++or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they ++know their rights. ++ ++ Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: ++(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License ++giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. ++ ++ For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains ++that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and ++authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as ++changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to ++authors of previous versions. ++ ++ Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run ++modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer ++can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of ++protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic ++pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to ++use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we ++have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those ++products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we ++stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions ++of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. ++ ++ Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. ++States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of ++software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to ++avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could ++make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that ++patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. ++ ++ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and ++modification follow. ++ ++ TERMS AND CONDITIONS ++ ++ 0. Definitions. ++ ++ "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. ++ ++ "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of ++works, such as semiconductor masks. ++ ++ "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this ++License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and ++"recipients" may be individuals or organizations. ++ ++ To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work ++in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an ++exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the ++earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. ++ ++ A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based ++on the Program. ++ ++ To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without ++permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for ++infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a ++computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, ++distribution (with or without modification), making available to the ++public, and in some countries other activities as well. ++ ++ To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other ++parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through ++a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. ++ ++ An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" ++to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible ++feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) ++tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the ++extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the ++work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If ++the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a ++menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. ++ ++ 1. Source Code. ++ ++ The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work ++for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source ++form of a work. ++ ++ A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official ++standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of ++interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that ++is widely used among developers working in that language. ++ ++ The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other ++than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of ++packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major ++Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that ++Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an ++implementation is available to the public in source code form. A ++"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component ++(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system ++(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to ++produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. ++ ++ The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all ++the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable ++work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to ++control those activities. However, it does not include the work's ++System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free ++programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but ++which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source ++includes interface definition files associated with source files for ++the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically ++linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, ++such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those ++subprograms and other parts of the work. ++ ++ The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users ++can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding ++Source. ++ ++ The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that ++same work. ++ ++ 2. Basic Permissions. ++ ++ All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of ++copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated ++conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited ++permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a ++covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its ++content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your ++rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. ++ ++ You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not ++convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains ++in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose ++of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you ++with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with ++the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do ++not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works ++for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction ++and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of ++your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. ++ ++ Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under ++the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 ++makes it unnecessary. ++ ++ 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. ++ ++ No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological ++measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article ++11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or ++similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such ++measures. ++ ++ When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid ++circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention ++is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to ++the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or ++modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's ++users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of ++technological measures. ++ ++ 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. ++ ++ You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you ++receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and ++appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; ++keep intact all notices stating that this License and any ++non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; ++keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all ++recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. ++ ++ You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, ++and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. ++ ++ 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. ++ ++ You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to ++produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the ++terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: ++ ++ a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified ++ it, and giving a relevant date. ++ ++ b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is ++ released under this License and any conditions added under section ++ 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to ++ "keep intact all notices". ++ ++ c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this ++ License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This ++ License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 ++ additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, ++ regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no ++ permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not ++ invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. ++ ++ d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display ++ Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive ++ interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your ++ work need not make them do so. ++ ++ A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent ++works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, ++and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, ++in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an ++"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not ++used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users ++beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work ++in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other ++parts of the aggregate. ++ ++ 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. ++ ++ You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms ++of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the ++machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, ++in one of these ways: ++ ++ a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product ++ (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the ++ Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium ++ customarily used for software interchange. ++ ++ b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product ++ (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a ++ written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as ++ long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product ++ model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a ++ copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the ++ product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical ++ medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no ++ more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this ++ conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the ++ Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. ++ ++ c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the ++ written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This ++ alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and ++ only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord ++ with subsection 6b. ++ ++ d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated ++ place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the ++ Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no ++ further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the ++ Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to ++ copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source ++ may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) ++ that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain ++ clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the ++ Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the ++ Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is ++ available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. ++ ++ e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided ++ you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding ++ Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no ++ charge under subsection 6d. ++ ++ A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded ++from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be ++included in conveying the object code work. ++ ++ A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any ++tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, ++or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation ++into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, ++doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular ++product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a ++typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status ++of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user ++actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product ++is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial ++commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent ++the only significant mode of use of the product. ++ ++ "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, ++procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install ++and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from ++a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must ++suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object ++code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because ++modification has been made. ++ ++ If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or ++specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as ++part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the ++User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a ++fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the ++Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied ++by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply ++if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install ++modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has ++been installed in ROM). ++ ++ The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a ++requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates ++for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for ++the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a ++network may be denied when the modification itself materially and ++adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and ++protocols for communication across the network. ++ ++ Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, ++in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly ++documented (and with an implementation available to the public in ++source code form), and must require no special password or key for ++unpacking, reading or copying. ++ ++ 7. Additional Terms. ++ ++ "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this ++License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. ++Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall ++be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent ++that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions ++apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately ++under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by ++this License without regard to the additional permissions. ++ ++ When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option ++remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of ++it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own ++removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place ++additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, ++for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. ++ ++ Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you ++add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of ++that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: ++ ++ a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the ++ terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or ++ ++ b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or ++ author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal ++ Notices displayed by works containing it; or ++ ++ c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or ++ requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in ++ reasonable ways as different from the original version; or ++ ++ d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or ++ authors of the material; or ++ ++ e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some ++ trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or ++ ++ f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that ++ material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of ++ it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for ++ any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on ++ those licensors and authors. ++ ++ All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further ++restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you ++received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is ++governed by this License along with a term that is a further ++restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains ++a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this ++License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms ++of that license document, provided that the further restriction does ++not survive such relicensing or conveying. ++ ++ If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you ++must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the ++additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating ++where to find the applicable terms. ++ ++ Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the ++form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; ++the above requirements apply either way. ++ ++ 8. Termination. ++ ++ You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly ++provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or ++modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under ++this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third ++paragraph of section 11). ++ ++ However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your ++license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) ++provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and ++finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright ++holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means ++prior to 60 days after the cessation. ++ ++ Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is ++reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the ++violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have ++received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that ++copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after ++your receipt of the notice. ++ ++ Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the ++licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under ++this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently ++reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same ++material under section 10. ++ ++ 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. ++ ++ You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or ++run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work ++occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission ++to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, ++nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or ++modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do ++not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a ++covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. ++ ++ 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. ++ ++ Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically ++receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and ++propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible ++for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. ++ ++ An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an ++organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an ++organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered ++work results from an entity transaction, each party to that ++transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever ++licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could ++give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the ++Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if ++the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. ++ ++ You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the ++rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may ++not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of ++rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation ++(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that ++any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for ++sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. ++ ++ 11. Patents. ++ ++ A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this ++License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The ++work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". ++ ++ A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims ++owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or ++hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted ++by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, ++but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a ++consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For ++purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant ++patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of ++this License. ++ ++ Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free ++patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to ++make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and ++propagate the contents of its contributor version. ++ ++ In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express ++agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent ++(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to ++sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a ++party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a ++patent against the party. ++ ++ If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, ++and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone ++to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a ++publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, ++then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so ++available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the ++patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner ++consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent ++license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have ++actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the ++covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work ++in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that ++country that you have reason to believe are valid. ++ ++ If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or ++arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a ++covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties ++receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify ++or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license ++you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered ++work and works based on it. ++ ++ A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within ++the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is ++conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are ++specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered ++work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is ++in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment ++to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying ++the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the ++parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory ++patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work ++conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily ++for and in connection with specific products or compilations that ++contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, ++or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. ++ ++ Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting ++any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may ++otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. ++ ++ 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. ++ ++ If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or ++otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not ++excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a ++covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this ++License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may ++not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you ++to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey ++the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this ++License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. ++ ++ 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. ++ ++ Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have ++permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed ++under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single ++combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this ++License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, ++but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, ++section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the ++combination as such. ++ ++ 14. Revised Versions of this License. ++ ++ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of ++the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will ++be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to ++address new problems or concerns. ++ ++ Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the ++Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General ++Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the ++option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered ++version or of any later version published by the Free Software ++Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the ++GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published ++by the Free Software Foundation. ++ ++ If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future ++versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's ++public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you ++to choose that version for the Program. ++ ++ Later license versions may give you additional or different ++permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any ++author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a ++later version. ++ ++ 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. ++ ++ THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY ++APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT ++HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY ++OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ++THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR ++PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM ++IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ++ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. ++ ++ 16. Limitation of Liability. ++ ++ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING ++WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS ++THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY ++GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE ++USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF ++DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD ++PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), ++EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ++SUCH DAMAGES. ++ ++ 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. ++ ++ If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided ++above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, ++reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates ++an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the ++Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a ++copy of the Program in return for a fee. ++ ++ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS ++ ++ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs ++ ++ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest ++possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it ++free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. ++ ++ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest ++to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively ++state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least ++the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. ++ ++ ++ Copyright (C) ++ ++ This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify ++ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by ++ the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or ++ (at your option) any later version. ++ ++ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, ++ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of ++ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the ++ GNU General Public License for more details. ++ ++ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License ++ along with this program. If not, see . ++ ++Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. ++ ++ If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short ++notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: ++ ++ Copyright (C) ++ This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. ++ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it ++ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. ++ ++The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate ++parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands ++might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". ++ ++ You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, ++if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. ++For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see ++. ++ ++ The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program ++into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you ++may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with ++the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General ++Public License instead of this License. But first, please read ++. +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/changelog.txt b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/changelog.txt +new file mode 100644 +index 0000000..1be74ac +--- /dev/null ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/changelog.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,533 @@ ++#### Version 2.0.0-beta released on 13.09.16 #### ++ ++Added major features: ++ - Axis tick and tick label generation was completely refactored and is now handled in the QCPAxisTicker class (also see QCPAxis::setTicker). Available ticker subclasses for special uses cases: ++ QCPAxisTicker, QCPAxisTickerFixed, QCPAxisTickerLog, QCPAxisTickerPi, QCPAxisTickerTime, QCPAxisTickerDateTime, QCPAxisTickerText ++ - Data container is now based on QCPDataContainer template for unified data interface and significantly improved memory footprint and better performance for common use-cases, especially data adding/removing. ++ - New data selection mechanism allows selection of single data points and data ranges for plottables. See special documentation page "data selection mechanism". ++ - Rubber band/selection rect for data point selection and axis zooming is now available, see documentation of QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode and QCPSelectionRect. For this purpose, the new default ++ layer "overlay" was introduced, which is now the top layer, and holds the QCustomPlot's QCPSelectionRect instance. ++ - Data sharing between plottables of the same type (see setData methods taking a QSharedPointer) ++ - OpenGL hardware acceleration is now available across all Qt versions (including Qt4) in a unified, simple interface, with QCustomPlot::setOpenGl ++ - QCPStatisticalBox can now display a series of statistical boxes instead of only a single one ++ - New QCPErrorBars plottable allows attaching error bars to any one-dimensional plottable (QCPGraph has thus lost its own error-bar capability) ++ - QCPColorMap now supports transparency via alpha in its color gradient stops, and via a dedicated cell-wise alpha map (see QCPColorMapData::setAlpha) ++ - Layers may now be individually replotted (QCPLayer::replot), if the mode (QCPLayer::setMode) is set to lmBuffered. Mutually adjacent lmLogical layers share a single paint buffer to save resources. ++ By default, the new topmost "overlay" layer which contains the selection rect is an lmBuffered layer. Updating the selection rect is thus very fast, independent of the plot contents. ++ - QCPLayerable (and thus practically all objects in QCP) now have virtual methods to receive mouse press/move/release/doubleclick/wheel events. Before, only QCPLayoutElement provided them. ++ this makes it much easier to subclass e.g. items and plottables to provide custom mouse interactions that were cumbersome and awkward with the simpler signal-based interface ++ ++Added minor features: ++ - High-DPI support for Qt versions 5.0 and up, using device pixel ratio detected by Qt (can be changed manually via QCustomPlot::setBufferDevicePixelRatio). ++ - QCPGraph and QCPCurve can now be configured to only display every n'th scatter symbol, see ::setScatterSkip() method ++ - QCPFinancial allows to define bar width in absolute pixels and axis rect ratio, instead of only in plot key coordinates (see QCPFinancial::setWidthType) ++ - Range dragging/zooming can now be configured to affect more than one axis per orientation (see new overloads of QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes/setRangeZoomAxes) ++ - Added QCPTextElement (replaces QCPPlotTitle) for general texts in layouts. Provides clicked and doubleClicked signals, as replacement for the removed QCustomPlot::titleClicked/titleDoubleClicked ++ - Export functions (QCustomPlot::savePng etc.) now support specifying the resolution that will be written to the image file header. This improves operability with other tools which respect metadata. ++ - Replots can now be queued to the next event loop iteration with replot(QCP::rpQueuedReplot). This way you can successively ask for a replot at multiple code locations without causing redundant replots ++ - QCPAxisRect::zoom(...) allows to zoom to a specific rectangular region given in pixel coordinates, either affecting all axes or a specified subset of axes. ++ - QCPRange::bounded returns a bounded range, trying to preserve its size. Works with rangeChanged signal to limit the allowed range (see rangeChanged doc) ++ - Plottable rescaleValueAxis method (and getValueRange) now take parameter inKeyRange, which allows rescaling of the value axis only with respect to data in the currently visible key range ++ - plottableClick and plottableDoubleClick signals now carry the clicked data point index as second parameter ++ - Added QCPAxis::scaleRange overload without "center" argument, which scales around the current axis range center ++ - Added QCPRange::expand/expanded overloads which take only one double parameter ++ - Plottables addToLegend/removeFromLegend methods now have overloads that take any QCPLegend, to make working with non-default legends easier (legends that are not QCustomPlot::legend) ++ - Added QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerAntialiased to allow controlling antialiasing state of whiskers independently of quartile box/median line ++ - The virtual method QCPLayoutElement::layoutChanged() now allows subclasses to react on a move of the layout element between logical positions in the parent layout, or between layouts ++ - QCPMarginGroup::commonMargin is now virtual, to facilitate subclassing of QCPMarginGroup ++ - QCPGraph::getPreparedData is now virtual, and thus allows subclasses to easily generate own plotted data, e.g. on-the-fly. ++ - Added QCPRange qDebug stream operator ++ - QCPLayoutGrid (and thus QCPLegend) can now wrap rows or columns at specified row/column counts, see setFillOrder, setWrap and the new addElement overload which doesn't have row/column index ++ ++Bugfixes [Also backported to 1.3.2]: ++ - Fixed possible crash when having a QCPGraph with scatters only and a non-transparent main/fill brush of the graph ++ - Fixed QCPItemPixmap not updating internally cached scaled pixmap if new pixmap set with same scaled dimensions ++ - When using log axis scale and zooming out as far as possible (~1e-280..1e280), axis doesn't end up in (via mouse) unrecoverable range with strange axis ticks anymore ++ - Axis tick label algorithm for beautifully typeset powers now checks whether "e" in tick label is actually part of a number before converting the exponent to superscript ++ - Fixed QCustomPlot::moveLayer performing incorrect move and possible crash in certain situations ++ - Fixed possible crash on QCustomPlot destruction due to wrong QObject-hierarchy. Only occurs if a QCPAxisRect is removed from the normal QCustomPlot destruction hierarchy by taking it out of its layout ++ - Fixed possible freeze when data values become infinity after coord-to-pixel transformation (e.g. maximally zoomed out log axis), and line style is not solid (e.g. dashed) or phFastPolylines is disabled ++ - Fixed a few missing enums in meta type system, by unifying usage of Q_ENUMS, Q_FLAGS and Q_DECLARE_METATYPE ++Bugfixes [Not in 1.3.2]: ++ - Fixed QCPItemLine/QCPItemStraightLine not being selectable when defining coords are many orders of magnitude (>1e8) larger than currently viewed range ++ - Fixed/worked around crash due to bug in QPainter::drawPixmap with very large negative x/y pixel coordinates, when drawing sparse pixmap scatters ++ - Fixed possible (but unlikely) int overflow in adaptive sampling algorithm, that could cause plot artifacts when using extremely sparse data (with respect to current key axis range). ++ - Fixed QCPBarsGroup bug which caused stPlotCoords spacing to be wrong with vertical key axes ++ - A QCPBars axis rescale in the main window constructor (i.e. without well-defined plot size) now falls back to a datapoint-tight rescaling instead of doing nothing (because bar width can't be determined) ++ - Improved QCPBars stacking when using bars with very large keys and key separation at limit of double precision ++ ++Summary of backward incompatible changes: ++ Plottable related: ++ - Removed QCustomPlot::addPlottable, not needed anymore as plottables now automatically register in their constructor ++ - Removed QCustomPlot::addItem, not needed anymore as items now automatically register in their constructor ++ - QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend/removeFromLegend are not virtual anymore. If your plottable requires a custom legend item, add it to the legend manually. ++ - setData/addData method overloads of plottables have changed to facilitate data sharing and new data container (see documentation) ++ - plottableClick and plottableDoubleClick signals now carry the clicked data point index as second parameter, and the QMouseEvent parameter has moved to third. ++ Check all your usages of those signals, because Qt's connect method only reports problems during runtime! ++ - setSelectable now not only limits what can be selected by the user, but limits also any programmatic selection changes via setSelected. ++ - enum QCPAbstractPlottable::SignDomain has changed namespace to QCP::SignDomain ++ Axis related: ++ - Removed QCPAxis::setAutoTicks, setAutoTickCount, setAutoTickLabels, setAutoTickStep, setAutoSubTicks, setTickLabelType, setDateTimeFormat, setDateTimeSpec, ++ setTickStep, setTickVector, setTickVectorLabels, setSubTickCount in favor of new QCPAxisTicker-based interface ++ - Added QCPAxis::setSubTicks to enable/disable subticks (manually controlling the subtick count needs subclassing of QCPAxisTicker, e.g. QCPAxisTickerText and QCPAxisTickerLog provide setSubTickCount) ++ Item related: ++ - Renamed QCPAbstractItem::rectSelectTest to rectDistance, to prevent confusion with new QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTestRect ++ - Renamed QCPItemAnchor::pixelPoint to QCPItemAnchor::pixelPosition (also affects subclass QCPItemPosition) ++ General: ++ - Renamed QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority enums (parameter of the replot() method): rpImmediate to rpImmediateRefresh, rpQueued to rpQueuedRefresh, rpHint to rpRefreshHint ++ - Renamed QCustomPlot::PlottingHint enum phForceRepaint to phImmediateRefresh ++ - Removed QCPPlotTitle layout element (See new QCPTextElement for almost drop-in replacement) ++ - Removed signals QCustomPlot::titleClicked/titleDoubleClicked, replaced by QCPTextElement signals clicked/doubleClicked. ++ - QCustomPlot::savePdf has changed parameters from (fileName, bool noCosmeticPen, width, height,...) to (fileName, width, height, QCP::ExportPen exportPen,...) ++ - Virtual methods QCPLayoutElement::mouseMoveEvent/mouseReleaseEvent (which are now introduced already in the superclass QCPLayerable) have gained an additional parameter const QPointF &startPos. ++ If you have reimplemented these methods, make sure to update your function signatures, otherwise your reimplementations will likely be ignored by the compiler without warning ++ - Creating a new QCPColorGradient without supplying a preset parameter in the constructor now creates an empty gradient, instead of loading the gpCold preset ++ ++Other: ++ - Replaced usage of Qt's QVector2D with own QCPVector2D which uses double precision and offers some convenience functions ++ - Extended relative range to which QCPItemLine/QCPItemStraightLine can be zoomed before vanishing from ~1e9 to ~1e16 ++ - Removed QCPItemStraightLine::distToStraightLine (replaced by QCPVector2D::distanceToStraightLine) ++ - Removed QCPAbstractPlottable::distSqrToLine and QCPAbstractItem::distSqrToLine (replaced by QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine) ++ - Qt5.5 compatibility (If you use PDF export, test your outputs, as output dimensions might change when switching Qt versions -- QCP does not try to emulate previous Qt version behaviour here) ++ - QCP now includes instead of just because some users had problems with the latter. Please report if you now experience issues due to the new include. ++ - QCPGraph can now use a brush (filled polygon under the graph data) without having a graph line (line style lsNone) ++ - QCPFinancial is now two-colored (setTwoColored(true)) by default, and has green/red as default two-colored brushes and pens ++ - Plottable pixelsToCoords/coordsToPixels methods are now public, and offer transformations from pixel to plot coordinates and vice versa, using the plottable's axes ++ - Plottable getKeyRange/getValueRange methods are now public ++ - QCPBarsGroup now always places the QCPBars that was added to the group first towards lower keys, independent of axis orientation or direction (the ordering used to flip with axis orientation) ++ - Default focus policy for QCustomPlot is now Qt::ClickFocus, instead of Qt::NoFocus. ++ - tweaked QCPLegend and QCPAbstractLegendItem margins: The items have by default zero own margins, and QCPLegend row- and column spacing was increased to compensate. Legend was made slightly denser by default. ++ - Used doxygen version is now 1.8.12, and documentation/postprocessing-scripts were adapted accordingly. Expect minor issues and some warnings when using older doxygen. ++ ++#### Version 1.3.2 released on 22.12.15 #### ++ ++ Bugfixes [Backported from 2.0.0 branch]: ++ - Fixed possible crash when having a QCPGraph with scatters only and a non-transparent main/fill brush of the graph ++ - Fixed QCPItemPixmap not updating internally cached scaled pixmap if new pixmap set with same scaled dimensions ++ - When using log axis scale and zooming out as far as possible (~1e-280..1e280), axis doesn't end up in (via mouse) unrecoverable range with strange axis ticks anymore ++ - Axis tick label algorithm for beautifully typeset powers now checks whether "e" in tick label is actually part of a number before converting the exponent to superscript ++ - Fixed QCustomPlot::moveLayer performing incorrect move and possible crash in certain situations ++ - Fixed possible crash on QCustomPlot destruction due to wrong QObject-hierarchy. Only occurs if a QCPAxisRect is removed from the normal QCustomPlot destruction hierarchy by taking it out of its layout ++ - Fixed possible freeze when data values become infinity after coord-to-pixel transformation (e.g. maximally zoomed out log axis), and line style is not solid (e.g. dashed) or phFastPolylines is disabled ++ ++ Other [Backported from 2.0.0 branch]: ++ - A few documentation fixes/improvements ++ - Qt5.5 compatibility (If you use PDF export, test your outputs, as output dimensions might change when switching Qt versions -- QCP does not try to emulate previous Qt version behaviour here) ++ - QCP now includes instead of just because some users had problems with the latter. Please report if you now experience issues due to the new include. ++ ++#### Version 1.3.1 released on 25.04.15 #### ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed bug that prevented automatic axis rescaling when some graphs/curves had only NaN data points ++ - Improved QCPItemBracket selection boundaries, especially bsCurly and bsCalligraphic ++ - Fixed bug of axis rect and colorscale background shifted downward by one logical pixel (visible in scaled png and pdf export) ++ - Replot upon mouse release is now only performed if a selection change has actually happened (improves responsivity on particularly complex plots) ++ - Fixed bug that allowed scatter-only graphs to be selected by clicking the non-existent line between scatters ++ - Fixed crash when trying to select a scatter-only QCPGraph whose only points in the visible key range are at identical key coordinates and vertically off-screen, with adaptive sampling enabled ++ - Fixed pdf export of QCPColorMap with enabled interpolation (didn't appear interpolated in pdf) ++ - Reduced QCPColorMap jitter of internal cell boundaries for small sized maps when viewed with high zoom, by applying oversampling factors dependent on map size ++ - Fixed bug of QCPColorMap::fill() not causing the buffered internal image map to be updated, and thus the change didn't become visible immediately ++ - Axis labels with size set in pixels (setPixelSize) instead of points now correctly calculate the exponent's font size if beautifully typeset powers are enabled ++ - Fixed QCPColorMap appearing at the wrong position for logarithmic axes and color map spanning larger ranges ++ ++ Other: ++ - Pdf export used to embed entire QCPColorMaps, potentially leading to large files. Now only the visible portion of the map is embedded in the pdf ++ - Many documentation fixes and extensions, style modernization ++ - Reduced documentation file size (and thus full package size) by automatically reducing image palettes during package build ++ - Fixed MSVC warning message (at warning level 4) due to temporary QLists in some foreach statements ++ ++#### Version 1.3.0 released on 27.12.14 #### ++ ++ Added features: ++ - New plottable class QCPFinancial allows display of candlestick/ohlc data ++ - New class QCPBarsGroup allows horizontal grouping of multiple QCPBars plottables ++ - Added QCPBars feature allowing non-zero base values (see property QCPBars::setBaseValue) ++ - Added QCPBars width type, for more flexible bar widths (see property QCPBars::setWidthType) ++ - New QCPCurve optimization algorithm, fixes bug which caused line flicker at deep zoom into curve segment ++ - Item positions can now have different position types and anchors for their x and y coordinates (QCPItemPosition::setTypeX/Y, setParentAnchorX/Y) ++ - QCPGraph and QCPCurve can now display gaps in their lines, when inserting quiet NaNs as values (std::numeric_limits::quiet_NaN()) ++ - QCPAxis now supports placing the tick labels inside the axis rect, for particularly space saving plots (QCPAxis::setTickLabelSide) ++ Added features after beta: ++ - Made code compatible with QT_NO_CAST_FROM_ASCII, QT_NO_CAST_TO_ASCII ++ - Added compatibility with QT_NO_KEYWORDS after sending code files through a simple reg-ex script ++ - Added possibility to inject own QCPAxis(-subclasses) via second, optional QCPAxisRect::addAxis parameter ++ - Added parameter to QCPItemPixmap::setScaled to specify transformation mode ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed bug in QCPCurve rendering of very zoomed-in curves (via new optimization algorithm) ++ - Fixed conflict with MSVC-specific keyword "interface" in text-document-integration example ++ - Fixed QCPScatterStyle bug ignoring the specified pen in the custom scatter shape constructor ++ - Fixed bug (possible crash) during QCustomPlot teardown, when a QCPLegend that has no parent layout (i.e. was removed from layout manually) gets deleted ++ Bugfixes after beta: ++ - Fixed bug of QCPColorMap/QCPColorGradient colors being off by one color sampling step (only noticeable in special cases) ++ - Fixed bug of QCPGraph adaptive sampling on vertical key axis, causing staggered look ++ - Fixed low (float) precision in QCPCurve optimization algorithm, by not using QVector2D anymore ++ ++ Other: ++ - Qt 5.3 and Qt 5.4 compatibility ++ ++#### Version 1.2.1 released on 07.04.14 #### ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed regression which garbled date-time tick labels on axes, if setTickLabelType is ltDateTime and setNumberFormat contains the "b" option ++ ++#### Version 1.2.0 released on 14.03.14 #### ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Adaptive Sampling for QCPGraph greatly improves performance for high data densities (see QCPGraph::setAdaptiveSampling) ++ - QCPColorMap plottable with QCPColorScale layout element allows plotting of 2D color maps ++ - QCustomPlot::savePdf now has additional optional parameters pdfCreator and pdfTitle to set according PDF metadata fields ++ - QCustomPlot::replot now allows specifying whether the widget update is immediate (repaint) or queued (update) ++ - QCPRange operators +, -, *, / with double operand for range shifting and scaling, and ==, != for range comparison ++ - Layers now have a visibility property (QCPLayer::setVisible) ++ - static functions QCPAxis::opposite and QCPAxis::orientation now offer more convenience when handling axis types ++ - added notification signals for selectability change (selectableChanged) on all objects that have a selected/selectable property ++ - added notification signal for QCPAxis scaleType property ++ - added notification signal QCPLayerable::layerChanged ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed assert halt, when QCPAxis auto tick labels not disabled but nevertheless a custom non-number tick label ending in "e" given ++ - Fixed painting glitches when QCustomPlot resized inside a QMdiArea or under certain conditions inside a QLayout ++ - If changing QCPAxis::scaleType and thus causing range sanitizing and a range modification, rangeChanged wouldn't be emitted ++ - Fixed documentation bug that caused indentation to be lost in code examples ++ Bugfixes after beta: ++ - Fixed bug that caused crash if clicked-on legend item is removed in mousePressEvent. ++ - On some systems, font size defaults to -1, which used to cause a debug output in QCPAxisPainterPrivate::TickLabelDataQCP. Now it's checked before setting values based on the default font size. ++ - When using multiple axes on one side, setting one to invisible didn't properly compress the freed space. ++ - Fixed bug that allowed selection of plottables when clicking in the bottom or top margin of a QCPAxisRect (outside the inner rect) ++ ++ Other: ++ - In method QCPAbstractPlottable::getKeyRange/getValueRange, renamed parameter "validRange" to "foundRange", to better reflect its meaning (and contrast it from QCPRange::validRange) ++ - QCPAxis low-level axis painting methods exported to QCPAxisPainterPrivate ++ ++#### Version 1.1.1 released on 09.12.13 #### ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed bug causing legends blocking input events from reaching underlying axis rect even if legend is invisible ++ - Added missing Q_PROPERTY for QCPAxis::setDateTimeSpec ++ - Fixed behaviour of QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox (now transfers more properties from bottom/left to top/right axes and sets visibility of bottom/left axes to true) ++ - Made sure PDF export doesn't default to grayscale output on some systems ++ ++ Other: ++ - Plotting hint QCP::phForceRepaint is now enabled on all systems (and not only on windows) by default ++ - Documentation improvements ++ ++#### Version 1.1.0 released on 04.11.13 #### ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Added QCPRange::expand and QCPRange::expanded ++ - Added QCPAxis::rescale to rescale axis to all associated plottables ++ - Added QCPAxis::setDateTimeSpec/dateTimeSpec to allow axis labels either in UTC or local time ++ - QCPAxis now additionally emits a rangeChanged signal overload that provides the old range as second parameter ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes not rescaling properly if first plottable has an empty range ++ - QCPGraph::rescaleAxes/rescaleKeyAxis/rescaleValueAxis are no longer virtual (never were in base class, was a mistake) ++ - Fixed bugs in QCPAxis::items and QCPAxisRect::items not properly returning associated items and potentially stalling ++ ++ Other: ++ - Internal change from QWeakPointer to QPointer, thus got rid of deprecated Qt functionality ++ - Qt5.1 and Qt5.2 (beta1) compatibility ++ - Release packages now extract to single subdirectory and don't place multiple files in current working directory ++ ++#### Version 1.0.1 released on 05.09.13 #### ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - using define flag QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA caused debug output when data was correct, instead of invalid (fixed QCP::isInvalidData) ++ - documentation images are now properly shown when viewed with Qt Assistant ++ - fixed various documentation mistakes ++ ++ Other: ++ - Adapted documentation style sheet to better match Qt5 documentation ++ ++#### Version 1.0.0 released on 01.08.13 #### ++ ++ Quick Summary: ++ - Layout system for multiple axis rects in one plot ++ - Multiple axes per side ++ - Qt5 compatibility ++ - More flexible and consistent scatter configuration with QCPScatterStyle ++ - Various interface cleanups/refactoring ++ - Pixmap-cached axis labels for improved replot performance ++ ++ Changes that break backward compatibility: ++ - QCustomPlot::axisRect() changed meaning due to the extensive changes to how axes and axis rects are handled ++ it now returns a pointer to a QCPAxisRect and takes an integer index as parameter. ++ - QCPAxis constructor changed to now take QCPAxisRect* as parent ++ - setAutoMargin, setMarginLeft/Right/Top/Bottom removed due to the axis rect changes (see QCPAxisRect::setMargins/setAutoMargins) ++ - setAxisRect removed due to the axis rect changes ++ - setAxisBackground(-Scaled/-ScaledMode) now moved to QCPAxisRect as setBackground(-Scaled/ScaledMode) (access via QCustomPlot::axisRects()) ++ - QCPLegend now is a QCPLayoutElement ++ - QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon parameter "rect" changed from QRect to QRectF ++ - QCPAbstractLegendItem::draw second parameter removed (position/size now handled via QCPLayoutElement base class) ++ - removed QCPLegend::setMargin/setMarginLeft/Right/Top/Bottom (now inherits the capability from QCPLayoutElement::setMargins) ++ - removed QCPLegend::setMinimumSize (now inherits the capability from QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize) ++ - removed enum QCPLegend::PositionStyle, QCPLegend::positionStyle/setPositionStyle/position/setPosition (replaced by capabilities of QCPLayoutInset) ++ - QCPLegend transformed to work with new layout system (almost everything changed) ++ - removed entire title interface: QCustomPlot::setTitle/setTitleFont/setTitleColor/setTitleSelected/setTitleSelectedFont/setTitleSelectedColor and ++ the QCustomPlot::iSelectTitle interaction flag (all functionality is now given by the layout element "QCPPlotTitle" which can be added to the plot layout) ++ - selectTest functions now take two additional parameters: bool onlySelectable and QVariant *details=0 ++ - selectTest functions now ignores visibility of objects and (if parameter onlySelectable is true) does not anymore ignore selectability of the object ++ - moved QCustomPlot::Interaction/Interactions to QCP namespace as QCP::Interaction/Interactions ++ - moved QCustomPlot::setupFullAxesBox() to QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox. Now also accepts parameter to decide whether to connect opposite axis ranges ++ - moved range dragging/zooming interface from QCustomPlot to QCPAxisRect (setRangeDrag, setRangeZoom, setRangeDragAxes, setRangeZoomAxes,...) ++ - rangeDrag/Zoom is now set to Qt::Horizontal|Qt::Vertical instead of 0 by default, on the other hand, iRangeDrag/Zoom is unset in interactions by ++ default (this makes enabling dragging/zooming easier by just adding the interaction flags) ++ - QCPScatterStyle takes over everything related to handling scatters in all plottables ++ - removed setScatterPen/Size on QCPGraph and QCPCurve, removed setOutlierPen/Size on QCPStatisticalBox (now handled via QCPScatterStyle) ++ - modified setScatterStyle on QCPGraph and QCPCurve, and setOutlierStyle on QCPStatisticalBox, to take QCPScatterStyle ++ - axis grid and subgrid are now reachable via the QCPGrid *QCPAxis::grid() method. (e.g. instead of xAxis->setGrid(true), write xAxis->grid()->setVisible(true)) ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Axis tick labels are now pixmap-cached, thus increasing replot performance (in usual setups by about 24%). See plotting hint phCacheLabels which is set by default ++ - Advanced layout system, including the classes QCPLayoutElement, QCPLayout, QCPLayoutGrid, QCPLayoutInset, QCPAxisRect ++ - QCustomPlot::axisRects() returns all the axis rects in the QCustomPlot. ++ - QCustomPlot::plotLayout() returns the top level layout (initially a QCPLayoutGrid with one QCPAxisRect inside) ++ - QCPAxis now may have an offset to the axis rect (setOffset) ++ - Multiple axes per QCPAxisRect side are now supported (see QCPAxisRect::addAxis) ++ - QCustomPlot::toPixmap renders the plot into a pixmap and returns it ++ - When setting tick label rotation to +90 or -90 degrees on a vertical axis, the labels are now centered vertically on the tick height ++ (This allows space saving vertical tick labels by having the text direction parallel to the axis) ++ - Substantially increased replot performance when using very large manual tick vectors (> 10000 ticks) via QCPAxis::setTickVector ++ - QCPAxis and QCPAxisRect now allow easy access to all plottables(), graphs() and items() that are associated with them ++ - Added QCustomPlot::hasItem method for consistency with plottable interface, hasPlottable ++ - Added QCPAxisRect::setMinimumMargins as replacement for hardcoded minimum axis margin (15 px) when auto margin is enabled ++ - Added Flags type QCPAxis::AxisTypes (from QCPAxis::AxisType), used in QCPAxisRect interface ++ - Automatic margin calculation can now be enabled/disabled on a per-side basis, see QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins ++ - QCPAxisRect margins of multiple axis rects can be coupled via QCPMarginGroup ++ - Added new default layers "background" and "legend" (QCPAxisRect draws its background on the "background" layer, QCPLegend is on the "legend" layer by default) ++ - Custom scatter style via QCP::ssCustom and respective setCustomScatter functions that take a QPainterPath ++ - Filled scatters via QCPScatterStyle::setBrush ++ Added features after beta: ++ - Added QCustomPlot::toPainter method, to allow rendering with existing painter ++ - QCPItemEllipse now provides a center anchor ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed compile error on ARM ++ - Wrong legend icons were displayed if using pixmaps for scatters that are smaller than the legend icon rect ++ - Fixed clipping inaccuracy for rotated tick labels (were hidden too early, because the non-rotated bounding box was used) ++ - Fixed bug that caused wrong clipping of axis ticks and subticks when the ticks were given manually by QCPAxis::setTickVector ++ - Fixed Qt5 crash when dragging graph out of view (iterator out of bounds in QCPGraph::getVisibleDataBounds) ++ - Fixed QCPItemText not scaling properly when using scaled raster export ++ Bugfixes after beta: ++ - Fixed bug that clipped the rightmost pixel column of tick labels when caching activated (only visible on windows for superscript exponents) ++ - Restored compatibility to Qt4.6 ++ - Restored support for -no-RTTI compilation ++ - Empty manual tick labels are handled more gracefully (no QPainter qDebug messages anymore) ++ - Fixed type ambiguity in QCPLineEnding::draw causing compile error on ARM ++ - Fixed bug of grid layouts not propagating the minimum size from their child elements to the parent layout correctly ++ - Fixed bug of child elements (e.g. axis rects) of inset layouts not properly receiving mouse events ++ ++ Other: ++ - Opened up non-amalgamated project structure to public via git repository ++ ++#### Version released on 09.06.12 #### ++ ++ Quick Summary: ++ - Items (arrows, text,...) ++ - Layers (easier control over rendering order) ++ - New antialiasing system (Each objects controls own antialiasing with setAntialiased) ++ - Performance Improvements ++ - improved pixel-precise drawing ++ - easier shared library creation/usage ++ ++ Changes that (might) break backward compatibility: ++ - enum QCPGraph::ScatterSymbol was moved to QCP namespace (now QCP::ScatterSymbol). ++ This replace should fix your code: "QCPGraph::ss" -> "QCP::ss" ++ - enum QCustomPlot::AntialiasedElement and flag QCustomPlot::AntialiasedElements was moved to QCP namespace ++ This replace should fix your code: "QCustomPlot::ae" -> "QCP::ae" ++ - the meaning of QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements has changed slightly: It is now an override to force elements to be antialiased. If you want to force ++ elements to not be drawn antialiased, use the new setNotAntialiasedElements. If an element is mentioned in neither of those functions, it now controls ++ its antialiasing itself via its "setAntialiased" function(s). (e.g. QCPAxis::setAntialiased(bool), QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased(bool), ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedScatters(bool), etc.) ++ - QCPAxis::setTickVector and QCPAxis::setTickVectorLabels no longer take a pointer but a const reference of the respective QVector as parameter. ++ (handing over a pointer didn't give any noticeable performance benefits but was inconsistent with the rest of the interface) ++ - Equally QCPAxis::tickVector and QCPAxis::tickVectorLabels don't return by pointer but by value now ++ - QCustomPlot::savePngScaled was removed, its purpose is now included as optional parameter "scale" of savePng. ++ - If you have derived from QCPAbstractPlottable: all selectTest functions now consistently take the argument "const QPointF &pos" which is the test point in pixel coordinates. ++ (the argument there was "double key, double value" in plot coordinates, before). ++ - QCPAbstractPlottable, QCPAxis and QCPLegend now inherit from QCPLayerable ++ - If you have derived from QCPAbstractPlottable: the draw method signature has changed from "draw (..) const" to "draw (..)", i.e. the method ++ is not const anymore. This allows the draw function of your plottable to perform buffering/caching operations, if necessary. ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Item system: QCPAbstractItem, QCPItemAnchor, QCPItemPosition, QCPLineEnding. Allows placing of lines, arrows, text, pixmaps etc. ++ - New Items: QCPItemStraightLine, QCPItemLine, QCPItemCurve, QCPItemEllipse, QCPItemRect, QCPItemPixmap, QCPItemText, QCPItemBracket, QCPItemTracer ++ - QCustomPlot::addItem/itemCount/item/removeItem/selectedItems ++ - signals QCustomPlot::itemClicked/itemDoubleClicked ++ - the QCustomPlot interactions property now includes iSelectItems (for selection of QCPAbstractItem) ++ - QCPLineEnding. Represents the different styles a line/curve can end (e.g. different arrows, circle, square, bar, etc.), see e.g. QCPItemCurve::setHead ++ - Layer system: QCPLayerable, QCPLayer. Allows more sophisticated control over drawing order and a kind of grouping. ++ - QCPAbstractPlottable, QCPAbstractItem, QCPAxis, QCPGrid, QCPLegend are layerables and derive from QCPLayerable ++ - QCustomPlot::addLayer/moveLayer/removeLayer/setCurrentLayer/layer/currentLayer/layerCount ++ - Initially there are three layers: "grid", "main", and "axes". The "main" layer is initially empty and set as current layer, so new plottables/items are put there. ++ - QCustomPlot::viewport now makes the previously inaccessible viewport rect read-only-accessible (needed that for item-interface) ++ - PNG export now allows transparent background by calling QCustomPlot::setColor(Qt::transparent) before savePng ++ - QCPStatisticalBox outlier symbols may now be all scatter symbols, not only hardcoded circles. ++ - perfect precision of scatter symbol/error bar drawing and clipping in both antialiased and non-antialiased mode, by introducing QCPPainter ++ that works around some QPainter bugs/inconveniences. Further, more complex symbols like ssCrossSquare used to look crooked, now they look good. ++ - new antialiasing control system: Each drawing element now has its own "setAntialiased" function to control whether it is drawn antialiased. ++ - QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements can be used to override the individual settings. ++ - Subclasses of QCPAbstractPlottable can now use the convenience functions like applyFillAntialiasingHint or applyScattersAntialiasingHint to ++ easily make their drawing code comply with the overall antialiasing system. ++ - QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag allows greatly improved performance and responsiveness by temporarily disabling all antialiasing while ++ the user is dragging axis ranges ++ - QCPGraph can now show scatter symbols at data points and hide its line (see QCPGraph::setScatterStyle, setScatterSize, setScatterPixmap, setLineStyle) ++ - Grid drawing code was sourced out from QCPAxis to QCPGrid. QCPGrid is mainly an internal class and every QCPAxis owns one. The grid interface still ++ works through QCPAxis and hasn't changed. The separation allows the grid to be drawn on a different layer as the axes, such that e.g. a graph can ++ be above the grid but below the axes. ++ - QCustomPlot::hasPlottable(plottable), returns whether the QCustomPlot contains the plottable ++ - QCustomPlot::setPlottingHint/setPlottingHints, plotting hints control details about the plotting quality/speed ++ - export to jpg and bmp added (QCustomPlot::saveJpg/saveBmp), as well as control over compression quality for png and jpg ++ - multi-select-modifier may now be specified with QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier and is not fixed to Ctrl anymore ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - fixed QCustomPlot ignores replot after it had size (0,0) even if size becomes valid again ++ - on Windows, a repaint used to be delayed during dragging/zooming of a complex plot, until the drag operation was done. ++ This was fixed, i.e. repaints are forced after a replot() call. See QCP::phForceRepaint and setPlottingHints. ++ - when using the raster paintengine and exporting to scaled PNG, pen widths are now scaled correctly (QPainter bug workaround via QCPPainter) ++ - PDF export now respects QCustomPlot background color (QCustomPlot::setColor), also Qt::transparent ++ - fixed a bug on QCPBars and QCPStatisticalBox where auto-rescaling of axis would fail when all data is very small (< 1e-11) ++ - fixed mouse event propagation bug that prevented range dragging from working on KDE (GNU/Linux) ++ - fixed a compiler warning on 64-bit systems due to pointer cast to int instead of quintptr in a qDebug output ++ ++ Other: ++ - Added support for easier shared library creation (including examples for compiling and using QCustomPlot as shared library) ++ - QCustomPlot now has the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute (gives slightly improved performance). ++ - QCP::aeGraphs (enum QCP::AntialiasedElement, previously QCustomPlot::aeGraphs) has been marked deprecated since version 02.02.12 and ++ was now removed. Use QCP::aePlottables instead. ++ - optional performance-quality-tradeoff for solid graph lines (see QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints). ++ - marked data classes and QCPRange as Q_MOVABLE_TYPE ++ - replaced usage of own macro FUNCNAME with Qt macro Q_FUNC_INFO ++ - QCustomPlot now returns a minimum size hint of 50*50 ++ ++#### Version released on 31.03.12 #### ++ ++ Changes that (might) break backward compatibility: ++ - QCPAbstractLegendItem now inherits from QObject ++ - mousePress, mouseMove and mouseRelease signals are now emitted before and not after any QCustomPlot processing (range dragging, selecting, etc.) ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Interaction system: now allows selecting of objects like plottables, axes, legend and plot title, see QCustomPlot::setInteractions documentation ++ - Interaction system for plottables: ++ - setSelectable, setSelected, setSelectedPen, setSelectedBrush, selectTest on QCPAbstractPlottable and all derived plottables ++ - setSelectionTolerance on QCustomPlot ++ - selectedPlottables and selectedGraphs on QCustomPlot (returns the list of currently selected plottables/graphs) ++ - Interaction system for axes: ++ - setSelectable, setSelected, setSelectedBasePen, setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelFont, ++ setSelectedLabelColor, setSelectedTickLabelColor, selectTest on QCPAxis ++ - selectedAxes on QCustomPlot (returns a list of the axes that currently have selected parts) ++ - Interaction system for legend: ++ - setSelectable, setSelected, setSelectedBorderPen, setSelectedIconBorderPen, setSelectedBrush, setSelectedFont, setSelectedTextColor, selectedItems on QCPLegend ++ - setSelectedFont, setSelectedTextColor, setSelectable, setSelected on QCPAbstractLegendItem ++ - selectedLegends on QCustomPlot ++ - Interaction system for title: ++ - setSelectedTitleFont, setSelectedTitleColor, setTitleSelected on QCustomPlot ++ - new signals in accordance with the interaction system: ++ - selectionChangedByUser on QCustomPlot ++ - selectionChanged on QCPAbstractPlottable ++ - selectionChanged on QCPAxis ++ - selectionChanged on QCPLegend and QCPAbstractLegendItem ++ - plottableClick, legendClick, axisClick, titleClick, plottableDoubleClick, legendDoubleClick, axisDoubleClick, titleDoubleClick on QCustomPlot ++ - QCustomPlot::deselectAll (deselects everything, i.e. axes and plottables) ++ - QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords (inverse function to the already existing coordsToPixels function) ++ - QCPRange::contains(double value) ++ - QCPAxis::setLabelColor and setTickLabelColor ++ - QCustomPlot::setTitleColor ++ - QCustomPlot now emits beforeReplot and afterReplot signals. Note that it is safe to make two customPlots mutually call eachothers replot functions ++ in one of these slots, it will not cause an infinite loop. (useful for synchronizing axes ranges between two customPlots, because setRange alone doesn't replot) ++ - If the Qt version is 4.7 or greater, the tick label strings in date-time-mode now support sub-second accuracy (e.g. with format like "hh:mm:ss.zzz"). ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - tick labels/margins should no longer oscillate by one pixel when dragging range or replotting repeatedly while changing e.g. data. This ++ was caused by a bug in Qt's QFontMetrics::boundingRect function when the font has an integer point size (probably some rounding problem). ++ The fix hence consists of creating a temporary font (only for bounding-box calculation) which is 0.05pt larger and thus avoiding the ++ jittering rounding outcome. ++ - tick label, axis label and plot title colors used to be undefined. This was fixed by providing explicit color properties. ++ ++ Other: ++ - fixed some glitches in the documentation ++ - QCustomPlot::replot and QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes are now slots ++ ++#### Version released on 02.02.12 #### ++ ++ Changes that break backward compatibility: ++ - renamed all secondary classes from QCustomPlot[...] to QCP[...]: ++ QCustomPlotAxis -> QCPAxis ++ QCustomPlotGraph -> QCPGraph ++ QCustomPlotRange -> QCPRange ++ QCustomPlotData -> QCPData ++ QCustomPlotDataMap -> QCPDataMap ++ QCustomPlotLegend -> QCPLegend ++ QCustomPlotDataMapIterator -> QCPDataMapIterator ++ QCustomPlotDataMutableMapIterator -> QCPDataMutableMapIterator ++ A simple search and replace on all code files should make your code run again, e.g. consider the regex "QCustomPlot(?=[AGRDL])" -> "QCP". ++ Make sure not to just replace "QCustomPlot" with "QCP" because the main class QCustomPlot hasn't changed to QCP. ++ This change was necessary because class names became unhandy, pardon my bad naming decision in the beginning. ++ - QCPAxis::tickLength() and QCPAxis::subTickLength() now each split into two functions for inward and outward ticks (tickLengthIn/tickLengthOut). ++ - QCPLegend now uses QCPAbstractLegendItem to carry item data (before, the legend was passed QCPGraphs directly) ++ - QCustomPlot::addGraph() now doesn't return the index of the created graph anymore, but a pointer to the created QCPGraph. ++ - QCustomPlot::setAutoAddGraphToLegend is replaced by setAutoAddPlottableToLegend ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Reversed axis range with QCPAxis::setRangeReversed(bool) ++ - Tick labels are now only drawn if not clipped by the viewport (widget border) on the sides (e.g. left and right on a horizontal axis). ++ - Zerolines. Like grid lines only with a separate pen (QCPAxis::setZeroLinePen), at tick position zero. ++ - Outward ticks. QCPAxis::setTickLength/setSubTickLength now accepts two arguments for inward and outward tick length. This doesn't break ++ backward compatibility because the second argument (outward) has default value zero and thereby a call with one argument hasn't changed its meaning. ++ - QCPGraph now inherits from QCPAbstractPlottable ++ - QCustomPlot::addPlottable/plottable/removePlottable/clearPlottables added to interface with the new QCPAbstractPlottable-based system. The simpler interface ++ which only acts on QCPGraphs (addGraph, graph, removeGraph, etc.) was adapted internally and is kept for backward compatibility and ease of use. ++ - QCPLegend items for plottables (e.g. graphs) can automatically wrap their texts to fit the widths, see QCPLegend::setMinimumSize and QCPPlottableLegendItem::setTextWrap. ++ - QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes. Adapts axis ranges to show all plottables/graphs, by calling QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes on all plottables in the plot. ++ - QCPCurve. For plotting of parametric curves. ++ - QCPBars. For plotting of bar charts. ++ - QCPStatisticalBox. For statistical box plots. ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed QCustomPlot::removeGraph(int) not being able to remove graph index 0 ++ - made QCustomPlot::replot() abort painting when painter initialization fails (e.g. because width/height of QCustomPlot is zero) ++ - The distance of the axis label from the axis ignored the tick label padding, this could have caused overlapping axis labels and tick labels ++ - fixed memory leak in QCustomPlot (dtor didn't delete legend) ++ - fixed bug that prevented QCPAxis::setRangeLower/Upper from setting the value to exactly 0. ++ ++ Other: ++ - Changed default error bar handle size (QCustomPlotGraph::setErrorBarSize) from 4 to 6. ++ - Removed QCustomPlotDataFetcher. Was deprecated and not used class. ++ - Extended documentation, especially class descriptions. ++ ++#### Version released on 15.01.12 #### ++ ++ Changes that (might) break backward compatibility: ++ - QCustomPlotGraph now inherits from QObject ++ ++ Added features: ++ - Added axis background pixmap (QCustomPlot::setAxisBackground, setAxisBackgroundScaled, setAxisBackgroundScaledMode) ++ - Added width and height parameter on PDF export function QCustomPlot::savePdf(). This now allows PDF export to ++ have arbitrary dimensions, independent of the current geometry of the QCustomPlot. ++ - Added overload of QCustomPlot::removeGraph that takes QCustomPlotGraph* as parameter, instead the index of the graph ++ - Added all enums to the Qt meta system via Q_ENUMS(). The enums can now be transformed ++ to QString values easily with the Qt meta system, which makes saving state e.g. as XML ++ significantly nicer. ++ - added typedef QMapIterator QCustomPlotDataMapIterator ++ and typedef QMutableMapIterator QCustomPlotDataMutableMapIterator ++ for improved information hiding, when using iterators outside QCustomPlot code ++ ++ Bugfixes: ++ - Fixed savePngScaled. Axis/label drawing functions used to reset the painter transform ++ and thereby break savePngScaled. Now they buffer the current transform and restore it afterwards. ++ - Fixed some glitches in the doxygen comments (affects documentation only) ++ ++ Other: ++ - Changed the default tickLabelPadding of top axis from 3 to 6 pixels. Looks better. ++ - Changed the default QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements setting: Graph fills are now antialiased ++ by default. That's a bit slower, but makes fill borders look better. ++ ++#### Version released on 19.11.11 #### ++ ++ Changes that break backward compatibility: ++ - QCustomPlotAxis: tickFont and setTickFont renamed to tickLabelFont and setTickLabelFont (for naming consistency) ++ ++ Other: ++ - QCustomPlotAxis: Added rotated tick labels, see setTickLabelRotation ++ +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.cpp b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.cpp +new file mode 100644 +index 0000000..6a8bcb9 +--- /dev/null ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.cpp +@@ -0,0 +1,29756 @@ ++/*************************************************************************** ++** ** ++** QCustomPlot, an easy to use, modern plotting widget for Qt ** ++** Copyright (C) 2011-2016 Emanuel Eichhammer ** ++** ** ++** This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify ** ++** it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by ** ++** the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or ** ++** (at your option) any later version. ** ++** ** ++** This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, ** ++** but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of ** ++** MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the ** ++** GNU General Public License for more details. ** ++** ** ++** You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License ** ++** along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. ** ++** ** ++**************************************************************************** ++** Author: Emanuel Eichhammer ** ++** Website/Contact: http://www.qcustomplot.com/ ** ++** Date: 13.09.16 ** ++** Version: 2.0.0-beta ** ++****************************************************************************/ ++ ++#include "qcustomplot.h" ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/vector2d.cpp', size 7340 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPVector2D ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPVector2D ++ \brief Represents two doubles as a mathematical 2D vector ++ ++ This class acts as a replacement for QVector2D with the advantage of double precision instead of ++ single, and some convenience methods tailored for the QCustomPlot library. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPVector2D::setX(double x) ++ ++ Sets the x coordinate of this vector to \a x. ++ ++ \see setY ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPVector2D::setY(double y) ++ ++ Sets the y coordinate of this vector to \a y. ++ ++ \see setX ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::length() const ++ ++ Returns the length of this vector. ++ ++ \see lengthSquared ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::lengthSquared() const ++ ++ Returns the squared length of this vector. In some situations, e.g. when just trying to find the ++ shortest vector of a group, this is faster than calculating \ref length, because it avoids ++ calculation of a square root. ++ ++ \see length ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPVector2D::toPoint() const ++ ++ Returns a QPoint which has the x and y coordinates of this vector, truncating any floating point ++ information. ++ ++ \see toPointF ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPointF QCPVector2D::toPointF() const ++ ++ Returns a QPointF which has the x and y coordinates of this vector. ++ ++ \see toPoint ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPVector2D::isNull() const ++ ++ Returns whether this vector is null. A vector is null if \c qIsNull returns true for both x and y ++ coordinates, i.e. if both are binary equal to 0. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPVector2D QCPVector2D::perpendicular() const ++ ++ Returns a vector perpendicular to this vector, with the same length. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPVector2D::dot() const ++ ++ Returns the dot/scalar product of this vector with the specified vector \a vec. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates to 0. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D() : ++ mX(0), ++ mY(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the \a x and \a y coordinates with the specified ++ values. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(double x, double y) : ++ mX(x), ++ mY(y) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates respective coordinates of ++ the specified \a point. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(const QPoint &point) : ++ mX(point.x()), ++ mY(point.y()) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPVector2D object and initializes the x and y coordinates respective coordinates of ++ the specified \a point. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D::QCPVector2D(const QPointF &point) : ++ mX(point.x()), ++ mY(point.y()) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Normalizes this vector. After this operation, the length of the vector is equal to 1. ++ ++ \see normalized, length, lengthSquared ++*/ ++void QCPVector2D::normalize() ++{ ++ double len = length(); ++ mX /= len; ++ mY /= len; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a normalized version of this vector. The length of the returned vector is equal to 1. ++ ++ \see normalize, length, lengthSquared ++*/ ++QCPVector2D QCPVector2D::normalized() const ++{ ++ QCPVector2D result(mX, mY); ++ result.normalize(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the squared shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the finite line ++ segment given by \a start and \a end. ++ ++ \see distanceToStraightLine ++*/ ++double QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end) const ++{ ++ QCPVector2D v(end-start); ++ double vLengthSqr = v.lengthSquared(); ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vLengthSqr)) ++ { ++ double mu = v.dot(*this-start)/vLengthSqr; ++ if (mu < 0) ++ return (*this-start).lengthSquared(); ++ else if (mu > 1) ++ return (*this-end).lengthSquared(); ++ else ++ return ((start + mu*v)-*this).lengthSquared(); ++ } else ++ return (*this-start).lengthSquared(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the squared shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the finite line ++ segment given by \a line. ++ ++ \see distanceToStraightLine ++*/ ++double QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine(const QLineF &line) const ++{ ++ return distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(line.p1()), QCPVector2D(line.p2())); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the shortest distance of this vector (interpreted as a point) to the infinite straight ++ line given by a \a base point and a \a direction vector. ++ ++ \see distanceSquaredToLine ++*/ ++double QCPVector2D::distanceToStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &base, const QCPVector2D &direction) const ++{ ++ return qAbs((*this-base).dot(direction.perpendicular()))/direction.length(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Scales this vector by the given \a factor, i.e. the x and y components are multiplied by \a ++ factor. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator*=(double factor) ++{ ++ mX *= factor; ++ mY *= factor; ++ return *this; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Scales this vector by the given \a divisor, i.e. the x and y components are divided by \a ++ divisor. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator/=(double divisor) ++{ ++ mX /= divisor; ++ mY /= divisor; ++ return *this; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the given \a vector to this vector component-wise. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator+=(const QCPVector2D &vector) ++{ ++ mX += vector.mX; ++ mY += vector.mY; ++ return *this; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ subtracts the given \a vector from this vector component-wise. ++*/ ++QCPVector2D &QCPVector2D::operator-=(const QCPVector2D &vector) ++{ ++ mX -= vector.mX; ++ mY -= vector.mY; ++ return *this; ++} ++/* end of 'src/vector2d.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/painter.cpp', size 8670 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPainter ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPainter ++ \brief QPainter subclass used internally ++ ++ This QPainter subclass is used to provide some extended functionality e.g. for tweaking position ++ consistency between antialiased and non-antialiased painting. Further it provides workarounds ++ for QPainter quirks. ++ ++ \warning This class intentionally hides non-virtual functions of QPainter, e.g. setPen, save and ++ restore. So while it is possible to pass a QCPPainter instance to a function that expects a ++ QPainter pointer, some of the workarounds and tweaks will be unavailable to the function (because ++ it will call the base class implementations of the functions actually hidden by QCPPainter). ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPPainter instance and sets default values ++*/ ++QCPPainter::QCPPainter() : ++ QPainter(), ++ mModes(pmDefault), ++ mIsAntialiasing(false) ++{ ++ // don't setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefautPen) here, because painter isn't active yet and ++ // a call to begin() will follow ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPPainter instance on the specified paint \a device and sets default values. Just ++ like the analogous QPainter constructor, begins painting on \a device immediately. ++ ++ Like \ref begin, this method sets QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt versions before Qt5. ++*/ ++QCPPainter::QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device) : ++ QPainter(device), ++ mModes(pmDefault), ++ mIsAntialiasing(false) ++{ ++#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) // before Qt5, default pens used to be cosmetic if NonCosmeticDefaultPen flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions. ++ if (isActive()) ++ setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen); ++#endif ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of this ++ QCPPainter. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ QPainter::setPen(pen); ++ if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic)) ++ makeNonCosmetic(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the pen (by color) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of ++ this QCPPainter. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setPen(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ QPainter::setPen(color); ++ if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic)) ++ makeNonCosmetic(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the pen (by style) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the mode of ++ this QCPPainter. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setPen(Qt::PenStyle penStyle) ++{ ++ QPainter::setPen(penStyle); ++ if (mModes.testFlag(pmNonCosmetic)) ++ makeNonCosmetic(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Works around a Qt bug introduced with Qt 4.8 which makes drawing QLineF unpredictable when ++ antialiasing is disabled. Thus when antialiasing is disabled, it rounds the \a line to ++ integer coordinates and then passes it to the original drawLine. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::drawLine(const QLineF &line) ++{ ++ if (mIsAntialiasing || mModes.testFlag(pmVectorized)) ++ QPainter::drawLine(line); ++ else ++ QPainter::drawLine(line.toLine()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether painting uses antialiasing or not. Use this method instead of using setRenderHint ++ with QPainter::Antialiasing directly, as it allows QCPPainter to regain pixel exactness between ++ antialiased and non-antialiased painting (Since Qt < 5.0 uses slightly different coordinate systems for ++ AA/Non-AA painting). ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setAntialiasing(bool enabled) ++{ ++ setRenderHint(QPainter::Antialiasing, enabled); ++ if (mIsAntialiasing != enabled) ++ { ++ mIsAntialiasing = enabled; ++ if (!mModes.testFlag(pmVectorized)) // antialiasing half-pixel shift only needed for rasterized outputs ++ { ++ if (mIsAntialiasing) ++ translate(0.5, 0.5); ++ else ++ translate(-0.5, -0.5); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust its ++ fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setModes(QCPPainter::PainterModes modes) ++{ ++ mModes = modes; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt versions before Qt5 after beginning painting on \a ++ device. This is necessary to get cosmetic pen consistency across Qt versions, because since Qt5, ++ all pens are non-cosmetic by default, and in Qt4 this render hint must be set to get that ++ behaviour. ++ ++ The Constructor \ref QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device) which directly starts painting also sets ++ the render hint as appropriate. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++*/ ++bool QCPPainter::begin(QPaintDevice *device) ++{ ++ bool result = QPainter::begin(device); ++#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) // before Qt5, default pens used to be cosmetic if NonCosmeticDefaultPen flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions. ++ if (result) ++ setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen); ++#endif ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust its ++ fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::setMode(QCPPainter::PainterMode mode, bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!enabled && mModes.testFlag(mode)) ++ mModes &= ~mode; ++ else if (enabled && !mModes.testFlag(mode)) ++ mModes |= mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves the painter (see QPainter::save). Since QCPPainter adds some new internal state to ++ QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore those members. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++ ++ \see restore ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::save() ++{ ++ mAntialiasingStack.push(mIsAntialiasing); ++ QPainter::save(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Restores the painter (see QPainter::restore). Since QCPPainter adds some new internal state to ++ QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore those members. ++ ++ \note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation. ++ ++ \see save ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::restore() ++{ ++ if (!mAntialiasingStack.isEmpty()) ++ mIsAntialiasing = mAntialiasingStack.pop(); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Unbalanced save/restore"; ++ QPainter::restore(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Changes the pen width to 1 if it currently is 0. This function is called in the \ref setPen ++ overrides when the \ref pmNonCosmetic mode is set. ++*/ ++void QCPPainter::makeNonCosmetic() ++{ ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull(pen().widthF())) ++ { ++ QPen p = pen(); ++ p.setWidth(1); ++ QPainter::setPen(p); ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/painter.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/paintbuffer.cpp', size 18502 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++ \brief The abstract base class for paint buffers, which define the rendering backend ++ ++ This abstract base class defines the basic interface that a paint buffer needs to provide in ++ order to be usable by QCustomPlot. ++ ++ A paint buffer manages both a surface to draw onto, and the matching paint device. The size of ++ the surface can be changed via \ref setSize. External classes (\ref QCustomPlot and \ref ++ QCPLayer) request a painter via \ref startPainting and then perform the draw calls. Once the ++ painting is complete, \ref donePainting is called, so the paint buffer implementation can do ++ clean up if necessary. Before rendering a frame, each paint buffer is usually filled with a color ++ using \ref clear (usually the color is \c Qt::transparent), to remove the contents of the ++ previous frame. ++ ++ The simplest paint buffer implementation is \ref QCPPaintBufferPixmap which allows regular ++ software rendering via the raster engine. Hardware accelerated rendering via pixel buffers and ++ frame buffer objects is provided by \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer and \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo. ++ They are used automatically if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is enabled. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPPainter *QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::startPainting() = 0 ++ ++ Returns a \ref QCPPainter which is ready to draw to this buffer. The ownership and thus the ++ responsibility to delete the painter after the painting operations are complete is given to the ++ caller of this method. ++ ++ Once you are done using the painter, delete the painter and call \ref donePainting. ++ ++ While a painter generated with this method is active, you must not call \ref setSize, \ref ++ setDevicePixelRatio or \ref clear. ++ ++ This method may return 0, if a painter couldn't be activated on the buffer. This usually ++ indicates a problem with the respective painting backend. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0 ++ ++ Draws the contents of this buffer with the provided \a painter. This is the method that is used ++ to finally join all paint buffers and draw them onto the screen. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::clear(const QColor &color) = 0 ++ ++ Fills the entire buffer with the provided \a color. To have an empty transparent buffer, use the ++ named color \c Qt::transparent. ++ ++ This method must not be called if there is currently a painter (acquired with \ref startPainting) ++ active. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::reallocateBuffer() = 0 ++ ++ Reallocates the internal buffer with the currently configured size (\ref setSize) and device ++ pixel ratio, if applicable (\ref setDevicePixelRatio). It is called as soon as any of those ++ properties are changed on this paint buffer. ++ ++ \note Subclasses of \ref QCPAbstractPaintBuffer must call their reimplementation of this method ++ in their constructor, to perform the first allocation (this can not be done by the base class ++ because calling pure virtual methods in base class constructors is not possible). ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::donePainting() ++ ++ If you have acquired a \ref QCPPainter to paint onto this paint buffer via \ref startPainting, ++ call this method as soon as you are done with the painting operations and have deleted the ++ painter. ++ ++ paint buffer subclasses may use this method to perform any type of cleanup that is necessary. The ++ default implementation does nothing. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a paint buffer and initializes it with the provided \a size and \a devicePixelRatio. ++ ++ Subclasses must call their \ref reallocateBuffer implementation in their respective constructors. ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mDevicePixelRatio(devicePixelRatio), ++ mInvalidated(true) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::~QCPAbstractPaintBuffer() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the paint buffer size. ++ ++ The buffer is reallocated (by calling \ref reallocateBuffer), so any painters that were obtained ++ by \ref startPainting are invalidated and must not be used after calling this method. ++ ++ If \a size is already the current buffer size, this method does nothing. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setSize(const QSize &size) ++{ ++ if (mSize != size) ++ { ++ mSize = size; ++ reallocateBuffer(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the invalidated flag to \a invalidated. ++ ++ This mechanism is used internally in conjunction with isolated replotting of \ref QCPLayer ++ instances (in \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered mode). If \ref QCPLayer::replot is called on a buffered ++ layer, i.e. an isolated repaint of only that layer (and its dedicated paint buffer) is requested, ++ QCustomPlot will decide depending on the invalidated flags of other paint buffers whether it also ++ replots them, instead of only the layer on which the replot was called. ++ ++ The invalidated flag is set to true when \ref QCPLayer association has changed, i.e. if layers ++ were added or removed from this buffer, or if they were reordered. It is set to false as soon as ++ all associated \ref QCPLayer instances are drawn onto the buffer. ++ ++ Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to manually call this method. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setInvalidated(bool invalidated) ++{ ++ mInvalidated = invalidated; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the the device pixel ratio to \a ratio. This is useful to render on high-DPI output devices. ++ The ratio is automatically set to the device pixel ratio used by the parent QCustomPlot instance. ++ ++ The buffer is reallocated (by calling \ref reallocateBuffer), so any painters that were obtained ++ by \ref startPainting are invalidated and must not be used after calling this method. ++ ++ \note This method is only available for Qt versions 5.4 and higher. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setDevicePixelRatio(double ratio) ++{ ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare(ratio, mDevicePixelRatio)) ++ { ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ mDevicePixelRatio = ratio; ++ reallocateBuffer(); ++#else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4"; ++ mDevicePixelRatio = 1.0; ++#endif ++ } ++} ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferPixmap ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPaintBufferPixmap ++ \brief A paint buffer based on QPixmap, using software raster rendering ++ ++ This paint buffer is the default and fall-back paint buffer which uses software rendering and ++ QPixmap as internal buffer. It is used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is false. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a pixmap paint buffer instancen with the specified \a size and \a devicePixelRatio, if ++ applicable. ++*/ ++QCPPaintBufferPixmap::QCPPaintBufferPixmap(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio) : ++ QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio) ++{ ++ QCPPaintBufferPixmap::reallocateBuffer(); ++} ++ ++QCPPaintBufferPixmap::~QCPPaintBufferPixmap() ++{ ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferPixmap::startPainting() ++{ ++ QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(&mBuffer); ++ result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ if (painter && painter->isActive()) ++ painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, mBuffer); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed"; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::clear(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mBuffer.fill(color); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferPixmap::reallocateBuffer() ++{ ++ setInvalidated(); ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare(1.0, mDevicePixelRatio)) ++ { ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio); ++ mBuffer.setDevicePixelRatio(mDevicePixelRatio); ++#else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4"; ++ mDevicePixelRatio = 1.0; ++ mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize); ++#endif ++ } else ++ { ++ mBuffer = QPixmap(mSize); ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer ++ \brief A paint buffer based on OpenGL pixel buffers, using hardware accelerated rendering ++ ++ This paint buffer is one of the OpenGL paint buffers which facilitate hardware accelerated plot ++ rendering. It is based on OpenGL pixel buffers (pbuffer) and is used in Qt versions before 5.0. ++ (See \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo used in newer Qt versions.) ++ ++ The OpenGL paint buffers are used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is set to true, and if they are ++ supported by the system. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer instance with the specified \a size and \a ++ devicePixelRatio, if applicable. ++ ++ The parameter \a multisamples defines how many samples are used per pixel. Higher values thus ++ result in higher quality antialiasing. If the specified \a multisamples value exceeds the ++ capability of the graphics hardware, the highest supported multisampling is used. ++*/ ++QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, int multisamples) : ++ QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio), ++ mGlPBuffer(0), ++ mMultisamples(qMax(0, multisamples)) ++{ ++ QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::reallocateBuffer(); ++} ++ ++QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::~QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer() ++{ ++ if (mGlPBuffer) ++ delete mGlPBuffer; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::startPainting() ++{ ++ if (!mGlPBuffer->isValid()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ ++ QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(mGlPBuffer); ++ result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ if (!painter || !painter->isActive()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!mGlPBuffer->isValid()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL pbuffer isn't valid, reallocateBuffer was not called?"; ++ return; ++ } ++ painter->drawImage(0, 0, mGlPBuffer->toImage()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::clear(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ if (mGlPBuffer->isValid()) ++ { ++ mGlPBuffer->makeCurrent(); ++ glClearColor(color.redF(), color.greenF(), color.blueF(), color.alphaF()); ++ glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT | GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT); ++ mGlPBuffer->doneCurrent(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL pbuffer invalid or context not current"; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer::reallocateBuffer() ++{ ++ if (mGlPBuffer) ++ delete mGlPBuffer; ++ ++ QGLFormat format; ++ format.setAlpha(true); ++ format.setSamples(mMultisamples); ++ mGlPBuffer = new QGLPixelBuffer(mSize, format); ++} ++#endif // QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++ ++ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPaintBufferGlFbo ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPaintBufferGlFbo ++ \brief A paint buffer based on OpenGL frame buffers objects, using hardware accelerated rendering ++ ++ This paint buffer is one of the OpenGL paint buffers which facilitate hardware accelerated plot ++ rendering. It is based on OpenGL frame buffer objects (fbo) and is used in Qt versions 5.0 and ++ higher. (See \ref QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer used in older Qt versions.) ++ ++ The OpenGL paint buffers are used if \ref QCustomPlot::setOpenGl is set to true, and if they are ++ supported by the system. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo instance with the specified \a size and \a devicePixelRatio, ++ if applicable. ++ ++ All frame buffer objects shall share one OpenGL context and paint device, which need to be set up ++ externally and passed via \a glContext and \a glPaintDevice. The set-up is done in \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setupOpenGl and the context and paint device are managed by the parent QCustomPlot ++ instance. ++*/ ++QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, QWeakPointer glContext, QWeakPointer glPaintDevice) : ++ QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(size, devicePixelRatio), ++ mGlContext(glContext), ++ mGlPaintDevice(glPaintDevice), ++ mGlFrameBuffer(0) ++{ ++ QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::reallocateBuffer(); ++} ++ ++QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::~QCPPaintBufferGlFbo() ++{ ++ if (mGlFrameBuffer) ++ delete mGlFrameBuffer; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPPainter *QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::startPainting() ++{ ++ if (mGlPaintDevice.isNull()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL paint device doesn't exist"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ if (!mGlFrameBuffer) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ ++ if (QOpenGLContext::currentContext() != mGlContext.data()) ++ mGlContext.data()->makeCurrent(mGlContext.data()->surface()); ++ mGlFrameBuffer->bind(); ++ QCPPainter *result = new QCPPainter(mGlPaintDevice.data()); ++ result->setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::donePainting() ++{ ++ if (mGlFrameBuffer && mGlFrameBuffer->isBound()) ++ mGlFrameBuffer->release(); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Either OpenGL frame buffer not valid or was not bound"; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ if (!painter || !painter->isActive()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid or inactive painter passed"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!mGlFrameBuffer) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?"; ++ return; ++ } ++ painter->drawImage(0, 0, mGlFrameBuffer->toImage()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::clear(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ if (mGlContext.isNull()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL context doesn't exist"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!mGlFrameBuffer) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL frame buffer object doesn't exist, reallocateBuffer was not called?"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (QOpenGLContext::currentContext() != mGlContext.data()) ++ mGlContext.data()->makeCurrent(mGlContext.data()->surface()); ++ mGlFrameBuffer->bind(); ++ glClearColor(color.redF(), color.greenF(), color.blueF(), color.alphaF()); ++ glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT | GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT); ++ mGlFrameBuffer->release(); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPPaintBufferGlFbo::reallocateBuffer() ++{ ++ // release and delete possibly existing framebuffer: ++ if (mGlFrameBuffer) ++ { ++ if (mGlFrameBuffer->isBound()) ++ mGlFrameBuffer->release(); ++ delete mGlFrameBuffer; ++ mGlFrameBuffer = 0; ++ } ++ ++ if (mGlContext.isNull()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL context doesn't exist"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (mGlPaintDevice.isNull()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL paint device doesn't exist"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // create new fbo with appropriate size: ++ mGlContext.data()->makeCurrent(mGlContext.data()->surface()); ++ QOpenGLFramebufferObjectFormat frameBufferFormat; ++ frameBufferFormat.setSamples(mGlContext.data()->format().samples()); ++ frameBufferFormat.setAttachment(QOpenGLFramebufferObject::CombinedDepthStencil); ++ mGlFrameBuffer = new QOpenGLFramebufferObject(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio, frameBufferFormat); ++ if (mGlPaintDevice.data()->size() != mSize*mDevicePixelRatio) ++ mGlPaintDevice.data()->setSize(mSize*mDevicePixelRatio); ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ mGlPaintDevice.data()->setDevicePixelRatio(mDevicePixelRatio); ++#endif ++} ++#endif // QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++/* end of 'src/paintbuffer.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layer.cpp', size 37064 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLayer ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLayer ++ \brief A layer that may contain objects, to control the rendering order ++ ++ The Layering system of QCustomPlot is the mechanism to control the rendering order of the ++ elements inside the plot. ++ ++ It is based on the two classes QCPLayer and QCPLayerable. QCustomPlot holds an ordered list of ++ one or more instances of QCPLayer (see QCustomPlot::addLayer, QCustomPlot::layer, ++ QCustomPlot::moveLayer, etc.). When replotting, QCustomPlot goes through the list of layers ++ bottom to top and successively draws the layerables of the layers into the paint buffer(s). ++ ++ A QCPLayer contains an ordered list of QCPLayerable instances. QCPLayerable is an abstract base ++ class from which almost all visible objects derive, like axes, grids, graphs, items, etc. ++ ++ \section qcplayer-defaultlayers Default layers ++ ++ Initially, QCustomPlot has six layers: "background", "grid", "main", "axes", "legend" and ++ "overlay" (in that order). On top is the "overlay" layer, which only contains the QCustomPlot's ++ selection rect (\ref QCustomPlot::selectionRect). The next two layers "axes" and "legend" contain ++ the default axes and legend, so they will be drawn above plottables. In the middle, there is the ++ "main" layer. It is initially empty and set as the current layer (see ++ QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer). This means, all new plottables, items etc. are created on this ++ layer by default. Then comes the "grid" layer which contains the QCPGrid instances (which belong ++ tightly to QCPAxis, see \ref QCPAxis::grid). The Axis rect background shall be drawn behind ++ everything else, thus the default QCPAxisRect instance is placed on the "background" layer. Of ++ course, the layer affiliation of the individual objects can be changed as required (\ref ++ QCPLayerable::setLayer). ++ ++ \section qcplayer-ordering Controlling the rendering order via layers ++ ++ Controlling the ordering of layerables in the plot is easy: Create a new layer in the position ++ you want the layerable to be in, e.g. above "main", with \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer. Then set the ++ current layer with \ref QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer to that new layer and finally create the ++ objects normally. They will be placed on the new layer automatically, due to the current layer ++ setting. Alternatively you could have also ignored the current layer setting and just moved the ++ objects with \ref QCPLayerable::setLayer to the desired layer after creating them. ++ ++ It is also possible to move whole layers. For example, If you want the grid to be shown in front ++ of all plottables/items on the "main" layer, just move it above "main" with ++ QCustomPlot::moveLayer. ++ ++ The rendering order within one layer is simply by order of creation or insertion. The item ++ created last (or added last to the layer), is drawn on top of all other objects on that layer. ++ ++ When a layer is deleted, the objects on it are not deleted with it, but fall on the layer below ++ the deleted layer, see QCustomPlot::removeLayer. ++ ++ \section qcplayer-buffering Replotting only a specific layer ++ ++ If the layer mode (\ref setMode) is set to \ref lmBuffered, you can replot only this specific ++ layer by calling \ref replot. In certain situations this can provide better replot performance, ++ compared with a full replot of all layers. Upon creation of a new layer, the layer mode is ++ initialized to \ref lmLogical. The only layer that is set to \ref lmBuffered in a new \ref ++ QCustomPlot instance is the "overlay" layer, containing the selection rect. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QList QCPLayer::children() const ++ ++ Returns a list of all layerables on this layer. The order corresponds to the rendering order: ++ layerables with higher indices are drawn above layerables with lower indices. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPLayer::index() const ++ ++ Returns the index this layer has in the QCustomPlot. The index is the integer number by which this layer can be ++ accessed via \ref QCustomPlot::layer. ++ ++ Layers with higher indices will be drawn above layers with lower indices. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPLayer instance. ++ ++ Normally you shouldn't directly instantiate layers, use \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer instead. ++ ++ \warning It is not checked that \a layerName is actually a unique layer name in \a parentPlot. ++ This check is only performed by \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer. ++*/ ++QCPLayer::QCPLayer(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &layerName) : ++ QObject(parentPlot), ++ mParentPlot(parentPlot), ++ mName(layerName), ++ mIndex(-1), // will be set to a proper value by the QCustomPlot layer creation function ++ mVisible(true), ++ mMode(lmLogical) ++{ ++ // Note: no need to make sure layerName is unique, because layer ++ // management is done with QCustomPlot functions. ++} ++ ++QCPLayer::~QCPLayer() ++{ ++ // If child layerables are still on this layer, detach them, so they don't try to reach back to this ++ // then invalid layer once they get deleted/moved themselves. This only happens when layers are deleted ++ // directly, like in the QCustomPlot destructor. (The regular layer removal procedure for the user is to ++ // call QCustomPlot::removeLayer, which moves all layerables off this layer before deleting it.) ++ ++ while (!mChildren.isEmpty()) ++ mChildren.last()->setLayer(0); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild() ++ ++ if (mParentPlot->currentLayer() == this) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "The parent plot's mCurrentLayer will be a dangling pointer. Should have been set to a valid layer or 0 beforehand."; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this layer is visible or not. If \a visible is set to false, all layerables on this ++ layer will be invisible. ++ ++ This function doesn't change the visibility property of the layerables (\ref ++ QCPLayerable::setVisible), but the \ref QCPLayerable::realVisibility of each layerable takes the ++ visibility of the parent layer into account. ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::setVisible(bool visible) ++{ ++ mVisible = visible; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the rendering mode of this layer. ++ ++ If \a mode is set to \ref lmBuffered for a layer, it will be given a dedicated paint buffer by ++ the parent QCustomPlot instance. This means it may be replotted individually by calling \ref ++ QCPLayer::replot, without needing to replot all other layers. ++ ++ Layers which are set to \ref lmLogical (the default) are used only to define the rendering order ++ and can't be replotted individually. ++ ++ Note that each layer which is set to \ref lmBuffered requires additional paint buffers for the ++ layers below, above and for the layer itself. This increases the memory consumption and ++ (slightly) decreases the repainting speed because multiple paint buffers need to be joined. So ++ you should carefully choose which layers benefit from having their own paint buffer. A typical ++ example would be a layer which contains certain layerables (e.g. items) that need to be changed ++ and thus replotted regularly, while all other layerables on other layers stay static. By default, ++ only the topmost layer called "overlay" is in mode \ref lmBuffered, and contains the selection ++ rect. ++ ++ \see replot ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::setMode(QCPLayer::LayerMode mode) ++{ ++ if (mMode != mode) ++ { ++ mMode = mode; ++ if (!mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the contents of this layer with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ \see replot, drawToPaintBuffer ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ foreach (QCPLayerable *child, mChildren) ++ { ++ if (child->realVisibility()) ++ { ++ painter->save(); ++ painter->setClipRect(child->clipRect().translated(0, -1)); ++ child->applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ child->draw(painter); ++ painter->restore(); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the contents of this layer into the paint buffer which is associated with this layer. The ++ association is established by the parent QCustomPlot, which manages all paint buffers (see \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setupPaintBuffers). ++ ++ \see draw ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::drawToPaintBuffer() ++{ ++ if (!mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ { ++ if (QCPPainter *painter = mPaintBuffer.data()->startPainting()) ++ { ++ if (painter->isActive()) ++ draw(painter); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "paint buffer returned inactive painter"; ++ delete painter; ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->donePainting(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "paint buffer returned zero painter"; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid paint buffer associated with this layer"; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If the layer mode (\ref setMode) is set to \ref lmBuffered, this method allows replotting only ++ the layerables on this specific layer, without the need to replot all other layers (as a call to ++ \ref QCustomPlot::replot would do). ++ ++ If the layer mode is \ref lmLogical however, this method simply calls \ref QCustomPlot::replot on ++ the parent QCustomPlot instance. ++ ++ QCustomPlot also makes sure to replot all layers instead of only this one, if the layer ordering ++ has changed since the last full replot and the other paint buffers were thus invalidated. ++ ++ \see draw ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::replot() ++{ ++ if (mMode == lmBuffered && !mParentPlot->hasInvalidatedPaintBuffers()) ++ { ++ if (!mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ { ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->clear(Qt::transparent); ++ drawToPaintBuffer(); ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(false); ++ mParentPlot->update(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid paint buffer associated with this layer"; ++ } else if (mMode == lmLogical) ++ mParentPlot->replot(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Adds the \a layerable to the list of this layer. If \a prepend is set to true, the layerable will ++ be prepended to the list, i.e. be drawn beneath the other layerables already in the list. ++ ++ This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable to this layer. (Use ++ QCPLayerable::setLayer to change the layer of an object, not this function.) ++ ++ \see removeChild ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::addChild(QCPLayerable *layerable, bool prepend) ++{ ++ if (!mChildren.contains(layerable)) ++ { ++ if (prepend) ++ mChildren.prepend(layerable); ++ else ++ mChildren.append(layerable); ++ if (!mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is already child of this layer" << reinterpret_cast(layerable); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Removes the \a layerable from the list of this layer. ++ ++ This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable. (Use QCPLayerable::setLayer ++ to change the layer of an object, not this function.) ++ ++ \see addChild ++*/ ++void QCPLayer::removeChild(QCPLayerable *layerable) ++{ ++ if (mChildren.removeOne(layerable)) ++ { ++ if (!mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is not child of this layer" << reinterpret_cast(layerable); ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLayerable ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLayerable ++ \brief Base class for all drawable objects ++ ++ This is the abstract base class most visible objects derive from, e.g. plottables, axes, grid ++ etc. ++ ++ Every layerable is on a layer (QCPLayer) which allows controlling the rendering order by stacking ++ the layers accordingly. ++ ++ For details about the layering mechanism, see the QCPLayer documentation. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPLayerable *QCPLayerable::parentLayerable() const ++ ++ Returns the parent layerable of this layerable. The parent layerable is used to provide ++ visibility hierarchies in conjunction with the method \ref realVisibility. This way, layerables ++ only get drawn if their parent layerables are visible, too. ++ ++ Note that a parent layerable is not necessarily also the QObject parent for memory management. ++ Further, a layerable doesn't always have a parent layerable, so this function may return 0. ++ ++ A parent layerable is set implicitly when placed inside layout elements and doesn't need to be ++ set manually by the user. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0 ++ \internal ++ ++ This function applies the default antialiasing setting to the specified \a painter, using the ++ function \ref applyAntialiasingHint. It is the antialiasing state the painter is put in, when ++ \ref draw is called on the layerable. If the layerable has multiple entities whose antialiasing ++ setting may be specified individually, this function should set the antialiasing state of the ++ most prominent entity. In this case however, the \ref draw function usually calls the specialized ++ versions of this function before drawing each entity, effectively overriding the setting of the ++ default antialiasing hint. ++ ++ First example: QCPGraph has multiple entities that have an antialiasing setting: The graph ++ line, fills and scatters. Those can be configured via QCPGraph::setAntialiased, ++ QCPGraph::setAntialiasedFill and QCPGraph::setAntialiasedScatters. Consequently, there isn't only ++ the QCPGraph::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint function (which corresponds to the graph line's ++ antialiasing), but specialized ones like QCPGraph::applyFillAntialiasingHint and ++ QCPGraph::applyScattersAntialiasingHint. So before drawing one of those entities, QCPGraph::draw ++ calls the respective specialized applyAntialiasingHint function. ++ ++ Second example: QCPItemLine consists only of a line so there is only one antialiasing ++ setting which can be controlled with QCPItemLine::setAntialiased. (This function is inherited by ++ all layerables. The specialized functions, as seen on QCPGraph, must be added explicitly to the ++ respective layerable subclass.) Consequently it only has the normal ++ QCPItemLine::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint. The \ref QCPItemLine::draw function doesn't need to ++ care about setting any antialiasing states, because the default antialiasing hint is already set ++ on the painter when the \ref draw function is called, and that's the state it wants to draw the ++ line with. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0 ++ \internal ++ ++ This function draws the layerable with the specified \a painter. It is only called by ++ QCustomPlot, if the layerable is visible (\ref setVisible). ++ ++ Before this function is called, the painter's antialiasing state is set via \ref ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint, see the documentation there. Further, the clipping rectangle was ++ set to \ref clipRect. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++/* start documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPLayerable::layerChanged(QCPLayer *newLayer); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the layer of this layerable changes, i.e. this layerable is moved to ++ a different layer. ++ ++ \see setLayer ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPLayerable instance. ++ ++ Since QCPLayerable is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated directly. Use one of the ++ derived classes. ++ ++ If \a plot is provided, it automatically places itself on the layer named \a targetLayer. If \a ++ targetLayer is an empty string, it places itself on the current layer of the plot (see \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer). ++ ++ It is possible to provide 0 as \a plot. In that case, you should assign a parent plot at a later ++ time with \ref initializeParentPlot. ++ ++ The layerable's parent layerable is set to \a parentLayerable, if provided. Direct layerable ++ parents are mainly used to control visibility in a hierarchy of layerables. This means a ++ layerable is only drawn, if all its ancestor layerables are also visible. Note that \a ++ parentLayerable does not become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable, \a ++ plot does. It is not uncommon to set the QObject-parent to something else in the constructors of ++ QCPLayerable subclasses, to guarantee a working destruction hierarchy. ++*/ ++QCPLayerable::QCPLayerable(QCustomPlot *plot, QString targetLayer, QCPLayerable *parentLayerable) : ++ QObject(plot), ++ mVisible(true), ++ mParentPlot(plot), ++ mParentLayerable(parentLayerable), ++ mLayer(0), ++ mAntialiased(true) ++{ ++ if (mParentPlot) ++ { ++ if (targetLayer.isEmpty()) ++ setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer()); ++ else if (!setLayer(targetLayer)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "setting QCPlayerable initial layer to" << targetLayer << "failed."; ++ } ++} ++ ++QCPLayerable::~QCPLayerable() ++{ ++ if (mLayer) ++ { ++ mLayer->removeChild(this); ++ mLayer = 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the visibility of this layerable object. If an object is not visible, it will not be drawn ++ on the QCustomPlot surface, and user interaction with it (e.g. click and selection) is not ++ possible. ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::setVisible(bool on) ++{ ++ mVisible = on; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a layer of this layerable object. The object will be placed on top of the other objects ++ already on \a layer. ++ ++ If \a layer is 0, this layerable will not be on any layer and thus not appear in the plot (or ++ interact/receive events). ++ ++ Returns true if the layer of this layerable was successfully changed to \a layer. ++*/ ++bool QCPLayerable::setLayer(QCPLayer *layer) ++{ ++ return moveToLayer(layer, false); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ Sets the layer of this layerable object by name ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layerName is a valid layer name. ++*/ ++bool QCPLayerable::setLayer(const QString &layerName) ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (QCPLayer *layer = mParentPlot->layer(layerName)) ++ { ++ return setLayer(layer); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "there is no layer with name" << layerName; ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this object will be drawn antialiased or not. ++ ++ Note that antialiasing settings may be overridden by QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::setAntialiased(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAntialiased = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this layerable is visible, taking the visibility of the layerable parent and the ++ visibility of this layerable's layer into account. This is the method that is consulted to decide ++ whether a layerable shall be drawn or not. ++ ++ If this layerable has a direct layerable parent (usually set via hierarchies implemented in ++ subclasses, like in the case of \ref QCPLayoutElement), this function returns true only if this ++ layerable has its visibility set to true and the parent layerable's \ref realVisibility returns ++ true. ++*/ ++bool QCPLayerable::realVisibility() const ++{ ++ return mVisible && (!mLayer || mLayer->visible()) && (!mParentLayerable || mParentLayerable.data()->realVisibility()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This function is used to decide whether a click hits a layerable object or not. ++ ++ \a pos is a point in pixel coordinates on the QCustomPlot surface. This function returns the ++ shortest pixel distance of this point to the object. If the object is either invisible or the ++ distance couldn't be determined, -1.0 is returned. Further, if \a onlySelectable is true and the ++ object is not selectable, -1.0 is returned, too. ++ ++ If the object is represented not by single lines but by an area like a \ref QCPItemText or the ++ bars of a \ref QCPBars plottable, a click inside the area should also be considered a hit. In ++ these cases this function thus returns a constant value greater zero but still below the parent ++ plot's selection tolerance. (typically the selectionTolerance multiplied by 0.99). ++ ++ Providing a constant value for area objects allows selecting line objects even when they are ++ obscured by such area objects, by clicking close to the lines (i.e. closer than ++ 0.99*selectionTolerance). ++ ++ The actual setting of the selection state is not done by this function. This is handled by the ++ parent QCustomPlot when the mouseReleaseEvent occurs, and the finally selected object is notified ++ via the \ref selectEvent/\ref deselectEvent methods. ++ ++ \a details is an optional output parameter. Every layerable subclass may place any information ++ in \a details. This information will be passed to \ref selectEvent when the parent QCustomPlot ++ decides on the basis of this selectTest call, that the object was successfully selected. The ++ subsequent call to \ref selectEvent will carry the \a details. This is useful for multi-part ++ objects (like QCPAxis). This way, a possibly complex calculation to decide which part was clicked ++ is only done once in \ref selectTest. The result (i.e. the actually clicked part) can then be ++ placed in \a details. So in the subsequent \ref selectEvent, the decision which part was ++ selected doesn't have to be done a second time for a single selection operation. ++ ++ You may pass 0 as \a details to indicate that you are not interested in those selection details. ++ ++ \see selectEvent, deselectEvent, mousePressEvent, wheelEvent, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++double QCPLayerable::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(pos) ++ Q_UNUSED(onlySelectable) ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ return -1.0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Sets the parent plot of this layerable. Use this function once to set the parent plot if you have ++ passed 0 in the constructor. It can not be used to move a layerable from one QCustomPlot to ++ another one. ++ ++ Note that, unlike when passing a non-null parent plot in the constructor, this function does not ++ make \a parentPlot the QObject-parent of this layerable. If you want this, call ++ QObject::setParent(\a parentPlot) in addition to this function. ++ ++ Further, you will probably want to set a layer (\ref setLayer) after calling this function, to ++ make the layerable appear on the QCustomPlot. ++ ++ The parent plot change will be propagated to subclasses via a call to \ref parentPlotInitialized ++ so they can react accordingly (e.g. also initialize the parent plot of child layerables, like ++ QCPLayout does). ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) ++{ ++ if (mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with mParentPlot already initialized"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (!parentPlot) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with parentPlot zero"; ++ ++ mParentPlot = parentPlot; ++ parentPlotInitialized(mParentPlot); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Sets the parent layerable of this layerable to \a parentLayerable. Note that \a parentLayerable does not ++ become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable. ++ ++ The parent layerable has influence on the return value of the \ref realVisibility method. Only ++ layerables with a fully visible parent tree will return true for \ref realVisibility, and thus be ++ drawn. ++ ++ \see realVisibility ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::setParentLayerable(QCPLayerable *parentLayerable) ++{ ++ mParentLayerable = parentLayerable; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Moves this layerable object to \a layer. If \a prepend is true, this object will be prepended to ++ the new layer's list, i.e. it will be drawn below the objects already on the layer. If it is ++ false, the object will be appended. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layer is a valid layer. ++*/ ++bool QCPLayerable::moveToLayer(QCPLayer *layer, bool prepend) ++{ ++ if (layer && !mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (layer && layer->parentPlot() != mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer" << layer->name() << "is not in same QCustomPlot as this layerable"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ QCPLayer *oldLayer = mLayer; ++ if (mLayer) ++ mLayer->removeChild(this); ++ mLayer = layer; ++ if (mLayer) ++ mLayer->addChild(this, prepend); ++ if (mLayer != oldLayer) ++ emit layerChanged(mLayer); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Sets the QCPainter::setAntialiasing state on the provided \a painter, depending on the \a ++ localAntialiased value as well as the overrides \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. Which override enum this function takes into account is ++ controlled via \a overrideElement. ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::applyAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter, bool localAntialiased, QCP::AntialiasedElement overrideElement) const ++{ ++ if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements().testFlag(overrideElement)) ++ painter->setAntialiasing(false); ++ else if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->antialiasedElements().testFlag(overrideElement)) ++ painter->setAntialiasing(true); ++ else ++ painter->setAntialiasing(localAntialiased); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is called by \ref initializeParentPlot, to allow subclasses to react on the setting ++ of a parent plot. This is the case when 0 was passed as parent plot in the constructor, and the ++ parent plot is set at a later time. ++ ++ For example, QCPLayoutElement/QCPLayout hierarchies may be created independently of any ++ QCustomPlot at first. When they are then added to a layout inside the QCustomPlot, the top level ++ element of the hierarchy gets its parent plot initialized with \ref initializeParentPlot. To ++ propagate the parent plot to all the children of the hierarchy, the top level element then uses ++ this function to pass the parent plot on to its child elements. ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ \see initializeParentPlot ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(parentPlot) ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the selection category this layerable shall belong to. The selection category is used in ++ conjunction with \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions to control which objects are selectable and ++ which aren't. ++ ++ Subclasses that don't fit any of the normal \ref QCP::Interaction values can use \ref ++ QCP::iSelectOther. This is what the default implementation returns. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++QCP::Interaction QCPLayerable::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectOther; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the clipping rectangle of this layerable object. By default, this is the viewport of the ++ parent QCustomPlot. Specific subclasses may reimplement this function to provide different ++ clipping rects. ++ ++ The returned clipping rect is set on the painter before the draw function of the respective ++ object is called. ++*/ ++QRect QCPLayerable::clipRect() const ++{ ++ if (mParentPlot) ++ return mParentPlot->viewport(); ++ else ++ return QRect(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This event is called when the layerable shall be selected, as a consequence of a click by the ++ user. Subclasses should react to it by setting their selection state appropriately. The default ++ implementation does nothing. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the selection. \a additive indicates, whether the user ++ was holding the multi-select-modifier while performing the selection (see \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier). if \a additive is true, the selection state must be toggled ++ (i.e. become selected when unselected and unselected when selected). ++ ++ Every selectEvent is preceded by a call to \ref selectTest, which has returned positively (i.e. ++ returned a value greater than 0 and less than the selection tolerance of the parent QCustomPlot). ++ The \a details data you output from \ref selectTest is fed back via \a details here. You may ++ use it to transport any kind of information from the selectTest to the possibly subsequent ++ selectEvent. Usually \a details is used to transfer which part was clicked, if it is a layerable ++ that has multiple individually selectable parts (like QCPAxis). This way selectEvent doesn't need ++ to do the calculation again to find out which part was actually clicked. ++ ++ \a selectionStateChanged is an output parameter. If the pointer is non-null, this function must ++ set the value either to true or false, depending on whether the selection state of this layerable ++ was actually changed. For layerables that only are selectable as a whole and not in parts, this ++ is simple: if \a additive is true, \a selectionStateChanged must also be set to true, because the ++ selection toggles. If \a additive is false, \a selectionStateChanged is only set to true, if the ++ layerable was previously unselected and now is switched to the selected state. ++ ++ \see selectTest, deselectEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ Q_UNUSED(additive) ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ Q_UNUSED(selectionStateChanged) ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This event is called when the layerable shall be deselected, either as consequence of a user ++ interaction or a call to \ref QCustomPlot::deselectAll. Subclasses should react to it by ++ unsetting their selection appropriately. ++ ++ just as in \ref selectEvent, the output parameter \a selectionStateChanged (if non-null), must ++ return true or false when the selection state of this layerable has changed or not changed, ++ respectively. ++ ++ \see selectTest, selectEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(selectionStateChanged) ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This event gets called when the user presses a mouse button while the cursor is over the ++ layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a preceding call to \ref ++ selectTest. ++ ++ The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c ++ event->pos(). The parameter \a details contains layerable-specific details about the hit, which ++ were generated in the previous call to \ref selectTest. For example, One-dimensional plottables ++ like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPBars convey the clicked data point in the \a details parameter, as ++ \ref QCPDataSelection packed as QVariant. Multi-part objects convey the specific \c ++ SelectablePart that was hit (e.g. \ref QCPAxis::SelectablePart in the case of axes). ++ ++ QCustomPlot uses an event propagation system that works the same as Qt's system. If your ++ layerable doesn't reimplement the \ref mousePressEvent or explicitly calls \c event->ignore() in ++ its reimplementation, the event will be propagated to the next layerable in the stacking order. ++ ++ Once a layerable has accepted the \ref mousePressEvent, it is considered the mouse grabber and ++ will receive all following calls to \ref mouseMoveEvent or \ref mouseReleaseEvent for this mouse ++ interaction (a "mouse interaction" in this context ends with the release). ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing except explicitly ignoring the event with \c ++ event->ignore(). ++ ++ \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ event->ignore(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This event gets called when the user moves the mouse while holding a mouse button, after this ++ layerable has become the mouse grabber by accepting the preceding \ref mousePressEvent. ++ ++ The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c ++ event->pos(). The parameter \a startPos indicates the position where the initial \ref ++ mousePressEvent occurred, that started the mouse interaction. ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(startPos) ++ event->ignore(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This event gets called when the user releases the mouse button, after this layerable has become ++ the mouse grabber by accepting the preceding \ref mousePressEvent. ++ ++ The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c ++ event->pos(). The parameter \a startPos indicates the position where the initial \ref ++ mousePressEvent occurred, that started the mouse interaction. ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent, wheelEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(startPos) ++ event->ignore(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This event gets called when the user presses the mouse button a second time in a double-click, ++ while the cursor is over the layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a ++ preceding call to \ref selectTest. ++ ++ The \ref mouseDoubleClickEvent is called instead of the second \ref mousePressEvent. So in the ++ case of a double-click, the event succession is ++ pressEvent – releaseEvent – doubleClickEvent – releaseEvent. ++ ++ The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c ++ event->pos(). The parameter \a details contains layerable-specific details about the hit, which ++ were generated in the previous call to \ref selectTest. For example, One-dimensional plottables ++ like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPBars convey the clicked data point in the \a details parameter, as ++ \ref QCPDataSelection packed as QVariant. Multi-part objects convey the specific \c ++ SelectablePart that was hit (e.g. \ref QCPAxis::SelectablePart in the case of axes). ++ ++ Similarly to \ref mousePressEvent, once a layerable has accepted the \ref mouseDoubleClickEvent, ++ it is considered the mouse grabber and will receive all following calls to \ref mouseMoveEvent ++ and \ref mouseReleaseEvent for this mouse interaction (a "mouse interaction" in this context ends ++ with the release). ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing except explicitly ignoring the event with \c ++ event->ignore(). ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, wheelEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ event->ignore(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This event gets called when the user turns the mouse scroll wheel while the cursor is over the ++ layerable. Whether a cursor is over the layerable is decided by a preceding call to \ref ++ selectTest. ++ ++ The current pixel position of the cursor on the QCustomPlot widget is accessible via \c ++ event->pos(). ++ ++ The \c event->delta() indicates how far the mouse wheel was turned, which is usually +/- 120 for ++ single rotation steps. However, if the mouse wheel is turned rapidly, multiple steps may ++ accumulate to one event, making \c event->delta() larger. On the other hand, if the wheel has ++ very smooth steps or none at all, the delta may be smaller. ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent, mouseDoubleClickEvent ++*/ ++void QCPLayerable::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) ++{ ++ event->ignore(); ++} ++/* end of 'src/layer.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/range.cpp', size 12221 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPRange ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPRange ++ \brief Represents the range an axis is encompassing. ++ ++ contains a \a lower and \a upper double value and provides convenience input, output and ++ modification functions. ++ ++ \see QCPAxis::setRange ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPRange::size() const ++ ++ Returns the size of the range, i.e. \a upper-\a lower ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPRange::center() const ++ ++ Returns the center of the range, i.e. (\a upper+\a lower)*0.5 ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPRange::normalize() ++ ++ Makes sure \a lower is numerically smaller than \a upper. If this is not the case, the values are ++ swapped. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPRange::contains(double value) const ++ ++ Returns true when \a value lies within or exactly on the borders of the range. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator+=(const double& value) ++ ++ Adds \a value to both boundaries of the range. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator-=(const double& value) ++ ++ Subtracts \a value from both boundaries of the range. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator*=(const double& value) ++ ++ Multiplies both boundaries of the range by \a value. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange &QCPRange::operator/=(const double& value) ++ ++ Divides both boundaries of the range by \a value. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Minimum range size (\a upper - \a lower) the range changing functions will accept. Smaller ++ intervals would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double precision numbers, ++ corresponding to a minimum magnitude of roughly 1e-308. ++ ++ \warning Do not use this constant to indicate "arbitrarily small" values in plotting logic (as ++ values that will appear in the plot)! It is intended only as a bound to compare against, e.g. to ++ prevent axis ranges from obtaining underflowing ranges. ++ ++ \see validRange, maxRange ++*/ ++const double QCPRange::minRange = 1e-280; ++ ++/*! ++ Maximum values (negative and positive) the range will accept in range-changing functions. ++ Larger absolute values would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double precision numbers, ++ corresponding to a maximum magnitude of roughly 1e308. ++ ++ \warning Do not use this constant to indicate "arbitrarily large" values in plotting logic (as ++ values that will appear in the plot)! It is intended only as a bound to compare against, e.g. to ++ prevent axis ranges from obtaining overflowing ranges. ++ ++ \see validRange, minRange ++*/ ++const double QCPRange::maxRange = 1e250; ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a range with \a lower and \a upper set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPRange::QCPRange() : ++ lower(0), ++ upper(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Constructs a range with the specified \a lower and \a upper values. ++ ++ The resulting range will be normalized (see \ref normalize), so if \a lower is not numerically ++ smaller than \a upper, they will be swapped. ++*/ ++QCPRange::QCPRange(double lower, double upper) : ++ lower(lower), ++ upper(upper) ++{ ++ normalize(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Expands this range such that \a otherRange is contained in the new range. It is assumed that both ++ this range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize). ++ ++ If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, it will be replaced by the respective bound ++ of \a otherRange. ++ ++ If \a otherRange is already inside the current range, this function does nothing. ++ ++ \see expanded ++*/ ++void QCPRange::expand(const QCPRange &otherRange) ++{ ++ if (lower > otherRange.lower || qIsNaN(lower)) ++ lower = otherRange.lower; ++ if (upper < otherRange.upper || qIsNaN(upper)) ++ upper = otherRange.upper; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Expands this range such that \a includeCoord is contained in the new range. It is assumed that ++ this range is normalized (see \ref normalize). ++ ++ If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the respective bound will be set to \a ++ includeCoord. ++ ++ If \a includeCoord is already inside the current range, this function does nothing. ++ ++ \see expand ++*/ ++void QCPRange::expand(double includeCoord) ++{ ++ if (lower > includeCoord || qIsNaN(lower)) ++ lower = includeCoord; ++ if (upper < includeCoord || qIsNaN(upper)) ++ upper = includeCoord; ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns an expanded range that contains this and \a otherRange. It is assumed that both this ++ range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize). ++ ++ If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the returned range's bound will be taken from ++ \a otherRange. ++ ++ \see expand ++*/ ++QCPRange QCPRange::expanded(const QCPRange &otherRange) const ++{ ++ QCPRange result = *this; ++ result.expand(otherRange); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns an expanded range that includes the specified \a includeCoord. It is assumed that this ++ range is normalized (see \ref normalize). ++ ++ If this range contains NaN as lower or upper bound, the returned range's bound will be set to \a ++ includeCoord. ++ ++ \see expand ++*/ ++QCPRange QCPRange::expanded(double includeCoord) const ++{ ++ QCPRange result = *this; ++ result.expand(includeCoord); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns this range, possibly modified to not exceed the bounds provided as \a lowerBound and \a ++ upperBound. If possible, the size of the current range is preserved in the process. ++ ++ If the range shall only be bounded at the lower side, you can set \a upperBound to \ref ++ QCPRange::maxRange. If it shall only be bounded at the upper side, set \a lowerBound to -\ref ++ QCPRange::maxRange. ++*/ ++QCPRange QCPRange::bounded(double lowerBound, double upperBound) const ++{ ++ if (lowerBound > upperBound) ++ qSwap(lowerBound, upperBound); ++ ++ QCPRange result(lower, upper); ++ if (result.lower < lowerBound) ++ { ++ result.lower = lowerBound; ++ result.upper = lowerBound + size(); ++ if (result.upper > upperBound || qFuzzyCompare(size(), upperBound-lowerBound)) ++ result.upper = upperBound; ++ } else if (result.upper > upperBound) ++ { ++ result.upper = upperBound; ++ result.lower = upperBound - size(); ++ if (result.lower < lowerBound || qFuzzyCompare(size(), upperBound-lowerBound)) ++ result.lower = lowerBound; ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a sanitized version of the range. Sanitized means for logarithmic scales, that ++ the range won't span the positive and negative sign domain, i.e. contain zero. Further ++ \a lower will always be numerically smaller (or equal) to \a upper. ++ ++ If the original range does span positive and negative sign domains or contains zero, ++ the returned range will try to approximate the original range as good as possible. ++ If the positive interval of the original range is wider than the negative interval, the ++ returned range will only contain the positive interval, with lower bound set to \a rangeFac or ++ \a rangeFac *\a upper, whichever is closer to zero. Same procedure is used if the negative interval ++ is wider than the positive interval, this time by changing the \a upper bound. ++*/ ++QCPRange QCPRange::sanitizedForLogScale() const ++{ ++ double rangeFac = 1e-3; ++ QCPRange sanitizedRange(lower, upper); ++ sanitizedRange.normalize(); ++ // can't have range spanning negative and positive values in log plot, so change range to fix it ++ //if (qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.lower+1, 1) && !qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.upper+1, 1)) ++ if (sanitizedRange.lower == 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper != 0.0) ++ { ++ // case lower is 0 ++ if (rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac) ++ sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac; ++ else ++ sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac; ++ } //else if (!qFuzzyCompare(lower+1, 1) && qFuzzyCompare(upper+1, 1)) ++ else if (sanitizedRange.lower != 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper == 0.0) ++ { ++ // case upper is 0 ++ if (-rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac) ++ sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac; ++ else ++ sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac; ++ } else if (sanitizedRange.lower < 0 && sanitizedRange.upper > 0) ++ { ++ // find out whether negative or positive interval is wider to decide which sign domain will be chosen ++ if (-sanitizedRange.lower > sanitizedRange.upper) ++ { ++ // negative is wider, do same as in case upper is 0 ++ if (-rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac) ++ sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac; ++ else ++ sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower*rangeFac; ++ } else ++ { ++ // positive is wider, do same as in case lower is 0 ++ if (rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac) ++ sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac; ++ else ++ sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper*rangeFac; ++ } ++ } ++ // due to normalization, case lower>0 && upper<0 should never occur, because that implies upper -maxRange && ++ upper < maxRange && ++ qAbs(lower-upper) > minRange && ++ qAbs(lower-upper) < maxRange && ++ !(lower > 0 && qIsInf(upper/lower)) && ++ !(upper < 0 && qIsInf(lower/upper))); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \overload ++ Checks, whether the specified range is within valid bounds, which are defined ++ as QCPRange::maxRange and QCPRange::minRange. ++ A valid range means: ++ \li range bounds within -maxRange and maxRange ++ \li range size above minRange ++ \li range size below maxRange ++*/ ++bool QCPRange::validRange(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ return (range.lower > -maxRange && ++ range.upper < maxRange && ++ qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) > minRange && ++ qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) < maxRange && ++ !(range.lower > 0 && qIsInf(range.upper/range.lower)) && ++ !(range.upper < 0 && qIsInf(range.lower/range.upper))); ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/range.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/selection.cpp', size 21898 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPDataRange ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPDataRange ++ \brief Describes a data range given by begin and end index ++ ++ QCPDataRange holds two integers describing the begin (\ref setBegin) and end (\ref setEnd) index ++ of a contiguous set of data points. The end index points to the data point above the last data point that's part of ++ the data range, similarly to the nomenclature used in standard iterators. ++ ++ Data Ranges are not bound to a certain plottable, thus they can be freely exchanged, created and ++ modified. If a non-contiguous data set shall be described, the class \ref QCPDataSelection is ++ used, which holds and manages multiple instances of \ref QCPDataRange. In most situations, \ref ++ QCPDataSelection is thus used. ++ ++ Both \ref QCPDataRange and \ref QCPDataSelection offer convenience methods to work with them, ++ e.g. \ref bounded, \ref expanded, \ref intersects, \ref intersection, \ref adjusted, \ref ++ contains. Further, addition and subtraction operators (defined in \ref QCPDataSelection) can be ++ used to join/subtract data ranges and data selections (or mixtures), to retrieve a corresponding ++ \ref QCPDataSelection. ++ ++ %QCustomPlot's \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism" is based on \ref QCPDataSelection and ++ QCPDataRange. ++ ++ \note Do not confuse \ref QCPDataRange with \ref QCPRange. A \ref QCPRange describes an interval ++ in floating point plot coordinates, e.g. the current axis range. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPDataRange::size() const ++ ++ Returns the number of data points described by this data range. This is equal to the end index ++ minus the begin index. ++ ++ \see length ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPDataRange::length() const ++ ++ Returns the number of data points described by this data range. Equivalent to \ref size. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPDataRange::setBegin(int begin) ++ ++ Sets the begin of this data range. The \a begin index points to the first data point that is part ++ of the data range. ++ ++ No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid). ++ ++ \see setEnd ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPDataRange::setEnd(int end) ++ ++ Sets the end of this data range. The \a end index points to the data point just above the last ++ data point that is part of the data range. ++ ++ No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid). ++ ++ \see setBegin ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPDataRange::isValid() const ++ ++ Returns whether this range is valid. A valid range has a begin index greater or equal to 0, and ++ an end index greater or equal to the begin index. ++ ++ \note Invalid ranges should be avoided and are never the result of any of QCustomPlot's methods ++ (unless they are themselves fed with invalid ranges). Do not pass invalid ranges to QCustomPlot's ++ methods. The invalid range is not inherently prevented in QCPDataRange, to allow temporary ++ invalid begin/end values while manipulating the range. An invalid range is not necessarily empty ++ (\ref isEmpty), since its \ref length can be negative and thus non-zero. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPDataRange::isEmpty() const ++ ++ Returns whether this range is empty, i.e. whether its begin index equals its end index. ++ ++ \see size, length ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::adjusted(int changeBegin, int changeEnd) const ++ ++ Returns a data range where \a changeBegin and \a changeEnd were added to the begin and end ++ indices, respectively. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an empty QCPDataRange, with begin and end set to 0. ++*/ ++QCPDataRange::QCPDataRange() : ++ mBegin(0), ++ mEnd(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPDataRange, initialized with the specified \a begin and \a end. ++ ++ No checks or corrections are made to ensure the resulting range is valid (\ref isValid). ++*/ ++QCPDataRange::QCPDataRange(int begin, int end) : ++ mBegin(begin), ++ mEnd(end) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a data range that matches this data range, except that parts exceeding \a other are ++ excluded. ++ ++ This method is very similar to \ref intersection, with one distinction: If this range and the \a ++ other range share no intersection, the returned data range will be empty with begin and end set ++ to the respective boundary side of \a other, at which this range is residing. (\ref intersection ++ would just return a range with begin and end set to 0.) ++*/ ++QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::bounded(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ QCPDataRange result(intersection(other)); ++ if (result.isEmpty()) // no intersection, preserve respective bounding side of otherRange as both begin and end of return value ++ { ++ if (mEnd <= other.mBegin) ++ result = QCPDataRange(other.mBegin, other.mBegin); ++ else ++ result = QCPDataRange(other.mEnd, other.mEnd); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a data range that contains both this data range as well as \a other. ++*/ ++QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::expanded(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ return QCPDataRange(qMin(mBegin, other.mBegin), qMax(mEnd, other.mEnd)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the data range which is contained in both this data range and \a other. ++ ++ This method is very similar to \ref bounded, with one distinction: If this range and the \a other ++ range share no intersection, the returned data range will be empty with begin and end set to 0. ++ (\ref bounded would return a range with begin and end set to one of the boundaries of \a other, ++ depending on which side this range is on.) ++ ++ \see QCPDataSelection::intersection ++*/ ++QCPDataRange QCPDataRange::intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ QCPDataRange result(qMax(mBegin, other.mBegin), qMin(mEnd, other.mEnd)); ++ if (result.isValid()) ++ return result; ++ else ++ return QCPDataRange(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this data range and \a other share common data points. ++ ++ \see intersection, contains ++*/ ++bool QCPDataRange::intersects(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ return !( (mBegin > other.mBegin && mBegin >= other.mEnd) || ++ (mEnd <= other.mBegin && mEnd < other.mEnd) ); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether all data points described by this data range are also in \a other. ++ ++ \see intersects ++*/ ++bool QCPDataRange::contains(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ return mBegin <= other.mBegin && mEnd >= other.mEnd; ++} ++ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPDataSelection ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPDataSelection ++ \brief Describes a data set by holding multiple QCPDataRange instances ++ ++ QCPDataSelection manages multiple instances of QCPDataRange in order to represent any (possibly ++ disjoint) set of data selection. ++ ++ The data selection can be modified with addition and subtraction operators which take ++ QCPDataSelection and QCPDataRange instances, as well as methods such as \ref addDataRange and ++ \ref clear. Read access is provided by \ref dataRange, \ref dataRanges, \ref dataRangeCount, etc. ++ ++ The method \ref simplify is used to join directly adjacent or even overlapping QCPDataRange ++ instances. QCPDataSelection automatically simplifies when using the addition/subtraction ++ operators. The only case when \ref simplify is left to the user, is when calling \ref ++ addDataRange, with the parameter \a simplify explicitly set to false. This is useful if many data ++ ranges will be added to the selection successively and the overhead for simplifying after each ++ iteration shall be avoided. In this case, you should make sure to call \ref simplify after ++ completing the operation. ++ ++ Use \ref enforceType to bring the data selection into a state complying with the constraints for ++ selections defined in \ref QCP::SelectionType. ++ ++ %QCustomPlot's \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism" is based on QCPDataSelection and ++ QCPDataRange. ++ ++ \section qcpdataselection-iterating Iterating over a data selection ++ ++ As an example, the following code snippet calculates the average value of a graph's data ++ \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selection "selection": ++ ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpdataselection-iterating-1 ++ ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPDataSelection::dataRangeCount() const ++ ++ Returns the number of ranges that make up the data selection. The ranges can be accessed by \ref ++ dataRange via their index. ++ ++ \see dataRange, dataPointCount ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QList QCPDataSelection::dataRanges() const ++ ++ Returns all data ranges that make up the data selection. If the data selection is simplified (the ++ usual state of the selection, see \ref simplify), the ranges are sorted by ascending data point ++ index. ++ ++ \see dataRange ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPDataSelection::isEmpty() const ++ ++ Returns true if there are no data ranges, and thus no data points, in this QCPDataSelection ++ instance. ++ ++ \see dataRangeCount ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an empty QCPDataSelection. ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection::QCPDataSelection() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPDataSelection containing the provided \a range. ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection::QCPDataSelection(const QCPDataRange &range) ++{ ++ mDataRanges.append(range); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns true if this selection is identical (contains the same data ranges with the same begin ++ and end indices) to \a other. ++ ++ Note that both data selections must be in simplified state (the usual state of the selection, see ++ \ref simplify) for this operator to return correct results. ++*/ ++bool QCPDataSelection::operator==(const QCPDataSelection &other) const ++{ ++ if (mDataRanges.size() != other.mDataRanges.size()) ++ return false; ++ for (int i=0; i= other.end()) ++ break; // since data ranges are sorted after the simplify() call, no ranges which contain other will come after this ++ ++ if (thisEnd > other.begin()) // ranges which don't fulfill this are entirely before other and can be ignored ++ { ++ if (thisBegin >= other.begin()) // range leading segment is encompassed ++ { ++ if (thisEnd <= other.end()) // range fully encompassed, remove completely ++ { ++ mDataRanges.removeAt(i); ++ continue; ++ } else // only leading segment is encompassed, trim accordingly ++ mDataRanges[i].setBegin(other.end()); ++ } else // leading segment is not encompassed ++ { ++ if (thisEnd <= other.end()) // only trailing segment is encompassed, trim accordingly ++ { ++ mDataRanges[i].setEnd(other.begin()); ++ } else // other lies inside this range, so split range ++ { ++ mDataRanges[i].setEnd(other.begin()); ++ mDataRanges.insert(i+1, QCPDataRange(other.end(), thisEnd)); ++ break; // since data ranges are sorted (and don't overlap) after simplify() call, we're done here ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++i; ++ } ++ ++ return *this; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the total number of data points contained in all data ranges that make up this data ++ selection. ++*/ ++int QCPDataSelection::dataPointCount() const ++{ ++ int result = 0; ++ for (int i=0; i= 0 && index < mDataRanges.size()) ++ { ++ return mDataRanges.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of range:" << index; ++ return QCPDataRange(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a \ref QCPDataRange which spans the entire data selection, including possible ++ intermediate segments which are not part of the original data selection. ++*/ ++QCPDataRange QCPDataSelection::span() const ++{ ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ return QCPDataRange(); ++ else ++ return QCPDataRange(mDataRanges.first().begin(), mDataRanges.last().end()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the given \a dataRange to this data selection. This is equivalent to the += operator but ++ allows disabling immediate simplification by setting \a simplify to false. This can improve ++ performance if adding a very large amount of data ranges successively. In this case, make sure to ++ call \ref simplify manually, after the operation. ++*/ ++void QCPDataSelection::addDataRange(const QCPDataRange &dataRange, bool simplify) ++{ ++ mDataRanges.append(dataRange); ++ if (simplify) ++ this->simplify(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all data ranges. The data selection then contains no data points. ++ ++ \ref isEmpty ++*/ ++void QCPDataSelection::clear() ++{ ++ mDataRanges.clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sorts all data ranges by range begin index in ascending order, and then joins directly adjacent ++ or overlapping ranges. This can reduce the number of individual data ranges in the selection, and ++ prevents possible double-counting when iterating over the data points held by the data ranges. ++ ++ This method is automatically called when using the addition/subtraction operators. The only case ++ when \ref simplify is left to the user, is when calling \ref addDataRange, with the parameter \a ++ simplify explicitly set to false. ++*/ ++void QCPDataSelection::simplify() ++{ ++ // remove any empty ranges: ++ for (int i=mDataRanges.size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ { ++ if (mDataRanges.at(i).isEmpty()) ++ mDataRanges.removeAt(i); ++ } ++ if (mDataRanges.isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ ++ // sort ranges by starting value, ascending: ++ std::sort(mDataRanges.begin(), mDataRanges.end(), lessThanDataRangeBegin); ++ ++ // join overlapping/contiguous ranges: ++ int i = 1; ++ while (i < mDataRanges.size()) ++ { ++ if (mDataRanges.at(i-1).end() >= mDataRanges.at(i).begin()) // range i overlaps/joins with i-1, so expand range i-1 appropriately and remove range i from list ++ { ++ mDataRanges[i-1].setEnd(qMax(mDataRanges.at(i-1).end(), mDataRanges.at(i).end())); ++ mDataRanges.removeAt(i); ++ } else ++ ++i; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Makes sure this data selection conforms to the specified \a type selection type. Before the type ++ is enforced, \ref simplify is called. ++ ++ Depending on \a type, enforcing means adding new data points that were previously not part of the ++ selection, or removing data points from the selection. If the current selection already conforms ++ to \a type, the data selection is not changed. ++ ++ \see QCP::SelectionType ++*/ ++void QCPDataSelection::enforceType(QCP::SelectionType type) ++{ ++ simplify(); ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case QCP::stNone: ++ { ++ mDataRanges.clear(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case QCP::stWhole: ++ { ++ // whole selection isn't defined by data range, so don't change anything (is handled in plottable methods) ++ break; ++ } ++ case QCP::stSingleData: ++ { ++ // reduce all data ranges to the single first data point: ++ if (!mDataRanges.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ if (mDataRanges.size() > 1) ++ mDataRanges = QList() << mDataRanges.first(); ++ if (mDataRanges.first().length() > 1) ++ mDataRanges.first().setEnd(mDataRanges.first().begin()+1); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case QCP::stDataRange: ++ { ++ mDataRanges = QList() << span(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case QCP::stMultipleDataRanges: ++ { ++ // this is the selection type that allows all concievable combinations of ranges, so do nothing ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns true if the data selection \a other is contained entirely in this data selection, i.e. ++ all data point indices that are in \a other are also in this data selection. ++ ++ \see QCPDataRange::contains ++*/ ++bool QCPDataSelection::contains(const QCPDataSelection &other) const ++{ ++ if (other.isEmpty()) return false; ++ ++ int otherIndex = 0; ++ int thisIndex = 0; ++ while (thisIndex < mDataRanges.size() && otherIndex < other.mDataRanges.size()) ++ { ++ if (mDataRanges.at(thisIndex).contains(other.mDataRanges.at(otherIndex))) ++ ++otherIndex; ++ else ++ ++thisIndex; ++ } ++ return thisIndex < mDataRanges.size(); // if thisIndex ran all the way to the end to find a containing range for the current otherIndex, other is not contained in this ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a data selection containing the points which are both in this data selection and in the ++ data range \a other. ++ ++ A common use case is to limit an unknown data selection to the valid range of a data container, ++ using \ref QCPDataContainer::dataRange as \a other. One can then safely iterate over the returned ++ data selection without exceeding the data container's bounds. ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection QCPDataSelection::intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ for (int i=0; iorientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return QCPRange(axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.left()), axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.left()+mRect.width())); ++ else ++ return QCPRange(axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.top()+mRect.height()), axis->pixelToCoord(mRect.top())); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with axis zero"; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the selection rect outline. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill the selection rect. By default the selection rect is not ++ filled, i.e. \a brush is Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If there is currently a selection interaction going on (\ref isActive), the interaction is ++ canceled. The selection rect will emit the \ref canceled signal. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::cancel() ++{ ++ if (mActive) ++ { ++ mActive = false; ++ emit canceled(mRect, 0); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that a selection rect interaction was initiated. ++ The default implementation sets the selection rect to active, initializes the selection rect ++ geometry and emits the \ref started signal. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::startSelection(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ mActive = true; ++ mRect = QRect(event->pos(), event->pos()); ++ emit started(event); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that an ongoing selection rect interaction needs ++ to update its geometry. The default implementation updates the rect and emits the \ref changed ++ signal. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::moveSelection(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ mRect.setBottomRight(event->pos()); ++ emit changed(mRect, event); ++ layer()->replot(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called by QCustomPlot to indicate that an ongoing selection rect interaction has ++ finished by the user releasing the mouse button. The default implementation deactivates the ++ selection rect and emits the \ref accepted signal. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::endSelection(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ mRect.setBottomRight(event->pos()); ++ mActive = false; ++ emit accepted(mRect, event); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called by QCustomPlot when a key has been pressed by the user while the selection ++ rect interaction is active. The default implementation allows to \ref cancel the interaction by ++ hitting the escape key. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::keyPressEvent(QKeyEvent *event) ++{ ++ if (event->key() == Qt::Key_Escape && mActive) ++ { ++ mActive = false; ++ emit canceled(mRect, event); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPSelectionRect::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeOther); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ If the selection rect is active (\ref isActive), draws the selection rect defined by \a mRect. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (mActive) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->drawRect(mRect); ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/selectionrect.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layout.cpp', size 74302 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPMarginGroup ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPMarginGroup ++ \brief A margin group allows synchronization of margin sides if working with multiple layout elements. ++ ++ QCPMarginGroup allows you to tie a margin side of two or more layout elements together, such that ++ they will all have the same size, based on the largest required margin in the group. ++ ++ \n ++ \image html QCPMarginGroup.png "Demonstration of QCPMarginGroup" ++ \n ++ ++ In certain situations it is desirable that margins at specific sides are synchronized across ++ layout elements. For example, if one QCPAxisRect is below another one in a grid layout, it will ++ provide a cleaner look to the user if the left and right margins of the two axis rects are of the ++ same size. The left axis of the top axis rect will then be at the same horizontal position as the ++ left axis of the lower axis rect, making them appear aligned. The same applies for the right ++ axes. This is what QCPMarginGroup makes possible. ++ ++ To add/remove a specific side of a layout element to/from a margin group, use the \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup method. To completely break apart the margin group, either call ++ \ref clear, or just delete the margin group. ++ ++ \section QCPMarginGroup-example Example ++ ++ First create a margin group: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpmargingroup-creation-1 ++ Then set this group on the layout element sides: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpmargingroup-creation-2 ++ Here, we've used the first two axis rects of the plot and synchronized their left margins with ++ each other and their right margins with each other. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QList QCPMarginGroup::elements(QCP::MarginSide side) const ++ ++ Returns a list of all layout elements that have their margin \a side associated with this margin ++ group. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPMarginGroup instance in \a parentPlot. ++*/ ++QCPMarginGroup::QCPMarginGroup(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QObject(parentPlot), ++ mParentPlot(parentPlot) ++{ ++ mChildren.insert(QCP::msLeft, QList()); ++ mChildren.insert(QCP::msRight, QList()); ++ mChildren.insert(QCP::msTop, QList()); ++ mChildren.insert(QCP::msBottom, QList()); ++} ++ ++QCPMarginGroup::~QCPMarginGroup() ++{ ++ clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this margin group is empty. If this function returns true, no layout elements use ++ this margin group to synchronize margin sides. ++*/ ++bool QCPMarginGroup::isEmpty() const ++{ ++ QHashIterator > it(mChildren); ++ while (it.hasNext()) ++ { ++ it.next(); ++ if (!it.value().isEmpty()) ++ return false; ++ } ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Clears this margin group. The synchronization of the margin sides that use this margin group is ++ lifted and they will use their individual margin sizes again. ++*/ ++void QCPMarginGroup::clear() ++{ ++ // make all children remove themselves from this margin group: ++ QHashIterator > it(mChildren); ++ while (it.hasNext()) ++ { ++ it.next(); ++ const QList elements = it.value(); ++ for (int i=elements.size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ elements.at(i)->setMarginGroup(it.key(), 0); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the synchronized common margin for \a side. This is the margin value that will be used by ++ the layout element on the respective side, if it is part of this margin group. ++ ++ The common margin is calculated by requesting the automatic margin (\ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin) of each element associated with \a side in this margin ++ group, and choosing the largest returned value. (QCPLayoutElement::minimumMargins is taken into ++ account, too.) ++*/ ++int QCPMarginGroup::commonMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) const ++{ ++ // query all automatic margins of the layout elements in this margin group side and find maximum: ++ int result = 0; ++ const QList elements = mChildren.value(side); ++ for (int i=0; iautoMargins().testFlag(side)) ++ continue; ++ int m = qMax(elements.at(i)->calculateAutoMargin(side), QCP::getMarginValue(elements.at(i)->minimumMargins(), side)); ++ if (m > result) ++ result = m; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Adds \a element to the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a side. ++ ++ This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element. ++*/ ++void QCPMarginGroup::addChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (!mChildren[side].contains(element)) ++ mChildren[side].append(element); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is already child of this margin group side" << reinterpret_cast(element); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Removes \a element from the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a side. ++ ++ This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element. ++*/ ++void QCPMarginGroup::removeChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (!mChildren[side].removeOne(element)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is not child of this margin group side" << reinterpret_cast(element); ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLayoutElement ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLayoutElement ++ \brief The abstract base class for all objects that form \ref thelayoutsystem "the layout system". ++ ++ This is an abstract base class. As such, it can't be instantiated directly, rather use one of its subclasses. ++ ++ A Layout element is a rectangular object which can be placed in layouts. It has an outer rect ++ (QCPLayoutElement::outerRect) and an inner rect (\ref QCPLayoutElement::rect). The difference ++ between outer and inner rect is called its margin. The margin can either be set to automatic or ++ manual (\ref setAutoMargins) on a per-side basis. If a side is set to manual, that margin can be ++ set explicitly with \ref setMargins and will stay fixed at that value. If it's set to automatic, ++ the layout element subclass will control the value itself (via \ref calculateAutoMargin). ++ ++ Layout elements can be placed in layouts (base class QCPLayout) like QCPLayoutGrid. The top level ++ layout is reachable via \ref QCustomPlot::plotLayout, and is a \ref QCPLayoutGrid. Since \ref ++ QCPLayout itself derives from \ref QCPLayoutElement, layouts can be nested. ++ ++ Thus in QCustomPlot one can divide layout elements into two categories: The ones that are ++ invisible by themselves, because they don't draw anything. Their only purpose is to manage the ++ position and size of other layout elements. This category of layout elements usually use ++ QCPLayout as base class. Then there is the category of layout elements which actually draw ++ something. For example, QCPAxisRect, QCPLegend and QCPTextElement are of this category. This does ++ not necessarily mean that the latter category can't have child layout elements. QCPLegend for ++ instance, actually derives from QCPLayoutGrid and the individual legend items are child layout ++ elements in the grid layout. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPLayout *QCPLayoutElement::layout() const ++ ++ Returns the parent layout of this layout element. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QRect QCPLayoutElement::rect() const ++ ++ Returns the inner rect of this layout element. The inner rect is the outer rect (\ref ++ setOuterRect) shrunk by the margins (\ref setMargins, \ref setAutoMargins). ++ ++ In some cases, the area between outer and inner rect is left blank. In other cases the margin ++ area is used to display peripheral graphics while the main content is in the inner rect. This is ++ where automatic margin calculation becomes interesting because it allows the layout element to ++ adapt the margins to the peripheral graphics it wants to draw. For example, \ref QCPAxisRect ++ draws the axis labels and tick labels in the margin area, thus needs to adjust the margins (if ++ \ref setAutoMargins is enabled) according to the space required by the labels of the axes. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an instance of QCPLayoutElement and sets default values. ++*/ ++QCPLayoutElement::QCPLayoutElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPLayerable(parentPlot), // parenthood is changed as soon as layout element gets inserted into a layout (except for top level layout) ++ mParentLayout(0), ++ mMinimumSize(), ++ mMaximumSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX), ++ mRect(0, 0, 0, 0), ++ mOuterRect(0, 0, 0, 0), ++ mMargins(0, 0, 0, 0), ++ mMinimumMargins(0, 0, 0, 0), ++ mAutoMargins(QCP::msAll) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPLayoutElement::~QCPLayoutElement() ++{ ++ setMarginGroup(QCP::msAll, 0); // unregister at margin groups, if there are any ++ // unregister at layout: ++ if (qobject_cast(mParentLayout)) // the qobject_cast is just a safeguard in case the layout forgets to call clear() in its dtor and this dtor is called by QObject dtor ++ mParentLayout->take(this); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the outer rect of this layout element. If the layout element is inside a layout, the layout ++ sets the position and size of this layout element using this function. ++ ++ Calling this function externally has no effect, since the layout will overwrite any changes to ++ the outer rect upon the next replot. ++ ++ The layout element will adapt its inner \ref rect by applying the margins inward to the outer rect. ++ ++ \see rect ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect(const QRect &rect) ++{ ++ if (mOuterRect != rect) ++ { ++ mOuterRect = rect; ++ mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted(mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(), -mMargins.bottom()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the margins of this layout element. If \ref setAutoMargins is disabled for some or all ++ sides, this function is used to manually set the margin on those sides. Sides that are still set ++ to be handled automatically are ignored and may have any value in \a margins. ++ ++ The margin is the distance between the outer rect (controlled by the parent layout via \ref ++ setOuterRect) and the inner \ref rect (which usually contains the main content of this layout ++ element). ++ ++ \see setAutoMargins ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMargins(const QMargins &margins) ++{ ++ if (mMargins != margins) ++ { ++ mMargins = margins; ++ mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted(mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(), -mMargins.bottom()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If \ref setAutoMargins is enabled on some or all margins, this function is used to provide ++ minimum values for those margins. ++ ++ The minimum values are not enforced on margin sides that were set to be under manual control via ++ \ref setAutoMargins. ++ ++ \see setAutoMargins ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumMargins(const QMargins &margins) ++{ ++ if (mMinimumMargins != margins) ++ { ++ mMinimumMargins = margins; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets on which sides the margin shall be calculated automatically. If a side is calculated ++ automatically, a minimum margin value may be provided with \ref setMinimumMargins. If a side is ++ set to be controlled manually, the value may be specified with \ref setMargins. ++ ++ Margin sides that are under automatic control may participate in a \ref QCPMarginGroup (see \ref ++ setMarginGroup), to synchronize (align) it with other layout elements in the plot. ++ ++ \see setMinimumMargins, setMargins, QCP::MarginSide ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setAutoMargins(QCP::MarginSides sides) ++{ ++ mAutoMargins = sides; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the minimum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. A parent layout tries to ++ respect the \a size here by changing row/column sizes in the layout accordingly. ++ ++ If the parent layout size is not sufficient to satisfy all minimum size constraints of its child ++ layout elements, the layout may set a size that is actually smaller than \a size. QCustomPlot ++ propagates the layout's size constraints to the outside by setting its own minimum QWidget size ++ accordingly, so violations of \a size should be exceptions. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize(const QSize &size) ++{ ++ if (mMinimumSize != size) ++ { ++ mMinimumSize = size; ++ if (mParentLayout) ++ mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the minimum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize(int width, int height) ++{ ++ setMinimumSize(QSize(width, height)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the maximum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. A parent layout tries to ++ respect the \a size here by changing row/column sizes in the layout accordingly. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize(const QSize &size) ++{ ++ if (mMaximumSize != size) ++ { ++ mMaximumSize = size; ++ if (mParentLayout) ++ mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the maximum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize(int width, int height) ++{ ++ setMaximumSize(QSize(width, height)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the margin \a group of the specified margin \a sides. ++ ++ Margin groups allow synchronizing specified margins across layout elements, see the documentation ++ of \ref QCPMarginGroup. ++ ++ To unset the margin group of \a sides, set \a group to 0. ++ ++ Note that margin groups only work for margin sides that are set to automatic (\ref ++ setAutoMargins). ++ ++ \see QCP::MarginSide ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup(QCP::MarginSides sides, QCPMarginGroup *group) ++{ ++ QVector sideVector; ++ if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msLeft)) sideVector.append(QCP::msLeft); ++ if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msRight)) sideVector.append(QCP::msRight); ++ if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msTop)) sideVector.append(QCP::msTop); ++ if (sides.testFlag(QCP::msBottom)) sideVector.append(QCP::msBottom); ++ ++ for (int i=0; iremoveChild(side, this); ++ ++ if (!group) // if setting to 0, remove hash entry. Else set hash entry to new group and register there ++ { ++ mMarginGroups.remove(side); ++ } else // setting to a new group ++ { ++ mMarginGroups[side] = group; ++ group->addChild(side, this); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Updates the layout element and sub-elements. This function is automatically called before every ++ replot by the parent layout element. It is called multiple times, once for every \ref ++ UpdatePhase. The phases are run through in the order of the enum values. For details about what ++ happens at the different phases, see the documentation of \ref UpdatePhase. ++ ++ Layout elements that have child elements should call the \ref update method of their child ++ elements, and pass the current \a phase unchanged. ++ ++ The default implementation executes the automatic margin mechanism in the \ref upMargins phase. ++ Subclasses should make sure to call the base class implementation. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::update(UpdatePhase phase) ++{ ++ if (phase == upMargins) ++ { ++ if (mAutoMargins != QCP::msNone) ++ { ++ // set the margins of this layout element according to automatic margin calculation, either directly or via a margin group: ++ QMargins newMargins = mMargins; ++ QList allMarginSides = QList() << QCP::msLeft << QCP::msRight << QCP::msTop << QCP::msBottom; ++ foreach (QCP::MarginSide side, allMarginSides) ++ { ++ if (mAutoMargins.testFlag(side)) // this side's margin shall be calculated automatically ++ { ++ if (mMarginGroups.contains(side)) ++ QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, mMarginGroups[side]->commonMargin(side)); // this side is part of a margin group, so get the margin value from that group ++ else ++ QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, calculateAutoMargin(side)); // this side is not part of a group, so calculate the value directly ++ // apply minimum margin restrictions: ++ if (QCP::getMarginValue(newMargins, side) < QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side)) ++ QCP::setMarginValue(newMargins, side, QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side)); ++ } ++ } ++ setMargins(newMargins); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the minimum size this layout element (the inner \ref rect) may be compressed to. ++ ++ if a minimum size (\ref setMinimumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts consult this ++ function to determine the minimum allowed size of this layout element. (A manual minimum size is ++ considered set if it is non-zero.) ++*/ ++QSize QCPLayoutElement::minimumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ return mMinimumSize; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the maximum size this layout element (the inner \ref rect) may be expanded to. ++ ++ if a maximum size (\ref setMaximumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts consult this ++ function to determine the maximum allowed size of this layout element. (A manual maximum size is ++ considered set if it is smaller than Qt's QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.) ++*/ ++QSize QCPLayoutElement::maximumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ return mMaximumSize; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all child elements in this layout element. If \a recursive is true, all ++ sub-child elements are included in the list, too. ++ ++ \warning There may be entries with value 0 in the returned list. (For example, QCPLayoutGrid may have ++ empty cells which yield 0 at the respective index.) ++*/ ++QList QCPLayoutElement::elements(bool recursive) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(recursive) ++ return QList(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Layout elements are sensitive to events inside their outer rect. If \a pos is within the outer ++ rect, this method returns a value corresponding to 0.99 times the parent plot's selection ++ tolerance. However, layout elements are not selectable by default. So if \a onlySelectable is ++ true, -1.0 is returned. ++ ++ See \ref QCPLayerable::selectTest for a general explanation of this virtual method. ++ ++ QCPLayoutElement subclasses may reimplement this method to provide more specific selection test ++ behaviour. ++*/ ++double QCPLayoutElement::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ ++ if (onlySelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (QRectF(mOuterRect).contains(pos)) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot) ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "parent plot not defined"; ++ return -1; ++ } ++ } else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ propagates the parent plot initialization to all child elements, by calling \ref ++ QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on them. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) ++{ ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement* el, elements(false)) ++ { ++ if (!el->parentPlot()) ++ el->initializeParentPlot(parentPlot); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the margin size for this \a side. It is used if automatic margins is enabled for this \a ++ side (see \ref setAutoMargins). If a minimum margin was set with \ref setMinimumMargins, the ++ returned value will not be smaller than the specified minimum margin. ++ ++ The default implementation just returns the respective manual margin (\ref setMargins) or the ++ minimum margin, whichever is larger. ++*/ ++int QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) ++{ ++ return qMax(QCP::getMarginValue(mMargins, side), QCP::getMarginValue(mMinimumMargins, side)); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This virtual method is called when this layout element was moved to a different QCPLayout, or ++ when this layout element has changed its logical position (e.g. row and/or column) within the ++ same QCPLayout. Subclasses may use this to react accordingly. ++ ++ Since this method is called after the completion of the move, you can access the new parent ++ layout via \ref layout(). ++ ++ The default implementation does nothing. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutElement::layoutChanged() ++{ ++} ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLayout ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLayout ++ \brief The abstract base class for layouts ++ ++ This is an abstract base class for layout elements whose main purpose is to define the position ++ and size of other child layout elements. In most cases, layouts don't draw anything themselves ++ (but there are exceptions to this, e.g. QCPLegend). ++ ++ QCPLayout derives from QCPLayoutElement, and thus can itself be nested in other layouts. ++ ++ QCPLayout introduces a common interface for accessing and manipulating the child elements. Those ++ functions are most notably \ref elementCount, \ref elementAt, \ref takeAt, \ref take, \ref ++ simplify, \ref removeAt, \ref remove and \ref clear. Individual subclasses may add more functions ++ to this interface which are more specialized to the form of the layout. For example, \ref ++ QCPLayoutGrid adds functions that take row and column indices to access cells of the layout grid ++ more conveniently. ++ ++ Since this is an abstract base class, you can't instantiate it directly. Rather use one of its ++ subclasses like QCPLayoutGrid or QCPLayoutInset. ++ ++ For a general introduction to the layout system, see the dedicated documentation page \ref ++ thelayoutsystem "The Layout System". ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual int QCPLayout::elementCount() const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the number of elements/cells in the layout. ++ ++ \see elements, elementAt ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::elementAt(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the element in the cell with the given \a index. If \a index is invalid, returns 0. ++ ++ Note that even if \a index is valid, the respective cell may be empty in some layouts (e.g. ++ QCPLayoutGrid), so this function may return 0 in those cases. You may use this function to check ++ whether a cell is empty or not. ++ ++ \see elements, elementCount, takeAt ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::takeAt(int index) = 0 ++ ++ Removes the element with the given \a index from the layout and returns it. ++ ++ If the \a index is invalid or the cell with that index is empty, returns 0. ++ ++ Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an empty cell after ++ successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref simplify. ++ ++ \see elementAt, take ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual bool QCPLayout::take(QCPLayoutElement* element) = 0 ++ ++ Removes the specified \a element from the layout and returns true on success. ++ ++ If the \a element isn't in this layout, returns false. ++ ++ Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an empty cell after ++ successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref simplify. ++ ++ \see takeAt ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an instance of QCPLayout and sets default values. Note that since QCPLayout ++ is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated directly. ++*/ ++QCPLayout::QCPLayout() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ First calls the QCPLayoutElement::update base class implementation to update the margins on this ++ layout. ++ ++ Then calls \ref updateLayout which subclasses reimplement to reposition and resize their cells. ++ ++ Finally, \ref update is called on all child elements. ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::update(UpdatePhase phase) ++{ ++ QCPLayoutElement::update(phase); ++ ++ // set child element rects according to layout: ++ if (phase == upLayout) ++ updateLayout(); ++ ++ // propagate update call to child elements: ++ const int elCount = elementCount(); ++ for (int i=0; iupdate(phase); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QList QCPLayout::elements(bool recursive) const ++{ ++ const int c = elementCount(); ++ QList result; ++#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0) ++ result.reserve(c); ++#endif ++ for (int i=0; ielements(recursive); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Simplifies the layout by collapsing empty cells. The exact behavior depends on subclasses, the ++ default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ Not all layouts need simplification. For example, QCPLayoutInset doesn't use explicit ++ simplification while QCPLayoutGrid does. ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::simplify() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes and deletes the element at the provided \a index. Returns true on success. If \a index is ++ invalid or points to an empty cell, returns false. ++ ++ This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the layout and then deletes ++ the returned element. Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an ++ empty cell after successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref ++ simplify. ++ ++ \see remove, takeAt ++*/ ++bool QCPLayout::removeAt(int index) ++{ ++ if (QCPLayoutElement *el = takeAt(index)) ++ { ++ delete el; ++ return true; ++ } else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes and deletes the provided \a element. Returns true on success. If \a element is not in the ++ layout, returns false. ++ ++ This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the layout and then deletes ++ the element. Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave an ++ empty cell after successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref ++ simplify. ++ ++ \see removeAt, take ++*/ ++bool QCPLayout::remove(QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (take(element)) ++ { ++ delete element; ++ return true; ++ } else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes and deletes all layout elements in this layout. Finally calls \ref simplify to make sure ++ all empty cells are collapsed. ++ ++ \see remove, removeAt ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::clear() ++{ ++ for (int i=elementCount()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ { ++ if (elementAt(i)) ++ removeAt(i); ++ } ++ simplify(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Subclasses call this method to report changed (minimum/maximum) size constraints. ++ ++ If the parent of this layout is again a QCPLayout, forwards the call to the parent's \ref ++ sizeConstraintsChanged. If the parent is a QWidget (i.e. is the \ref QCustomPlot::plotLayout of ++ QCustomPlot), calls QWidget::updateGeometry, so if the QCustomPlot widget is inside a Qt QLayout, ++ it may update itself and resize cells accordingly. ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged() const ++{ ++ if (QWidget *w = qobject_cast(parent())) ++ w->updateGeometry(); ++ else if (QCPLayout *l = qobject_cast(parent())) ++ l->sizeConstraintsChanged(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Subclasses reimplement this method to update the position and sizes of the child elements/cells ++ via calling their \ref QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect. The default implementation does nothing. ++ ++ The geometry used as a reference is the inner \ref rect of this layout. Child elements should stay ++ within that rect. ++ ++ \ref getSectionSizes may help with the reimplementation of this function. ++ ++ \see update ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::updateLayout() ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Associates \a el with this layout. This is done by setting the \ref QCPLayoutElement::layout, the ++ \ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable and the QObject parent to this layout. ++ ++ Further, if \a el didn't previously have a parent plot, calls \ref ++ QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on \a el to set the parent plot. ++ ++ This method is used by subclass specific methods that add elements to the layout. Note that this ++ method only changes properties in \a el. The removal from the old layout and the insertion into ++ the new layout must be done additionally. ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::adoptElement(QCPLayoutElement *el) ++{ ++ if (el) ++ { ++ el->mParentLayout = this; ++ el->setParentLayerable(this); ++ el->setParent(this); ++ if (!el->parentPlot()) ++ el->initializeParentPlot(mParentPlot); ++ el->layoutChanged(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed"; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Disassociates \a el from this layout. This is done by setting the \ref QCPLayoutElement::layout ++ and the \ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable to zero. The QObject parent is set to the parent ++ QCustomPlot. ++ ++ This method is used by subclass specific methods that remove elements from the layout (e.g. \ref ++ take or \ref takeAt). Note that this method only changes properties in \a el. The removal from ++ the old layout must be done additionally. ++*/ ++void QCPLayout::releaseElement(QCPLayoutElement *el) ++{ ++ if (el) ++ { ++ el->mParentLayout = 0; ++ el->setParentLayerable(0); ++ el->setParent(mParentPlot); ++ // Note: Don't initializeParentPlot(0) here, because layout element will stay in same parent plot ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed"; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This is a helper function for the implementation of \ref updateLayout in subclasses. ++ ++ It calculates the sizes of one-dimensional sections with provided constraints on maximum section ++ sizes, minimum section sizes, relative stretch factors and the final total size of all sections. ++ ++ The QVector entries refer to the sections. Thus all QVectors must have the same size. ++ ++ \a maxSizes gives the maximum allowed size of each section. If there shall be no maximum size ++ imposed, set all vector values to Qt's QWIDGETSIZE_MAX. ++ ++ \a minSizes gives the minimum allowed size of each section. If there shall be no minimum size ++ imposed, set all vector values to zero. If the \a minSizes entries add up to a value greater than ++ \a totalSize, sections will be scaled smaller than the proposed minimum sizes. (In other words, ++ not exceeding the allowed total size is taken to be more important than not going below minimum ++ section sizes.) ++ ++ \a stretchFactors give the relative proportions of the sections to each other. If all sections ++ shall be scaled equally, set all values equal. If the first section shall be double the size of ++ each individual other section, set the first number of \a stretchFactors to double the value of ++ the other individual values (e.g. {2, 1, 1, 1}). ++ ++ \a totalSize is the value that the final section sizes will add up to. Due to rounding, the ++ actual sum may differ slightly. If you want the section sizes to sum up to exactly that value, ++ you could distribute the remaining difference on the sections. ++ ++ The return value is a QVector containing the section sizes. ++*/ ++QVector QCPLayout::getSectionSizes(QVector maxSizes, QVector minSizes, QVector stretchFactors, int totalSize) const ++{ ++ if (maxSizes.size() != minSizes.size() || minSizes.size() != stretchFactors.size()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed vector sizes aren't equal:" << maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors; ++ return QVector(); ++ } ++ if (stretchFactors.isEmpty()) ++ return QVector(); ++ int sectionCount = stretchFactors.size(); ++ QVector sectionSizes(sectionCount); ++ // if provided total size is forced smaller than total minimum size, ignore minimum sizes (squeeze sections): ++ int minSizeSum = 0; ++ for (int i=0; i minimumLockedSections; ++ QList unfinishedSections; ++ for (int i=0; i result(sectionCount); ++ for (int i=0; i= 0 && row < mElements.size()) ++ { ++ if (column >= 0 && column < mElements.first().size()) ++ { ++ if (QCPLayoutElement *result = mElements.at(row).at(column)) ++ return result; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Requested cell is empty. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the \a element to cell with \a row and \a column. If \a element is already in a layout, it ++ is first removed from there. If \a row or \a column don't exist yet, the layout is expanded ++ accordingly. ++ ++ Returns true if the element was added successfully, i.e. if the cell at \a row and \a column ++ didn't already have an element. ++ ++ Use the overload of this method without explicit row/column index to place the element according ++ to the configured fill order and wrapping settings. ++ ++ \see element, hasElement, take, remove ++*/ ++bool QCPLayoutGrid::addElement(int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (!hasElement(row, column)) ++ { ++ if (element && element->layout()) // remove from old layout first ++ element->layout()->take(element); ++ expandTo(row+1, column+1); ++ mElements[row][column] = element; ++ if (element) ++ adoptElement(element); ++ return true; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "There is already an element in the specified row/column:" << row << column; ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the \a element to the next empty cell according to the current fill order (\ref ++ setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap). If \a element is already in a layout, it is first ++ removed from there. If necessary, the layout is expanded to hold the new element. ++ ++ Returns true if the element was added successfully. ++ ++ \see setFillOrder, setWrap, element, hasElement, take, remove ++*/ ++bool QCPLayoutGrid::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ int rowIndex = 0; ++ int colIndex = 0; ++ if (mFillOrder == foColumnsFirst) ++ { ++ while (hasElement(rowIndex, colIndex)) ++ { ++ ++colIndex; ++ if (colIndex >= mWrap && mWrap > 0) ++ { ++ colIndex = 0; ++ ++rowIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ while (hasElement(rowIndex, colIndex)) ++ { ++ ++rowIndex; ++ if (rowIndex >= mWrap && mWrap > 0) ++ { ++ rowIndex = 0; ++ ++colIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return addElement(rowIndex, colIndex, element); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether the cell at \a row and \a column exists and contains a valid element, i.e. isn't ++ empty. ++ ++ \see element ++*/ ++bool QCPLayoutGrid::hasElement(int row, int column) ++{ ++ if (row >= 0 && row < rowCount() && column >= 0 && column < columnCount()) ++ return mElements.at(row).at(column); ++ else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the stretch \a factor of \a column. ++ ++ Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond ++ their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor. ++ ++ The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1. ++ ++ \see setColumnStretchFactors, setRowStretchFactor ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactor(int column, double factor) ++{ ++ if (column >= 0 && column < columnCount()) ++ { ++ if (factor > 0) ++ mColumnStretchFactors[column] = factor; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column:" << column; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the stretch \a factors of all columns. \a factors must have the size \ref columnCount. ++ ++ Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond ++ their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor. ++ ++ The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1. ++ ++ \see setColumnStretchFactor, setRowStretchFactors ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactors(const QList &factors) ++{ ++ if (factors.size() == mColumnStretchFactors.size()) ++ { ++ mColumnStretchFactors = factors; ++ for (int i=0; i= 0 && row < rowCount()) ++ { ++ if (factor > 0) ++ mRowStretchFactors[row] = factor; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row:" << row; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the stretch \a factors of all rows. \a factors must have the size \ref rowCount. ++ ++ Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not be resized beyond ++ their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor. ++ ++ The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1. ++ ++ \see setRowStretchFactor, setColumnStretchFactors ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowStretchFactors(const QList &factors) ++{ ++ if (factors.size() == mRowStretchFactors.size()) ++ { ++ mRowStretchFactors = factors; ++ for (int i=0; i tempElements; ++ if (rearrange) ++ { ++ tempElements.reserve(elCount); ++ for (int i=0; i()); ++ mRowStretchFactors.append(1); ++ } ++ // go through rows and expand columns as necessary: ++ int newColCount = qMax(columnCount(), newColumnCount); ++ for (int i=0; i rowCount()) ++ newIndex = rowCount(); ++ ++ mRowStretchFactors.insert(newIndex, 1); ++ QList newRow; ++ for (int col=0; col columnCount()) ++ newIndex = columnCount(); ++ ++ mColumnStretchFactors.insert(newIndex, 1); ++ for (int row=0; row= 0 && row < rowCount()) ++ { ++ if (column >= 0 && column < columnCount()) ++ { ++ switch (mFillOrder) ++ { ++ case foRowsFirst: return column*rowCount() + row; ++ case foColumnsFirst: return row*columnCount() + column; ++ } ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "row index out of bounds:" << row; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "column index out of bounds:" << column; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Converts the linear index to row and column indices and writes the result to \a row and \a ++ column. ++ ++ The way the cells are indexed depends on \ref setFillOrder. If it is \ref foRowsFirst, the ++ indices increase left to right and then top to bottom. If it is \ref foColumnsFirst, the indices ++ increase top to bottom and then left to right. ++ ++ If there are no cells (i.e. column or row count is zero), sets \a row and \a column to -1. ++ ++ For the retrieved \a row and \a column to be valid, the passed \a index must be valid itself, ++ i.e. greater or equal to zero and smaller than the current \ref elementCount. ++ ++ \see rowColToIndex ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::indexToRowCol(int index, int &row, int &column) const ++{ ++ row = -1; ++ column = -1; ++ if (columnCount() == 0 || rowCount() == 0) ++ return; ++ if (index < 0 || index >= elementCount()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ switch (mFillOrder) ++ { ++ case foRowsFirst: ++ { ++ column = index / rowCount(); ++ row = index % rowCount(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case foColumnsFirst: ++ { ++ row = index / columnCount(); ++ column = index % columnCount(); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::updateLayout() ++{ ++ QVector minColWidths, minRowHeights, maxColWidths, maxRowHeights; ++ getMinimumRowColSizes(&minColWidths, &minRowHeights); ++ getMaximumRowColSizes(&maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights); ++ ++ int totalRowSpacing = (rowCount()-1) * mRowSpacing; ++ int totalColSpacing = (columnCount()-1) * mColumnSpacing; ++ QVector colWidths = getSectionSizes(maxColWidths, minColWidths, mColumnStretchFactors.toVector(), mRect.width()-totalColSpacing); ++ QVector rowHeights = getSectionSizes(maxRowHeights, minRowHeights, mRowStretchFactors.toVector(), mRect.height()-totalRowSpacing); ++ ++ // go through cells and set rects accordingly: ++ int yOffset = mRect.top(); ++ for (int row=0; row 0) ++ yOffset += rowHeights.at(row-1)+mRowSpacing; ++ int xOffset = mRect.left(); ++ for (int col=0; col 0) ++ xOffset += colWidths.at(col-1)+mColumnSpacing; ++ if (mElements.at(row).at(col)) ++ mElements.at(row).at(col)->setOuterRect(QRect(xOffset, yOffset, colWidths.at(col), rowHeights.at(row))); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++ ++ Note that the association of the linear \a index to the row/column based cells depends on the ++ current setting of \ref setFillOrder. ++ ++ \see rowColToIndex ++*/ ++QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutGrid::elementAt(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < elementCount()) ++ { ++ int row, col; ++ indexToRowCol(index, row, col); ++ return mElements.at(row).at(col); ++ } else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++ ++ Note that the association of the linear \a index to the row/column based cells depends on the ++ current setting of \ref setFillOrder. ++ ++ \see rowColToIndex ++*/ ++QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutGrid::takeAt(int index) ++{ ++ if (QCPLayoutElement *el = elementAt(index)) ++ { ++ releaseElement(el); ++ int row, col; ++ indexToRowCol(index, row, col); ++ mElements[row][col] = 0; ++ return el; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++bool QCPLayoutGrid::take(QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (element) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i QCPLayoutGrid::elements(bool recursive) const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ const int elCount = elementCount(); ++#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0) ++ result.reserve(elCount); ++#endif ++ for (int i=0; ielements(recursive); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Simplifies the layout by collapsing rows and columns which only contain empty cells. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::simplify() ++{ ++ // remove rows with only empty cells: ++ for (int row=rowCount()-1; row>=0; --row) ++ { ++ bool hasElements = false; ++ for (int col=0; col=0; --col) ++ { ++ bool hasElements = false; ++ for (int row=0; row minColWidths, minRowHeights; ++ getMinimumRowColSizes(&minColWidths, &minRowHeights); ++ QSize result(0, 0); ++ for (int i=0; i maxColWidths, maxRowHeights; ++ getMaximumRowColSizes(&maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights); ++ ++ QSize result(0, 0); ++ for (int i=0; i *minColWidths, QVector *minRowHeights) const ++{ ++ *minColWidths = QVector(columnCount(), 0); ++ *minRowHeights = QVector(rowCount(), 0); ++ for (int row=0; rowminimumSizeHint(); ++ QSize min = mElements.at(row).at(col)->minimumSize(); ++ QSize final(min.width() > 0 ? min.width() : minHint.width(), min.height() > 0 ? min.height() : minHint.height()); ++ if (minColWidths->at(col) < final.width()) ++ (*minColWidths)[col] = final.width(); ++ if (minRowHeights->at(row) < final.height()) ++ (*minRowHeights)[row] = final.height(); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Places the maximum column widths and row heights into \a maxColWidths and \a maxRowHeights ++ respectively. ++ ++ The maximum height of a row is the smallest maximum height of any element in that row. The ++ maximum width of a column is the smallest maximum width of any element in that column. ++ ++ This is a helper function for \ref updateLayout. ++ ++ \see getMinimumRowColSizes ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutGrid::getMaximumRowColSizes(QVector *maxColWidths, QVector *maxRowHeights) const ++{ ++ *maxColWidths = QVector(columnCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX); ++ *maxRowHeights = QVector(rowCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX); ++ for (int row=0; rowmaximumSizeHint(); ++ QSize max = mElements.at(row).at(col)->maximumSize(); ++ QSize final(max.width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? max.width() : maxHint.width(), max.height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? max.height() : maxHint.height()); ++ if (maxColWidths->at(col) > final.width()) ++ (*maxColWidths)[col] = final.width(); ++ if (maxRowHeights->at(row) > final.height()) ++ (*maxRowHeights)[row] = final.height(); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLayoutInset ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPLayoutInset ++ \brief A layout that places child elements aligned to the border or arbitrarily positioned ++ ++ Elements are placed either aligned to the border or at arbitrary position in the area of the ++ layout. Which placement applies is controlled with the \ref InsetPlacement (\ref ++ setInsetPlacement). ++ ++ Elements are added via \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment) or ++ addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect). If the first method is used, the inset ++ placement will default to \ref ipBorderAligned and the element will be aligned according to the ++ \a alignment parameter. The second method defaults to \ref ipFree and allows placing elements at ++ arbitrary position and size, defined by \a rect. ++ ++ The alignment or rect can be set via \ref setInsetAlignment or \ref setInsetRect, respectively. ++ ++ This is the layout that every QCPAxisRect has as \ref QCPAxisRect::insetLayout. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutInset::simplify() ++ ++ The QCPInsetLayout does not need simplification since it can never have empty cells due to its ++ linear index structure. This method does nothing. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an instance of QCPLayoutInset and sets default values. ++*/ ++QCPLayoutInset::QCPLayoutInset() ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPLayoutInset::~QCPLayoutInset() ++{ ++ // clear all child layout elements. This is important because only the specific layouts know how ++ // to handle removing elements (clear calls virtual removeAt method to do that). ++ clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the placement type of the element with the specified \a index. ++*/ ++QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement QCPLayoutInset::insetPlacement(int index) const ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ return mInsetPlacement.at(index); ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++ return ipFree; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the alignment of the element with the specified \a index. The alignment only has a ++ meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipBorderAligned. ++*/ ++Qt::Alignment QCPLayoutInset::insetAlignment(int index) const ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ return mInsetAlignment.at(index); ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the rect of the element with the specified \a index. The rect only has a ++ meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree. ++*/ ++QRectF QCPLayoutInset::insetRect(int index) const ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ return mInsetRect.at(index); ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++ return QRectF(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the inset placement type of the element with the specified \a index to \a placement. ++ ++ \see InsetPlacement ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetPlacement(int index, QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement placement) ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ mInsetPlacement[index] = placement; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipBorderAligned, this function ++ is used to set the alignment of the element with the specified \a index to \a alignment. ++ ++ \a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags: Qt::AlignLeft, ++ Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter, Qt::AlignBottom. Any other ++ alignment flags will be ignored. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetAlignment(int index, Qt::Alignment alignment) ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ mInsetAlignment[index] = alignment; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree, this function is used to set the ++ position and size of the element with the specified \a index to \a rect. ++ ++ \a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with rect (0, 0, 1, 1) ++ will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be in the top right ++ corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout. ++ ++ Note that the minimum and maximum sizes of the embedded element (\ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize) are enforced. ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetRect(int index, const QRectF &rect) ++{ ++ if (elementAt(index)) ++ mInsetRect[index] = rect; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPLayoutInset::updateLayout() ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iminimumSizeHint(); ++ QSize maxSizeHint = mElements.at(i)->maximumSizeHint(); ++ finalMinSize.setWidth(mElements.at(i)->minimumSize().width() > 0 ? mElements.at(i)->minimumSize().width() : minSizeHint.width()); ++ finalMinSize.setHeight(mElements.at(i)->minimumSize().height() > 0 ? mElements.at(i)->minimumSize().height() : minSizeHint.height()); ++ finalMaxSize.setWidth(mElements.at(i)->maximumSize().width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? mElements.at(i)->maximumSize().width() : maxSizeHint.width()); ++ finalMaxSize.setHeight(mElements.at(i)->maximumSize().height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? mElements.at(i)->maximumSize().height() : maxSizeHint.height()); ++ if (mInsetPlacement.at(i) == ipFree) ++ { ++ insetRect = QRect(rect().x()+rect().width()*mInsetRect.at(i).x(), ++ rect().y()+rect().height()*mInsetRect.at(i).y(), ++ rect().width()*mInsetRect.at(i).width(), ++ rect().height()*mInsetRect.at(i).height()); ++ if (insetRect.size().width() < finalMinSize.width()) ++ insetRect.setWidth(finalMinSize.width()); ++ if (insetRect.size().height() < finalMinSize.height()) ++ insetRect.setHeight(finalMinSize.height()); ++ if (insetRect.size().width() > finalMaxSize.width()) ++ insetRect.setWidth(finalMaxSize.width()); ++ if (insetRect.size().height() > finalMaxSize.height()) ++ insetRect.setHeight(finalMaxSize.height()); ++ } else if (mInsetPlacement.at(i) == ipBorderAligned) ++ { ++ insetRect.setSize(finalMinSize); ++ Qt::Alignment al = mInsetAlignment.at(i); ++ if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignLeft)) insetRect.moveLeft(rect().x()); ++ else if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignRight)) insetRect.moveRight(rect().x()+rect().width()); ++ else insetRect.moveLeft(rect().x()+rect().width()*0.5-finalMinSize.width()*0.5); // default to Qt::AlignHCenter ++ if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignTop)) insetRect.moveTop(rect().y()); ++ else if (al.testFlag(Qt::AlignBottom)) insetRect.moveBottom(rect().y()+rect().height()); ++ else insetRect.moveTop(rect().y()+rect().height()*0.5-finalMinSize.height()*0.5); // default to Qt::AlignVCenter ++ } ++ mElements.at(i)->setOuterRect(insetRect); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++int QCPLayoutInset::elementCount() const ++{ ++ return mElements.size(); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutInset::elementAt(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mElements.size()) ++ return mElements.at(index); ++ else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPLayoutElement *QCPLayoutInset::takeAt(int index) ++{ ++ if (QCPLayoutElement *el = elementAt(index)) ++ { ++ releaseElement(el); ++ mElements.removeAt(index); ++ mInsetPlacement.removeAt(index); ++ mInsetAlignment.removeAt(index); ++ mInsetRect.removeAt(index); ++ return el; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++bool QCPLayoutInset::take(QCPLayoutElement *element) ++{ ++ if (element) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; irealVisibility() && mElements.at(i)->selectTest(pos, onlySelectable) >= 0) ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset aligned at the border (\ref ++ setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipBorderAligned). The alignment is set to \a ++ alignment. ++ ++ \a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags: Qt::AlignLeft, ++ Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter, Qt::AlignBottom. Any other ++ alignment flags will be ignored. ++ ++ \see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect) ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutInset::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment) ++{ ++ if (element) ++ { ++ if (element->layout()) // remove from old layout first ++ element->layout()->take(element); ++ mElements.append(element); ++ mInsetPlacement.append(ipBorderAligned); ++ mInsetAlignment.append(alignment); ++ mInsetRect.append(QRectF(0.6, 0.6, 0.4, 0.4)); ++ adoptElement(element); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add null element"; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset with free positioning/sizing (\ref ++ setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipFree). The position and size is set to \a ++ rect. ++ ++ \a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with rect (0, 0, 1, 1) ++ will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be in the top right ++ corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout. ++ ++ \see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment) ++*/ ++void QCPLayoutInset::addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect) ++{ ++ if (element) ++ { ++ if (element->layout()) // remove from old layout first ++ element->layout()->take(element); ++ mElements.append(element); ++ mInsetPlacement.append(ipFree); ++ mInsetAlignment.append(Qt::AlignRight|Qt::AlignTop); ++ mInsetRect.append(rect); ++ adoptElement(element); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add null element"; ++} ++/* end of 'src/layout.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/lineending.cpp', size 11536 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLineEnding ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLineEnding ++ \brief Handles the different ending decorations for line-like items ++ ++ \image html QCPLineEnding.png "The various ending styles currently supported" ++ ++ For every ending a line-like item has, an instance of this class exists. For example, QCPItemLine ++ has two endings which can be set with QCPItemLine::setHead and QCPItemLine::setTail. ++ ++ The styles themselves are defined via the enum QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle. Most decorations can ++ be modified regarding width and length, see \ref setWidth and \ref setLength. The direction of ++ the ending decoration (e.g. direction an arrow is pointing) is controlled by the line-like item. ++ For example, when both endings of a QCPItemLine are set to be arrows, they will point to opposite ++ directions, e.g. "outward". This can be changed by \ref setInverted, which would make the ++ respective arrow point inward. ++ ++ Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify a ++ QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle where actually a QCPLineEnding is expected, e.g. ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcplineending-sethead ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with default values (style \ref esNone). ++*/ ++QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding() : ++ mStyle(esNone), ++ mWidth(8), ++ mLength(10), ++ mInverted(false) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with the specified values. ++*/ ++QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style, double width, double length, bool inverted) : ++ mStyle(style), ++ mWidth(width), ++ mLength(length), ++ mInverted(inverted) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the style of the ending decoration. ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::setStyle(QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style) ++{ ++ mStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows, for example, the ++ width defines the size perpendicular to the arrow's pointing direction. ++ ++ \see setLength ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::setWidth(double width) ++{ ++ mWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows, for example, the ++ length defines the size in pointing direction. ++ ++ \see setWidth ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::setLength(double length) ++{ ++ mLength = length; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the ending decoration shall be inverted. For example, an arrow decoration will point ++ inward when \a inverted is set to true. ++ ++ Note that also the \a width direction is inverted. For symmetrical ending styles like arrows or ++ discs, this doesn't make a difference. However, asymmetric styles like \ref esHalfBar are ++ affected by it, which can be used to control to which side the half bar points to. ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::setInverted(bool inverted) ++{ ++ mInverted = inverted; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the maximum pixel radius the ending decoration might cover, starting from the position ++ the decoration is drawn at (typically a line ending/\ref QCPItemPosition of an item). ++ ++ This is relevant for clipping. Only omit painting of the decoration when the position where the ++ decoration is supposed to be drawn is farther away from the clipping rect than the returned ++ distance. ++*/ ++double QCPLineEnding::boundingDistance() const ++{ ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case esNone: ++ return 0; ++ ++ case esFlatArrow: ++ case esSpikeArrow: ++ case esLineArrow: ++ case esSkewedBar: ++ return qSqrt(mWidth*mWidth+mLength*mLength); // items that have width and length ++ ++ case esDisc: ++ case esSquare: ++ case esDiamond: ++ case esBar: ++ case esHalfBar: ++ return mWidth*1.42; // items that only have a width -> width*sqrt(2) ++ ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Starting from the origin of this line ending (which is style specific), returns the length ++ covered by the line ending symbol, in backward direction. ++ ++ For example, the \ref esSpikeArrow has a shorter real length than a \ref esFlatArrow, even if ++ both have the same \ref setLength value, because the spike arrow has an inward curved back, which ++ reduces the length along its center axis (the drawing origin for arrows is at the tip). ++ ++ This function is used for precise, style specific placement of line endings, for example in ++ QCPAxes. ++*/ ++double QCPLineEnding::realLength() const ++{ ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case esNone: ++ case esLineArrow: ++ case esSkewedBar: ++ case esBar: ++ case esHalfBar: ++ return 0; ++ ++ case esFlatArrow: ++ return mLength; ++ ++ case esDisc: ++ case esSquare: ++ case esDiamond: ++ return mWidth*0.5; ++ ++ case esSpikeArrow: ++ return mLength*0.8; ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the line ending with the specified \a painter at the position \a pos. The direction of the ++ line ending is controlled with \a dir. ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, const QCPVector2D &dir) const ++{ ++ if (mStyle == esNone) ++ return; ++ ++ QCPVector2D lengthVec = dir.normalized() * mLength*(mInverted ? -1 : 1); ++ if (lengthVec.isNull()) ++ lengthVec = QCPVector2D(1, 0); ++ QCPVector2D widthVec = dir.normalized().perpendicular() * mWidth*0.5*(mInverted ? -1 : 1); ++ ++ QPen penBackup = painter->pen(); ++ QBrush brushBackup = painter->brush(); ++ QPen miterPen = penBackup; ++ miterPen.setJoinStyle(Qt::MiterJoin); // to make arrow heads spikey ++ QBrush brush(painter->pen().color(), Qt::SolidPattern); ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case esNone: break; ++ case esFlatArrow: ++ { ++ QPointF points[3] = {pos.toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF() ++ }; ++ painter->setPen(miterPen); ++ painter->setBrush(brush); ++ painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 3); ++ painter->setBrush(brushBackup); ++ painter->setPen(penBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esSpikeArrow: ++ { ++ QPointF points[4] = {pos.toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF() ++ }; ++ painter->setPen(miterPen); ++ painter->setBrush(brush); ++ painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4); ++ painter->setBrush(brushBackup); ++ painter->setPen(penBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esLineArrow: ++ { ++ QPointF points[3] = {(pos-lengthVec+widthVec).toPointF(), ++ pos.toPointF(), ++ (pos-lengthVec-widthVec).toPointF() ++ }; ++ painter->setPen(miterPen); ++ painter->drawPolyline(points, 3); ++ painter->setPen(penBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esDisc: ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(brush); ++ painter->drawEllipse(pos.toPointF(), mWidth*0.5, mWidth*0.5); ++ painter->setBrush(brushBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esSquare: ++ { ++ QCPVector2D widthVecPerp = widthVec.perpendicular(); ++ QPointF points[4] = {(pos-widthVecPerp+widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos-widthVecPerp-widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos+widthVecPerp-widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos+widthVecPerp+widthVec).toPointF() ++ }; ++ painter->setPen(miterPen); ++ painter->setBrush(brush); ++ painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4); ++ painter->setBrush(brushBackup); ++ painter->setPen(penBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esDiamond: ++ { ++ QCPVector2D widthVecPerp = widthVec.perpendicular(); ++ QPointF points[4] = {(pos-widthVecPerp).toPointF(), ++ (pos-widthVec).toPointF(), ++ (pos+widthVecPerp).toPointF(), ++ (pos+widthVec).toPointF() ++ }; ++ painter->setPen(miterPen); ++ painter->setBrush(brush); ++ painter->drawConvexPolygon(points, 4); ++ painter->setBrush(brushBackup); ++ painter->setPen(penBackup); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esBar: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec).toPointF(), (pos-widthVec).toPointF()); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esHalfBar: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec).toPointF(), pos.toPointF()); ++ break; ++ } ++ case esSkewedBar: ++ { ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull(painter->pen().widthF()) && !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic)) ++ { ++ // if drawing with cosmetic pen (perfectly thin stroke, happens only in vector exports), draw bar exactly on tip of line ++ painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec+lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)).toPointF(), ++ (pos-widthVec-lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)).toPointF()); ++ } else ++ { ++ // if drawing with thick (non-cosmetic) pen, shift bar a little in line direction to prevent line from sticking through bar slightly ++ painter->drawLine((pos+widthVec+lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)+dir.normalized()*qMax(1.0f, (float)painter->pen().widthF())*0.5f).toPointF(), ++ (pos-widthVec-lengthVec*0.2*(mInverted?-1:1)+dir.normalized()*qMax(1.0f, (float)painter->pen().widthF())*0.5f).toPointF()); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ \overload ++ ++ Draws the line ending. The direction is controlled with the \a angle parameter in radians. ++*/ ++void QCPLineEnding::draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, double angle) const ++{ ++ draw(painter, pos, QCPVector2D(qCos(angle), qSin(angle))); ++} ++/* end of 'src/lineending.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axisticker.cpp', size 18664 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTicker ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTicker ++ \brief The base class tick generator used by QCPAxis to create tick positions and tick labels ++ ++ Each QCPAxis has an internal QCPAxisTicker (or a subclass) in order to generate tick positions ++ and tick labels for the current axis range. The ticker of an axis can be set via \ref ++ QCPAxis::setTicker. Since that method takes a QSharedPointer, multiple ++ axes can share the same ticker instance. ++ ++ This base class generates normal tick coordinates and numeric labels for linear axes. It picks a ++ reasonable tick step (the separation between ticks) which results in readable tick labels. The ++ number of ticks that should be approximately generated can be set via \ref setTickCount. ++ Depending on the current tick step strategy (\ref setTickStepStrategy), the algorithm either ++ sacrifices readability to better match the specified tick count (\ref ++ QCPAxisTicker::tssMeetTickCount) or relaxes the tick count in favor of better tick steps (\ref ++ QCPAxisTicker::tssReadability), which is the default. ++ ++ The following more specialized axis ticker subclasses are available, see details in the ++ respective class documentation: ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
QCPAxisTickerFixed\image html axisticker-fixed.png
QCPAxisTickerLog\image html axisticker-log.png
QCPAxisTickerPi\image html axisticker-pi.png
QCPAxisTickerText\image html axisticker-text.png
QCPAxisTickerDateTime\image html axisticker-datetime.png
QCPAxisTickerTime\image html axisticker-time.png ++ \image html axisticker-time2.png
++
++ ++ \section axisticker-subclassing Creating own axis tickers ++ ++ Creating own axis tickers can be achieved very easily by sublassing QCPAxisTicker and ++ reimplementing some or all of the available virtual methods. ++ ++ In the simplest case you might wish to just generate different tick steps than the other tickers, ++ so you only reimplement the method \ref getTickStep. If you additionally want control over the ++ string that will be shown as tick label, reimplement \ref getTickLabel. ++ ++ If you wish to have complete control, you can generate the tick vectors and tick label vectors ++ yourself by reimplementing \ref createTickVector and \ref createLabelVector. The default ++ implementations use the previously mentioned virtual methods \ref getTickStep and \ref ++ getTickLabel, but your reimplementations don't necessarily need to do so. For example in the case ++ of unequal tick steps, the method \ref getTickStep loses its usefulness and can be ignored. ++ ++ The sub tick count between major ticks can be controlled with \ref getSubTickCount. Full sub tick ++ placement control is obtained by reimplementing \ref createSubTickVector. ++ ++ See the documentation of all these virtual methods in QCPAxisTicker for detailed information ++ about the parameters and expected return values. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTicker::QCPAxisTicker() : ++ mTickStepStrategy(tssReadability), ++ mTickCount(5), ++ mTickOrigin(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPAxisTicker::~QCPAxisTicker() ++{ ++ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which strategy the axis ticker follows when choosing the size of the tick step. For the ++ available strategies, see \ref TickStepStrategy. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTicker::setTickStepStrategy(QCPAxisTicker::TickStepStrategy strategy) ++{ ++ mTickStepStrategy = strategy; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how many ticks this ticker shall aim to generate across the axis range. Note that \a count ++ is not guaranteed to be matched exactly, as generating readable tick intervals may conflict with ++ the requested number of ticks. ++ ++ Whether the readability has priority over meeting the requested \a count can be specified with ++ \ref setTickStepStrategy. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount(int count) ++{ ++ if (count > 0) ++ mTickCount = count; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "tick count must be greater than zero:" << count; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the mathematical coordinate (or "offset") of the zeroth tick. This tick coordinate is just a ++ concept and doesn't need to be inside the currently visible axis range. ++ ++ By default \a origin is zero, which for example yields ticks {-5, 0, 5, 10, 15,...} when the tick ++ step is five. If \a origin is now set to 1 instead, the correspondingly generated ticks would be ++ {-4, 1, 6, 11, 16,...}. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin(double origin) ++{ ++ mTickOrigin = origin; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This is the method called by QCPAxis in order to actually generate tick coordinates (\a ticks), ++ tick label strings (\a tickLabels) and sub tick coordinates (\a subTicks). ++ ++ The ticks are generated for the specified \a range. The generated labels typically follow the ++ specified \a locale, \a formatChar and number \a precision, however this might be different (or ++ even irrelevant) for certain QCPAxisTicker subclasses. ++ ++ The output parameter \a ticks is filled with the generated tick positions in axis coordinates. ++ The output parameters \a subTicks and \a tickLabels are optional (set them to 0 if not needed) ++ and are respectively filled with sub tick coordinates, and tick label strings belonging to \a ++ ticks by index. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTicker::generate(const QCPRange &range, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision, QVector &ticks, QVector *subTicks, QVector *tickLabels) ++{ ++ // generate (major) ticks: ++ double tickStep = getTickStep(range); ++ ticks = createTickVector(tickStep, range); ++ trimTicks(range, ticks, true); // trim ticks to visible range plus one outer tick on each side (in case a subclass createTickVector creates more) ++ ++ // generate sub ticks between major ticks: ++ if (subTicks) ++ { ++ if (ticks.size() > 0) ++ { ++ *subTicks = createSubTickVector(getSubTickCount(tickStep), ticks); ++ trimTicks(range, *subTicks, false); ++ } else ++ *subTicks = QVector(); ++ } ++ ++ // finally trim also outliers (no further clipping happens in axis drawing): ++ trimTicks(range, ticks, false); ++ // generate labels for visible ticks if requested: ++ if (tickLabels) ++ *tickLabels = createLabelVector(ticks, locale, formatChar, precision); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes the entire currently visible axis range and returns a sensible tick step in ++ order to provide readable tick labels as well as a reasonable number of tick counts (see \ref ++ setTickCount, \ref setTickStepStrategy). ++ ++ If a QCPAxisTicker subclass only wants a different tick step behaviour than the default ++ implementation, it should reimplement this method. See \ref cleanMantissa for a possible helper ++ function. ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTicker::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ double exactStep = range.size()/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ return cleanMantissa(exactStep); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes the \a tickStep, i.e. the distance between two consecutive ticks, and returns ++ an appropriate number of sub ticks for that specific tick step. ++ ++ Note that a returned sub tick count of e.g. 4 will split each tick interval into 5 sections. ++*/ ++int QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(double tickStep) ++{ ++ int result = 1; // default to 1, if no proper value can be found ++ ++ // separate integer and fractional part of mantissa: ++ double epsilon = 0.01; ++ double intPartf; ++ int intPart; ++ double fracPart = modf(getMantissa(tickStep), &intPartf); ++ intPart = intPartf; ++ ++ // handle cases with (almost) integer mantissa: ++ if (fracPart < epsilon || 1.0-fracPart < epsilon) ++ { ++ if (1.0-fracPart < epsilon) ++ ++intPart; ++ switch (intPart) ++ { ++ case 1: result = 4; break; // 1.0 -> 0.2 substep ++ case 2: result = 3; break; // 2.0 -> 0.5 substep ++ case 3: result = 2; break; // 3.0 -> 1.0 substep ++ case 4: result = 3; break; // 4.0 -> 1.0 substep ++ case 5: result = 4; break; // 5.0 -> 1.0 substep ++ case 6: result = 2; break; // 6.0 -> 2.0 substep ++ case 7: result = 6; break; // 7.0 -> 1.0 substep ++ case 8: result = 3; break; // 8.0 -> 2.0 substep ++ case 9: result = 2; break; // 9.0 -> 3.0 substep ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ // handle cases with significantly fractional mantissa: ++ if (qAbs(fracPart-0.5) < epsilon) // *.5 mantissa ++ { ++ switch (intPart) ++ { ++ case 1: result = 2; break; // 1.5 -> 0.5 substep ++ case 2: result = 4; break; // 2.5 -> 0.5 substep ++ case 3: result = 4; break; // 3.5 -> 0.7 substep ++ case 4: result = 2; break; // 4.5 -> 1.5 substep ++ case 5: result = 4; break; // 5.5 -> 1.1 substep (won't occur with default getTickStep from here on) ++ case 6: result = 4; break; // 6.5 -> 1.3 substep ++ case 7: result = 2; break; // 7.5 -> 2.5 substep ++ case 8: result = 4; break; // 8.5 -> 1.7 substep ++ case 9: result = 4; break; // 9.5 -> 1.9 substep ++ } ++ } ++ // if mantissa fraction isn't 0.0 or 0.5, don't bother finding good sub tick marks, leave default ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method returns the tick label string as it should be printed under the \a tick coordinate. ++ If a textual number is returned, it should respect the provided \a locale, \a formatChar and \a ++ precision. ++ ++ If the returned value contains exponentials of the form "2e5" and beautifully typeset powers is ++ enabled in the QCPAxis number format (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberFormat), the exponential part will ++ be formatted accordingly using multiplication symbol and superscript during rendering of the ++ label automatically. ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTicker::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) ++{ ++ return locale.toString(tick, formatChar.toLatin1(), precision); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a vector containing all coordinates of sub ticks that should be drawn. It generates \a ++ subTickCount sub ticks between each tick pair given in \a ticks. ++ ++ If a QCPAxisTicker subclass needs maximal control over the generated sub ticks, it should ++ reimplement this method. Depending on the purpose of the subclass it doesn't necessarily need to ++ base its result on \a subTickCount or \a ticks. ++*/ ++QVector QCPAxisTicker::createSubTickVector(int subTickCount, const QVector &ticks) ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ if (subTickCount <= 0 || ticks.size() < 2) ++ return result; ++ ++ result.reserve((ticks.size()-1)*subTickCount); ++ for (int i=1; i QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ // Generate tick positions according to tickStep: ++ qint64 firstStep = floor((range.lower-mTickOrigin)/tickStep); // do not use qFloor here, or we'll lose 64 bit precision ++ qint64 lastStep = ceil((range.upper-mTickOrigin)/tickStep); // do not use qCeil here, or we'll lose 64 bit precision ++ int tickcount = lastStep-firstStep+1; ++ if (tickcount < 0) tickcount = 0; ++ result.resize(tickcount); ++ for (int i=0; i QCPAxisTicker::createLabelVector(const QVector &ticks, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ result.reserve(ticks.size()); ++ for (int i=0; i &ticks, bool keepOneOutlier) const ++{ ++ bool lowFound = false; ++ bool highFound = false; ++ int lowIndex = 0; ++ int highIndex = -1; ++ ++ for (int i=0; i < ticks.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (ticks.at(i) >= range.lower) ++ { ++ lowFound = true; ++ lowIndex = i; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ for (int i=ticks.size()-1; i >= 0; --i) ++ { ++ if (ticks.at(i) <= range.upper) ++ { ++ highFound = true; ++ highIndex = i; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (highFound && lowFound) ++ { ++ int trimFront = qMax(0, lowIndex-(keepOneOutlier ? 1 : 0)); ++ int trimBack = qMax(0, ticks.size()-(keepOneOutlier ? 2 : 1)-highIndex); ++ if (trimFront > 0 || trimBack > 0) ++ ticks = ticks.mid(trimFront, ticks.size()-trimFront-trimBack); ++ } else // all ticks are either all below or all above the range ++ ticks.clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the coordinate contained in \a candidates which is closest to the provided \a target. ++ ++ This method assumes \a candidates is not empty and sorted in ascending order. ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTicker::pickClosest(double target, const QVector &candidates) const ++{ ++ if (candidates.size() == 1) ++ return candidates.first(); ++ QVector::const_iterator it = std::lower_bound(candidates.constBegin(), candidates.constEnd(), target); ++ if (it == candidates.constEnd()) ++ return *(it-1); ++ else if (it == candidates.constBegin()) ++ return *it; ++ else ++ return target-*(it-1) < *it-target ? *(it-1) : *it; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the decimal mantissa of \a input. Optionally, if \a magnitude is not set to zero, it also ++ returns the magnitude of \a input as a power of 10. ++ ++ For example, an input of 142.6 will return a mantissa of 1.426 and a magnitude of 100. ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTicker::getMantissa(double input, double *magnitude) const ++{ ++ const double mag = qPow(10.0, qFloor(qLn(input)/qLn(10.0))); ++ if (magnitude) *magnitude = mag; ++ return input/mag; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a number that is close to \a input but has a clean, easier human readable mantissa. How ++ strongly the mantissa is altered, and thus how strong the result deviates from the original \a ++ input, depends on the current tick step strategy (see \ref setTickStepStrategy). ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTicker::cleanMantissa(double input) const ++{ ++ double magnitude; ++ const double mantissa = getMantissa(input, &magnitude); ++ switch (mTickStepStrategy) ++ { ++ case tssReadability: ++ { ++ return pickClosest(mantissa, QVector() << 1.0 << 2.0 << 2.5 << 5.0 << 10.0)*magnitude; ++ } ++ case tssMeetTickCount: ++ { ++ // this gives effectively a mantissa of 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 ++ if (mantissa <= 5.0) ++ return (int)(mantissa*2)/2.0*magnitude; // round digit after decimal point to 0.5 ++ else ++ return (int)(mantissa/2.0)*2.0*magnitude; // round to first digit in multiples of 2 ++ } ++ } ++ return input; ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axisticker.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.cpp', size 14443 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerDateTime ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerDateTime ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker for calendar dates and times as axis ticks ++ ++ \image html axisticker-datetime.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that correspond to real calendar dates and times. The ++ plot axis coordinate is interpreted as Unix Time, so seconds since Epoch (January 1, 1970, 00:00 ++ UTC). This is also used for example by QDateTime in the toTime_t()/setTime_t() methods ++ with a precision of one second. Since Qt 4.7, millisecond accuracy can be obtained from QDateTime ++ by using QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0. The static methods \ref dateTimeToKey ++ and \ref keyToDateTime conveniently perform this conversion achieving a precision of one ++ millisecond on all Qt versions. ++ ++ The format of the date/time display in the tick labels is controlled with \ref setDateTimeFormat. ++ If a different time spec (time zone) shall be used, see \ref setDateTimeSpec. ++ ++ This ticker produces unequal tick spacing in order to provide intuitive date and time-of-day ++ ticks. For example, if the axis range spans a few years such that there is one tick per year, ++ ticks will be positioned on 1. January of every year. This is intuitive but, due to leap years, ++ will result in slightly unequal tick intervals (visually unnoticeable). The same can be seen in ++ the image above: even though the number of days varies month by month, this ticker generates ++ ticks on the same day of each month. ++ ++ If you would like to change the date/time that is used as a (mathematical) starting date for the ++ ticks, use the \ref setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin) method overload, which takes a ++ QDateTime. If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method, the yearly ticks will end up on 15. July at ++ 9:45 of every year. ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerdatetime-creation ++ ++ \note If you rather wish to display relative times in terms of days, hours, minutes, seconds and ++ milliseconds, and are not interested in the intricacies of real calendar dates with months and ++ (leap) years, have a look at QCPAxisTickerTime instead. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerDateTime::QCPAxisTickerDateTime() : ++ mDateTimeFormat(QLatin1String("hh:mm:ss\ndd.MM.yy")), ++ mDateTimeSpec(Qt::LocalTime), ++ mDateStrategy(dsNone) ++{ ++ setTickCount(4); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the format in which dates and times are displayed as tick labels. For details about the \a ++ format string, see the documentation of QDateTime::toString(). ++ ++ Newlines can be inserted with "\n". ++ ++ \see setDateTimeSpec ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setDateTimeFormat(const QString &format) ++{ ++ mDateTimeFormat = format; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the time spec that is used for creating the tick labels from corresponding dates/times. ++ ++ The default value of QDateTime objects (and also QCPAxisTickerDateTime) is ++ Qt::LocalTime. However, if the date time values passed to QCustomPlot (e.g. in the form ++ of axis ranges or keys of a plottable) are given in the UTC spec, set \a spec to Qt::UTC ++ to get the correct axis labels. ++ ++ \see setDateTimeFormat ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setDateTimeSpec(Qt::TimeSpec spec) ++{ ++ mDateTimeSpec = spec; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the tick origin (see \ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin) in seconds since Epoch (1. Jan 1970, ++ 00:00 UTC). For the date time ticker it might be more intuitive to use the overload which ++ directly takes a QDateTime, see \ref setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin). ++ ++ This is useful to define the month/day/time recurring at greater tick interval steps. For ++ example, If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method and the tick interval happens to be one tick ++ per year, the ticks will end up on 15. July at 9:45 of every year. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setTickOrigin(double origin) ++{ ++ QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin(origin); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the tick origin (see \ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin) as a QDateTime \a origin. ++ ++ This is useful to define the month/day/time recurring at greater tick interval steps. For ++ example, If you pass 15. July, 9:45 to this method and the tick interval happens to be one tick ++ per year, the ticks will end up on 15. July at 9:45 of every year. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerDateTime::setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin) ++{ ++ setTickOrigin(dateTimeToKey(origin)); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a sensible tick step with intervals appropriate for a date-time-display, such as weekly, ++ monthly, bi-monthly, etc. ++ ++ Note that this tick step isn't used exactly when generating the tick vector in \ref ++ createTickVector, but only as a guiding value requiring some correction for each individual tick ++ interval. Otherwise this would lead to unintuitive date displays, e.g. jumping between first day ++ in the month to the last day in the previous month from tick to tick, due to the non-uniform ++ length of months. The same problem arises with leap years. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ double result = range.size()/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ ++ mDateStrategy = dsNone; ++ if (result < 1) // ideal tick step is below 1 second -> use normal clean mantissa algorithm in units of seconds ++ { ++ result = cleanMantissa(result); ++ } else if (result < 86400*30.4375*12) // below a year ++ { ++ result = pickClosest(result, QVector() ++ << 1 << 2.5 << 5 << 10 << 15 << 30 << 60 << 2.5*60 << 5*60 << 10*60 << 15*60 << 30*60 << 60*60 // second, minute, hour range ++ << 3600*2 << 3600*3 << 3600*6 << 3600*12 << 3600*24 // hour to day range ++ << 86400*2 << 86400*5 << 86400*7 << 86400*14 << 86400*30.4375 << 86400*30.4375*2 << 86400*30.4375*3 << 86400*30.4375*6 << 86400*30.4375*12); // day, week, month range (avg. days per month includes leap years) ++ if (result > 86400*30.4375-1) // month tick intervals or larger ++ mDateStrategy = dsUniformDayInMonth; ++ else if (result > 3600*24-1) // day tick intervals or larger ++ mDateStrategy = dsUniformTimeInDay; ++ } else // more than a year, go back to normal clean mantissa algorithm but in units of years ++ { ++ const double secondsPerYear = 86400*30.4375*12; // average including leap years ++ result = cleanMantissa(result/secondsPerYear)*secondsPerYear; ++ mDateStrategy = dsUniformDayInMonth; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a sensible sub tick count with intervals appropriate for a date-time-display, such as weekly, ++ monthly, bi-monthly, etc. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++int QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getSubTickCount(double tickStep) ++{ ++ int result = QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep); ++ switch (qRound(tickStep)) // hand chosen subticks for specific minute/hour/day/week/month range (as specified in getTickStep) ++ { ++ case 5*60: result = 4; break; ++ case 10*60: result = 1; break; ++ case 15*60: result = 2; break; ++ case 30*60: result = 1; break; ++ case 60*60: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*2: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*3: result = 2; break; ++ case 3600*6: result = 1; break; ++ case 3600*12: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*24: result = 3; break; ++ case 86400*2: result = 1; break; ++ case 86400*5: result = 4; break; ++ case 86400*7: result = 6; break; ++ case 86400*14: result = 1; break; ++ case (int)(86400*30.4375+0.5): result = 3; break; ++ case (int)(86400*30.4375*2+0.5): result = 1; break; ++ case (int)(86400*30.4375*3+0.5): result = 2; break; ++ case (int)(86400*30.4375*6+0.5): result = 5; break; ++ case (int)(86400*30.4375*12+0.5): result = 3; break; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Generates a date/time tick label for tick coordinate \a tick, based on the currently set format ++ (\ref setDateTimeFormat) and time spec (\ref setDateTimeSpec). ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerDateTime::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(precision) ++ Q_UNUSED(formatChar) ++ return locale.toString(keyToDateTime(tick).toTimeSpec(mDateTimeSpec), mDateTimeFormat); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Uses the passed \a tickStep as a guiding value and applies corrections in order to obtain ++ non-uniform tick intervals but intuitive tick labels, e.g. falling on the same day of each month. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QVector QCPAxisTickerDateTime::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ QVector result = QCPAxisTicker::createTickVector(tickStep, range); ++ if (!result.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ if (mDateStrategy == dsUniformTimeInDay) ++ { ++ QDateTime uniformDateTime = keyToDateTime(mTickOrigin); // the time of this datetime will be set for all other ticks, if possible ++ QDateTime tickDateTime; ++ for (int i=0; i 15) // with leap years involved, date month may jump backwards or forwards, and needs to be corrected before setting day ++ tickDateTime = tickDateTime.addMonths(-1); ++ tickDateTime.setDate(QDate(tickDateTime.date().year(), tickDateTime.date().month(), thisUniformDay)); ++ result[i] = dateTimeToKey(tickDateTime); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ A convenience method which turns \a key (in seconds since Epoch 1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC) into a ++ QDateTime object. This can be used to turn axis coordinates to actual QDateTimes. ++ ++ The accuracy achieved by this method is one millisecond, irrespective of the used Qt version (it ++ works around the lack of a QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch in Qt 4.6) ++ ++ \see dateTimeToKey ++*/ ++QDateTime QCPAxisTickerDateTime::keyToDateTime(double key) ++{ ++# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0) ++ return QDateTime::fromTime_t(key).addMSecs((key-(qint64)key)*1000); ++# else ++ return QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch(key*1000.0); ++# endif ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ A convenience method which turns a QDateTime object into a double value that corresponds to ++ seconds since Epoch (1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC). This is the format used as axis coordinates by ++ QCPAxisTickerDateTime. ++ ++ The accuracy achieved by this method is one millisecond, irrespective of the used Qt version (it ++ works around the lack of a QDateTime::toMSecsSinceEpoch in Qt 4.6) ++ ++ \see keyToDateTime ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::dateTimeToKey(const QDateTime dateTime) ++{ ++# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0) ++ return dateTime.toTime_t()+dateTime.time().msec()/1000.0; ++# else ++ return dateTime.toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0; ++# endif ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ A convenience method which turns a QDate object into a double value that corresponds to ++ seconds since Epoch (1. Jan 1970, 00:00 UTC). This is the format used as axis coordinates by ++ QCPAxisTickerDateTime. ++ ++ \see keyToDateTime ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerDateTime::dateTimeToKey(const QDate date) ++{ ++# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 7, 0) ++ return QDateTime(date).toTime_t(); ++# else ++ return QDateTime(date).toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0; ++# endif ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertime.cpp', size 11747 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerTime ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerTime ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker for time spans in units of milliseconds to days ++ ++ \image html axisticker-time.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that corresponds to time intervals. ++ ++ The format of the time display in the tick labels is controlled with \ref setTimeFormat and \ref ++ setFieldWidth. The time coordinate is in the unit of seconds with respect to the time coordinate ++ zero. Unlike with QCPAxisTickerDateTime, the ticks don't correspond to a specific calendar date ++ and time. ++ ++ The time can be displayed in milliseconds, seconds, minutes, hours and days. Depending on the ++ largest available unit in the format specified with \ref setTimeFormat, any time spans above will ++ be carried in that largest unit. So for example if the format string is "%m:%s" and a tick at ++ coordinate value 7815 (being 2 hours, 10 minutes and 15 seconds) is created, the resulting tick ++ label will show "130:15" (130 minutes, 15 seconds). If the format string is "%h:%m:%s", the hour ++ unit will be used and the label will thus be "02:10:15". Negative times with respect to the axis ++ zero will carry a leading minus sign. ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertime-creation ++ ++ Here is an example of a time axis providing time information in days, hours and minutes. Due to ++ the axis range spanning a few days and the wanted tick count (\ref setTickCount), the ticker ++ decided to use tick steps of 12 hours: ++ ++ \image html axisticker-time2.png ++ ++ The format string for this example is ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertime-creation-2 ++ ++ \note If you rather wish to display calendar dates and times, have a look at QCPAxisTickerDateTime ++ instead. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerTime::QCPAxisTickerTime() : ++ mTimeFormat(QLatin1String("%h:%m:%s")), ++ mSmallestUnit(tuSeconds), ++ mBiggestUnit(tuHours) ++{ ++ setTickCount(4); ++ mFieldWidth[tuMilliseconds] = 3; ++ mFieldWidth[tuSeconds] = 2; ++ mFieldWidth[tuMinutes] = 2; ++ mFieldWidth[tuHours] = 2; ++ mFieldWidth[tuDays] = 1; ++ ++ mFormatPattern[tuMilliseconds] = QLatin1String("%z"); ++ mFormatPattern[tuSeconds] = QLatin1String("%s"); ++ mFormatPattern[tuMinutes] = QLatin1String("%m"); ++ mFormatPattern[tuHours] = QLatin1String("%h"); ++ mFormatPattern[tuDays] = QLatin1String("%d"); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the format that will be used to display time in the tick labels. ++ ++ The available patterns are: ++ - %%z for milliseconds ++ - %%s for seconds ++ - %%m for minutes ++ - %%h for hours ++ - %%d for days ++ ++ The field width (zero padding) can be controlled for each unit with \ref setFieldWidth. ++ ++ The largest unit that appears in \a format will carry all the remaining time of a certain tick ++ coordinate, even if it overflows the natural limit of the unit. For example, if %%m is the ++ largest unit it might become larger than 59 in order to consume larger time values. If on the ++ other hand %%h is available, the minutes will wrap around to zero after 59 and the time will ++ carry to the hour digit. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerTime::setTimeFormat(const QString &format) ++{ ++ mTimeFormat = format; ++ ++ // determine smallest and biggest unit in format, to optimize unit replacement and allow biggest ++ // unit to consume remaining time of a tick value and grow beyond its modulo (e.g. min > 59) ++ mSmallestUnit = tuMilliseconds; ++ mBiggestUnit = tuMilliseconds; ++ bool hasSmallest = false; ++ for (int i = tuMilliseconds; i <= tuDays; ++i) ++ { ++ TimeUnit unit = static_cast(i); ++ if (mTimeFormat.contains(mFormatPattern.value(unit))) ++ { ++ if (!hasSmallest) ++ { ++ mSmallestUnit = unit; ++ hasSmallest = true; ++ } ++ mBiggestUnit = unit; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the field widh of the specified \a unit to be \a width digits, when displayed in the tick ++ label. If the number for the specific unit is shorter than \a width, it will be padded with an ++ according number of zeros to the left in order to reach the field width. ++ ++ \see setTimeFormat ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerTime::setFieldWidth(QCPAxisTickerTime::TimeUnit unit, int width) ++{ ++ mFieldWidth[unit] = qMax(width, 1); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the tick step appropriate for time displays, depending on the provided \a range and the ++ smallest available time unit in the current format (\ref setTimeFormat). For example if the unit ++ of seconds isn't available in the format, this method will not generate steps (like 2.5 minutes) ++ that require sub-minute precision to be displayed correctly. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerTime::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ double result = range.size()/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ ++ if (result < 1) // ideal tick step is below 1 second -> use normal clean mantissa algorithm in units of seconds ++ { ++ if (mSmallestUnit == tuMilliseconds) ++ result = qMax(cleanMantissa(result), 0.001); // smallest tick step is 1 millisecond ++ else // have no milliseconds available in format, so stick with 1 second tickstep ++ result = 1.0; ++ } else if (result < 3600*24) // below a day ++ { ++ // the filling of availableSteps seems a bit contorted but it fills in a sorted fashion and thus saves a post-fill sorting run ++ QVector availableSteps; ++ // seconds range: ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds) ++ availableSteps << 1; ++ if (mSmallestUnit == tuMilliseconds) ++ availableSteps << 2.5; // only allow half second steps if milliseconds are there to display it ++ else if (mSmallestUnit == tuSeconds) ++ availableSteps << 2; ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds) ++ availableSteps << 5 << 10 << 15 << 30; ++ // minutes range: ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuMinutes) ++ availableSteps << 1*60; ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuSeconds) ++ availableSteps << 2.5*60; // only allow half minute steps if seconds are there to display it ++ else if (mSmallestUnit == tuMinutes) ++ availableSteps << 2*60; ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuMinutes) ++ availableSteps << 5*60 << 10*60 << 15*60 << 30*60; ++ // hours range: ++ if (mSmallestUnit <= tuHours) ++ availableSteps << 1*3600 << 2*3600 << 3*3600 << 6*3600 << 12*3600 << 24*3600; ++ // pick available step that is most appropriate to approximate ideal step: ++ result = pickClosest(result, availableSteps); ++ } else // more than a day, go back to normal clean mantissa algorithm but in units of days ++ { ++ const double secondsPerDay = 3600*24; ++ result = cleanMantissa(result/secondsPerDay)*secondsPerDay; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the sub tick count appropriate for the provided \a tickStep and time displays. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++int QCPAxisTickerTime::getSubTickCount(double tickStep) ++{ ++ int result = QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep); ++ switch (qRound(tickStep)) // hand chosen subticks for specific minute/hour/day range (as specified in getTickStep) ++ { ++ case 5*60: result = 4; break; ++ case 10*60: result = 1; break; ++ case 15*60: result = 2; break; ++ case 30*60: result = 1; break; ++ case 60*60: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*2: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*3: result = 2; break; ++ case 3600*6: result = 1; break; ++ case 3600*12: result = 3; break; ++ case 3600*24: result = 3; break; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the tick label corresponding to the provided \a tick and the configured format and field ++ widths (\ref setTimeFormat, \ref setFieldWidth). ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerTime::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(precision) ++ Q_UNUSED(formatChar) ++ Q_UNUSED(locale) ++ bool negative = tick < 0; ++ if (negative) tick *= -1; ++ double values[tuDays+1]; // contains the msec/sec/min/... value with its respective modulo (e.g. minute 0..59) ++ double restValues[tuDays+1]; // contains the msec/sec/min/... value as if it's the largest available unit and thus consumes the remaining time ++ ++ restValues[tuMilliseconds] = tick*1000; ++ values[tuMilliseconds] = modf(restValues[tuMilliseconds]/1000, &restValues[tuSeconds])*1000; ++ values[tuSeconds] = modf(restValues[tuSeconds]/60, &restValues[tuMinutes])*60; ++ values[tuMinutes] = modf(restValues[tuMinutes]/60, &restValues[tuHours])*60; ++ values[tuHours] = modf(restValues[tuHours]/24, &restValues[tuDays])*24; ++ // no need to set values[tuDays] because days are always a rest value (there is no higher unit so it consumes all remaining time) ++ ++ QString result = mTimeFormat; ++ for (int i = mSmallestUnit; i <= mBiggestUnit; ++i) ++ { ++ TimeUnit iUnit = static_cast(i); ++ replaceUnit(result, iUnit, qRound(iUnit == mBiggestUnit ? restValues[iUnit] : values[iUnit])); ++ } ++ if (negative) ++ result.prepend(QLatin1Char('-')); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Replaces all occurrences of the format pattern belonging to \a unit in \a text with the specified ++ \a value, using the field width as specified with \ref setFieldWidth for the \a unit. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerTime::replaceUnit(QString &text, QCPAxisTickerTime::TimeUnit unit, int value) const ++{ ++ QString valueStr = QString::number(value); ++ while (valueStr.size() < mFieldWidth.value(unit)) ++ valueStr.prepend(QLatin1Char('0')); ++ ++ text.replace(mFormatPattern.value(unit), valueStr); ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertime.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.cpp', size 5583 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerFixed ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerFixed ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker with a fixed tick step ++ ++ \image html axisticker-fixed.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks with a fixed tick step set with \ref setTickStep. It ++ is also possible to allow integer multiples and integer powers of the specified tick step with ++ \ref setScaleStrategy. ++ ++ A typical application of this ticker is to make an axis only display integers, by setting the ++ tick step of the ticker to 1.0 and the scale strategy to \ref ssMultiples. ++ ++ Another case is when a certain number has a special meaning and axis ticks should only appear at ++ multiples of that value. In this case you might also want to consider \ref QCPAxisTickerPi ++ because despite the name it is not limited to only pi symbols/values. ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerfixed-creation ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerFixed::QCPAxisTickerFixed() : ++ mTickStep(1.0), ++ mScaleStrategy(ssNone) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the fixed tick interval to \a step. ++ ++ The axis ticker will only use this tick step when generating axis ticks. This might cause a very ++ high tick density and overlapping labels if the axis range is zoomed out. Using \ref ++ setScaleStrategy it is possible to relax the fixed step and also allow multiples or powers of \a ++ step. This will enable the ticker to reduce the number of ticks to a reasonable amount (see \ref ++ setTickCount). ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerFixed::setTickStep(double step) ++{ ++ if (step > 0) ++ mTickStep = step; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "tick step must be greater than zero:" << step; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the specified tick step (\ref setTickStep) is absolutely fixed or whether ++ modifications may be applied to it before calculating the finally used tick step, such as ++ permitting multiples or powers. See \ref ScaleStrategy for details. ++ ++ The default strategy is \ref ssNone, which means the tick step is absolutely fixed. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerFixed::setScaleStrategy(QCPAxisTickerFixed::ScaleStrategy strategy) ++{ ++ mScaleStrategy = strategy; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Determines the actually used tick step from the specified tick step and scale strategy (\ref ++ setTickStep, \ref setScaleStrategy). ++ ++ This method either returns the specified tick step exactly, or, if the scale strategy is not \ref ++ ssNone, a modification of it to allow varying the number of ticks in the current axis range. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerFixed::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ switch (mScaleStrategy) ++ { ++ case ssNone: ++ { ++ return mTickStep; ++ } ++ case ssMultiples: ++ { ++ double exactStep = range.size()/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ if (exactStep < mTickStep) ++ return mTickStep; ++ else ++ return (qint64)(cleanMantissa(exactStep/mTickStep)+0.5)*mTickStep; ++ } ++ case ssPowers: ++ { ++ double exactStep = range.size()/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ return qPow(mTickStep, (int)(qLn(exactStep)/qLn(mTickStep)+0.5)); ++ } ++ } ++ return mTickStep; ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertext.cpp', size 8653 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerText ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerText ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker which allows arbitrary labels at specified coordinates ++ ++ \image html axisticker-text.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks which can be directly specified by the user as ++ coordinates and associated strings. They can be passed as a whole with \ref setTicks or one at a ++ time with \ref addTick. Alternatively you can directly access the internal storage via \ref ticks ++ and modify the tick/label data there. ++ ++ This is useful for cases where the axis represents categories rather than numerical values. ++ ++ If you are updating the ticks of this ticker regularly and in a dynamic fashion (e.g. dependent on ++ the axis range), it is a sign that you should probably create an own ticker by subclassing ++ QCPAxisTicker, instead of using this one. ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickertext-creation ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QMap &QCPAxisTickerText::ticks() ++ ++ Returns a non-const reference to the internal map which stores the tick coordinates and their ++ labels. ++ ++ You can access the map directly in order to add, remove or manipulate ticks, as an alternative to ++ using the methods provided by QCPAxisTickerText, such as \ref setTicks and \ref addTick. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerText::QCPAxisTickerText() : ++ mSubTickCount(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the ticks that shall appear on the axis. The map key of \a ticks corresponds to the axis ++ coordinate, and the map value is the string that will appear as tick label. ++ ++ An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks ++ getter. ++ ++ \see addTicks, addTick, clear ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::setTicks(const QMap &ticks) ++{ ++ mTicks = ticks; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the ticks that shall appear on the axis. The entries of \a positions correspond to the axis ++ coordinates, and the entries of \a labels are the respective strings that will appear as tick ++ labels. ++ ++ \see addTicks, addTick, clear ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::setTicks(const QVector &positions, const QVector labels) ++{ ++ clear(); ++ addTicks(positions, labels); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the number of sub ticks that shall appear between ticks. For QCPAxisTickerText, there is no ++ automatic sub tick count calculation. So if sub ticks are needed, they must be configured with this ++ method. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::setSubTickCount(int subTicks) ++{ ++ if (subTicks >= 0) ++ mSubTickCount = subTicks; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "sub tick count can't be negative:" << subTicks; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Clears all ticks. ++ ++ An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks ++ getter. ++ ++ \see setTicks, addTicks, addTick ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::clear() ++{ ++ mTicks.clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds a single tick to the axis at the given axis coordinate \a position, with the provided tick \a ++ label. ++ ++ \see addTicks, setTicks, clear ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::addTick(double position, QString label) ++{ ++ mTicks.insert(position, label); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided \a ticks to the ones already existing. The map key of \a ticks corresponds to ++ the axis coordinate, and the map value is the string that will appear as tick label. ++ ++ An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks ++ getter. ++ ++ \see addTick, setTicks, clear ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::addTicks(const QMap &ticks) ++{ ++ mTicks.unite(ticks); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided ticks to the ones already existing. The entries of \a positions correspond to ++ the axis coordinates, and the entries of \a labels are the respective strings that will appear as ++ tick labels. ++ ++ An alternative to manipulate ticks is to directly access the internal storage with the \ref ticks ++ getter. ++ ++ \see addTick, setTicks, clear ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerText::addTicks(const QVector &positions, const QVector &labels) ++{ ++ if (positions.size() != labels.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed unequal length vectors for positions and labels:" << positions.size() << labels.size(); ++ int n = qMin(positions.size(), labels.size()); ++ for (int i=0; i QCPAxisTickerText::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(tickStep) ++ QVector result; ++ if (mTicks.isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ ++ QMap::const_iterator start = mTicks.lowerBound(range.lower); ++ QMap::const_iterator end = mTicks.upperBound(range.upper); ++ // this method should try to give one tick outside of range so proper subticks can be generated: ++ if (start != mTicks.constBegin()) --start; ++ if (end != mTicks.constEnd()) ++end; ++ for (QMap::const_iterator it = start; it != end; ++it) ++ result.append(it.key()); ++ ++ return result; ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertext.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerpi.cpp', size 11170 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerPi ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerPi ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker to display ticks in units of an arbitrary constant, for example pi ++ ++ \image html axisticker-pi.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks that are expressed with respect to a given symbolic ++ constant with a numerical value specified with \ref setPiValue and an appearance in the tick ++ labels specified with \ref setPiSymbol. ++ ++ Ticks may be generated at fractions of the symbolic constant. How these fractions appear in the ++ tick label can be configured with \ref setFractionStyle. ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerpi-creation ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerPi::QCPAxisTickerPi() : ++ mPiSymbol(QLatin1String(" ")+QChar(0x03C0)), ++ mPiValue(M_PI), ++ mPeriodicity(0), ++ mFractionStyle(fsUnicodeFractions), ++ mPiTickStep(0) ++{ ++ setTickCount(4); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the symbol part (which is always a suffix to the number) shall appear in the axis tick ++ label. ++ ++ If a space shall appear between the number and the symbol, make sure the space is contained in \a ++ symbol. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPiSymbol(QString symbol) ++{ ++ mPiSymbol = symbol; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the numerical value that the symbolic constant has. ++ ++ This will be used to place the appropriate fractions of the symbol at the respective axis ++ coordinates. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPiValue(double pi) ++{ ++ mPiValue = pi; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the axis labels shall appear periodicly and if so, at which multiplicity of the ++ symbolic constant. ++ ++ To disable periodicity, set \a multiplesOfPi to zero. ++ ++ For example, an axis that identifies 0 with 2pi would set \a multiplesOfPi to two. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerPi::setPeriodicity(int multiplesOfPi) ++{ ++ mPeriodicity = qAbs(multiplesOfPi); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant is displayed in tick ++ labels. See \ref FractionStyle for the various options. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerPi::setFractionStyle(QCPAxisTickerPi::FractionStyle style) ++{ ++ mFractionStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the tick step, using the constant's value (\ref setPiValue) as base unit. In consequence ++ the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant is made to have a readable ++ mantissa. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerPi::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ mPiTickStep = range.size()/mPiValue/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); // mTickCount ticks on average, the small addition is to prevent jitter on exact integers ++ mPiTickStep = cleanMantissa(mPiTickStep); ++ return mPiTickStep*mPiValue; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the sub tick count, using the constant's value (\ref setPiValue) as base unit. In ++ consequence the sub ticks divide the numerical/fractional part preceding the symbolic constant ++ reasonably, and not the total tick coordinate. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++int QCPAxisTickerPi::getSubTickCount(double tickStep) ++{ ++ return QCPAxisTicker::getSubTickCount(tickStep/mPiValue); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the tick label as a fractional/numerical part and a symbolic string as suffix. The ++ formatting of the fraction is done according to the specified \ref setFractionStyle. The appended ++ symbol is specified with \ref setPiSymbol. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerPi::getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) ++{ ++ double tickInPis = tick/mPiValue; ++ if (mPeriodicity > 0) ++ tickInPis = fmod(tickInPis, mPeriodicity); ++ ++ if (mFractionStyle != fsFloatingPoint && mPiTickStep > 0.09 && mPiTickStep < 50) ++ { ++ // simply construct fraction from decimal like 1.234 -> 1234/1000 and then simplify fraction, smaller digits are irrelevant due to mPiTickStep conditional above ++ int denominator = 1000; ++ int numerator = qRound(tickInPis*denominator); ++ simplifyFraction(numerator, denominator); ++ if (qAbs(numerator) == 1 && denominator == 1) ++ return (numerator < 0 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) + mPiSymbol.trimmed(); ++ else if (numerator == 0) ++ return QLatin1String("0"); ++ else ++ return fractionToString(numerator, denominator) + mPiSymbol; ++ } else ++ { ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull(tickInPis)) ++ return QLatin1String("0"); ++ else if (qFuzzyCompare(qAbs(tickInPis), 1.0)) ++ return (tickInPis < 0 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) + mPiSymbol.trimmed(); ++ else ++ return QCPAxisTicker::getTickLabel(tickInPis, locale, formatChar, precision) + mPiSymbol; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes the fraction given by \a numerator and \a denominator and modifies the values to make sure ++ the fraction is in irreducible form, i.e. numerator and denominator don't share any common ++ factors which could be cancelled. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerPi::simplifyFraction(int &numerator, int &denominator) const ++{ ++ if (numerator == 0 || denominator == 0) ++ return; ++ ++ int num = numerator; ++ int denom = denominator; ++ while (denom != 0) // euclidean gcd algorithm ++ { ++ int oldDenom = denom; ++ denom = num % denom; ++ num = oldDenom; ++ } ++ // num is now gcd of numerator and denominator ++ numerator /= num; ++ denominator /= num; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes the fraction given by \a numerator and \a denominator and returns a string representation. ++ The result depends on the configured fraction style (\ref setFractionStyle). ++ ++ This method is used to format the numerical/fractional part when generating tick labels. It ++ simplifies the passed fraction to an irreducible form using \ref simplifyFraction and factors out ++ any integer parts of the fraction (e.g. "10/4" becomes "2 1/2"). ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerPi::fractionToString(int numerator, int denominator) const ++{ ++ if (denominator == 0) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with zero denominator"; ++ return QString(); ++ } ++ if (mFractionStyle == fsFloatingPoint) // should never be the case when calling this function ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "shouldn't be called with fraction style fsDecimal"; ++ return QString::number(numerator/(double)denominator); // failsafe ++ } ++ int sign = numerator*denominator < 0 ? -1 : 1; ++ numerator = qAbs(numerator); ++ denominator = qAbs(denominator); ++ ++ if (denominator == 1) ++ { ++ return QString::number(sign*numerator); ++ } else ++ { ++ int integerPart = numerator/denominator; ++ int remainder = numerator%denominator; ++ if (remainder == 0) ++ { ++ return QString::number(sign*integerPart); ++ } else ++ { ++ if (mFractionStyle == fsAsciiFractions) ++ { ++ return QString(QLatin1String("%1%2%3/%4")) ++ .arg(sign == -1 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) ++ .arg(integerPart > 0 ? QString::number(integerPart)+QLatin1String(" ") : QLatin1String("")) ++ .arg(remainder) ++ .arg(denominator); ++ } else if (mFractionStyle == fsUnicodeFractions) ++ { ++ return QString(QLatin1String("%1%2%3")) ++ .arg(sign == -1 ? QLatin1String("-") : QLatin1String("")) ++ .arg(integerPart > 0 ? QString::number(integerPart) : QLatin1String("")) ++ .arg(unicodeFraction(remainder, denominator)); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return QString(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the unicode string representation of the fraction given by \a numerator and \a ++ denominator. This is the representation used in \ref fractionToString when the fraction style ++ (\ref setFractionStyle) is \ref fsUnicodeFractions. ++ ++ This method doesn't use the single-character common fractions but builds each fraction from a ++ superscript unicode number, the unicode fraction character, and a subscript unicode number. ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeFraction(int numerator, int denominator) const ++{ ++ return unicodeSuperscript(numerator)+QChar(0x2044)+unicodeSubscript(denominator); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the unicode string representing \a number as superscript. This is used to build ++ unicode fractions in \ref unicodeFraction. ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeSuperscript(int number) const ++{ ++ if (number == 0) ++ return QString(QChar(0x2070)); ++ ++ QString result; ++ while (number > 0) ++ { ++ const int digit = number%10; ++ switch (digit) ++ { ++ case 1: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B9)); break; } ++ case 2: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B2)); break; } ++ case 3: { result.prepend(QChar(0x00B3)); break; } ++ default: { result.prepend(QChar(0x2070+digit)); break; } ++ } ++ number /= 10; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the unicode string representing \a number as subscript. This is used to build unicode ++ fractions in \ref unicodeFraction. ++*/ ++QString QCPAxisTickerPi::unicodeSubscript(int number) const ++{ ++ if (number == 0) ++ return QString(QChar(0x2080)); ++ ++ QString result; ++ while (number > 0) ++ { ++ result.prepend(QChar(0x2080+number%10)); ++ number /= 10; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerpi.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerlog.cpp', size 7106 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisTickerLog ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++/*! \class QCPAxisTickerLog ++ \brief Specialized axis ticker suited for logarithmic axes ++ ++ \image html axisticker-log.png ++ ++ This QCPAxisTicker subclass generates ticks with unequal tick intervals suited for logarithmic ++ axis scales. The ticks are placed at powers of the specified log base (\ref setLogBase). ++ ++ Especially in the case of a log base equal to 10 (the default), it might be desirable to have ++ tick labels in the form of powers of ten without mantissa display. To achieve this, set the ++ number precision (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision) to zero and the number format (\ref ++ QCPAxis::setNumberFormat) to scientific (exponential) display with beautifully typeset decimal ++ powers, so a format string of "eb". This will result in the following axis tick labels: ++ ++ \image html axisticker-log-powers.png ++ ++ The ticker can be created and assigned to an axis like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-image-generator/mainwindow.cpp axistickerlog-creation ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs the ticker and sets reasonable default values. Axis tickers are commonly created ++ managed by a QSharedPointer, which then can be passed to QCPAxis::setTicker. ++*/ ++QCPAxisTickerLog::QCPAxisTickerLog() : ++ mLogBase(10.0), ++ mSubTickCount(8), // generates 10 intervals ++ mLogBaseLnInv(1.0/qLn(mLogBase)) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the logarithm base used for tick coordinate generation. The ticks will be placed at integer ++ powers of \a base. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerLog::setLogBase(double base) ++{ ++ if (base > 0) ++ { ++ mLogBase = base; ++ mLogBaseLnInv = 1.0/qLn(mLogBase); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "log base has to be greater than zero:" << base; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the number of sub ticks in a tick interval. Within each interval, the sub ticks are spaced ++ linearly to provide a better visual guide, so the sub tick density increases toward the higher ++ tick. ++ ++ Note that \a subTicks is the number of sub ticks (not sub intervals) in one tick interval. So in ++ the case of logarithm base 10 an intuitive sub tick spacing would be achieved with eight sub ++ ticks (the default). This means e.g. between the ticks 10 and 100 there will be eight ticks, ++ namely at 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisTickerLog::setSubTickCount(int subTicks) ++{ ++ if (subTicks >= 0) ++ mSubTickCount = subTicks; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "sub tick count can't be negative:" << subTicks; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Since logarithmic tick steps are necessarily different for each tick interval, this method does ++ nothing in the case of QCPAxisTickerLog ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPAxisTickerLog::getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ // Logarithmic axis ticker has unequal tick spacing, so doesn't need this method ++ Q_UNUSED(range) ++ return 1.0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the sub tick count specified in \ref setSubTickCount. For QCPAxisTickerLog, there is no ++ automatic sub tick count calculation necessary. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++int QCPAxisTickerLog::getSubTickCount(double tickStep) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(tickStep) ++ return mSubTickCount; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Creates ticks with a spacing given by the logarithm base and an increasing integer power in the ++ provided \a range. The step in which the power increases tick by tick is chosen in order to keep ++ the total number of ticks as close as possible to the tick count (\ref setTickCount). The ++ parameter \a tickStep is ignored for QCPAxisTickerLog ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QVector QCPAxisTickerLog::createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(tickStep) ++ QVector result; ++ if (range.lower > 0 && range.upper > 0) // positive range ++ { ++ double exactPowerStep = qLn(range.upper/range.lower)*mLogBaseLnInv/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); ++ double newLogBase = qPow(mLogBase, qMax((int)cleanMantissa(exactPowerStep), 1)); ++ double currentTick = qPow(newLogBase, qFloor(qLn(range.lower)/qLn(newLogBase))); ++ result.append(currentTick); ++ while (currentTick < range.upper && currentTick > 0) // currentMag might be zero for ranges ~1e-300, just cancel in that case ++ { ++ currentTick *= newLogBase; ++ result.append(currentTick); ++ } ++ } else if (range.lower < 0 && range.upper < 0) // negative range ++ { ++ double exactPowerStep = qLn(range.lower/range.upper)*mLogBaseLnInv/(double)(mTickCount+1e-10); ++ double newLogBase = qPow(mLogBase, qMax((int)cleanMantissa(exactPowerStep), 1)); ++ double currentTick = -qPow(newLogBase, qCeil(qLn(-range.lower)/qLn(newLogBase))); ++ result.append(currentTick); ++ while (currentTick < range.upper && currentTick < 0) // currentMag might be zero for ranges ~1e-300, just cancel in that case ++ { ++ currentTick /= newLogBase; ++ result.append(currentTick); ++ } ++ } else // invalid range for logarithmic scale, because lower and upper have different sign ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid range for logarithmic plot: " << range.lower << ".." << range.upper; ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerlog.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axis.cpp', size 94458 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPGrid ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPGrid ++ \brief Responsible for drawing the grid of a QCPAxis. ++ ++ This class is tightly bound to QCPAxis. Every axis owns a grid instance and uses it to draw the ++ grid lines, sub grid lines and zero-line. You can interact with the grid of an axis via \ref ++ QCPAxis::grid. Normally, you don't need to create an instance of QCPGrid yourself. ++ ++ The axis and grid drawing was split into two classes to allow them to be placed on different ++ layers (both QCPAxis and QCPGrid inherit from QCPLayerable). Thus it is possible to have the grid ++ in the background and the axes in the foreground, and any plottables/items in between. This ++ described situation is the default setup, see the QCPLayer documentation. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPGrid instance and sets default values. ++ ++ You shouldn't instantiate grids on their own, since every QCPAxis brings its own QCPGrid. ++*/ ++QCPGrid::QCPGrid(QCPAxis *parentAxis) : ++ QCPLayerable(parentAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), parentAxis), ++ mParentAxis(parentAxis) ++{ ++ // warning: this is called in QCPAxis constructor, so parentAxis members should not be accessed/called ++ setParent(parentAxis); ++ setPen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::DotLine)); ++ setSubGridPen(QPen(QColor(220,220,220), 0, Qt::DotLine)); ++ setZeroLinePen(QPen(QColor(200,200,200), 0, Qt::SolidLine)); ++ setSubGridVisible(false); ++ setAntialiased(false); ++ setAntialiasedSubGrid(false); ++ setAntialiasedZeroLine(false); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether grid lines at sub tick marks are drawn. ++ ++ \see setSubGridPen ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setSubGridVisible(bool visible) ++{ ++ mSubGridVisible = visible; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether sub grid lines are drawn antialiased. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedSubGrid(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAntialiasedSubGrid = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether zero lines are drawn antialiased. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedZeroLine(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAntialiasedZeroLine = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen with which (major) grid lines are drawn. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen with which sub grid lines are drawn. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setSubGridPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSubGridPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen with which zero lines are drawn. ++ ++ Zero lines are lines at value coordinate 0 which may be drawn with a different pen than other grid ++ lines. To disable zero lines and just draw normal grid lines at zero, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::setZeroLinePen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mZeroLinePen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing the major grid lines. ++ ++ This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \see setAntialiased ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeGrid); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws grid lines and sub grid lines at the positions of (sub) ticks of the parent axis, spanning ++ over the complete axis rect. Also draws the zero line, if appropriate (\ref setZeroLinePen). ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; } ++ ++ if (mParentAxis->subTicks() && mSubGridVisible) ++ drawSubGridLines(painter); ++ drawGridLines(painter); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the main grid lines and possibly a zero line with the specified painter. ++ ++ This is a helper function called by \ref draw. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::drawGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; } ++ ++ const int tickCount = mParentAxis->mTickVector.size(); ++ double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms ++ if (mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ // draw zeroline: ++ int zeroLineIndex = -1; ++ if (mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 && mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0) ++ { ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine); ++ painter->setPen(mZeroLinePen); ++ double epsilon = mParentAxis->range().size()*1E-6; // for comparing double to zero ++ for (int i=0; imTickVector.at(i)) < epsilon) ++ { ++ zeroLineIndex = i; ++ t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // x ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top())); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ // draw grid lines: ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // x ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top())); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ // draw zeroline: ++ int zeroLineIndex = -1; ++ if (mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 && mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0) ++ { ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine); ++ painter->setPen(mZeroLinePen); ++ double epsilon = mParentAxis->mRange.size()*1E-6; // for comparing double to zero ++ for (int i=0; imTickVector.at(i)) < epsilon) ++ { ++ zeroLineIndex = i; ++ t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // y ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t)); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ // draw grid lines: ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(mParentAxis->mTickVector.at(i)); // y ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t)); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the sub grid lines with the specified painter. ++ ++ This is a helper function called by \ref draw. ++*/ ++void QCPGrid::drawSubGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ if (!mParentAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis"; return; } ++ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedSubGrid, QCP::aeSubGrid); ++ double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms ++ painter->setPen(mSubGridPen); ++ if (mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; imSubTickVector.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.at(i)); // x ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top())); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ for (int i=0; imSubTickVector.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel(mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.at(i)); // y ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t)); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxis ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAxis ++ \brief Manages a single axis inside a QCustomPlot. ++ ++ Usually doesn't need to be instantiated externally. Access %QCustomPlot's default four axes via ++ QCustomPlot::xAxis (bottom), QCustomPlot::yAxis (left), QCustomPlot::xAxis2 (top) and ++ QCustomPlot::yAxis2 (right). ++ ++ Axes are always part of an axis rect, see QCPAxisRect. ++ \image html AxisNamesOverview.png ++
Naming convention of axis parts
++ \n ++ ++ \image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png ++
Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an axis. The dashed gray line ++ on the left represents the QCustomPlot widget border.
++ ++ Each axis holds an instance of QCPAxisTicker which is used to generate the tick coordinates and ++ tick labels. You can access the currently installed \ref ticker or set a new one (possibly one of ++ the specialized subclasses, or your own subclass) via \ref setTicker. For details, see the ++ documentation of QCPAxisTicker. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation() const ++ ++ Returns the orientation of this axis. The axis orientation (horizontal or vertical) is deduced ++ from the axis type (left, top, right or bottom). ++ ++ \see orientation(AxisType type), pixelOrientation ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPGrid *QCPAxis::grid() const ++ ++ Returns the \ref QCPGrid instance belonging to this axis. Access it to set details about the way the ++ grid is displayed. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation(AxisType type) ++ ++ Returns the orientation of the specified axis type ++ ++ \see orientation(), pixelOrientation ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxis::pixelOrientation() const ++ ++ Returns which direction points towards higher coordinate values/keys, in pixel space. ++ ++ This method returns either 1 or -1. If it returns 1, then going in the positive direction along ++ the orientation of the axis in pixels corresponds to going from lower to higher axis coordinates. ++ On the other hand, if this method returns -1, going to smaller pixel values corresponds to going ++ from lower to higher axis coordinates. ++ ++ For example, this is useful to easily shift axis coordinates by a certain amount given in pixels, ++ without having to care about reversed or vertically aligned axes: ++ ++ \code ++ double newKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(oldKey)+10*keyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ \endcode ++ ++ \a newKey will then contain a key that is ten pixels towards higher keys, starting from \a oldKey. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPAxis::ticker() const ++ ++ Returns a modifiable shared pointer to the currently installed axis ticker. The axis ticker is ++ responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels of this axis. You can access the ++ \ref QCPAxisTicker with this method and modify basic properties such as the approximate tick count ++ (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount). ++ ++ You can gain more control over the axis ticks by setting a different \ref QCPAxisTicker subclass, see ++ the documentation there. A new axis ticker can be set with \ref setTicker. ++ ++ Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis ++ ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes. ++ ++ \see setTicker ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++/* start of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the range of this axis has changed. You can connect it to the \ref ++ setRange slot of another axis to communicate the new range to the other axis, in order for it to ++ be synchronized. ++ ++ You may also manipulate/correct the range with \ref setRange in a slot connected to this signal. ++ This is useful if for example a maximum range span shall not be exceeded, or if the lower/upper ++ range shouldn't go beyond certain values (see \ref QCPRange::bounded). For example, the following ++ slot would limit the x axis to ranges between 0 and 10: ++ \code ++ customPlot->xAxis->setRange(newRange.bounded(0, 10)) ++ \endcode ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange, const QCPRange &oldRange) ++ \overload ++ ++ Additionally to the new range, this signal also provides the previous range held by the axis as ++ \a oldRange. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAxis::scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the scale type changes, by calls to \ref setScaleType ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selection) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this axis has changed, either by user interaction ++ or by a direct call to \ref setSelectedParts. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectableChanged(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &parts); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selectability changes, by calls to \ref setSelectableParts ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an Axis instance of Type \a type for the axis rect \a parent. ++ ++ Usually it isn't necessary to instantiate axes directly, because you can let QCustomPlot create ++ them for you with \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis. If you want to use own QCPAxis-subclasses however, ++ create them manually and then inject them also via \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis. ++*/ ++QCPAxis::QCPAxis(QCPAxisRect *parent, AxisType type) : ++ QCPLayerable(parent->parentPlot(), QString(), parent), ++ // axis base: ++ mAxisType(type), ++ mAxisRect(parent), ++ mPadding(5), ++ mOrientation(orientation(type)), ++ mSelectableParts(spAxis | spTickLabels | spAxisLabel), ++ mSelectedParts(spNone), ++ mBasePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ mSelectedBasePen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)), ++ // axis label: ++ mLabel(), ++ mLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()), ++ mSelectedLabelFont(QFont(mLabelFont.family(), mLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)), ++ mLabelColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedLabelColor(Qt::blue), ++ // tick labels: ++ mTickLabels(true), ++ mTickLabelFont(mParentPlot->font()), ++ mSelectedTickLabelFont(QFont(mTickLabelFont.family(), mTickLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold)), ++ mTickLabelColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedTickLabelColor(Qt::blue), ++ mNumberPrecision(6), ++ mNumberFormatChar('g'), ++ mNumberBeautifulPowers(true), ++ // ticks and subticks: ++ mTicks(true), ++ mSubTicks(true), ++ mTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ mSelectedTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)), ++ mSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ mSelectedSubTickPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)), ++ // scale and range: ++ mRange(0, 5), ++ mRangeReversed(false), ++ mScaleType(stLinear), ++ // internal members: ++ mGrid(new QCPGrid(this)), ++ mAxisPainter(new QCPAxisPainterPrivate(parent->parentPlot())), ++ mTicker(new QCPAxisTicker), ++ mCachedMarginValid(false), ++ mCachedMargin(0) ++{ ++ setParent(parent); ++ mGrid->setVisible(false); ++ setAntialiased(false); ++ setLayer(mParentPlot->currentLayer()); // it's actually on that layer already, but we want it in front of the grid, so we place it on there again ++ ++ if (type == atTop) ++ { ++ setTickLabelPadding(3); ++ setLabelPadding(6); ++ } else if (type == atRight) ++ { ++ setTickLabelPadding(7); ++ setLabelPadding(12); ++ } else if (type == atBottom) ++ { ++ setTickLabelPadding(3); ++ setLabelPadding(3); ++ } else if (type == atLeft) ++ { ++ setTickLabelPadding(5); ++ setLabelPadding(10); ++ } ++} ++ ++QCPAxis::~QCPAxis() ++{ ++ delete mAxisPainter; ++ delete mGrid; // delete grid here instead of via parent ~QObject for better defined deletion order ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::tickLabelPadding() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++double QCPAxis::tickLabelRotation() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++QCPAxis::LabelSide QCPAxis::tickLabelSide() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->tickLabelSide; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++QString QCPAxis::numberFormat() const ++{ ++ QString result; ++ result.append(mNumberFormatChar); ++ if (mNumberBeautifulPowers) ++ { ++ result.append(QLatin1Char('b')); ++ if (mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross) ++ result.append(QLatin1Char('c')); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::tickLengthIn() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::tickLengthOut() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::subTickLengthIn() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::subTickLengthOut() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::labelPadding() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->labelPadding; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++int QCPAxis::offset() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->offset; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::lowerEnding() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->lowerEnding; ++} ++ ++/* No documentation as it is a property getter */ ++QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::upperEnding() const ++{ ++ return mAxisPainter->upperEnding; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the axis uses a linear scale or a logarithmic scale. ++ ++ Note that this method controls the coordinate transformation. You will likely also want to use a ++ logarithmic tick spacing and labeling, which can be achieved by setting an instance of \ref ++ QCPAxisTickerLog via \ref setTicker. See the documentation of \ref QCPAxisTickerLog about the ++ details of logarithmic axis tick creation. ++ ++ \ref setNumberPrecision ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType type) ++{ ++ if (mScaleType != type) ++ { ++ mScaleType = type; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ setRange(mRange.sanitizedForLogScale()); ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ emit scaleTypeChanged(mScaleType); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the range of the axis. ++ ++ This slot may be connected with the \ref rangeChanged signal of another axis so this axis ++ is always synchronized with the other axis range, when it changes. ++ ++ To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRange(const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ if (range.lower == mRange.lower && range.upper == mRange.upper) ++ return; ++ ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(range)) return; ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ mRange = range.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ } else ++ { ++ mRange = range.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface. ++ (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes.) ++ ++ However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part, ++ it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts ++ directly. ++ ++ \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectableParts != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectableParts = selectable; ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the selected state of the respective axis parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part ++ is selected, it uses a different pen/font. ++ ++ The entire selection mechanism for axes is handled automatically when \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes. You only need to call this function when you ++ wish to change the selection state manually. ++ ++ This function can change the selection state of a part, independent of the \ref setSelectableParts setting. ++ ++ emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state. ++ ++ \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBasePen, setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen, ++ setSelectedTickLabelFont, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelColor, setSelectedLabelColor ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected) ++{ ++ if (mSelectedParts != selected) ++ { ++ mSelectedParts = selected; ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \overload ++ ++ Sets the lower and upper bound of the axis range. ++ ++ To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed. ++ ++ There is also a slot to set a range, see \ref setRange(const QCPRange &range). ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRange(double lower, double upper) ++{ ++ if (lower == mRange.lower && upper == mRange.upper) ++ return; ++ ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(lower, upper)) return; ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ mRange.lower = lower; ++ mRange.upper = upper; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ } else ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \overload ++ ++ Sets the range of the axis. ++ ++ The \a position coordinate indicates together with the \a alignment parameter, where the new ++ range will be positioned. \a size defines the size of the new axis range. \a alignment may be ++ Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight or Qt::AlignCenter. This will cause the left border, right border, ++ or center of the range to be aligned with \a position. Any other values of \a alignment will ++ default to Qt::AlignCenter. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRange(double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment) ++{ ++ if (alignment == Qt::AlignLeft) ++ setRange(position, position+size); ++ else if (alignment == Qt::AlignRight) ++ setRange(position-size, position); ++ else // alignment == Qt::AlignCenter ++ setRange(position-size/2.0, position+size/2.0); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the lower bound of the axis range. The upper bound is not changed. ++ \see setRange ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRangeLower(double lower) ++{ ++ if (mRange.lower == lower) ++ return; ++ ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ mRange.lower = lower; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ } else ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the upper bound of the axis range. The lower bound is not changed. ++ \see setRange ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRangeUpper(double upper) ++{ ++ if (mRange.upper == upper) ++ return; ++ ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ mRange.upper = upper; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ } else ++ { ++ mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the axis range (direction) is displayed reversed. Normally, the values on horizontal ++ axes increase left to right, on vertical axes bottom to top. When \a reversed is set to true, the ++ direction of increasing values is inverted. ++ ++ Note that the range and data interface stays the same for reversed axes, e.g. the \a lower part ++ of the \ref setRange interface will still reference the mathematically smaller number than the \a ++ upper part. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setRangeReversed(bool reversed) ++{ ++ mRangeReversed = reversed; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The axis ticker is responsible for generating the tick positions and tick labels. See the ++ documentation of QCPAxisTicker for details on how to work with axis tickers. ++ ++ You can change the tick positioning/labeling behaviour of this axis by setting a different ++ QCPAxisTicker subclass using this method. If you only wish to modify the currently installed axis ++ ticker, access it via \ref ticker. ++ ++ Since the ticker is stored in the axis as a shared pointer, multiple axes may share the same axis ++ ticker simply by passing the same shared pointer to multiple axes. ++ ++ \see ticker ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTicker(QSharedPointer ticker) ++{ ++ if (ticker) ++ mTicker = ticker; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can not set 0 as axis ticker"; ++ // no need to invalidate margin cache here because produced tick labels are checked for changes in setupTickVector ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether tick marks are displayed. ++ ++ Note that setting \a show to false does not imply that tick labels are invisible, too. To achieve ++ that, see \ref setTickLabels. ++ ++ \see setSubTicks ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTicks(bool show) ++{ ++ if (mTicks != show) ++ { ++ mTicks = show; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether tick labels are displayed. Tick labels are the numbers drawn next to tick marks. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabels(bool show) ++{ ++ if (mTickLabels != show) ++ { ++ mTickLabels = show; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ if (!mTickLabels) ++ mTickVectorLabels.clear(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the distance between the axis base line (including any outward ticks) and the tick labels. ++ \see setLabelPadding, setPadding ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabelPadding(int padding) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding != padding) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding = padding; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font of the tick labels. ++ ++ \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelColor ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabelFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ if (font != mTickLabelFont) ++ { ++ mTickLabelFont = font; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color of the tick labels. ++ ++ \see setTickLabels, setTickLabelFont ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabelColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mTickLabelColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the rotation of the tick labels. If \a degrees is zero, the labels are drawn normally. Else, ++ the tick labels are drawn rotated by \a degrees clockwise. The specified angle is bound to values ++ from -90 to 90 degrees. ++ ++ If \a degrees is exactly -90, 0 or 90, the tick labels are centered on the tick coordinate. For ++ other angles, the label is drawn with an offset such that it seems to point toward or away from ++ the tick mark. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabelRotation(double degrees) ++{ ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(degrees-mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation)) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation = qBound(-90.0, degrees, 90.0); ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the tick labels (numbers) shall appear inside or outside the axis rect. ++ ++ The usual and default setting is \ref lsOutside. Very compact plots sometimes require tick labels ++ to be inside the axis rect, to save space. If \a side is set to \ref lsInside, the tick labels ++ appear on the inside are additionally clipped to the axis rect. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLabelSide(LabelSide side) ++{ ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelSide = side; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the number format for the numbers in tick labels. This \a formatCode is an extended version ++ of the format code used e.g. by QString::number() and QLocale::toString(). For reference about ++ that, see the "Argument Formats" section in the detailed description of the QString class. ++ ++ \a formatCode is a string of one, two or three characters. The first character is identical to ++ the normal format code used by Qt. In short, this means: 'e'/'E' scientific format, 'f' fixed ++ format, 'g'/'G' scientific or fixed, whichever is shorter. ++ ++ The second and third characters are optional and specific to QCustomPlot:\n ++ If the first char was 'e' or 'g', numbers are/might be displayed in the scientific format, e.g. ++ "5.5e9", which is ugly in a plot. So when the second char of \a formatCode is set to 'b' (for ++ "beautiful"), those exponential numbers are formatted in a more natural way, i.e. "5.5 ++ [multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] 9". By default, the multiplication sign is a centered dot. ++ If instead a cross should be shown (as is usual in the USA), the third char of \a formatCode can ++ be set to 'c'. The inserted multiplication signs are the UTF-8 characters 215 (0xD7) for the ++ cross and 183 (0xB7) for the dot. ++ ++ Examples for \a formatCode: ++ \li \c g normal format code behaviour. If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large, ++ normal scientific format is used ++ \li \c gb If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large, scientific format is used with ++ beautifully typeset decimal powers and a dot as multiplication sign ++ \li \c ebc All numbers are in scientific format with beautifully typeset decimal power and a cross as ++ multiplication sign ++ \li \c fb illegal format code, since fixed format doesn't support (or need) beautifully typeset decimal ++ powers. Format code will be reduced to 'f'. ++ \li \c hello illegal format code, since first char is not 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' or 'G'. Current format ++ code will not be changed. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setNumberFormat(const QString &formatCode) ++{ ++ if (formatCode.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed formatCode is empty"; ++ return; ++ } ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ ++ // interpret first char as number format char: ++ QString allowedFormatChars(QLatin1String("eEfgG")); ++ if (allowedFormatChars.contains(formatCode.at(0))) ++ { ++ mNumberFormatChar = QLatin1Char(formatCode.at(0).toLatin1()); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (first char not in 'eEfgG'):" << formatCode; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (formatCode.length() < 2) ++ { ++ mNumberBeautifulPowers = false; ++ mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // interpret second char as indicator for beautiful decimal powers: ++ if (formatCode.at(1) == QLatin1Char('b') && (mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('e') || mNumberFormatChar == QLatin1Char('g'))) ++ { ++ mNumberBeautifulPowers = true; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (second char not 'b' or first char neither 'e' nor 'g'):" << formatCode; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (formatCode.length() < 3) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // interpret third char as indicator for dot or cross multiplication symbol: ++ if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('c')) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = true; ++ } else if (formatCode.at(2) == QLatin1Char('d')) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid number format code (third char neither 'c' nor 'd'):" << formatCode; ++ return; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the precision of the tick label numbers. See QLocale::toString(double i, char f, int prec) ++ for details. The effect of precisions are most notably for number Formats starting with 'e', see ++ \ref setNumberFormat ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision(int precision) ++{ ++ if (mNumberPrecision != precision) ++ { ++ mNumberPrecision = precision; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach inside the ++ plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than ++ zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so ++ they won't collide with the ticks. ++ ++ \see setSubTickLength, setTickLengthIn, setTickLengthOut ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLength(int inside, int outside) ++{ ++ setTickLengthIn(inside); ++ setTickLengthOut(outside); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the inward ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will reach ++ inside the plot. ++ ++ \see setTickLengthOut, setTickLength, setSubTickLength ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLengthIn(int inside) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn != inside) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn = inside; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the outward ticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the ticks will reach ++ outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels and axis label will ++ increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks. ++ ++ \see setTickLengthIn, setTickLength, setSubTickLength ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickLengthOut(int outside) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut != outside) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut = outside; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether sub tick marks are displayed. ++ ++ Sub ticks are only potentially visible if (major) ticks are also visible (see \ref setTicks) ++ ++ \see setTicks ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSubTicks(bool show) ++{ ++ if (mSubTicks != show) ++ { ++ mSubTicks = show; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside ++ the plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a outside is greater ++ than zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis accordingly, ++ so they won't collide with the ticks. ++ ++ \see setTickLength, setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLengthOut ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSubTickLength(int inside, int outside) ++{ ++ setSubTickLengthIn(inside); ++ setSubTickLengthOut(outside); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the inward subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the subticks will reach inside ++ the plot. ++ ++ \see setSubTickLengthOut, setSubTickLength, setTickLength ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthIn(int inside) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn != inside) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn = inside; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the length of the outward subticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the subticks will reach ++ outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels will increase their ++ distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks. ++ ++ \see setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLength, setTickLength ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthOut(int outside) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut != outside) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut = outside; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen, the axis base line is drawn with. ++ ++ \see setTickPen, setSubTickPen ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setBasePen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mBasePen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen, tick marks will be drawn with. ++ ++ \see setTickLength, setBasePen ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setTickPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mTickPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen, subtick marks will be drawn with. ++ ++ \see setSubTickCount, setSubTickLength, setBasePen ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSubTickPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSubTickPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font of the axis label. ++ ++ \see setLabelColor ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setLabelFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ if (mLabelFont != font) ++ { ++ mLabelFont = font; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color of the axis label. ++ ++ \see setLabelFont ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setLabelColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mLabelColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the text of the axis label that will be shown below/above or next to the axis, depending on ++ its orientation. To disable axis labels, pass an empty string as \a str. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setLabel(const QString &str) ++{ ++ if (mLabel != str) ++ { ++ mLabel = str; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the distance between the tick labels and the axis label. ++ ++ \see setTickLabelPadding, setPadding ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setLabelPadding(int padding) ++{ ++ if (mAxisPainter->labelPadding != padding) ++ { ++ mAxisPainter->labelPadding = padding; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the padding of the axis. ++ ++ When \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is enabled, the padding is the additional outer most space, ++ that is left blank. ++ ++ The axis padding has no meaning if \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is disabled. ++ ++ \see setLabelPadding, setTickLabelPadding ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setPadding(int padding) ++{ ++ if (mPadding != padding) ++ { ++ mPadding = padding; ++ mCachedMarginValid = false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the offset the axis has to its axis rect side. ++ ++ If an axis rect side has multiple axes and automatic margin calculation is enabled for that side, ++ only the offset of the inner most axis has meaning (even if it is set to be invisible). The ++ offset of the other, outer axes is controlled automatically, to place them at appropriate ++ positions. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setOffset(int offset) ++{ ++ mAxisPainter->offset = offset; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font that is used for tick labels when they are selected. ++ ++ \see setTickLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ if (font != mSelectedTickLabelFont) ++ { ++ mSelectedTickLabelFont = font; ++ // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font that is used for the axis label when it is selected. ++ ++ \see setLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mSelectedLabelFont = font; ++ // don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is always done with non-selected fonts ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color that is used for tick labels when they are selected. ++ ++ \see setTickLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ if (color != mSelectedTickLabelColor) ++ { ++ mSelectedTickLabelColor = color; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color that is used for the axis label when it is selected. ++ ++ \see setLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mSelectedLabelColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that is used to draw the axis base line when selected. ++ ++ \see setBasePen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedBasePen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedBasePen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks when selected. ++ ++ \see setTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedTickPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that is used to draw the subticks when selected. ++ ++ \see setSubTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setSelectedSubTickPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedSubTickPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the style for the lower axis ending. See the documentation of QCPLineEnding for available ++ styles. ++ ++ For horizontal axes, this method refers to the left ending, for vertical axes the bottom ending. ++ Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with \ref ++ setRangeReversed. ++ ++ \see setUpperEnding ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setLowerEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending) ++{ ++ mAxisPainter->lowerEnding = ending; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the style for the upper axis ending. See the documentation of QCPLineEnding for available ++ styles. ++ ++ For horizontal axes, this method refers to the right ending, for vertical axes the top ending. ++ Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with \ref ++ setRangeReversed. ++ ++ \see setLowerEnding ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setUpperEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending) ++{ ++ mAxisPainter->upperEnding = ending; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLinear, \a diff is added to the lower and upper ++ bounds of the range. The range is simply moved by \a diff. ++ ++ If the scale type is \ref stLogarithmic, the range bounds are multiplied by \a diff. This ++ corresponds to an apparent "linear" move in logarithmic scaling by a distance of log(diff). ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::moveRange(double diff) ++{ ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ mRange.lower += diff; ++ mRange.upper += diff; ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ mRange.lower *= diff; ++ mRange.upper *= diff; ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the center of the current axis range. For ++ example, if \a factor is 2.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at the axis ++ range center won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates around ++ the center will have moved symmetrically closer). ++ ++ If you wish to scale around a different coordinate than the current axis range center, use the ++ overload \ref scaleRange(double factor, double center). ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::scaleRange(double factor) ++{ ++ scaleRange(factor, range().center()); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the coordinate \a center. For example, if \a ++ factor is 2.0, \a center is 1.0, then the axis range will double its size, and the point at ++ coordinate 1.0 won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e. coordinates ++ around 1.0 will have moved symmetrically closer to 1.0). ++ ++ \see scaleRange(double factor) ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::scaleRange(double factor, double center) ++{ ++ QCPRange oldRange = mRange; ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ QCPRange newRange; ++ newRange.lower = (mRange.lower-center)*factor + center; ++ newRange.upper = (mRange.upper-center)*factor + center; ++ if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) ++ mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ if ((mRange.upper < 0 && center < 0) || (mRange.upper > 0 && center > 0)) // make sure center has same sign as range ++ { ++ QCPRange newRange; ++ newRange.lower = qPow(mRange.lower/center, factor)*center; ++ newRange.upper = qPow(mRange.upper/center, factor)*center; ++ if (QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) ++ mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Center of scaling operation doesn't lie in same logarithmic sign domain as range:" << center; ++ } ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange); ++ emit rangeChanged(mRange, oldRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Scales the range of this axis to have a certain scale \a ratio to \a otherAxis. The scaling will ++ be done around the center of the current axis range. ++ ++ For example, if \a ratio is 1, this axis is the \a yAxis and \a otherAxis is \a xAxis, graphs ++ plotted with those axes will appear in a 1:1 aspect ratio, independent of the aspect ratio the ++ axis rect has. ++ ++ This is an operation that changes the range of this axis once, it doesn't fix the scale ratio ++ indefinitely. Note that calling this function in the constructor of the QCustomPlot's parent ++ won't have the desired effect, since the widget dimensions aren't defined yet, and a resizeEvent ++ will follow. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setScaleRatio(const QCPAxis *otherAxis, double ratio) ++{ ++ int otherPixelSize, ownPixelSize; ++ ++ if (otherAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->width(); ++ else ++ otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->height(); ++ ++ if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ ownPixelSize = axisRect()->width(); ++ else ++ ownPixelSize = axisRect()->height(); ++ ++ double newRangeSize = ratio*otherAxis->range().size()*ownPixelSize/(double)otherPixelSize; ++ setRange(range().center(), newRangeSize, Qt::AlignCenter); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Changes the axis range such that all plottables associated with this axis are fully visible in ++ that dimension. ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::rescale(bool onlyVisiblePlottables) ++{ ++ QList p = plottables(); ++ QCPRange newRange; ++ bool haveRange = false; ++ for (int i=0; irealVisibility() && onlyVisiblePlottables) ++ continue; ++ QCPRange plottableRange; ++ bool currentFoundRange; ++ QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth; ++ if (mScaleType == stLogarithmic) ++ signDomain = (mRange.upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive); ++ if (p.at(i)->keyAxis() == this) ++ plottableRange = p.at(i)->getKeyRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain); ++ else ++ plottableRange = p.at(i)->getValueRange(currentFoundRange, signDomain); ++ if (currentFoundRange) ++ { ++ if (!haveRange) ++ newRange = plottableRange; ++ else ++ newRange.expand(plottableRange); ++ haveRange = true; ++ } ++ } ++ if (haveRange) ++ { ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable ++ { ++ double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, in case validRange returned false for other reason ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center-mRange.size()/2.0; ++ newRange.upper = center+mRange.size()/2.0; ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower); ++ newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(mRange.upper/mRange.lower); ++ } ++ } ++ setRange(newRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Transforms \a value, in pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget, to axis coordinates. ++*/ ++double QCPAxis::pixelToCoord(double value) const ++{ ++ if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return (value-mAxisRect->left())/(double)mAxisRect->width()*mRange.size()+mRange.lower; ++ else ++ return -(value-mAxisRect->left())/(double)mAxisRect->width()*mRange.size()+mRange.upper; ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (value-mAxisRect->left())/(double)mAxisRect->width())*mRange.lower; ++ else ++ return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (mAxisRect->left()-value)/(double)mAxisRect->width())*mRange.upper; ++ } ++ } else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return (mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/(double)mAxisRect->height()*mRange.size()+mRange.lower; ++ else ++ return -(mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/(double)mAxisRect->height()*mRange.size()+mRange.upper; ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (mAxisRect->bottom()-value)/(double)mAxisRect->height())*mRange.lower; ++ else ++ return qPow(mRange.upper/mRange.lower, (value-mAxisRect->bottom())/(double)mAxisRect->height())*mRange.upper; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Transforms \a value, in coordinates of the axis, to pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget. ++*/ ++double QCPAxis::coordToPixel(double value) const ++{ ++ if (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return (value-mRange.lower)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left(); ++ else ++ return (mRange.upper-value)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left(); ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ if (value >= 0 && mRange.upper < 0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range ++ return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->right()+200 : mAxisRect->left()-200; ++ else if (value <= 0 && mRange.upper > 0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range ++ return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->left()-200 : mAxisRect->right()+200; ++ else ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return qLn(value/mRange.lower)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left(); ++ else ++ return qLn(mRange.upper/value)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->width()+mAxisRect->left(); ++ } ++ } ++ } else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ if (mScaleType == stLinear) ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return mAxisRect->bottom()-(value-mRange.lower)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->height(); ++ else ++ return mAxisRect->bottom()-(mRange.upper-value)/mRange.size()*mAxisRect->height(); ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ if (value >= 0 && mRange.upper < 0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range ++ return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->top()-200 : mAxisRect->bottom()+200; ++ else if (value <= 0 && mRange.upper > 0) // invalid value for logarithmic scale, just draw it outside visible range ++ return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->bottom()+200 : mAxisRect->top()-200; ++ else ++ { ++ if (!mRangeReversed) ++ return mAxisRect->bottom()-qLn(value/mRange.lower)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->height(); ++ else ++ return mAxisRect->bottom()-qLn(mRange.upper/value)/qLn(mRange.upper/mRange.lower)*mAxisRect->height(); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the part of the axis that is hit by \a pos (in pixels). The return value of this function ++ is independent of the user-selectable parts defined with \ref setSelectableParts. Further, this ++ function does not change the current selection state of the axis. ++ ++ If the axis is not visible (\ref setVisible), this function always returns \ref spNone. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++QCPAxis::SelectablePart QCPAxis::getPartAt(const QPointF &pos) const ++{ ++ if (!mVisible) ++ return spNone; ++ ++ if (mAxisPainter->axisSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ return spAxis; ++ else if (mAxisPainter->tickLabelsSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ return spTickLabels; ++ else if (mAxisPainter->labelSelectionBox().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ return spAxisLabel; ++ else ++ return spNone; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPAxis::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot) return -1; ++ SelectablePart part = getPartAt(pos); ++ if ((onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(part)) || part == spNone) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (details) ++ details->setValue(part); ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the plottables that have this axis as key or value axis. ++ ++ If you are only interested in plottables of type QCPGraph, see \ref graphs. ++ ++ \see graphs, items ++*/ ++QList QCPAxis::plottables() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (!mParentPlot) return result; ++ ++ for (int i=0; imPlottables.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)->keyAxis() == this ||mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)->valueAxis() == this) ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the graphs that have this axis as key or value axis. ++ ++ \see plottables, items ++*/ ++QList QCPAxis::graphs() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (!mParentPlot) return result; ++ ++ for (int i=0; imGraphs.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)->keyAxis() == this || mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)->valueAxis() == this) ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis. An item is considered ++ associated with an axis if at least one of its positions uses the axis as key or value axis. ++ ++ \see plottables, graphs ++*/ ++QList QCPAxis::items() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (!mParentPlot) return result; ++ ++ for (int itemId=0; itemIdmItems.size(); ++itemId) ++ { ++ QList positions = mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)->positions(); ++ for (int posId=0; posIdkeyAxis() == this || positions.at(posId)->valueAxis() == this) ++ { ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Transforms a margin side to the logically corresponding axis type. (QCP::msLeft to ++ QCPAxis::atLeft, QCP::msRight to QCPAxis::atRight, etc.) ++*/ ++QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(QCP::MarginSide side) ++{ ++ switch (side) ++ { ++ case QCP::msLeft: return atLeft; ++ case QCP::msRight: return atRight; ++ case QCP::msTop: return atTop; ++ case QCP::msBottom: return atBottom; ++ default: break; ++ } ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid margin side passed:" << (int)side; ++ return atLeft; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the axis type that describes the opposite axis of an axis with the specified \a type. ++*/ ++QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::opposite(QCPAxis::AxisType type) ++{ ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case atLeft: return atRight; break; ++ case atRight: return atLeft; break; ++ case atBottom: return atTop; break; ++ case atTop: return atBottom; break; ++ default: qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis type"; return atLeft; break; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAxis::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ SelectablePart part = details.value(); ++ if (mSelectableParts.testFlag(part)) ++ { ++ SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts; ++ setSelectedParts(additive ? mSelectedParts^part : part); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAxis::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts; ++ setSelectedParts(mSelectedParts & ~mSelectableParts); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing axis lines. ++ ++ This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++ ++ \see setAntialiased ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeAxes); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the axis with the specified \a painter, using the internal QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QVector subTickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter ++ QVector tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter ++ QVector tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter ++ tickPositions.reserve(mTickVector.size()); ++ tickLabels.reserve(mTickVector.size()); ++ subTickPositions.reserve(mSubTickVector.size()); ++ ++ if (mTicks) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; itype = mAxisType; ++ mAxisPainter->basePen = getBasePen(); ++ mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont(); ++ mAxisPainter->labelColor = getLabelColor(); ++ mAxisPainter->label = mLabel; ++ mAxisPainter->substituteExponent = mNumberBeautifulPowers; ++ mAxisPainter->tickPen = getTickPen(); ++ mAxisPainter->subTickPen = getSubTickPen(); ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = getTickLabelFont(); ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelColor = getTickLabelColor(); ++ mAxisPainter->axisRect = mAxisRect->rect(); ++ mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport(); ++ mAxisPainter->abbreviateDecimalPowers = mScaleType == stLogarithmic; ++ mAxisPainter->reversedEndings = mRangeReversed; ++ mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions; ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels; ++ mAxisPainter->subTickPositions = subTickPositions; ++ mAxisPainter->draw(painter); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Prepares the internal tick vector, sub tick vector and tick label vector. This is done by calling ++ QCPAxisTicker::generate on the currently installed ticker. ++ ++ If a change in the label text/count is detected, the cached axis margin is invalidated to make ++ sure the next margin calculation recalculates the label sizes and returns an up-to-date value. ++*/ ++void QCPAxis::setupTickVectors() ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot) return; ++ if ((!mTicks && !mTickLabels && !mGrid->visible()) || mRange.size() <= 0) return; ++ ++ QVector oldLabels = mTickVectorLabels; ++ mTicker->generate(mRange, mParentPlot->locale(), mNumberFormatChar, mNumberPrecision, mTickVector, mSubTicks ? &mSubTickVector : 0, mTickLabels ? &mTickVectorLabels : 0); ++ mCachedMarginValid &= mTickVectorLabels == oldLabels; // if labels have changed, margin might have changed, too ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that is used to draw the axis base line. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedBasePen or mBasePen. ++*/ ++QPen QCPAxis::getBasePen() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedBasePen : mBasePen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedTickPen or mTickPen. ++*/ ++QPen QCPAxis::getTickPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedTickPen : mTickPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that is used to draw the subticks. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedSubTickPen or mSubTickPen. ++*/ ++QPen QCPAxis::getSubTickPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxis) ? mSelectedSubTickPen : mSubTickPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the font that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedTickLabelFont or mTickLabelFont. ++*/ ++QFont QCPAxis::getTickLabelFont() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelFont : mTickLabelFont; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the font that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedLabelFont or mLabelFont. ++*/ ++QFont QCPAxis::getLabelFont() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelFont : mLabelFont; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the color that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedTickLabelColor or mTickLabelColor. ++*/ ++QColor QCPAxis::getTickLabelColor() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spTickLabels) ? mSelectedTickLabelColor : mTickLabelColor; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the color that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the selection state, this ++ is either mSelectedLabelColor or mLabelColor. ++*/ ++QColor QCPAxis::getLabelColor() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spAxisLabel) ? mSelectedLabelColor : mLabelColor; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the appropriate outward margin for this axis. It is needed if \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is set to true on the parent axis rect. An axis with axis type \ref ++ atLeft will return an appropriate left margin, \ref atBottom will return an appropriate bottom ++ margin and so forth. For the calculation, this function goes through similar steps as \ref draw, ++ so changing one function likely requires the modification of the other one as well. ++ ++ The margin consists of the outward tick length, tick label padding, tick label size, label ++ padding, label size, and padding. ++ ++ The margin is cached internally, so repeated calls while leaving the axis range, fonts, etc. ++ unchanged are very fast. ++*/ ++int QCPAxis::calculateMargin() ++{ ++ if (!mVisible) // if not visible, directly return 0, don't cache 0 because we can't react to setVisible in QCPAxis ++ return 0; ++ ++ if (mCachedMarginValid) ++ return mCachedMargin; ++ ++ // run through similar steps as QCPAxis::draw, and calculate margin needed to fit axis and its labels ++ int margin = 0; ++ ++ QVector tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector passed to QCPAxisPainter ++ QVector tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter ++ tickPositions.reserve(mTickVector.size()); ++ tickLabels.reserve(mTickVector.size()); ++ ++ if (mTicks) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; itype = mAxisType; ++ mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont(); ++ mAxisPainter->label = mLabel; ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = mTickLabelFont; ++ mAxisPainter->axisRect = mAxisRect->rect(); ++ mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport(); ++ mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions; ++ mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels; ++ margin += mAxisPainter->size(); ++ margin += mPadding; ++ ++ mCachedMargin = margin; ++ mCachedMarginValid = true; ++ return margin; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCP::Interaction QCPAxis::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectAxes; ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisPainterPrivate ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAxisPainterPrivate ++ ++ \internal ++ \brief (Private) ++ ++ This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface. ++ ++ It is used by QCPAxis to do the low-level drawing of axis backbone, tick marks, tick labels and ++ axis label. It also buffers the labels to reduce replot times. The parameters are configured by ++ directly accessing the public member variables. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance. Make sure to not create a new instance on every ++ redraw, to utilize the caching mechanisms. ++*/ ++QCPAxisPainterPrivate::QCPAxisPainterPrivate(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ type(QCPAxis::atLeft), ++ basePen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ lowerEnding(QCPLineEnding::esNone), ++ upperEnding(QCPLineEnding::esNone), ++ labelPadding(0), ++ tickLabelPadding(0), ++ tickLabelRotation(0), ++ tickLabelSide(QCPAxis::lsOutside), ++ substituteExponent(true), ++ numberMultiplyCross(false), ++ tickLengthIn(5), ++ tickLengthOut(0), ++ subTickLengthIn(2), ++ subTickLengthOut(0), ++ tickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ subTickPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap)), ++ offset(0), ++ abbreviateDecimalPowers(false), ++ reversedEndings(false), ++ mParentPlot(parentPlot), ++ mLabelCache(16) // cache at most 16 (tick) labels ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPAxisPainterPrivate::~QCPAxisPainterPrivate() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the axis with the specified \a painter. ++ ++ The selection boxes (mAxisSelectionBox, mTickLabelsSelectionBox, mLabelSelectionBox) are set ++ here, too. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QByteArray newHash = generateLabelParameterHash(); ++ if (newHash != mLabelParameterHash) ++ { ++ mLabelCache.clear(); ++ mLabelParameterHash = newHash; ++ } ++ ++ QPoint origin; ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case QCPAxis::atLeft: origin = axisRect.bottomLeft() +QPoint(-offset, 0); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atRight: origin = axisRect.bottomRight()+QPoint(+offset, 0); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atTop: origin = axisRect.topLeft() +QPoint(0, -offset); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atBottom: origin = axisRect.bottomLeft() +QPoint(0, +offset); break; ++ } ++ ++ double xCor = 0, yCor = 0; // paint system correction, for pixel exact matches (affects baselines and ticks of top/right axes) ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case QCPAxis::atTop: yCor = -1; break; ++ case QCPAxis::atRight: xCor = 1; break; ++ default: break; ++ } ++ int margin = 0; ++ // draw baseline: ++ QLineF baseLine; ++ painter->setPen(basePen); ++ if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ++ baseLine.setPoints(origin+QPointF(xCor, yCor), origin+QPointF(axisRect.width()+xCor, yCor)); ++ else ++ baseLine.setPoints(origin+QPointF(xCor, yCor), origin+QPointF(xCor, -axisRect.height()+yCor)); ++ if (reversedEndings) ++ baseLine = QLineF(baseLine.p2(), baseLine.p1()); // won't make a difference for line itself, but for line endings later ++ painter->drawLine(baseLine); ++ ++ // draw ticks: ++ if (!tickPositions.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(tickPen); ++ int tickDir = (type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight) ? -1 : 1; // direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left axis and left for right axis) ++ if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; idrawLine(QLineF(tickPositions.at(i)+xCor, origin.y()-tickLengthOut*tickDir+yCor, tickPositions.at(i)+xCor, origin.y()+tickLengthIn*tickDir+yCor)); ++ } else ++ { ++ for (int i=0; idrawLine(QLineF(origin.x()-tickLengthOut*tickDir+xCor, tickPositions.at(i)+yCor, origin.x()+tickLengthIn*tickDir+xCor, tickPositions.at(i)+yCor)); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw subticks: ++ if (!subTickPositions.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(subTickPen); ++ // direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left axis and left for right axis) ++ int tickDir = (type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight) ? -1 : 1; ++ if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; idrawLine(QLineF(subTickPositions.at(i)+xCor, origin.y()-subTickLengthOut*tickDir+yCor, subTickPositions.at(i)+xCor, origin.y()+subTickLengthIn*tickDir+yCor)); ++ } else ++ { ++ for (int i=0; idrawLine(QLineF(origin.x()-subTickLengthOut*tickDir+xCor, subTickPositions.at(i)+yCor, origin.x()+subTickLengthIn*tickDir+xCor, subTickPositions.at(i)+yCor)); ++ } ++ } ++ margin += qMax(0, qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)); ++ ++ // draw axis base endings: ++ bool antialiasingBackup = painter->antialiasing(); ++ painter->setAntialiasing(true); // always want endings to be antialiased, even if base and ticks themselves aren't ++ painter->setBrush(QBrush(basePen.color())); ++ QCPVector2D baseLineVector(baseLine.dx(), baseLine.dy()); ++ if (lowerEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ lowerEnding.draw(painter, QCPVector2D(baseLine.p1())-baseLineVector.normalized()*lowerEnding.realLength()*(lowerEnding.inverted()?-1:1), -baseLineVector); ++ if (upperEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ upperEnding.draw(painter, QCPVector2D(baseLine.p2())+baseLineVector.normalized()*upperEnding.realLength()*(upperEnding.inverted()?-1:1), baseLineVector); ++ painter->setAntialiasing(antialiasingBackup); ++ ++ // tick labels: ++ QRect oldClipRect; ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside) // if using inside labels, clip them to the axis rect ++ { ++ oldClipRect = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect(); ++ painter->setClipRect(axisRect); ++ } ++ QSize tickLabelsSize(0, 0); // size of largest tick label, for offset calculation of axis label ++ if (!tickLabels.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) ++ margin += tickLabelPadding; ++ painter->setFont(tickLabelFont); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(tickLabelColor)); ++ const int maxLabelIndex = qMin(tickPositions.size(), tickLabels.size()); ++ int distanceToAxis = margin; ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside) ++ distanceToAxis = -(qMax(tickLengthIn, subTickLengthIn)+tickLabelPadding); ++ for (int i=0; isetClipRect(oldClipRect); ++ ++ // axis label: ++ QRect labelBounds; ++ if (!label.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ margin += labelPadding; ++ painter->setFont(labelFont); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(labelColor)); ++ labelBounds = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, label); ++ if (type == QCPAxis::atLeft) ++ { ++ QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform(); ++ painter->translate((origin.x()-margin-labelBounds.height()), origin.y()); ++ painter->rotate(-90); ++ painter->drawText(0, 0, axisRect.height(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label); ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ } ++ else if (type == QCPAxis::atRight) ++ { ++ QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform(); ++ painter->translate((origin.x()+margin+labelBounds.height()), origin.y()-axisRect.height()); ++ painter->rotate(90); ++ painter->drawText(0, 0, axisRect.height(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label); ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ } ++ else if (type == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ painter->drawText(origin.x(), origin.y()-margin-labelBounds.height(), axisRect.width(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label); ++ else if (type == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ painter->drawText(origin.x(), origin.y()+margin, axisRect.width(), labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label); ++ } ++ ++ // set selection boxes: ++ int selectionTolerance = 0; ++ if (mParentPlot) ++ selectionTolerance = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "mParentPlot is null"; ++ int selAxisOutSize = qMax(qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut), selectionTolerance); ++ int selAxisInSize = selectionTolerance; ++ int selTickLabelSize; ++ int selTickLabelOffset; ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) ++ { ++ selTickLabelSize = (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width()); ++ selTickLabelOffset = qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)+tickLabelPadding; ++ } else ++ { ++ selTickLabelSize = -(QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height() : tickLabelsSize.width()); ++ selTickLabelOffset = -(qMax(tickLengthIn, subTickLengthIn)+tickLabelPadding); ++ } ++ int selLabelSize = labelBounds.height(); ++ int selLabelOffset = qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)+(!tickLabels.isEmpty() && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside ? tickLabelPadding+selTickLabelSize : 0)+labelPadding; ++ if (type == QCPAxis::atLeft) ++ { ++ mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selAxisOutSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selAxisInSize, axisRect.bottom()); ++ mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selTickLabelOffset-selTickLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()-selTickLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom()); ++ mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selLabelOffset-selLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()-selLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom()); ++ } else if (type == QCPAxis::atRight) ++ { ++ mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()-selAxisInSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selAxisOutSize, axisRect.bottom()); ++ mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()+selTickLabelOffset+selTickLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selTickLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom()); ++ mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(origin.x()+selLabelOffset+selLabelSize, axisRect.top(), origin.x()+selLabelOffset, axisRect.bottom()); ++ } else if (type == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ { ++ mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selAxisOutSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selAxisInSize); ++ mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selTickLabelOffset-selTickLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()-selTickLabelOffset); ++ mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selLabelOffset-selLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()-selLabelOffset); ++ } else if (type == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ { ++ mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()-selAxisInSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selAxisOutSize); ++ mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()+selTickLabelOffset+selTickLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selTickLabelOffset); ++ mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords(axisRect.left(), origin.y()+selLabelOffset+selLabelSize, axisRect.right(), origin.y()+selLabelOffset); ++ } ++ mAxisSelectionBox = mAxisSelectionBox.normalized(); ++ mTickLabelsSelectionBox = mTickLabelsSelectionBox.normalized(); ++ mLabelSelectionBox = mLabelSelectionBox.normalized(); ++ // draw hitboxes for debug purposes: ++ //painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ //painter->drawRects(QVector() << mAxisSelectionBox << mTickLabelsSelectionBox << mLabelSelectionBox); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the size ("margin" in QCPAxisRect context, so measured perpendicular to the axis backbone ++ direction) needed to fit the axis. ++*/ ++int QCPAxisPainterPrivate::size() const ++{ ++ int result = 0; ++ ++ // get length of tick marks pointing outwards: ++ if (!tickPositions.isEmpty()) ++ result += qMax(0, qMax(tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut)); ++ ++ // calculate size of tick labels: ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) ++ { ++ QSize tickLabelsSize(0, 0); ++ if (!tickLabels.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; ibufferDevicePixelRatio())); ++ result.append(QByteArray::number(tickLabelRotation)); ++ result.append(QByteArray::number((int)tickLabelSide)); ++ result.append(QByteArray::number((int)substituteExponent)); ++ result.append(QByteArray::number((int)numberMultiplyCross)); ++ result.append(tickLabelColor.name().toLatin1()+QByteArray::number(tickLabelColor.alpha(), 16)); ++ result.append(tickLabelFont.toString().toLatin1()); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws a single tick label with the provided \a painter, utilizing the internal label cache to ++ significantly speed up drawing of labels that were drawn in previous calls. The tick label is ++ always bound to an axis, the distance to the axis is controllable via \a distanceToAxis in ++ pixels. The pixel position in the axis direction is passed in the \a position parameter. Hence ++ for the bottom axis, \a position would indicate the horizontal pixel position (not coordinate), ++ at which the label should be drawn. ++ ++ In order to later draw the axis label in a place that doesn't overlap with the tick labels, the ++ largest tick label size is needed. This is acquired by passing a \a tickLabelsSize to the \ref ++ drawTickLabel calls during the process of drawing all tick labels of one axis. In every call, \a ++ tickLabelsSize is expanded, if the drawn label exceeds the value \a tickLabelsSize currently ++ holds. ++ ++ The label is drawn with the font and pen that are currently set on the \a painter. To draw ++ superscripted powers, the font is temporarily made smaller by a fixed factor (see \ref ++ getTickLabelData). ++*/ ++void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::placeTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double position, int distanceToAxis, const QString &text, QSize *tickLabelsSize) ++{ ++ // warning: if you change anything here, also adapt getMaxTickLabelSize() accordingly! ++ if (text.isEmpty()) return; ++ QSize finalSize; ++ QPointF labelAnchor; ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case QCPAxis::atLeft: labelAnchor = QPointF(axisRect.left()-distanceToAxis-offset, position); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atRight: labelAnchor = QPointF(axisRect.right()+distanceToAxis+offset, position); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atTop: labelAnchor = QPointF(position, axisRect.top()-distanceToAxis-offset); break; ++ case QCPAxis::atBottom: labelAnchor = QPointF(position, axisRect.bottom()+distanceToAxis+offset); break; ++ } ++ if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching)) // label caching enabled ++ { ++ CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.take(text); // attempt to get label from cache ++ if (!cachedLabel) // no cached label existed, create it ++ { ++ cachedLabel = new CachedLabel; ++ TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(painter->font(), text); ++ cachedLabel->offset = getTickLabelDrawOffset(labelData)+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft(); ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare(1.0, mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio())) ++ { ++ cachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size()*mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio()); ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ cachedLabel->pixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(mParentPlot->devicePixelRatio()); ++#endif ++ } else ++ cachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size()); ++ cachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size()); ++ cachedLabel->pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent); ++ QCPPainter cachePainter(&cachedLabel->pixmap); ++ cachePainter.setPen(painter->pen()); ++ drawTickLabel(&cachePainter, -labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().x(), -labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().y(), labelData); ++ } ++ // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels): ++ bool labelClippedByBorder = false; ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) ++ { ++ if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ++ labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x()+cachedLabel->pixmap.width()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.right() || labelAnchor.x()+cachedLabel->offset.x() < viewportRect.left(); ++ else ++ labelClippedByBorder = labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y()+cachedLabel->pixmap.height()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio() > viewportRect.bottom() || labelAnchor.y()+cachedLabel->offset.y() < viewportRect.top(); ++ } ++ if (!labelClippedByBorder) ++ { ++ painter->drawPixmap(labelAnchor+cachedLabel->offset, cachedLabel->pixmap); ++ finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio(); ++ } ++ mLabelCache.insert(text, cachedLabel); // return label to cache or insert for the first time if newly created ++ } else // label caching disabled, draw text directly on surface: ++ { ++ TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(painter->font(), text); ++ QPointF finalPosition = labelAnchor + getTickLabelDrawOffset(labelData); ++ // if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw it (only for outside tick labels): ++ bool labelClippedByBorder = false; ++ if (tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) ++ { ++ if (QCPAxis::orientation(type) == Qt::Horizontal) ++ labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.x()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.width()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left()) > viewportRect.right() || finalPosition.x()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left() < viewportRect.left(); ++ else ++ labelClippedByBorder = finalPosition.y()+(labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.height()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top()) > viewportRect.bottom() || finalPosition.y()+labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top() < viewportRect.top(); ++ } ++ if (!labelClippedByBorder) ++ { ++ drawTickLabel(painter, finalPosition.x(), finalPosition.y(), labelData); ++ finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size(); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger: ++ if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width()) ++ tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width()); ++ if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height()) ++ tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height()); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function. ++ ++ Draws the tick label specified in \a labelData with \a painter at the pixel positions \a x and \a ++ y. This function is used by \ref placeTickLabel to create new tick labels for the cache, or to ++ directly draw the labels on the QCustomPlot surface when label caching is disabled, i.e. when ++ QCP::phCacheLabels plotting hint is not set. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::drawTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y, const TickLabelData &labelData) const ++{ ++ // backup painter settings that we're about to change: ++ QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform(); ++ QFont oldFont = painter->font(); ++ ++ // transform painter to position/rotation: ++ painter->translate(x, y); ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation)) ++ painter->rotate(tickLabelRotation); ++ ++ // draw text: ++ if (!labelData.expPart.isEmpty()) // indicator that beautiful powers must be used ++ { ++ painter->setFont(labelData.baseFont); ++ painter->drawText(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.basePart); ++ if (!labelData.suffixPart.isEmpty()) ++ painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1+labelData.expBounds.width(), 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.suffixPart); ++ painter->setFont(labelData.expFont); ++ painter->drawText(labelData.baseBounds.width()+1, 0, labelData.expBounds.width(), labelData.expBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.expPart); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setFont(labelData.baseFont); ++ painter->drawText(0, 0, labelData.totalBounds.width(), labelData.totalBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, labelData.basePart); ++ } ++ ++ // reset painter settings to what it was before: ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ painter->setFont(oldFont); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function. ++ ++ Transforms the passed \a text and \a font to a tickLabelData structure that can then be further ++ processed by \ref getTickLabelDrawOffset and \ref drawTickLabel. It splits the text into base and ++ exponent if necessary (member substituteExponent) and calculates appropriate bounding boxes. ++*/ ++QCPAxisPainterPrivate::TickLabelData QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelData(const QFont &font, const QString &text) const ++{ ++ TickLabelData result; ++ ++ // determine whether beautiful decimal powers should be used ++ bool useBeautifulPowers = false; ++ int ePos = -1; // first index of exponent part, text before that will be basePart, text until eLast will be expPart ++ int eLast = -1; // last index of exponent part, rest of text after this will be suffixPart ++ if (substituteExponent) ++ { ++ ePos = text.indexOf(QLatin1Char('e')); ++ if (ePos > 0 && text.at(ePos-1).isDigit()) ++ { ++ eLast = ePos; ++ while (eLast+1 < text.size() && (text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('+') || text.at(eLast+1) == QLatin1Char('-') || text.at(eLast+1).isDigit())) ++ ++eLast; ++ if (eLast > ePos) // only if also to right of 'e' is a digit/+/- interpret it as beautifiable power ++ useBeautifulPowers = true; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // calculate text bounding rects and do string preparation for beautiful decimal powers: ++ result.baseFont = font; ++ if (result.baseFont.pointSizeF() > 0) // might return -1 if specified with setPixelSize, in that case we can't do correction in next line ++ result.baseFont.setPointSizeF(result.baseFont.pointSizeF()+0.05); // QFontMetrics.boundingRect has a bug for exact point sizes that make the results oscillate due to internal rounding ++ if (useBeautifulPowers) ++ { ++ // split text into parts of number/symbol that will be drawn normally and part that will be drawn as exponent: ++ result.basePart = text.left(ePos); ++ result.suffixPart = text.mid(eLast+1); // also drawn normally but after exponent ++ // in log scaling, we want to turn "1*10^n" into "10^n", else add multiplication sign and decimal base: ++ if (abbreviateDecimalPowers && result.basePart == QLatin1String("1")) ++ result.basePart = QLatin1String("10"); ++ else ++ result.basePart += (numberMultiplyCross ? QString(QChar(215)) : QString(QChar(183))) + QLatin1String("10"); ++ result.expPart = text.mid(ePos+1, eLast-ePos); ++ // clip "+" and leading zeros off expPart: ++ while (result.expPart.length() > 2 && result.expPart.at(1) == QLatin1Char('0')) // length > 2 so we leave one zero when numberFormatChar is 'e' ++ result.expPart.remove(1, 1); ++ if (!result.expPart.isEmpty() && result.expPart.at(0) == QLatin1Char('+')) ++ result.expPart.remove(0, 1); ++ // prepare smaller font for exponent: ++ result.expFont = font; ++ if (result.expFont.pointSize() > 0) ++ result.expFont.setPointSize(result.expFont.pointSize()*0.75); ++ else ++ result.expFont.setPixelSize(result.expFont.pixelSize()*0.75); ++ // calculate bounding rects of base part(s), exponent part and total one: ++ result.baseBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.basePart); ++ result.expBounds = QFontMetrics(result.expFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.expPart); ++ if (!result.suffixPart.isEmpty()) ++ result.suffixBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.suffixPart); ++ result.totalBounds = result.baseBounds.adjusted(0, 0, result.expBounds.width()+result.suffixBounds.width()+2, 0); // +2 consists of the 1 pixel spacing between base and exponent (see drawTickLabel) and an extra pixel to include AA ++ } else // useBeautifulPowers == false ++ { ++ result.basePart = text; ++ result.totalBounds = QFontMetrics(result.baseFont).boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, result.basePart); ++ } ++ result.totalBounds.moveTopLeft(QPoint(0, 0)); // want bounding box aligned top left at origin, independent of how it was created, to make further processing simpler ++ ++ // calculate possibly different bounding rect after rotation: ++ result.rotatedTotalBounds = result.totalBounds; ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation)) ++ { ++ QTransform transform; ++ transform.rotate(tickLabelRotation); ++ result.rotatedTotalBounds = transform.mapRect(result.rotatedTotalBounds); ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function. ++ ++ Calculates the offset at which the top left corner of the specified tick label shall be drawn. ++ The offset is relative to a point right next to the tick the label belongs to. ++ ++ This function is thus responsible for e.g. centering tick labels under ticks and positioning them ++ appropriately when they are rotated. ++*/ ++QPointF QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelDrawOffset(const TickLabelData &labelData) const ++{ ++ /* ++ calculate label offset from base point at tick (non-trivial, for best visual appearance): short ++ explanation for bottom axis: The anchor, i.e. the point in the label that is placed ++ horizontally under the corresponding tick is always on the label side that is closer to the ++ axis (e.g. the left side of the text when we're rotating clockwise). On that side, the height ++ is halved and the resulting point is defined the anchor. This way, a 90 degree rotated text ++ will be centered under the tick (i.e. displaced horizontally by half its height). At the same ++ time, a 45 degree rotated text will "point toward" its tick, as is typical for rotated tick ++ labels. ++ */ ++ bool doRotation = !qFuzzyIsNull(tickLabelRotation); ++ bool flip = qFuzzyCompare(qAbs(tickLabelRotation), 90.0); // perfect +/-90 degree flip. Indicates vertical label centering on vertical axes. ++ double radians = tickLabelRotation/180.0*M_PI; ++ int x=0, y=0; ++ if ((type == QCPAxis::atLeft && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atRight && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at right side of tick label ++ { ++ if (doRotation) ++ { ++ if (tickLabelRotation > 0) ++ { ++ x = -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width(); ++ y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height(); ++ y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : +qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -labelData.totalBounds.width(); ++ y = -labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } ++ } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atRight && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atLeft && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at left side of tick label ++ { ++ if (doRotation) ++ { ++ if (tickLabelRotation > 0) ++ { ++ x = +qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height(); ++ y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } else ++ { ++ x = 0; ++ y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0 : -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ x = 0; ++ y = -labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ } ++ } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atTop && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atBottom && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at bottom side of tick label ++ { ++ if (doRotation) ++ { ++ if (tickLabelRotation > 0) ++ { ++ x = -qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()+qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ y = -qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qCos(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height(); ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ y = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height(); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0; ++ y = -labelData.totalBounds.height(); ++ } ++ } else if ((type == QCPAxis::atBottom && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsOutside) || (type == QCPAxis::atTop && tickLabelSide == QCPAxis::lsInside)) // Anchor at top side of tick label ++ { ++ if (doRotation) ++ { ++ if (tickLabelRotation > 0) ++ { ++ x = +qSin(radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ y = 0; ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -qCos(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width()-qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.height()/2.0; ++ y = +qSin(-radians)*labelData.totalBounds.width(); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ x = -labelData.totalBounds.width()/2.0; ++ y = 0; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return QPointF(x, y); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Simulates the steps done by \ref placeTickLabel by calculating bounding boxes of the text label ++ to be drawn, depending on number format etc. Since only the largest tick label is wanted for the ++ margin calculation, the passed \a tickLabelsSize is only expanded, if it's currently set to a ++ smaller width/height. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getMaxTickLabelSize(const QFont &font, const QString &text, QSize *tickLabelsSize) const ++{ ++ // note: this function must return the same tick label sizes as the placeTickLabel function. ++ QSize finalSize; ++ if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels) && mLabelCache.contains(text)) // label caching enabled and have cached label ++ { ++ const CachedLabel *cachedLabel = mLabelCache.object(text); ++ finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size()/mParentPlot->bufferDevicePixelRatio(); ++ } else // label caching disabled or no label with this text cached: ++ { ++ TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData(font, text); ++ finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size(); ++ } ++ ++ // expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger: ++ if (finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width()) ++ tickLabelsSize->setWidth(finalSize.width()); ++ if (finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height()) ++ tickLabelsSize->setHeight(finalSize.height()); ++} ++/* end of 'src/axis/axis.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/scatterstyle.cpp', size 17420 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPScatterStyle ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPScatterStyle ++ \brief Represents the visual appearance of scatter points ++ ++ This class holds information about shape, color and size of scatter points. In plottables like ++ QCPGraph it is used to store how scatter points shall be drawn. For example, \ref ++ QCPGraph::setScatterStyle takes a QCPScatterStyle instance. ++ ++ A scatter style consists of a shape (\ref setShape), a line color (\ref setPen) and possibly a ++ fill (\ref setBrush), if the shape provides a fillable area. Further, the size of the shape can ++ be controlled with \ref setSize. ++ ++ \section QCPScatterStyle-defining Specifying a scatter style ++ ++ You can set all these configurations either by calling the respective functions on an instance: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-creation-1 ++ ++ Or you can use one of the various constructors that take different parameter combinations, making ++ it easy to specify a scatter style in a single call, like so: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-creation-2 ++ ++ \section QCPScatterStyle-undefinedpen Leaving the color/pen up to the plottable ++ ++ There are two constructors which leave the pen undefined: \ref QCPScatterStyle() and \ref ++ QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size). If those constructors are used, a call to \ref ++ isPenDefined will return false. It leads to scatter points that inherit the pen from the ++ plottable that uses the scatter style. Thus, if such a scatter style is passed to QCPGraph, the line ++ color of the graph (\ref QCPGraph::setPen) will be used by the scatter points. This makes ++ it very convenient to set up typical scatter settings: ++ ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpscatterstyle-shortcreation ++ ++ Notice that it wasn't even necessary to explicitly call a QCPScatterStyle constructor. This works ++ because QCPScatterStyle provides a constructor that can transform a \ref ScatterShape directly ++ into a QCPScatterStyle instance (that's the \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size) ++ constructor with a default for \a size). In those cases, C++ allows directly supplying a \ref ++ ScatterShape, where actually a QCPScatterStyle is expected. ++ ++ \section QCPScatterStyle-custompath-and-pixmap Custom shapes and pixmaps ++ ++ QCPScatterStyle supports drawing custom shapes and arbitrary pixmaps as scatter points. ++ ++ For custom shapes, you can provide a QPainterPath with the desired shape to the \ref ++ setCustomPath function or call the constructor that takes a painter path. The scatter shape will ++ automatically be set to \ref ssCustom. ++ ++ For pixmaps, you call \ref setPixmap with the desired QPixmap. Alternatively you can use the ++ constructor that takes a QPixmap. The scatter shape will automatically be set to \ref ssPixmap. ++ Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isNone() const ++ ++ Returns whether the scatter shape is \ref ssNone. ++ ++ \see setShape ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isPenDefined() const ++ ++ Returns whether a pen has been defined for this scatter style. ++ ++ The pen is undefined if a constructor is called that does not carry \a pen as parameter. Those ++ are \ref QCPScatterStyle() and \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size). If the pen ++ is undefined, the pen of the respective plottable will be used for drawing scatters. ++ ++ If a pen was defined for this scatter style instance, and you now wish to undefine the pen, call ++ \ref undefinePen. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with size set to 6. No shape, pen or brush is defined. ++ ++ Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter color will be inherited ++ from the plottable that uses this scatter style. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle() : ++ mSize(6), ++ mShape(ssNone), ++ mPen(Qt::NoPen), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mPenDefined(false) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape and size to \a size. No pen or ++ brush is defined. ++ ++ Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter color will be inherited ++ from the plottable that uses this scatter style. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mShape(shape), ++ mPen(Qt::NoPen), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mPenDefined(false) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen color set to \a color, ++ and size to \a size. No brush is defined, i.e. the scatter point will not be filled. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, double size) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mShape(shape), ++ mPen(QPen(color)), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mPenDefined(true) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen color set to \a color, ++ the brush color to \a fill (with a solid pattern), and size to \a size. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor &fill, double size) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mShape(shape), ++ mPen(QPen(color)), ++ mBrush(QBrush(fill)), ++ mPenDefined(true) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen set to \a pen, the ++ brush to \a brush, and size to \a size. ++ ++ \warning In some cases it might be tempting to directly use a pen style like Qt::NoPen as \a pen ++ and a color like Qt::blue as \a brush. Notice however, that the corresponding call\n ++ QCPScatterStyle(QCPScatterShape::ssCircle, Qt::NoPen, Qt::blue, 5)\n ++ doesn't necessarily lead C++ to use this constructor in some cases, but might mistake ++ Qt::NoPen for a QColor and use the ++ \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor &fill, double size) ++ constructor instead (which will lead to an unexpected look of the scatter points). To prevent ++ this, be more explicit with the parameter types. For example, use QBrush(Qt::blue) ++ instead of just Qt::blue, to clearly point out to the compiler that this constructor is ++ wanted. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush, double size) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mShape(shape), ++ mPen(pen), ++ mBrush(brush), ++ mPenDefined(pen.style() != Qt::NoPen) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance which will show the specified \a pixmap. The scatter shape ++ is set to \ref ssPixmap. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(const QPixmap &pixmap) : ++ mSize(5), ++ mShape(ssPixmap), ++ mPen(Qt::NoPen), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mPixmap(pixmap), ++ mPenDefined(false) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with a custom shape that is defined via \a customPath. The ++ scatter shape is set to \ref ssCustom. ++ ++ The custom shape line will be drawn with \a pen and filled with \a brush. The size has a slightly ++ different meaning than for built-in scatter points: The custom path will be drawn scaled by a ++ factor of \a size/6.0. Since the default \a size is 6, the custom path will appear at a its ++ natural size by default. To double the size of the path for example, set \a size to 12. ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle(const QPainterPath &customPath, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush, double size) : ++ mSize(size), ++ mShape(ssCustom), ++ mPen(pen), ++ mBrush(brush), ++ mCustomPath(customPath), ++ mPenDefined(pen.style() != Qt::NoPen) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Copies the specified \a properties from the \a other scatter style to this scatter style. ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setFromOther(const QCPScatterStyle &other, ScatterProperties properties) ++{ ++ if (properties.testFlag(spPen)) ++ { ++ setPen(other.pen()); ++ if (!other.isPenDefined()) ++ undefinePen(); ++ } ++ if (properties.testFlag(spBrush)) ++ setBrush(other.brush()); ++ if (properties.testFlag(spSize)) ++ setSize(other.size()); ++ if (properties.testFlag(spShape)) ++ { ++ setShape(other.shape()); ++ if (other.shape() == ssPixmap) ++ setPixmap(other.pixmap()); ++ else if (other.shape() == ssCustom) ++ setCustomPath(other.customPath()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the size (pixel diameter) of the drawn scatter points to \a size. ++ ++ \see setShape ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setSize(double size) ++{ ++ mSize = size; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the shape to \a shape. ++ ++ Note that the calls \ref setPixmap and \ref setCustomPath automatically set the shape to \ref ++ ssPixmap and \ref ssCustom, respectively. ++ ++ \see setSize ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setShape(QCPScatterStyle::ScatterShape shape) ++{ ++ mShape = shape; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw scatter points to \a pen. ++ ++ If the pen was previously undefined (see \ref isPenDefined), the pen is considered defined after ++ a call to this function, even if \a pen is Qt::NoPen. If you have defined a pen ++ previously by calling this function and now wish to undefine the pen, call \ref undefinePen. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPenDefined = true; ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill scatter points to \a brush. Note that not all scatter ++ shapes have fillable areas. For example, \ref ssPlus does not while \ref ssCircle does. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pixmap that will be drawn as scatter point to \a pixmap. ++ ++ Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap. ++ ++ The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssPixmap. ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap) ++{ ++ setShape(ssPixmap); ++ mPixmap = pixmap; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the custom shape that will be drawn as scatter point to \a customPath. ++ ++ The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssCustom. ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::setCustomPath(const QPainterPath &customPath) ++{ ++ setShape(ssCustom); ++ mCustomPath = customPath; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets this scatter style to have an undefined pen (see \ref isPenDefined for what an undefined pen ++ implies). ++ ++ A call to \ref setPen will define a pen. ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::undefinePen() ++{ ++ mPenDefined = false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Applies the pen and the brush of this scatter style to \a painter. If this scatter style has an ++ undefined pen (\ref isPenDefined), sets the pen of \a painter to \a defaultPen instead. ++ ++ This function is used by plottables (or any class that wants to draw scatters) just before a ++ number of scatters with this style shall be drawn with the \a painter. ++ ++ \see drawShape ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::applyTo(QCPPainter *painter, const QPen &defaultPen) const ++{ ++ painter->setPen(mPenDefined ? mPen : defaultPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a pos. ++ ++ This function does not modify the pen or the brush on the painter, as \ref applyTo is meant to be ++ called before scatter points are drawn with \ref drawShape. ++ ++ \see applyTo ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &pos) const ++{ ++ drawShape(painter, pos.x(), pos.y()); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a x and \a y. ++*/ ++void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y) const ++{ ++ double w = mSize/2.0; ++ switch (mShape) ++ { ++ case ssNone: break; ++ case ssDot: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(x, y), QPointF(x+0.0001, y)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssCross: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y-w, x+w, y+w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y+w, x+w, y-w)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssPlus: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y, x+w, y)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+w, x, y-w)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssCircle: ++ { ++ painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x , y), w, w); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssDisc: ++ { ++ QBrush b = painter->brush(); ++ painter->setBrush(painter->pen().color()); ++ painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x , y), w, w); ++ painter->setBrush(b); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssSquare: ++ { ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssDiamond: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y, x, y-w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y-w, x+w, y)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x+w, y, x, y+w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+w, x-w, y)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssStar: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y, x+w, y)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+w, x, y-w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y-w*0.707, x+w*0.707, y+w*0.707)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y+w*0.707, x+w*0.707, y-w*0.707)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssTriangle: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y+0.755*w, x+w, y+0.755*w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x+w, y+0.755*w, x, y-0.977*w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y-0.977*w, x-w, y+0.755*w)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssTriangleInverted: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y-0.755*w, x+w, y-0.755*w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x+w, y-0.755*w, x, y+0.977*w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+0.977*w, x-w, y-0.755*w)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssCrossSquare: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y-w, x+w*0.95, y+w*0.95)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y+w*0.95, x+w*0.95, y-w)); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssPlusSquare: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y, x+w*0.95, y)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+w, x, y-w)); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(x-w, y-w, mSize, mSize)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssCrossCircle: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y-w*0.707, x+w*0.670, y+w*0.670)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w*0.707, y+w*0.670, x+w*0.670, y-w*0.707)); ++ painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssPlusCircle: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x-w, y, x+w, y)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF( x, y+w, x, y-w)); ++ painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssPeace: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x, y-w, x, y+w)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x, y, x-w*0.707, y+w*0.707)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(x, y, x+w*0.707, y+w*0.707)); ++ painter->drawEllipse(QPointF(x, y), w, w); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssPixmap: ++ { ++ const double widthHalf = mPixmap.width()*0.5; ++ const double heightHalf = mPixmap.height()*0.5; ++#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(4, 8, 0) ++ const QRectF clipRect = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect().adjusted(-widthHalf, -heightHalf, widthHalf, heightHalf); ++#else ++ const QRectF clipRect = painter->clipBoundingRect().adjusted(-widthHalf, -heightHalf, widthHalf, heightHalf); ++#endif ++ if (clipRect.contains(x, y)) ++ painter->drawPixmap(x-widthHalf, y-heightHalf, mPixmap); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ssCustom: ++ { ++ QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform(); ++ painter->translate(x, y); ++ painter->scale(mSize/6.0, mSize/6.0); ++ painter->drawPath(mCustomPath); ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/scatterstyle.cpp' */ ++ ++//amalgamation: add datacontainer.cpp ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottable.cpp', size 38861 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPSelectionDecorator ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPSelectionDecorator ++ \brief Controls how a plottable's data selection is drawn ++ ++ Each \ref QCPAbstractPlottable instance has one \ref QCPSelectionDecorator (accessible via \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionDecorator) and uses it when drawing selected segments of its data. ++ ++ The selection decorator controls both pen (\ref setPen) and brush (\ref setBrush), as well as the ++ scatter style (\ref setScatterStyle) if the plottable draws scatters. Since a \ref ++ QCPScatterStyle is itself composed of different properties such as color shape and size, the ++ decorator allows specifying exactly which of those properties shall be used for the selected data ++ point, via \ref setUsedScatterProperties. ++ ++ A \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass instance can be passed to a plottable via \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator, allowing greater customizability of the appearance ++ of selected segments. ++ ++ Use \ref copyFrom to easily transfer the settings of one decorator to another one. This is ++ especially useful since plottables take ownership of the passed selection decorator, and thus the ++ same decorator instance can not be passed to multiple plottables. ++ ++ Selection decorators can also themselves perform drawing operations by reimplementing \ref ++ drawDecoration, which is called by the plottable's draw method. The base class \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecorator does not make use of this however. For example, \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket draws brackets around selected data segments. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPSelectionDecorator instance with default values ++*/ ++QCPSelectionDecorator::QCPSelectionDecorator() : ++ mPen(QColor(80, 80, 255), 2.5), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, QPen(Qt::blue, 2), Qt::NoBrush, 6.0), ++ mUsedScatterProperties(QCPScatterStyle::spPen), ++ mPlottable(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPSelectionDecorator::~QCPSelectionDecorator() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used by the parent plottable to draw selected data segments. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used by the parent plottable to draw selected data segments. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the scatter style that will be used by the parent plottable to draw scatters in selected ++ data segments. ++ ++ \a usedProperties specifies which parts of the passed \a scatterStyle will be used by the ++ plottable. The used properties can also be changed via \ref setUsedScatterProperties. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &scatterStyle, QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties usedProperties) ++{ ++ mScatterStyle = scatterStyle; ++ setUsedScatterProperties(usedProperties); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Use this method to define which properties of the scatter style (set via \ref setScatterStyle) ++ will be used for selected data segments. All properties of the scatter style that are not ++ specified in \a properties will remain as specified in the plottable's original scatter style. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::setUsedScatterProperties(const QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties &properties) ++{ ++ mUsedScatterProperties = properties; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen of \a painter to the pen of this selection decorator. ++ ++ \see applyBrush, getFinalScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::applyPen(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush of \a painter to the brush of this selection decorator. ++ ++ \see applyPen, getFinalScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::applyBrush(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the scatter style that the parent plottable shall use for selected scatter points. The ++ plottable's original (unselected) scatter style must be passed as \a unselectedStyle. Depending ++ on the setting of \ref setUsedScatterProperties, the returned scatter style is a mixture of this ++ selecion decorator's scatter style (\ref setScatterStyle), and \a unselectedStyle. ++ ++ \see applyPen, applyBrush, setScatterStyle ++*/ ++QCPScatterStyle QCPSelectionDecorator::getFinalScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &unselectedStyle) const ++{ ++ QCPScatterStyle result(unselectedStyle); ++ result.setFromOther(mScatterStyle, mUsedScatterProperties); ++ ++ // if style shall inherit pen from plottable (has no own pen defined), give it the selected ++ // plottable pen explicitly, so it doesn't use the unselected plottable pen when used in the ++ // plottable: ++ if (!result.isPenDefined()) ++ result.setPen(mPen); ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Copies all properties (e.g. color, fill, scatter style) of the \a other selection decorator to ++ this selection decorator. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::copyFrom(const QCPSelectionDecorator *other) ++{ ++ setPen(other->pen()); ++ setBrush(other->brush()); ++ setScatterStyle(other->scatterStyle(), other->usedScatterProperties()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method is called by all plottables' draw methods to allow custom selection decorations to be ++ drawn. Use the passed \a painter to perform the drawing operations. \a selection carries the data ++ selection for which the decoration shall be drawn. ++ ++ The default base class implementation of \ref QCPSelectionDecorator has no special decoration, so ++ this method does nothing. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecorator::drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(painter) ++ Q_UNUSED(selection) ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called as soon as a selection decorator is associated with a plottable, by a call ++ to \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator. This way the selection decorator can obtain a pointer to the plottable that uses it (e.g. to access ++ data points via the \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D interface). ++ ++ If the selection decorator was already added to a different plottable before, this method aborts ++ the registration and returns false. ++*/ ++bool QCPSelectionDecorator::registerWithPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) ++{ ++ if (!mPlottable) ++ { ++ mPlottable = plottable; ++ return true; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "This selection decorator is already registered with plottable:" << reinterpret_cast(mPlottable); ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAbstractPlottable ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAbstractPlottable ++ \brief The abstract base class for all data representing objects in a plot. ++ ++ It defines a very basic interface like name, pen, brush, visibility etc. Since this class is ++ abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or create a subclass yourself to ++ create new ways of displaying data (see "Creating own plottables" below). Plottables that display ++ one-dimensional data (i.e. data points have a single key dimension and one or multiple values at ++ each key) are based off of the template subclass \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D, see details ++ there. ++ ++ All further specifics are in the subclasses, for example: ++ \li A normal graph with possibly a line and/or scatter points \ref QCPGraph ++ (typically created with \ref QCustomPlot::addGraph) ++ \li A parametric curve: \ref QCPCurve ++ \li A bar chart: \ref QCPBars ++ \li A statistical box plot: \ref QCPStatisticalBox ++ \li A color encoded two-dimensional map: \ref QCPColorMap ++ \li An OHLC/Candlestick chart: \ref QCPFinancial ++ ++ \section plottables-subclassing Creating own plottables ++ ++ Subclassing directly from QCPAbstractPlottable is only recommended if you wish to display ++ two-dimensional data like \ref QCPColorMap, i.e. two logical key dimensions and one (or more) ++ data dimensions. If you want to display data with only one logical key dimension, you should ++ rather derive from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D. ++ ++ If subclassing QCPAbstractPlottable directly, these are the pure virtual functions you must ++ implement: ++ \li \ref selectTest ++ \li \ref draw ++ \li \ref drawLegendIcon ++ \li \ref getKeyRange ++ \li \ref getValueRange ++ ++ See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do. ++ ++ For drawing your plot, you can use the \ref coordsToPixels functions to translate a point in plot ++ coordinates to pixel coordinates. This function is quite convenient, because it takes the ++ orientation of the key and value axes into account for you (x and y are swapped when the key axis ++ is vertical and the value axis horizontal). If you are worried about performance (i.e. you need ++ to translate many points in a loop like QCPGraph), you can directly use \ref ++ QCPAxis::coordToPixel. However, you must then take care about the orientation of the axis ++ yourself. ++ ++ Here are some important members you inherit from QCPAbstractPlottable: ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
QCustomPlot *\b mParentPlotA pointer to the parent QCustomPlot instance. The parent plot is inferred from the axes that are passed in the constructor.
QString \b mNameThe name of the plottable.
QPen \b mPenThe generic pen of the plottable. You should use this pen for the most prominent data representing lines in the plottable ++ (e.g QCPGraph uses this pen for its graph lines and scatters)
QBrush \b mBrushThe generic brush of the plottable. You should use this brush for the most prominent fillable structures in the plottable ++ (e.g. QCPGraph uses this brush to control filling under the graph)
QPointer<\ref QCPAxis> \b mKeyAxis, \b mValueAxisThe key and value axes this plottable is attached to. Call their QCPAxis::coordToPixel functions to translate coordinates ++ to pixels in either the key or value dimension. Make sure to check whether the pointer is null before using it. If one of ++ the axes is null, don't draw the plottable.
\ref QCPSelectionDecorator \b mSelectionDecoratorThe currently set selection decorator which specifies how selected data of the plottable shall be drawn and decorated. ++ When drawing your data, you must consult this decorator for the appropriate pen/brush before drawing unselected/selected data segments. ++ Finally, you should call its \ref QCPSelectionDecorator::drawDecoration method at the end of your \ref draw implementation.
\ref QCP::SelectionType \b mSelectableIn which composition, if at all, this plottable's data may be selected. Enforcing this setting on the data selection is done ++ by QCPAbstractPlottable automatically.
\ref QCPDataSelection \b mSelectionHolds the current selection state of the plottable's data, i.e. the selected data ranges (\ref QCPDataRange).
++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPSelectionDecorator *QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionDecorator() const ++ ++ Provides access to the selection decorator of this plottable. The selection decorator controls ++ how selected data ranges are drawn (e.g. their pen color and fill), see \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecorator for details. ++ ++ If you wish to use an own \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass, pass an instance of it to \ref ++ setSelectionDecorator. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPAbstractPlottable::selected() const ++ ++ Returns true if there are any data points of the plottable currently selected. Use \ref selection ++ to retrieve the current \ref QCPDataSelection. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataSelection QCPAbstractPlottable::selection() const ++ ++ Returns a \ref QCPDataSelection encompassing all the data points that are currently selected on ++ this plottable. ++ ++ \see selected, setSelection, setSelectable ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPPlottableInterface1D *QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D() ++ ++ If this plottable is a one-dimensional plottable, i.e. it implements the \ref ++ QCPPlottableInterface1D, returns the \a this pointer with that type. Otherwise (e.g. in the case ++ of a \ref QCPColorMap) returns zero. ++ ++ You can use this method to gain read access to data coordinates while holding a pointer to the ++ abstract base class only. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++/* start of documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRect &rect) const = 0 ++ \internal ++ ++ called by QCPLegend::draw (via QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw) to create a graphical representation ++ of this plottable inside \a rect, next to the plottable name. ++ ++ The passed \a painter has its cliprect set to \a rect, so painting outside of \a rect won't ++ appear outside the legend icon border. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the coordinate range that all data in this plottable span in the key axis dimension. For ++ logarithmic plots, one can set \a inSignDomain to either \ref QCP::sdNegative or \ref ++ QCP::sdPositive in order to restrict the returned range to that sign domain. E.g. when only ++ negative range is wanted, set \a inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdNegative and all positive points ++ will be ignored for range calculation. For no restriction, just set \a inSignDomain to \ref ++ QCP::sdBoth (default). \a foundRange is an output parameter that indicates whether a range could ++ be found or not. If this is false, you shouldn't use the returned range (e.g. no points in data). ++ ++ Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since the range returned by ++ this function may have size zero (e.g. when there is only one data point). In this case \a ++ foundRange would return true, but the returned range is not a valid range in terms of \ref ++ QCPRange::validRange. ++ ++ \see rescaleAxes, getValueRange ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the coordinate range that the data points in the specified key range (\a inKeyRange) span ++ in the value axis dimension. For logarithmic plots, one can set \a inSignDomain to either \ref ++ QCP::sdNegative or \ref QCP::sdPositive in order to restrict the returned range to that sign ++ domain. E.g. when only negative range is wanted, set \a inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdNegative and ++ all positive points will be ignored for range calculation. For no restriction, just set \a ++ inSignDomain to \ref QCP::sdBoth (default). \a foundRange is an output parameter that indicates ++ whether a range could be found or not. If this is false, you shouldn't use the returned range ++ (e.g. no points in data). ++ ++ If \a inKeyRange has both lower and upper bound set to zero (is equal to QCPRange()), ++ all data points are considered, without any restriction on the keys. ++ ++ Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since the range returned by ++ this function may have size zero (e.g. when there is only one data point). In this case \a ++ foundRange would return true, but the returned range is not a valid range in terms of \ref ++ QCPRange::validRange. ++ ++ \see rescaleAxes, getKeyRange ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++/* start of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged(bool selected) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this plottable has changed, either by user ++ interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelection. The parameter \a selected indicates whether ++ there are any points selected or not. ++ ++ \see selectionChanged(const QCPDataSelection &selection) ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged(const QCPDataSelection &selection) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this plottable has changed, either by user ++ interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelection. The parameter \a selection holds the ++ currently selected data ranges. ++ ++ \see selectionChanged(bool selected) ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectableChanged(QCP::SelectionType selectable); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selectability of this plottable has changed. ++ ++ \see setSelectable ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an abstract plottable which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as ++ its value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance ++ and have perpendicular orientations. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding ++ message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ Since QCPAbstractPlottable is an abstract class that defines the basic interface to plottables, ++ it can't be directly instantiated. ++ ++ You probably want one of the subclasses like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPCurve instead. ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPlottable::QCPAbstractPlottable(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPLayerable(keyAxis->parentPlot(), QString(), keyAxis->axisRect()), ++ mName(), ++ mAntialiasedFill(true), ++ mAntialiasedScatters(true), ++ mPen(Qt::black), ++ mBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mKeyAxis(keyAxis), ++ mValueAxis(valueAxis), ++ mSelectable(QCP::stWhole), ++ mSelectionDecorator(0) ++{ ++ if (keyAxis->parentPlot() != valueAxis->parentPlot()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Parent plot of keyAxis is not the same as that of valueAxis."; ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == valueAxis->orientation()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keyAxis and valueAxis must be orthogonal to each other."; ++ ++ mParentPlot->registerPlottable(this); ++ setSelectionDecorator(new QCPSelectionDecorator); ++} ++ ++QCPAbstractPlottable::~QCPAbstractPlottable() ++{ ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ { ++ delete mSelectionDecorator; ++ mSelectionDecorator = 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The name is the textual representation of this plottable as it is displayed in the legend ++ (\ref QCPLegend). It may contain any UTF-8 characters, including newlines. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setName(const QString &name) ++{ ++ mName = name; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether fills of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not. ++ ++ Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedFill(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAntialiasedFill = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the scatter symbols of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not. ++ ++ Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedScatters(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAntialiasedScatters = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The pen is used to draw basic lines that make up the plottable representation in the ++ plot. ++ ++ For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws its graph lines with this pen. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The brush is used to draw basic fills of the plottable representation in the ++ plot. The Fill can be a color, gradient or texture, see the usage of QBrush. ++ ++ For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws the fill under the graph with this brush, when ++ it's not set to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The key axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is orthogonal ++ to the plottable's value axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the case. ++ The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and the ++ y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis. ++ ++ Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref ++ QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface). ++ ++ \see setValueAxis ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setKeyAxis(QCPAxis *axis) ++{ ++ mKeyAxis = axis; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ The value axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long as it is ++ orthogonal to the plottable's key axis. This function performs no checks to make sure this is the ++ case. The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and ++ the y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis. ++ ++ Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable (or \ref ++ QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph interface). ++ ++ \see setKeyAxis ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setValueAxis(QCPAxis *axis) ++{ ++ mValueAxis = axis; ++} ++ ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which data ranges of this plottable are selected. Selected data ranges are drawn differently ++ (e.g. color) in the plot. This can be controlled via the selection decorator (see \ref ++ selectionDecorator). ++ ++ The entire selection mechanism for plottables is handled automatically when \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectPlottables. You only need to call this function when ++ you wish to change the selection state programmatically. ++ ++ Using \ref setSelectable you can further specify for each plottable whether and to which ++ granularity it is selectable. If \a selection is not compatible with the current \ref ++ QCP::SelectionType set via \ref setSelectable, the resulting selection will be adjusted ++ accordingly (see \ref QCPDataSelection::enforceType). ++ ++ emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state. ++ ++ \see setSelectable, selectTest ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection(QCPDataSelection selection) ++{ ++ selection.enforceType(mSelectable); ++ if (mSelection != selection) ++ { ++ mSelection = selection; ++ emit selectionChanged(selected()); ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelection); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Use this method to set an own QCPSelectionDecorator (subclass) instance. This allows you to ++ customize the visual representation of selected data ranges further than by using the default ++ QCPSelectionDecorator. ++ ++ The plottable takes ownership of the \a decorator. ++ ++ The currently set decorator can be accessed via \ref selectionDecorator. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectionDecorator(QCPSelectionDecorator *decorator) ++{ ++ if (decorator) ++ { ++ if (decorator->registerWithPlottable(this)) ++ { ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) // delete old decorator if necessary ++ delete mSelectionDecorator; ++ mSelectionDecorator = decorator; ++ } ++ } else if (mSelectionDecorator) // just clear decorator ++ { ++ delete mSelectionDecorator; ++ mSelectionDecorator = 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether and to which granularity this plottable can be selected. ++ ++ A selection can happen by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface (When \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables), by dragging a selection rect ++ (When \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode is \ref QCP::srmSelect), or programmatically by ++ calling \ref setSelection. ++ ++ \see setSelection, QCP::SelectionType ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable(QCP::SelectionType selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectable = selectable; ++ QCPDataSelection oldSelection = mSelection; ++ mSelection.enforceType(mSelectable); ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectable); ++ if (mSelection != oldSelection) ++ { ++ emit selectionChanged(selected()); ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelection); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++/*! ++ Convenience function for transforming a key/value pair to pixels on the QCustomPlot surface, ++ taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into account (e.g. whether key ++ represents x or y). ++ ++ \a key and \a value are transformed to the coordinates in pixels and are written to \a x and \a y. ++ ++ \see pixelsToCoords, QCPAxis::coordToPixel ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels(double key, double value, double &x, double &y) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ x = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key); ++ y = valueAxis->coordToPixel(value); ++ } else ++ { ++ y = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key); ++ x = valueAxis->coordToPixel(value); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Transforms the given \a key and \a value to pixel coordinates and returns them in a QPointF. ++*/ ++const QPointF QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels(double key, double value) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(); } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return QPointF(keyAxis->coordToPixel(key), valueAxis->coordToPixel(value)); ++ else ++ return QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(value), keyAxis->coordToPixel(key)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Convenience function for transforming a x/y pixel pair on the QCustomPlot surface to plot coordinates, ++ taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into account (e.g. whether key ++ represents x or y). ++ ++ \a x and \a y are transformed to the plot coordinates and are written to \a key and \a value. ++ ++ \see coordsToPixels, QCPAxis::coordToPixel ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords(double x, double y, double &key, double &value) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(x); ++ value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(y); ++ } else ++ { ++ key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(y); ++ value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(x); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the pixel input \a pixelPos as plot coordinates \a key and \a value. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords(const QPointF &pixelPos, double &key, double &value) const ++{ ++ pixelsToCoords(pixelPos.x(), pixelPos.y(), key, value); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Rescales the key and value axes associated with this plottable to contain all displayed data, so ++ the whole plottable is visible. If the scaling of an axis is logarithmic, rescaleAxes will make ++ sure not to rescale to an illegal range i.e. a range containing different signs and/or zero. ++ Instead it will stay in the current sign domain and ignore all parts of the plottable that lie ++ outside of that domain. ++ ++ \a onlyEnlarge makes sure the ranges are only expanded, never reduced. So it's possible to show ++ multiple plottables in their entirety by multiple calls to rescaleAxes where the first call has ++ \a onlyEnlarge set to false (the default), and all subsequent set to true. ++ ++ \see rescaleKeyAxis, rescaleValueAxis, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes, QCPAxis::rescale ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes(bool onlyEnlarge) const ++{ ++ rescaleKeyAxis(onlyEnlarge); ++ rescaleValueAxis(onlyEnlarge); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Rescales the key axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible. ++ ++ See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleKeyAxis(bool onlyEnlarge) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; return; } ++ ++ QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth; ++ if (keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ signDomain = (keyAxis->range().upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive); ++ ++ bool foundRange; ++ QCPRange newRange = getKeyRange(foundRange, signDomain); ++ if (foundRange) ++ { ++ if (onlyEnlarge) ++ newRange.expand(keyAxis->range()); ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable ++ { ++ double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, in case validRange returned false for other reason ++ if (keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center-keyAxis->range().size()/2.0; ++ newRange.upper = center+keyAxis->range().size()/2.0; ++ } else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(keyAxis->range().upper/keyAxis->range().lower); ++ newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(keyAxis->range().upper/keyAxis->range().lower); ++ } ++ } ++ keyAxis->setRange(newRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Rescales the value axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible. If \a inKeyRange is ++ set to true, only the data points which are in the currently visible key axis range are ++ considered. ++ ++ Returns true if the axis was actually scaled. This might not be the case if this plottable has an ++ invalid range, e.g. because it has no data points. ++ ++ See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour. ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleValueAxis(bool onlyEnlarge, bool inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ QCP::SignDomain signDomain = QCP::sdBoth; ++ if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ signDomain = (valueAxis->range().upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive); ++ ++ bool foundRange; ++ QCPRange newRange = getValueRange(foundRange, signDomain, inKeyRange ? keyAxis->range() : QCPRange()); ++ if (foundRange) ++ { ++ if (onlyEnlarge) ++ newRange.expand(valueAxis->range()); ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable ++ { ++ double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, in case validRange returned false for other reason ++ if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center-valueAxis->range().size()/2.0; ++ newRange.upper = center+valueAxis->range().size()/2.0; ++ } else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower); ++ newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(valueAxis->range().upper/valueAxis->range().lower); ++ } ++ } ++ valueAxis->setRange(newRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds this plottable to the specified \a legend. ++ ++ Creates a QCPPlottableLegendItem which is inserted into the legend. Returns true on success, i.e. ++ when the legend exists and a legend item associated with this plottable isn't already in the ++ legend. ++ ++ If the plottable needs a more specialized representation in the legend, you can create a ++ corresponding subclass of \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem and add it to the legend manually instead ++ of calling this method. ++ ++ \see removeFromLegend, QCPLegend::addItem ++*/ ++bool QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend(QCPLegend *legend) ++{ ++ if (!legend) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (legend->parentPlot() != mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend isn't in the same QCustomPlot as this plottable"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ if (!legend->hasItemWithPlottable(this)) ++ { ++ legend->addItem(new QCPPlottableLegendItem(legend, this)); ++ return true; ++ } else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds this plottable to the legend of the parent QCustomPlot (\ref QCustomPlot::legend). ++ ++ \see removeFromLegend ++*/ ++bool QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend() ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend) ++ return false; ++ else ++ return addToLegend(mParentPlot->legend); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes the plottable from the specified \a legend. This means the \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem ++ that is associated with this plottable is removed. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if the legend exists and a legend item associated with this ++ plottable was found and removed. ++ ++ \see addToLegend, QCPLegend::removeItem ++*/ ++bool QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend(QCPLegend *legend) const ++{ ++ if (!legend) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed legend is null"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ if (QCPPlottableLegendItem *lip = legend->itemWithPlottable(this)) ++ return legend->removeItem(lip); ++ else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes the plottable from the legend of the parent QCustomPlot. ++ ++ \see addToLegend ++*/ ++bool QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend() const ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend) ++ return false; ++ else ++ return removeFromLegend(mParentPlot->legend); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QRect QCPAbstractPlottable::clipRect() const ++{ ++ if (mKeyAxis && mValueAxis) ++ return mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect() & mValueAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect(); ++ else ++ return QRect(); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectPlottables; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing plottable lines. ++ ++ This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++ ++ \see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing plottable fills. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \see setAntialiased, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyFillAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedFill, QCP::aeFills); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing plottable scatter points. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyScattersAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiasedScatters, QCP::aeScatters); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ ++ if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone) ++ { ++ QCPDataSelection newSelection = details.value(); ++ QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection; ++ if (additive) ++ { ++ if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // in whole selection mode, we toggle to no selection even if currently unselected point was hit ++ { ++ if (selected()) ++ setSelection(QCPDataSelection()); ++ else ++ setSelection(newSelection); ++ } else // in all other selection modes we toggle selections of homogeneously selected/unselected segments ++ { ++ if (mSelection.contains(newSelection)) // if entire newSelection is already selected, toggle selection ++ setSelection(mSelection-newSelection); ++ else ++ setSelection(mSelection+newSelection); ++ } ++ } else ++ setSelection(newSelection); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractPlottable::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable != QCP::stNone) ++ { ++ QCPDataSelection selectionBefore = mSelection; ++ setSelection(QCPDataSelection()); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelection != selectionBefore; ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottable.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/item.cpp', size 49269 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemAnchor ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemAnchor ++ \brief An anchor of an item to which positions can be attached to. ++ ++ An item (QCPAbstractItem) may have one or more anchors. Unlike QCPItemPosition, an anchor doesn't ++ control anything on its item, but provides a way to tie other items via their positions to the ++ anchor. ++ ++ For example, a QCPItemRect is defined by its positions \a topLeft and \a bottomRight. ++ Additionally it has various anchors like \a top, \a topRight or \a bottomLeft etc. So you can ++ attach the \a start (which is a QCPItemPosition) of a QCPItemLine to one of the anchors by ++ calling QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor on \a start, passing the wanted anchor of the ++ QCPItemRect. This way the start of the line will now always follow the respective anchor location ++ on the rect item. ++ ++ Note that QCPItemPosition derives from QCPItemAnchor, so every position can also serve as an ++ anchor to other positions. ++ ++ To learn how to provide anchors in your own item subclasses, see the subclassing section of the ++ QCPAbstractItem documentation. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPItemPosition *QCPItemAnchor::toQCPItemPosition() ++ ++ Returns 0 if this instance is merely a QCPItemAnchor, and a valid pointer of type QCPItemPosition* if ++ it actually is a QCPItemPosition (which is a subclass of QCPItemAnchor). ++ ++ This safe downcast functionality could also be achieved with a dynamic_cast. However, QCustomPlot avoids ++ dynamic_cast to work with projects that don't have RTTI support enabled (e.g. -fno-rtti flag with ++ gcc compiler). ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPItemAnchor. You shouldn't create QCPItemAnchor instances directly, even if ++ you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor instead, as ++ explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation. ++*/ ++QCPItemAnchor::QCPItemAnchor(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name, int anchorId) : ++ mName(name), ++ mParentPlot(parentPlot), ++ mParentItem(parentItem), ++ mAnchorId(anchorId) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPItemAnchor::~QCPItemAnchor() ++{ ++ // unregister as parent at children: ++ foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenX.toList()) ++ { ++ if (child->parentAnchorX() == this) ++ child->setParentAnchorX(0); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenX ++ } ++ foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenY.toList()) ++ { ++ if (child->parentAnchorY() == this) ++ child->setParentAnchorY(0); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenY ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemAnchor on the QCustomPlot surface. ++ ++ The pixel information is internally retrieved via QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition of the ++ parent item, QCPItemAnchor is just an intermediary. ++*/ ++QPointF QCPItemAnchor::pixelPosition() const ++{ ++ if (mParentItem) ++ { ++ if (mAnchorId > -1) ++ { ++ return mParentItem->anchorPixelPosition(mAnchorId); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid anchor id set:" << mAnchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent item set"; ++ return QPointF(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Adds \a pos to the childX list of this anchor, which keeps track of which children use this ++ anchor as parent anchor for the respective coordinate. This is necessary to notify the children ++ prior to destruction of the anchor. ++ ++ Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos. ++*/ ++void QCPItemAnchor::addChildX(QCPItemPosition *pos) ++{ ++ if (!mChildrenX.contains(pos)) ++ mChildrenX.insert(pos); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos is child already" << reinterpret_cast(pos); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Removes \a pos from the childX list of this anchor. ++ ++ Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos. ++*/ ++void QCPItemAnchor::removeChildX(QCPItemPosition *pos) ++{ ++ if (!mChildrenX.remove(pos)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos isn't child" << reinterpret_cast(pos); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Adds \a pos to the childY list of this anchor, which keeps track of which children use this ++ anchor as parent anchor for the respective coordinate. This is necessary to notify the children ++ prior to destruction of the anchor. ++ ++ Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos. ++*/ ++void QCPItemAnchor::addChildY(QCPItemPosition *pos) ++{ ++ if (!mChildrenY.contains(pos)) ++ mChildrenY.insert(pos); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos is child already" << reinterpret_cast(pos); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Removes \a pos from the childY list of this anchor. ++ ++ Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos. ++*/ ++void QCPItemAnchor::removeChildY(QCPItemPosition *pos) ++{ ++ if (!mChildrenY.remove(pos)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos isn't child" << reinterpret_cast(pos); ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemPosition ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemPosition ++ \brief Manages the position of an item. ++ ++ Every item has at least one public QCPItemPosition member pointer which provides ways to position the ++ item on the QCustomPlot surface. Some items have multiple positions, for example QCPItemRect has two: ++ \a topLeft and \a bottomRight. ++ ++ QCPItemPosition has a type (\ref PositionType) that can be set with \ref setType. This type ++ defines how coordinates passed to \ref setCoords are to be interpreted, e.g. as absolute pixel ++ coordinates, as plot coordinates of certain axes, etc. For more advanced plots it is also ++ possible to assign different types per X/Y coordinate of the position (see \ref setTypeX, \ref ++ setTypeY). This way an item could be positioned at a fixed pixel distance from the top in the Y ++ direction, while following a plot coordinate in the X direction. ++ ++ A QCPItemPosition may have a parent QCPItemAnchor, see \ref setParentAnchor. This way you can tie ++ multiple items together. If the QCPItemPosition has a parent, its coordinates (\ref setCoords) ++ are considered to be absolute pixels in the reference frame of the parent anchor, where (0, 0) ++ means directly ontop of the parent anchor. For example, You could attach the \a start position of ++ a QCPItemLine to the \a bottom anchor of a QCPItemText to make the starting point of the line ++ always be centered under the text label, no matter where the text is moved to. For more advanced ++ plots, it is possible to assign different parent anchors per X/Y coordinate of the position, see ++ \ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY. This way an item could follow another item in the X ++ direction but stay at a fixed position in the Y direction. Or even follow item A in X, and item B ++ in Y. ++ ++ Note that every QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor and thus can itself be used as parent ++ anchor for other positions. ++ ++ To set the apparent pixel position on the QCustomPlot surface directly, use \ref setPixelPosition. This ++ works no matter what type this QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child situation it is in, as \ref ++ setPixelPosition transforms the coordinates appropriately, to make the position appear at the specified ++ pixel values. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPItemPosition::PositionType *QCPItemPosition::type() const ++ ++ Returns the current position type. ++ ++ If different types were set for X and Y (\ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY), this method returns the ++ type of the X coordinate. In that case rather use \a typeX() and \a typeY(). ++ ++ \see setType ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPItemAnchor *QCPItemPosition::parentAnchor() const ++ ++ Returns the current parent anchor. ++ ++ If different parent anchors were set for X and Y (\ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY), ++ this method returns the parent anchor of the Y coordinate. In that case rather use \a ++ parentAnchorX() and \a parentAnchorY(). ++ ++ \see setParentAnchor ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPItemPosition. You shouldn't create QCPItemPosition instances directly, even if ++ you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createPosition instead, as ++ explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation. ++*/ ++QCPItemPosition::QCPItemPosition(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name) : ++ QCPItemAnchor(parentPlot, parentItem, name), ++ mPositionTypeX(ptAbsolute), ++ mPositionTypeY(ptAbsolute), ++ mKey(0), ++ mValue(0), ++ mParentAnchorX(0), ++ mParentAnchorY(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPItemPosition::~QCPItemPosition() ++{ ++ // unregister as parent at children: ++ // Note: this is done in ~QCPItemAnchor again, but it's important QCPItemPosition does it itself, because only then ++ // the setParentAnchor(0) call the correct QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition function instead of QCPItemAnchor::pixelPosition ++ foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenX.toList()) ++ { ++ if (child->parentAnchorX() == this) ++ child->setParentAnchorX(0); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenX ++ } ++ foreach (QCPItemPosition *child, mChildrenY.toList()) ++ { ++ if (child->parentAnchorY() == this) ++ child->setParentAnchorY(0); // this acts back on this anchor and child removes itself from mChildrenY ++ } ++ // unregister as child in parent: ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ mParentAnchorX->removeChildX(this); ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ mParentAnchorY->removeChildY(this); ++} ++ ++/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */ ++QCPAxisRect *QCPItemPosition::axisRect() const ++{ ++ return mAxisRect.data(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the type of the position. The type defines how the coordinates passed to \ref setCoords ++ should be handled and how the QCPItemPosition should behave in the plot. ++ ++ The possible values for \a type can be separated in two main categories: ++ ++ \li The position is regarded as a point in plot coordinates. This corresponds to \ref ptPlotCoords ++ and requires two axes that define the plot coordinate system. They can be specified with \ref setAxes. ++ By default, the QCustomPlot's x- and yAxis are used. ++ ++ \li The position is fixed on the QCustomPlot surface, i.e. independent of axis ranges. This ++ corresponds to all other types, i.e. \ref ptAbsolute, \ref ptViewportRatio and \ref ++ ptAxisRectRatio. They differ only in the way the absolute position is described, see the ++ documentation of \ref PositionType for details. For \ref ptAxisRectRatio, note that you can specify ++ the axis rect with \ref setAxisRect. By default this is set to the main axis rect. ++ ++ Note that the position type \ref ptPlotCoords is only available (and sensible) when the position ++ has no parent anchor (\ref setParentAnchor). ++ ++ If the type is changed, the apparent pixel position on the plot is preserved. This means ++ the coordinates as retrieved with coords() and set with \ref setCoords may change in the process. ++ ++ This method sets the type for both X and Y directions. It is also possible to set different types ++ for X and Y, see \ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setType(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type) ++{ ++ setTypeX(type); ++ setTypeY(type); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method sets the position type of the X coordinate to \a type. ++ ++ For a detailed description of what a position type is, see the documentation of \ref setType. ++ ++ \see setType, setTypeY ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setTypeX(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type) ++{ ++ if (mPositionTypeX != type) ++ { ++ // if switching from or to coordinate type that isn't valid (e.g. because axes or axis rect ++ // were deleted), don't try to recover the pixelPosition() because it would output a qDebug warning. ++ bool retainPixelPosition = true; ++ if ((mPositionTypeX == ptPlotCoords || type == ptPlotCoords) && (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)) ++ retainPixelPosition = false; ++ if ((mPositionTypeX == ptAxisRectRatio || type == ptAxisRectRatio) && (!mAxisRect)) ++ retainPixelPosition = false; ++ ++ QPointF pixel; ++ if (retainPixelPosition) ++ pixel = pixelPosition(); ++ ++ mPositionTypeX = type; ++ ++ if (retainPixelPosition) ++ setPixelPosition(pixel); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method sets the position type of the Y coordinate to \a type. ++ ++ For a detailed description of what a position type is, see the documentation of \ref setType. ++ ++ \see setType, setTypeX ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setTypeY(QCPItemPosition::PositionType type) ++{ ++ if (mPositionTypeY != type) ++ { ++ // if switching from or to coordinate type that isn't valid (e.g. because axes or axis rect ++ // were deleted), don't try to recover the pixelPosition() because it would output a qDebug warning. ++ bool retainPixelPosition = true; ++ if ((mPositionTypeY == ptPlotCoords || type == ptPlotCoords) && (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis)) ++ retainPixelPosition = false; ++ if ((mPositionTypeY == ptAxisRectRatio || type == ptAxisRectRatio) && (!mAxisRect)) ++ retainPixelPosition = false; ++ ++ QPointF pixel; ++ if (retainPixelPosition) ++ pixel = pixelPosition(); ++ ++ mPositionTypeY = type; ++ ++ if (retainPixelPosition) ++ setPixelPosition(pixel); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the parent of this QCPItemPosition to \a parentAnchor. This means the position will now ++ follow any position changes of the anchor. The local coordinate system of positions with a parent ++ anchor always is absolute pixels, with (0, 0) being exactly on top of the parent anchor. (Hence ++ the type shouldn't be set to \ref ptPlotCoords for positions with parent anchors.) ++ ++ if \a keepPixelPosition is true, the current pixel position of the QCPItemPosition is preserved ++ during reparenting. If it's set to false, the coordinates are set to (0, 0), i.e. the position ++ will be exactly on top of the parent anchor. ++ ++ To remove this QCPItemPosition from any parent anchor, set \a parentAnchor to 0. ++ ++ If the QCPItemPosition previously had no parent and the type is \ref ptPlotCoords, the type is ++ set to \ref ptAbsolute, to keep the position in a valid state. ++ ++ This method sets the parent anchor for both X and Y directions. It is also possible to set ++ different parents for X and Y, see \ref setParentAnchorX, \ref setParentAnchorY. ++*/ ++bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition) ++{ ++ bool successX = setParentAnchorX(parentAnchor, keepPixelPosition); ++ bool successY = setParentAnchorY(parentAnchor, keepPixelPosition); ++ return successX && successY; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method sets the parent anchor of the X coordinate to \a parentAnchor. ++ ++ For a detailed description of what a parent anchor is, see the documentation of \ref setParentAnchor. ++ ++ \see setParentAnchor, setParentAnchorY ++*/ ++bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorX(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition) ++{ ++ // make sure self is not assigned as parent: ++ if (parentAnchor == this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set self as parent anchor" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ // make sure no recursive parent-child-relationships are created: ++ QCPItemAnchor *currentParent = parentAnchor; ++ while (currentParent) ++ { ++ if (QCPItemPosition *currentParentPos = currentParent->toQCPItemPosition()) ++ { ++ // is a QCPItemPosition, might have further parent, so keep iterating ++ if (currentParentPos == this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't create recursive parent-child-relationship" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ currentParent = currentParentPos->parentAnchorX(); ++ } else ++ { ++ // is a QCPItemAnchor, can't have further parent. Now make sure the parent items aren't the ++ // same, to prevent a position being child of an anchor which itself depends on the position, ++ // because they're both on the same item: ++ if (currentParent->mParentItem == mParentItem) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set parent to be an anchor which itself depends on this position" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // if previously no parent set and PosType is still ptPlotCoords, set to ptAbsolute: ++ if (!mParentAnchorX && mPositionTypeX == ptPlotCoords) ++ setTypeX(ptAbsolute); ++ ++ // save pixel position: ++ QPointF pixelP; ++ if (keepPixelPosition) ++ pixelP = pixelPosition(); ++ // unregister at current parent anchor: ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ mParentAnchorX->removeChildX(this); ++ // register at new parent anchor: ++ if (parentAnchor) ++ parentAnchor->addChildX(this); ++ mParentAnchorX = parentAnchor; ++ // restore pixel position under new parent: ++ if (keepPixelPosition) ++ setPixelPosition(pixelP); ++ else ++ setCoords(0, coords().y()); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method sets the parent anchor of the Y coordinate to \a parentAnchor. ++ ++ For a detailed description of what a parent anchor is, see the documentation of \ref setParentAnchor. ++ ++ \see setParentAnchor, setParentAnchorX ++*/ ++bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorY(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition) ++{ ++ // make sure self is not assigned as parent: ++ if (parentAnchor == this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set self as parent anchor" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ // make sure no recursive parent-child-relationships are created: ++ QCPItemAnchor *currentParent = parentAnchor; ++ while (currentParent) ++ { ++ if (QCPItemPosition *currentParentPos = currentParent->toQCPItemPosition()) ++ { ++ // is a QCPItemPosition, might have further parent, so keep iterating ++ if (currentParentPos == this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't create recursive parent-child-relationship" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ currentParent = currentParentPos->parentAnchorY(); ++ } else ++ { ++ // is a QCPItemAnchor, can't have further parent. Now make sure the parent items aren't the ++ // same, to prevent a position being child of an anchor which itself depends on the position, ++ // because they're both on the same item: ++ if (currentParent->mParentItem == mParentItem) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set parent to be an anchor which itself depends on this position" << reinterpret_cast(parentAnchor); ++ return false; ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // if previously no parent set and PosType is still ptPlotCoords, set to ptAbsolute: ++ if (!mParentAnchorY && mPositionTypeY == ptPlotCoords) ++ setTypeY(ptAbsolute); ++ ++ // save pixel position: ++ QPointF pixelP; ++ if (keepPixelPosition) ++ pixelP = pixelPosition(); ++ // unregister at current parent anchor: ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ mParentAnchorY->removeChildY(this); ++ // register at new parent anchor: ++ if (parentAnchor) ++ parentAnchor->addChildY(this); ++ mParentAnchorY = parentAnchor; ++ // restore pixel position under new parent: ++ if (keepPixelPosition) ++ setPixelPosition(pixelP); ++ else ++ setCoords(coords().x(), 0); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the coordinates of this QCPItemPosition. What the coordinates mean, is defined by the type ++ (\ref setType, \ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY). ++ ++ For example, if the type is \ref ptAbsolute, \a key and \a value mean the x and y pixel position ++ on the QCustomPlot surface. In that case the origin (0, 0) is in the top left corner of the ++ QCustomPlot viewport. If the type is \ref ptPlotCoords, \a key and \a value mean a point in the ++ plot coordinate system defined by the axes set by \ref setAxes. By default those are the ++ QCustomPlot's xAxis and yAxis. See the documentation of \ref setType for other available ++ coordinate types and their meaning. ++ ++ If different types were configured for X and Y (\ref setTypeX, \ref setTypeY), \a key and \a ++ value must also be provided in the different coordinate systems. Here, the X type refers to \a ++ key, and the Y type refers to \a value. ++ ++ \see setPixelPosition ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setCoords(double key, double value) ++{ ++ mKey = key; ++ mValue = value; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the coordinates as a QPointF \a pos where pos.x has the meaning of \a key and pos.y the ++ meaning of \a value of the \ref setCoords(double key, double value) method. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setCoords(const QPointF &pos) ++{ ++ setCoords(pos.x(), pos.y()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemPosition on the QCustomPlot surface. It ++ includes all effects of type (\ref setType) and possible parent anchors (\ref setParentAnchor). ++ ++ \see setPixelPosition ++*/ ++QPointF QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition() const ++{ ++ QPointF result; ++ ++ // determine X: ++ switch (mPositionTypeX) ++ { ++ case ptAbsolute: ++ { ++ result.rx() = mKey; ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptViewportRatio: ++ { ++ result.rx() = mKey*mParentPlot->viewport().width(); ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ else ++ result.rx() += mParentPlot->viewport().left(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mAxisRect) ++ { ++ result.rx() = mKey*mAxisRect.data()->width(); ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ result.rx() += mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ else ++ result.rx() += mAxisRect.data()->left(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ result.rx() = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKey); ++ else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ result.rx() = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mValue); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // determine Y: ++ switch (mPositionTypeY) ++ { ++ case ptAbsolute: ++ { ++ result.ry() = mValue; ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptViewportRatio: ++ { ++ result.ry() = mValue*mParentPlot->viewport().height(); ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ else ++ result.ry() += mParentPlot->viewport().top(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mAxisRect) ++ { ++ result.ry() = mValue*mAxisRect.data()->height(); ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ result.ry() += mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ else ++ result.ry() += mAxisRect.data()->top(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ result.ry() = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKey); ++ else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ result.ry() = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mValue); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When \ref setType is \ref ptPlotCoords, this function may be used to specify the axes the ++ coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default they are set to the initial xAxis and ++ yAxis of the QCustomPlot. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setAxes(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) ++{ ++ mKeyAxis = keyAxis; ++ mValueAxis = valueAxis; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When \ref setType is \ref ptAxisRectRatio, this function may be used to specify the axis rect the ++ coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default this is set to the main axis rect of ++ the QCustomPlot. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *axisRect) ++{ ++ mAxisRect = axisRect; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the apparent pixel position. This works no matter what type (\ref setType) this ++ QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child situation it is in, as coordinates are transformed ++ appropriately, to make the position finally appear at the specified pixel values. ++ ++ Only if the type is \ref ptAbsolute and no parent anchor is set, this function's effect is ++ identical to that of \ref setCoords. ++ ++ \see pixelPosition, setCoords ++*/ ++void QCPItemPosition::setPixelPosition(const QPointF &pixelPosition) ++{ ++ double x = pixelPosition.x(); ++ double y = pixelPosition.y(); ++ ++ switch (mPositionTypeX) ++ { ++ case ptAbsolute: ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptViewportRatio: ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ else ++ x -= mParentPlot->viewport().left(); ++ x /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().width(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mAxisRect) ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorX) ++ x -= mParentAnchorX->pixelPosition().x(); ++ else ++ x -= mAxisRect.data()->left(); ++ x /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->width(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ x = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(x); ++ else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ y = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(x); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type x is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ switch (mPositionTypeY) ++ { ++ case ptAbsolute: ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptViewportRatio: ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ else ++ y -= mParentPlot->viewport().top(); ++ y /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().height(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mAxisRect) ++ { ++ if (mParentAnchorY) ++ y -= mParentAnchorY->pixelPosition().y(); ++ else ++ y -= mAxisRect.data()->top(); ++ y /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->height(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptAxisRectRatio, but no axis rect was defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case ptPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ x = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(y); ++ else if (mValueAxis && mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ y = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(y); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item position type y is ptPlotCoords, but no axes were defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ setCoords(x, y); ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAbstractItem ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAbstractItem ++ \brief The abstract base class for all items in a plot. ++ ++ In QCustomPlot, items are supplemental graphical elements that are neither plottables ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable) nor axes (QCPAxis). While plottables are always tied to two axes and thus ++ plot coordinates, items can also be placed in absolute coordinates independent of any axes. Each ++ specific item has at least one QCPItemPosition member which controls the positioning. Some items ++ are defined by more than one coordinate and thus have two or more QCPItemPosition members (For ++ example, QCPItemRect has \a topLeft and \a bottomRight). ++ ++ This abstract base class defines a very basic interface like visibility and clipping. Since this ++ class is abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or create a subclass ++ yourself to create new items. ++ ++ The built-in items are: ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
QCPItemLineA line defined by a start and an end point. May have different ending styles on each side (e.g. arrows).
QCPItemStraightLineA straight line defined by a start and a direction point. Unlike QCPItemLine, the straight line is infinitely long and has no endings.
QCPItemCurveA curve defined by start, end and two intermediate control points. May have different ending styles on each side (e.g. arrows).
QCPItemRectA rectangle
QCPItemEllipseAn ellipse
QCPItemPixmapAn arbitrary pixmap
QCPItemTextA text label
QCPItemBracketA bracket which may be used to reference/highlight certain parts in the plot.
QCPItemTracerAn item that can be attached to a QCPGraph and sticks to its data points, given a key coordinate.
++ ++ \section items-clipping Clipping ++ ++ Items are by default clipped to the main axis rect (they are only visible inside the axis rect). ++ To make an item visible outside that axis rect, disable clipping via \ref setClipToAxisRect ++ "setClipToAxisRect(false)". ++ ++ On the other hand if you want the item to be clipped to a different axis rect, specify it via ++ \ref setClipAxisRect. This clipAxisRect property of an item is only used for clipping behaviour, and ++ in principle is independent of the coordinate axes the item might be tied to via its position ++ members (\ref QCPItemPosition::setAxes). However, it is common that the axis rect for clipping ++ also contains the axes used for the item positions. ++ ++ \section items-using Using items ++ ++ First you instantiate the item you want to use and add it to the plot: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-1 ++ by default, the positions of the item are bound to the x- and y-Axis of the plot. So we can just ++ set the plot coordinates where the line should start/end: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-2 ++ If we don't want the line to be positioned in plot coordinates but a different coordinate system, ++ e.g. absolute pixel positions on the QCustomPlot surface, we need to change the position type like this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-3 ++ Then we can set the coordinates, this time in pixels: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-4 ++ and make the line visible on the entire QCustomPlot, by disabling clipping to the axis rect: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpitemline-creation-5 ++ ++ For more advanced plots, it is even possible to set different types and parent anchors per X/Y ++ coordinate of an item position, using for example \ref QCPItemPosition::setTypeX or \ref ++ QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchorX. For details, see the documentation of \ref QCPItemPosition. ++ ++ \section items-subclassing Creating own items ++ ++ To create an own item, you implement a subclass of QCPAbstractItem. These are the pure ++ virtual functions, you must implement: ++ \li \ref selectTest ++ \li \ref draw ++ ++ See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do. ++ ++ \subsection items-positioning Allowing the item to be positioned ++ ++ As mentioned, item positions are represented by QCPItemPosition members. Let's assume the new item shall ++ have only one point as its position (as opposed to two like a rect or multiple like a polygon). You then add ++ a public member of type QCPItemPosition like so: ++ ++ \code QCPItemPosition * const myPosition;\endcode ++ ++ the const makes sure the pointer itself can't be modified from the user of your new item (the QCPItemPosition ++ instance it points to, can be modified, of course). ++ The initialization of this pointer is made easy with the \ref createPosition function. Just assign ++ the return value of this function to each QCPItemPosition in the constructor of your item. \ref createPosition ++ takes a string which is the name of the position, typically this is identical to the variable name. ++ For example, the constructor of QCPItemExample could look like this: ++ ++ \code ++ QCPItemExample::QCPItemExample(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ myPosition(createPosition("myPosition")) ++ { ++ // other constructor code ++ } ++ \endcode ++ ++ \subsection items-drawing The draw function ++ ++ To give your item a visual representation, reimplement the \ref draw function and use the passed ++ QCPPainter to draw the item. You can retrieve the item position in pixel coordinates from the ++ position member(s) via \ref QCPItemPosition::pixelPosition. ++ ++ To optimize performance you should calculate a bounding rect first (don't forget to take the pen ++ width into account), check whether it intersects the \ref clipRect, and only draw the item at all ++ if this is the case. ++ ++ \subsection items-selection The selectTest function ++ ++ Your implementation of the \ref selectTest function may use the helpers \ref ++ QCPVector2D::distanceSquaredToLine and \ref rectDistance. With these, the implementation of the ++ selection test becomes significantly simpler for most items. See the documentation of \ref ++ selectTest for what the function parameters mean and what the function should return. ++ ++ \subsection anchors Providing anchors ++ ++ Providing anchors (QCPItemAnchor) starts off like adding a position. First you create a public ++ member, e.g. ++ ++ \code QCPItemAnchor * const bottom;\endcode ++ ++ and create it in the constructor with the \ref createAnchor function, assigning it a name and an ++ anchor id (an integer enumerating all anchors on the item, you may create an own enum for this). ++ Since anchors can be placed anywhere, relative to the item's position(s), your item needs to ++ provide the position of every anchor with the reimplementation of the \ref anchorPixelPosition(int ++ anchorId) function. ++ ++ In essence the QCPItemAnchor is merely an intermediary that itself asks your item for the pixel ++ position when anything attached to the anchor needs to know the coordinates. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QList QCPAbstractItem::positions() const ++ ++ Returns all positions of the item in a list. ++ ++ \see anchors, position ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QList QCPAbstractItem::anchors() const ++ ++ Returns all anchors of the item in a list. Note that since a position (QCPItemPosition) is always ++ also an anchor, the list will also contain the positions of this item. ++ ++ \see positions, anchor ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter) = 0 ++ \internal ++ ++ Draws this item with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ The cliprect of the provided painter is set to the rect returned by \ref clipRect before this ++ function is called. The clipRect depends on the clipping settings defined by \ref ++ setClipToAxisRect and \ref setClipAxisRect. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++/* start documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::selectionChanged(bool selected) ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this item has changed, either by user interaction ++ or by a direct call to \ref setSelected. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Base class constructor which initializes base class members. ++*/ ++QCPAbstractItem::QCPAbstractItem(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPLayerable(parentPlot), ++ mClipToAxisRect(false), ++ mSelectable(true), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ parentPlot->registerItem(this); ++ ++ QList rects = parentPlot->axisRects(); ++ if (rects.size() > 0) ++ { ++ setClipToAxisRect(true); ++ setClipAxisRect(rects.first()); ++ } ++} ++ ++QCPAbstractItem::~QCPAbstractItem() ++{ ++ // don't delete mPositions because every position is also an anchor and thus in mAnchors ++ qDeleteAll(mAnchors); ++} ++ ++/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */ ++QCPAxisRect *QCPAbstractItem::clipAxisRect() const ++{ ++ return mClipAxisRect.data(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the item shall be clipped to an axis rect or whether it shall be visible on the ++ entire QCustomPlot. The axis rect can be set with \ref setClipAxisRect. ++ ++ \see setClipAxisRect ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractItem::setClipToAxisRect(bool clip) ++{ ++ mClipToAxisRect = clip; ++ if (mClipToAxisRect) ++ setParentLayerable(mClipAxisRect.data()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the clip axis rect. It defines the rect that will be used to clip the item when \ref ++ setClipToAxisRect is set to true. ++ ++ \see setClipToAxisRect ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *rect) ++{ ++ mClipAxisRect = rect; ++ if (mClipToAxisRect) ++ setParentLayerable(mClipAxisRect.data()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user can (de-)select this item by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface. ++ (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems.) ++ ++ However, even when \a selectable was set to false, it is possible to set the selection manually, ++ by calling \ref setSelected. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setInteractions, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable(bool selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectable = selectable; ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectable); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this item is selected or not. When selected, it might use a different visual ++ appearance (e.g. pen and brush), this depends on the specific item though. ++ ++ The entire selection mechanism for items is handled automatically when \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems. You only need to call this ++ function when you wish to change the selection state manually. ++ ++ This function can change the selection state even when \ref setSelectable was set to false. ++ ++ emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state. ++ ++ \see setSelectable, selectTest ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractItem::setSelected(bool selected) ++{ ++ if (mSelected != selected) ++ { ++ mSelected = selected; ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelected); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the QCPItemPosition with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't have a position by ++ that name, returns 0. ++ ++ This function provides an alternative way to access item positions. Normally, you access ++ positions directly by their member pointers (which typically have the same variable name as \a ++ name). ++ ++ \see positions, anchor ++*/ ++QCPItemPosition *QCPAbstractItem::position(const QString &name) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iname() == name) ++ return mPositions.at(i); ++ } ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "position with name not found:" << name; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the QCPItemAnchor with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't have an anchor by ++ that name, returns 0. ++ ++ This function provides an alternative way to access item anchors. Normally, you access ++ anchors directly by their member pointers (which typically have the same variable name as \a ++ name). ++ ++ \see anchors, position ++*/ ++QCPItemAnchor *QCPAbstractItem::anchor(const QString &name) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iname() == name) ++ return mAnchors.at(i); ++ } ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor with name not found:" << name; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this item has an anchor with the specified \a name. ++ ++ Note that you can check for positions with this function, too. This is because every position is ++ also an anchor (QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor). ++ ++ \see anchor, position ++*/ ++bool QCPAbstractItem::hasAnchor(const QString &name) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iname() == name) ++ return true; ++ } ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the rect the visual representation of this item is clipped to. This depends on the ++ current setting of \ref setClipToAxisRect as well as the axis rect set with \ref setClipAxisRect. ++ ++ If the item is not clipped to an axis rect, QCustomPlot's viewport rect is returned. ++ ++ \see draw ++*/ ++QRect QCPAbstractItem::clipRect() const ++{ ++ if (mClipToAxisRect && mClipAxisRect) ++ return mClipAxisRect.data()->rect(); ++ else ++ return mParentPlot->viewport(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing item lines. ++ ++ This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \see setAntialiased ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeItems); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function which returns the selectTest value for a specified \a rect and a specified ++ click position \a pos. \a filledRect defines whether a click inside the rect should also be ++ considered a hit or whether only the rect border is sensitive to hits. ++ ++ This function may be used to help with the implementation of the \ref selectTest function for ++ specific items. ++ ++ For example, if your item consists of four rects, call this function four times, once for each ++ rect, in your \ref selectTest reimplementation. Finally, return the minimum (non -1) of all four ++ returned values. ++*/ ++double QCPAbstractItem::rectDistance(const QRectF &rect, const QPointF &pos, bool filledRect) const ++{ ++ double result = -1; ++ ++ // distance to border: ++ QList lines; ++ lines << QLineF(rect.topLeft(), rect.topRight()) << QLineF(rect.bottomLeft(), rect.bottomRight()) ++ << QLineF(rect.topLeft(), rect.bottomLeft()) << QLineF(rect.topRight(), rect.bottomRight()); ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ for (int i=0; i mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99) ++ { ++ if (rect.contains(pos)) ++ result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pixel position of the anchor with Id \a anchorId. This function must be reimplemented in ++ item subclasses if they want to provide anchors (QCPItemAnchor). ++ ++ For example, if the item has two anchors with id 0 and 1, this function takes one of these anchor ++ ids and returns the respective pixel points of the specified anchor. ++ ++ \see createAnchor ++*/ ++QPointF QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called on item which shouldn't have any anchors (this method not reimplemented). anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Creates a QCPItemPosition, registers it with this item and returns a pointer to it. The specified ++ \a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name of the position ++ member (This is needed to provide the name-based \ref position access to positions). ++ ++ Don't delete positions created by this function manually, as the item will take care of it. ++ ++ Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific item subclass to ++ create each position member. Don't create QCPItemPositions with \b new yourself, because they ++ won't be registered with the item properly. ++ ++ \see createAnchor ++*/ ++QCPItemPosition *QCPAbstractItem::createPosition(const QString &name) ++{ ++ if (hasAnchor(name)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name; ++ QCPItemPosition *newPosition = new QCPItemPosition(mParentPlot, this, name); ++ mPositions.append(newPosition); ++ mAnchors.append(newPosition); // every position is also an anchor ++ newPosition->setAxes(mParentPlot->xAxis, mParentPlot->yAxis); ++ newPosition->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords); ++ if (mParentPlot->axisRect()) ++ newPosition->setAxisRect(mParentPlot->axisRect()); ++ newPosition->setCoords(0, 0); ++ return newPosition; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Creates a QCPItemAnchor, registers it with this item and returns a pointer to it. The specified ++ \a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name of the anchor ++ member (This is needed to provide the name based \ref anchor access to anchors). ++ ++ The \a anchorId must be a number identifying the created anchor. It is recommended to create an ++ enum (e.g. "AnchorIndex") for this on each item that uses anchors. This id is used by the anchor ++ to identify itself when it calls QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition. That function then returns ++ the correct pixel coordinates for the passed anchor id. ++ ++ Don't delete anchors created by this function manually, as the item will take care of it. ++ ++ Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific item subclass to ++ create each anchor member. Don't create QCPItemAnchors with \b new yourself, because then they ++ won't be registered with the item properly. ++ ++ \see createPosition ++*/ ++QCPItemAnchor *QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor(const QString &name, int anchorId) ++{ ++ if (hasAnchor(name)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name; ++ QCPItemAnchor *newAnchor = new QCPItemAnchor(mParentPlot, this, name, anchorId); ++ mAnchors.append(newAnchor); ++ return newAnchor; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractItem::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (mSelectable) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractItem::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(false); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractItem::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectItems; ++} ++/* end of 'src/item.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/core.cpp', size 124243 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCustomPlot ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCustomPlot ++ ++ \brief The central class of the library. This is the QWidget which displays the plot and ++ interacts with the user. ++ ++ For tutorials on how to use QCustomPlot, see the website\n ++ http://www.qcustomplot.com/ ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPSelectionRect *QCustomPlot::selectionRect() const ++ ++ Allows access to the currently used QCPSelectionRect instance (or subclass thereof), that is used ++ to handle and draw selection rect interactions (see \ref setSelectionRectMode). ++ ++ \see setSelectionRect ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPLayoutGrid *QCustomPlot::plotLayout() const ++ ++ Returns the top level layout of this QCustomPlot instance. It is a \ref QCPLayoutGrid, initially containing just ++ one cell with the main QCPAxisRect inside. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++/* start of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClick(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse double click event. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mousePress(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse press event. ++ ++ It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range dragging. So a slot ++ connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseMove(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse move event. ++ ++ It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range dragging. So a slot ++ connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes. ++ ++ \warning It is discouraged to change the drag-axes with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes here, ++ because the dragging starting point was saved the moment the mouse was pressed. Thus it only has ++ a meaning for the range drag axes that were set at that moment. If you want to change the drag ++ axes, consider doing this in the \ref mousePress signal instead. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseRelease(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse release event. ++ ++ It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like object selection. So a ++ slot connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref setInteractions or ++ \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseWheel(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse wheel event. ++ ++ It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like range zooming. So a slot ++ connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes or \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when a plottable is clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the plottable that received ++ the click. The parameter \a dataIndex indicates the data point that was closest to the click ++ position. ++ ++ \see plottableDoubleClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableDoubleClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when a plottable is double clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the plottable that received ++ the click. The parameter \a dataIndex indicates the data point that was closest to the click ++ position. ++ ++ \see plottableClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when an item is clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that received the ++ click. ++ ++ \see itemDoubleClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemDoubleClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when an item is double clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that received the ++ click. ++ ++ \see itemClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when an axis is clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that received the click and ++ \a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked. ++ ++ \see axisDoubleClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisDoubleClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when an axis is double clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that received the click and ++ \a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked. ++ ++ \see axisClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend that received the ++ click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the legend and no item is ++ clicked, \a item is 0. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or the space between ++ two items. ++ ++ \see legendDoubleClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendDoubleClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is double clicked. ++ ++ \a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend that received the ++ click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the legend and no item is ++ clicked, \a item is 0. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or the space between ++ two items. ++ ++ \see legendClick ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::selectionChangedByUser() ++ ++ This signal is emitted after the user has changed the selection in the QCustomPlot, e.g. by ++ clicking. It is not emitted when the selection state of an object has changed programmatically by ++ a direct call to setSelected()/setSelection() on an object or by calling \ref ++ deselectAll. ++ ++ In addition to this signal, selectable objects also provide individual signals, for example \ref ++ QCPAxis::selectionChanged or \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged. Note that those signals ++ are emitted even if the selection state is changed programmatically. ++ ++ See the documentation of \ref setInteractions for details about the selection mechanism. ++ ++ \see selectedPlottables, selectedGraphs, selectedItems, selectedAxes, selectedLegends ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::beforeReplot() ++ ++ This signal is emitted immediately before a replot takes place (caused by a call to the slot \ref ++ replot). ++ ++ It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two QCustomPlots to make them ++ replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion. ++ ++ \see replot, afterReplot ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::afterReplot() ++ ++ This signal is emitted immediately after a replot has taken place (caused by a call to the slot \ref ++ replot). ++ ++ It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two QCustomPlots to make them ++ replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion. ++ ++ \see replot, beforeReplot ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of signals */ ++/* start of documentation of public members */ ++ ++/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis ++ ++ A pointer to the primary x Axis (bottom) of the main axis rect of the plot. ++ ++ QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref ++ yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single ++ axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the ++ layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the ++ default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main ++ axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0. ++ ++ If an axis convenience pointer is currently zero and a new axis rect or a corresponding axis is ++ added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to the ++ according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend is ++ added after the main legend was removed before. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis ++ ++ A pointer to the primary y Axis (left) of the main axis rect of the plot. ++ ++ QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref ++ yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single ++ axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the ++ layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the ++ default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main ++ axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0. ++ ++ If an axis convenience pointer is currently zero and a new axis rect or a corresponding axis is ++ added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to the ++ according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend is ++ added after the main legend was removed before. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis2 ++ ++ A pointer to the secondary x Axis (top) of the main axis rect of the plot. Secondary axes are ++ invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox). ++ ++ QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref ++ yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single ++ axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the ++ layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the ++ default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main ++ axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0. ++ ++ If an axis convenience pointer is currently zero and a new axis rect or a corresponding axis is ++ added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to the ++ according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend is ++ added after the main legend was removed before. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis2 ++ ++ A pointer to the secondary y Axis (right) of the main axis rect of the plot. Secondary axes are ++ invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox). ++ ++ QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref ++ yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single ++ axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the ++ layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side, use the \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default axes or the ++ default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main ++ axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0. ++ ++ If an axis convenience pointer is currently zero and a new axis rect or a corresponding axis is ++ added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to the ++ according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend is ++ added after the main legend was removed before. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \var QCPLegend *QCustomPlot::legend ++ ++ A pointer to the default legend of the main axis rect. The legend is invisible by default. Use ++ QCPLegend::setVisible to change this. ++ ++ QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis, \ref xAxis2, \ref ++ yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that only have a single ++ axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link thelayoutsystem the ++ layout system\endlink to add multiple legends to the plot, use the layout system interface to ++ access the new legend. For example, legends can be placed inside an axis rect's \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::insetLayout "inset layout", and must then also be accessed via the inset layout. If ++ the default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by removing the main ++ axis rect), the corresponding pointer becomes 0. ++ ++ If an axis convenience pointer is currently zero and a new axis rect or a corresponding axis is ++ added in the place of the main axis rect, QCustomPlot resets the convenience pointers to the ++ according new axes. Similarly the \ref legend convenience pointer will be reset if a legend is ++ added after the main legend was removed before. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of public members */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a QCustomPlot and sets reasonable default values. ++*/ ++QCustomPlot::QCustomPlot(QWidget *parent) : ++ QWidget(parent), ++ xAxis(0), ++ yAxis(0), ++ xAxis2(0), ++ yAxis2(0), ++ legend(0), ++ mBufferDevicePixelRatio(1.0), // will be adapted to primary screen below ++ mPlotLayout(0), ++ mAutoAddPlottableToLegend(true), ++ mAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeNone), ++ mNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeNone), ++ mInteractions(0), ++ mSelectionTolerance(8), ++ mNoAntialiasingOnDrag(false), ++ mBackgroundBrush(Qt::white, Qt::SolidPattern), ++ mBackgroundScaled(true), ++ mBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding), ++ mCurrentLayer(0), ++ mPlottingHints(QCP::phCacheLabels|QCP::phImmediateRefresh), ++ mMultiSelectModifier(Qt::ControlModifier), ++ mSelectionRectMode(QCP::srmNone), ++ mSelectionRect(0), ++ mOpenGl(false), ++ mMouseHasMoved(false), ++ mMouseEventLayerable(0), ++ mReplotting(false), ++ mReplotQueued(false), ++ mOpenGlMultisamples(16), ++ mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup(QCP::aeNone), ++ mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup(true) ++{ ++ setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation); ++ setAttribute(Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent); ++ setFocusPolicy(Qt::ClickFocus); ++ setMouseTracking(true); ++ QLocale currentLocale = locale(); ++ currentLocale.setNumberOptions(QLocale::OmitGroupSeparator); ++ setLocale(currentLocale); ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ setBufferDevicePixelRatio(QWidget::devicePixelRatio()); ++#endif ++ ++ mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup = mAntialiasedElements; ++ mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup = mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels); ++ // create initial layers: ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("background"))); ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("grid"))); ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("main"))); ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("axes"))); ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("legend"))); ++ mLayers.append(new QCPLayer(this, QLatin1String("overlay"))); ++ updateLayerIndices(); ++ setCurrentLayer(QLatin1String("main")); ++ layer(QLatin1String("overlay"))->setMode(QCPLayer::lmBuffered); ++ ++ // create initial layout, axis rect and legend: ++ mPlotLayout = new QCPLayoutGrid; ++ mPlotLayout->initializeParentPlot(this); ++ mPlotLayout->setParent(this); // important because if parent is QWidget, QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged will call QWidget::updateGeometry ++ mPlotLayout->setLayer(QLatin1String("main")); ++ QCPAxisRect *defaultAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect(this, true); ++ mPlotLayout->addElement(0, 0, defaultAxisRect); ++ xAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ yAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ xAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ yAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ legend = new QCPLegend; ++ legend->setVisible(false); ++ defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->addElement(legend, Qt::AlignRight|Qt::AlignTop); ++ defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->setMargins(QMargins(12, 12, 12, 12)); ++ ++ defaultAxisRect->setLayer(QLatin1String("background")); ++ xAxis->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes")); ++ yAxis->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes")); ++ xAxis2->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes")); ++ yAxis2->setLayer(QLatin1String("axes")); ++ xAxis->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid")); ++ yAxis->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid")); ++ xAxis2->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid")); ++ yAxis2->grid()->setLayer(QLatin1String("grid")); ++ legend->setLayer(QLatin1String("legend")); ++ ++ // create selection rect instance: ++ mSelectionRect = new QCPSelectionRect(this); ++ mSelectionRect->setLayer(QLatin1String("overlay")); ++ ++ setViewport(rect()); // needs to be called after mPlotLayout has been created ++ ++ replot(rpQueuedReplot); ++} ++ ++QCustomPlot::~QCustomPlot() ++{ ++ clearPlottables(); ++ clearItems(); ++ ++ if (mPlotLayout) ++ { ++ delete mPlotLayout; ++ mPlotLayout = 0; ++ } ++ ++ mCurrentLayer = 0; ++ qDeleteAll(mLayers); // don't use removeLayer, because it would prevent the last layer to be removed ++ mLayers.clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which elements are forcibly drawn antialiased as an \a or combination of QCP::AntialiasedElement. ++ ++ This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally controlled with the ++ \a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is neither specified in ++ \ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the antialiasing setting on ++ each individual element instance is used. ++ ++ For example, if \a antialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, all plottables will be ++ drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set ++ to. ++ ++ if an element in \a antialiasedElements is already set in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, it is ++ removed from there. ++ ++ \see setNotAntialiasedElements ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements &antialiasedElements) ++{ ++ mAntialiasedElements = antialiasedElements; ++ ++ // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously: ++ if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0) ++ mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the specified \a antialiasedElement is forcibly drawn antialiased. ++ ++ See \ref setAntialiasedElements for details. ++ ++ \see setNotAntialiasedElement ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement antialiasedElement, bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!enabled && mAntialiasedElements.testFlag(antialiasedElement)) ++ mAntialiasedElements &= ~antialiasedElement; ++ else if (enabled && !mAntialiasedElements.testFlag(antialiasedElement)) ++ mAntialiasedElements |= antialiasedElement; ++ ++ // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously: ++ if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0) ++ mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which elements are forcibly drawn not antialiased as an \a or combination of ++ QCP::AntialiasedElement. ++ ++ This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally controlled with the ++ \a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is neither specified in ++ \ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the antialiasing setting on ++ each individual element instance is used. ++ ++ For example, if \a notAntialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, no plottables will be ++ drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set ++ to. ++ ++ if an element in \a notAntialiasedElements is already set in \ref setAntialiasedElements, it is ++ removed from there. ++ ++ \see setAntialiasedElements ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements ¬AntialiasedElements) ++{ ++ mNotAntialiasedElements = notAntialiasedElements; ++ ++ // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously: ++ if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0) ++ mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the specified \a notAntialiasedElement is forcibly drawn not antialiased. ++ ++ See \ref setNotAntialiasedElements for details. ++ ++ \see setAntialiasedElement ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement notAntialiasedElement, bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!enabled && mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag(notAntialiasedElement)) ++ mNotAntialiasedElements &= ~notAntialiasedElement; ++ else if (enabled && !mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag(notAntialiasedElement)) ++ mNotAntialiasedElements |= notAntialiasedElement; ++ ++ // make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and mAntialiasedElements simultaneously: ++ if ((mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements) != 0) ++ mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If set to true, adding a plottable (e.g. a graph) to the QCustomPlot automatically also adds the ++ plottable to the legend (QCustomPlot::legend). ++ ++ \see addGraph, QCPLegend::addItem ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setAutoAddPlottableToLegend(bool on) ++{ ++ mAutoAddPlottableToLegend = on; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the possible interactions of this QCustomPlot as an or-combination of \ref QCP::Interaction ++ enums. There are the following types of interactions: ++ ++ Axis range manipulation is controlled via \ref QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref QCP::iRangeZoom. When the ++ respective interaction is enabled, the user may drag axes ranges and zoom with the mouse wheel. ++ For details how to control which axes the user may drag/zoom and in what orientations, see \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes, ++ \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes. ++ ++ Plottable data selection is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables. If \ref ++ QCP::iSelectPlottables is set, the user may select plottables (graphs, curves, bars,...) and ++ their data by clicking on them or in their vicinity (\ref setSelectionTolerance). Whether the ++ user can actually select a plottable and its data can further be restricted with the \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable method on the specific plottable. For details, see the ++ special page about the \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism". To retrieve a list of all ++ currently selected plottables, call \ref selectedPlottables. If you're only interested in ++ QCPGraphs, you may use the convenience function \ref selectedGraphs. ++ ++ Item selection is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectItems. If \ref QCP::iSelectItems is set, the user ++ may select items (QCPItemLine, QCPItemText,...) by clicking on them or in their vicinity. To find ++ out whether a specific item is selected, call QCPAbstractItem::selected(). To retrieve a list of ++ all currently selected items, call \ref selectedItems. ++ ++ Axis selection is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectAxes. If \ref QCP::iSelectAxes is set, the user ++ may select parts of the axes by clicking on them. What parts exactly (e.g. Axis base line, tick ++ labels, axis label) are selectable can be controlled via \ref QCPAxis::setSelectableParts for ++ each axis. To retrieve a list of all axes that currently contain selected parts, call \ref ++ selectedAxes. Which parts of an axis are selected, can be retrieved with QCPAxis::selectedParts(). ++ ++ Legend selection is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectLegend. If this is set, the user may ++ select the legend itself or individual items by clicking on them. What parts exactly are ++ selectable can be controlled via \ref QCPLegend::setSelectableParts. To find out whether the ++ legend or any of its child items are selected, check the value of QCPLegend::selectedParts. To ++ find out which child items are selected, call \ref QCPLegend::selectedItems. ++ ++ All other selectable elements The selection of all other selectable objects (e.g. ++ QCPTextElement, or your own layerable subclasses) is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectOther. If set, the ++ user may select those objects by clicking on them. To find out which are currently selected, you ++ need to check their selected state explicitly. ++ ++ If the selection state has changed by user interaction, the \ref selectionChangedByUser signal is ++ emitted. Each selectable object additionally emits an individual selectionChanged signal whenever ++ their selection state has changed, i.e. not only by user interaction. ++ ++ To allow multiple objects to be selected by holding the selection modifier (\ref ++ setMultiSelectModifier), set the flag \ref QCP::iMultiSelect. ++ ++ \note In addition to the selection mechanism presented here, QCustomPlot always emits ++ corresponding signals, when an object is clicked or double clicked. see \ref plottableClick and ++ \ref plottableDoubleClick for example. ++ ++ \see setInteraction, setSelectionTolerance ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setInteractions(const QCP::Interactions &interactions) ++{ ++ mInteractions = interactions; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the single \a interaction of this QCustomPlot to \a enabled. ++ ++ For details about the interaction system, see \ref setInteractions. ++ ++ \see setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setInteraction(const QCP::Interaction &interaction, bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!enabled && mInteractions.testFlag(interaction)) ++ mInteractions &= ~interaction; ++ else if (enabled && !mInteractions.testFlag(interaction)) ++ mInteractions |= interaction; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the tolerance that is used to decide whether a click selects an object (e.g. a plottable) or ++ not. ++ ++ If the user clicks in the vicinity of the line of e.g. a QCPGraph, it's only regarded as a ++ potential selection when the minimum distance between the click position and the graph line is ++ smaller than \a pixels. Objects that are defined by an area (e.g. QCPBars) only react to clicks ++ directly inside the area and ignore this selection tolerance. In other words, it only has meaning ++ for parts of objects that are too thin to exactly hit with a click and thus need such a ++ tolerance. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, QCPLayerable::selectTest ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setSelectionTolerance(int pixels) ++{ ++ mSelectionTolerance = pixels; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether antialiasing is disabled for this QCustomPlot while the user is dragging axes ++ ranges. If many objects, especially plottables, are drawn antialiased, this greatly improves ++ performance during dragging. Thus it creates a more responsive user experience. As soon as the ++ user stops dragging, the last replot is done with normal antialiasing, to restore high image ++ quality. ++ ++ \see setAntialiasedElements, setNotAntialiasedElements ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mNoAntialiasingOnDrag = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the plotting hints for this QCustomPlot instance as an \a or combination of QCP::PlottingHint. ++ ++ \see setPlottingHint ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints(const QCP::PlottingHints &hints) ++{ ++ mPlottingHints = hints; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the specified plotting \a hint to \a enabled. ++ ++ \see setPlottingHints ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHint(QCP::PlottingHint hint, bool enabled) ++{ ++ QCP::PlottingHints newHints = mPlottingHints; ++ if (!enabled) ++ newHints &= ~hint; ++ else ++ newHints |= hint; ++ ++ if (newHints != mPlottingHints) ++ setPlottingHints(newHints); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the keyboard modifier that will be recognized as multi-select-modifier. ++ ++ If \ref QCP::iMultiSelect is specified in \ref setInteractions, the user may select multiple ++ objects (or data points) by clicking on them one after the other while holding down \a modifier. ++ ++ By default the multi-select-modifier is set to Qt::ControlModifier. ++ ++ \see setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier(Qt::KeyboardModifier modifier) ++{ ++ mMultiSelectModifier = modifier; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how QCustomPlot processes mouse click-and-drag interactions by the user. ++ ++ If \a mode is \ref QCP::srmNone, the mouse drag is forwarded to the underlying objects. For ++ example, QCPAxisRect may process a mouse drag by dragging axis ranges, see \ref ++ QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag. If \a mode is not \ref QCP::srmNone, the current selection rect (\ref ++ selectionRect) becomes activated and allows e.g. rect zooming and data point selection. ++ ++ If you wish to provide your user both with axis range dragging and data selection/range zooming, ++ use this method to switch between the modes just before the interaction is processed, e.g. in ++ reaction to the \ref mousePress or \ref mouseMove signals. For example you could check whether ++ the user is holding a certain keyboard modifier, and then decide which \a mode shall be set. ++ ++ If a selection rect interaction is currently active, and \a mode is set to \ref QCP::srmNone, the ++ interaction is canceled (\ref QCPSelectionRect::cancel). Switching between any of the other modes ++ will keep the selection rect active. Upon completion of the interaction, the behaviour is as ++ defined by the currently set \a mode, not the mode that was set when the interaction started. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, setSelectionRect, QCPSelectionRect ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode(QCP::SelectionRectMode mode) ++{ ++ if (mSelectionRect) ++ { ++ if (mode == QCP::srmNone) ++ mSelectionRect->cancel(); // when switching to none, we immediately want to abort a potentially active selection rect ++ ++ // disconnect old connections: ++ if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmSelect) ++ disconnect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ else if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmZoom) ++ disconnect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ ++ // establish new ones: ++ if (mode == QCP::srmSelect) ++ connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ else if (mode == QCP::srmZoom) ++ connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ } ++ ++ mSelectionRectMode = mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \ref QCPSelectionRect instance that QCustomPlot will use if \a mode is not \ref ++ QCP::srmNone and the user performs a click-and-drag interaction. QCustomPlot takes ownership of ++ the passed \a selectionRect. It can be accessed later via \ref selectionRect. ++ ++ This method is useful if you wish to replace the default QCPSelectionRect instance with an ++ instance of a QCPSelectionRect subclass, to introduce custom behaviour of the selection rect. ++ ++ \see setSelectionRectMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setSelectionRect(QCPSelectionRect *selectionRect) ++{ ++ if (mSelectionRect) ++ delete mSelectionRect; ++ ++ mSelectionRect = selectionRect; ++ ++ if (mSelectionRect) ++ { ++ // establish connections with new selection rect: ++ if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmSelect) ++ connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectSelection(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ else if (mSelectionRectMode == QCP::srmZoom) ++ connect(mSelectionRect, SIGNAL(accepted(QRect,QMouseEvent*)), this, SLOT(processRectZoom(QRect,QMouseEvent*))); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method allows to enable OpenGL plot rendering, for increased plotting performance of ++ graphically demanding plots (thick lines, translucent fills, etc.). ++ ++ If \a enabled is set to true, QCustomPlot will try to initialize OpenGL and, if successful, ++ continue plotting with hardware acceleration. The parameter \a multisampling controls how many ++ samples will be used per pixel, it essentially controls the antialiasing quality. If \a ++ multisampling is set too high for the current graphics hardware, the maximum allowed value will ++ be used. ++ ++ You can test whether switching to OpenGL rendering was successful by checking whether the ++ according getter \a QCustomPlot::openGl() returns true. If the OpenGL initialization fails, ++ rendering continues with the regular software rasterizer, and an according qDebug output is ++ generated. ++ ++ If switching to OpenGL was successful, this method disables label caching (\ref setPlottingHint ++ "setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, false)") and turns on QCustomPlot's antialiasing override ++ for all elements (\ref setAntialiasedElements "setAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll)"), leading to a ++ higher quality output. The antialiasing override allows for pixel-grid aligned drawing in the ++ OpenGL paint device. As stated before, in OpenGL rendering the actual antialiasing of the plot is ++ controlled with \a multisampling. If \a enabled is set to false, the antialiasing/label caching ++ settings are restored to what they were before OpenGL was enabled, if they weren't altered in the ++ meantime. ++ ++ \note OpenGL support is only enabled if QCustomPlot is compiled with the macro \c QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL ++ defined. This define must be set before including the QCustomPlot header both during compilation ++ of the QCustomPlot library as well as when compiling your application. It is best to just include ++ the line DEFINES += QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL in the respective qmake project files. ++ \note If you are using a Qt version before 5.0, you must also add the module "opengl" to your \c ++ QT variable in the qmake project files. For Qt versions 5.0 and higher, QCustomPlot switches to a ++ newer OpenGL interface which is already in the "gui" module. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setOpenGl(bool enabled, int multisampling) ++{ ++ mOpenGlMultisamples = qMax(0, multisampling); ++#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL ++ mOpenGl = enabled; ++ if (mOpenGl) ++ { ++ if (setupOpenGl()) ++ { ++ // backup antialiasing override and labelcaching setting so we can restore upon disabling OpenGL ++ mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup = mAntialiasedElements; ++ mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup = mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels); ++ // set antialiasing override to antialias all (aligns gl pixel grid properly), and disable label caching (would use software rasterizer for pixmap caches): ++ setAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll); ++ setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, false); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to enable OpenGL, continuing plotting without hardware acceleration."; ++ mOpenGl = false; ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ // restore antialiasing override and labelcaching to what it was before enabling OpenGL, if nobody changed it in the meantime: ++ if (mAntialiasedElements == QCP::aeAll) ++ setAntialiasedElements(mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup); ++ if (!mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phCacheLabels)) ++ setPlottingHint(QCP::phCacheLabels, mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup); ++ freeOpenGl(); ++ } ++ // recreate all paint buffers: ++ mPaintBuffers.clear(); ++ setupPaintBuffers(); ++#else ++ Q_UNUSED(enabled) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "QCustomPlot can't use OpenGL because QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL was not defined during compilation (add 'DEFINES += QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL' to your qmake .pro file)"; ++#endif ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the viewport of this QCustomPlot. Usually users of QCustomPlot don't need to change the ++ viewport manually. ++ ++ The viewport is the area in which the plot is drawn. All mechanisms, e.g. margin caluclation take ++ the viewport to be the outer border of the plot. The viewport normally is the rect() of the ++ QCustomPlot widget, i.e. a rect with top left (0, 0) and size of the QCustomPlot widget. ++ ++ Don't confuse the viewport with the axis rect (QCustomPlot::axisRect). An axis rect is typically ++ an area enclosed by four axes, where the graphs/plottables are drawn in. The viewport is larger ++ and contains also the axes themselves, their tick numbers, their labels, or even additional axis ++ rects, color scales and other layout elements. ++ ++ This function is used to allow arbitrary size exports with \ref toPixmap, \ref savePng, \ref ++ savePdf, etc. by temporarily changing the viewport size. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setViewport(const QRect &rect) ++{ ++ mViewport = rect; ++ if (mPlotLayout) ++ mPlotLayout->setOuterRect(mViewport); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the device pixel ratio used by the paint buffers of this QCustomPlot instance. ++ ++ Normally, this doesn't need to be set manually, because it is initialized with the regular \a ++ QWidget::devicePixelRatio which is configured by Qt to fit the display device (e.g. 1 for normal ++ displays, 2 for High-DPI displays). ++ ++ Device pixel ratios are supported by Qt only for Qt versions since 5.4. If this method is called ++ when QCustomPlot is being used with older Qt versions, outputs an according qDebug message and ++ leaves the internal buffer device pixel ratio at 1.0. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBufferDevicePixelRatio(double ratio) ++{ ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare(ratio, mBufferDevicePixelRatio)) ++ { ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ mBufferDevicePixelRatio = ratio; ++ for (int i=0; isetDevicePixelRatio(mBufferDevicePixelRatio); ++ // Note: axis label cache has devicePixelRatio as part of cache hash, so no need to manually clear cache here ++#else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Device pixel ratios not supported for Qt versions before 5.4"; ++ mBufferDevicePixelRatio = 1.0; ++#endif ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets \a pm as the viewport background pixmap (see \ref setViewport). The pixmap is always drawn ++ below all other objects in the plot. ++ ++ For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the viewport, scaling can be ++ enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (whether and how the aspect ratio is ++ preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these options in one call, ++ consider using the overloaded version of this function. ++ ++ If a background brush was set with \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), the viewport will ++ first be filled with that brush, before drawing the background pixmap. This can be useful for ++ background pixmaps with translucent areas. ++ ++ \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm) ++{ ++ mBackgroundPixmap = pm; ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the background brush of the viewport (see \ref setViewport). ++ ++ Before drawing everything else, the background is filled with \a brush. If a background pixmap ++ was set with \ref setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), this brush will be used to fill the viewport ++ before the background pixmap is drawn. This can be useful for background pixmaps with translucent ++ areas. ++ ++ Set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush or Qt::Transparent to leave background transparent. This can be ++ useful for exporting to image formats which support transparency, e.g. \ref savePng. ++ ++ \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBackgroundBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Allows setting the background pixmap of the viewport, whether it shall be scaled and how it ++ shall be scaled in one call. ++ ++ \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode) ++{ ++ mBackgroundPixmap = pm; ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap(); ++ mBackgroundScaled = scaled; ++ mBackgroundScaledMode = mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the viewport background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the viewport. If \a scaled is ++ set to true, control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is preserved with ++ \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. ++ ++ Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is no performance ++ penalty on replots. (Except when the viewport dimensions are changed continuously.) ++ ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled) ++{ ++ mBackgroundScaled = scaled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If scaling of the viewport background pixmap is enabled (\ref setBackgroundScaled), use this ++ function to define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is preserved. ++ ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode) ++{ ++ mBackgroundScaledMode = mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the plottable with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0. ++ ++ There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last added ++ plottable, see QCustomPlot::plottable() ++ ++ \see plottableCount ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottable(int index) ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size()) ++ { ++ return mPlottables.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the last plottable that was added to the plot. If there are no plottables in the plot, ++ returns 0. ++ ++ \see plottableCount ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottable() ++{ ++ if (!mPlottables.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ return mPlottables.last(); ++ } else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified plottable from the plot and deletes it. If necessary, the corresponding ++ legend item is also removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend). ++ ++ Returns true on success. ++ ++ \see clearPlottables ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) ++{ ++ if (!mPlottables.contains(plottable)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not in list:" << reinterpret_cast(plottable); ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ // remove plottable from legend: ++ plottable->removeFromLegend(); ++ // special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface: ++ if (QCPGraph *graph = qobject_cast(plottable)) ++ mGraphs.removeOne(graph); ++ // remove plottable: ++ delete plottable; ++ mPlottables.removeOne(plottable); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes and deletes the plottable by its \a index. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable(int index) ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size()) ++ return removePlottable(mPlottables[index]); ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all plottables from the plot and deletes them. Corresponding legend items are also ++ removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend). ++ ++ Returns the number of plottables removed. ++ ++ \see removePlottable ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::clearPlottables() ++{ ++ int c = mPlottables.size(); ++ for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i) ++ removePlottable(mPlottables[i]); ++ return c; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of currently existing plottables in the plot ++ ++ \see plottable ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::plottableCount() const ++{ ++ return mPlottables.size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of the selected plottables. If no plottables are currently selected, the list is empty. ++ ++ There is a convenience function if you're only interested in selected graphs, see \ref selectedGraphs. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::selectedPlottables() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, mPlottables) ++ { ++ if (plottable->selected()) ++ result.append(plottable); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the plottable at the pixel position \a pos. Plottables that only consist of single lines ++ (like graphs) have a tolerance band around them, see \ref setSelectionTolerance. If multiple ++ plottables come into consideration, the one closest to \a pos is returned. ++ ++ If \a onlySelectable is true, only plottables that are selectable ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable) are considered. ++ ++ If there is no plottable at \a pos, the return value is 0. ++ ++ \see itemAt, layoutElementAt ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPlottable *QCustomPlot::plottableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *resultPlottable = 0; ++ double resultDistance = mSelectionTolerance; // only regard clicks with distances smaller than mSelectionTolerance as selections, so initialize with that value ++ ++ foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, mPlottables) ++ { ++ if (onlySelectable && !plottable->selectable()) // we could have also passed onlySelectable to the selectTest function, but checking here is faster, because we have access to QCPabstractPlottable::selectable ++ continue; ++ if ((plottable->keyAxis()->axisRect()->rect() & plottable->valueAxis()->axisRect()->rect()).contains(pos.toPoint())) // only consider clicks inside the rect that is spanned by the plottable's key/value axes ++ { ++ double currentDistance = plottable->selectTest(pos, false); ++ if (currentDistance >= 0 && currentDistance < resultDistance) ++ { ++ resultPlottable = plottable; ++ resultDistance = currentDistance; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return resultPlottable; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this QCustomPlot instance contains the \a plottable. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::hasPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const ++{ ++ return mPlottables.contains(plottable); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the graph with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0. ++ ++ There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last created ++ graph, see QCustomPlot::graph() ++ ++ \see graphCount, addGraph ++*/ ++QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::graph(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size()) ++ { ++ return mGraphs.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the last graph, that was created with \ref addGraph. If there are no graphs in the plot, ++ returns 0. ++ ++ \see graphCount, addGraph ++*/ ++QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::graph() const ++{ ++ if (!mGraphs.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ return mGraphs.last(); ++ } else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new graph inside the plot. If \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis are left unspecified (0), the ++ bottom (xAxis) is used as key and the left (yAxis) is used as value axis. If specified, \a ++ keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in this QCustomPlot. ++ ++ \a keyAxis will be used as key axis (typically "x") and \a valueAxis as value axis (typically ++ "y") for the graph. ++ ++ Returns a pointer to the newly created graph, or 0 if adding the graph failed. ++ ++ \see graph, graphCount, removeGraph, clearGraphs ++*/ ++QCPGraph *QCustomPlot::addGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) ++{ ++ if (!keyAxis) keyAxis = xAxis; ++ if (!valueAxis) valueAxis = yAxis; ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't use default QCustomPlot xAxis or yAxis, because at least one is invalid (has been deleted)"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ if (keyAxis->parentPlot() != this || valueAxis->parentPlot() != this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed keyAxis or valueAxis doesn't have this QCustomPlot as parent"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ ++ QCPGraph *newGraph = new QCPGraph(keyAxis, valueAxis); ++ newGraph->setName(QLatin1String("Graph ")+QString::number(mGraphs.size())); ++ return newGraph; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified \a graph from the plot and deletes it. If necessary, the corresponding ++ legend item is also removed from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend). If any other graphs in ++ the plot have a channel fill set towards the removed graph, the channel fill property of those ++ graphs is reset to zero (no channel fill). ++ ++ Returns true on success. ++ ++ \see clearGraphs ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph(QCPGraph *graph) ++{ ++ return removePlottable(graph); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes and deletes the graph by its \a index. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph(int index) ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size()) ++ return removeGraph(mGraphs[index]); ++ else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all graphs from the plot and deletes them. Corresponding legend items are also removed ++ from the default legend (QCustomPlot::legend). ++ ++ Returns the number of graphs removed. ++ ++ \see removeGraph ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::clearGraphs() ++{ ++ int c = mGraphs.size(); ++ for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i) ++ removeGraph(mGraphs[i]); ++ return c; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of currently existing graphs in the plot ++ ++ \see graph, addGraph ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::graphCount() const ++{ ++ return mGraphs.size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of the selected graphs. If no graphs are currently selected, the list is empty. ++ ++ If you are not only interested in selected graphs but other plottables like QCPCurve, QCPBars, ++ etc., use \ref selectedPlottables. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelection ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::selectedGraphs() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ foreach (QCPGraph *graph, mGraphs) ++ { ++ if (graph->selected()) ++ result.append(graph); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the item with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0. ++ ++ There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which returns the last added ++ item, see QCustomPlot::item() ++ ++ \see itemCount ++*/ ++QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::item(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mItems.size()) ++ { ++ return mItems.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the last item that was added to this plot. If there are no items in the plot, ++ returns 0. ++ ++ \see itemCount ++*/ ++QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::item() const ++{ ++ if (!mItems.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ return mItems.last(); ++ } else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified item from the plot and deletes it. ++ ++ Returns true on success. ++ ++ \see clearItems ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removeItem(QCPAbstractItem *item) ++{ ++ if (mItems.contains(item)) ++ { ++ delete item; ++ mItems.removeOne(item); ++ return true; ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item not in list:" << reinterpret_cast(item); ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes and deletes the item by its \a index. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removeItem(int index) ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mItems.size()) ++ return removeItem(mItems[index]); ++ else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all items from the plot and deletes them. ++ ++ Returns the number of items removed. ++ ++ \see removeItem ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::clearItems() ++{ ++ int c = mItems.size(); ++ for (int i=c-1; i >= 0; --i) ++ removeItem(mItems[i]); ++ return c; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of currently existing items in the plot ++ ++ \see item ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::itemCount() const ++{ ++ return mItems.size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of the selected items. If no items are currently selected, the list is empty. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable, QCPAbstractItem::setSelected ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::selectedItems() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ foreach (QCPAbstractItem *item, mItems) ++ { ++ if (item->selected()) ++ result.append(item); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the item at the pixel position \a pos. Items that only consist of single lines (e.g. \ref ++ QCPItemLine or \ref QCPItemCurve) have a tolerance band around them, see \ref ++ setSelectionTolerance. If multiple items come into consideration, the one closest to \a pos is ++ returned. ++ ++ If \a onlySelectable is true, only items that are selectable (QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable) are ++ considered. ++ ++ If there is no item at \a pos, the return value is 0. ++ ++ \see plottableAt, layoutElementAt ++*/ ++QCPAbstractItem *QCustomPlot::itemAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPAbstractItem *resultItem = 0; ++ double resultDistance = mSelectionTolerance; // only regard clicks with distances smaller than mSelectionTolerance as selections, so initialize with that value ++ ++ foreach (QCPAbstractItem *item, mItems) ++ { ++ if (onlySelectable && !item->selectable()) // we could have also passed onlySelectable to the selectTest function, but checking here is faster, because we have access to QCPAbstractItem::selectable ++ continue; ++ if (!item->clipToAxisRect() || item->clipRect().contains(pos.toPoint())) // only consider clicks inside axis cliprect of the item if actually clipped to it ++ { ++ double currentDistance = item->selectTest(pos, false); ++ if (currentDistance >= 0 && currentDistance < resultDistance) ++ { ++ resultItem = item; ++ resultDistance = currentDistance; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return resultItem; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether this QCustomPlot contains the \a item. ++ ++ \see item ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::hasItem(QCPAbstractItem *item) const ++{ ++ return mItems.contains(item); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the layer with the specified \a name. If there is no layer with the specified name, 0 is ++ returned. ++ ++ Layer names are case-sensitive. ++ ++ \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer ++*/ ++QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::layer(const QString &name) const ++{ ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ { ++ if (layer->name() == name) ++ return layer; ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns the layer by \a index. If the index is invalid, 0 is returned. ++ ++ \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer ++*/ ++QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::layer(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mLayers.size()) ++ { ++ return mLayers.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the layer that is set as current layer (see \ref setCurrentLayer). ++*/ ++QCPLayer *QCustomPlot::currentLayer() const ++{ ++ return mCurrentLayer; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the layer with the specified \a name to be the current layer. All layerables (\ref ++ QCPLayerable), e.g. plottables and items, are created on the current layer. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if there is a layer with the specified \a name in the QCustomPlot. ++ ++ Layer names are case-sensitive. ++ ++ \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer, QCPLayerable::setLayer ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer(const QString &name) ++{ ++ if (QCPLayer *newCurrentLayer = layer(name)) ++ { ++ return setCurrentLayer(newCurrentLayer); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer with name doesn't exist:" << name; ++ return false; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the provided \a layer to be the current layer. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. when \a layer is a valid layer in the QCustomPlot. ++ ++ \see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer(QCPLayer *layer) ++{ ++ if (!mLayers.contains(layer)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(layer); ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ mCurrentLayer = layer; ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of currently existing layers in the plot ++ ++ \see layer, addLayer ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::layerCount() const ++{ ++ return mLayers.size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds a new layer to this QCustomPlot instance. The new layer will have the name \a name, which ++ must be unique. Depending on \a insertMode, it is positioned either below or above \a otherLayer. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if there is no other layer named \a name and \a otherLayer is a ++ valid layer inside this QCustomPlot. ++ ++ If \a otherLayer is 0, the highest layer in the QCustomPlot will be used. ++ ++ For an explanation of what layers are in QCustomPlot, see the documentation of \ref QCPLayer. ++ ++ \see layer, moveLayer, removeLayer ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::addLayer(const QString &name, QCPLayer *otherLayer, QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode) ++{ ++ if (!otherLayer) ++ otherLayer = mLayers.last(); ++ if (!mLayers.contains(otherLayer)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(otherLayer); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (layer(name)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "A layer exists already with the name" << name; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ QCPLayer *newLayer = new QCPLayer(this, name); ++ mLayers.insert(otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 1:0), newLayer); ++ updateLayerIndices(); ++ setupPaintBuffers(); // associates new layer with the appropriate paint buffer ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified \a layer and returns true on success. ++ ++ All layerables (e.g. plottables and items) on the removed layer will be moved to the layer below ++ \a layer. If \a layer is the bottom layer, the layerables are moved to the layer above. In both ++ cases, the total rendering order of all layerables in the QCustomPlot is preserved. ++ ++ If \a layer is the current layer (\ref setCurrentLayer), the layer below (or above, if bottom ++ layer) becomes the new current layer. ++ ++ It is not possible to remove the last layer of the plot. ++ ++ \see layer, addLayer, moveLayer ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::removeLayer(QCPLayer *layer) ++{ ++ if (!mLayers.contains(layer)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(layer); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (mLayers.size() < 2) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't remove last layer"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ // append all children of this layer to layer below (if this is lowest layer, prepend to layer above) ++ int removedIndex = layer->index(); ++ bool isFirstLayer = removedIndex==0; ++ QCPLayer *targetLayer = isFirstLayer ? mLayers.at(removedIndex+1) : mLayers.at(removedIndex-1); ++ QList children = layer->children(); ++ if (isFirstLayer) // prepend in reverse order (so order relative to each other stays the same) ++ { ++ for (int i=children.size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ children.at(i)->moveToLayer(targetLayer, true); ++ } else // append normally ++ { ++ for (int i=0; imoveToLayer(targetLayer, false); ++ } ++ // if removed layer is current layer, change current layer to layer below/above: ++ if (layer == mCurrentLayer) ++ setCurrentLayer(targetLayer); ++ // invalidate the paint buffer that was responsible for this layer: ++ if (!layer->mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ layer->mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ // remove layer: ++ delete layer; ++ mLayers.removeOne(layer); ++ updateLayerIndices(); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Moves the specified \a layer either above or below \a otherLayer. Whether it's placed above or ++ below is controlled with \a insertMode. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. when both \a layer and \a otherLayer are valid layers in the ++ QCustomPlot. ++ ++ \see layer, addLayer, moveLayer ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::moveLayer(QCPLayer *layer, QCPLayer *otherLayer, QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode) ++{ ++ if (!mLayers.contains(layer)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(layer); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (!mLayers.contains(otherLayer)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(otherLayer); ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ if (layer->index() > otherLayer->index()) ++ mLayers.move(layer->index(), otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 1:0)); ++ else if (layer->index() < otherLayer->index()) ++ mLayers.move(layer->index(), otherLayer->index() + (insertMode==limAbove ? 0:-1)); ++ ++ // invalidate the paint buffers that are responsible for the layers: ++ if (!layer->mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ layer->mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ if (!otherLayer->mPaintBuffer.isNull()) ++ otherLayer->mPaintBuffer.data()->setInvalidated(); ++ ++ updateLayerIndices(); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of axis rects in the plot. ++ ++ All axis rects can be accessed via QCustomPlot::axisRect(). ++ ++ Initially, only one axis rect exists in the plot. ++ ++ \see axisRect, axisRects ++*/ ++int QCustomPlot::axisRectCount() const ++{ ++ return axisRects().size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the axis rect with \a index. ++ ++ Initially, only one axis rect (with index 0) exists in the plot. If multiple axis rects were ++ added, all of them may be accessed with this function in a linear fashion (even when they are ++ nested in a layout hierarchy or inside other axis rects via QCPAxisRect::insetLayout). ++ ++ \see axisRectCount, axisRects ++*/ ++QCPAxisRect *QCustomPlot::axisRect(int index) const ++{ ++ const QList rectList = axisRects(); ++ if (index >= 0 && index < rectList.size()) ++ { ++ return rectList.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis rect index" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns all axis rects in the plot. ++ ++ \see axisRectCount, axisRect ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::axisRects() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ QStack elementStack; ++ if (mPlotLayout) ++ elementStack.push(mPlotLayout); ++ ++ while (!elementStack.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement *element, elementStack.pop()->elements(false)) ++ { ++ if (element) ++ { ++ elementStack.push(element); ++ if (QCPAxisRect *ar = qobject_cast(element)) ++ result.append(ar); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the layout element at pixel position \a pos. If there is no element at that position, ++ returns 0. ++ ++ Only visible elements are used. If \ref QCPLayoutElement::setVisible on the element itself or on ++ any of its parent elements is set to false, it will not be considered. ++ ++ \see itemAt, plottableAt ++*/ ++QCPLayoutElement *QCustomPlot::layoutElementAt(const QPointF &pos) const ++{ ++ QCPLayoutElement *currentElement = mPlotLayout; ++ bool searchSubElements = true; ++ while (searchSubElements && currentElement) ++ { ++ searchSubElements = false; ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, currentElement->elements(false)) ++ { ++ if (subElement && subElement->realVisibility() && subElement->selectTest(pos, false) >= 0) ++ { ++ currentElement = subElement; ++ searchSubElements = true; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return currentElement; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the layout element of type \ref QCPAxisRect at pixel position \a pos. This method ignores ++ other layout elements even if they are visually in front of the axis rect (e.g. a \ref ++ QCPLegend). If there is no axis rect at that position, returns 0. ++ ++ Only visible axis rects are used. If \ref QCPLayoutElement::setVisible on the axis rect itself or ++ on any of its parent elements is set to false, it will not be considered. ++ ++ \see layoutElementAt ++*/ ++QCPAxisRect *QCustomPlot::axisRectAt(const QPointF &pos) const ++{ ++ QCPAxisRect *result = 0; ++ QCPLayoutElement *currentElement = mPlotLayout; ++ bool searchSubElements = true; ++ while (searchSubElements && currentElement) ++ { ++ searchSubElements = false; ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, currentElement->elements(false)) ++ { ++ if (subElement && subElement->realVisibility() && subElement->selectTest(pos, false) >= 0) ++ { ++ currentElement = subElement; ++ searchSubElements = true; ++ if (QCPAxisRect *ar = qobject_cast(currentElement)) ++ result = ar; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the axes that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection state is not \ref ++ QCPAxis::spNone. ++ ++ \see selectedPlottables, selectedLegends, setInteractions, QCPAxis::setSelectedParts, ++ QCPAxis::setSelectableParts ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::selectedAxes() const ++{ ++ QList result, allAxes; ++ foreach (QCPAxisRect *rect, axisRects()) ++ allAxes << rect->axes(); ++ ++ foreach (QCPAxis *axis, allAxes) ++ { ++ if (axis->selectedParts() != QCPAxis::spNone) ++ result.append(axis); ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the legends that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection state is not \ref ++ QCPLegend::spNone. ++ ++ \see selectedPlottables, selectedAxes, setInteractions, QCPLegend::setSelectedParts, ++ QCPLegend::setSelectableParts, QCPLegend::selectedItems ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::selectedLegends() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ ++ QStack elementStack; ++ if (mPlotLayout) ++ elementStack.push(mPlotLayout); ++ ++ while (!elementStack.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement *subElement, elementStack.pop()->elements(false)) ++ { ++ if (subElement) ++ { ++ elementStack.push(subElement); ++ if (QCPLegend *leg = qobject_cast(subElement)) ++ { ++ if (leg->selectedParts() != QCPLegend::spNone) ++ result.append(leg); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Deselects all layerables (plottables, items, axes, legends,...) of the QCustomPlot. ++ ++ Since calling this function is not a user interaction, this does not emit the \ref ++ selectionChangedByUser signal. The individual selectionChanged signals are emitted though, if the ++ objects were previously selected. ++ ++ \see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, selectedItems, selectedAxes, selectedLegends ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::deselectAll() ++{ ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children()) ++ layerable->deselectEvent(0); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Causes a complete replot into the internal paint buffer(s). Finally, the widget surface is ++ refreshed with the new buffer contents. This is the method that must be called to make changes to ++ the plot, e.g. on the axis ranges or data points of graphs, visible. ++ ++ The parameter \a refreshPriority can be used to fine-tune the timing of the replot. For example ++ if your application calls \ref replot very quickly in succession (e.g. multiple independent ++ functions change some aspects of the plot and each wants to make sure the change gets replotted), ++ it is advisable to set \a refreshPriority to \ref QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot. This way, the ++ actual replotting is deferred to the next event loop iteration. Multiple successive calls of \ref ++ replot with this priority will only cause a single replot, avoiding redundant replots and ++ improving performance. ++ ++ Under a few circumstances, QCustomPlot causes a replot by itself. Those are resize events of the ++ QCustomPlot widget and user interactions (object selection and range dragging/zooming). ++ ++ Before the replot happens, the signal \ref beforeReplot is emitted. After the replot, \ref ++ afterReplot is emitted. It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with any of those two ++ signals on two QCustomPlots to make them replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite ++ recursion. ++ ++ If a layer is in mode \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered (\ref QCPLayer::setMode), it is also possible to ++ replot only that specific layer via \ref QCPLayer::replot. See the documentation there for ++ details. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::replot(QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority refreshPriority) ++{ ++ if (refreshPriority == QCustomPlot::rpQueuedReplot) ++ { ++ if (!mReplotQueued) ++ { ++ mReplotQueued = true; ++ QTimer::singleShot(0, this, SLOT(replot())); ++ } ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (mReplotting) // in case signals loop back to replot slot ++ return; ++ mReplotting = true; ++ mReplotQueued = false; ++ emit beforeReplot(); ++ ++ updateLayout(); ++ // draw all layered objects (grid, axes, plottables, items, legend,...) into their buffers: ++ setupPaintBuffers(); ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ layer->drawToPaintBuffer(); ++ for (int i=0; isetInvalidated(false); ++ ++ if ((refreshPriority == rpRefreshHint && mPlottingHints.testFlag(QCP::phImmediateRefresh)) || refreshPriority==rpImmediateRefresh) ++ repaint(); ++ else ++ update(); ++ ++ emit afterReplot(); ++ mReplotting = false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Rescales the axes such that all plottables (like graphs) in the plot are fully visible. ++ ++ if \a onlyVisiblePlottables is set to true, only the plottables that have their visibility set to true ++ (QCPLayerable::setVisible), will be used to rescale the axes. ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCPAxis::rescale ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes(bool onlyVisiblePlottables) ++{ ++ QList allAxes; ++ foreach (QCPAxisRect *rect, axisRects()) ++ allAxes << rect->axes(); ++ ++ foreach (QCPAxis *axis, allAxes) ++ axis->rescale(onlyVisiblePlottables); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves a PDF with the vectorized plot to the file \a fileName. The axis ratio as well as the scale ++ of texts and lines will be derived from the specified \a width and \a height. This means, the ++ output will look like the normal on-screen output of a QCustomPlot widget with the corresponding ++ pixel width and height. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported image will have the ++ same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has. ++ ++ Setting \a exportPen to \ref QCP::epNoCosmetic allows to disable the use of cosmetic pens when ++ drawing to the PDF file. Cosmetic pens are pens with numerical width 0, which are always drawn as ++ a one pixel wide line, no matter what zoom factor is set in the PDF-Viewer. For more information ++ about cosmetic pens, see the QPainter and QPen documentation. ++ ++ The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any ++ selected objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll ++ before calling this function. ++ ++ Returns true on success. ++ ++ \warning ++ \li If you plan on editing the exported PDF file with a vector graphics editor like Inkscape, it ++ is advised to set \a exportPen to \ref QCP::epNoCosmetic to avoid losing those cosmetic lines ++ (which might be quite many, because cosmetic pens are the default for e.g. axes and tick marks). ++ \li If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget ++ (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide ++ explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this ++ function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these ++ aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange ++ widths/heights. ++ ++ \a pdfCreator and \a pdfTitle may be used to set the according metadata fields in the resulting ++ PDF file. ++ ++ \note On Android systems, this method does nothing and issues an according qDebug warning ++ message. This is also the case if for other reasons the define flag \c QT_NO_PRINTER is set. ++ ++ \see savePng, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::savePdf(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, QCP::ExportPen exportPen, const QString &pdfCreator, const QString &pdfTitle) ++{ ++ bool success = false; ++#ifdef QT_NO_PRINTER ++ Q_UNUSED(fileName) ++ Q_UNUSED(exportPen) ++ Q_UNUSED(width) ++ Q_UNUSED(height) ++ Q_UNUSED(pdfCreator) ++ Q_UNUSED(pdfTitle) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Qt was built without printer support (QT_NO_PRINTER). PDF not created."; ++#else ++ int newWidth, newHeight; ++ if (width == 0 || height == 0) ++ { ++ newWidth = this->width(); ++ newHeight = this->height(); ++ } else ++ { ++ newWidth = width; ++ newHeight = height; ++ } ++ ++ QPrinter printer(QPrinter::ScreenResolution); ++ printer.setOutputFileName(fileName); ++ printer.setOutputFormat(QPrinter::PdfFormat); ++ printer.setColorMode(QPrinter::Color); ++ printer.printEngine()->setProperty(QPrintEngine::PPK_Creator, pdfCreator); ++ printer.printEngine()->setProperty(QPrintEngine::PPK_DocumentName, pdfTitle); ++ QRect oldViewport = viewport(); ++ setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight)); ++#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 3, 0) ++ printer.setFullPage(true); ++ printer.setPaperSize(viewport().size(), QPrinter::DevicePixel); ++#else ++ QPageLayout pageLayout; ++ pageLayout.setMode(QPageLayout::FullPageMode); ++ pageLayout.setOrientation(QPageLayout::Portrait); ++ pageLayout.setMargins(QMarginsF(0, 0, 0, 0)); ++ pageLayout.setPageSize(QPageSize(viewport().size(), QPageSize::Point, QString(), QPageSize::ExactMatch)); ++ printer.setPageLayout(pageLayout); ++#endif ++ QCPPainter printpainter; ++ if (printpainter.begin(&printer)) ++ { ++ printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmVectorized); ++ printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching); ++ printpainter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic, exportPen==QCP::epNoCosmetic); ++ printpainter.setWindow(mViewport); ++ if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && ++ mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::white && ++ mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::transparent && ++ mBackgroundBrush.color().alpha() > 0) // draw pdf background color if not white/transparent ++ printpainter.fillRect(viewport(), mBackgroundBrush); ++ draw(&printpainter); ++ printpainter.end(); ++ success = true; ++ } ++ setViewport(oldViewport); ++#endif // QT_NO_PRINTER ++ return success; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves a PNG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width ++ and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the ++ current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc. ++ are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale ++ parameter. ++ ++ For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an ++ image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths, ++ texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full ++ 200*200 pixel resolution. ++ ++ If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by ++ temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows ++ QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy. ++ ++ image compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be between 0 and 100 ++ or -1 to use the default setting. ++ ++ The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the ++ quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata, ++ it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch, ++ centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is ++ given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected ++ resolution unit internally. ++ ++ Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the PNG format isn't supported by ++ the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats(). ++ ++ The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected ++ objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling ++ this function. ++ ++ If you want the PNG to have a transparent background, call \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush) ++ with no brush (Qt::NoBrush) or a transparent color (Qt::transparent), before saving. ++ ++ \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget ++ (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide ++ explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this ++ function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these ++ aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange ++ widths/heights. ++ ++ \see savePdf, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::savePng(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit) ++{ ++ return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "PNG", quality, resolution, resolutionUnit); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves a JPEG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width ++ and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the ++ current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc. ++ are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale ++ parameter. ++ ++ For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an ++ image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths, ++ texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full ++ 200*200 pixel resolution. ++ ++ If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by ++ temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows ++ QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy. ++ ++ image compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be between 0 and 100 ++ or -1 to use the default setting. ++ ++ The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the ++ quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata, ++ it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch, ++ centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is ++ given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected ++ resolution unit internally. ++ ++ Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the JPEG format isn't supported by ++ the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats(). ++ ++ The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected ++ objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling ++ this function. ++ ++ \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget ++ (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide ++ explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this ++ function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these ++ aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange ++ widths/heights. ++ ++ \see savePdf, savePng, saveBmp, saveRastered ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::saveJpg(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit) ++{ ++ return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "JPG", quality, resolution, resolutionUnit); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves a BMP image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the dimensions \a width ++ and \a height in pixels, multiplied by \a scale. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the ++ current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget is used instead. Line widths and texts etc. ++ are not scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use the \a scale ++ parameter. ++ ++ For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2, you will end up with an ++ image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by factor 2 (line widths, ++ texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the result will have full ++ 200*200 pixel resolution. ++ ++ If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for all elements by ++ temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref QCP::aeAll as this allows ++ QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy. ++ ++ The \a resolution will be written to the image file header and has no direct consequence for the ++ quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a tool which respects the metadata, ++ it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size in real units of length (inch, ++ centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in which units \a resolution is ++ given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted to the format's expected ++ resolution unit internally. ++ ++ Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the BMP format isn't supported by ++ the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats(). ++ ++ The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you don't want any selected ++ objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref deselectAll before calling ++ this function. ++ ++ \warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the QCustomPlot widget ++ (i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow), always provide ++ explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0 (default), this ++ function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However, in Qt, these ++ aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has strange ++ widths/heights. ++ ++ \see savePdf, savePng, saveJpg, saveRastered ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::saveBmp(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit) ++{ ++ return saveRastered(fileName, width, height, scale, "BMP", -1, resolution, resolutionUnit); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a minimum size hint that corresponds to the minimum size of the top level layout ++ (\ref plotLayout). To prevent QCustomPlot from being collapsed to size/width zero, set a minimum ++ size (setMinimumSize) either on the whole QCustomPlot or on any layout elements inside the plot. ++ This is especially important, when placed in a QLayout where other components try to take in as ++ much space as possible (e.g. QMdiArea). ++*/ ++QSize QCustomPlot::minimumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ return mPlotLayout->minimumSizeHint(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns a size hint that is the same as \ref minimumSizeHint. ++ ++*/ ++QSize QCustomPlot::sizeHint() const ++{ ++ return mPlotLayout->minimumSizeHint(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when the QCustomPlot widget needs repainting. This does not cause a \ref replot, but ++ draws the internal buffer on the widget surface. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *event) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event); ++ QCPPainter painter(this); ++ if (painter.isActive()) ++ { ++ painter.setRenderHint(QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing); // to make Antialiasing look good if using the OpenGL graphicssystem ++ if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) ++ painter.fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush); ++ drawBackground(&painter); ++ for (int bufferIndex = 0; bufferIndex < mPaintBuffers.size(); ++bufferIndex) ++ mPaintBuffers.at(bufferIndex)->draw(&painter); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for a resize of the QCustomPlot widget. The viewport (which becomes the outer rect ++ of mPlotLayout) is resized appropriately. Finally a \ref replot is performed. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::resizeEvent(QResizeEvent *event) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ // resize and repaint the buffer: ++ setViewport(rect()); ++ replot(rpQueuedRefresh); // queued refresh is important here, to prevent painting issues in some contexts (e.g. MDI subwindow) ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when a double click occurs. Emits the \ref mouseDoubleClick signal, then ++ determines the layerable under the cursor and forwards the event to it. Finally, emits the ++ specialized signals when certain objects are clicked (e.g. \ref plottableDoubleClick, \ref ++ axisDoubleClick, etc.). ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ emit mouseDoubleClick(event); ++ mMouseHasMoved = false; ++ mMousePressPos = event->pos(); ++ ++ // determine layerable under the cursor (this event is called instead of the second press event in a double-click): ++ QList details; ++ QList candidates = layerableListAt(mMousePressPos, false, &details); ++ for (int i=0; iaccept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events ignore the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list ++ candidates.at(i)->mouseDoubleClickEvent(event, details.at(i)); ++ if (event->isAccepted()) ++ { ++ mMouseEventLayerable = candidates.at(i); ++ mMouseEventLayerableDetails = details.at(i); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // emit specialized object double click signals: ++ if (!candidates.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ if (QCPAbstractPlottable *ap = qobject_cast(candidates.first())) ++ { ++ int dataIndex = 0; ++ if (!details.first().value().isEmpty()) ++ dataIndex = details.first().value().dataRange().begin(); ++ emit plottableDoubleClick(ap, dataIndex, event); ++ } else if (QCPAxis *ax = qobject_cast(candidates.first())) ++ emit axisDoubleClick(ax, details.first().value(), event); ++ else if (QCPAbstractItem *ai = qobject_cast(candidates.first())) ++ emit itemDoubleClick(ai, event); ++ else if (QCPLegend *lg = qobject_cast(candidates.first())) ++ emit legendDoubleClick(lg, 0, event); ++ else if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *li = qobject_cast(candidates.first())) ++ emit legendDoubleClick(li->parentLegend(), li, event); ++ } ++ ++ event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event. ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed. Emits the mousePress signal. ++ ++ If the current \ref setSelectionRectMode is not \ref QCP::srmNone, passes the event to the ++ selection rect. Otherwise determines the layerable under the cursor and forwards the event to it. ++ ++ \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ emit mousePress(event); ++ // save some state to tell in releaseEvent whether it was a click: ++ mMouseHasMoved = false; ++ mMousePressPos = event->pos(); ++ ++ if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRectMode != QCP::srmNone) ++ { ++ if (mSelectionRectMode != QCP::srmZoom || qobject_cast(axisRectAt(mMousePressPos))) // in zoom mode only activate selection rect if on an axis rect ++ mSelectionRect->startSelection(event); ++ } else ++ { ++ // no selection rect interaction, so forward event to layerable under the cursor: ++ QList details; ++ QList candidates = layerableListAt(mMousePressPos, false, &details); ++ for (int i=0; iaccept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events ignore the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list ++ candidates.at(i)->mousePressEvent(event, details.at(i)); ++ if (event->isAccepted()) ++ { ++ mMouseEventLayerable = candidates.at(i); ++ mMouseEventLayerableDetails = details.at(i); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event. ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when the cursor is moved. Emits the \ref mouseMove signal. ++ ++ If the selection rect (\ref setSelectionRect) is currently active, the event is forwarded to it ++ in order to update the rect geometry. ++ ++ Otherwise, if a layout element has mouse capture focus (a mousePressEvent happened on top of the ++ layout element before), the mouseMoveEvent is forwarded to that element. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ emit mouseMove(event); ++ ++ if (!mMouseHasMoved && (mMousePressPos-event->pos()).manhattanLength() > 3) ++ mMouseHasMoved = true; // moved too far from mouse press position, don't handle as click on mouse release ++ ++ if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive()) ++ mSelectionRect->moveSelection(event); ++ else if (mMouseEventLayerable) // call event of affected layerable: ++ mMouseEventLayerable->mouseMoveEvent(event, mMousePressPos); ++ ++ event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event. ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when a mouse button is released. Emits the \ref mouseRelease signal. ++ ++ If the mouse was moved less than a certain threshold in any direction since the \ref ++ mousePressEvent, it is considered a click which causes the selection mechanism (if activated via ++ \ref setInteractions) to possibly change selection states accordingly. Further, specialized mouse ++ click signals are emitted (e.g. \ref plottableClick, \ref axisClick, etc.) ++ ++ If a layerable is the mouse capturer (a \ref mousePressEvent happened on top of the layerable ++ before), the \ref mouseReleaseEvent is forwarded to that element. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ emit mouseRelease(event); ++ ++ if (!mMouseHasMoved) // mouse hasn't moved (much) between press and release, so handle as click ++ { ++ if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive()) // a simple click shouldn't successfully finish a selection rect, so cancel it here ++ mSelectionRect->cancel(); ++ if (event->button() == Qt::LeftButton) ++ processPointSelection(event); ++ ++ // emit specialized click signals of QCustomPlot instance: ++ if (QCPAbstractPlottable *ap = qobject_cast(mMouseEventLayerable)) ++ { ++ int dataIndex = 0; ++ if (!mMouseEventLayerableDetails.value().isEmpty()) ++ dataIndex = mMouseEventLayerableDetails.value().dataRange().begin(); ++ emit plottableClick(ap, dataIndex, event); ++ } else if (QCPAxis *ax = qobject_cast(mMouseEventLayerable)) ++ emit axisClick(ax, mMouseEventLayerableDetails.value(), event); ++ else if (QCPAbstractItem *ai = qobject_cast(mMouseEventLayerable)) ++ emit itemClick(ai, event); ++ else if (QCPLegend *lg = qobject_cast(mMouseEventLayerable)) ++ emit legendClick(lg, 0, event); ++ else if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *li = qobject_cast(mMouseEventLayerable)) ++ emit legendClick(li->parentLegend(), li, event); ++ } ++ ++ if (mSelectionRect && mSelectionRect->isActive()) // Note: if a click was detected above, the selection rect is canceled there ++ { ++ // finish selection rect, the appropriate action will be taken via signal-slot connection: ++ mSelectionRect->endSelection(event); ++ } else ++ { ++ // call event of affected layerable: ++ if (mMouseEventLayerable) ++ { ++ mMouseEventLayerable->mouseReleaseEvent(event, mMousePressPos); ++ mMouseEventLayerable = 0; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (noAntialiasingOnDrag()) ++ replot(rpQueuedReplot); ++ ++ event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event. ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for mouse wheel events. First, the \ref mouseWheel signal is emitted. Then ++ determines the affected layerable and forwards the event to it. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) ++{ ++ emit mouseWheel(event); ++ // forward event to layerable under cursor: ++ QList candidates = layerableListAt(event->pos(), false); ++ for (int i=0; iaccept(); // default impl of QCPLayerable's mouse events ignore the event, in that case propagate to next candidate in list ++ candidates.at(i)->wheelEvent(event); ++ if (event->isAccepted()) ++ break; ++ } ++ event->accept(); // in case QCPLayerable reimplementation manipulates event accepted state. In QWidget event system, QCustomPlot wants to accept the event. ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function draws the entire plot, including background pixmap, with the specified \a painter. ++ It does not make use of the paint buffers like \ref replot, so this is the function typically ++ used by saving/exporting methods such as \ref savePdf or \ref toPainter. ++ ++ Note that it does not fill the background with the background brush (as the user may specify with ++ \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)), this is up to the respective functions calling this ++ method. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ updateLayout(); ++ ++ // draw viewport background pixmap: ++ drawBackground(painter); ++ ++ // draw all layered objects (grid, axes, plottables, items, legend,...): ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ layer->draw(painter); ++ ++ /* Debug code to draw all layout element rects ++ foreach (QCPLayoutElement* el, findChildren()) ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(0, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine)); ++ painter->drawRect(el->rect()); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(255, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine)); ++ painter->drawRect(el->outerRect()); ++ } ++ */ ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Performs the layout update steps defined by \ref QCPLayoutElement::UpdatePhase, by calling \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement::update on the main plot layout. ++ ++ Here, the layout elements calculate their positions and margins, and prepare for the following ++ draw call. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::updateLayout() ++{ ++ // run through layout phases: ++ mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upPreparation); ++ mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upMargins); ++ mPlotLayout->update(QCPLayoutElement::upLayout); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the viewport background pixmap of the plot. ++ ++ If a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the scaled version ++ depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and then draws it inside ++ the viewport with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is only updated, when ++ the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background pixmap (this is ++ dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a different axis background pixmap was ++ set. ++ ++ Note that this function does not draw a fill with the background brush ++ (\ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)) beneath the pixmap. ++ ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ // Note: background color is handled in individual replot/save functions ++ ++ // draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified): ++ if (!mBackgroundPixmap.isNull()) ++ { ++ if (mBackgroundScaled) ++ { ++ // check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated: ++ QSize scaledSize(mBackgroundPixmap.size()); ++ scaledSize.scale(mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode); ++ if (mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize) ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled(mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation); ++ painter->drawPixmap(mViewport.topLeft(), mScaledBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height()) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect()); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->drawPixmap(mViewport.topLeft(), mBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height())); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Goes through the layers and makes sure this QCustomPlot instance holds the correct number of ++ paint buffers and that they have the correct configuration (size, pixel ratio, etc.). ++ Allocations, reallocations and deletions of paint buffers are performed as necessary. It also ++ associates the paint buffers with the layers, so they draw themselves into the right buffer when ++ \ref QCPLayer::drawToPaintBuffer is called. This means it associates adjacent \ref ++ QCPLayer::lmLogical layers to a mutual paint buffer and creates dedicated paint buffers for ++ layers in \ref QCPLayer::lmBuffered mode. ++ ++ This method uses \ref createPaintBuffer to create new paint buffers. ++ ++ After this method, the paint buffers are empty (filled with \c Qt::transparent) and invalidated ++ (so an attempt to replot only a single buffered layer causes a full replot). ++ ++ This method is called in every \ref replot call, prior to actually drawing the layers (into their ++ associated paint buffer). If the paint buffers don't need changing/reallocating, this method ++ basically leaves them alone and thus finishes very fast. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::setupPaintBuffers() ++{ ++ int bufferIndex = 0; ++ if (mPaintBuffers.isEmpty()) ++ mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer(createPaintBuffer())); ++ ++ for (int layerIndex = 0; layerIndex < mLayers.size(); ++layerIndex) ++ { ++ QCPLayer *layer = mLayers.at(layerIndex); ++ if (layer->mode() == QCPLayer::lmLogical) ++ { ++ layer->mPaintBuffer = mPaintBuffers.at(bufferIndex).toWeakRef(); ++ } else if (layer->mode() == QCPLayer::lmBuffered) ++ { ++ ++bufferIndex; ++ if (bufferIndex >= mPaintBuffers.size()) ++ mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer(createPaintBuffer())); ++ layer->mPaintBuffer = mPaintBuffers.at(bufferIndex).toWeakRef(); ++ if (layerIndex < mLayers.size()-1 && mLayers.at(layerIndex+1)->mode() == QCPLayer::lmLogical) // not last layer, and next one is logical, so prepare another buffer for next layerables ++ { ++ ++bufferIndex; ++ if (bufferIndex >= mPaintBuffers.size()) ++ mPaintBuffers.append(QSharedPointer(createPaintBuffer())); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ // remove unneeded buffers: ++ while (mPaintBuffers.size()-1 > bufferIndex) ++ mPaintBuffers.removeLast(); ++ // resize buffers to viewport size and clear contents: ++ for (int i=0; isetSize(viewport().size()); // won't do anything if already correct size ++ mPaintBuffers.at(i)->clear(Qt::transparent); ++ mPaintBuffers.at(i)->setInvalidated(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is used by \ref setupPaintBuffers when it needs to create new paint buffers. ++ ++ Depending on the current setting of \ref setOpenGl, and the current Qt version, different ++ backends (subclasses of \ref QCPAbstractPaintBuffer) are created, initialized with the proper ++ size and device pixel ratio, and returned. ++*/ ++QCPAbstractPaintBuffer *QCustomPlot::createPaintBuffer() ++{ ++ if (mOpenGl) ++ { ++#if defined(QCP_OPENGL_FBO) ++ return new QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio, mGlContext, mGlPaintDevice); ++#elif defined(QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER) ++ return new QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio, mOpenGlMultisamples); ++#else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL enabled even though no support for it compiled in, this shouldn't have happened. Falling back to pixmap paint buffer."; ++ return new QCPPaintBufferPixmap(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio); ++#endif ++ } else ++ return new QCPPaintBufferPixmap(viewport().size(), mBufferDevicePixelRatio); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method returns whether any of the paint buffers held by this QCustomPlot instance are ++ invalidated. ++ ++ If any buffer is invalidated, a partial replot (\ref QCPLayer::replot) is not allowed and always ++ causes a full replot (\ref QCustomPlot::replot) of all layers. This is the case when for example ++ the layer order has changed, new layers were added, layers were removed, or layer modes were ++ changed (\ref QCPLayer::setMode). ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractPaintBuffer::setInvalidated ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::hasInvalidatedPaintBuffers() ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iinvalidated()) ++ return true; ++ } ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ When \ref setOpenGl is set to true, this method is used to initialize OpenGL (create a context, ++ surface, paint device). ++ ++ Returns true on success. ++ ++ If this method is successful, all paint buffers should be deleted and then reallocated by calling ++ \ref setupPaintBuffers, so the OpenGL-based paint buffer subclasses (\ref ++ QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer, \ref QCPPaintBufferGlFbo) are used for subsequent replots. ++ ++ \see freeOpenGl ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::setupOpenGl() ++{ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++ freeOpenGl(); ++ QSurfaceFormat proposedSurfaceFormat; ++ proposedSurfaceFormat.setSamples(mOpenGlMultisamples); ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_OFFSCREENSURFACE ++ QOffscreenSurface *surface = new QOffscreenSurface; ++#else ++ QWindow *surface = new QWindow; ++ surface->setSurfaceType(QSurface::OpenGLSurface); ++#endif ++ surface->setFormat(proposedSurfaceFormat); ++ surface->create(); ++ mGlSurface = QSharedPointer(surface); ++ mGlContext = QSharedPointer(new QOpenGLContext); ++ mGlContext->setFormat(mGlSurface->format()); ++ if (!mGlContext->create()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to create OpenGL context"; ++ mGlContext.clear(); ++ mGlSurface.clear(); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (!mGlContext->makeCurrent(mGlSurface.data())) // context needs to be current to create paint device ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Failed to make opengl context current"; ++ mGlContext.clear(); ++ mGlSurface.clear(); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (!QOpenGLFramebufferObject::hasOpenGLFramebufferObjects()) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "OpenGL of this system doesn't support frame buffer objects"; ++ mGlContext.clear(); ++ mGlSurface.clear(); ++ return false; ++ } ++ mGlPaintDevice = QSharedPointer(new QOpenGLPaintDevice); ++ return true; ++#elif defined(QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER) ++ return QGLFormat::hasOpenGL(); ++#else ++ return false; ++#endif ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ When \ref setOpenGl is set to false, this method is used to deinitialize OpenGL (releases the ++ context and frees resources). ++ ++ After OpenGL is disabled, all paint buffers should be deleted and then reallocated by calling ++ \ref setupPaintBuffers, so the standard software rendering paint buffer subclass (\ref ++ QCPPaintBufferPixmap) is used for subsequent replots. ++ ++ \see setupOpenGl ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::freeOpenGl() ++{ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++ mGlPaintDevice.clear(); ++ mGlContext.clear(); ++ mGlSurface.clear(); ++#endif ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is used by \ref QCPAxisRect::removeAxis to report removed axes to the QCustomPlot ++ so it may clear its QCustomPlot::xAxis, yAxis, xAxis2 and yAxis2 members accordingly. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::axisRemoved(QCPAxis *axis) ++{ ++ if (xAxis == axis) ++ xAxis = 0; ++ if (xAxis2 == axis) ++ xAxis2 = 0; ++ if (yAxis == axis) ++ yAxis = 0; ++ if (yAxis2 == axis) ++ yAxis2 = 0; ++ ++ // Note: No need to take care of range drag axes and range zoom axes, because they are stored in smart pointers ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is used by the QCPLegend destructor to report legend removal to the QCustomPlot so ++ it may clear its QCustomPlot::legend member accordingly. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::legendRemoved(QCPLegend *legend) ++{ ++ if (this->legend == legend) ++ this->legend = 0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This slot is connected to the selection rect's \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted signal when \ref ++ setSelectionRectMode is set to \ref QCP::srmSelect. ++ ++ First, it determines which axis rect was the origin of the selection rect judging by the starting ++ point of the selection. Then it goes through the plottables (\ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D to be ++ precise) associated with that axis rect and finds the data points that are in \a rect. It does ++ this by querying their \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTestRect method. ++ ++ Then, the actual selection is done by calling the plottables' \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::selectEvent, placing the found selected data points in the \a details ++ parameter as QVariant(\ref QCPDataSelection). All plottables that weren't touched by \a ++ rect receive a \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::deselectEvent. ++ ++ \see processRectZoom ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::processRectSelection(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ bool selectionStateChanged = false; ++ ++ if (mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iSelectPlottables)) ++ { ++ QMap > potentialSelections; // map key is number of selected data points, so we have selections sorted by size ++ QRectF rectF(rect.normalized()); ++ if (QCPAxisRect *affectedAxisRect = axisRectAt(rectF.topLeft())) ++ { ++ // determine plottables that were hit by the rect and thus are candidates for selection: ++ foreach (QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, affectedAxisRect->plottables()) ++ { ++ if (QCPPlottableInterface1D *plottableInterface = plottable->interface1D()) ++ { ++ QCPDataSelection dataSel = plottableInterface->selectTestRect(rectF, true); ++ if (!dataSel.isEmpty()) ++ potentialSelections.insertMulti(dataSel.dataPointCount(), QPair(plottable, dataSel)); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (!mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iMultiSelect)) ++ { ++ // only leave plottable with most selected points in map, since we will only select a single plottable: ++ if (!potentialSelections.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ QMap >::iterator it = potentialSelections.begin(); ++ while (it != potentialSelections.end()-1) // erase all except last element ++ it = potentialSelections.erase(it); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ bool additive = event->modifiers().testFlag(mMultiSelectModifier); ++ // deselect all other layerables if not additive selection: ++ if (!additive) ++ { ++ // emit deselection except to those plottables who will be selected afterwards: ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children()) ++ { ++ if ((potentialSelections.isEmpty() || potentialSelections.constBegin()->first != layerable) && mInteractions.testFlag(layerable->selectionCategory())) ++ { ++ bool selChanged = false; ++ layerable->deselectEvent(&selChanged); ++ selectionStateChanged |= selChanged; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // go through selections in reverse (largest selection first) and emit select events: ++ QMap >::const_iterator it = potentialSelections.constEnd(); ++ while (it != potentialSelections.constBegin()) ++ { ++ --it; ++ if (mInteractions.testFlag(it.value().first->selectionCategory())) ++ { ++ bool selChanged = false; ++ it.value().first->selectEvent(event, additive, QVariant::fromValue(it.value().second), &selChanged); ++ selectionStateChanged |= selChanged; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ { ++ emit selectionChangedByUser(); ++ replot(rpQueuedReplot); ++ } else if (mSelectionRect) ++ mSelectionRect->layer()->replot(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This slot is connected to the selection rect's \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted signal when \ref ++ setSelectionRectMode is set to \ref QCP::srmZoom. ++ ++ It determines which axis rect was the origin of the selection rect judging by the starting point ++ of the selection, and then zooms the axes defined via \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes to the ++ provided \a rect (see \ref QCPAxisRect::zoom). ++ ++ \see processRectSelection ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::processRectZoom(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ if (QCPAxisRect *axisRect = axisRectAt(rect.topLeft())) ++ { ++ QList affectedAxes = QList() << axisRect->rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Horizontal) << axisRect->rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Vertical); ++ affectedAxes.removeAll(static_cast(0)); ++ axisRect->zoom(QRectF(rect), affectedAxes); ++ } ++ replot(rpQueuedReplot); // always replot to make selection rect disappear ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is called when a simple left mouse click was detected on the QCustomPlot surface. ++ ++ It first determines the layerable that was hit by the click, and then calls its \ref ++ QCPLayerable::selectEvent. All other layerables receive a QCPLayerable::deselectEvent (unless the ++ multi-select modifier was pressed, see \ref setMultiSelectModifier). ++ ++ In this method the hit layerable is determined a second time using \ref layerableAt (after the ++ one in \ref mousePressEvent), because we want \a onlySelectable set to true this time. This ++ implies that the mouse event grabber (mMouseEventLayerable) may be a different one from the ++ clicked layerable determined here. For example, if a non-selectable layerable is in front of a ++ selectable layerable at the click position, the front layerable will receive mouse events but the ++ selectable one in the back will receive the \ref QCPLayerable::selectEvent. ++ ++ \see processRectSelection, QCPLayerable::selectTest ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::processPointSelection(QMouseEvent *event) ++{ ++ QVariant details; ++ QCPLayerable *clickedLayerable = layerableAt(event->pos(), true, &details); ++ bool selectionStateChanged = false; ++ bool additive = mInteractions.testFlag(QCP::iMultiSelect) && event->modifiers().testFlag(mMultiSelectModifier); ++ // deselect all other layerables if not additive selection: ++ if (!additive) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayer *layer, mLayers) ++ { ++ foreach (QCPLayerable *layerable, layer->children()) ++ { ++ if (layerable != clickedLayerable && mInteractions.testFlag(layerable->selectionCategory())) ++ { ++ bool selChanged = false; ++ layerable->deselectEvent(&selChanged); ++ selectionStateChanged |= selChanged; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ if (clickedLayerable && mInteractions.testFlag(clickedLayerable->selectionCategory())) ++ { ++ // a layerable was actually clicked, call its selectEvent: ++ bool selChanged = false; ++ clickedLayerable->selectEvent(event, additive, details, &selChanged); ++ selectionStateChanged |= selChanged; ++ } ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ { ++ emit selectionChangedByUser(); ++ replot(rpQueuedReplot); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Registers the specified plottable with this QCustomPlot and, if \ref setAutoAddPlottableToLegend ++ is enabled, adds it to the legend (QCustomPlot::legend). QCustomPlot takes ownership of the ++ plottable. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. when \a plottable isn't already in this plot and the parent plot of ++ \a plottable is this QCustomPlot. ++ ++ This method is called automatically in the QCPAbstractPlottable base class constructor. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::registerPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) ++{ ++ if (mPlottables.contains(plottable)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable already added to this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(plottable); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (plottable->parentPlot() != this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not created with this QCustomPlot as parent:" << reinterpret_cast(plottable); ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ mPlottables.append(plottable); ++ // possibly add plottable to legend: ++ if (mAutoAddPlottableToLegend) ++ plottable->addToLegend(); ++ if (!plottable->layer()) // usually the layer is already set in the constructor of the plottable (via QCPLayerable constructor) ++ plottable->setLayer(currentLayer()); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ In order to maintain the simplified graph interface of QCustomPlot, this method is called by the ++ QCPGraph constructor to register itself with this QCustomPlot's internal graph list. Returns true ++ on success, i.e. if \a graph is valid and wasn't already registered with this QCustomPlot. ++ ++ This graph specific registration happens in addition to the call to \ref registerPlottable by the ++ QCPAbstractPlottable base class. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::registerGraph(QCPGraph *graph) ++{ ++ if (!graph) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed graph is zero"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (mGraphs.contains(graph)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph already registered with this QCustomPlot"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ mGraphs.append(graph); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Registers the specified item with this QCustomPlot. QCustomPlot takes ownership of the item. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. when \a item wasn't already in the plot and the parent plot of \a ++ item is this QCustomPlot. ++ ++ This method is called automatically in the QCPAbstractItem base class constructor. ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::registerItem(QCPAbstractItem *item) ++{ ++ if (mItems.contains(item)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item already added to this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast(item); ++ return false; ++ } ++ if (item->parentPlot() != this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item not created with this QCustomPlot as parent:" << reinterpret_cast(item); ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ mItems.append(item); ++ if (!item->layer()) // usually the layer is already set in the constructor of the item (via QCPLayerable constructor) ++ item->setLayer(currentLayer()); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Assigns all layers their index (QCPLayer::mIndex) in the mLayers list. This method is thus called ++ after every operation that changes the layer indices, like layer removal, layer creation, layer ++ moving. ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::updateLayerIndices() const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; imIndex = i; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the top-most layerable at pixel position \a pos. If \a onlySelectable is set to true, ++ only those layerables that are selectable will be considered. (Layerable subclasses communicate ++ their selectability via the QCPLayerable::selectTest method, by returning -1.) ++ ++ \a selectionDetails is an output parameter that contains selection specifics of the affected ++ layerable. This is useful if the respective layerable shall be given a subsequent ++ QCPLayerable::selectEvent (like in \ref mouseReleaseEvent). \a selectionDetails usually contains ++ information about which part of the layerable was hit, in multi-part layerables (e.g. ++ QCPAxis::SelectablePart). If the layerable is a plottable, \a selectionDetails contains a \ref ++ QCPDataSelection instance with the single data point which is closest to \a pos. ++ ++ \see layerableListAt, layoutElementAt, axisRectAt ++*/ ++QCPLayerable *QCustomPlot::layerableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *selectionDetails) const ++{ ++ QList details; ++ QList candidates = layerableListAt(pos, onlySelectable, selectionDetails ? &details : 0); ++ if (selectionDetails && !details.isEmpty()) ++ *selectionDetails = details.first(); ++ if (!candidates.isEmpty()) ++ return candidates.first(); ++ else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the layerables at pixel position \a pos. If \a onlySelectable is set to true, only those ++ layerables that are selectable will be considered. (Layerable subclasses communicate their ++ selectability via the QCPLayerable::selectTest method, by returning -1.) ++ ++ The returned list is sorted by the layerable/drawing order. If you only need to know the top-most ++ layerable, rather use \ref layerableAt. ++ ++ \a selectionDetails is an output parameter that contains selection specifics of the affected ++ layerable. This is useful if the respective layerable shall be given a subsequent ++ QCPLayerable::selectEvent (like in \ref mouseReleaseEvent). \a selectionDetails usually contains ++ information about which part of the layerable was hit, in multi-part layerables (e.g. ++ QCPAxis::SelectablePart). If the layerable is a plottable, \a selectionDetails contains a \ref ++ QCPDataSelection instance with the single data point which is closest to \a pos. ++ ++ \see layerableAt, layoutElementAt, axisRectAt ++*/ ++QList QCustomPlot::layerableListAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QList *selectionDetails) const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ for (int layerIndex=mLayers.size()-1; layerIndex>=0; --layerIndex) ++ { ++ const QList layerables = mLayers.at(layerIndex)->children(); ++ for (int i=layerables.size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ { ++ if (!layerables.at(i)->realVisibility()) ++ continue; ++ QVariant details; ++ double dist = layerables.at(i)->selectTest(pos, onlySelectable, selectionDetails ? &details : 0); ++ if (dist >= 0 && dist < selectionTolerance()) ++ { ++ result.append(layerables.at(i)); ++ if (selectionDetails) ++ selectionDetails->append(details); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Saves the plot to a rastered image file \a fileName in the image format \a format. The plot is ++ sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a scale. (width 100 and scale 2.0 lead ++ to a full resolution file with width 200.) If the \a format supports compression, \a quality may ++ be between 0 and 100 to control it. ++ ++ Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the given \a format isn't supported ++ by the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats(). ++ ++ The \a resolution will be written to the image file header (if the file format supports this) and ++ has no direct consequence for the quality or the pixel size. However, if opening the image with a ++ tool which respects the metadata, it will be able to scale the image to match either a given size ++ in real units of length (inch, centimeters, etc.), or the target display DPI. You can specify in ++ which units \a resolution is given, by setting \a resolutionUnit. The \a resolution is converted ++ to the format's expected resolution unit internally. ++ ++ \see saveBmp, saveJpg, savePng, savePdf ++*/ ++bool QCustomPlot::saveRastered(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, const char *format, int quality, int resolution, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit) ++{ ++ QImage buffer = toPixmap(width, height, scale).toImage(); ++ ++ int dotsPerMeter = 0; ++ switch (resolutionUnit) ++ { ++ case QCP::ruDotsPerMeter: dotsPerMeter = resolution; break; ++ case QCP::ruDotsPerCentimeter: dotsPerMeter = resolution*100; break; ++ case QCP::ruDotsPerInch: dotsPerMeter = resolution/0.0254; break; ++ } ++ buffer.setDotsPerMeterX(dotsPerMeter); // this is saved together with some image formats, e.g. PNG, and is relevant when opening image in other tools ++ buffer.setDotsPerMeterY(dotsPerMeter); // this is saved together with some image formats, e.g. PNG, and is relevant when opening image in other tools ++ if (!buffer.isNull()) ++ return buffer.save(fileName, format, quality); ++ else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Renders the plot to a pixmap and returns it. ++ ++ The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a scale. (width 100 and ++ scale 2.0 lead to a full resolution pixmap with width 200.) ++ ++ \see toPainter, saveRastered, saveBmp, savePng, saveJpg, savePdf ++*/ ++QPixmap QCustomPlot::toPixmap(int width, int height, double scale) ++{ ++ // this method is somewhat similar to toPainter. Change something here, and a change in toPainter might be necessary, too. ++ int newWidth, newHeight; ++ if (width == 0 || height == 0) ++ { ++ newWidth = this->width(); ++ newHeight = this->height(); ++ } else ++ { ++ newWidth = width; ++ newHeight = height; ++ } ++ int scaledWidth = qRound(scale*newWidth); ++ int scaledHeight = qRound(scale*newHeight); ++ ++ QPixmap result(scaledWidth, scaledHeight); ++ result.fill(mBackgroundBrush.style() == Qt::SolidPattern ? mBackgroundBrush.color() : Qt::transparent); // if using non-solid pattern, make transparent now and draw brush pattern later ++ QCPPainter painter; ++ painter.begin(&result); ++ if (painter.isActive()) ++ { ++ QRect oldViewport = viewport(); ++ setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight)); ++ painter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching); ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare(scale, 1.0)) ++ { ++ if (scale > 1.0) // for scale < 1 we always want cosmetic pens where possible, because else lines might disappear for very small scales ++ painter.setMode(QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic); ++ painter.scale(scale, scale); ++ } ++ if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::SolidPattern && mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) // solid fills were done a few lines above with QPixmap::fill ++ painter.fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush); ++ draw(&painter); ++ setViewport(oldViewport); ++ painter.end(); ++ } else // might happen if pixmap has width or height zero ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Couldn't activate painter on pixmap"; ++ return QPixmap(); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Renders the plot using the passed \a painter. ++ ++ The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels. If the \a painter's scale is not 1.0, the resulting plot will ++ appear scaled accordingly. ++ ++ \note If you are restricted to using a QPainter (instead of QCPPainter), create a temporary QPicture and open a QCPPainter ++ on it. Then call \ref toPainter with this QCPPainter. After ending the paint operation on the picture, draw it with ++ the QPainter. This will reproduce the painter actions the QCPPainter took, with a QPainter. ++ ++ \see toPixmap ++*/ ++void QCustomPlot::toPainter(QCPPainter *painter, int width, int height) ++{ ++ // this method is somewhat similar to toPixmap. Change something here, and a change in toPixmap might be necessary, too. ++ int newWidth, newHeight; ++ if (width == 0 || height == 0) ++ { ++ newWidth = this->width(); ++ newHeight = this->height(); ++ } else ++ { ++ newWidth = width; ++ newHeight = height; ++ } ++ ++ if (painter->isActive()) ++ { ++ QRect oldViewport = viewport(); ++ setViewport(QRect(0, 0, newWidth, newHeight)); ++ painter->setMode(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching); ++ if (mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) // unlike in toPixmap, we can't do QPixmap::fill for Qt::SolidPattern brush style, so we also draw solid fills with fillRect here ++ painter->fillRect(mViewport, mBackgroundBrush); ++ draw(painter); ++ setViewport(oldViewport); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed painter is not active"; ++} ++/* end of 'src/core.cpp' */ ++ ++//amalgamation: add plottable1d.cpp ++ ++/* including file 'src/colorgradient.cpp', size 24646 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPColorGradient ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPColorGradient ++ \brief Defines a color gradient for use with e.g. \ref QCPColorMap ++ ++ This class describes a color gradient which can be used to encode data with color. For example, ++ QCPColorMap and QCPColorScale have \ref QCPColorMap::setGradient "setGradient" methods which ++ take an instance of this class. Colors are set with \ref setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color) ++ with a \a position from 0 to 1. In between these defined color positions, the ++ color will be interpolated linearly either in RGB or HSV space, see \ref setColorInterpolation. ++ ++ Alternatively, load one of the preset color gradients shown in the image below, with \ref ++ loadPreset, or by directly specifying the preset in the constructor. ++ ++ Apart from red, green and blue components, the gradient also interpolates the alpha values of the ++ configured color stops. This allows to display some portions of the data range as transparent in ++ the plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPColorGradient.png ++ ++ The \ref QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset) constructor allows directly converting a \ref ++ GradientPreset to a QCPColorGradient. This means that you can directly pass \ref GradientPreset ++ to all the \a setGradient methods, e.g.: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorgradient-setgradient ++ ++ The total number of levels used in the gradient can be set with \ref setLevelCount. Whether the ++ color gradient shall be applied periodically (wrapping around) to data values that lie outside ++ the data range specified on the plottable instance can be controlled with \ref setPeriodic. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new, empty QCPColorGradient with no predefined color stops. You can add own color ++ stops with \ref setColorStopAt. ++ ++ The color level count is initialized to 350. ++*/ ++QCPColorGradient::QCPColorGradient() : ++ mLevelCount(350), ++ mColorInterpolation(ciRGB), ++ mPeriodic(false), ++ mColorBufferInvalidated(true) ++{ ++ mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0), mLevelCount); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new QCPColorGradient initialized with the colors and color interpolation according ++ to \a preset. ++ ++ The color level count is initialized to 350. ++*/ ++QCPColorGradient::QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset) : ++ mLevelCount(350), ++ mColorInterpolation(ciRGB), ++ mPeriodic(false), ++ mColorBufferInvalidated(true) ++{ ++ mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0), mLevelCount); ++ loadPreset(preset); ++} ++ ++/* undocumented operator */ ++bool QCPColorGradient::operator==(const QCPColorGradient &other) const ++{ ++ return ((other.mLevelCount == this->mLevelCount) && ++ (other.mColorInterpolation == this->mColorInterpolation) && ++ (other.mPeriodic == this->mPeriodic) && ++ (other.mColorStops == this->mColorStops)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the number of discretization levels of the color gradient to \a n. The default is 350 which ++ is typically enough to create a smooth appearance. The minimum number of levels is 2. ++ ++ \image html QCPColorGradient-levelcount.png ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::setLevelCount(int n) ++{ ++ if (n < 2) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "n must be greater or equal 2 but was" << n; ++ n = 2; ++ } ++ if (n != mLevelCount) ++ { ++ mLevelCount = n; ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets at which positions from 0 to 1 which color shall occur. The positions are the keys, the ++ colors are the values of the passed QMap \a colorStops. In between these color stops, the color ++ is interpolated according to \ref setColorInterpolation. ++ ++ A more convenient way to create a custom gradient may be to clear all color stops with \ref ++ clearColorStops (or creating a new, empty QCPColorGradient) and then adding them one by one with ++ \ref setColorStopAt. ++ ++ \see clearColorStops ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::setColorStops(const QMap &colorStops) ++{ ++ mColorStops = colorStops; ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a color the gradient will have at the specified \a position (from 0 to 1). In between ++ these color stops, the color is interpolated according to \ref setColorInterpolation. ++ ++ \see setColorStops, clearColorStops ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mColorStops.insert(position, color); ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the colors in between the configured color stops (see \ref setColorStopAt) shall be ++ interpolated linearly in RGB or in HSV color space. ++ ++ For example, a sweep in RGB space from red to green will have a muddy brown intermediate color, ++ whereas in HSV space the intermediate color is yellow. ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::setColorInterpolation(QCPColorGradient::ColorInterpolation interpolation) ++{ ++ if (interpolation != mColorInterpolation) ++ { ++ mColorInterpolation = interpolation; ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether data points that are outside the configured data range (e.g. \ref ++ QCPColorMap::setDataRange) are colored by periodically repeating the color gradient or whether ++ they all have the same color, corresponding to the respective gradient boundary color. ++ ++ \image html QCPColorGradient-periodic.png ++ ++ As shown in the image above, gradients that have the same start and end color are especially ++ suitable for a periodic gradient mapping, since they produce smooth color transitions throughout ++ the color map. A preset that has this property is \ref gpHues. ++ ++ In practice, using periodic color gradients makes sense when the data corresponds to a periodic ++ dimension, such as an angle or a phase. If this is not the case, the color encoding might become ++ ambiguous, because multiple different data values are shown as the same color. ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mPeriodic = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ This method is used to quickly convert a \a data array to colors. The colors will be output in ++ the array \a scanLine. Both \a data and \a scanLine must have the length \a n when passed to this ++ function. The data range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the gradient is passed ++ in \a range. \a logarithmic indicates whether the data values shall be mapped to colors ++ logarithmically. ++ ++ if \a data actually contains 2D-data linearized via [row*columnCount + column], you can ++ set \a dataIndexFactor to columnCount to convert a column instead of a row of the data ++ array, in \a scanLine. \a scanLine will remain a regular (1D) array. This works because \a data ++ is addressed data[i*dataIndexFactor]. ++ ++ Use the overloaded method to additionally provide alpha map data. ++ ++ The QRgb values that are placed in \a scanLine have their r, g and b components premultiplied ++ with alpha (see QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied). ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::colorize(const double *data, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor, bool logarithmic) ++{ ++ // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt color() and the other colorize() overload ++ if (!data) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as data"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!scanLine) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as scanLine"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (mColorBufferInvalidated) ++ updateColorBuffer(); ++ ++ if (!logarithmic) ++ { ++ const double posToIndexFactor = (mLevelCount-1)/range.size(); ++ if (mPeriodic) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mLevelCount) ++ index = mLevelCount-1; ++ scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ } ++ } ++ } else // logarithmic == true ++ { ++ if (mPeriodic) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mLevelCount) ++ index = mLevelCount-1; ++ scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Additionally to the other overload of \ref colorize, this method takes the array \a alpha, which ++ has the same size and structure as \a data and encodes the alpha information per data point. ++ ++ The QRgb values that are placed in \a scanLine have their r, g and b components premultiplied ++ with alpha (see QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied). ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::colorize(const double *data, const unsigned char *alpha, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor, bool logarithmic) ++{ ++ // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt color() and the other colorize() overload ++ if (!data) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as data"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!alpha) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as alpha"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!scanLine) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as scanLine"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (mColorBufferInvalidated) ++ updateColorBuffer(); ++ ++ if (!logarithmic) ++ { ++ const double posToIndexFactor = (mLevelCount-1)/range.size(); ++ if (mPeriodic) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mLevelCount) ++ index = mLevelCount-1; ++ if (alpha[dataIndexFactor*i] == 255) ++ { ++ scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ const QRgb rgb = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ const float alphaF = alpha[dataIndexFactor*i]/255.0f; ++ scanLine[i] = qRgba(qRed(rgb)*alphaF, qGreen(rgb)*alphaF, qBlue(rgb)*alphaF, qAlpha(rgb)*alphaF); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } else // logarithmic == true ++ { ++ if (mPeriodic) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mLevelCount) ++ index = mLevelCount-1; ++ if (alpha[dataIndexFactor*i] == 255) ++ { ++ scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ const QRgb rgb = mColorBuffer.at(index); ++ const float alphaF = alpha[dataIndexFactor*i]/255.0f; ++ scanLine[i] = qRgba(qRed(rgb)*alphaF, qGreen(rgb)*alphaF, qBlue(rgb)*alphaF, qAlpha(rgb)*alphaF); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is used to colorize a single data value given in \a position, to colors. The data ++ range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the gradient is passed in \a range. \a ++ logarithmic indicates whether the data value shall be mapped to a color logarithmically. ++ ++ If an entire array of data values shall be converted, rather use \ref colorize, for better ++ performance. ++ ++ The returned QRgb has its r, g and b components premultiplied with alpha (see ++ QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied). ++*/ ++QRgb QCPColorGradient::color(double position, const QCPRange &range, bool logarithmic) ++{ ++ // If you change something here, make sure to also adapt ::colorize() ++ if (mColorBufferInvalidated) ++ updateColorBuffer(); ++ int index = 0; ++ if (!logarithmic) ++ index = (position-range.lower)*(mLevelCount-1)/range.size(); ++ else ++ index = qLn(position/range.lower)/qLn(range.upper/range.lower)*(mLevelCount-1); ++ if (mPeriodic) ++ { ++ index = index % mLevelCount; ++ if (index < 0) ++ index += mLevelCount; ++ } else ++ { ++ if (index < 0) ++ index = 0; ++ else if (index >= mLevelCount) ++ index = mLevelCount-1; ++ } ++ return mColorBuffer.at(index); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Clears the current color stops and loads the specified \a preset. A preset consists of predefined ++ color stops and the corresponding color interpolation method. ++ ++ The available presets are: ++ \image html QCPColorGradient.png ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::loadPreset(GradientPreset preset) ++{ ++ clearColorStops(); ++ switch (preset) ++ { ++ case gpGrayscale: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, Qt::black); ++ setColorStopAt(1, Qt::white); ++ break; ++ case gpHot: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 0, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.2, QColor(180, 10, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.4, QColor(245, 50, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 150, 10)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(255, 255, 50)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255)); ++ break; ++ case gpCold: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 50)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.2, QColor(0, 10, 180)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.4, QColor(0, 50, 245)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(10, 150, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(50, 255, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255)); ++ break; ++ case gpNight: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciHSV); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(10, 20, 30)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(250, 255, 250)); ++ break; ++ case gpCandy: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciHSV); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 250, 250)); ++ break; ++ case gpGeography: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(70, 170, 210)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.20, QColor(90, 160, 180)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.25, QColor(45, 130, 175)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.30, QColor(100, 140, 125)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.5, QColor(100, 140, 100)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(130, 145, 120)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.7, QColor(140, 130, 120)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.9, QColor(180, 190, 190)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(210, 210, 230)); ++ break; ++ case gpIon: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciHSV); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 10, 10)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.45, QColor(0, 0, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.8, QColor(0, 255, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(0, 255, 0)); ++ break; ++ case gpThermal: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 50)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(20, 0, 120)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.33, QColor(200, 30, 140)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 100, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.85, QColor(255, 255, 40)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 255)); ++ break; ++ case gpPolar: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 255, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.18, QColor(10, 70, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.28, QColor(10, 10, 190)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.5, QColor(0, 0, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.72, QColor(190, 10, 10)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.82, QColor(255, 70, 10)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 255, 50)); ++ break; ++ case gpSpectrum: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciHSV); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(50, 0, 50)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(0, 0, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.35, QColor(0, 255, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.6, QColor(255, 255, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.75, QColor(255, 30, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(50, 0, 0)); ++ break; ++ case gpJet: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciRGB); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(0, 0, 100)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.15, QColor(0, 50, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.35, QColor(0, 255, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.65, QColor(255, 255, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(0.85, QColor(255, 30, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(100, 0, 0)); ++ break; ++ case gpHues: ++ setColorInterpolation(ciHSV); ++ setColorStopAt(0, QColor(255, 0, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(1.0/3.0, QColor(0, 0, 255)); ++ setColorStopAt(2.0/3.0, QColor(0, 255, 0)); ++ setColorStopAt(1, QColor(255, 0, 0)); ++ break; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Clears all color stops. ++ ++ \see setColorStops, setColorStopAt ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::clearColorStops() ++{ ++ mColorStops.clear(); ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns an inverted gradient. The inverted gradient has all properties as this \ref ++ QCPColorGradient, but the order of the color stops is inverted. ++ ++ \see setColorStops, setColorStopAt ++*/ ++QCPColorGradient QCPColorGradient::inverted() const ++{ ++ QCPColorGradient result(*this); ++ result.clearColorStops(); ++ for (QMap::const_iterator it=mColorStops.constBegin(); it!=mColorStops.constEnd(); ++it) ++ result.setColorStopAt(1.0-it.key(), it.value()); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns true if the color gradient uses transparency, i.e. if any of the configured color stops ++ has an alpha value below 255. ++*/ ++bool QCPColorGradient::stopsUseAlpha() const ++{ ++ for (QMap::const_iterator it=mColorStops.constBegin(); it!=mColorStops.constEnd(); ++it) ++ { ++ if (it.value().alpha() < 255) ++ return true; ++ } ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Updates the internal color buffer which will be used by \ref colorize and \ref color, to quickly ++ convert positions to colors. This is where the interpolation between color stops is calculated. ++*/ ++void QCPColorGradient::updateColorBuffer() ++{ ++ if (mColorBuffer.size() != mLevelCount) ++ mColorBuffer.resize(mLevelCount); ++ if (mColorStops.size() > 1) ++ { ++ double indexToPosFactor = 1.0/(double)(mLevelCount-1); ++ const bool useAlpha = stopsUseAlpha(); ++ for (int i=0; i::const_iterator it = mColorStops.lowerBound(position); ++ if (it == mColorStops.constEnd()) // position is on or after last stop, use color of last stop ++ { ++ mColorBuffer[i] = (it-1).value().rgba(); ++ } else if (it == mColorStops.constBegin()) // position is on or before first stop, use color of first stop ++ { ++ mColorBuffer[i] = it.value().rgba(); ++ } else // position is in between stops (or on an intermediate stop), interpolate color ++ { ++ QMap::const_iterator high = it; ++ QMap::const_iterator low = it-1; ++ double t = (position-low.key())/(high.key()-low.key()); // interpolation factor 0..1 ++ switch (mColorInterpolation) ++ { ++ case ciRGB: ++ { ++ if (useAlpha) ++ { ++ const int alpha = (1-t)*low.value().alpha() + t*high.value().alpha(); ++ const float alphaPremultiplier = alpha/255.0f; // since we use QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied ++ mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(((1-t)*low.value().red() + t*high.value().red())*alphaPremultiplier, ++ ((1-t)*low.value().green() + t*high.value().green())*alphaPremultiplier, ++ ((1-t)*low.value().blue() + t*high.value().blue())*alphaPremultiplier, ++ alpha); ++ } else ++ { ++ mColorBuffer[i] = qRgb(((1-t)*low.value().red() + t*high.value().red()), ++ ((1-t)*low.value().green() + t*high.value().green()), ++ ((1-t)*low.value().blue() + t*high.value().blue())); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case ciHSV: ++ { ++ QColor lowHsv = low.value().toHsv(); ++ QColor highHsv = high.value().toHsv(); ++ double hue = 0; ++ double hueDiff = highHsv.hueF()-lowHsv.hueF(); ++ if (hueDiff > 0.5) ++ hue = lowHsv.hueF() - t*(1.0-hueDiff); ++ else if (hueDiff < -0.5) ++ hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t*(1.0+hueDiff); ++ else ++ hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t*hueDiff; ++ if (hue < 0) hue += 1.0; ++ else if (hue >= 1.0) hue -= 1.0; ++ if (useAlpha) ++ { ++ const QRgb rgb = QColor::fromHsvF(hue, ++ (1-t)*lowHsv.saturationF() + t*highHsv.saturationF(), ++ (1-t)*lowHsv.valueF() + t*highHsv.valueF()).rgb(); ++ const float alpha = (1-t)*lowHsv.alphaF() + t*highHsv.alphaF(); ++ mColorBuffer[i] = qRgba(qRed(rgb)*alpha, qGreen(rgb)*alpha, qBlue(rgb)*alpha, 255*alpha); ++ } ++ else ++ { ++ mColorBuffer[i] = QColor::fromHsvF(hue, ++ (1-t)*lowHsv.saturationF() + t*highHsv.saturationF(), ++ (1-t)*lowHsv.valueF() + t*highHsv.valueF()).rgb(); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } else if (mColorStops.size() == 1) ++ { ++ const QRgb rgb = mColorStops.constBegin().value().rgb(); ++ const float alpha = mColorStops.constBegin().value().alphaF(); ++ mColorBuffer.fill(qRgba(qRed(rgb)*alpha, qGreen(rgb)*alpha, qBlue(rgb)*alpha, 255*alpha)); ++ } else // mColorStops is empty, fill color buffer with black ++ { ++ mColorBuffer.fill(qRgb(0, 0, 0)); ++ } ++ mColorBufferInvalidated = false; ++} ++/* end of 'src/colorgradient.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.cpp', size 12313 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket ++ \brief A selection decorator which draws brackets around each selected data segment ++ ++ Additionally to the regular highlighting of selected segments via color, fill and scatter style, ++ this \ref QCPSelectionDecorator subclass draws markers at the begin and end of each selected data ++ segment of the plottable. ++ ++ The shape of the markers can be controlled with \ref setBracketStyle, \ref setBracketWidth and ++ \ref setBracketHeight. The color/fill can be controlled with \ref setBracketPen and \ref ++ setBracketBrush. ++ ++ To introduce custom bracket styles, it is only necessary to sublcass \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket and reimplement \ref drawBracket. The rest will be managed by the ++ base class. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket instance with default values. ++*/ ++QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket() : ++ mBracketPen(QPen(Qt::black)), ++ mBracketBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mBracketWidth(5), ++ mBracketHeight(50), ++ mBracketStyle(bsSquareBracket), ++ mTangentToData(false), ++ mTangentAverage(2) ++{ ++ ++} ++ ++QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::~QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the brackets at the beginning and end of each selected ++ data segment. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mBracketPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to draw the brackets at the beginning and end of each selected ++ data segment. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBracketBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the drawn bracket. The width dimension is always parallel to the key axis of ++ the data, or the tangent direction of the current data slope, if \ref setTangentToData is ++ enabled. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketWidth(int width) ++{ ++ mBracketWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the height of the drawn bracket. The height dimension is always perpendicular to the key axis ++ of the data, or the tangent direction of the current data slope, if \ref setTangentToData is ++ enabled. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketHeight(int height) ++{ ++ mBracketHeight = height; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the shape that the bracket/marker will have. ++ ++ \see setBracketWidth, setBracketHeight ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setBracketStyle(QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::BracketStyle style) ++{ ++ mBracketStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the brackets will be rotated such that they align with the slope of the data at the ++ position that they appear in. ++ ++ For noisy data, it might be more visually appealing to average the slope over multiple data ++ points. This can be configured via \ref setTangentAverage. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setTangentToData(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mTangentToData = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Controls over how many data points the slope shall be averaged, when brackets shall be aligned ++ with the data (if \ref setTangentToData is true). ++ ++ From the position of the bracket, \a pointCount points towards the selected data range will be ++ taken into account. The smallest value of \a pointCount is 1, which is effectively equivalent to ++ disabling \ref setTangentToData. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::setTangentAverage(int pointCount) ++{ ++ mTangentAverage = pointCount; ++ if (mTangentAverage < 1) ++ mTangentAverage = 1; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Draws the bracket shape with \a painter. The parameter \a direction is either -1 or 1 and ++ indicates whether the bracket shall point to the left or the right (i.e. is a closing or opening ++ bracket, respectively). ++ ++ The passed \a painter already contains all transformations that are necessary to position and ++ rotate the bracket appropriately. Painting operations can be performed as if drawing upright ++ brackets on flat data with horizontal key axis, with (0, 0) being the center of the bracket. ++ ++ If you wish to sublcass \ref QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket in order to provide custom bracket ++ shapes (see \ref QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::bsUserStyle), this is the method you should ++ reimplement. ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::drawBracket(QCPPainter *painter, int direction) const ++{ ++ switch (mBracketStyle) ++ { ++ case bsSquareBracket: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(mBracketWidth*direction, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, -mBracketHeight*0.5)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(mBracketWidth*direction, mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5)); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsHalfEllipse: ++ { ++ painter->drawArc(-mBracketWidth*0.5, -mBracketHeight*0.5, mBracketWidth, mBracketHeight, -90*16, -180*16*direction); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsEllipse: ++ { ++ painter->drawEllipse(-mBracketWidth*0.5, -mBracketHeight*0.5, mBracketWidth, mBracketHeight); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsPlus: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, -mBracketHeight*0.5, 0, mBracketHeight*0.5)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(-mBracketWidth*0.5, 0, mBracketWidth*0.5, 0)); ++ break; ++ } ++ default: ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "unknown/custom bracket style can't be handled by default implementation:" << static_cast(mBracketStyle); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Draws the bracket decoration on the data points at the begin and end of each selected data ++ segment given in \a selection. ++ ++ It uses the method \ref drawBracket to actually draw the shapes. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection) ++{ ++ if (!mPlottable || selection.isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ if (QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d = mPlottable->interface1D()) ++ { ++ foreach (const QCPDataRange &dataRange, selection.dataRanges()) ++ { ++ // determine position and (if tangent mode is enabled) angle of brackets: ++ int openBracketDir = (mPlottable->keyAxis() && !mPlottable->keyAxis()->rangeReversed()) ? 1 : -1; ++ int closeBracketDir = -openBracketDir; ++ QPointF openBracketPos = getPixelCoordinates(interface1d, dataRange.begin()); ++ QPointF closeBracketPos = getPixelCoordinates(interface1d, dataRange.end()-1); ++ double openBracketAngle = 0; ++ double closeBracketAngle = 0; ++ if (mTangentToData) ++ { ++ openBracketAngle = getTangentAngle(interface1d, dataRange.begin(), openBracketDir); ++ closeBracketAngle = getTangentAngle(interface1d, dataRange.end()-1, closeBracketDir); ++ } ++ // draw opening bracket: ++ QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform(); ++ painter->setPen(mBracketPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBracketBrush); ++ painter->translate(openBracketPos); ++ painter->rotate(openBracketAngle/M_PI*180.0); ++ drawBracket(painter, openBracketDir); ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ // draw closing bracket: ++ painter->setPen(mBracketPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBracketBrush); ++ painter->translate(closeBracketPos); ++ painter->rotate(closeBracketAngle/M_PI*180.0); ++ drawBracket(painter, closeBracketDir); ++ painter->setTransform(oldTransform); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ If \ref setTangentToData is enabled, brackets need to be rotated according to the data slope. ++ This method returns the angle in radians by which a bracket at the given \a dataIndex must be ++ rotated. ++ ++ The parameter \a direction must be set to either -1 or 1, representing whether it is an opening ++ or closing bracket. Since for slope calculation multiple data points are required, this defines ++ the direction in which the algorithm walks, starting at \a dataIndex, to average those data ++ points. (see \ref setTangentToData and \ref setTangentAverage) ++ ++ \a interface1d is the interface to the plottable's data which is used to query data coordinates. ++*/ ++double QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::getTangentAngle(const QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d, int dataIndex, int direction) const ++{ ++ if (!interface1d || dataIndex < 0 || dataIndex >= interface1d->dataCount()) ++ return 0; ++ direction = direction < 0 ? -1 : 1; // enforce direction is either -1 or 1 ++ ++ // how many steps we can actually go from index in the given direction without exceeding data bounds: ++ int averageCount; ++ if (direction < 0) ++ averageCount = qMin(mTangentAverage, dataIndex); ++ else ++ averageCount = qMin(mTangentAverage, interface1d->dataCount()-1-dataIndex); ++ qDebug() << averageCount; ++ // calculate point average of averageCount points: ++ QVector points(averageCount); ++ QPointF pointsAverage; ++ int currentIndex = dataIndex; ++ for (int i=0; ikeyAxis(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mPlottable->valueAxis(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(0, 0); } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return QPointF(keyAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainKey(dataIndex)), valueAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainValue(dataIndex))); ++ else ++ return QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainValue(dataIndex)), keyAxis->coordToPixel(interface1d->dataMainKey(dataIndex))); ++} ++/* end of 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.cpp', size 47509 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAxisRect ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAxisRect ++ \brief Holds multiple axes and arranges them in a rectangular shape. ++ ++ This class represents an axis rect, a rectangular area that is bounded on all sides with an ++ arbitrary number of axes. ++ ++ Initially QCustomPlot has one axis rect, accessible via QCustomPlot::axisRect(). However, the ++ layout system allows to have multiple axis rects, e.g. arranged in a grid layout ++ (QCustomPlot::plotLayout). ++ ++ By default, QCPAxisRect comes with four axes, at bottom, top, left and right. They can be ++ accessed via \ref axis by providing the respective axis type (\ref QCPAxis::AxisType) and index. ++ If you need all axes in the axis rect, use \ref axes. The top and right axes are set to be ++ invisible initially (QCPAxis::setVisible). To add more axes to a side, use \ref addAxis or \ref ++ addAxes. To remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis. ++ ++ The axis rect layerable itself only draws a background pixmap or color, if specified (\ref ++ setBackground). It is placed on the "background" layer initially (see \ref QCPLayer for an ++ explanation of the QCustomPlot layer system). The axes that are held by the axis rect can be ++ placed on other layers, independently of the axis rect. ++ ++ Every axis rect has a child layout of type \ref QCPLayoutInset. It is accessible via \ref ++ insetLayout and can be used to have other layout elements (or even other layouts with multiple ++ elements) hovering inside the axis rect. ++ ++ If an axis rect is clicked and dragged, it processes this by moving certain axis ranges. The ++ behaviour can be controlled with \ref setRangeDrag and \ref setRangeDragAxes. If the mouse wheel ++ is scrolled while the cursor is on the axis rect, certain axes are scaled. This is controllable ++ via \ref setRangeZoom, \ref setRangeZoomAxes and \ref setRangeZoomFactor. These interactions are ++ only enabled if \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref ++ QCP::iRangeZoom. ++ ++ \image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png ++
Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an axis. The dashed ++ line on the far left indicates the viewport/widget border.
++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPLayoutInset *QCPAxisRect::insetLayout() const ++ ++ Returns the inset layout of this axis rect. It can be used to place other layout elements (or ++ even layouts with multiple other elements) inside/on top of an axis rect. ++ ++ \see QCPLayoutInset ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::left() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel position of the left border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into ++ account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::right() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel position of the right border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into ++ account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::top() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel position of the top border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into ++ account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::bottom() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel position of the bottom border of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into ++ account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::width() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel width of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the ++ returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::height() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel height of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the ++ returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QSize QCPAxisRect::size() const ++ ++ Returns the pixel size of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account here, so the ++ returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topLeft() const ++ ++ Returns the top left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here, ++ so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topRight() const ++ ++ Returns the top right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account ++ here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomLeft() const ++ ++ Returns the bottom left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account ++ here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomRight() const ++ ++ Returns the bottom right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account ++ here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::center() const ++ ++ Returns the center of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into account here, so the ++ returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a QCPAxisRect instance and sets default values. An axis is added for each of the four ++ sides, the top and right axes are set invisible initially. ++*/ ++QCPAxisRect::QCPAxisRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, bool setupDefaultAxes) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mBackgroundBrush(Qt::NoBrush), ++ mBackgroundScaled(true), ++ mBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding), ++ mInsetLayout(new QCPLayoutInset), ++ mRangeDrag(Qt::Horizontal|Qt::Vertical), ++ mRangeZoom(Qt::Horizontal|Qt::Vertical), ++ mRangeZoomFactorHorz(0.85), ++ mRangeZoomFactorVert(0.85), ++ mDragging(false) ++{ ++ mInsetLayout->initializeParentPlot(mParentPlot); ++ mInsetLayout->setParentLayerable(this); ++ mInsetLayout->setParent(this); ++ ++ setMinimumSize(50, 50); ++ setMinimumMargins(QMargins(15, 15, 15, 15)); ++ mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atLeft, QList()); ++ mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atRight, QList()); ++ mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atTop, QList()); ++ mAxes.insert(QCPAxis::atBottom, QList()); ++ ++ if (setupDefaultAxes) ++ { ++ QCPAxis *xAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ QCPAxis *yAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ QCPAxis *xAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ QCPAxis *yAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ setRangeDragAxes(xAxis, yAxis); ++ setRangeZoomAxes(xAxis, yAxis); ++ xAxis2->setVisible(false); ++ yAxis2->setVisible(false); ++ xAxis->grid()->setVisible(true); ++ yAxis->grid()->setVisible(true); ++ xAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false); ++ yAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false); ++ xAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen(Qt::NoPen); ++ yAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen(Qt::NoPen); ++ xAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false); ++ yAxis2->grid()->setVisible(false); ++ } ++} ++ ++QCPAxisRect::~QCPAxisRect() ++{ ++ delete mInsetLayout; ++ mInsetLayout = 0; ++ ++ QList axesList = axes(); ++ for (int i=0; i ax(mAxes.value(type)); ++ if (index >= 0 && index < ax.size()) ++ { ++ return ax.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns all axes on the axis rect sides specified with \a types. ++ ++ \a types may be a single \ref QCPAxis::AxisType or an or-combination, to get the axes of ++ multiple sides. ++ ++ \see axis ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::axes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types) const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atLeft)) ++ result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atRight)) ++ result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atTop)) ++ result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atBottom)) ++ result << mAxes.value(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Returns all axes of this axis rect. ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::axes() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ QHashIterator > it(mAxes); ++ while (it.hasNext()) ++ { ++ it.next(); ++ result << it.value(); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds a new axis to the axis rect side specified with \a type, and returns it. If \a axis is 0, a ++ new QCPAxis instance is created internally. QCustomPlot owns the returned axis, so if you want to ++ remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis instead of deleting it manually. ++ ++ You may inject QCPAxis instances (or subclasses of QCPAxis) by setting \a axis to an axis that was ++ previously created outside QCustomPlot. It is important to note that QCustomPlot takes ownership ++ of the axis, so you may not delete it afterwards. Further, the \a axis must have been created ++ with this axis rect as parent and with the same axis type as specified in \a type. If this is not ++ the case, a debug output is generated, the axis is not added, and the method returns 0. ++ ++ This method can not be used to move \a axis between axis rects. The same \a axis instance must ++ not be added multiple times to the same or different axis rects. ++ ++ If an axis rect side already contains one or more axes, the lower and upper endings of the new ++ axis (\ref QCPAxis::setLowerEnding, \ref QCPAxis::setUpperEnding) are set to \ref ++ QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar. ++ ++ \see addAxes, setupFullAxesBox ++*/ ++QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::addAxis(QCPAxis::AxisType type, QCPAxis *axis) ++{ ++ QCPAxis *newAxis = axis; ++ if (!newAxis) ++ { ++ newAxis = new QCPAxis(this, type); ++ } else // user provided existing axis instance, do some sanity checks ++ { ++ if (newAxis->axisType() != type) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis has different axis type than specified in type parameter"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ if (newAxis->axisRect() != this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis doesn't have this axis rect as parent axis rect"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ if (axes().contains(newAxis)) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed axis is already owned by this axis rect"; ++ return 0; ++ } ++ } ++ if (mAxes[type].size() > 0) // multiple axes on one side, add half-bar axis ending to additional axes with offset ++ { ++ bool invert = (type == QCPAxis::atRight) || (type == QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ newAxis->setLowerEnding(QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, !invert)); ++ newAxis->setUpperEnding(QCPLineEnding(QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, invert)); ++ } ++ mAxes[type].append(newAxis); ++ ++ // reset convenience axis pointers on parent QCustomPlot if they are unset: ++ if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->axisRectCount() > 0 && mParentPlot->axisRect(0) == this) ++ { ++ switch (type) ++ { ++ case QCPAxis::atBottom: { if (!mParentPlot->xAxis) mParentPlot->xAxis = newAxis; break; } ++ case QCPAxis::atLeft: { if (!mParentPlot->yAxis) mParentPlot->yAxis = newAxis; break; } ++ case QCPAxis::atTop: { if (!mParentPlot->xAxis2) mParentPlot->xAxis2 = newAxis; break; } ++ case QCPAxis::atRight: { if (!mParentPlot->yAxis2) mParentPlot->yAxis2 = newAxis; break; } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return newAxis; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds a new axis with \ref addAxis to each axis rect side specified in \a types. This may be an ++ or-combination of QCPAxis::AxisType, so axes can be added to multiple sides at once. ++ ++ Returns a list of the added axes. ++ ++ \see addAxis, setupFullAxesBox ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::addAxes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types) ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atLeft)) ++ result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atRight)) ++ result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atTop)) ++ result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ if (types.testFlag(QCPAxis::atBottom)) ++ result << addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified \a axis from the axis rect and deletes it. ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if \a axis was a valid axis in this axis rect. ++ ++ \see addAxis ++*/ ++bool QCPAxisRect::removeAxis(QCPAxis *axis) ++{ ++ // don't access axis->axisType() to provide safety when axis is an invalid pointer, rather go through all axis containers: ++ QHashIterator > it(mAxes); ++ while (it.hasNext()) ++ { ++ it.next(); ++ if (it.value().contains(axis)) ++ { ++ mAxes[it.key()].removeOne(axis); ++ if (qobject_cast(parentPlot())) // make sure this isn't called from QObject dtor when QCustomPlot is already destructed (happens when the axis rect is not in any layout and thus QObject-child of QCustomPlot) ++ parentPlot()->axisRemoved(axis); ++ delete axis; ++ return true; ++ } ++ } ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis isn't in axis rect:" << reinterpret_cast(axis); ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Zooms in (or out) to the passed rectangular region \a pixelRect, given in pixel coordinates. ++ ++ All axes of this axis rect will have their range zoomed accordingly. If you only wish to zoom ++ specific axes, use the overloaded version of this method. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect) ++{ ++ zoom(pixelRect, axes()); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Zooms in (or out) to the passed rectangular region \a pixelRect, given in pixel coordinates. ++ ++ Only the axes passed in \a affectedAxes will have their ranges zoomed accordingly. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QList &affectedAxes) ++{ ++ foreach (QCPAxis *axis, affectedAxes) ++ { ++ if (!axis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "a passed axis was zero"; ++ continue; ++ } ++ QCPRange pixelRange; ++ if (axis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ pixelRange = QCPRange(pixelRect.left(), pixelRect.right()); ++ else ++ pixelRange = QCPRange(pixelRect.top(), pixelRect.bottom()); ++ axis->setRange(axis->pixelToCoord(pixelRange.lower), axis->pixelToCoord(pixelRange.upper)); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Convenience function to create an axis on each side that doesn't have any axes yet and set their ++ visibility to true. Further, the top/right axes are assigned the following properties of the ++ bottom/left axes: ++ ++ \li range (\ref QCPAxis::setRange) ++ \li range reversed (\ref QCPAxis::setRangeReversed) ++ \li scale type (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType) ++ \li tick visibility (\ref QCPAxis::setTicks) ++ \li number format (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberFormat) ++ \li number precision (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision) ++ \li tick count of ticker (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickCount) ++ \li tick origin of ticker (\ref QCPAxisTicker::setTickOrigin) ++ ++ Tick label visibility (\ref QCPAxis::setTickLabels) of the right and top axes are set to false. ++ ++ If \a connectRanges is true, the \ref QCPAxis::rangeChanged "rangeChanged" signals of the bottom ++ and left axes are connected to the \ref QCPAxis::setRange slots of the top and right axes. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox(bool connectRanges) ++{ ++ QCPAxis *xAxis, *yAxis, *xAxis2, *yAxis2; ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atBottom) == 0) ++ xAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ else ++ xAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atLeft) == 0) ++ yAxis = addAxis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ else ++ yAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atTop) == 0) ++ xAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ else ++ xAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atRight) == 0) ++ yAxis2 = addAxis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ else ++ yAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ ++ xAxis->setVisible(true); ++ yAxis->setVisible(true); ++ xAxis2->setVisible(true); ++ yAxis2->setVisible(true); ++ xAxis2->setTickLabels(false); ++ yAxis2->setTickLabels(false); ++ ++ xAxis2->setRange(xAxis->range()); ++ xAxis2->setRangeReversed(xAxis->rangeReversed()); ++ xAxis2->setScaleType(xAxis->scaleType()); ++ xAxis2->setTicks(xAxis->ticks()); ++ xAxis2->setNumberFormat(xAxis->numberFormat()); ++ xAxis2->setNumberPrecision(xAxis->numberPrecision()); ++ xAxis2->ticker()->setTickCount(xAxis->ticker()->tickCount()); ++ xAxis2->ticker()->setTickOrigin(xAxis->ticker()->tickOrigin()); ++ ++ yAxis2->setRange(yAxis->range()); ++ yAxis2->setRangeReversed(yAxis->rangeReversed()); ++ yAxis2->setScaleType(yAxis->scaleType()); ++ yAxis2->setTicks(yAxis->ticks()); ++ yAxis2->setNumberFormat(yAxis->numberFormat()); ++ yAxis2->setNumberPrecision(yAxis->numberPrecision()); ++ yAxis2->ticker()->setTickCount(yAxis->ticker()->tickCount()); ++ yAxis2->ticker()->setTickOrigin(yAxis->ticker()->tickOrigin()); ++ ++ if (connectRanges) ++ { ++ connect(xAxis, SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), xAxis2, SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(yAxis, SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), yAxis2, SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the plottables that are associated with this axis rect. ++ ++ A plottable is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value axis (or both) is in ++ this axis rect. ++ ++ \see graphs, items ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::plottables() const ++{ ++ // Note: don't append all QCPAxis::plottables() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries ++ QList result; ++ for (int i=0; imPlottables.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this || mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this) ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mPlottables.at(i)); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the graphs that are associated with this axis rect. ++ ++ A graph is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value axis (or both) is in ++ this axis rect. ++ ++ \see plottables, items ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::graphs() const ++{ ++ // Note: don't append all QCPAxis::graphs() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries ++ QList result; ++ for (int i=0; imGraphs.size(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this || mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this) ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mGraphs.at(i)); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis rect. ++ ++ An item is considered associated with an axis rect if any of its positions has key or value axis ++ set to an axis that is in this axis rect, or if any of its positions has \ref ++ QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect set to the axis rect, or if the clip axis rect (\ref ++ QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect) is set to this axis rect. ++ ++ \see plottables, graphs ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::items() const ++{ ++ // Note: don't just append all QCPAxis::items() into a list, because we might get duplicate entries ++ // and miss those items that have this axis rect as clipAxisRect. ++ QList result; ++ for (int itemId=0; itemIdmItems.size(); ++itemId) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)->clipAxisRect() == this) ++ { ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)); ++ continue; ++ } ++ QList positions = mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)->positions(); ++ for (int posId=0; posIdaxisRect() == this || ++ positions.at(posId)->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this || ++ positions.at(posId)->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this) ++ { ++ result.append(mParentPlot->mItems.at(itemId)); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method is called automatically upon replot and doesn't need to be called by users of ++ QCPAxisRect. ++ ++ Calls the base class implementation to update the margins (see \ref QCPLayoutElement::update), ++ and finally passes the \ref rect to the inset layout (\ref insetLayout) and calls its ++ QCPInsetLayout::update function. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::update(UpdatePhase phase) ++{ ++ QCPLayoutElement::update(phase); ++ ++ switch (phase) ++ { ++ case upPreparation: ++ { ++ QList allAxes = axes(); ++ for (int i=0; isetupTickVectors(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case upLayout: ++ { ++ mInsetLayout->setOuterRect(rect()); ++ break; ++ } ++ default: break; ++ } ++ ++ // pass update call on to inset layout (doesn't happen automatically, because QCPAxisRect doesn't derive from QCPLayout): ++ mInsetLayout->update(phase); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QList QCPAxisRect::elements(bool recursive) const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (mInsetLayout) ++ { ++ result << mInsetLayout; ++ if (recursive) ++ result << mInsetLayout->elements(recursive); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAxisRect::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ painter->setAntialiasing(false); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAxisRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ drawBackground(painter); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets \a pm as the axis background pixmap. The axis background pixmap will be drawn inside the ++ axis rect. Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect ++ backgrounds are usually drawn below everything else. ++ ++ For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the axis rect, scaling can be ++ enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (i.e. whether and how the aspect ratio ++ is preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these options in one call, ++ consider using the overloaded version of this function. ++ ++ Below the pixmap, the axis rect may be optionally filled with a brush, if specified with \ref ++ setBackground(const QBrush &brush). ++ ++ \see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode, setBackground(const QBrush &brush) ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm) ++{ ++ mBackgroundPixmap = pm; ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets \a brush as the background brush. The axis rect background will be filled with this brush. ++ Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the axis rect backgrounds ++ are usually drawn below everything else. ++ ++ The brush will be drawn before (under) any background pixmap, which may be specified with \ref ++ setBackground(const QPixmap &pm). ++ ++ To disable drawing of a background brush, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm) ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBackgroundBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Allows setting the background pixmap of the axis rect, whether it shall be scaled and how it ++ shall be scaled in one call. ++ ++ \see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode) ++{ ++ mBackgroundPixmap = pm; ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap(); ++ mBackgroundScaled = scaled; ++ mBackgroundScaledMode = mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the axis background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the axis rect or not. If \a scaled ++ is set to true, you may control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is ++ preserved with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. ++ ++ Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is no performance ++ penalty on replots. (Except when the axis rect dimensions are changed continuously.) ++ ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled) ++{ ++ mBackgroundScaled = scaled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If scaling of the axis background pixmap is enabled (\ref setBackgroundScaled), use this function to ++ define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap passed to \ref setBackground is preserved. ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode) ++{ ++ mBackgroundScaledMode = mode; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the range drag axis of the \a orientation provided. If multiple axes were set, returns ++ the first one (use \ref rangeDragAxes to retrieve a list with all set axes). ++ ++ \see setRangeDragAxes ++*/ ++QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::rangeDragAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation) ++{ ++ if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return mRangeDragHorzAxis.isEmpty() ? 0 : mRangeDragHorzAxis.first().data(); ++ else ++ return mRangeDragVertAxis.isEmpty() ? 0 : mRangeDragVertAxis.first().data(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the range zoom axis of the \a orientation provided. If multiple axes were set, returns ++ the first one (use \ref rangeZoomAxes to retrieve a list with all set axes). ++ ++ \see setRangeZoomAxes ++*/ ++QCPAxis *QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation) ++{ ++ if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return mRangeZoomHorzAxis.isEmpty() ? 0 : mRangeZoomHorzAxis.first().data(); ++ else ++ return mRangeZoomVertAxis.isEmpty() ? 0 : mRangeZoomVertAxis.first().data(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns all range drag axes of the \a orientation provided. ++ ++ \see rangeZoomAxis, setRangeZoomAxes ++*/ ++QList QCPAxisRect::rangeDragAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation) ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation) ++{ ++ QList result; ++ if (orientation == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; iQt::Horizontal | ++ Qt::Vertical as \a orientations. ++ ++ In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++ contains \ref QCP::iRangeDrag to enable the range dragging interaction. ++ ++ \see setRangeZoom, setRangeDragAxes, QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag(Qt::Orientations orientations) ++{ ++ mRangeDrag = orientations; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which axis orientation may be zoomed by the user with the mouse wheel. What orientation ++ corresponds to which specific axis can be set with \ref setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, ++ QCPAxis *vertical). By default, the horizontal axis is the bottom axis (xAxis) and the vertical ++ axis is the left axis (yAxis). ++ ++ To disable range zooming entirely, pass 0 as \a orientations or remove \ref QCP::iRangeZoom from \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions. To enable range zooming for both directions, pass Qt::Horizontal | ++ Qt::Vertical as \a orientations. ++ ++ In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++ contains \ref QCP::iRangeZoom to enable the range zooming interaction. ++ ++ \see setRangeZoomFactor, setRangeZoomAxes, setRangeDrag ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom(Qt::Orientations orientations) ++{ ++ mRangeZoom = orientations; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets the axes whose range will be dragged when \ref setRangeDrag enables mouse range dragging on ++ the QCustomPlot widget. Pass 0 if no axis shall be dragged in the respective orientation. ++ ++ Use the overload taking a list of axes, if multiple axes (more than one per orientation) shall ++ react to dragging interactions. ++ ++ \see setRangeZoomAxes ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical) ++{ ++ QList horz, vert; ++ if (horizontal) ++ horz.append(horizontal); ++ if (vertical) ++ vert.append(vertical); ++ setRangeDragAxes(horz, vert); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ This method allows to set up multiple axes to react to horizontal and vertical dragging. The drag ++ orientation that the respective axis will react to is deduced from its orientation (\ref ++ QCPAxis::orientation). ++ ++ In the unusual case that you wish to e.g. drag a vertically oriented axis with a horizontal drag ++ motion, use the overload taking two separate lists for horizontal and vertical dragging. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QList axes) ++{ ++ QList horz, vert; ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, axes) ++ { ++ if (ax->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ horz.append(ax); ++ else ++ vert.append(ax); ++ } ++ setRangeDragAxes(horz, vert); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ This method allows to set multiple axes up to react to horizontal and vertical dragging, and ++ define specifically which axis reacts to which drag orientation (irrespective of the axis ++ orientation). ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes(QList horizontal, QList vertical) ++{ ++ mRangeDragHorzAxis.clear(); ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, horizontal) ++ { ++ QPointer axPointer(ax); ++ if (!axPointer.isNull()) ++ mRangeDragHorzAxis.append(axPointer); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in horizontal list:" << reinterpret_cast(ax); ++ } ++ mRangeDragVertAxis.clear(); ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, vertical) ++ { ++ QPointer axPointer(ax); ++ if (!axPointer.isNull()) ++ mRangeDragVertAxis.append(axPointer); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in vertical list:" << reinterpret_cast(ax); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the axes whose range will be zoomed when \ref setRangeZoom enables mouse wheel zooming on ++ the QCustomPlot widget. Pass 0 if no axis shall be zoomed in the respective orientation. ++ ++ The two axes can be zoomed with different strengths, when different factors are passed to \ref ++ setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor). ++ ++ Use the overload taking a list of axes, if multiple axes (more than one per orientation) shall ++ react to zooming interactions. ++ ++ \see setRangeDragAxes ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical) ++{ ++ QList horz, vert; ++ if (horizontal) ++ horz.append(horizontal); ++ if (vertical) ++ vert.append(vertical); ++ setRangeZoomAxes(horz, vert); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ This method allows to set up multiple axes to react to horizontal and vertical range zooming. The ++ zoom orientation that the respective axis will react to is deduced from its orientation (\ref ++ QCPAxis::orientation). ++ ++ In the unusual case that you wish to e.g. zoom a vertically oriented axis with a horizontal zoom ++ interaction, use the overload taking two separate lists for horizontal and vertical zooming. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QList axes) ++{ ++ QList horz, vert; ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, axes) ++ { ++ if (ax->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ horz.append(ax); ++ else ++ vert.append(ax); ++ } ++ setRangeZoomAxes(horz, vert); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ This method allows to set multiple axes up to react to horizontal and vertical zooming, and ++ define specifically which axis reacts to which zoom orientation (irrespective of the axis ++ orientation). ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes(QList horizontal, QList vertical) ++{ ++ mRangeZoomHorzAxis.clear(); ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, horizontal) ++ { ++ QPointer axPointer(ax); ++ if (!axPointer.isNull()) ++ mRangeZoomHorzAxis.append(axPointer); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in horizontal list:" << reinterpret_cast(ax); ++ } ++ mRangeZoomVertAxis.clear(); ++ foreach (QCPAxis *ax, vertical) ++ { ++ QPointer axPointer(ax); ++ if (!axPointer.isNull()) ++ mRangeZoomVertAxis.append(axPointer); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis passed in vertical list:" << reinterpret_cast(ax); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how strong one rotation step of the mouse wheel zooms, when range zoom was activated with ++ \ref setRangeZoom. The two parameters \a horizontalFactor and \a verticalFactor provide a way to ++ let the horizontal axis zoom at different rates than the vertical axis. Which axis is horizontal ++ and which is vertical, can be set with \ref setRangeZoomAxes. ++ ++ When the zoom factor is greater than one, scrolling the mouse wheel backwards (towards the user) ++ will zoom in (make the currently visible range smaller). For zoom factors smaller than one, the ++ same scrolling direction will zoom out. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor) ++{ ++ mRangeZoomFactorHorz = horizontalFactor; ++ mRangeZoomFactorVert = verticalFactor; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets both the horizontal and vertical zoom \a factor. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor(double factor) ++{ ++ mRangeZoomFactorHorz = factor; ++ mRangeZoomFactorVert = factor; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the background of this axis rect. It may consist of a background fill (a QBrush) and a ++ pixmap. ++ ++ If a brush was given via \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), this function first draws an ++ according filling inside the axis rect with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ Then, if a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the scaled version ++ depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and then draws it inside ++ the axis rect with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is only updated, when ++ the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background pixmap (this is ++ dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a different axis background pixmap was ++ set. ++ ++ \see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ // draw background fill: ++ if (mBackgroundBrush != Qt::NoBrush) ++ painter->fillRect(mRect, mBackgroundBrush); ++ ++ // draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified): ++ if (!mBackgroundPixmap.isNull()) ++ { ++ if (mBackgroundScaled) ++ { ++ // check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated: ++ QSize scaledSize(mBackgroundPixmap.size()); ++ scaledSize.scale(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode); ++ if (mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize) ++ mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled(mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation); ++ painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mScaledBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height()) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect()); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->drawPixmap(mRect.topLeft()+QPoint(0, -1), mBackgroundPixmap, QRect(0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height())); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function makes sure multiple axes on the side specified with \a type don't collide, but are ++ distributed according to their respective space requirement (QCPAxis::calculateMargin). ++ ++ It does this by setting an appropriate offset (\ref QCPAxis::setOffset) on all axes except the ++ one with index zero. ++ ++ This function is called by \ref calculateAutoMargin. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::updateAxesOffset(QCPAxis::AxisType type) ++{ ++ const QList axesList = mAxes.value(type); ++ if (axesList.isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ ++ bool isFirstVisible = !axesList.first()->visible(); // if the first axis is visible, the second axis (which is where the loop starts) isn't the first visible axis, so initialize with false ++ for (int i=1; ioffset() + axesList.at(i-1)->calculateMargin(); ++ if (axesList.at(i)->visible()) // only add inner tick length to offset if this axis is visible and it's not the first visible one (might happen if true first axis is invisible) ++ { ++ if (!isFirstVisible) ++ offset += axesList.at(i)->tickLengthIn(); ++ isFirstVisible = false; ++ } ++ axesList.at(i)->setOffset(offset); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++int QCPAxisRect::calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) ++{ ++ if (!mAutoMargins.testFlag(side)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Called with side that isn't specified as auto margin"; ++ ++ updateAxesOffset(QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(side)); ++ ++ // note: only need to look at the last (outer most) axis to determine the total margin, due to updateAxisOffset call ++ const QList axesList = mAxes.value(QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType(side)); ++ if (axesList.size() > 0) ++ return axesList.last()->offset() + axesList.last()->calculateMargin(); ++ else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Reacts to a change in layout to potentially set the convenience axis pointers \ref ++ QCustomPlot::xAxis, \ref QCustomPlot::yAxis, etc. of the parent QCustomPlot to the respective ++ axes of this axis rect. This is only done if the respective convenience pointer is currently zero ++ and if there is no QCPAxisRect at position (0, 0) of the plot layout. ++ ++ This automation makes it simpler to replace the main axis rect with a newly created one, without ++ the need to manually reset the convenience pointers. ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::layoutChanged() ++{ ++ if (mParentPlot && mParentPlot->axisRectCount() > 0 && mParentPlot->axisRect(0) == this) ++ { ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atBottom) > 0 && !mParentPlot->xAxis) ++ mParentPlot->xAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atBottom); ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atLeft) > 0 && !mParentPlot->yAxis) ++ mParentPlot->yAxis = axis(QCPAxis::atLeft); ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atTop) > 0 && !mParentPlot->xAxis2) ++ mParentPlot->xAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atTop); ++ if (axisCount(QCPAxis::atRight) > 0 && !mParentPlot->yAxis2) ++ mParentPlot->yAxis2 = axis(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed on the axis rect. If the left mouse button is ++ pressed, the range dragging interaction is initialized (the actual range manipulation happens in ++ the \ref mouseMoveEvent). ++ ++ The mDragging flag is set to true and some anchor points are set that are needed to determine the ++ distance the mouse was dragged in the mouse move/release events later. ++ ++ \see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ mDragStart = event->pos(); // need this even when not LeftButton is pressed, to determine in releaseEvent whether it was a full click (no position change between press and release) ++ if (event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton) ++ { ++ mDragging = true; ++ // initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging: ++ if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag()) ++ { ++ mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements(); ++ mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements(); ++ } ++ // Mouse range dragging interaction: ++ if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag)) ++ { ++ mDragStartHorzRange.clear(); ++ for (int i=0; irange()); ++ mDragStartVertRange.clear(); ++ for (int i=0; irange()); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for when the mouse is moved on the axis rect. If range dragging was activated in a ++ preceding \ref mousePressEvent, the range is moved accordingly. ++ ++ \see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(startPos) ++ // Mouse range dragging interaction: ++ if (mDragging && mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeDrag)) ++ { ++ ++ if (mRangeDrag.testFlag(Qt::Horizontal)) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mDragStartHorzRange.size()) ++ break; ++ if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(mDragStart.x()) - ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().x()); ++ ax->setRange(mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).lower+diff, mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).upper+diff); ++ } else if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(mDragStart.x()) / ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().x()); ++ ax->setRange(mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).lower*diff, mDragStartHorzRange.at(i).upper*diff); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (mRangeDrag.testFlag(Qt::Vertical)) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; i= mDragStartVertRange.size()) ++ break; ++ if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(mDragStart.y()) - ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().y()); ++ ax->setRange(mDragStartVertRange.at(i).lower+diff, mDragStartVertRange.at(i).upper+diff); ++ } else if (ax->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ { ++ double diff = ax->pixelToCoord(mDragStart.y()) / ax->pixelToCoord(event->pos().y()); ++ ax->setRange(mDragStartVertRange.at(i).lower*diff, mDragStartVertRange.at(i).upper*diff); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (mRangeDrag != 0) // if either vertical or horizontal drag was enabled, do a replot ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag()) ++ mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(QCP::aeAll); ++ mParentPlot->replot(); ++ } ++ ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAxisRect::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ Q_UNUSED(startPos) ++ mDragging = false; ++ if (mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag()) ++ { ++ mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements(mAADragBackup); ++ mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements(mNotAADragBackup); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Event handler for mouse wheel events. If rangeZoom is Qt::Horizontal, Qt::Vertical or both, the ++ ranges of the axes defined as rangeZoomHorzAxis and rangeZoomVertAxis are scaled. The center of ++ the scaling operation is the current cursor position inside the axis rect. The scaling factor is ++ dependent on the mouse wheel delta (which direction the wheel was rotated) to provide a natural ++ zooming feel. The Strength of the zoom can be controlled via \ref setRangeZoomFactor. ++ ++ Note, that event->delta() is usually +/-120 for single rotation steps. However, if the mouse ++ wheel is turned rapidly, many steps may bunch up to one event, so the event->delta() may then be ++ multiples of 120. This is taken into account here, by calculating \a wheelSteps and using it as ++ exponent of the range zoom factor. This takes care of the wheel direction automatically, by ++ inverting the factor, when the wheel step is negative (f^-1 = 1/f). ++*/ ++void QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) ++{ ++ // Mouse range zooming interaction: ++ if (mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag(QCP::iRangeZoom)) ++ { ++ if (mRangeZoom != 0) ++ { ++ double factor; ++ double wheelSteps = event->delta()/120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually ++ if (mRangeZoom.testFlag(Qt::Horizontal)) ++ { ++ factor = qPow(mRangeZoomFactorHorz, wheelSteps); ++ for (int i=0; iscaleRange(factor, mRangeZoomHorzAxis.at(i)->pixelToCoord(event->pos().x())); ++ } ++ } ++ if (mRangeZoom.testFlag(Qt::Vertical)) ++ { ++ factor = qPow(mRangeZoomFactorVert, wheelSteps); ++ for (int i=0; iscaleRange(factor, mRangeZoomVertAxis.at(i)->pixelToCoord(event->pos().y())); ++ } ++ } ++ mParentPlot->replot(); ++ } ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.cpp', size 30933 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAbstractLegendItem ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAbstractLegendItem ++ \brief The abstract base class for all entries in a QCPLegend. ++ ++ It defines a very basic interface for entries in a QCPLegend. For representing plottables in the ++ legend, the subclass \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem is more suitable. ++ ++ Only derive directly from this class when you need absolute freedom (e.g. a custom legend entry ++ that's not even associated with a plottable). ++ ++ You must implement the following pure virtual functions: ++ \li \ref draw (from QCPLayerable) ++ ++ You inherit the following members you may use: ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
QCPLegend *\b mParentLegendA pointer to the parent QCPLegend.
QFont \b mFontThe generic font of the item. You should use this font for all or at least the most prominent text of the item.
++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionChanged(bool selected) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend item has changed, either by user ++ interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a QCPAbstractLegendItem and associates it with the QCPLegend \a parent. This does not ++ cause the item to be added to \a parent, so \ref QCPLegend::addItem must be called separately. ++*/ ++QCPAbstractLegendItem::QCPAbstractLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parent->parentPlot()), ++ mParentLegend(parent), ++ mFont(parent->font()), ++ mTextColor(parent->textColor()), ++ mSelectedFont(parent->selectedFont()), ++ mSelectedTextColor(parent->selectedTextColor()), ++ mSelectable(true), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ setLayer(QLatin1String("legend")); ++ setMargins(QMargins(0, 0, 0, 0)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default font of this specific legend item to \a font. ++ ++ \see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setFont ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default text color of this specific legend item to \a color. ++ ++ \see setFont, QCPLegend::setTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mTextColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When this legend item is selected, \a font is used to draw generic text, instead of the normal ++ font set with \ref setFont. ++ ++ \see setFont, QCPLegend::setSelectedFont ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mSelectedFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When this legend item is selected, \a color is used to draw generic text, instead of the normal ++ color set with \ref setTextColor. ++ ++ \see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mSelectedTextColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this specific legend item is selectable. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectable(bool selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectable = selectable; ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectable); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this specific legend item is selected. ++ ++ It is possible to set the selection state of this item by calling this function directly, even if ++ setSelectable is set to false. ++ ++ \see setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected(bool selected) ++{ ++ if (mSelected != selected) ++ { ++ mSelected = selected; ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelected); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (!mParentPlot) return -1; ++ if (onlySelectable && (!mSelectable || !mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems))) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mRect.contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegendItems); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QRect QCPAbstractLegendItem::clipRect() const ++{ ++ return mOuterRect; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems)) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPAbstractLegendItem::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPLegend::spItems)) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(false); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPlottableLegendItem ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPlottableLegendItem ++ \brief A legend item representing a plottable with an icon and the plottable name. ++ ++ This is the standard legend item for plottables. It displays an icon of the plottable next to the ++ plottable name. The icon is drawn by the respective plottable itself (\ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon), and tries to give an intuitive symbol for the plottable. ++ For example, the QCPGraph draws a centered horizontal line and/or a single scatter point in the ++ middle. ++ ++ Legend items of this type are always associated with one plottable (retrievable via the ++ plottable() function and settable with the constructor). You may change the font of the plottable ++ name with \ref setFont. Icon padding and border pen is taken from the parent QCPLegend, see \ref ++ QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen and \ref QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding. ++ ++ The function \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend/\ref QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend ++ creates/removes legend items of this type in the default implementation. However, these functions ++ may be reimplemented such that a different kind of legend item (e.g a direct subclass of ++ QCPAbstractLegendItem) is used for that plottable. ++ ++ Since QCPLegend is based on QCPLayoutGrid, a legend item itself is just a subclass of ++ QCPLayoutElement. While it could be added to a legend (or any other layout) via the normal layout ++ interface, QCPLegend has specialized functions for handling legend items conveniently, see the ++ documentation of \ref QCPLegend. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new legend item associated with \a plottable. ++ ++ Once it's created, it can be added to the legend via \ref QCPLegend::addItem. ++ ++ A more convenient way of adding/removing a plottable to/from the legend is via the functions \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend and \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend. ++*/ ++QCPPlottableLegendItem::QCPPlottableLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent, QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) : ++ QCPAbstractLegendItem(parent), ++ mPlottable(plottable) ++{ ++ setAntialiased(false); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that shall be used to draw the icon border, taking into account the selection ++ state of this item. ++*/ ++QPen QCPPlottableLegendItem::getIconBorderPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mParentLegend->selectedIconBorderPen() : mParentLegend->iconBorderPen(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the text color that shall be used to draw text, taking into account the selection state ++ of this item. ++*/ ++QColor QCPPlottableLegendItem::getTextColor() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the font that shall be used to draw text, taking into account the selection state of this ++ item. ++*/ ++QFont QCPPlottableLegendItem::getFont() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the item with \a painter. The size and position of the drawn legend item is defined by the ++ parent layout (typically a \ref QCPLegend) and the \ref minimumSizeHint and \ref maximumSizeHint ++ of this legend item. ++*/ ++void QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (!mPlottable) return; ++ painter->setFont(getFont()); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(getTextColor())); ++ QSizeF iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize(); ++ QRectF textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name()); ++ QRectF iconRect(mRect.topLeft(), iconSize); ++ int textHeight = qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height()); // if text has smaller height than icon, center text vertically in icon height, else align tops ++ painter->drawText(mRect.x()+iconSize.width()+mParentLegend->iconTextPadding(), mRect.y(), textRect.width(), textHeight, Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name()); ++ // draw icon: ++ painter->save(); ++ painter->setClipRect(iconRect, Qt::IntersectClip); ++ mPlottable->drawLegendIcon(painter, iconRect); ++ painter->restore(); ++ // draw icon border: ++ if (getIconBorderPen().style() != Qt::NoPen) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(getIconBorderPen()); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ int halfPen = qCeil(painter->pen().widthF()*0.5)+1; ++ painter->setClipRect(mOuterRect.adjusted(-halfPen, -halfPen, halfPen, halfPen)); // extend default clip rect so thicker pens (especially during selection) are not clipped ++ painter->drawRect(iconRect); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Calculates and returns the size of this item. This includes the icon, the text and the padding in ++ between. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++QSize QCPPlottableLegendItem::minimumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ if (!mPlottable) return QSize(); ++ QSize result(0, 0); ++ QRect textRect; ++ QFontMetrics fontMetrics(getFont()); ++ QSize iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize(); ++ textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name()); ++ result.setWidth(iconSize.width() + mParentLegend->iconTextPadding() + textRect.width() + mMargins.left() + mMargins.right()); ++ result.setHeight(qMax(textRect.height(), iconSize.height()) + mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom()); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPLegend ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPLegend ++ \brief Manages a legend inside a QCustomPlot. ++ ++ A legend is a small box somewhere in the plot which lists plottables with their name and icon. ++ ++ Normally, the legend is populated by calling \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend. The ++ respective legend item can be removed with \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend. However, ++ QCPLegend also offers an interface to add and manipulate legend items directly: \ref item, \ref ++ itemWithPlottable, \ref itemCount, \ref addItem, \ref removeItem, etc. ++ ++ Since \ref QCPLegend derives from \ref QCPLayoutGrid, it can be placed in any position a \ref ++ QCPLayoutElement may be positioned. The legend items are themselves \ref QCPLayoutElement ++ "QCPLayoutElements" which are placed in the grid layout of the legend. \ref QCPLegend only adds ++ an interface specialized for handling child elements of type \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem, as ++ mentioned above. In principle, any other layout elements may also be added to a legend via the ++ normal \ref QCPLayoutGrid interface. See the special page about \link thelayoutsystem The Layout ++ System\endlink for examples on how to add other elements to the legend and move it outside the axis ++ rect. ++ ++ Use the methods \ref setFillOrder and \ref setWrap inherited from \ref QCPLayoutGrid to control ++ in which order (column first or row first) the legend is filled up when calling \ref addItem, and ++ at which column or row wrapping occurs. ++ ++ By default, every QCustomPlot has one legend (\ref QCustomPlot::legend) which is placed in the ++ inset layout of the main axis rect (\ref QCPAxisRect::insetLayout). To move the legend to another ++ position inside the axis rect, use the methods of the \ref QCPLayoutInset. To move the legend ++ outside of the axis rect, place it anywhere else with the \ref QCPLayout/\ref QCPLayoutElement ++ interface. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPLegend::selectionChanged(QCPLegend::SelectableParts selection); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend has changed. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new QCPLegend instance with default values. ++ ++ Note that by default, QCustomPlot already contains a legend ready to be used as \ref ++ QCustomPlot::legend ++*/ ++QCPLegend::QCPLegend() ++{ ++ setFillOrder(QCPLayoutGrid::foRowsFirst); ++ setWrap(0); ++ ++ setRowSpacing(3); ++ setColumnSpacing(8); ++ setMargins(QMargins(7, 5, 7, 4)); ++ setAntialiased(false); ++ setIconSize(32, 18); ++ ++ setIconTextPadding(7); ++ ++ setSelectableParts(spLegendBox | spItems); ++ setSelectedParts(spNone); ++ ++ setBorderPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0)); ++ setSelectedBorderPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)); ++ setIconBorderPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ setSelectedIconBorderPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)); ++ setBrush(Qt::white); ++ setSelectedBrush(Qt::white); ++ setTextColor(Qt::black); ++ setSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue); ++} ++ ++QCPLegend::~QCPLegend() ++{ ++ clearItems(); ++ if (qobject_cast(mParentPlot)) // make sure this isn't called from QObject dtor when QCustomPlot is already destructed (happens when the legend is not in any layout and thus QObject-child of QCustomPlot) ++ mParentPlot->legendRemoved(this); ++} ++ ++/* no doc for getter, see setSelectedParts */ ++QCPLegend::SelectableParts QCPLegend::selectedParts() const ++{ ++ // check whether any legend elements selected, if yes, add spItems to return value ++ bool hasSelectedItems = false; ++ for (int i=0; iselected()) ++ { ++ hasSelectedItems = true; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ if (hasSelectedItems) ++ return mSelectedParts | spItems; ++ else ++ return mSelectedParts & ~spItems; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen, the border of the entire legend is drawn with. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setBorderPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mBorderPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush of the legend background. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default font of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the name of a graph) will ++ use this font by default. However, a different font can be specified on a per-item-basis by ++ accessing the specific legend item. ++ ++ This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items. ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mFont = font; ++ for (int i=0; isetFont(mFont); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default color of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the name of a graph) ++ will use this color by default. However, a different colors can be specified on a per-item-basis ++ by accessing the specific legend item. ++ ++ This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items. ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mTextColor = color; ++ for (int i=0; isetTextColor(color); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the size of legend icons. Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual ++ representation of the graph) will use this size by default. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setIconSize(const QSize &size) ++{ ++ mIconSize = size; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setIconSize(int width, int height) ++{ ++ mIconSize.setWidth(width); ++ mIconSize.setHeight(height); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the horizontal space in pixels between the legend icon and the text next to it. ++ Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) and text (e.g. the ++ name of the graph) will use this space by default. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding(int padding) ++{ ++ mIconTextPadding = padding; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen used to draw a border around each legend icon. Legend items that draw an ++ icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) will use this pen by default. ++ ++ If no border is wanted, set this to \a Qt::NoPen. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mIconBorderPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking on the QCustomPlot surface. ++ (When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectLegend.) ++ ++ However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection of a specific part, ++ it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling \ref setSelectedParts ++ directly. ++ ++ \see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectableParts != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectableParts = selectable; ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectableParts); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the selected state of the respective legend parts described by \ref SelectablePart. When a part ++ is selected, it uses a different pen/font and brush. If some legend items are selected and \a selected ++ doesn't contain \ref spItems, those items become deselected. ++ ++ The entire selection mechanism is handled automatically when \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++ contains iSelectLegend. You only need to call this function when you wish to change the selection ++ state manually. ++ ++ This function can change the selection state of a part even when \ref setSelectableParts was set to a ++ value that actually excludes the part. ++ ++ emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the previous selection state. ++ ++ Note that it doesn't make sense to set the selected state \ref spItems here when it wasn't set ++ before, because there's no way to specify which exact items to newly select. Do this by calling ++ \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected directly on the legend item you wish to select. ++ ++ \see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBorderPen, setSelectedIconBorderPen, setSelectedBrush, ++ setSelectedFont ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selected) ++{ ++ SelectableParts newSelected = selected; ++ mSelectedParts = this->selectedParts(); // update mSelectedParts in case item selection changed ++ ++ if (mSelectedParts != newSelected) ++ { ++ if (!mSelectedParts.testFlag(spItems) && newSelected.testFlag(spItems)) // attempt to set spItems flag (can't do that) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "spItems flag can not be set, it can only be unset with this function"; ++ newSelected &= ~spItems; ++ } ++ if (mSelectedParts.testFlag(spItems) && !newSelected.testFlag(spItems)) // spItems flag was unset, so clear item selection ++ { ++ for (int i=0; isetSelected(false); ++ } ++ } ++ mSelectedParts = newSelected; ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelectedParts); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When the legend box is selected, this pen is used to draw the border instead of the normal pen ++ set via \ref setBorderPen. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBrush ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedBorderPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedBorderPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen legend items will use to draw their icon borders, when they are selected. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedFont ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedIconBorderPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ When the legend box is selected, this brush is used to draw the legend background instead of the normal brush ++ set via \ref setBrush. ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBorderPen ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mSelectedBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default font that is used by legend items when they are selected. ++ ++ This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items. ++ ++ \see setFont, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mSelectedFont = font; ++ for (int i=0; isetSelectedFont(font); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the default text color that is used by legend items when they are selected. ++ ++ This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items. ++ ++ \see setTextColor, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mSelectedTextColor = color; ++ for (int i=0; isetSelectedTextColor(color); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the item with index \a i. ++ ++ Note that the linear index depends on the current fill order (\ref setFillOrder). ++ ++ \see itemCount, addItem, itemWithPlottable ++*/ ++QCPAbstractLegendItem *QCPLegend::item(int index) const ++{ ++ return qobject_cast(elementAt(index)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the QCPPlottableLegendItem which is associated with \a plottable (e.g. a \ref QCPGraph*). ++ If such an item isn't in the legend, returns 0. ++ ++ \see hasItemWithPlottable ++*/ ++QCPPlottableLegendItem *QCPLegend::itemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; i(item(i))) ++ { ++ if (pli->plottable() == plottable) ++ return pli; ++ } ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the number of items currently in the legend. ++ ++ Note that if empty cells are in the legend (e.g. by calling methods of the \ref QCPLayoutGrid ++ base class which allows creating empty cells), they are included in the returned count. ++ ++ \see item ++*/ ++int QCPLegend::itemCount() const ++{ ++ return elementCount(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether the legend contains \a item. ++ ++ \see hasItemWithPlottable ++*/ ++bool QCPLegend::hasItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; iitem(i)) ++ return true; ++ } ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns whether the legend contains a QCPPlottableLegendItem which is associated with \a plottable (e.g. a \ref QCPGraph*). ++ If such an item isn't in the legend, returns false. ++ ++ \see itemWithPlottable ++*/ ++bool QCPLegend::hasItemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const ++{ ++ return itemWithPlottable(plottable); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds \a item to the legend, if it's not present already. The element is arranged according to the ++ current fill order (\ref setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap). ++ ++ Returns true on success, i.e. if the item wasn't in the list already and has been successfully added. ++ ++ The legend takes ownership of the item. ++ ++ \see removeItem, item, hasItem ++*/ ++bool QCPLegend::addItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item) ++{ ++ return addElement(item); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes the item with the specified \a index from the legend and deletes it. ++ ++ After successful removal, the legend is reordered according to the current fill order (\ref ++ setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap), so no empty cell remains where the removed \a item ++ was. If you don't want this, rather use the raw element interface of \ref QCPLayoutGrid. ++ ++ Returns true, if successful. Unlike \ref QCPLayoutGrid::removeAt, this method only removes ++ elements derived from \ref QCPAbstractLegendItem. ++ ++ \see itemCount, clearItems ++*/ ++bool QCPLegend::removeItem(int index) ++{ ++ if (QCPAbstractLegendItem *ali = item(index)) ++ { ++ bool success = remove(ali); ++ if (success) ++ setFillOrder(fillOrder(), true); // gets rid of empty cell by reordering ++ return success; ++ } else ++ return false; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes \a item from the legend and deletes it. ++ ++ After successful removal, the legend is reordered according to the current fill order (\ref ++ setFillOrder) and wrapping (\ref setWrap), so no empty cell remains where the removed \a item ++ was. If you don't want this, rather use the raw element interface of \ref QCPLayoutGrid. ++ ++ Returns true, if successful. ++ ++ \see clearItems ++*/ ++bool QCPLegend::removeItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item) ++{ ++ bool success = remove(item); ++ if (success) ++ setFillOrder(fillOrder(), true); // gets rid of empty cell by reordering ++ return success; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all items from the legend. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::clearItems() ++{ ++ for (int i=itemCount()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ removeItem(i); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the legend items that are currently selected. If no items are selected, ++ the list is empty. ++ ++ \see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected, setSelectable ++*/ ++QList QCPLegend::selectedItems() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ for (int i=0; iselected()) ++ result.append(ali); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the provided \a painter ++ before drawing main legend elements. ++ ++ This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is in by default. ++ ++ This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as well as the ++ overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++ ++ \see setAntialiased ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegend); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen used to paint the border of the legend, taking into account the selection state ++ of the legend box. ++*/ ++QPen QCPLegend::getBorderPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spLegendBox) ? mSelectedBorderPen : mBorderPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the brush used to paint the background of the legend, taking into account the selection ++ state of the legend box. ++*/ ++QBrush QCPLegend::getBrush() const ++{ ++ return mSelectedParts.testFlag(spLegendBox) ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the legend box with the provided \a painter. The individual legend items are layerables ++ themselves, thus are drawn independently. ++*/ ++void QCPLegend::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ // draw background rect: ++ painter->setBrush(getBrush()); ++ painter->setPen(getBorderPen()); ++ painter->drawRect(mOuterRect); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPLegend::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if (!mParentPlot) return -1; ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox)) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mOuterRect.contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ if (details) details->setValue(spLegendBox); ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPLegend::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed ++ if (details.value() == spLegendBox && mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox)) ++ { ++ SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts; ++ setSelectedParts(additive ? mSelectedParts^spLegendBox : mSelectedParts|spLegendBox); // no need to unset spItems in !additive case, because they will be deselected by QCustomPlot (they're normal QCPLayerables with own deselectEvent) ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPLegend::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed ++ if (mSelectableParts.testFlag(spLegendBox)) ++ { ++ SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts; ++ setSelectedParts(selectedParts() & ~spLegendBox); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCP::Interaction QCPLegend::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectLegend; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionCategory() const ++{ ++ return QCP::iSelectLegend; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPLegend::parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) ++{ ++ if (parentPlot && !parentPlot->legend) ++ parentPlot->legend = this; ++} ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.cpp', size 12759 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPTextElement ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPTextElement ++ \brief A layout element displaying a text ++ ++ The text may be specified with \ref setText, the formatting can be controlled with \ref setFont, ++ \ref setTextColor, and \ref setTextFlags. ++ ++ A text element can be added as follows: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcptextelement-creation ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::selectionChanged(bool selected) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the selection state has changed to \a selected, either by user ++ interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected. ++ ++ \see setSelected, setSelectable ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::clicked(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the text element is clicked. ++ ++ \see doubleClicked, selectTest ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPTextElement::doubleClicked(QMouseEvent *event) ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the text element is double clicked. ++ ++ \see clicked, selectTest ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. The initial text is empty (\ref ++ setText). ++*/ ++QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mText(), ++ mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter|Qt::TextWordWrap), ++ mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mTextColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue), ++ mSelectable(false), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ if (parentPlot) ++ { ++ mFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ } ++ setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. ++ ++ The initial text is set to \a text. ++*/ ++QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mText(text), ++ mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter|Qt::TextWordWrap), ++ mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mTextColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), 12)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue), ++ mSelectable(false), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ if (parentPlot) ++ { ++ mFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ } ++ setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. ++ ++ The initial text is set to \a text with \a pointSize. ++*/ ++QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, double pointSize) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mText(text), ++ mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter|Qt::TextWordWrap), ++ mFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), pointSize)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mTextColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedFont(QFont(QLatin1String("sans serif"), pointSize)), // will be taken from parentPlot if available, see below ++ mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue), ++ mSelectable(false), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ if (parentPlot) ++ { ++ mFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ mFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize); ++ mSelectedFont = parentPlot->font(); ++ mSelectedFont.setPointSizeF(pointSize); ++ } ++ setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. ++ ++ The initial text is set to \a text with \a pointSize and the specified \a fontFamily. ++*/ ++QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QString &fontFamily, double pointSize) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mText(text), ++ mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter|Qt::TextWordWrap), ++ mFont(QFont(fontFamily, pointSize)), ++ mTextColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedFont(QFont(fontFamily, pointSize)), ++ mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue), ++ mSelectable(false), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Creates a new QCPTextElement instance and sets default values. ++ ++ The initial text is set to \a text with the specified \a font. ++*/ ++QCPTextElement::QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QFont &font) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mText(text), ++ mTextFlags(Qt::AlignCenter|Qt::TextWordWrap), ++ mFont(font), ++ mTextColor(Qt::black), ++ mSelectedFont(font), ++ mSelectedTextColor(Qt::blue), ++ mSelectable(false), ++ mSelected(false) ++{ ++ setMargins(QMargins(2, 2, 2, 2)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the text that will be displayed to \a text. Multiple lines can be created by insertion of "\n". ++ ++ \see setFont, setTextColor, setTextFlags ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setText(const QString &text) ++{ ++ mText = text; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets options for text alignment and wrapping behaviour. \a flags is a bitwise OR-combination of ++ \c Qt::AlignmentFlag and \c Qt::TextFlag enums. ++ ++ Possible enums are: ++ - Qt::AlignLeft ++ - Qt::AlignRight ++ - Qt::AlignHCenter ++ - Qt::AlignJustify ++ - Qt::AlignTop ++ - Qt::AlignBottom ++ - Qt::AlignVCenter ++ - Qt::AlignCenter ++ - Qt::TextDontClip ++ - Qt::TextSingleLine ++ - Qt::TextExpandTabs ++ - Qt::TextShowMnemonic ++ - Qt::TextWordWrap ++ - Qt::TextIncludeTrailingSpaces ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setTextFlags(int flags) ++{ ++ mTextFlags = flags; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a font of the text. ++ ++ \see setTextColor, setSelectedFont ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a color of the text. ++ ++ \see setFont, setSelectedTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mTextColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a font of the text that will be used if the text element is selected (\ref setSelected). ++ ++ \see setFont ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mSelectedFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a color of the text that will be used if the text element is selected (\ref setSelected). ++ ++ \see setTextColor ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mSelectedTextColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user may select this text element. ++ ++ Note that even when \a selectable is set to false, the selection state may be changed ++ programmatically via \ref setSelected. ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setSelectable(bool selectable) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable != selectable) ++ { ++ mSelectable = selectable; ++ emit selectableChanged(mSelectable); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the selection state of this text element to \a selected. If the selection has changed, \ref ++ selectionChanged is emitted. ++ ++ Note that this function can change the selection state independently of the current \ref ++ setSelectable state. ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::setSelected(bool selected) ++{ ++ if (mSelected != selected) ++ { ++ mSelected = selected; ++ emit selectionChanged(mSelected); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPTextElement::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeOther); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPTextElement::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ painter->setFont(mainFont()); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(mainTextColor())); ++ painter->drawText(mRect, Qt::AlignCenter, mText, &mTextBoundingRect); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QSize QCPTextElement::minimumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ QFontMetrics metrics(mFont); ++ QSize result = metrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::AlignCenter, mText).size(); ++ result.rwidth() += mMargins.left() + mMargins.right(); ++ result.rheight() += mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QSize QCPTextElement::maximumSizeHint() const ++{ ++ QFontMetrics metrics(mFont); ++ QSize result = metrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::AlignCenter, mText).size(); ++ result.rheight() += mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom(); ++ result.setWidth(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPTextElement::selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(event) ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (mSelectable) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(additive ? !mSelected : true); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPTextElement::deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) ++{ ++ if (mSelectable) ++ { ++ bool selBefore = mSelected; ++ setSelected(false); ++ if (selectionStateChanged) ++ *selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns 0.99*selectionTolerance (see \ref QCustomPlot::setSelectionTolerance) when \a pos is ++ within the bounding box of the text element's text. Note that this bounding box is updated in the ++ draw call. ++ ++ If \a pos is outside the text's bounding box or if \a onlySelectable is true and this text ++ element is not selectable (\ref setSelectable), returns -1. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++double QCPTextElement::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mTextBoundingRect.contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Accepts the mouse event in order to emit the according click signal in the \ref ++ mouseReleaseEvent. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ event->accept(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Emits the \ref clicked signal if the cursor hasn't moved by more than a few pixels since the \ref ++ mousePressEvent. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ if ((QPointF(event->pos())-startPos).manhattanLength() <= 3) ++ emit clicked(event); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Emits the \ref doubleClicked signal. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPTextElement::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ emit doubleClicked(event); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the main font to be used. This is mSelectedFont if \ref setSelected is set to ++ true, else mFont is returned. ++*/ ++QFont QCPTextElement::mainFont() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the main color to be used. This is mSelectedTextColor if \ref setSelected is set to ++ true, else mTextColor is returned. ++*/ ++QColor QCPTextElement::mainTextColor() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor; ++} ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.cpp', size 25910 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPColorScale ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPColorScale ++ \brief A color scale for use with color coding data such as QCPColorMap ++ ++ This layout element can be placed on the plot to correlate a color gradient with data values. It ++ is usually used in combination with one or multiple \ref QCPColorMap "QCPColorMaps". ++ ++ \image html QCPColorScale.png ++ ++ The color scale can be either horizontal or vertical, as shown in the image above. The ++ orientation and the side where the numbers appear is controlled with \ref setType. ++ ++ Use \ref QCPColorMap::setColorScale to connect a color map with a color scale. Once they are ++ connected, they share their gradient, data range and data scale type (\ref setGradient, \ref ++ setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType). Multiple color maps may be associated with a single color ++ scale, to make them all synchronize these properties. ++ ++ To have finer control over the number display and axis behaviour, you can directly access the ++ \ref axis. See the documentation of QCPAxis for details about configuring axes. For example, if ++ you want to change the number of automatically generated ticks, call ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-tickcount ++ ++ Placing a color scale next to the main axis rect works like with any other layout element: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-creation ++ In this case we have placed it to the right of the default axis rect, so it wasn't necessary to ++ call \ref setType, since \ref QCPAxis::atRight is already the default. The text next to the color ++ scale can be set with \ref setLabel. ++ ++ For optimum appearance (like in the image above), it may be desirable to line up the axis rect and ++ the borders of the color scale. Use a \ref QCPMarginGroup to achieve this: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcolorscale-margingroup ++ ++ Color scales are initialized with a non-zero minimum top and bottom margin (\ref ++ setMinimumMargins), because vertical color scales are most common and the minimum top/bottom ++ margin makes sure it keeps some distance to the top/bottom widget border. So if you change to a ++ horizontal color scale by setting \ref setType to \ref QCPAxis::atBottom or \ref QCPAxis::atTop, you ++ might want to also change the minimum margins accordingly, e.g. setMinimumMargins(QMargins(6, 0, 6, 0)). ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPAxis *QCPColorScale::axis() const ++ ++ Returns the internal \ref QCPAxis instance of this color scale. You can access it to alter the ++ appearance and behaviour of the axis. \ref QCPColorScale duplicates some properties in its ++ interface for convenience. Those are \ref setDataRange (\ref QCPAxis::setRange), \ref ++ setDataScaleType (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType), and the method \ref setLabel (\ref ++ QCPAxis::setLabel). As they each are connected, it does not matter whether you use the method on ++ the QCPColorScale or on its QCPAxis. ++ ++ If the type of the color scale is changed with \ref setType, the axis returned by this method ++ will change, too, to either the left, right, bottom or top axis, depending on which type was set. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of signals */ ++/* start documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataRangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the data range changes. ++ ++ \see setDataRange ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the data scale type changes. ++ ++ \see setDataScaleType ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::gradientChanged(const QCPColorGradient &newGradient); ++ ++ This signal is emitted when the gradient changes. ++ ++ \see setGradient ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of signals */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new QCPColorScale. ++*/ ++QCPColorScale::QCPColorScale(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPLayoutElement(parentPlot), ++ mType(QCPAxis::atTop), // set to atTop such that setType(QCPAxis::atRight) below doesn't skip work because it thinks it's already atRight ++ mDataScaleType(QCPAxis::stLinear), ++ mBarWidth(20), ++ mAxisRect(new QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate(this)) ++{ ++ setMinimumMargins(QMargins(0, 6, 0, 6)); // for default right color scale types, keep some room at bottom and top (important if no margin group is used) ++ setType(QCPAxis::atRight); ++ setDataRange(QCPRange(0, 6)); ++} ++ ++QCPColorScale::~QCPColorScale() ++{ ++ delete mAxisRect; ++} ++ ++/* undocumented getter */ ++QString QCPColorScale::label() const ++{ ++ if (!mColorAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined"; ++ return QString(); ++ } ++ ++ return mColorAxis.data()->label(); ++} ++ ++/* undocumented getter */ ++bool QCPColorScale::rangeDrag() const ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ return mAxisRect.data()->rangeDrag().testFlag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) && ++ mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) && ++ mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType))->orientation() == QCPAxis::orientation(mType); ++} ++ ++/* undocumented getter */ ++bool QCPColorScale::rangeZoom() const ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ return mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoom().testFlag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) && ++ mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)) && ++ mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis(QCPAxis::orientation(mType))->orientation() == QCPAxis::orientation(mType); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets at which side of the color scale the axis is placed, and thus also its orientation. ++ ++ Note that after setting \a type to a different value, the axis returned by \ref axis() will ++ be a different one. The new axis will adopt the following properties from the previous axis: The ++ range, scale type, label and ticker (the latter will be shared and not copied). ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setType(QCPAxis::AxisType type) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (mType != type) ++ { ++ mType = type; ++ QCPRange rangeTransfer(0, 6); ++ QString labelTransfer; ++ QSharedPointer tickerTransfer; ++ // transfer/revert some settings on old axis if it exists: ++ bool doTransfer = (bool)mColorAxis; ++ if (doTransfer) ++ { ++ rangeTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->range(); ++ labelTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->label(); ++ tickerTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->ticker(); ++ mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(QString()); ++ disconnect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ disconnect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ } ++ QList allAxisTypes = QList() << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop; ++ foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType atype, allAxisTypes) ++ { ++ mAxisRect.data()->axis(atype)->setTicks(atype == mType); ++ mAxisRect.data()->axis(atype)->setTickLabels(atype== mType); ++ } ++ // set new mColorAxis pointer: ++ mColorAxis = mAxisRect.data()->axis(mType); ++ // transfer settings to new axis: ++ if (doTransfer) ++ { ++ mColorAxis.data()->setRange(rangeTransfer); // range transfer necessary if axis changes from vertical to horizontal or vice versa (axes with same orientation are synchronized via signals) ++ mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(labelTransfer); ++ mColorAxis.data()->setTicker(tickerTransfer); ++ } ++ connect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDragAxes(QList() << mColorAxis.data()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the range spanned by the color gradient and that is shown by the axis in the color scale. ++ ++ It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataRange on any of the connected color maps. It is ++ also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its range with \ref ++ QCPAxis::setRange. ++ ++ \see setDataScaleType, setGradient, rescaleDataRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange) ++{ ++ if (mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper) ++ { ++ mDataRange = dataRange; ++ if (mColorAxis) ++ mColorAxis.data()->setRange(mDataRange); ++ emit dataRangeChanged(mDataRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the scale type of the color scale, i.e. whether values are linearly associated with colors ++ or logarithmically. ++ ++ It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType on any of the connected color maps. It is ++ also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its scale type with \ref ++ QCPAxis::setScaleType. ++ ++ \see setDataRange, setGradient ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType) ++{ ++ if (mDataScaleType != scaleType) ++ { ++ mDataScaleType = scaleType; ++ if (mColorAxis) ++ mColorAxis.data()->setScaleType(mDataScaleType); ++ if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ setDataRange(mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale()); ++ emit dataScaleTypeChanged(mDataScaleType); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color gradient that will be used to represent data values. ++ ++ It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setGradient on any of the connected color maps. ++ ++ \see setDataRange, setDataScaleType ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient) ++{ ++ if (mGradient != gradient) ++ { ++ mGradient = gradient; ++ if (mAxisRect) ++ mAxisRect.data()->mGradientImageInvalidated = true; ++ emit gradientChanged(mGradient); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the axis label of the color scale. This is equivalent to calling \ref QCPAxis::setLabel on ++ the internal \ref axis. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setLabel(const QString &str) ++{ ++ if (!mColorAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ mColorAxis.data()->setLabel(str); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width (or height, for horizontal color scales) the bar where the gradient is displayed ++ will have. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setBarWidth(int width) ++{ ++ mBarWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user can drag the data range (\ref setDataRange). ++ ++ Note that \ref QCP::iRangeDrag must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setRangeDrag(bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (enabled) ++ mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)); ++ else ++ mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag(0); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the user can zoom the data range (\ref setDataRange) by scrolling the mouse wheel. ++ ++ Note that \ref QCP::iRangeZoom must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref ++ QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::setRangeZoom(bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (enabled) ++ mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom(QCPAxis::orientation(mType)); ++ else ++ mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom(0); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns a list of all the color maps associated with this color scale. ++*/ ++QList QCPColorScale::colorMaps() const ++{ ++ QList result; ++ for (int i=0; iplottableCount(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (QCPColorMap *cm = qobject_cast(mParentPlot->plottable(i))) ++ if (cm->colorScale() == this) ++ result.append(cm); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Changes the data range such that all color maps associated with this color scale are fully mapped ++ to the gradient in the data dimension. ++ ++ \see setDataRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorScale::rescaleDataRange(bool onlyVisibleMaps) ++{ ++ QList maps = colorMaps(); ++ QCPRange newRange; ++ bool haveRange = false; ++ QCP::SignDomain sign = QCP::sdBoth; ++ if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ sign = (mDataRange.upper < 0 ? QCP::sdNegative : QCP::sdPositive); ++ for (int i=0; irealVisibility() && onlyVisibleMaps) ++ continue; ++ QCPRange mapRange; ++ if (maps.at(i)->colorScale() == this) ++ { ++ bool currentFoundRange = true; ++ mapRange = maps.at(i)->data()->dataBounds(); ++ if (sign == QCP::sdPositive) ++ { ++ if (mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper > 0) ++ mapRange.lower = mapRange.upper*1e-3; ++ else if (mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper <= 0) ++ currentFoundRange = false; ++ } else if (sign == QCP::sdNegative) ++ { ++ if (mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower < 0) ++ mapRange.upper = mapRange.lower*1e-3; ++ else if (mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower >= 0) ++ currentFoundRange = false; ++ } ++ if (currentFoundRange) ++ { ++ if (!haveRange) ++ newRange = mapRange; ++ else ++ newRange.expand(mapRange); ++ haveRange = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ if (haveRange) ++ { ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(newRange)) // likely due to range being zero (plottable has only constant data in this dimension), shift current range to at least center the data ++ { ++ double center = (newRange.lower+newRange.upper)*0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to make sure, in case validRange returned false for other reason ++ if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center-mDataRange.size()/2.0; ++ newRange.upper = center+mDataRange.size()/2.0; ++ } else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic ++ { ++ newRange.lower = center/qSqrt(mDataRange.upper/mDataRange.lower); ++ newRange.upper = center*qSqrt(mDataRange.upper/mDataRange.lower); ++ } ++ } ++ setDataRange(newRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::update(UpdatePhase phase) ++{ ++ QCPLayoutElement::update(phase); ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ mAxisRect.data()->update(phase); ++ ++ switch (phase) ++ { ++ case upMargins: ++ { ++ if (mType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mType == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ { ++ setMaximumSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().top()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom()+margins().top()+margins().bottom()); ++ setMinimumSize(0, mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().top()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom()+margins().top()+margins().bottom()); ++ } else ++ { ++ setMaximumSize(mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().left()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().right()+margins().left()+margins().right(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX); ++ setMinimumSize(mBarWidth+mAxisRect.data()->margins().left()+mAxisRect.data()->margins().right()+margins().left()+margins().right(), 0); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case upLayout: ++ { ++ mAxisRect.data()->setOuterRect(rect()); ++ break; ++ } ++ default: break; ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const ++{ ++ painter->setAntialiasing(false); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ mAxisRect.data()->mousePressEvent(event, details); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ mAxisRect.data()->mouseMoveEvent(event, startPos); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ mAxisRect.data()->mouseReleaseEvent(event, startPos); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorScale::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) ++{ ++ if (!mAxisRect) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted"; ++ return; ++ } ++ mAxisRect.data()->wheelEvent(event); ++} ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate ++ ++ \internal ++ \brief An axis rect subclass for use in a QCPColorScale ++ ++ This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface. ++ ++ It provides the axis rect functionality for the QCPColorScale class. ++*/ ++ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a new instance, as a child of \a parentColorScale. ++*/ ++QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate(QCPColorScale *parentColorScale) : ++ QCPAxisRect(parentColorScale->parentPlot(), true), ++ mParentColorScale(parentColorScale), ++ mGradientImageInvalidated(true) ++{ ++ setParentLayerable(parentColorScale); ++ setMinimumMargins(QMargins(0, 0, 0, 0)); ++ QList allAxisTypes = QList() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight; ++ foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes) ++ { ++ axis(type)->setVisible(true); ++ axis(type)->grid()->setVisible(false); ++ axis(type)->setPadding(0); ++ connect(axis(type), SIGNAL(selectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)), this, SLOT(axisSelectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts))); ++ connect(axis(type), SIGNAL(selectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts)), this, SLOT(axisSelectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts))); ++ } ++ ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SIGNAL(rangeChanged(QCPRange)), axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SLOT(setRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atRight), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atLeft), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ connect(axis(QCPAxis::atTop), SIGNAL(scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), axis(QCPAxis::atBottom), SLOT(setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ ++ // make layer transfers of color scale transfer to axis rect and axes ++ // the axes must be set after axis rect, such that they appear above color gradient drawn by axis rect: ++ connect(parentColorScale, SIGNAL(layerChanged(QCPLayer*)), this, SLOT(setLayer(QCPLayer*))); ++ foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes) ++ connect(parentColorScale, SIGNAL(layerChanged(QCPLayer*)), axis(type), SLOT(setLayer(QCPLayer*))); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Updates the color gradient image if necessary, by calling \ref updateGradientImage, then draws ++ it. Then the axes are drawn by calling the \ref QCPAxisRect::draw base class implementation. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (mGradientImageInvalidated) ++ updateGradientImage(); ++ ++ bool mirrorHorz = false; ++ bool mirrorVert = false; ++ if (mParentColorScale->mColorAxis) ++ { ++ mirrorHorz = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && (mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atBottom || mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atTop); ++ mirrorVert = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && (mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atLeft || mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atRight); ++ } ++ ++ painter->drawImage(rect().adjusted(0, -1, 0, -1), mGradientImage.mirrored(mirrorHorz, mirrorVert)); ++ QCPAxisRect::draw(painter); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Uses the current gradient of the parent \ref QCPColorScale (specified in the constructor) to ++ generate a gradient image. This gradient image will be used in the \ref draw method. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::updateGradientImage() ++{ ++ if (rect().isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ ++ const QImage::Format format = QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied; ++ int n = mParentColorScale->mGradient.levelCount(); ++ int w, h; ++ QVector data(n); ++ for (int i=0; imType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mParentColorScale->mType == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ { ++ w = n; ++ h = rect().height(); ++ mGradientImage = QImage(w, h, format); ++ QVector pixels; ++ for (int y=0; y(mGradientImage.scanLine(y))); ++ mParentColorScale->mGradient.colorize(data.constData(), QCPRange(0, n-1), pixels.first(), n); ++ for (int y=1; y(mGradientImage.scanLine(y)); ++ const QRgb lineColor = mParentColorScale->mGradient.color(data[h-1-y], QCPRange(0, n-1)); ++ for (int x=0; x allAxisTypes = QList() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight; ++ foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes) ++ { ++ if (QCPAxis *senderAxis = qobject_cast(sender())) ++ if (senderAxis->axisType() == type) ++ continue; ++ ++ if (axis(type)->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis)) ++ { ++ if (selectedParts.testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis)) ++ axis(type)->setSelectedParts(axis(type)->selectedParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis); ++ else ++ axis(type)->setSelectedParts(axis(type)->selectedParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This slot is connected to the selectableChanged signals of the four axes in the constructor. It ++ synchronizes the selectability of the axes. ++*/ ++void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::axisSelectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectableParts) ++{ ++ // synchronize axis base selectability: ++ QList allAxisTypes = QList() << QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight; ++ foreach (QCPAxis::AxisType type, allAxisTypes) ++ { ++ if (QCPAxis *senderAxis = qobject_cast(sender())) ++ if (senderAxis->axisType() == type) ++ continue; ++ ++ if (axis(type)->selectableParts().testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis)) ++ { ++ if (selectableParts.testFlag(QCPAxis::spAxis)) ++ axis(type)->setSelectableParts(axis(type)->selectableParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis); ++ else ++ axis(type)->setSelectableParts(axis(type)->selectableParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis); ++ } ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.cpp', size 72363 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPGraphData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPGraphData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPGraph. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey) ++ \li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this data point (this is the \a mainValue) ++ ++ The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPGraphDataContainer. It is a typedef for ++ \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPGraphData as the DataType template parameter. See the ++ documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods. ++ ++ \see QCPGraphDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::sortKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static QCPGraphData QCPGraphData::fromSortKey(double sortKey) ++ ++ Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static static bool QCPGraphData::sortKeyIsMainKey() ++ ++ Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter, ++ this method returns true. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::mainKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPGraphData::mainValue() const ++ ++ Returns the \a value member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPGraphData::valueRange() const ++ ++ Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with key and value set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPGraphData::QCPGraphData() : ++ key(0), ++ value(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with the specified \a key and \a value. ++*/ ++QCPGraphData::QCPGraphData(double key, double value) : ++ key(key), ++ value(value) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPGraph ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPGraph ++ \brief A plottable representing a graph in a plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPGraph.png ++ ++ Usually you create new graphs by calling QCustomPlot::addGraph. The resulting instance can be ++ accessed via QCustomPlot::graph. ++ ++ To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can ++ also access and modify the data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the internal ++ \ref QCPGraphDataContainer. ++ ++ Graphs are used to display single-valued data. Single-valued means that there should only be one ++ data point per unique key coordinate. In other words, the graph can't have \a loops. If you do ++ want to plot non-single-valued curves, rather use the QCPCurve plottable. ++ ++ Gaps in the graph line can be created by adding data points with NaN as value ++ (qQNaN() or std::numeric_limits::quiet_NaN()) in between the two data points that shall be ++ separated. ++ ++ \section qcpgraph-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ The appearance of the graph is mainly determined by the line style, scatter style, brush and pen ++ of the graph (\ref setLineStyle, \ref setScatterStyle, \ref setBrush, \ref setPen). ++ ++ \subsection filling Filling under or between graphs ++ ++ QCPGraph knows two types of fills: Normal graph fills towards the zero-value-line parallel to ++ the key axis of the graph, and fills between two graphs, called channel fills. To enable a fill, ++ just set a brush with \ref setBrush which is neither Qt::NoBrush nor fully transparent. ++ ++ By default, a normal fill towards the zero-value-line will be drawn. To set up a channel fill ++ between this graph and another one, call \ref setChannelFillGraph with the other graph as ++ parameter. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::addGraph, QCustomPlot::graph ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPGraph::data() const ++ ++ Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPGraphDataContainer. You may ++ use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the ++ regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a graph which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value ++ axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have ++ the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is ++ printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ The created QCPGraph is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a ++ keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPGraph, so do not delete it manually ++ but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++ ++ To directly create a graph inside a plot, you can also use the simpler QCustomPlot::addGraph function. ++*/ ++QCPGraph::QCPGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(keyAxis, valueAxis) ++{ ++ // special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface: ++ mParentPlot->registerGraph(this); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 0)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ ++ setLineStyle(lsLine); ++ setScatterSkip(0); ++ setChannelFillGraph(0); ++ setAdaptiveSampling(true); ++} ++ ++QCPGraph::~QCPGraph() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPGraphs may share the same data container safely. ++ Modifying the data in the container will then affect all graphs that share the container. Sharing ++ can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpgraph-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use ++ the \ref QCPDataContainer::set method on the graph's data container directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpgraph-datasharing-2 ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided ++ vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the ++ smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(keys, values, alreadySorted); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot. For scatter-only plots, set \a ls to ++ \ref lsNone and \ref setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style. ++ ++ \see setScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setLineStyle(LineStyle ls) ++{ ++ mLineStyle = ls; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points ++ are drawn (e.g. for line-only-plots with appropriate line style). ++ ++ \see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style) ++{ ++ mScatterStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If scatters are displayed (scatter style not \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone), \a skip number of ++ scatter points are skipped/not drawn after every drawn scatter point. ++ ++ This can be used to make the data appear sparser while for example still having a smooth line, ++ and to improve performance for very high density plots. ++ ++ If \a skip is set to 0 (default), all scatter points are drawn. ++ ++ \see setScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setScatterSkip(int skip) ++{ ++ mScatterSkip = qMax(0, skip); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the target graph for filling the area between this graph and \a targetGraph with the current ++ brush (\ref setBrush). ++ ++ When \a targetGraph is set to 0, a normal graph fill to the zero-value-line will be shown. To ++ disable any filling, set the brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setChannelFillGraph(QCPGraph *targetGraph) ++{ ++ // prevent setting channel target to this graph itself: ++ if (targetGraph == this) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph is this graph itself"; ++ mChannelFillGraph = 0; ++ return; ++ } ++ // prevent setting channel target to a graph not in the plot: ++ if (targetGraph && targetGraph->mParentPlot != mParentPlot) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph not in same plot"; ++ mChannelFillGraph = 0; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ mChannelFillGraph = targetGraph; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether adaptive sampling shall be used when plotting this graph. QCustomPlot's adaptive ++ sampling technique can drastically improve the replot performance for graphs with a larger number ++ of points (e.g. above 10,000), without notably changing the appearance of the graph. ++ ++ By default, adaptive sampling is enabled. Even if enabled, QCustomPlot decides whether adaptive ++ sampling shall actually be used on a per-graph basis. So leaving adaptive sampling enabled has no ++ disadvantage in almost all cases. ++ ++ \image html adaptive-sampling-line.png "A line plot of 500,000 points without and with adaptive sampling" ++ ++ As can be seen, line plots experience no visual degradation from adaptive sampling. Outliers are ++ reproduced reliably, as well as the overall shape of the data set. The replot time reduces ++ dramatically though. This allows QCustomPlot to display large amounts of data in realtime. ++ ++ \image html adaptive-sampling-scatter.png "A scatter plot of 100,000 points without and with adaptive sampling" ++ ++ Care must be taken when using high-density scatter plots in combination with adaptive sampling. ++ The adaptive sampling algorithm treats scatter plots more carefully than line plots which still ++ gives a significant reduction of replot times, but not quite as much as for line plots. This is ++ because scatter plots inherently need more data points to be preserved in order to still resemble ++ the original, non-adaptive-sampling plot. As shown above, the results still aren't quite ++ identical, as banding occurs for the outer data points. This is in fact intentional, such that ++ the boundaries of the data cloud stay visible to the viewer. How strong the banding appears, ++ depends on the point density, i.e. the number of points in the plot. ++ ++ For some situations with scatter plots it might thus be desirable to manually turn adaptive ++ sampling off. For example, when saving the plot to disk. This can be achieved by setting \a ++ enabled to false before issuing a command like \ref QCustomPlot::savePng, and setting \a enabled ++ back to true afterwards. ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::setAdaptiveSampling(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mAdaptiveSampling = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors ++ should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest ++ vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (keys.size() != values.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size()); ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->value = values[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::addData(double key, double value) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPGraphData(key, value)); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPGraph::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint); ++ if (details) ++ { ++ int pointIndex = closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return result; ++ } else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPGraph::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPGraph::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPGraph::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return; ++ if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone()) return; ++ ++ QVector lines, scatters; // line and (if necessary) scatter pixel coordinates will be stored here while iterating over segments ++ ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ // get line pixel points appropriate to line style: ++ QCPDataRange lineDataRange = isSelectedSegment ? allSegments.at(i) : allSegments.at(i).adjusted(-1, 1); // unselected segments extend lines to bordering selected data point (safe to exceed total data bounds in first/last segment, getLines takes care) ++ getLines(&lines, lineDataRange); ++ ++ // check data validity if flag set: ++#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it; ++ for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it) ++ { ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++ } ++#endif ++ ++ // draw fill of graph: ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ else ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ drawFill(painter, &lines); ++ ++ // draw line: ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ else ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ if (mLineStyle == lsImpulse) ++ drawImpulsePlot(painter, lines); ++ else ++ drawLinePlot(painter, lines); // also step plots can be drawn as a line plot ++ } ++ ++ // draw scatters: ++ QCPScatterStyle finalScatterStyle = mScatterStyle; ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ finalScatterStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mScatterStyle); ++ if (!finalScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ { ++ getScatters(&scatters, allSegments.at(i)); ++ drawScatterPlot(painter, scatters, finalScatterStyle); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPGraph::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ // draw fill: ++ if (mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) ++ { ++ applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->fillRect(QRectF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.width(), rect.height()/3.0), mBrush); ++ } ++ // draw line vertically centered: ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.right()+5, rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0)); // +5 on x2 else last segment is missing from dashed/dotted pens ++ } ++ // draw scatter symbol: ++ if (!mScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ { ++ applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ // scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect: ++ if (mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap && (mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() || mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height())) ++ { ++ QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle(mScatterStyle); ++ scaledStyle.setPixmap(scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::SmoothTransformation)); ++ scaledStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ scaledStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center()); ++ } else ++ { ++ mScatterStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ mScatterStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center()); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method retrieves an optimized set of data points via \ref getOptimizedLineData, an branches ++ out to the line style specific functions such as \ref dataToLines, \ref dataToStepLeftLines, etc. ++ according to the line style of the graph. ++ ++ \a lines will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with the according ++ draw functions like \ref drawLinePlot and \ref drawImpulsePlot. The points returned in \a lines ++ aren't necessarily the original data points. For example, step line styles require additional ++ points to form the steps when drawn. If the line style of the graph is \ref lsNone, the \a ++ lines vector will be empty. ++ ++ \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for ++ conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm: ++ a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this ++ function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref ++ getDataSegments. ++ ++ \see getScatters ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::getLines(QVector *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const ++{ ++ if (!lines) return; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange); ++ if (begin == end) ++ { ++ lines->clear(); ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ QVector lineData; ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ getOptimizedLineData(&lineData, begin, end); ++ ++ switch (mLineStyle) ++ { ++ case lsNone: lines->clear(); break; ++ case lsLine: *lines = dataToLines(lineData); break; ++ case lsStepLeft: *lines = dataToStepLeftLines(lineData); break; ++ case lsStepRight: *lines = dataToStepRightLines(lineData); break; ++ case lsStepCenter: *lines = dataToStepCenterLines(lineData); break; ++ case lsImpulse: *lines = dataToImpulseLines(lineData); break; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method retrieves an optimized set of data points via \ref getOptimizedScatterData and then ++ converts them to pixel coordinates. The resulting points are returned in \a scatters, and can be ++ passed to \ref drawScatterPlot. ++ ++ \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for ++ conversion. In this function, the specified range may exceed the total data bounds without harm: ++ a correspondingly trimmed data range will be used. This takes the burden off the user of this ++ function to check for valid indices in \a dataRange, e.g. when extending ranges coming from \ref ++ getDataSegments. ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::getScatters(QVector *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const ++{ ++ if (!scatters) return; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; scatters->clear(); return; } ++ ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, dataRange); ++ if (begin == end) ++ { ++ scatters->clear(); ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ QVector data; ++ getOptimizedScatterData(&data, begin, end); ++ scatters->resize(data.size()); ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ (*scatters)[i].setY(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key)); ++ } ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key)); ++ (*scatters)[i].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel ++ coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsLine. ++ ++ The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a ++ getLines if the line style is set accordingly. ++ ++ \see dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot ++*/ ++QVector QCPGraph::dataToLines(const QVector &data) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; } ++ ++ result.reserve(data.size()+2); // added 2 to reserve memory for lower/upper fill base points that might be needed for fill ++ result.resize(data.size()); ++ ++ // transform data points to pixels: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ result[i].setY(keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key)); ++ } ++ } else // key axis is horizontal ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key)); ++ result[i].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel ++ coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepLeft. ++ ++ The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a ++ getLines if the line style is set accordingly. ++ ++ \see dataToLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot ++*/ ++QVector QCPGraph::dataToStepLeftLines(const QVector &data) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; } ++ ++ result.reserve(data.size()*2+2); // added 2 to reserve memory for lower/upper fill base points that might be needed for fill ++ result.resize(data.size()*2); ++ ++ // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(lastValue); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(key); ++ lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(lastValue); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(key); ++ } ++ } else // key axis is horizontal ++ { ++ double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(key); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(lastValue); ++ lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(key); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(lastValue); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel ++ coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepRight. ++ ++ The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a ++ getLines if the line style is set accordingly. ++ ++ \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepCenterLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot ++*/ ++QVector QCPGraph::dataToStepRightLines(const QVector &data) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; } ++ ++ result.reserve(data.size()*2+2); // added 2 to reserve memory for lower/upper fill base points that might be needed for fill ++ result.resize(data.size()*2); ++ ++ // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(value); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(lastKey); ++ lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(value); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(lastKey); ++ } ++ } else // key axis is horizontal ++ { ++ double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key); ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(lastKey); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(value); ++ lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(lastKey); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(value); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel ++ coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsStepCenter. ++ ++ The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a ++ getLines if the line style is set accordingly. ++ ++ \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToImpulseLines, getLines, drawLinePlot ++*/ ++QVector QCPGraph::dataToStepCenterLines(const QVector &data) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; } ++ ++ result.reserve(data.size()*2+2); // added 2 to reserve memory for lower/upper fill base points that might be needed for fill ++ result.resize(data.size()*2); ++ ++ // calculate steps from data and transform to pixel coordinates: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key); ++ double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value); ++ result[0].setX(lastValue); ++ result[0].setY(lastKey); ++ for (int i=1; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key)+lastKey)*0.5; ++ result[i*2-1].setX(lastValue); ++ result[i*2-1].setY(key); ++ lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(lastValue); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(key); ++ } ++ result[data.size()*2-1].setX(lastValue); ++ result[data.size()*2-1].setY(lastKey); ++ } else // key axis is horizontal ++ { ++ double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().key); ++ double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.first().value); ++ result[0].setX(lastKey); ++ result[0].setY(lastValue); ++ for (int i=1; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key)+lastKey)*0.5; ++ result[i*2-1].setX(key); ++ result[i*2-1].setY(lastValue); ++ lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value); ++ lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(key); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(lastValue); ++ } ++ result[data.size()*2-1].setX(lastKey); ++ result[data.size()*2-1].setY(lastValue); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Takes raw data points in plot coordinates as \a data, and returns a vector containing pixel ++ coordinate points which are suitable for drawing the line style \ref lsImpulse. ++ ++ The source of \a data is usually \ref getOptimizedLineData, and this method is called in \a ++ getLines if the line style is set accordingly. ++ ++ \see dataToLines, dataToStepLeftLines, dataToStepRightLines, dataToStepCenterLines, getLines, drawImpulsePlot ++*/ ++QVector QCPGraph::dataToImpulseLines(const QVector &data) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return result; } ++ ++ result.resize(data.size()*2); // no need to reserve 2 extra points because impulse plot has no fill ++ ++ // transform data points to pixels: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(key); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(key); ++ } ++ } else // key axis is horizontal ++ { ++ for (int i=0; icoordToPixel(data.at(i).key); ++ result[i*2+0].setX(key); ++ result[i*2+0].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ result[i*2+1].setX(key); ++ result[i*2+1].setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(data.at(i).value)); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the fill of the graph using the specified \a painter, with the currently set brush. ++ ++ \a lines contains the points of the graph line, in pixel coordinates. ++ ++ If the fill is a normal fill towards the zero-value-line, only the points in \a lines are ++ required and two extra points at the zero-value-line, which are added by \ref addFillBasePoints ++ and removed by \ref removeFillBasePoints after the fill drawing is done. ++ ++ On the other hand if the fill is a channel fill between this QCPGraph and another QCPGraph (\a ++ mChannelFillGraph), the more complex polygon is calculated with the \ref getChannelFillPolygon ++ function, and then drawn. ++ ++ \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot, drawScatterPlot ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::drawFill(QCPPainter *painter, QVector *lines) const ++{ ++ if (mLineStyle == lsImpulse) return; // fill doesn't make sense for impulse plot ++ if (painter->brush().style() == Qt::NoBrush || painter->brush().color().alpha() == 0) return; ++ ++ applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ if (!mChannelFillGraph) ++ { ++ // draw base fill under graph, fill goes all the way to the zero-value-line: ++ addFillBasePoints(lines); ++ painter->drawPolygon(QPolygonF(*lines)); ++ removeFillBasePoints(lines); ++ } else ++ { ++ // draw channel fill between this graph and mChannelFillGraph: ++ painter->drawPolygon(getChannelFillPolygon(lines)); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws scatter symbols at every point passed in \a scatters, given in pixel coordinates. The ++ scatters will be drawn with \a painter and have the appearance as specified in \a style. ++ ++ \see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &scatters, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const ++{ ++ applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ style.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ for (int i=0; i &lines) const ++{ ++ if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0) ++ { ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ drawPolyline(painter, lines); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws impulses from the provided data, i.e. it connects all line pairs in \a lines, given in ++ pixel coordinates. The \a lines necessary for impulses are generated by \ref dataToImpulseLines ++ from the regular graph data points. ++ ++ \see drawLinePlot, drawScatterPlot ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::drawImpulsePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lines) const ++{ ++ if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0) ++ { ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ QPen oldPen = painter->pen(); ++ QPen newPen = painter->pen(); ++ newPen.setCapStyle(Qt::FlatCap); // so impulse line doesn't reach beyond zero-line ++ painter->setPen(newPen); ++ painter->drawLines(lines); ++ painter->setPen(oldPen); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns via \a lineData the data points that need to be visualized for this graph when plotting ++ graph lines, taking into consideration the currently visible axis ranges and, if \ref ++ setAdaptiveSampling is enabled, local point densities. The considered data can be restricted ++ further by \a begin and \a end, e.g. to only plot a certain segment of the data (see \ref ++ getDataSegments). ++ ++ This method is used by \ref getLines to retrieve the basic working set of data. ++ ++ \see getOptimizedScatterData ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::getOptimizedLineData(QVector *lineData, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const ++{ ++ if (!lineData) return; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ if (begin == end) return; ++ ++ int dataCount = end-begin; ++ int maxCount = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ if (mAdaptiveSampling) ++ { ++ double keyPixelSpan = qAbs(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)-keyAxis->coordToPixel((end-1)->key)); ++ if (2*keyPixelSpan+2 < (double)std::numeric_limits::max()) ++ maxCount = 2*keyPixelSpan+2; ++ } ++ ++ if (mAdaptiveSampling && dataCount >= maxCount) // use adaptive sampling only if there are at least two points per pixel on average ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ double minValue = it->value; ++ double maxValue = it->value; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator currentIntervalFirstPoint = it; ++ int reversedFactor = keyAxis->pixelOrientation(); // is used to calculate keyEpsilon pixel into the correct direction ++ int reversedRound = reversedFactor==-1 ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor (normal) and ceil (reversed) rounding of currentIntervalStartKey ++ double currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord((int)(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)+reversedRound)); ++ double lastIntervalEndKey = currentIntervalStartKey; ++ double keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); // interval of one pixel on screen when mapped to plot key coordinates ++ bool keyEpsilonVariable = keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs to be updated after every interval (for log axes) ++ int intervalDataCount = 1; ++ ++it; // advance iterator to second data point because adaptive sampling works in 1 point retrospect ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ if (it->key < currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon) // data point is still within same pixel, so skip it and expand value span of this cluster if necessary ++ { ++ if (it->value < minValue) ++ minValue = it->value; ++ else if (it->value > maxValue) ++ maxValue = it->value; ++ ++intervalDataCount; ++ } else // new pixel interval started ++ { ++ if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them to a cluster ++ { ++ if (lastIntervalEndKey < currentIntervalStartKey-keyEpsilon) // last point is further away, so first point of this cluster must be at a real data point ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.2, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value)); ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.25, minValue)); ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.75, maxValue)); ++ if (it->key > currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*2) // new pixel started further away from previous cluster, so make sure the last point of the cluster is at a real data point ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.8, (it-1)->value)); ++ } else ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalFirstPoint->key, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value)); ++ lastIntervalEndKey = (it-1)->key; ++ minValue = it->value; ++ maxValue = it->value; ++ currentIntervalFirstPoint = it; ++ currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord((int)(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key)+reversedRound)); ++ if (keyEpsilonVariable) ++ keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); ++ intervalDataCount = 1; ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ // handle last interval: ++ if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them to a cluster ++ { ++ if (lastIntervalEndKey < currentIntervalStartKey-keyEpsilon) // last point wasn't a cluster, so first point of this cluster must be at a real data point ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.2, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value)); ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.25, minValue)); ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon*0.75, maxValue)); ++ } else ++ lineData->append(QCPGraphData(currentIntervalFirstPoint->key, currentIntervalFirstPoint->value)); ++ ++ } else // don't use adaptive sampling algorithm, transfer points one-to-one from the data container into the output ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ lineData->reserve(dataCount+2); // +2 for possible fill end points ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ lineData->append(*it); ++ ++it; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns via \a scatterData the data points that need to be visualized for this graph when ++ plotting scatter points, taking into consideration the currently visible axis ranges and, if \ref ++ setAdaptiveSampling is enabled, local point densities. The considered data can be restricted ++ further by \a begin and \a end, e.g. to only plot a certain segment of the data (see \ref ++ getDataSegments). ++ ++ This method is used by \ref getScatters to retrieve the basic working set of data. ++ ++ \see getOptimizedLineData ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::getOptimizedScatterData(QVector *scatterData, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end) const ++{ ++ if (!scatterData) return; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ const int scatterModulo = mScatterSkip+1; ++ const bool doScatterSkip = mScatterSkip > 0; ++ int beginIndex = begin-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ int endIndex = end-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ while (doScatterSkip && begin != end && beginIndex % scatterModulo != 0) // advance begin iterator to first non-skipped scatter ++ { ++ ++beginIndex; ++ ++begin; ++ } ++ if (begin == end) return; ++ int dataCount = end-begin; ++ int maxCount = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ if (mAdaptiveSampling) ++ { ++ int keyPixelSpan = qAbs(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)-keyAxis->coordToPixel((end-1)->key)); ++ maxCount = 2*keyPixelSpan+2; ++ } ++ ++ if (mAdaptiveSampling && dataCount >= maxCount) // use adaptive sampling only if there are at least two points per pixel on average ++ { ++ double valueMaxRange = valueAxis->range().upper; ++ double valueMinRange = valueAxis->range().lower; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ int itIndex = beginIndex; ++ double minValue = it->value; ++ double maxValue = it->value; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator minValueIt = it; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator maxValueIt = it; ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator currentIntervalStart = it; ++ int reversedFactor = keyAxis->pixelOrientation(); // is used to calculate keyEpsilon pixel into the correct direction ++ int reversedRound = reversedFactor==-1 ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor (normal) and ceil (reversed) rounding of currentIntervalStartKey ++ double currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord((int)(keyAxis->coordToPixel(begin->key)+reversedRound)); ++ double keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); // interval of one pixel on screen when mapped to plot key coordinates ++ bool keyEpsilonVariable = keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs to be updated after every interval (for log axes) ++ int intervalDataCount = 1; ++ // advance iterator to second (non-skipped) data point because adaptive sampling works in 1 point retrospect: ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++it; ++ else ++ { ++ itIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end ++ it += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ it = end; ++ itIndex = endIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ // main loop over data points: ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ if (it->key < currentIntervalStartKey+keyEpsilon) // data point is still within same pixel, so skip it and expand value span of this pixel if necessary ++ { ++ if (it->value < minValue && it->value > valueMinRange && it->value < valueMaxRange) ++ { ++ minValue = it->value; ++ minValueIt = it; ++ } else if (it->value > maxValue && it->value > valueMinRange && it->value < valueMaxRange) ++ { ++ maxValue = it->value; ++ maxValueIt = it; ++ } ++ ++intervalDataCount; ++ } else // new pixel started ++ { ++ if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them ++ { ++ // determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to maintain certain vertical data density (this is specific to scatter plot): ++ double valuePixelSpan = qAbs(valueAxis->coordToPixel(minValue)-valueAxis->coordToPixel(maxValue)); ++ int dataModulo = qMax(1, qRound(intervalDataCount/(valuePixelSpan/4.0))); // approximately every 4 value pixels one data point on average ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart; ++ int c = 0; ++ while (intervalIt != it) ++ { ++ if ((c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt) && intervalIt->value > valueMinRange && intervalIt->value < valueMaxRange) ++ scatterData->append(*intervalIt); ++ ++c; ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++intervalIt; ++ else ++ intervalIt += scatterModulo; // since we know indices of "currentIntervalStart", "intervalIt" and "it" are multiples of scatterModulo, we can't accidentally jump over "it" here ++ } ++ } else if (currentIntervalStart->value > valueMinRange && currentIntervalStart->value < valueMaxRange) ++ scatterData->append(*currentIntervalStart); ++ minValue = it->value; ++ maxValue = it->value; ++ currentIntervalStart = it; ++ currentIntervalStartKey = keyAxis->pixelToCoord((int)(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key)+reversedRound)); ++ if (keyEpsilonVariable) ++ keyEpsilon = qAbs(currentIntervalStartKey-keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(currentIntervalStartKey)+1.0*reversedFactor)); ++ intervalDataCount = 1; ++ } ++ // advance to next data point: ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++it; ++ else ++ { ++ itIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end ++ it += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ it = end; ++ itIndex = endIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ // handle last interval: ++ if (intervalDataCount >= 2) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them ++ { ++ // determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to maintain certain vertical data density (this is specific to scatter plot): ++ double valuePixelSpan = qAbs(valueAxis->coordToPixel(minValue)-valueAxis->coordToPixel(maxValue)); ++ int dataModulo = qMax(1, qRound(intervalDataCount/(valuePixelSpan/4.0))); // approximately every 4 value pixels one data point on average ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart; ++ int intervalItIndex = intervalIt-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ int c = 0; ++ while (intervalIt != it) ++ { ++ if ((c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt) && intervalIt->value > valueMinRange && intervalIt->value < valueMaxRange) ++ scatterData->append(*intervalIt); ++ ++c; ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++intervalIt; ++ else // here we can't guarantee that adding scatterModulo doesn't exceed "it" (because "it" is equal to "end" here, and "end" isn't scatterModulo-aligned), so check via index comparison: ++ { ++ intervalItIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (intervalItIndex < itIndex) ++ intervalIt += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ intervalIt = it; ++ intervalItIndex = itIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } else if (currentIntervalStart->value > valueMinRange && currentIntervalStart->value < valueMaxRange) ++ scatterData->append(*currentIntervalStart); ++ ++ } else // don't use adaptive sampling algorithm, transfer points one-to-one from the data container into the output ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ int itIndex = beginIndex; ++ scatterData->reserve(dataCount); ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ scatterData->append(*it); ++ // advance to next data point: ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++it; ++ else ++ { ++ itIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (itIndex < endIndex) ++ it += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ it = end; ++ itIndex = endIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ This method outputs the currently visible data range via \a begin and \a end. The returned range ++ will also never exceed \a rangeRestriction. ++ ++ This method takes into account that the drawing of data lines at the axis rect border always ++ requires the points just outside the visible axis range. So \a begin and \a end may actually ++ indicate a range that contains one additional data point to the left and right of the visible ++ axis range. ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const ++{ ++ if (rangeRestriction.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ begin = end; ++ } else ++ { ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ // get visible data range: ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(keyAxis->range().lower); ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(keyAxis->range().upper); ++ // limit lower/upperEnd to rangeRestriction: ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, rangeRestriction); // this also ensures rangeRestriction outside data bounds doesn't break anything ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ The line vector generated by e.g. \ref getLines describes only the line that connects the data ++ points. If the graph needs to be filled, two additional points need to be added at the ++ value-zero-line in the lower and upper key positions of the graph. This function calculates these ++ points and adds them to the end of \a lineData. Since the fill is typically drawn before the line ++ stroke, these added points need to be removed again after the fill is done, with the ++ removeFillBasePoints function. ++ ++ The expanding of \a lines by two points will not cause unnecessary memory reallocations, because ++ the data vector generation functions (e.g. \ref getLines) reserve two extra points when they ++ allocate memory for \a lines. ++ ++ \see removeFillBasePoints, lowerFillBasePoint, upperFillBasePoint ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::addFillBasePoints(QVector *lines) const ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; return; } ++ if (!lines) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed null as lineData"; return; } ++ if (lines->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ // append points that close the polygon fill at the key axis: ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ *lines << upperFillBasePoint(lines->last().y()); ++ *lines << lowerFillBasePoint(lines->first().y()); ++ } else ++ { ++ *lines << upperFillBasePoint(lines->last().x()); ++ *lines << lowerFillBasePoint(lines->first().x()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ removes the two points from \a lines that were added by \ref addFillBasePoints. ++ ++ \see addFillBasePoints, lowerFillBasePoint, upperFillBasePoint ++*/ ++void QCPGraph::removeFillBasePoints(QVector *lines) const ++{ ++ if (!lines) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed null as lineData"; return; } ++ if (lines->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ lines->remove(lines->size()-2, 2); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ called by \ref addFillBasePoints to conveniently assign the point which closes the fill polygon ++ on the lower side of the zero-value-line parallel to the key axis. The logarithmic axis scale ++ case is a bit special, since the zero-value-line in pixel coordinates is in positive or negative ++ infinity. So this case is handled separately by just closing the fill polygon on the axis which ++ lies in the direction towards the zero value. ++ ++ \a lowerKey will be the the key (in pixels) of the returned point. Depending on whether the key ++ axis is horizontal or vertical, \a lowerKey will end up as the x or y value of the returned ++ point, respectively. ++ ++ \see upperFillBasePoint, addFillBasePoints ++*/ ++QPointF QCPGraph::lowerFillBasePoint(double lowerKey) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(); } ++ ++ QPointF point; ++ if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atLeft) ++ { ++ point.setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ point.setY(lowerKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atRight) ++ { ++ point.setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ point.setY(lowerKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ { ++ point.setX(lowerKey); ++ point.setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ { ++ point.setX(lowerKey); ++ point.setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ } ++ } else // valueAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic ++ { ++ // In logarithmic scaling we can't just draw to value zero so we just fill all the way ++ // to the axis which is in the direction towards zero ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) || ++ (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis ++ point.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->right()); ++ else ++ point.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->left()); ++ point.setY(lowerKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop || keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ { ++ point.setX(lowerKey); ++ if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) || ++ (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis ++ point.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->top()); ++ else ++ point.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->bottom()); ++ } ++ } ++ return point; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ called by \ref addFillBasePoints to conveniently assign the point which closes the fill ++ polygon on the upper side of the zero-value-line parallel to the key axis. The logarithmic axis ++ scale case is a bit special, since the zero-value-line in pixel coordinates is in positive or ++ negative infinity. So this case is handled separately by just closing the fill polygon on the ++ axis which lies in the direction towards the zero value. ++ ++ \a upperKey will be the the key (in pixels) of the returned point. Depending on whether the key ++ axis is horizontal or vertical, \a upperKey will end up as the x or y value of the returned ++ point, respectively. ++ ++ \see lowerFillBasePoint, addFillBasePoints ++*/ ++QPointF QCPGraph::upperFillBasePoint(double upperKey) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(); } ++ ++ QPointF point; ++ if (valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear) ++ { ++ if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atLeft) ++ { ++ point.setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ point.setY(upperKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atRight) ++ { ++ point.setX(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ point.setY(upperKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop) ++ { ++ point.setX(upperKey); ++ point.setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ { ++ point.setX(upperKey); ++ point.setY(valueAxis->coordToPixel(0)); ++ } ++ } else // valueAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic ++ { ++ // In logarithmic scaling we can't just draw to value 0 so we just fill all the way ++ // to the axis which is in the direction towards 0 ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) || ++ (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis ++ point.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->right()); ++ else ++ point.setX(keyAxis->axisRect()->left()); ++ point.setY(upperKey); ++ } else if (keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop || keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom) ++ { ++ point.setX(upperKey); ++ if ((valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed()) || ++ (valueAxis->range().upper > 0 && valueAxis->rangeReversed())) // if range is negative, zero is on opposite side of key axis ++ point.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->top()); ++ else ++ point.setY(keyAxis->axisRect()->bottom()); ++ } ++ } ++ return point; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Generates the polygon needed for drawing channel fills between this graph and the graph specified ++ in \a mChannelFillGraph (see \ref setChannelFillGraph). The data points representing the line of ++ this graph in pixel coordinates must be passed in \a lines, the corresponding points of the other ++ graph are generated by calling its \ref getLines method. ++ ++ This method may return an empty polygon if the key ranges of the two graphs have no overlap of if ++ they don't have the same orientation (e.g. one key axis vertical, the other horizontal). For ++ increased performance (due to implicit sharing), it is recommended to keep the returned QPolygonF ++ const. ++*/ ++const QPolygonF QCPGraph::getChannelFillPolygon(const QVector *lines) const ++{ ++ if (!mChannelFillGraph) ++ return QPolygonF(); ++ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPolygonF(); } ++ if (!mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "channel fill target key axis invalid"; return QPolygonF(); } ++ ++ if (mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() != keyAxis->orientation()) ++ return QPolygonF(); // don't have same axis orientation, can't fill that (Note: if keyAxis fits, valueAxis will fit too, because it's always orthogonal to keyAxis) ++ ++ if (lines->isEmpty()) return QPolygonF(); ++ QVector otherData; ++ mChannelFillGraph.data()->getLines(&otherData, QCPDataRange(0, mChannelFillGraph.data()->dataCount())); ++ if (otherData.isEmpty()) return QPolygonF(); ++ QVector thisData; ++ thisData.reserve(lines->size()+otherData.size()); // because we will join both vectors at end of this function ++ for (int i=0; isize(); ++i) // don't use the vector<<(vector), it squeezes internally, which ruins the performance tuning with reserve() ++ thisData << lines->at(i); ++ ++ // pointers to be able to swap them, depending which data range needs cropping: ++ QVector *staticData = &thisData; ++ QVector *croppedData = &otherData; ++ ++ // crop both vectors to ranges in which the keys overlap (which coord is key, depends on axisType): ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ // x is key ++ // if an axis range is reversed, the data point keys will be descending. Reverse them, since following algorithm assumes ascending keys: ++ if (staticData->first().x() > staticData->last().x()) ++ { ++ int size = staticData->size(); ++ for (int i=0; ifirst().x() > croppedData->last().x()) ++ { ++ int size = croppedData->size(); ++ for (int i=0; ifirst().x() < croppedData->first().x()) // other one must be cropped ++ qSwap(staticData, croppedData); ++ int lowBound = findIndexBelowX(croppedData, staticData->first().x()); ++ if (lowBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap ++ croppedData->remove(0, lowBound); ++ // set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first static data ++ // point via linear interpolation: ++ if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation ++ double slope; ++ if (croppedData->at(1).x()-croppedData->at(0).x() != 0) ++ slope = (croppedData->at(1).y()-croppedData->at(0).y())/(croppedData->at(1).x()-croppedData->at(0).x()); ++ else ++ slope = 0; ++ (*croppedData)[0].setY(croppedData->at(0).y()+slope*(staticData->first().x()-croppedData->at(0).x())); ++ (*croppedData)[0].setX(staticData->first().x()); ++ ++ // crop upper bound: ++ if (staticData->last().x() > croppedData->last().x()) // other one must be cropped ++ qSwap(staticData, croppedData); ++ int highBound = findIndexAboveX(croppedData, staticData->last().x()); ++ if (highBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap ++ croppedData->remove(highBound+1, croppedData->size()-(highBound+1)); ++ // set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last static data ++ // point via linear interpolation: ++ if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation ++ int li = croppedData->size()-1; // last index ++ if (croppedData->at(li).x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x() != 0) ++ slope = (croppedData->at(li).y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y())/(croppedData->at(li).x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x()); ++ else ++ slope = 0; ++ (*croppedData)[li].setY(croppedData->at(li-1).y()+slope*(staticData->last().x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x())); ++ (*croppedData)[li].setX(staticData->last().x()); ++ } else // mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ // y is key ++ // similar to "x is key" but switched x,y. Further, lower/upper meaning is inverted compared to x, ++ // because in pixel coordinates, y increases from top to bottom, not bottom to top like data coordinate. ++ // if an axis range is reversed, the data point keys will be descending. Reverse them, since following algorithm assumes ascending keys: ++ if (staticData->first().y() < staticData->last().y()) ++ { ++ int size = staticData->size(); ++ for (int i=0; ifirst().y() < croppedData->last().y()) ++ { ++ int size = croppedData->size(); ++ for (int i=0; ifirst().y() > croppedData->first().y()) // other one must be cropped ++ qSwap(staticData, croppedData); ++ int lowBound = findIndexAboveY(croppedData, staticData->first().y()); ++ if (lowBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap ++ croppedData->remove(0, lowBound); ++ // set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first static data ++ // point via linear interpolation: ++ if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation ++ double slope; ++ if (croppedData->at(1).y()-croppedData->at(0).y() != 0) // avoid division by zero in step plots ++ slope = (croppedData->at(1).x()-croppedData->at(0).x())/(croppedData->at(1).y()-croppedData->at(0).y()); ++ else ++ slope = 0; ++ (*croppedData)[0].setX(croppedData->at(0).x()+slope*(staticData->first().y()-croppedData->at(0).y())); ++ (*croppedData)[0].setY(staticData->first().y()); ++ ++ // crop upper bound: ++ if (staticData->last().y() < croppedData->last().y()) // other one must be cropped ++ qSwap(staticData, croppedData); ++ int highBound = findIndexBelowY(croppedData, staticData->last().y()); ++ if (highBound == -1) return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap ++ croppedData->remove(highBound+1, croppedData->size()-(highBound+1)); ++ // set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last static data ++ // point via linear interpolation: ++ if (croppedData->size() < 2) return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation ++ int li = croppedData->size()-1; // last index ++ if (croppedData->at(li).y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y() != 0) // avoid division by zero in step plots ++ slope = (croppedData->at(li).x()-croppedData->at(li-1).x())/(croppedData->at(li).y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y()); ++ else ++ slope = 0; ++ (*croppedData)[li].setX(croppedData->at(li-1).x()+slope*(staticData->last().y()-croppedData->at(li-1).y())); ++ (*croppedData)[li].setY(staticData->last().y()); ++ } ++ ++ // return joined: ++ for (int i=otherData.size()-1; i>=0; --i) // insert reversed, otherwise the polygon will be twisted ++ thisData << otherData.at(i); ++ return QPolygonF(thisData); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points x value is just above \a x. Assumes x values in ++ \a data points are ordered ascending, as is the case when plotting with horizontal key axis. ++ ++ Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon. ++*/ ++int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveX(const QVector *data, double x) const ++{ ++ for (int i=data->size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ { ++ if (data->at(i).x() < x) ++ { ++ if (isize()-1) ++ return i+1; ++ else ++ return data->size()-1; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Finds the highest index of \a data, whose points x value is just below \a x. Assumes x values in ++ \a data points are ordered ascending, as is the case when plotting with horizontal key axis. ++ ++ Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon. ++*/ ++int QCPGraph::findIndexBelowX(const QVector *data, double x) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; isize(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (data->at(i).x() > x) ++ { ++ if (i>0) ++ return i-1; ++ else ++ return 0; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points y value is just above \a y. Assumes y values in ++ \a data points are ordered descending, as is the case when plotting with vertical key axis. ++ ++ Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon. ++*/ ++int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveY(const QVector *data, double y) const ++{ ++ for (int i=0; isize(); ++i) ++ { ++ if (data->at(i).y() < y) ++ { ++ if (i>0) ++ return i-1; ++ else ++ return 0; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Calculates the minimum distance in pixels the graph's representation has from the given \a ++ pixelPoint. This is used to determine whether the graph was clicked or not, e.g. in \ref ++ selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData. Note that if ++ the graph has a line representation, the returned distance may be smaller than the distance to ++ the \a closestData point, since the distance to the graph line is also taken into account. ++ ++ If either the graph has no data or if the line style is \ref lsNone and the scatter style's shape ++ is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone (i.e. there is no visual representation of the graph), returns -1.0. ++*/ ++double QCPGraph::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const ++{ ++ closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1.0; ++ if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ return -1.0; ++ ++ // calculate minimum distances to graph data points and find closestData iterator: ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ // determine which key range comes into question, taking selection tolerance around pos into account: ++ double posKeyMin, posKeyMax, dummy; ++ pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint-QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMin, dummy); ++ pixelsToCoords(pixelPoint+QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMax, dummy); ++ if (posKeyMin > posKeyMax) ++ qSwap(posKeyMin, posKeyMax); ++ // iterate over found data points and then choose the one with the shortest distance to pos: ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(posKeyMin, true); ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->findEnd(posKeyMax, true); ++ for (QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)-pixelPoint).lengthSquared(); ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestData = it; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // calculate distance to graph line if there is one (if so, will probably be smaller than distance to closest data point): ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ // line displayed, calculate distance to line segments: ++ QVector lineData; ++ getLines(&lineData, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())); ++ QCPVector2D p(pixelPoint); ++ const int step = mLineStyle==lsImpulse ? 2 : 1; // impulse plot differs from other line styles in that the lineData points are only pairwise connected ++ for (int i=0; i *data, double y) const ++{ ++ for (int i=data->size()-1; i>=0; --i) ++ { ++ if (data->at(i).y() > y) ++ { ++ if (isize()-1) ++ return i+1; ++ else ++ return data->size()-1; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-curve.cpp', size 60009 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPCurveData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPCurveData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPCurve. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ \li \a t: the free ordering parameter of this curve point, like in the mathematical vector (x(t), y(t)). (This is the \a sortKey) ++ \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this curve point (this is the \a mainKey) ++ \li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this curve point (this is the \a mainValue) ++ ++ The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPCurveDataContainer. It is a typedef for ++ \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPCurveData as the DataType template parameter. See the ++ documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods. ++ ++ \see QCPCurveDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::sortKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a t member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static QCPCurveData QCPCurveData::fromSortKey(double sortKey) ++ ++ Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey (assigned to the data point's \a t member). ++ All other members are set to zero. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static static bool QCPCurveData::sortKeyIsMainKey() ++ ++ Since the member \a key is the data point key coordinate and the member \a t is the data ordering ++ parameter, this method returns false. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::mainKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPCurveData::mainValue() const ++ ++ Returns the \a value member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPCurveData::valueRange() const ++ ++ Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a curve data point with t, key and value set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData() : ++ t(0), ++ key(0), ++ value(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a curve data point with the specified \a t, \a key and \a value. ++*/ ++QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData(double t, double key, double value) : ++ t(t), ++ key(key), ++ value(value) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPCurve ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPCurve ++ \brief A plottable representing a parametric curve in a plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPCurve.png ++ ++ Unlike QCPGraph, plottables of this type may have multiple points with the same key coordinate, ++ so their visual representation can have \a loops. This is realized by introducing a third ++ coordinate \a t, which defines the order of the points described by the other two coordinates \a ++ x and \a y. ++ ++ To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can ++ also access and modify the curve's data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the ++ internal \ref QCPCurveDataContainer. ++ ++ Gaps in the curve can be created by adding data points with NaN as key and value ++ (qQNaN() or std::numeric_limits::quiet_NaN()) in between the two data points that shall be ++ separated. ++ ++ \section qcpcurve-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ The appearance of the curve is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref setPen, \ref setBrush). ++ ++ \section qcpcurve-usage Usage ++ ++ Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPCurve is a plottable ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies ++ (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.) ++ ++ Usually, you first create an instance: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-creation-1 ++ which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++ The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-creation-2 ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPCurve::data() const ++ ++ Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPCurveDataContainer. You may ++ use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the ++ regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a curve which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value ++ axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have ++ the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is ++ printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ The created QCPCurve is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a ++ keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPCurve, so do not delete it manually ++ but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++*/ ++QCPCurve::QCPCurve(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(keyAxis, valueAxis) ++{ ++ // modify inherited properties from abstract plottable: ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 0)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ ++ setScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle()); ++ setLineStyle(lsLine); ++} ++ ++QCPCurve::~QCPCurve() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPCurves may share the same data container safely. ++ Modifying the data in the container will then affect all curves that share the container. Sharing ++ can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use ++ the \ref QCPDataContainer::set method on the curve's data container directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpcurve-datasharing-2 ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a t, \a keys and \a values. The provided ++ vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the ++ smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a t in ascending order, you can ++ set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setData(const QVector &t, const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(t, keys, values, alreadySorted); ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided vectors ++ should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest ++ vector. ++ ++ The t parameter of each data point will be set to the integer index of the respective key/value ++ pair. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(keys, values); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref ++ QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points are drawn (e.g. for line-only plots with appropriate ++ line style). ++ ++ \see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style) ++{ ++ mScatterStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If scatters are displayed (scatter style not \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone), \a skip number of ++ scatter points are skipped/not drawn after every drawn scatter point. ++ ++ This can be used to make the data appear sparser while for example still having a smooth line, ++ and to improve performance for very high density plots. ++ ++ If \a skip is set to 0 (default), all scatter points are drawn. ++ ++ \see setScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setScatterSkip(int skip) ++{ ++ mScatterSkip = qMax(0, skip); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot or how they are represented visually ++ apart from the scatter symbol. For scatter-only plots, set \a style to \ref lsNone and \ref ++ setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style. ++ ++ \see setScatterStyle ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::setLineStyle(QCPCurve::LineStyle style) ++{ ++ mLineStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a t, \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors ++ should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest ++ vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::addData(const QVector &t, const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (t.size() != keys.size() || t.size() != values.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "ts, keys and values have different sizes:" << t.size() << keys.size() << values.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(qMin(t.size(), keys.size()), values.size()); ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->t = t[i]; ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->value = values[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors ++ should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest ++ vector. ++ ++ The t parameter of each data point will be set to the integer index of the respective key/value ++ pair. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values) ++{ ++ if (keys.size() != values.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size()); ++ double tStart; ++ if (!mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ tStart = (mDataContainer->constEnd()-1)->t + 1.0; ++ else ++ tStart = 0; ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->t = tStart + i; ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->value = values[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, true); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ Adds the provided data point as \a t, \a key and \a value to the current data. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::addData(double t, double key, double value) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData(t, key, value)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data. ++ ++ The t parameter is generated automatically by increments of 1 for each point, starting at the ++ highest t of previously existing data or 0, if the curve data is empty. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::addData(double key, double value) ++{ ++ if (!mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData((mDataContainer->constEnd()-1)->t + 1.0, key, value)); ++ else ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPCurveData(0.0, key, value)); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPCurve::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint); ++ if (details) ++ { ++ int pointIndex = closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return result; ++ } else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPCurve::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPCurve::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPCurve::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ // allocate line vector: ++ QVector lines, scatters; ++ ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ ++ // fill with curve data: ++ QPen finalCurvePen = mPen; // determine the final pen already here, because the line optimization depends on its stroke width ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ finalCurvePen = mSelectionDecorator->pen(); ++ ++ QCPDataRange lineDataRange = isSelectedSegment ? allSegments.at(i) : allSegments.at(i).adjusted(-1, 1); // unselected segments extend lines to bordering selected data point (safe to exceed total data bounds in first/last segment, getCurveLines takes care) ++ getCurveLines(&lines, lineDataRange, finalCurvePen.widthF()); ++ ++ // check data validity if flag set: ++ #ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA ++ for (QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it) ++ { ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->t) || ++ QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++ } ++ #endif ++ ++ // draw curve fill: ++ applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ else ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ if (painter->brush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && painter->brush().color().alpha() != 0) ++ painter->drawPolygon(QPolygonF(lines)); ++ ++ // draw curve line: ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(finalCurvePen); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ drawCurveLine(painter, lines); ++ } ++ ++ // draw scatters: ++ QCPScatterStyle finalScatterStyle = mScatterStyle; ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ finalScatterStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mScatterStyle); ++ if (!finalScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ { ++ getScatters(&scatters, allSegments.at(i), finalScatterStyle.size()); ++ drawScatterPlot(painter, scatters, finalScatterStyle); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPCurve::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ // draw fill: ++ if (mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush) ++ { ++ applyFillAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->fillRect(QRectF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.width(), rect.height()/3.0), mBrush); ++ } ++ // draw line vertically centered: ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left(), rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0, rect.right()+5, rect.top()+rect.height()/2.0)); // +5 on x2 else last segment is missing from dashed/dotted pens ++ } ++ // draw scatter symbol: ++ if (!mScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ { ++ applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ // scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect: ++ if (mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap && (mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() || mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height())) ++ { ++ QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle(mScatterStyle); ++ scaledStyle.setPixmap(scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::SmoothTransformation)); ++ scaledStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ scaledStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center()); ++ } else ++ { ++ mScatterStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ mScatterStyle.drawShape(painter, QRectF(rect).center()); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws lines between the points in \a lines, given in pixel coordinates. ++ ++ \see drawScatterPlot, getCurveLines ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::drawCurveLine(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lines) const ++{ ++ if (painter->pen().style() != Qt::NoPen && painter->pen().color().alpha() != 0) ++ { ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ drawPolyline(painter, lines); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws scatter symbols at every point passed in \a points, given in pixel coordinates. The ++ scatters will be drawn with \a painter and have the appearance as specified in \a style. ++ ++ \see drawCurveLine, getCurveLines ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &points, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const ++{ ++ // draw scatter point symbols: ++ applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ style.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ for (int i=0; i *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double penWidth) const ++{ ++ if (!lines) return; ++ lines->clear(); ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ // add margins to rect to compensate for stroke width ++ const double strokeMargin = qMax(qreal(1.0), qreal(penWidth*0.75)); // stroke radius + 50% safety ++ const double keyMin = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyAxis->range().lower)-strokeMargin*keyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ const double keyMax = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyAxis->range().upper)+strokeMargin*keyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ const double valueMin = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueAxis->range().lower)-strokeMargin*valueAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ const double valueMax = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueAxis->range().upper)+strokeMargin*valueAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(itBegin, itEnd, dataRange); ++ if (itBegin == itEnd) ++ return; ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator prevIt = itEnd-1; ++ int prevRegion = getRegion(prevIt->key, prevIt->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin); ++ QVector trailingPoints; // points that must be applied after all other points (are generated only when handling first point to get virtual segment between last and first point right) ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ const int currentRegion = getRegion(it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin); ++ if (currentRegion != prevRegion) // changed region, possibly need to add some optimized edge points or original points if entering R ++ { ++ if (currentRegion != 5) // segment doesn't end in R, so it's a candidate for removal ++ { ++ QPointF crossA, crossB; ++ if (prevRegion == 5) // we're coming from R, so add this point optimized ++ { ++ lines->append(getOptimizedPoint(currentRegion, it->key, it->value, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin)); ++ // in the situations 5->1/7/9/3 the segment may leave R and directly cross through two outer regions. In these cases we need to add an additional corner point ++ *lines << getOptimizedCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin); ++ } else if (mayTraverse(prevRegion, currentRegion) && ++ getTraverse(prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin, crossA, crossB)) ++ { ++ // add the two cross points optimized if segment crosses R and if segment isn't virtual zeroth segment between last and first curve point: ++ QVector beforeTraverseCornerPoints, afterTraverseCornerPoints; ++ getTraverseCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin, beforeTraverseCornerPoints, afterTraverseCornerPoints); ++ if (it != itBegin) ++ { ++ *lines << beforeTraverseCornerPoints; ++ lines->append(crossA); ++ lines->append(crossB); ++ *lines << afterTraverseCornerPoints; ++ } else ++ { ++ lines->append(crossB); ++ *lines << afterTraverseCornerPoints; ++ trailingPoints << beforeTraverseCornerPoints << crossA ; ++ } ++ } else // doesn't cross R, line is just moving around in outside regions, so only need to add optimized point(s) at the boundary corner(s) ++ { ++ *lines << getOptimizedCornerPoints(prevRegion, currentRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin); ++ } ++ } else // segment does end in R, so we add previous point optimized and this point at original position ++ { ++ if (it == itBegin) // it is first point in curve and prevIt is last one. So save optimized point for adding it to the lineData in the end ++ trailingPoints << getOptimizedPoint(prevRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin); ++ else ++ lines->append(getOptimizedPoint(prevRegion, prevIt->key, prevIt->value, it->key, it->value, keyMin, valueMax, keyMax, valueMin)); ++ lines->append(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)); ++ } ++ } else // region didn't change ++ { ++ if (currentRegion == 5) // still in R, keep adding original points ++ { ++ lines->append(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)); ++ } else // still outside R, no need to add anything ++ { ++ // see how this is not doing anything? That's the main optimization... ++ } ++ } ++ prevIt = it; ++ prevRegion = currentRegion; ++ ++it; ++ } ++ *lines << trailingPoints; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Called by \ref draw to generate points in pixel coordinates which represent the scatters of the ++ curve. If a scatter skip is configured (\ref setScatterSkip), the returned points are accordingly ++ sparser. ++ ++ Scatters that aren't visible in the current axis rect are optimized away. ++ ++ \a scatters will be filled with points in pixel coordinates, that can be drawn with \ref ++ drawScatterPlot. ++ ++ \a dataRange specifies the beginning and ending data indices that will be taken into account for ++ conversion. ++ ++ \a scatterWidth specifies the scatter width that will be used to later draw the scatters at pixel ++ coordinates generated by this function. This is needed here to calculate an accordingly wider ++ margin around the axis rect when performing the data point reduction. ++ ++ \see draw, drawScatterPlot ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::getScatters(QVector *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double scatterWidth) const ++{ ++ if (!scatters) return; ++ scatters->clear(); ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, dataRange); ++ if (begin == end) ++ return; ++ const int scatterModulo = mScatterSkip+1; ++ const bool doScatterSkip = mScatterSkip > 0; ++ int endIndex = end-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ ++ QCPRange keyRange = keyAxis->range(); ++ QCPRange valueRange = valueAxis->range(); ++ // extend range to include width of scatter symbols: ++ keyRange.lower = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyRange.lower)-scatterWidth*keyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ keyRange.upper = keyAxis->pixelToCoord(keyAxis->coordToPixel(keyRange.upper)+scatterWidth*keyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ valueRange.lower = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueRange.lower)-scatterWidth*valueAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ valueRange.upper = valueAxis->pixelToCoord(valueAxis->coordToPixel(valueRange.upper)+scatterWidth*valueAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ int itIndex = begin-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ while (doScatterSkip && it != end && itIndex % scatterModulo != 0) // advance begin iterator to first non-skipped scatter ++ { ++ ++itIndex; ++ ++it; ++ } ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->value) && keyRange.contains(it->key) && valueRange.contains(it->value)) ++ scatters->append(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->value), keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key))); ++ ++ // advance iterator to next (non-skipped) data point: ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++it; ++ else ++ { ++ itIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end ++ it += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ it = end; ++ itIndex = endIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ while (it != end) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->value) && keyRange.contains(it->key) && valueRange.contains(it->value)) ++ scatters->append(QPointF(keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key), valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->value))); ++ ++ // advance iterator to next (non-skipped) data point: ++ if (!doScatterSkip) ++ ++it; ++ else ++ { ++ itIndex += scatterModulo; ++ if (itIndex < endIndex) // make sure we didn't jump over end ++ it += scatterModulo; ++ else ++ { ++ it = end; ++ itIndex = endIndex; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ It returns the region of the given point (\a key, \a value) with respect to a rectangle defined ++ by \a keyMin, \a keyMax, \a valueMin, and \a valueMax. ++ ++ The regions are enumerated from top to bottom (\a valueMin to \a valueMax) and left to right (\a ++ keyMin to \a keyMax): ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
147
258
369
++ ++ With the rectangle being region 5, and the outer regions extending infinitely outwards. In the ++ curve optimization algorithm, region 5 is considered to be the visible portion of the plot. ++*/ ++int QCPCurve::getRegion(double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const ++{ ++ if (key < keyMin) // region 123 ++ { ++ if (value > valueMax) ++ return 1; ++ else if (value < valueMin) ++ return 3; ++ else ++ return 2; ++ } else if (key > keyMax) // region 789 ++ { ++ if (value > valueMax) ++ return 7; ++ else if (value < valueMin) ++ return 9; ++ else ++ return 8; ++ } else // region 456 ++ { ++ if (value > valueMax) ++ return 4; ++ else if (value < valueMin) ++ return 6; ++ else ++ return 5; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ This method is used in case the current segment passes from inside the visible rect (region 5, ++ see \ref getRegion) to any of the outer regions (\a otherRegion). The current segment is given by ++ the line connecting (\a key, \a value) with (\a otherKey, \a otherValue). ++ ++ It returns the intersection point of the segment with the border of region 5. ++ ++ For this function it doesn't matter whether (\a key, \a value) is the point inside region 5 or ++ whether it's (\a otherKey, \a otherValue), i.e. whether the segment is coming from region 5 or ++ leaving it. It is important though that \a otherRegion correctly identifies the other region not ++ equal to 5. ++*/ ++QPointF QCPCurve::getOptimizedPoint(int otherRegion, double otherKey, double otherValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const ++{ ++ double intersectKey = keyMin; // initial value is just fail-safe ++ double intersectValue = valueMax; // initial value is just fail-safe ++ switch (otherRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: // top and left edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMax; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ if (intersectKey < keyMin || intersectKey > keyMax) // doesn't intersect, so must intersect other: ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMin; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 2: // left edge ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMin; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ break; ++ } ++ case 3: // bottom and left edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMin; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ if (intersectKey < keyMin || intersectKey > keyMax) // doesn't intersect, so must intersect other: ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMin; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 4: // top edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMax; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ break; ++ } ++ case 5: ++ { ++ break; // case 5 shouldn't happen for this function but we add it anyway to prevent potential discontinuity in branch table ++ } ++ case 6: // bottom edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMin; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ break; ++ } ++ case 7: // top and right edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMax; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ if (intersectKey < keyMin || intersectKey > keyMax) // doesn't intersect, so must intersect other: ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMax; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 8: // right edge ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMax; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ break; ++ } ++ case 9: // bottom and right edge ++ { ++ intersectValue = valueMin; ++ intersectKey = otherKey + (key-otherKey)/(value-otherValue)*(intersectValue-otherValue); ++ if (intersectKey < keyMin || intersectKey > keyMax) // doesn't intersect, so must intersect other: ++ { ++ intersectKey = keyMax; ++ intersectValue = otherValue + (value-otherValue)/(key-otherKey)*(intersectKey-otherKey); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ return coordsToPixels(intersectKey, intersectValue); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ In situations where a single segment skips over multiple regions it might become necessary to add ++ extra points at the corners of region 5 (see \ref getRegion) such that the optimized segment ++ doesn't unintentionally cut through the visible area of the axis rect and create plot artifacts. ++ This method provides these points that must be added, assuming the original segment doesn't ++ start, end, or traverse region 5. (Corner points where region 5 is traversed are calculated by ++ \ref getTraverseCornerPoints.) ++ ++ For example, consider a segment which directly goes from region 4 to 2 but originally is far out ++ to the top left such that it doesn't cross region 5. Naively optimizing these points by ++ projecting them on the top and left borders of region 5 will create a segment that surely crosses ++ 5, creating a visual artifact in the plot. This method prevents this by providing extra points at ++ the top left corner, making the optimized curve correctly pass from region 4 to 1 to 2 without ++ traversing 5. ++*/ ++QVector QCPCurve::getOptimizedCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const ++{ ++ QVector result; ++ switch (prevRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 9: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points ++ if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMin-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); } ++ else ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 2: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 3: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 7: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points ++ if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMax-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); } ++ else ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 4: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 5: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 6: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 7: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 3: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points ++ if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMax-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); } ++ else ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 8: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 1: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 9: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 6: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 8: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 3: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 7: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 2: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 4: { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); break; } ++ case 1: { // in this case we need another distinction of cases: segment may pass below or above rect, requiring either bottom right or top left corner points ++ if ((value-prevValue)/(key-prevKey)*(keyMin-key)+value < valueMin) // segment passes below R ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); } ++ else ++ { result << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin) << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); result.append(result.last()); result << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ This method returns whether a segment going from \a prevRegion to \a currentRegion (see \ref ++ getRegion) may traverse the visible region 5. This function assumes that neither \a prevRegion ++ nor \a currentRegion is 5 itself. ++ ++ If this method returns false, the segment for sure doesn't pass region 5. If it returns true, the ++ segment may or may not pass region 5 and a more fine-grained calculation must be used (\ref ++ getTraverse). ++*/ ++bool QCPCurve::mayTraverse(int prevRegion, int currentRegion) const ++{ ++ switch (prevRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 4: ++ case 7: ++ case 2: ++ case 3: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 2: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ case 3: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 3: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ case 2: ++ case 6: ++ case 9: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 4: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ case 7: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 5: return false; // should never occur ++ case 6: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 3: ++ case 9: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 7: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ case 4: ++ case 8: ++ case 9: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 8: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 7: ++ case 9: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ case 9: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 3: ++ case 6: ++ case 8: ++ case 7: return false; ++ default: return true; ++ } ++ } ++ default: return true; ++ } ++} ++ ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ This method assumes that the \ref mayTraverse test has returned true, so there is a chance the ++ segment defined by (\a prevKey, \a prevValue) and (\a key, \a value) goes through the visible ++ region 5. ++ ++ The return value of this method indicates whether the segment actually traverses region 5 or not. ++ ++ If the segment traverses 5, the output parameters \a crossA and \a crossB indicate the entry and ++ exit points of region 5. They will become the optimized points for that segment. ++*/ ++bool QCPCurve::getTraverse(double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QPointF &crossA, QPointF &crossB) const ++{ ++ QList intersections; // x of QPointF corresponds to key and y to value ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull(key-prevKey)) // line is parallel to value axis ++ { ++ // due to region filter in mayTraverseR(), if line is parallel to value or key axis, R is traversed here ++ intersections.append(QPointF(key, valueMin)); // direction will be taken care of at end of method ++ intersections.append(QPointF(key, valueMax)); ++ } else if (qFuzzyIsNull(value-prevValue)) // line is parallel to key axis ++ { ++ // due to region filter in mayTraverseR(), if line is parallel to value or key axis, R is traversed here ++ intersections.append(QPointF(keyMin, value)); // direction will be taken care of at end of method ++ intersections.append(QPointF(keyMax, value)); ++ } else // line is skewed ++ { ++ double gamma; ++ double keyPerValue = (key-prevKey)/(value-prevValue); ++ // check top of rect: ++ gamma = prevKey + (valueMax-prevValue)*keyPerValue; ++ if (gamma >= keyMin && gamma <= keyMax) ++ intersections.append(QPointF(gamma, valueMax)); ++ // check bottom of rect: ++ gamma = prevKey + (valueMin-prevValue)*keyPerValue; ++ if (gamma >= keyMin && gamma <= keyMax) ++ intersections.append(QPointF(gamma, valueMin)); ++ double valuePerKey = 1.0/keyPerValue; ++ // check left of rect: ++ gamma = prevValue + (keyMin-prevKey)*valuePerKey; ++ if (gamma >= valueMin && gamma <= valueMax) ++ intersections.append(QPointF(keyMin, gamma)); ++ // check right of rect: ++ gamma = prevValue + (keyMax-prevKey)*valuePerKey; ++ if (gamma >= valueMin && gamma <= valueMax) ++ intersections.append(QPointF(keyMax, gamma)); ++ } ++ ++ // handle cases where found points isn't exactly 2: ++ if (intersections.size() > 2) ++ { ++ // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got duplicate points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance in between: ++ double distSqrMax = 0; ++ QPointF pv1, pv2; ++ for (int i=0; i distSqrMax) ++ { ++ pv1 = intersections.at(i); ++ pv2 = intersections.at(k); ++ distSqrMax = distSqr; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ intersections = QList() << pv1 << pv2; ++ } else if (intersections.size() != 2) ++ { ++ // one or even zero points found (shouldn't happen unless line perfectly tangent to corner), no need to draw segment ++ return false; ++ } ++ ++ // possibly re-sort points so optimized point segment has same direction as original segment: ++ if ((key-prevKey)*(intersections.at(1).x()-intersections.at(0).x()) + (value-prevValue)*(intersections.at(1).y()-intersections.at(0).y()) < 0) // scalar product of both segments < 0 -> opposite direction ++ intersections.move(0, 1); ++ crossA = coordsToPixels(intersections.at(0).x(), intersections.at(0).y()); ++ crossB = coordsToPixels(intersections.at(1).x(), intersections.at(1).y()); ++ return true; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is part of the curve optimization algorithm of \ref getCurveLines. ++ ++ This method assumes that the \ref getTraverse test has returned true, so the segment definitely ++ traverses the visible region 5 when going from \a prevRegion to \a currentRegion. ++ ++ In certain situations it is not sufficient to merely generate the entry and exit points of the ++ segment into/out of region 5, as \ref getTraverse provides. It may happen that a single segment, in ++ addition to traversing region 5, skips another region outside of region 5, which makes it ++ necessary to add an optimized corner point there (very similar to the job \ref ++ getOptimizedCornerPoints does for segments that are completely in outside regions and don't ++ traverse 5). ++ ++ As an example, consider a segment going from region 1 to region 6, traversing the lower left ++ corner of region 5. In this configuration, the segment additionally crosses the border between ++ region 1 and 2 before entering region 5. This makes it necessary to add an additional point in ++ the top left corner, before adding the optimized traverse points. So in this case, the output ++ parameter \a beforeTraverse will contain the top left corner point, and \a afterTraverse will be ++ empty. ++ ++ In some cases, such as when going from region 1 to 9, it may even be necessary to add additional ++ corner points before and after the traverse. Then both \a beforeTraverse and \a afterTraverse ++ return the respective corner points. ++*/ ++void QCPCurve::getTraverseCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QVector &beforeTraverse, QVector &afterTraverse) const ++{ ++ switch (prevRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 6: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 8: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 2: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 7: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 9: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 3: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 4: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 7: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 8: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 4: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 3: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 9: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 5: { break; } // shouldn't happen because this method only handles full traverses ++ case 6: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 7: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 7: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 2: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ case 3: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ case 6: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMax); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 8: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 1: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 3: { afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case 9: ++ { ++ switch (currentRegion) ++ { ++ case 2: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ case 1: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); afterTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMin, valueMax); break; } ++ case 4: { beforeTraverse << coordsToPixels(keyMax, valueMin); break; } ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Calculates the (minimum) distance (in pixels) the curve's representation has from the given \a ++ pixelPoint in pixels. This is used to determine whether the curve was clicked or not, e.g. in ++ \ref selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData. Note that ++ if the curve has a line representation, the returned distance may be smaller than the distance to ++ the \a closestData point, since the distance to the curve line is also taken into account. ++ ++ If either the curve has no data or if the line style is \ref lsNone and the scatter style's shape ++ is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone (i.e. there is no visual representation of the curve), returns ++ -1.0. ++*/ ++double QCPCurve::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const ++{ ++ closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1.0; ++ if (mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone()) ++ return -1.0; ++ ++ if (mDataContainer->size() == 1) ++ { ++ QPointF dataPoint = coordsToPixels(mDataContainer->constBegin()->key, mDataContainer->constBegin()->value); ++ closestData = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ return QCPVector2D(dataPoint-pixelPoint).length(); ++ } ++ ++ // calculate minimum distances to curve data points and find closestData iterator: ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ // iterate over found data points and then choose the one with the shortest distance to pos: ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ for (QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->value)-pixelPoint).lengthSquared(); ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestData = it; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // calculate distance to line if there is one (if so, will probably be smaller than distance to closest data point): ++ if (mLineStyle != lsNone) ++ { ++ QVector lines; ++ getCurveLines(&lines, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*1.2); // optimized lines outside axis rect shouldn't respond to clicks at the edge, so use 1.2*tolerance as pen width ++ for (int i=0; i QCPBarsGroup::bars() const ++ ++ Returns all bars currently in this group. ++ ++ \see bars(int index) ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPBarsGroup::size() const ++ ++ Returns the number of QCPBars plottables that are part of this group. ++ ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPBarsGroup::isEmpty() const ++ ++ Returns whether this bars group is empty. ++ ++ \see size ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPBarsGroup::contains(QCPBars *bars) ++ ++ Returns whether the specified \a bars plottable is part of this group. ++ ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new bars group for the specified QCustomPlot instance. ++*/ ++QCPBarsGroup::QCPBarsGroup(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QObject(parentPlot), ++ mParentPlot(parentPlot), ++ mSpacingType(stAbsolute), ++ mSpacing(4) ++{ ++} ++ ++QCPBarsGroup::~QCPBarsGroup() ++{ ++ clear(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the spacing between adjacent bars is interpreted. See \ref SpacingType. ++ ++ The actual spacing can then be specified with \ref setSpacing. ++ ++ \see setSpacing ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::setSpacingType(SpacingType spacingType) ++{ ++ mSpacingType = spacingType; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the spacing between adjacent bars. What the number passed as \a spacing actually means, is ++ defined by the current \ref SpacingType, which can be set with \ref setSpacingType. ++ ++ \see setSpacingType ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::setSpacing(double spacing) ++{ ++ mSpacing = spacing; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the QCPBars instance with the specified \a index in this group. If no such QCPBars ++ exists, returns 0. ++ ++ \see bars(), size ++*/ ++QCPBars *QCPBarsGroup::bars(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mBars.size()) ++ { ++ return mBars.at(index); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all QCPBars plottables from this group. ++ ++ \see isEmpty ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::clear() ++{ ++ foreach (QCPBars *bars, mBars) // since foreach takes a copy, removing bars in the loop is okay ++ bars->setBarsGroup(0); // removes itself via removeBars ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the specified \a bars plottable to this group. Alternatively, you can also use \ref ++ QCPBars::setBarsGroup on the \a bars instance. ++ ++ \see insert, remove ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::append(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (!bars) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (!mBars.contains(bars)) ++ bars->setBarsGroup(this); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars plottable is already in this bars group:" << reinterpret_cast(bars); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Inserts the specified \a bars plottable into this group at the specified index position \a i. ++ This gives you full control over the ordering of the bars. ++ ++ \a bars may already be part of this group. In that case, \a bars is just moved to the new index ++ position. ++ ++ \see append, remove ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::insert(int i, QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (!bars) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // first append to bars list normally: ++ if (!mBars.contains(bars)) ++ bars->setBarsGroup(this); ++ // then move to according position: ++ mBars.move(mBars.indexOf(bars), qBound(0, i, mBars.size()-1)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes the specified \a bars plottable from this group. ++ ++ \see contains, clear ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::remove(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (!bars) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars is 0"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ if (mBars.contains(bars)) ++ bars->setBarsGroup(0); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "bars plottable is not in this bars group:" << reinterpret_cast(bars); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Adds the specified \a bars to the internal mBars list of bars. This method does not change the ++ barsGroup property on \a bars. ++ ++ \see unregisterBars ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::registerBars(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (!mBars.contains(bars)) ++ mBars.append(bars); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Removes the specified \a bars from the internal mBars list of bars. This method does not change ++ the barsGroup property on \a bars. ++ ++ \see registerBars ++*/ ++void QCPBarsGroup::unregisterBars(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ mBars.removeOne(bars); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pixel offset in the key dimension the specified \a bars plottable should have at the ++ given key coordinate \a keyCoord. The offset is relative to the pixel position of the key ++ coordinate \a keyCoord. ++*/ ++double QCPBarsGroup::keyPixelOffset(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord) ++{ ++ // find list of all base bars in case some mBars are stacked: ++ QList baseBars; ++ foreach (const QCPBars *b, mBars) ++ { ++ while (b->barBelow()) ++ b = b->barBelow(); ++ if (!baseBars.contains(b)) ++ baseBars.append(b); ++ } ++ // find base bar this "bars" is stacked on: ++ const QCPBars *thisBase = bars; ++ while (thisBase->barBelow()) ++ thisBase = thisBase->barBelow(); ++ ++ // determine key pixel offset of this base bars considering all other base bars in this barsgroup: ++ double result = 0; ++ int index = baseBars.indexOf(thisBase); ++ if (index >= 0) ++ { ++ if (baseBars.size() % 2 == 1 && index == (baseBars.size()-1)/2) // is center bar (int division on purpose) ++ { ++ return result; ++ } else ++ { ++ double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth; ++ int startIndex; ++ int dir = (index <= (baseBars.size()-1)/2) ? -1 : 1; // if bar is to lower keys of center, dir is negative ++ if (baseBars.size() % 2 == 0) // even number of bars ++ { ++ startIndex = baseBars.size()/2 + (dir < 0 ? -1 : 0); ++ result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at(startIndex), keyCoord)*0.5; // half of middle spacing ++ } else // uneven number of bars ++ { ++ startIndex = (baseBars.size()-1)/2+dir; ++ baseBars.at((baseBars.size()-1)/2)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth)*0.5; // half of center bar ++ result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at((baseBars.size()-1)/2), keyCoord); // center bar spacing ++ } ++ for (int i = startIndex; i != index; i += dir) // add widths and spacings of bars in between center and our bars ++ { ++ baseBars.at(i)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth); ++ result += getPixelSpacing(baseBars.at(i), keyCoord); ++ } ++ // finally half of our bars width: ++ baseBars.at(index)->getPixelWidth(keyCoord, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ result += qAbs(upperPixelWidth-lowerPixelWidth)*0.5; ++ // correct sign of result depending on orientation and direction of key axis: ++ result *= dir*thisBase->keyAxis()->pixelOrientation(); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the spacing in pixels which is between this \a bars and the following one, both at the ++ key coordinate \a keyCoord. ++ ++ \note Typically the returned value doesn't depend on \a bars or \a keyCoord. \a bars is only ++ needed to get access to the key axis transformation and axis rect for the modes \ref ++ stAxisRectRatio and \ref stPlotCoords. The \a keyCoord is only relevant for spacings given in ++ \ref stPlotCoords on a logarithmic axis. ++*/ ++double QCPBarsGroup::getPixelSpacing(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord) ++{ ++ switch (mSpacingType) ++ { ++ case stAbsolute: ++ { ++ return mSpacing; ++ } ++ case stAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (bars->keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return bars->keyAxis()->axisRect()->width()*mSpacing; ++ else ++ return bars->keyAxis()->axisRect()->height()*mSpacing; ++ } ++ case stPlotCoords: ++ { ++ double keyPixel = bars->keyAxis()->coordToPixel(keyCoord); ++ return qAbs(bars->keyAxis()->coordToPixel(keyCoord+mSpacing)-keyPixel); ++ } ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPBarsData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPBarsData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single data point (one bar) for QCPBars. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this bar (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey) ++ \li \a value: height coordinate on the value axis of this bar (this is the \a mainValue) ++ ++ The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPBarsDataContainer. It is a typedef for ++ \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPBarsData as the DataType template parameter. See the ++ documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods. ++ ++ \see QCPBarsDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::sortKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static QCPBarsData QCPBarsData::fromSortKey(double sortKey) ++ ++ Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static static bool QCPBarsData::sortKeyIsMainKey() ++ ++ Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter, ++ this method returns true. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::mainKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPBarsData::mainValue() const ++ ++ Returns the \a value member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPBarsData::valueRange() const ++ ++ Returns a QCPRange with both lower and upper boundary set to \a value of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a bar data point with key and value set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPBarsData::QCPBarsData() : ++ key(0), ++ value(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a bar data point with the specified \a key and \a value. ++*/ ++QCPBarsData::QCPBarsData(double key, double value) : ++ key(key), ++ value(value) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPBars ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPBars ++ \brief A plottable representing a bar chart in a plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPBars.png ++ ++ To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. ++ ++ \section qcpbars-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ The appearance of the bars is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref setPen, \ref setBrush). ++ The width of the individual bars can be controlled with \ref setWidthType and \ref setWidth. ++ ++ Bar charts are stackable. This means, two QCPBars plottables can be placed on top of each other ++ (see \ref QCPBars::moveAbove). So when two bars are at the same key position, they will appear ++ stacked. ++ ++ If you would like to group multiple QCPBars plottables together so they appear side by side as ++ shown below, use QCPBarsGroup. ++ ++ \image html QCPBarsGroup.png ++ ++ \section qcpbars-usage Usage ++ ++ Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPBars is a plottable ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies ++ (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.) ++ ++ Usually, you first create an instance: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-creation-1 ++ which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++ The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-creation-2 ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPBars::data() const ++ ++ Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPBarsDataContainer. You may ++ use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the ++ regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barBelow() const ++ Returns the bars plottable that is directly below this bars plottable. ++ If there is no such plottable, returns 0. ++ ++ \see barAbove, moveBelow, moveAbove ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barAbove() const ++ Returns the bars plottable that is directly above this bars plottable. ++ If there is no such plottable, returns 0. ++ ++ \see barBelow, moveBelow, moveAbove ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a bar chart which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value ++ axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have ++ the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is ++ printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ The created QCPBars is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a ++ keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPBars, so do not delete it manually ++ but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++*/ ++QCPBars::QCPBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(keyAxis, valueAxis), ++ mWidth(0.75), ++ mWidthType(wtPlotCoords), ++ mBarsGroup(0), ++ mBaseValue(0), ++ mStackingGap(0) ++{ ++ // modify inherited properties from abstract plottable: ++ mPen.setColor(Qt::blue); ++ mPen.setStyle(Qt::SolidLine); ++ mBrush.setColor(QColor(40, 50, 255, 30)); ++ mBrush.setStyle(Qt::SolidPattern); ++ mSelectionDecorator->setBrush(QBrush(QColor(160, 160, 255))); ++} ++ ++QCPBars::~QCPBars() ++{ ++ setBarsGroup(0); ++ if (mBarBelow || mBarAbove) ++ connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // take this bar out of any stacking ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPBars may share the same data container safely. ++ Modifying the data in the container will then affect all bars that share the container. Sharing ++ can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use ++ the \ref QCPDataContainer::set method on the bar's data container directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpbars-datasharing-2 ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys and \a values. The provided ++ vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the ++ smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(keys, values, alreadySorted); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the bars. ++ ++ How the number passed as \a width is interpreted (e.g. screen pixels, plot coordinates,...), ++ depends on the currently set width type, see \ref setWidthType and \ref WidthType. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setWidth(double width) ++{ ++ mWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the width of the bars is defined. See the documentation of \ref WidthType for an ++ explanation of the possible values for \a widthType. ++ ++ The default value is \ref wtPlotCoords. ++ ++ \see setWidth ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setWidthType(QCPBars::WidthType widthType) ++{ ++ mWidthType = widthType; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets to which QCPBarsGroup this QCPBars instance belongs to. Alternatively, you can also use \ref ++ QCPBarsGroup::append. ++ ++ To remove this QCPBars from any group, set \a barsGroup to 0. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setBarsGroup(QCPBarsGroup *barsGroup) ++{ ++ // deregister at old group: ++ if (mBarsGroup) ++ mBarsGroup->unregisterBars(this); ++ mBarsGroup = barsGroup; ++ // register at new group: ++ if (mBarsGroup) ++ mBarsGroup->registerBars(this); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the base value of this bars plottable. ++ ++ The base value defines where on the value coordinate the bars start. How far the bars extend from ++ the base value is given by their individual value data. For example, if the base value is set to ++ 1, a bar with data value 2 will have its lowest point at value coordinate 1 and highest point at ++ 3. ++ ++ For stacked bars, only the base value of the bottom-most QCPBars has meaning. ++ ++ The default base value is 0. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setBaseValue(double baseValue) ++{ ++ mBaseValue = baseValue; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If this bars plottable is stacked on top of another bars plottable (\ref moveAbove), this method ++ allows specifying a distance in \a pixels, by which the drawn bar rectangles will be separated by ++ the bars below it. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::setStackingGap(double pixels) ++{ ++ mStackingGap = pixels; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a keys and \a values to the current data. The provided vectors ++ should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size of the smallest ++ vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (keys.size() != values.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys and values have different sizes:" << keys.size() << values.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(keys.size(), values.size()); ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->value = values[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ Adds the provided data point as \a key and \a value to the current data. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::addData(double key, double value) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPBarsData(key, value)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Moves this bars plottable below \a bars. In other words, the bars of this plottable will appear ++ below the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and value axis as this ++ plottable. ++ ++ Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully. If \a bars already ++ has a bars object below itself, this bars object is inserted between the two. If this bars object ++ is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top of each other after ++ the operation. ++ ++ To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to 0. ++ ++ \see moveBelow, barAbove, barBelow ++*/ ++void QCPBars::moveBelow(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (bars == this) return; ++ if (bars && (bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data())) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and value axis as this QCPBars"; ++ return; ++ } ++ // remove from stacking: ++ connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0 ++ // if new bar given, insert this bar below it: ++ if (bars) ++ { ++ if (bars->mBarBelow) ++ connectBars(bars->mBarBelow.data(), this); ++ connectBars(this, bars); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Moves this bars plottable above \a bars. In other words, the bars of this plottable will appear ++ above the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and value axis as this ++ plottable. ++ ++ Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully. If \a bars already ++ has a bars object above itself, this bars object is inserted between the two. If this bars object ++ is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top of each other after ++ the operation. ++ ++ To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to 0. ++ ++ \see moveBelow, barBelow, barAbove ++*/ ++void QCPBars::moveAbove(QCPBars *bars) ++{ ++ if (bars == this) return; ++ if (bars && (bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data())) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and value axis as this QCPBars"; ++ return; ++ } ++ // remove from stacking: ++ connectBars(mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data()); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0 ++ // if new bar given, insert this bar above it: ++ if (bars) ++ { ++ if (bars->mBarAbove) ++ connectBars(this, bars->mBarAbove.data()); ++ connectBars(bars, this); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection QCPBars::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return result; ++ ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (rect.intersects(getBarRect(it->key, it->value))) ++ result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(it-mDataContainer->constBegin(), it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1), false); ++ } ++ result.simplify(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPBars::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ // get visible data range: ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (getBarRect(it->key, it->value).contains(pos)) ++ { ++ if (details) ++ { ++ int pointIndex = it-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPBars::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ /* Note: If this QCPBars uses absolute pixels as width (or is in a QCPBarsGroup with spacing in ++ absolute pixels), using this method to adapt the key axis range to fit the bars into the ++ currently visible axis range will not work perfectly. Because in the moment the axis range is ++ changed to the new range, the fixed pixel widths/spacings will represent different coordinate ++ spans than before, which in turn would require a different key range to perfectly fit, and so on. ++ The only solution would be to iteratively approach the perfect fitting axis range, but the ++ mismatch isn't large enough in most applications, to warrant this here. If a user does need a ++ better fit, he should call the corresponding axis rescale multiple times in a row. ++ */ ++ QCPRange range; ++ range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain); ++ ++ // determine exact range of bars by including bar width and barsgroup offset: ++ if (foundRange && mKeyAxis) ++ { ++ double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth, keyPixel; ++ // lower range bound: ++ getPixelWidth(range.lower, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(range.lower) + lowerPixelWidth; ++ if (mBarsGroup) ++ keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, range.lower); ++ const double lowerCorrected = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(keyPixel); ++ if (!qIsNaN(lowerCorrected) && qIsFinite(lowerCorrected) && range.lower > lowerCorrected) ++ range.lower = lowerCorrected; ++ // upper range bound: ++ getPixelWidth(range.upper, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(range.upper) + upperPixelWidth; ++ if (mBarsGroup) ++ keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, range.upper); ++ const double upperCorrected = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord(keyPixel); ++ if (!qIsNaN(upperCorrected) && qIsFinite(upperCorrected) && range.upper < upperCorrected) ++ range.upper = upperCorrected; ++ } ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPBars::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ // Note: can't simply use mDataContainer->valueRange here because we need to ++ // take into account bar base value and possible stacking of multiple bars ++ QCPRange range; ++ range.lower = mBaseValue; ++ range.upper = mBaseValue; ++ bool haveLower = true; // set to true, because baseValue should always be visible in bar charts ++ bool haveUpper = true; // set to true, because baseValue should always be visible in bar charts ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (inKeyRange != QCPRange()) ++ { ++ itBegin = mDataContainer->findBegin(inKeyRange.lower); ++ itEnd = mDataContainer->findEnd(inKeyRange.upper); ++ } ++ for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ const double current = it->value + getStackedBaseValue(it->key, it->value >= 0); ++ if (qIsNaN(current)) continue; ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = true; // return true because bar charts always have the 0-line visible ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPBars::dataPixelPosition(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QPointF(); } ++ ++ const QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = mDataContainer->constBegin()+index; ++ const double valuePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(getStackedBaseValue(it->key, it->value >= 0) + it->value); ++ const double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key) + (mBarsGroup ? mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, it->key) : 0); ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return QPointF(keyPixel, valuePixel); ++ else ++ return QPointF(valuePixel, keyPixel); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return QPointF(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPBars::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin; ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd; ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i)); ++ if (begin == end) ++ continue; ++ ++ for (QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ // check data validity if flag set: ++#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->value)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "of drawn range invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++#endif ++ // draw bar: ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ { ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ } ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->drawPolygon(getBarRect(it->key, it->value)); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPBars::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ // draw filled rect: ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ QRectF r = QRectF(0, 0, rect.width()*0.67, rect.height()*0.67); ++ r.moveCenter(rect.center()); ++ painter->drawRect(r); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ called by \ref draw to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key axis range ++ setting, so only that needs to be processed. It also takes into account the bar width. ++ ++ \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when ++ plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a ++ lower may still be just outside the visible range. ++ ++ \a end returns an iterator one higher than the highest visible data point. Same as before, \a end ++ may also lie just outside of the visible range. ++ ++ if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to constEnd. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; ++ begin = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ return; ++ } ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ { ++ begin = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // get visible data range as QMap iterators ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower); ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper); ++ double lowerPixelBound = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower); ++ double upperPixelBound = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper); ++ bool isVisible = false; ++ // walk left from begin to find lower bar that actually is completely outside visible pixel range: ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; ++ while (it != mDataContainer->constBegin()) ++ { ++ --it; ++ const QRectF barRect = getBarRect(it->key, it->value); ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.right() >= lowerPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.left() <= lowerPixelBound)); ++ else // keyaxis is vertical ++ isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.top() <= lowerPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.bottom() >= lowerPixelBound)); ++ if (isVisible) ++ begin = it; ++ else ++ break; ++ } ++ // walk right from ubound to find upper bar that actually is completely outside visible pixel range: ++ it = end; ++ while (it != mDataContainer->constEnd()) ++ { ++ const QRectF barRect = getBarRect(it->key, it->value); ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.left() <= upperPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.right() >= upperPixelBound)); ++ else // keyaxis is vertical ++ isVisible = ((!mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.bottom() >= upperPixelBound) || (mKeyAxis.data()->rangeReversed() && barRect.top() <= upperPixelBound)); ++ if (isVisible) ++ end = it+1; ++ else ++ break; ++ ++it; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the rect in pixel coordinates of a single bar with the specified \a key and \a value. The ++ rect is shifted according to the bar stacking (see \ref moveAbove) and base value (see \ref ++ setBaseValue), and to have non-overlapping border lines with the bars stacked below. ++*/ ++QRectF QCPBars::getBarRect(double key, double value) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QRectF(); } ++ ++ double lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth; ++ getPixelWidth(key, lowerPixelWidth, upperPixelWidth); ++ double base = getStackedBaseValue(key, value >= 0); ++ double basePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(base); ++ double valuePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(base+value); ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(key); ++ if (mBarsGroup) ++ keyPixel += mBarsGroup->keyPixelOffset(this, key); ++ double bottomOffset = (mBarBelow && mPen != Qt::NoPen ? 1 : 0)*(mPen.isCosmetic() ? 1 : mPen.widthF()); ++ bottomOffset += mBarBelow ? mStackingGap : 0; ++ bottomOffset *= (value<0 ? -1 : 1)*valueAxis->pixelOrientation(); ++ if (qAbs(valuePixel-basePixel) <= qAbs(bottomOffset)) ++ bottomOffset = valuePixel-basePixel; ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ return QRectF(QPointF(keyPixel+lowerPixelWidth, valuePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+upperPixelWidth, basePixel+bottomOffset)).normalized(); ++ } else ++ { ++ return QRectF(QPointF(basePixel+bottomOffset, keyPixel+lowerPixelWidth), QPointF(valuePixel, keyPixel+upperPixelWidth)).normalized(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is used to determine the width of the bar at coordinate \a key, according to the ++ specified width (\ref setWidth) and width type (\ref setWidthType). ++ ++ The output parameters \a lower and \a upper return the number of pixels the bar extends to lower ++ and higher keys, relative to the \a key coordinate (so with a non-reversed horizontal axis, \a ++ lower is negative and \a upper positive). ++*/ ++void QCPBars::getPixelWidth(double key, double &lower, double &upper) const ++{ ++ lower = 0; ++ upper = 0; ++ switch (mWidthType) ++ { ++ case wtAbsolute: ++ { ++ upper = mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ lower = -upper; ++ break; ++ } ++ case wtAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()) ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ upper = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->width()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ else ++ upper = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->height()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ lower = -upper; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis or axis rect defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case wtPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis) ++ { ++ double keyPixel = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key); ++ upper = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key+mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel; ++ lower = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key-mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel; ++ // no need to qSwap(lower, higher) when range reversed, because higher/lower are gained by ++ // coordinate transform which includes range direction ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is called to find at which value to start drawing the base of a bar at \a key, when ++ it is stacked on top of another QCPBars (e.g. with \ref moveAbove). ++ ++ positive and negative bars are separated per stack (positive are stacked above baseValue upwards, ++ negative are stacked below baseValue downwards). This can be indicated with \a positive. So if the ++ bar for which we need the base value is negative, set \a positive to false. ++*/ ++double QCPBars::getStackedBaseValue(double key, bool positive) const ++{ ++ if (mBarBelow) ++ { ++ double max = 0; // don't initialize with mBaseValue here because only base value of bottom-most bar has meaning in a bar stack ++ // find bars of mBarBelow that are approximately at key and find largest one: ++ double epsilon = qAbs(key)*(sizeof(key)==4 ? 1e-6 : 1e-14); // should be safe even when changed to use float at some point ++ if (key == 0) ++ epsilon = (sizeof(key)==4 ? 1e-6 : 1e-14); ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = mBarBelow.data()->mDataContainer->findBegin(key-epsilon); ++ QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mBarBelow.data()->mDataContainer->findEnd(key+epsilon); ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ if (it->key > key-epsilon && it->key < key+epsilon) ++ { ++ if ((positive && it->value > max) || ++ (!positive && it->value < max)) ++ max = it->value; ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ // recurse down the bar-stack to find the total height: ++ return max + mBarBelow.data()->getStackedBaseValue(key, positive); ++ } else ++ return mBaseValue; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Connects \a below and \a above to each other via their mBarAbove/mBarBelow properties. The bar(s) ++ currently above lower and below upper will become disconnected to lower/upper. ++ ++ If lower is zero, upper will be disconnected at the bottom. ++ If upper is zero, lower will be disconnected at the top. ++*/ ++void QCPBars::connectBars(QCPBars *lower, QCPBars *upper) ++{ ++ if (!lower && !upper) return; ++ ++ if (!lower) // disconnect upper at bottom ++ { ++ // disconnect old bar below upper: ++ if (upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper) ++ upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = 0; ++ upper->mBarBelow = 0; ++ } else if (!upper) // disconnect lower at top ++ { ++ // disconnect old bar above lower: ++ if (lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower) ++ lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = 0; ++ lower->mBarAbove = 0; ++ } else // connect lower and upper ++ { ++ // disconnect old bar above lower: ++ if (lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower) ++ lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = 0; ++ // disconnect old bar below upper: ++ if (upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper) ++ upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = 0; ++ lower->mBarAbove = upper; ++ upper->mBarBelow = lower; ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-bars.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.cpp', size 28622 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPStatisticalBoxData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPStatisticalBoxData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPStatisticalBox. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ ++ \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey) ++ ++ \li \a minimum: the position of the lower whisker, typically the minimum measurement of the ++ sample that's not considered an outlier. ++ ++ \li \a lowerQuartile: the lower end of the box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two ++ statistical quartiles around the median of the sample, they should contain 50% of the sample ++ data. ++ ++ \li \a median: the value of the median mark inside the quartile box. The median separates the ++ sample data in half (50% of the sample data is below/above the median). (This is the \a mainValue) ++ ++ \li \a upperQuartile: the upper end of the box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two ++ statistical quartiles around the median of the sample, they should contain 50% of the sample ++ data. ++ ++ \li \a maximum: the position of the upper whisker, typically the maximum measurement of the ++ sample that's not considered an outlier. ++ ++ \li \a outliers: a QVector of outlier values that will be drawn as scatter points at the \a key ++ coordinate of this data point (see \ref QCPStatisticalBox::setOutlierStyle) ++ ++ The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer. It is a ++ typedef for \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPStatisticalBoxData as the DataType template ++ parameter. See the documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic ++ methods. ++ ++ \see QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::sortKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static QCPStatisticalBoxData QCPStatisticalBoxData::fromSortKey(double sortKey) ++ ++ Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static static bool QCPStatisticalBoxData::sortKeyIsMainKey() ++ ++ Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter, ++ this method returns true. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::mainKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPStatisticalBoxData::mainValue() const ++ ++ Returns the \a median member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPStatisticalBoxData::valueRange() const ++ ++ Returns a QCPRange spanning from the \a minimum to the \a maximum member of this statistical box ++ data point, possibly further expanded by outliers. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with key and all values set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPStatisticalBoxData::QCPStatisticalBoxData() : ++ key(0), ++ minimum(0), ++ lowerQuartile(0), ++ median(0), ++ upperQuartile(0), ++ maximum(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with the specified \a key, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a ++ upperQuartile, \a maximum and optionally a number of \a outliers. ++*/ ++QCPStatisticalBoxData::QCPStatisticalBoxData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector &outliers) : ++ key(key), ++ minimum(minimum), ++ lowerQuartile(lowerQuartile), ++ median(median), ++ upperQuartile(upperQuartile), ++ maximum(maximum), ++ outliers(outliers) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPStatisticalBox ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPStatisticalBox ++ \brief A plottable representing a single statistical box in a plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPStatisticalBox.png ++ ++ To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions. Alternatively, you can ++ also access and modify the data via the \ref data method, which returns a pointer to the internal ++ \ref QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer. ++ ++ Additionally each data point can itself have a list of outliers, drawn as scatter points at the ++ key coordinate of the respective statistical box data point. They can either be set by using the ++ respective \ref addData(double,double,double,double,double,double,const QVector&) ++ "addData" method or accessing the individual data points through \ref data, and setting the ++ QVector outliers of the data points directly. ++ ++ \section qcpstatisticalbox-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ The appearance of each data point box, ranging from the lower to the upper quartile, is ++ controlled via \ref setPen and \ref setBrush. You may change the width of the boxes with \ref ++ setWidth in plot coordinates. ++ ++ Each data point's visual representation also consists of two whiskers. Whiskers are the lines ++ which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower quartile to the minimum. ++ The appearance of the whiskers can be modified with: \ref setWhiskerPen, \ref setWhiskerBarPen, ++ \ref setWhiskerWidth. The whisker width is the width of the bar perpendicular to the whisker at ++ the top (for maximum) and bottom (for minimum). If the whisker pen is changed, make sure to set ++ the \c capStyle to \c Qt::FlatCap. Otherwise the backbone line might exceed the whisker bars by a ++ few pixels due to the pen cap being not perfectly flat. ++ ++ The median indicator line inside the box has its own pen, \ref setMedianPen. ++ ++ The outlier data points are drawn as normal scatter points. Their look can be controlled with ++ \ref setOutlierStyle ++ ++ \section qcpstatisticalbox-usage Usage ++ ++ Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPStatisticalBox is a plottable ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies ++ (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.) ++ ++ Usually, you first create an instance: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-creation-1 ++ which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++ The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-creation-2 ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPStatisticalBox::data() const ++ ++ Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer. You may use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more ++ convenient and faster than using the regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a statistical box which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its ++ value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and ++ not have the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding ++ message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ The created QCPStatisticalBox is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred ++ from \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPStatisticalBox, so do not ++ delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++*/ ++QCPStatisticalBox::QCPStatisticalBox(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(keyAxis, valueAxis), ++ mWidth(0.5), ++ mWhiskerWidth(0.2), ++ mWhiskerPen(Qt::black, 0, Qt::DashLine, Qt::FlatCap), ++ mWhiskerBarPen(Qt::black), ++ mWhiskerAntialiased(false), ++ mMedianPen(Qt::black, 3, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::FlatCap), ++ mOutlierStyle(QCPScatterStyle::ssCircle, Qt::blue, 6) ++{ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPStatisticalBoxes may share the same data container ++ safely. Modifying the data in the container will then affect all statistical boxes that share the ++ container. Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared ++ pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use ++ the \ref QCPDataContainer::set method on the statistical box data container directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpstatisticalbox-datasharing-2 ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a ++ median, \a upperQuartile and \a maximum. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the ++ number of added points will be the size of the smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &minimum, const QVector &lowerQuartile, const QVector &median, const QVector &upperQuartile, const QVector &maximum, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(keys, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum, alreadySorted); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the boxes in key coordinates. ++ ++ \see setWhiskerWidth ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setWidth(double width) ++{ ++ mWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the whiskers in key coordinates. ++ ++ Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower ++ quartile to the minimum. ++ ++ \see setWidth ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerWidth(double width) ++{ ++ mWhiskerWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker backbone. ++ ++ Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower ++ quartile to the minimum. ++ ++ Make sure to set the \c capStyle of the passed \a pen to \c Qt::FlatCap. Otherwise the backbone ++ line might exceed the whisker bars by a few pixels due to the pen cap being not perfectly flat. ++ ++ \see setWhiskerBarPen ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mWhiskerPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker bars. Those are the lines parallel to the key axis at ++ each end of the whisker backbone. ++ ++ Whiskers are the lines which reach from the upper quartile to the maximum, and from the lower ++ quartile to the minimum. ++ ++ \see setWhiskerPen ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerBarPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mWhiskerBarPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the statistical boxes whiskers are drawn with antialiasing or not. ++ ++ Note that antialiasing settings may be overridden by QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and ++ QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerAntialiased(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mWhiskerAntialiased = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen used for drawing the median indicator line inside the statistical boxes. ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setMedianPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mMedianPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the appearance of the outlier data points. ++ ++ Outliers can be specified with the method ++ \ref addData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector &outliers) ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::setOutlierStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style) ++{ ++ mOutlierStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a keys, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a upperQuartile and ++ \a maximum to the current data. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number ++ of added points will be the size of the smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &minimum, const QVector &lowerQuartile, const QVector &median, const QVector &upperQuartile, const QVector &maximum, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (keys.size() != minimum.size() || minimum.size() != lowerQuartile.size() || lowerQuartile.size() != median.size() || ++ median.size() != upperQuartile.size() || upperQuartile.size() != maximum.size() || maximum.size() != keys.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum have different sizes:" ++ << keys.size() << minimum.size() << lowerQuartile.size() << median.size() << upperQuartile.size() << maximum.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(keys.size(), qMin(minimum.size(), qMin(lowerQuartile.size(), qMin(median.size(), qMin(upperQuartile.size(), maximum.size()))))); ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->minimum = minimum[i]; ++ it->lowerQuartile = lowerQuartile[i]; ++ it->median = median[i]; ++ it->upperQuartile = upperQuartile[i]; ++ it->maximum = maximum[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided data point as \a key, \a minimum, \a lowerQuartile, \a median, \a upperQuartile ++ and \a maximum to the current data. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::addData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector &outliers) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPStatisticalBoxData(key, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum, outliers)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection QCPStatisticalBox::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return result; ++ ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (rect.intersects(getQuartileBox(it))) ++ result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(it-mDataContainer->constBegin(), it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1), false); ++ } ++ result.simplify(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPStatisticalBox::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ // get visible data range: ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (getQuartileBox(it).contains(pos)) // quartile box ++ { ++ double currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestDataPoint = it; ++ } ++ } else // whiskers ++ { ++ const QVector whiskerBackbones(getWhiskerBackboneLines(it)); ++ for (int i=0; iconstBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return qSqrt(minDistSqr); ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ QCPRange range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain); ++ // determine exact range by including width of bars/flags: ++ if (foundRange) ++ { ++ if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdPositive || range.lower-mWidth*0.5 > 0) ++ range.lower -= mWidth*0.5; ++ if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdNegative || range.upper+mWidth*0.5 < 0) ++ range.upper += mWidth*0.5; ++ } ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return; ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin; ++ QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd; ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i)); ++ if (begin == end) ++ continue; ++ ++ for (QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ // check data validity if flag set: ++# ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->key, it->minimum) || ++ QCP::isInvalidData(it->lowerQuartile, it->median) || ++ QCP::isInvalidData(it->upperQuartile, it->maximum)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it->key << "of drawn range has invalid data." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++ for (int i=0; ioutliers.size(); ++i) ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->outliers.at(i))) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point outlier at" << it->key << "of drawn range invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++# endif ++ ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ { ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ } ++ QCPScatterStyle finalOutlierStyle = mOutlierStyle; ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ finalOutlierStyle = mSelectionDecorator->getFinalScatterStyle(mOutlierStyle); ++ drawStatisticalBox(painter, it, finalOutlierStyle); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ // draw filled rect: ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ QRectF r = QRectF(0, 0, rect.width()*0.67, rect.height()*0.67); ++ r.moveCenter(rect.center()); ++ painter->drawRect(r); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Draws the graphical representation of a single statistical box with the data given by the ++ iterator \a it with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ If the statistical box has a set of outlier data points, they are drawn with \a outlierStyle. ++ ++ \see getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines, getWhiskerBarLines ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::drawStatisticalBox(QCPPainter *painter, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it, const QCPScatterStyle &outlierStyle) const ++{ ++ // draw quartile box: ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ const QRectF quartileBox = getQuartileBox(it); ++ painter->drawRect(quartileBox); ++ // draw median line with cliprect set to quartile box: ++ painter->save(); ++ painter->setClipRect(quartileBox, Qt::IntersectClip); ++ painter->setPen(mMedianPen); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->median), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWidth*0.5, it->median))); ++ painter->restore(); ++ // draw whisker lines: ++ applyAntialiasingHint(painter, mWhiskerAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables); ++ painter->setPen(mWhiskerPen); ++ painter->drawLines(getWhiskerBackboneLines(it)); ++ painter->setPen(mWhiskerBarPen); ++ painter->drawLines(getWhiskerBarLines(it)); ++ // draw outliers: ++ applyScattersAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ outlierStyle.applyTo(painter, mPen); ++ for (int i=0; ioutliers.size(); ++i) ++ outlierStyle.drawShape(painter, coordsToPixels(it->key, it->outliers.at(i))); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ called by \ref draw to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key axis range ++ setting, so only that needs to be processed. It also takes into account the bar width. ++ ++ \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when ++ plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a ++ lower may still be just outside the visible range. ++ ++ \a end returns an iterator one higher than the highest visible data point. Same as before, \a end ++ may also lie just outside of the visible range. ++ ++ if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to constEnd. ++*/ ++void QCPStatisticalBox::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; ++ begin = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ return; ++ } ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower-mWidth*0.5); // subtract half width of box to include partially visible data points ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper+mWidth*0.5); // add half width of box to include partially visible data points ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the box in plot coordinates (keys in x, values in y of the returned rect) that covers the ++ value range from the lower to the upper quartile, of the data given by \a it. ++ ++ \see drawStatisticalBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines, getWhiskerBarLines ++*/ ++QRectF QCPStatisticalBox::getQuartileBox(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const ++{ ++ QRectF result; ++ result.setTopLeft(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->upperQuartile)); ++ result.setBottomRight(coordsToPixels(it->key+mWidth*0.5, it->lowerQuartile)); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the whisker backbones (keys in x, values in y of the returned lines) that cover the value ++ range from the minimum to the lower quartile, and from the upper quartile to the maximum of the ++ data given by \a it. ++ ++ \see drawStatisticalBox, getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBarLines ++*/ ++QVector QCPStatisticalBox::getWhiskerBackboneLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const ++{ ++ QVector result(2); ++ result[0].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->lowerQuartile), coordsToPixels(it->key, it->minimum)); // min backbone ++ result[1].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key, it->upperQuartile), coordsToPixels(it->key, it->maximum)); // max backbone ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the whisker bars (keys in x, values in y of the returned lines) that are placed at the ++ end of the whisker backbones, at the minimum and maximum of the data given by \a it. ++ ++ \see drawStatisticalBox, getQuartileBox, getWhiskerBackboneLines ++*/ ++QVector QCPStatisticalBox::getWhiskerBarLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const ++{ ++ QVector result(2); ++ result[0].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->minimum), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->minimum)); // min bar ++ result[1].setPoints(coordsToPixels(it->key-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->maximum), coordsToPixels(it->key+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, it->maximum)); // max bar ++ return result; ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.cpp', size 47531 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPColorMapData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPColorMapData ++ \brief Holds the two-dimensional data of a QCPColorMap plottable. ++ ++ This class is a data storage for \ref QCPColorMap. It holds a two-dimensional array, which \ref ++ QCPColorMap then displays as a 2D image in the plot, where the array values are represented by a ++ color, depending on the value. ++ ++ The size of the array can be controlled via \ref setSize (or \ref setKeySize, \ref setValueSize). ++ Which plot coordinates these cells correspond to can be configured with \ref setRange (or \ref ++ setKeyRange, \ref setValueRange). ++ ++ The data cells can be accessed in two ways: They can be directly addressed by an integer index ++ with \ref setCell. This is the fastest method. Alternatively, they can be addressed by their plot ++ coordinate with \ref setData. plot coordinate to cell index transformations and vice versa are ++ provided by the functions \ref coordToCell and \ref cellToCoord. ++ ++ A \ref QCPColorMapData also holds an on-demand two-dimensional array of alpha values which (if ++ allocated) has the same size as the data map. It can be accessed via \ref setAlpha, \ref ++ fillAlpha and \ref clearAlpha. The memory for the alpha map is only allocated if needed, i.e. on ++ the first call of \ref setAlpha. \ref clearAlpha restores full opacity and frees the alpha map. ++ ++ This class also buffers the minimum and maximum values that are in the data set, to provide ++ QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange with the necessary information quickly. Setting a cell to a value ++ that is greater than the current maximum increases this maximum to the new value. However, ++ setting the cell that currently holds the maximum value to a smaller value doesn't decrease the ++ maximum again, because finding the true new maximum would require going through the entire data ++ array, which might be time consuming. The same holds for the data minimum. This functionality is ++ given by \ref recalculateDataBounds, such that you can decide when it is sensible to find the ++ true current minimum and maximum. The method QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange offers a convenience ++ parameter \a recalculateDataBounds which may be set to true to automatically call \ref ++ recalculateDataBounds internally. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPColorMapData::isEmpty() const ++ ++ Returns whether this instance carries no data. This is equivalent to having a size where at least ++ one of the dimensions is 0 (see \ref setSize). ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance. The instance has \a keySize cells in the key direction ++ and \a valueSize cells in the value direction. These cells will be displayed by the \ref QCPColorMap ++ at the coordinates \a keyRange and \a valueRange. ++ ++ \see setSize, setKeySize, setValueSize, setRange, setKeyRange, setValueRange ++*/ ++QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData(int keySize, int valueSize, const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange) : ++ mKeySize(0), ++ mValueSize(0), ++ mKeyRange(keyRange), ++ mValueRange(valueRange), ++ mIsEmpty(true), ++ mData(0), ++ mAlpha(0), ++ mDataModified(true) ++{ ++ setSize(keySize, valueSize); ++ fill(0); ++} ++ ++QCPColorMapData::~QCPColorMapData() ++{ ++ if (mData) ++ delete[] mData; ++ if (mAlpha) ++ delete[] mAlpha; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance copying the data and range of \a other. ++*/ ++QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData(const QCPColorMapData &other) : ++ mKeySize(0), ++ mValueSize(0), ++ mIsEmpty(true), ++ mData(0), ++ mAlpha(0), ++ mDataModified(true) ++{ ++ *this = other; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Overwrites this color map data instance with the data stored in \a other. The alpha map state is ++ transferred, too. ++*/ ++QCPColorMapData &QCPColorMapData::operator=(const QCPColorMapData &other) ++{ ++ if (&other != this) ++ { ++ const int keySize = other.keySize(); ++ const int valueSize = other.valueSize(); ++ if (!other.mAlpha && mAlpha) ++ clearAlpha(); ++ setSize(keySize, valueSize); ++ if (other.mAlpha && !mAlpha) ++ createAlpha(false); ++ setRange(other.keyRange(), other.valueRange()); ++ if (!isEmpty()) ++ { ++ memcpy(mData, other.mData, sizeof(mData[0])*keySize*valueSize); ++ if (mAlpha) ++ memcpy(mAlpha, other.mAlpha, sizeof(mAlpha[0])*keySize*valueSize); ++ } ++ mDataBounds = other.mDataBounds; ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } ++ return *this; ++} ++ ++/* undocumented getter */ ++double QCPColorMapData::data(double key, double value) ++{ ++ int keyCell = (key-mKeyRange.lower)/(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)*(mKeySize-1)+0.5; ++ int valueCell = (value-mValueRange.lower)/(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)*(mValueSize-1)+0.5; ++ if (keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize) ++ return mData[valueCell*mKeySize + keyCell]; ++ else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* undocumented getter */ ++double QCPColorMapData::cell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex) ++{ ++ if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize) ++ return mData[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex]; ++ else ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the alpha map value of the cell with the indices \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex. ++ ++ If this color map data doesn't have an alpha map (because \ref setAlpha was never called after ++ creation or after a call to \ref clearAlpha), returns 255, which corresponds to full opacity. ++ ++ \see setAlpha ++*/ ++unsigned char QCPColorMapData::alpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex) ++{ ++ if (mAlpha && keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize) ++ return mAlpha[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex]; ++ else ++ return 255; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension and \a valueSize cells in ++ the value dimension. ++ ++ The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the ++ requested size. ++ ++ Setting at least one of \a keySize or \a valueSize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref ++ isEmpty returns true. ++ ++ \see setRange, setKeySize, setValueSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setSize(int keySize, int valueSize) ++{ ++ if (keySize != mKeySize || valueSize != mValueSize) ++ { ++ mKeySize = keySize; ++ mValueSize = valueSize; ++ if (mData) ++ delete[] mData; ++ mIsEmpty = mKeySize == 0 || mValueSize == 0; ++ if (!mIsEmpty) ++ { ++#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS ++ try { // 2D arrays get memory intensive fast. So if the allocation fails, at least output debug message ++#endif ++ mData = new double[mKeySize*mValueSize]; ++#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS ++ } catch (...) { mData = 0; } ++#endif ++ if (mData) ++ fill(0); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "out of memory for data dimensions "<< mKeySize << "*" << mValueSize; ++ } else ++ mData = 0; ++ ++ if (mAlpha) // if we had an alpha map, recreate it with new size ++ createAlpha(); ++ ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension. ++ ++ The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the ++ requested size. ++ ++ Setting \a keySize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty returns true. ++ ++ \see setKeyRange, setSize, setValueSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setKeySize(int keySize) ++{ ++ setSize(keySize, mValueSize); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Resizes the data array to have \a valueSize cells in the value dimension. ++ ++ The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map had already the ++ requested size. ++ ++ Setting \a valueSize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty returns true. ++ ++ \see setValueRange, setSize, setKeySize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setValueSize(int valueSize) ++{ ++ setSize(mKeySize, valueSize); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the coordinate ranges the data shall be distributed over. This defines the rectangular area ++ covered by the color map in plot coordinates. ++ ++ The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if ++ the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to QCPRange(2, 3) there will ++ be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3. ++ ++ \see setSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setRange(const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange) ++{ ++ setKeyRange(keyRange); ++ setValueRange(valueRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the key dimension. Together with ++ the value range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in plot coordinates. ++ ++ The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if ++ the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to QCPRange(2, 3) there will ++ be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3. ++ ++ \see setRange, setValueRange, setSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange(const QCPRange &keyRange) ++{ ++ mKeyRange = keyRange; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the value dimension. Together with ++ the key range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in plot coordinates. ++ ++ The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this function. For example, if ++ the value size (\ref setValueSize) is 3 and \a valueRange is set to QCPRange(2, 3) there ++ will be cells centered on the value coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3. ++ ++ \see setRange, setKeyRange, setSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setValueRange(const QCPRange &valueRange) ++{ ++ mValueRange = valueRange; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the data of the cell, which lies at the plot coordinates given by \a key and \a value, to \a ++ z. ++ ++ \note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals, even if the key or ++ value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap with logarithmic axes, ++ you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::setData method as it uses a linear transformation to ++ determine the cell index. Rather directly access the cell index with \ref ++ QCPColorMapData::setCell. ++ ++ \see setCell, setRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setData(double key, double value, double z) ++{ ++ int keyCell = (key-mKeyRange.lower)/(mKeyRange.upper-mKeyRange.lower)*(mKeySize-1)+0.5; ++ int valueCell = (value-mValueRange.lower)/(mValueRange.upper-mValueRange.lower)*(mValueSize-1)+0.5; ++ if (keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize) ++ { ++ mData[valueCell*mKeySize + keyCell] = z; ++ if (z < mDataBounds.lower) ++ mDataBounds.lower = z; ++ if (z > mDataBounds.upper) ++ mDataBounds.upper = z; ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the data of the cell with indices \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to \a z. The indices ++ enumerate the cells starting from zero, up to the map's size-1 in the respective dimension (see ++ \ref setSize). ++ ++ In the standard plot configuration (horizontal key axis and vertical value axis, both not ++ range-reversed), the cell with indices (0, 0) is in the bottom left corner and the cell with ++ indices (keySize-1, valueSize-1) is in the top right corner of the color map. ++ ++ \see setData, setSize ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setCell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double z) ++{ ++ if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize) ++ { ++ mData[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex] = z; ++ if (z < mDataBounds.lower) ++ mDataBounds.lower = z; ++ if (z > mDataBounds.upper) ++ mDataBounds.upper = z; ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << keyIndex << valueIndex; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the alpha of the color map cell given by \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to \a alpha. A value ++ of 0 for \a alpha results in a fully transparent cell, and a value of 255 results in a fully ++ opaque cell. ++ ++ If an alpha map doesn't exist yet for this color map data, it will be created here. If you wish ++ to restore full opacity and free any allocated memory of the alpha map, call \ref clearAlpha. ++ ++ Note that the cell-wise alpha which can be configured here is independent of any alpha configured ++ in the color map's gradient (\ref QCPColorGradient). If a cell is affected both by the cell-wise ++ and gradient alpha, the alpha values will be blended accordingly during rendering of the color ++ map. ++ ++ \see fillAlpha, clearAlpha ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::setAlpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, unsigned char alpha) ++{ ++ if (keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize) ++ { ++ if (mAlpha || createAlpha()) ++ { ++ mAlpha[valueIndex*mKeySize + keyIndex] = alpha; ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << keyIndex << valueIndex; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Goes through the data and updates the buffered minimum and maximum data values. ++ ++ Calling this method is only advised if you are about to call \ref QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange ++ and can not guarantee that the cells holding the maximum or minimum data haven't been overwritten ++ with a smaller or larger value respectively, since the buffered maximum/minimum values have been ++ updated the last time. Why this is the case is explained in the class description (\ref ++ QCPColorMapData). ++ ++ Note that the method \ref QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange provides a parameter \a ++ recalculateDataBounds for convenience. Setting this to true will call this method for you, before ++ doing the rescale. ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds() ++{ ++ if (mKeySize > 0 && mValueSize > 0) ++ { ++ double minHeight = mData[0]; ++ double maxHeight = mData[0]; ++ const int dataCount = mValueSize*mKeySize; ++ for (int i=0; i maxHeight) ++ maxHeight = mData[i]; ++ if (mData[i] < minHeight) ++ minHeight = mData[i]; ++ } ++ mDataBounds.lower = minHeight; ++ mDataBounds.upper = maxHeight; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Frees the internal data memory. ++ ++ This is equivalent to calling \ref setSize "setSize(0, 0)". ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::clear() ++{ ++ setSize(0, 0); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Frees the internal alpha map. The color map will have full opacity again. ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::clearAlpha() ++{ ++ if (mAlpha) ++ { ++ delete[] mAlpha; ++ mAlpha = 0; ++ mDataModified = true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets all cells to the value \a z. ++*/ ++void QCPColorMapData::fill(double z) ++{ ++ const int dataCount = mValueSize*mKeySize; ++ for (int i=0; i(data); ++ return; ++ } ++ if (copy) ++ { ++ *mMapData = *data; ++ } else ++ { ++ delete mMapData; ++ mMapData = data; ++ } ++ mMapImageInvalidated = true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the data range of this color map to \a dataRange. The data range defines which data values ++ are mapped to the color gradient. ++ ++ To make the data range span the full range of the data set, use \ref rescaleDataRange. ++ ++ \see QCPColorScale::setDataRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange) ++{ ++ if (!QCPRange::validRange(dataRange)) return; ++ if (mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper) ++ { ++ if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLogScale(); ++ else ++ mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLinScale(); ++ mMapImageInvalidated = true; ++ emit dataRangeChanged(mDataRange); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the data is correlated with the color gradient linearly or logarithmically. ++ ++ \see QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType) ++{ ++ if (mDataScaleType != scaleType) ++ { ++ mDataScaleType = scaleType; ++ mMapImageInvalidated = true; ++ emit dataScaleTypeChanged(mDataScaleType); ++ if (mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic) ++ setDataRange(mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale()); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color gradient that is used to represent the data. For more details on how to create an ++ own gradient or use one of the preset gradients, see \ref QCPColorGradient. ++ ++ The colors defined by the gradient will be used to represent data values in the currently set ++ data range, see \ref setDataRange. Data points that are outside this data range will either be ++ colored uniformly with the respective gradient boundary color, or the gradient will repeat, ++ depending on \ref QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic. ++ ++ \see QCPColorScale::setGradient ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient) ++{ ++ if (mGradient != gradient) ++ { ++ mGradient = gradient; ++ mMapImageInvalidated = true; ++ emit gradientChanged(mGradient); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the color map image shall use bicubic interpolation when displaying the color map ++ shrunk or expanded, and not at a 1:1 pixel-to-data scale. ++ ++ \image html QCPColorMap-interpolate.png "A 10*10 color map, with interpolation and without interpolation enabled" ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setInterpolate(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mInterpolate = enabled; ++ mMapImageInvalidated = true; // because oversampling factors might need to change ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the outer most data rows and columns are clipped to the specified key and value ++ range (see \ref QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange, \ref QCPColorMapData::setValueRange). ++ ++ if \a enabled is set to false, the data points at the border of the color map are drawn with the ++ same width and height as all other data points. Since the data points are represented by ++ rectangles of one color centered on the data coordinate, this means that the shown color map ++ extends by half a data point over the specified key/value range in each direction. ++ ++ \image html QCPColorMap-tightboundary.png "A color map, with tight boundary enabled and disabled" ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setTightBoundary(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mTightBoundary = enabled; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Associates the color scale \a colorScale with this color map. ++ ++ This means that both the color scale and the color map synchronize their gradient, data range and ++ data scale type (\ref setGradient, \ref setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType). Multiple color maps ++ can be associated with one single color scale. This causes the color maps to also synchronize ++ those properties, via the mutual color scale. ++ ++ This function causes the color map to adopt the current color gradient, data range and data scale ++ type of \a colorScale. After this call, you may change these properties at either the color map ++ or the color scale, and the setting will be applied to both. ++ ++ Pass 0 as \a colorScale to disconnect the color scale from this color map again. ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::setColorScale(QCPColorScale *colorScale) ++{ ++ if (mColorScale) // unconnect signals from old color scale ++ { ++ disconnect(this, SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ disconnect(this, SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ disconnect(this, SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient))); ++ disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), this, SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient))); ++ disconnect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ } ++ mColorScale = colorScale; ++ if (mColorScale) // connect signals to new color scale ++ { ++ setGradient(mColorScale.data()->gradient()); ++ setDataRange(mColorScale.data()->dataRange()); ++ setDataScaleType(mColorScale.data()->dataScaleType()); ++ connect(this, SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(this, SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ connect(this, SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), mColorScale.data(), SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient))); ++ connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataRangeChanged(QCPRange)), this, SLOT(setDataRange(QCPRange))); ++ connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient)), this, SLOT(setGradient(QCPColorGradient))); ++ connect(mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL(dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType)), this, SLOT(setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType))); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the data range (\ref setDataRange) to span the minimum and maximum values that occur in the ++ current data set. This corresponds to the \ref rescaleKeyAxis or \ref rescaleValueAxis methods, ++ only for the third data dimension of the color map. ++ ++ The minimum and maximum values of the data set are buffered in the internal QCPColorMapData ++ instance (\ref data). As data is updated via its \ref QCPColorMapData::setCell or \ref ++ QCPColorMapData::setData, the buffered minimum and maximum values are updated, too. For ++ performance reasons, however, they are only updated in an expanding fashion. So the buffered ++ maximum can only increase and the buffered minimum can only decrease. In consequence, changes to ++ the data that actually lower the maximum of the data set (by overwriting the cell holding the ++ current maximum with a smaller value), aren't recognized and the buffered maximum overestimates ++ the true maximum of the data set. The same happens for the buffered minimum. To recalculate the ++ true minimum and maximum by explicitly looking at each cell, the method ++ QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds can be used. For convenience, setting the parameter \a ++ recalculateDataBounds calls this method before setting the data range to the buffered minimum and ++ maximum. ++ ++ \see setDataRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange(bool recalculateDataBounds) ++{ ++ if (recalculateDataBounds) ++ mMapData->recalculateDataBounds(); ++ setDataRange(mMapData->dataBounds()); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Takes the current appearance of the color map and updates the legend icon, which is used to ++ represent this color map in the legend (see \ref QCPLegend). ++ ++ The \a transformMode specifies whether the rescaling is done by a faster, low quality image ++ scaling algorithm (Qt::FastTransformation) or by a slower, higher quality algorithm ++ (Qt::SmoothTransformation). ++ ++ The current color map appearance is scaled down to \a thumbSize. Ideally, this should be equal to ++ the size of the legend icon (see \ref QCPLegend::setIconSize). If it isn't exactly the configured ++ legend icon size, the thumb will be rescaled during drawing of the legend item. ++ ++ \see setDataRange ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::updateLegendIcon(Qt::TransformationMode transformMode, const QSize &thumbSize) ++{ ++ if (mMapImage.isNull() && !data()->isEmpty()) ++ updateMapImage(); // try to update map image if it's null (happens if no draw has happened yet) ++ ++ if (!mMapImage.isNull()) // might still be null, e.g. if data is empty, so check here again ++ { ++ bool mirrorX = (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis())->rangeReversed(); ++ bool mirrorY = (valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis())->rangeReversed(); ++ mLegendIcon = QPixmap::fromImage(mMapImage.mirrored(mirrorX, mirrorY)).scaled(thumbSize, Qt::KeepAspectRatio, transformMode); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPColorMap::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mMapData->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ double posKey, posValue; ++ pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue); ++ if (mMapData->keyRange().contains(posKey) && mMapData->valueRange().contains(posValue)) ++ { ++ if (details) ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(0, 1))); // temporary solution, to facilitate whole-plottable selection. Replace in future version with segmented 2D selection. ++ return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPColorMap::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ foundRange = true; ++ QCPRange result = mMapData->keyRange(); ++ result.normalize(); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive) ++ { ++ if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0) ++ result.lower = result.upper*1e-3; ++ else if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0) ++ foundRange = false; ++ } else if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative) ++ { ++ if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0) ++ result.upper = result.lower*1e-3; ++ else if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0) ++ foundRange = false; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPColorMap::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ if (inKeyRange != QCPRange()) ++ { ++ if (mMapData->keyRange().upper < inKeyRange.lower || mMapData->keyRange().lower > inKeyRange.upper) ++ { ++ foundRange = false; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = true; ++ QCPRange result = mMapData->valueRange(); ++ result.normalize(); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive) ++ { ++ if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0) ++ result.lower = result.upper*1e-3; ++ else if (result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0) ++ foundRange = false; ++ } else if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative) ++ { ++ if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0) ++ result.upper = result.lower*1e-3; ++ else if (result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0) ++ foundRange = false; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Updates the internal map image buffer by going through the internal \ref QCPColorMapData and ++ turning the data values into color pixels with \ref QCPColorGradient::colorize. ++ ++ This method is called by \ref QCPColorMap::draw if either the data has been modified or the map image ++ has been invalidated for a different reason (e.g. a change of the data range with \ref ++ setDataRange). ++ ++ If the map cell count is low, the image created will be oversampled in order to avoid a ++ QPainter::drawImage bug which makes inner pixel boundaries jitter when stretch-drawing images ++ without smooth transform enabled. Accordingly, oversampling isn't performed if \ref ++ setInterpolate is true. ++*/ ++void QCPColorMap::updateMapImage() ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis) return; ++ if (mMapData->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ const QImage::Format format = QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied; ++ const int keySize = mMapData->keySize(); ++ const int valueSize = mMapData->valueSize(); ++ int keyOversamplingFactor = mInterpolate ? 1 : (int)(1.0+100.0/(double)keySize); // make mMapImage have at least size 100, factor becomes 1 if size > 200 or interpolation is on ++ int valueOversamplingFactor = mInterpolate ? 1 : (int)(1.0+100.0/(double)valueSize); // make mMapImage have at least size 100, factor becomes 1 if size > 200 or interpolation is on ++ ++ // resize mMapImage to correct dimensions including possible oversampling factors, according to key/value axes orientation: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && (mMapImage.width() != keySize*keyOversamplingFactor || mMapImage.height() != valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor)) ++ mMapImage = QImage(QSize(keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor), format); ++ else if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && (mMapImage.width() != valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor || mMapImage.height() != keySize*keyOversamplingFactor)) ++ mMapImage = QImage(QSize(valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, keySize*keyOversamplingFactor), format); ++ ++ QImage *localMapImage = &mMapImage; // this is the image on which the colorization operates. Either the final mMapImage, or if we need oversampling, mUndersampledMapImage ++ if (keyOversamplingFactor > 1 || valueOversamplingFactor > 1) ++ { ++ // resize undersampled map image to actual key/value cell sizes: ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && (mUndersampledMapImage.width() != keySize || mUndersampledMapImage.height() != valueSize)) ++ mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(QSize(keySize, valueSize), format); ++ else if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && (mUndersampledMapImage.width() != valueSize || mUndersampledMapImage.height() != keySize)) ++ mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(QSize(valueSize, keySize), format); ++ localMapImage = &mUndersampledMapImage; // make the colorization run on the undersampled image ++ } else if (!mUndersampledMapImage.isNull()) ++ mUndersampledMapImage = QImage(); // don't need oversampling mechanism anymore (map size has changed) but mUndersampledMapImage still has nonzero size, free it ++ ++ const double *rawData = mMapData->mData; ++ const unsigned char *rawAlpha = mMapData->mAlpha; ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ const int lineCount = valueSize; ++ const int rowCount = keySize; ++ for (int line=0; line(localMapImage->scanLine(lineCount-1-line)); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical coordinate system) ++ if (rawAlpha) ++ mGradient.colorize(rawData+line*rowCount, rawAlpha+line*rowCount, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, 1, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic); ++ else ++ mGradient.colorize(rawData+line*rowCount, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, 1, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic); ++ } ++ } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ const int lineCount = keySize; ++ const int rowCount = valueSize; ++ for (int line=0; line(localMapImage->scanLine(lineCount-1-line)); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical coordinate system) ++ if (rawAlpha) ++ mGradient.colorize(rawData+line, rawAlpha+line, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, lineCount, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic); ++ else ++ mGradient.colorize(rawData+line, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, lineCount, mDataScaleType==QCPAxis::stLogarithmic); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (keyOversamplingFactor > 1 || valueOversamplingFactor > 1) ++ { ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ mMapImage = mUndersampledMapImage.scaled(keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation); ++ else ++ mMapImage = mUndersampledMapImage.scaled(valueSize*valueOversamplingFactor, keySize*keyOversamplingFactor, Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation); ++ } ++ mMapData->mDataModified = false; ++ mMapImageInvalidated = false; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorMap::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (mMapData->isEmpty()) return; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) return; ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ ++ if (mMapData->mDataModified || mMapImageInvalidated) ++ updateMapImage(); ++ ++ // use buffer if painting vectorized (PDF): ++ const bool useBuffer = painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmVectorized); ++ QCPPainter *localPainter = painter; // will be redirected to paint on mapBuffer if painting vectorized ++ QRectF mapBufferTarget; // the rect in absolute widget coordinates where the visible map portion/buffer will end up in ++ QPixmap mapBuffer; ++ if (useBuffer) ++ { ++ const double mapBufferPixelRatio = 3; // factor by which DPI is increased in embedded bitmaps ++ mapBufferTarget = painter->clipRegion().boundingRect(); ++ mapBuffer = QPixmap((mapBufferTarget.size()*mapBufferPixelRatio).toSize()); ++ mapBuffer.fill(Qt::transparent); ++ localPainter = new QCPPainter(&mapBuffer); ++ localPainter->scale(mapBufferPixelRatio, mapBufferPixelRatio); ++ localPainter->translate(-mapBufferTarget.topLeft()); ++ } ++ ++ QRectF imageRect = QRectF(coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().lower, mMapData->valueRange().lower), ++ coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().upper, mMapData->valueRange().upper)).normalized(); ++ // extend imageRect to contain outer halves/quarters of bordering/cornering pixels (cells are centered on map range boundary): ++ double halfCellWidth = 0; // in pixels ++ double halfCellHeight = 0; // in pixels ++ if (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ if (mMapData->keySize() > 1) ++ halfCellWidth = 0.5*imageRect.width()/(double)(mMapData->keySize()-1); ++ if (mMapData->valueSize() > 1) ++ halfCellHeight = 0.5*imageRect.height()/(double)(mMapData->valueSize()-1); ++ } else // keyAxis orientation is Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ if (mMapData->keySize() > 1) ++ halfCellHeight = 0.5*imageRect.height()/(double)(mMapData->keySize()-1); ++ if (mMapData->valueSize() > 1) ++ halfCellWidth = 0.5*imageRect.width()/(double)(mMapData->valueSize()-1); ++ } ++ imageRect.adjust(-halfCellWidth, -halfCellHeight, halfCellWidth, halfCellHeight); ++ const bool mirrorX = (keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis())->rangeReversed(); ++ const bool mirrorY = (valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis())->rangeReversed(); ++ const bool smoothBackup = localPainter->renderHints().testFlag(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform); ++ localPainter->setRenderHint(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, mInterpolate); ++ QRegion clipBackup; ++ if (mTightBoundary) ++ { ++ clipBackup = localPainter->clipRegion(); ++ QRectF tightClipRect = QRectF(coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().lower, mMapData->valueRange().lower), ++ coordsToPixels(mMapData->keyRange().upper, mMapData->valueRange().upper)).normalized(); ++ localPainter->setClipRect(tightClipRect, Qt::IntersectClip); ++ } ++ localPainter->drawImage(imageRect, mMapImage.mirrored(mirrorX, mirrorY)); ++ if (mTightBoundary) ++ localPainter->setClipRegion(clipBackup); ++ localPainter->setRenderHint(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, smoothBackup); ++ ++ if (useBuffer) // localPainter painted to mapBuffer, so now draw buffer with original painter ++ { ++ delete localPainter; ++ painter->drawPixmap(mapBufferTarget.toRect(), mapBuffer); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPColorMap::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ // draw map thumbnail: ++ if (!mLegendIcon.isNull()) ++ { ++ QPixmap scaledIcon = mLegendIcon.scaled(rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation); ++ QRectF iconRect = QRectF(0, 0, scaledIcon.width(), scaledIcon.height()); ++ iconRect.moveCenter(rect.center()); ++ painter->drawPixmap(iconRect.topLeft(), scaledIcon); ++ } ++ /* ++ // draw frame: ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ painter->setPen(Qt::black); ++ painter->drawRect(rect.adjusted(1, 1, 0, 0)); ++ */ ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.cpp', size 42610 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPFinancialData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPFinancialData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPFinancial. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ \li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point (this is the \a mainKey and the \a sortKey) ++ \li \a open: The opening value at the data point (this is the \a mainValue) ++ \li \a high: The high/maximum value at the data point ++ \li \a low: The low/minimum value at the data point ++ \li \a close: The closing value at the data point ++ ++ The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer. It is a typedef ++ for \ref QCPDataContainer with \ref QCPFinancialData as the DataType template parameter. See the ++ documentation there for an explanation regarding the data type's generic methods. ++ ++ \see QCPFinancialDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::sortKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static QCPFinancialData QCPFinancialData::fromSortKey(double sortKey) ++ ++ Returns a data point with the specified \a sortKey. All other members are set to zero. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn static static bool QCPFinancialData::sortKeyIsMainKey() ++ ++ Since the member \a key is both the data point key coordinate and the data ordering parameter, ++ this method returns true. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::mainKey() const ++ ++ Returns the \a key member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn double QCPFinancialData::mainValue() const ++ ++ Returns the \a open member of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPRange QCPFinancialData::valueRange() const ++ ++ Returns a QCPRange spanning from the \a low to the \a high value of this data point. ++ ++ For a general explanation of what this method is good for in the context of the data container, ++ see the documentation of \ref QCPDataContainer. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with key and all values set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPFinancialData::QCPFinancialData() : ++ key(0), ++ open(0), ++ high(0), ++ low(0), ++ close(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a data point with the specified \a key and OHLC values. ++*/ ++QCPFinancialData::QCPFinancialData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close) : ++ key(key), ++ open(open), ++ high(high), ++ low(low), ++ close(close) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPFinancial ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPFinancial ++ \brief A plottable representing a financial stock chart ++ ++ \image html QCPFinancial.png ++ ++ This plottable represents time series data binned to certain intervals, mainly used for stock ++ charts. The two common representations OHLC (Open-High-Low-Close) bars and Candlesticks can be ++ set via \ref setChartStyle. ++ ++ The data is passed via \ref setData as a set of open/high/low/close values at certain keys ++ (typically times). This means the data must be already binned appropriately. If data is only ++ available as a series of values (e.g. \a price against \a time), you can use the static ++ convenience function \ref timeSeriesToOhlc to generate binned OHLC-data which can then be passed ++ to \ref setData. ++ ++ The width of the OHLC bars/candlesticks can be controlled with \ref setWidth and \ref ++ setWidthType. A typical choice is to set the width type to \ref wtPlotCoords (the default) and ++ the width to (or slightly less than) one time bin interval width. ++ ++ \section qcpfinancial-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ Charts can be either single- or two-colored (\ref setTwoColored). If set to be single-colored, ++ lines are drawn with the plottable's pen (\ref setPen) and fills with the brush (\ref setBrush). ++ ++ If set to two-colored, positive changes of the value during an interval (\a close >= \a open) are ++ represented with a different pen and brush than negative changes (\a close < \a open). These can ++ be configured with \ref setPenPositive, \ref setPenNegative, \ref setBrushPositive, and \ref ++ setBrushNegative. In two-colored mode, the normal plottable pen/brush is ignored. Upon selection ++ however, the normal selected pen/brush (provided by the \ref selectionDecorator) is used, ++ irrespective of whether the chart is single- or two-colored. ++ ++ \section qcpfinancial-usage Usage ++ ++ Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPFinancial is a plottable ++ (QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies ++ (QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.) ++ ++ Usually, you first create an instance: ++ ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-creation-1 ++ which registers it with the QCustomPlot instance of the passed axes. Note that this QCustomPlot ++ instance takes ownership of the plottable, so do not delete it manually but use ++ QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. The newly created plottable can be modified, e.g.: ++ ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-creation-2 ++ Here we have used the static helper method \ref timeSeriesToOhlc, to turn a time-price data ++ series into a 24-hour binned open-high-low-close data series as QCPFinancial uses. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPFinancialDataContainer *QCPFinancial::data() const ++ ++ Returns a pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer. You may ++ use it to directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than using the ++ regular \ref setData or \ref addData methods, in certain situations. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a financial chart which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value ++ axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have ++ the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is ++ printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ The created QCPFinancial is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred from \a ++ keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the QCPFinancial, so do not delete it manually ++ but use QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++*/ ++QCPFinancial::QCPFinancial(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(keyAxis, valueAxis), ++ mChartStyle(csCandlestick), ++ mWidth(0.5), ++ mWidthType(wtPlotCoords), ++ mTwoColored(true), ++ mBrushPositive(QBrush(QColor(50, 160, 0))), ++ mBrushNegative(QBrush(QColor(180, 0, 15))), ++ mPenPositive(QPen(QColor(40, 150, 0))), ++ mPenNegative(QPen(QColor(170, 5, 5))) ++{ ++ mSelectionDecorator->setBrush(QBrush(QColor(160, 160, 255))); ++} ++ ++QCPFinancial::~QCPFinancial() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple QCPFinancials may share the same data container safely. ++ Modifying the data in the container will then affect all financials that share the container. ++ Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data containers wrapped in shared pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, rather use ++ the \ref QCPDataContainer::set method on the financial's data container directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcpfinancial-datasharing-2 ++ ++ \see addData, timeSeriesToOhlc ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a keys, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a ++ close. The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be ++ the size of the smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ \see addData, timeSeriesToOhlc ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &open, const QVector &high, const QVector &low, const QVector &close, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(keys, open, high, low, close, alreadySorted); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which representation style shall be used to display the OHLC data. ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setChartStyle(QCPFinancial::ChartStyle style) ++{ ++ mChartStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the individual bars/candlesticks to \a width in plot key coordinates. ++ ++ A typical choice is to set it to (or slightly less than) one bin interval width. ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setWidth(double width) ++{ ++ mWidth = width; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets how the width of the financial bars is defined. See the documentation of \ref WidthType for ++ an explanation of the possible values for \a widthType. ++ ++ The default value is \ref wtPlotCoords. ++ ++ \see setWidth ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setWidthType(QCPFinancial::WidthType widthType) ++{ ++ mWidthType = widthType; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether this chart shall contrast positive from negative trends per data point by using two ++ separate colors to draw the respective bars/candlesticks. ++ ++ If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref ++ setBrush). ++ ++ \see setPenPositive, setPenNegative, setBrushPositive, setBrushNegative ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setTwoColored(bool twoColored) ++{ ++ mTwoColored = twoColored; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the brush that is used to draw fills ++ of data points with a positive trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close >= open). ++ ++ If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref ++ setBrush). ++ ++ \see setBrushNegative, setPenPositive, setPenNegative ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setBrushPositive(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrushPositive = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the brush that is used to draw fills ++ of data points with a negative trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close < open). ++ ++ If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref ++ setBrush). ++ ++ \see setBrushPositive, setPenNegative, setPenPositive ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setBrushNegative(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrushNegative = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the pen that is used to draw ++ outlines of data points with a positive trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close >= open). ++ ++ If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref ++ setBrush). ++ ++ \see setPenNegative, setBrushPositive, setBrushNegative ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setPenPositive(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPenPositive = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If \ref setTwoColored is set to true, this function controls the pen that is used to draw ++ outlines of data points with a negative trend (i.e. bars/candlesticks with close < open). ++ ++ If \a twoColored is false, the normal plottable's pen and brush are used (\ref setPen, \ref ++ setBrush). ++ ++ \see setPenPositive, setBrushNegative, setBrushPositive ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::setPenNegative(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPenNegative = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided points in \a keys, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a close to the current data. ++ The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the size ++ of the smallest vector. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the passed data points are sorted by \a keys in ascending order, you ++ can set \a alreadySorted to true, to improve performance by saving a sorting run. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++ ++ \see timeSeriesToOhlc ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &open, const QVector &high, const QVector &low, const QVector &close, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (keys.size() != open.size() || open.size() != high.size() || high.size() != low.size() || low.size() != close.size() || close.size() != keys.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keys, open, high, low, close have different sizes:" << keys.size() << open.size() << high.size() << low.size() << close.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(keys.size(), qMin(open.size(), qMin(high.size(), qMin(low.size(), close.size())))); ++ QVector tempData(n); ++ QVector::iterator it = tempData.begin(); ++ const QVector::iterator itEnd = tempData.end(); ++ int i = 0; ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ it->key = keys[i]; ++ it->open = open[i]; ++ it->high = high[i]; ++ it->low = low[i]; ++ it->close = close[i]; ++ ++it; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ mDataContainer->add(tempData, alreadySorted); // don't modify tempData beyond this to prevent copy on write ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided data point as \a key, \a open, \a high, \a low and \a close to the current ++ data. ++ ++ Alternatively, you can also access and modify the data directly via the \ref data method, which ++ returns a pointer to the internal data container. ++ ++ \see timeSeriesToOhlc ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::addData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->add(QCPFinancialData(key, open, high, low, close)); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection QCPFinancial::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return result; ++ ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (rect.intersects(selectionHitBox(it))) ++ result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(it-mDataContainer->constBegin(), it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1), false); ++ } ++ result.simplify(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPFinancial::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ // get visible data range: ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ // perform select test according to configured style: ++ double result = -1; ++ switch (mChartStyle) ++ { ++ case QCPFinancial::csOhlc: ++ result = ohlcSelectTest(pos, visibleBegin, visibleEnd, closestDataPoint); break; ++ case QCPFinancial::csCandlestick: ++ result = candlestickSelectTest(pos, visibleBegin, visibleEnd, closestDataPoint); break; ++ } ++ if (details) ++ { ++ int pointIndex = closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return result; ++ } ++ ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPFinancial::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ QCPRange range = mDataContainer->keyRange(foundRange, inSignDomain); ++ // determine exact range by including width of bars/flags: ++ if (foundRange) ++ { ++ if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdPositive || range.lower-mWidth*0.5 > 0) ++ range.lower -= mWidth*0.5; ++ if (inSignDomain != QCP::sdNegative || range.upper+mWidth*0.5 < 0) ++ range.upper += mWidth*0.5; ++ } ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPFinancial::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->valueRange(foundRange, inSignDomain, inKeyRange); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ A convenience function that converts time series data (\a value against \a time) to OHLC binned ++ data points. The return value can then be passed on to \ref QCPFinancialDataContainer::set(const ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer&). ++ ++ The size of the bins can be controlled with \a timeBinSize in the same units as \a time is given. ++ For example, if the unit of \a time is seconds and single OHLC/Candlesticks should span an hour ++ each, set \a timeBinSize to 3600. ++ ++ \a timeBinOffset allows to control precisely at what \a time coordinate a bin should start. The ++ value passed as \a timeBinOffset doesn't need to be in the range encompassed by the \a time keys. ++ It merely defines the mathematical offset/phase of the bins that will be used to process the ++ data. ++*/ ++QCPFinancialDataContainer QCPFinancial::timeSeriesToOhlc(const QVector &time, const QVector &value, double timeBinSize, double timeBinOffset) ++{ ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer data; ++ int count = qMin(time.size(), value.size()); ++ if (count == 0) ++ return QCPFinancialDataContainer(); ++ ++ QCPFinancialData currentBinData(0, value.first(), value.first(), value.first(), value.first()); ++ int currentBinIndex = qFloor((time.first()-timeBinOffset)/timeBinSize+0.5); ++ for (int i=0; i currentBinData.high) currentBinData.high = value.at(i); ++ if (i == count-1) // last data point is in current bin, finalize bin: ++ { ++ currentBinData.close = value.at(i); ++ currentBinData.key = timeBinOffset+(index)*timeBinSize; ++ data.add(currentBinData); ++ } ++ } else // data point not anymore in current bin, set close of old and open of new bin, and add old to map: ++ { ++ // finalize current bin: ++ currentBinData.close = value.at(i-1); ++ currentBinData.key = timeBinOffset+(index-1)*timeBinSize; ++ data.add(currentBinData); ++ // start next bin: ++ currentBinIndex = index; ++ currentBinData.open = value.at(i); ++ currentBinData.high = value.at(i); ++ currentBinData.low = value.at(i); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ return data; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPFinancial::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ // get visible data range: ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd); ++ ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator begin = visibleBegin; ++ QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator end = visibleEnd; ++ mDataContainer->limitIteratorsToDataRange(begin, end, allSegments.at(i)); ++ if (begin == end) ++ continue; ++ ++ // draw data segment according to configured style: ++ switch (mChartStyle) ++ { ++ case QCPFinancial::csOhlc: ++ drawOhlcPlot(painter, begin, end, isSelectedSegment); break; ++ case QCPFinancial::csCandlestick: ++ drawCandlestickPlot(painter, begin, end, isSelectedSegment); break; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPFinancial::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ painter->setAntialiasing(false); // legend icon especially of csCandlestick looks better without antialiasing ++ if (mChartStyle == csOhlc) ++ { ++ if (mTwoColored) ++ { ++ // draw upper left half icon with positive color: ++ painter->setBrush(mBrushPositive); ++ painter->setPen(mPenPositive); ++ painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.topLeft().toPoint())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ // draw bottom right half icon with negative color: ++ painter->setBrush(mBrushNegative); ++ painter->setPen(mPenNegative); ++ painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.bottomRight().toPoint())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.3, rect.width()*0.2, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.8, rect.height()*0.7).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ } ++ } else if (mChartStyle == csCandlestick) ++ { ++ if (mTwoColored) ++ { ++ // draw upper left half icon with positive color: ++ painter->setBrush(mBrushPositive); ++ painter->setPen(mPenPositive); ++ painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.topLeft().toPoint())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ // draw bottom right half icon with negative color: ++ painter->setBrush(mBrushNegative); ++ painter->setPen(mPenNegative); ++ painter->setClipRegion(QRegion(QPolygon() << rect.bottomLeft().toPoint() << rect.topRight().toPoint() << rect.bottomRight().toPoint())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(0, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.width()*0.75, rect.height()*0.5, rect.width(), rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(rect.width()*0.25, rect.height()*0.25, rect.width()*0.5, rect.height()*0.5).translated(rect.topLeft())); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the data from \a begin to \a end-1 as OHLC bars with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ This method is a helper function for \ref draw. It is used when the chart style is \ref csOhlc. ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::drawOhlcPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected) ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ else if (mTwoColored) ++ painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative); ++ else ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open); ++ double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close); ++ // draw backbone: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low))); ++ // draw open: ++ double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); // sign of this makes sure open/close are on correct sides ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel-pixelWidth, openPixel), QPointF(keyPixel, openPixel)); ++ // draw close: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, closePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+pixelWidth, closePixel)); ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ else if (mTwoColored) ++ painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative); ++ else ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open); ++ double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close); ++ // draw backbone: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel)); ++ // draw open: ++ double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); // sign of this makes sure open/close are on correct sides ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel-pixelWidth), QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel)); ++ // draw close: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel), QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel+pixelWidth)); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Draws the data from \a begin to \a end-1 as Candlesticks with the provided \a painter. ++ ++ This method is a helper function for \ref draw. It is used when the chart style is \ref csCandlestick. ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::drawCandlestickPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected) ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator) ++ { ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ } else if (mTwoColored) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative); ++ painter->setBrush(it->close >= it->open ? mBrushPositive : mBrushNegative); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ } ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open); ++ double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close); ++ // draw high: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)))); ++ // draw low: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)), QPointF(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)))); ++ // draw open-close box: ++ double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(QPointF(keyPixel-pixelWidth, closePixel), QPointF(keyPixel+pixelWidth, openPixel))); ++ } ++ } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it = begin; it != end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (isSelected && mSelectionDecorator) ++ { ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyBrush(painter); ++ } else if (mTwoColored) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(it->close >= it->open ? mPenPositive : mPenNegative); ++ painter->setBrush(it->close >= it->open ? mBrushPositive : mBrushNegative); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ painter->setBrush(mBrush); ++ } ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double openPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->open); ++ double closePixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->close); ++ // draw high: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel)); ++ // draw low: ++ painter->drawLine(QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel), QPointF(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel)); ++ // draw open-close box: ++ double pixelWidth = getPixelWidth(it->key, keyPixel); ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(QPointF(closePixel, keyPixel-pixelWidth), QPointF(openPixel, keyPixel+pixelWidth))); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This function is used to determine the width of the bar at coordinate \a key, according to the ++ specified width (\ref setWidth) and width type (\ref setWidthType). Provide the pixel position of ++ \a key in \a keyPixel (because usually this was already calculated via \ref QCPAxis::coordToPixel ++ when this function is called). ++ ++ It returns the number of pixels the bar extends to higher keys, relative to the \a key ++ coordinate. So with a non-reversed horizontal axis, the return value is positive. With a reversed ++ horizontal axis, the return value is negative. This is important so the open/close flags on the ++ \ref csOhlc bar are drawn to the correct side. ++*/ ++double QCPFinancial::getPixelWidth(double key, double keyPixel) const ++{ ++ double result = 0; ++ switch (mWidthType) ++ { ++ case wtAbsolute: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis) ++ result = mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ break; ++ } ++ case wtAxisRectRatio: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis && mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()) ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ result = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->width()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ else ++ result = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->height()*mWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis.data()->pixelOrientation(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis or axis rect defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ case wtPlotCoords: ++ { ++ if (mKeyAxis) ++ result = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel(key+mWidth*0.5)-keyPixel; ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No key axis defined"; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is a helper function for \ref selectTest. It is used to test for selection when the ++ chart style is \ref csOhlc. It only tests against the data points between \a begin and \a end. ++ ++ Like \ref selectTest, this method returns the shortest distance of \a pos to the graphical ++ representation of the plottable, and \a closestDataPoint will point to the respective data point. ++*/ ++double QCPFinancial::ohlcSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const ++{ ++ closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return -1; } ++ ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ // calculate distance to backbone: ++ double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low))); ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestDataPoint = it; ++ } ++ } ++ } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ // calculate distance to backbone: ++ double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel)); ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestDataPoint = it; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return qSqrt(minDistSqr); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method is a helper function for \ref selectTest. It is used to test for selection when the ++ chart style is \ref csCandlestick. It only tests against the data points between \a begin and \a ++ end. ++ ++ Like \ref selectTest, this method returns the shortest distance of \a pos to the graphical ++ representation of the plottable, and \a closestDataPoint will point to the respective data point. ++*/ ++double QCPFinancial::candlestickSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const ++{ ++ closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return -1; } ++ ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ double currentDistSqr; ++ // determine whether pos is in open-close-box: ++ QCPRange boxKeyRange(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->key+mWidth*0.5); ++ QCPRange boxValueRange(it->close, it->open); ++ double posKey, posValue; ++ pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue); ++ if (boxKeyRange.contains(posKey) && boxValueRange.contains(posValue)) // is in open-close-box ++ { ++ currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } else ++ { ++ // calculate distance to high/low lines: ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double highLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)))); ++ double lowLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low)), QCPVector2D(keyPixel, valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)))); ++ currentDistSqr = qMin(highLineDistSqr, lowLineDistSqr); ++ } ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestDataPoint = it; ++ } ++ } ++ } else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ++ { ++ for (QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ double currentDistSqr; ++ // determine whether pos is in open-close-box: ++ QCPRange boxKeyRange(it->key-mWidth*0.5, it->key+mWidth*0.5); ++ QCPRange boxValueRange(it->close, it->open); ++ double posKey, posValue; ++ pixelsToCoords(pos, posKey, posValue); ++ if (boxKeyRange.contains(posKey) && boxValueRange.contains(posValue)) // is in open-close-box ++ { ++ currentDistSqr = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 * mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } else ++ { ++ // calculate distance to high/low lines: ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double highLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMax(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel)); ++ double lowLineDistSqr = QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low), keyPixel), QCPVector2D(valueAxis->coordToPixel(qMin(it->open, it->close)), keyPixel)); ++ currentDistSqr = qMin(highLineDistSqr, lowLineDistSqr); ++ } ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ closestDataPoint = it; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ return qSqrt(minDistSqr); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ called by the drawing methods to determine which data (key) range is visible at the current key ++ axis range setting, so only that needs to be processed. ++ ++ \a begin returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken into account when ++ plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of the axis rect, \a ++ begin may still be just outside the visible range. ++ ++ \a end returns the iterator just above the highest data point that needs to be taken into ++ account. Same as before, \a end may also lie just outside of the visible range ++ ++ if the plottable contains no data, both \a begin and \a end point to \c constEnd. ++*/ ++void QCPFinancial::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const ++{ ++ if (!mKeyAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis"; ++ begin = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ return; ++ } ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower-mWidth*0.5); // subtract half width of ohlc/candlestick to include partially visible data points ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper+mWidth*0.5); // add half width of ohlc/candlestick to include partially visible data points ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the hit box in pixel coordinates that will be used for data selection with the selection ++ rect (\ref selectTestRect), of the data point given by \a it. ++*/ ++QRectF QCPFinancial::selectionHitBox(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return QRectF(); } ++ ++ double keyPixel = keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key); ++ double highPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->high); ++ double lowPixel = valueAxis->coordToPixel(it->low); ++ double keyWidthPixels = keyPixel-keyAxis->coordToPixel(it->key-mWidth*0.5); ++ if (keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal) ++ return QRectF(keyPixel-keyWidthPixels, highPixel, keyWidthPixels*2, lowPixel-highPixel).normalized(); ++ else ++ return QRectF(highPixel, keyPixel-keyWidthPixels, lowPixel-highPixel, keyWidthPixels*2).normalized(); ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.cpp', size 37210 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPErrorBarsData ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPErrorBarsData ++ \brief Holds the data of one single error bar for QCPErrorBars. ++ ++ The stored data is: ++ \li \a errorMinus: how much the error bar extends towards negative coordinates from the data ++ point position ++ \li \a errorPlus: how much the error bar extends towards positive coordinates from the data point ++ position ++ ++ The container for storing the error bar information is \ref QCPErrorBarsDataContainer. It is a ++ typedef for QVector<\ref QCPErrorBarsData>. ++ ++ \see QCPErrorBarsDataContainer ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an error bar with errors set to zero. ++*/ ++QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData() : ++ errorMinus(0), ++ errorPlus(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an error bar with equal \a error in both negative and positive direction. ++*/ ++QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData(double error) : ++ errorMinus(error), ++ errorPlus(error) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an error bar with negative and positive errors set to \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus, ++ respectively. ++*/ ++QCPErrorBarsData::QCPErrorBarsData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus) : ++ errorMinus(errorMinus), ++ errorPlus(errorPlus) ++{ ++} ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPErrorBars ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPErrorBars ++ \brief A plottable that adds a set of error bars to other plottables. ++ ++ \image html QCPErrorBars.png ++ ++ The \ref QCPErrorBars plottable can be attached to other one-dimensional plottables (e.g. \ref ++ QCPGraph, \ref QCPCurve, \ref QCPBars, etc.) and equips them with error bars. ++ ++ Use \ref setDataPlottable to define for which plottable the \ref QCPErrorBars shall display the ++ error bars. The orientation of the error bars can be controlled with \ref setErrorType. ++ ++ By using \ref setData, you can supply the actual error data, either as symmetric error or ++ plus/minus asymmetric errors. \ref QCPErrorBars only stores the error data. The absolute ++ key/value position of each error bar will be adopted from the configured data plottable. The ++ error data of the \ref QCPErrorBars are associated one-to-one via their index to the data points ++ of the data plottable. You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ Set either of the plus/minus errors to NaN (qQNaN() or ++ std::numeric_limits::quiet_NaN()) to not show the respective error bar on the data point at ++ that index. ++ ++ \section qcperrorbars-appearance Changing the appearance ++ ++ The appearance of the error bars is defined by the pen (\ref setPen), and the width of the ++ whiskers (\ref setWhiskerWidth). Further, the error bar backbones may leave a gap around the data ++ point center to prevent that error bars are drawn too close to or even through scatter points. ++ This gap size can be controlled via \ref setSymbolGap. ++*/ ++ ++/* start of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QSharedPointer QCPErrorBars::data() const ++ ++ Returns a shared pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPErrorBarsDataContainer. You ++ may use it to directly manipulate the error values, which may be more convenient and faster than ++ using the regular \ref setData methods. ++*/ ++ ++/* end of documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs an error bars plottable which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a valueAxis as its value ++ axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot instance and not have ++ the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding message is ++ printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though. ++ ++ It is also important that the \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis are the same for the error bars ++ plottable and the data plottable that the error bars shall be drawn on (\ref setDataPlottable). ++ ++ The created \ref QCPErrorBars is automatically registered with the QCustomPlot instance inferred ++ from \a keyAxis. This QCustomPlot instance takes ownership of the \ref QCPErrorBars, so do not ++ delete it manually but use \ref QCustomPlot::removePlottable() instead. ++*/ ++QCPErrorBars::QCPErrorBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable(keyAxis, valueAxis), ++ mDataContainer(new QVector), ++ mErrorType(etValueError), ++ mWhiskerWidth(9), ++ mSymbolGap(10) ++{ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black, 0)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++} ++ ++QCPErrorBars::~QCPErrorBars() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data container with the provided \a data container. ++ ++ Since a QSharedPointer is used, multiple \ref QCPErrorBars instances may share the same data ++ container safely. Modifying the data in the container will then affect all \ref QCPErrorBars ++ instances that share the container. Sharing can be achieved by simply exchanging the data ++ containers wrapped in shared pointers: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcperrorbars-datasharing-1 ++ ++ If you do not wish to share containers, but create a copy from an existing container, assign the ++ data containers directly: ++ \snippet documentation/doc-code-snippets/mainwindow.cpp qcperrorbars-datasharing-2 ++ (This uses different notation compared with other plottables, because the \ref QCPErrorBars ++ uses a \c QVector as its data container, instead of a \ref QCPDataContainer.) ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setData(QSharedPointer data) ++{ ++ mDataContainer = data; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets symmetrical error values as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated one-to-one ++ by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setData(const QVector &error) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(error); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Sets asymmetrical errors as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors will be ++ associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref ++ setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see addData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setData(const QVector &errorMinus, const QVector &errorPlus) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->clear(); ++ addData(errorMinus, errorPlus); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the data plottable to which the error bars will be applied. The error values specified e.g. ++ via \ref setData will be associated one-to-one by the data point index to the data points of \a ++ plottable. This means that the error bars will adopt the key/value coordinates of the data point ++ with the same index. ++ ++ The passed \a plottable must be a one-dimensional plottable, i.e. it must implement the \ref ++ QCPPlottableInterface1D. Further, it must not be a \ref QCPErrorBars instance itself. If either ++ of these restrictions is violated, a corresponding qDebug output is generated, and the data ++ plottable of this \ref QCPErrorBars instance is set to zero. ++ ++ For proper display, care must also be taken that the key and value axes of the \a plottable match ++ those configured for this \ref QCPErrorBars instance. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setDataPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) ++{ ++ if (plottable && qobject_cast(plottable)) ++ { ++ mDataPlottable = 0; ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set another QCPErrorBars instance as data plottable"; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (plottable && !plottable->interface1D()) ++ { ++ mDataPlottable = 0; ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "passed plottable doesn't implement 1d interface, can't associate with QCPErrorBars"; ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ mDataPlottable = plottable; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets in which orientation the error bars shall appear on the data points. If your data needs both ++ error dimensions, create two \ref QCPErrorBars with different \a type. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setErrorType(ErrorType type) ++{ ++ mErrorType = type; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the width of the whiskers (the short bars at the end of the actual error bar backbones) to ++ \a pixels. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setWhiskerWidth(double pixels) ++{ ++ mWhiskerWidth = pixels; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the gap diameter around the data points that will be left out when drawing the error bar ++ backbones. This gap prevents that error bars are drawn too close to or even through scatter ++ points. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::setSymbolGap(double pixels) ++{ ++ mSymbolGap = pixels; ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds symmetrical error values as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated one-to-one ++ by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see setData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::addData(const QVector &error) ++{ ++ addData(error, error); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds asymmetrical errors as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors will be ++ associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref ++ setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see setData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::addData(const QVector &errorMinus, const QVector &errorPlus) ++{ ++ if (errorMinus.size() != errorPlus.size()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "minus and plus error vectors have different sizes:" << errorMinus.size() << errorPlus.size(); ++ const int n = qMin(errorMinus.size(), errorPlus.size()); ++ mDataContainer->reserve(n); ++ for (int i=0; iappend(QCPErrorBarsData(errorMinus.at(i), errorPlus.at(i))); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds a single symmetrical error bar as specified in \a error. The errors will be associated ++ one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see setData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::addData(double error) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->append(QCPErrorBarsData(error)); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds a single asymmetrical error bar as specified in \a errorMinus and \a errorPlus. The errors ++ will be associated one-to-one by the data point index to the associated data plottable (\ref ++ setDataPlottable). ++ ++ You can directly access and manipulate the error bar data via \ref data. ++ ++ \see setData ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::addData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus) ++{ ++ mDataContainer->append(QCPErrorBarsData(errorMinus, errorPlus)); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++int QCPErrorBars::dataCount() const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->size(); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPErrorBars::dataMainKey(int index) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(index); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPErrorBars::dataSortKey(int index) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataSortKey(index); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPErrorBars::dataMainValue(int index) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(index); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPErrorBars::dataValueRange(int index) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ const double value = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(index); ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size() && mErrorType == etValueError) ++ return QCPRange(value-mDataContainer->at(index).errorMinus, value+mDataContainer->at(index).errorPlus); ++ else ++ return QCPRange(value, value); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPErrorBars::dataPixelPosition(int index) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index); ++ else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++bool QCPErrorBars::sortKeyIsMainKey() const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ return mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey(); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return true; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect ++*/ ++QCPDataSelection QCPErrorBars::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ if (!mDataPlottable) ++ return result; ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return result; ++ ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator visibleBegin, visibleEnd; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(visibleBegin, visibleEnd, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())); ++ ++ QVector backbones, whiskers; ++ for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=visibleBegin; it!=visibleEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ backbones.clear(); ++ whiskers.clear(); ++ getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers); ++ for (int i=0; iconstBegin(), it-mDataContainer->constBegin()+1), false); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ result.simplify(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++int QCPErrorBars::findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return 0; ++ int beginIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findBegin(sortKey, expandedRange); ++ if (beginIndex >= mDataContainer->size()) ++ beginIndex = mDataContainer->size()-1; ++ return beginIndex; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++int QCPErrorBars::findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ if (mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ if (mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return 0; ++ int endIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findEnd(sortKey, expandedRange); ++ if (endIndex > mDataContainer->size()) ++ endIndex = mDataContainer->size(); ++ return endIndex; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no data plottable set"; ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPErrorBars::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if (!mDataPlottable) return -1; ++ ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains(pos.toPoint())) ++ { ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator closestDataPoint = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ double result = pointDistance(pos, closestDataPoint); ++ if (details) ++ { ++ int pointIndex = closestDataPoint-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ details->setValue(QCPDataSelection(QCPDataRange(pointIndex, pointIndex+1))); ++ } ++ return result; ++ } else ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPErrorBars::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ if (!mDataPlottable) return; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) { qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; return; } ++ if (mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) return; ++ ++ // if the sort key isn't the main key, we must check the visibility for each data point/error bar individually ++ // (getVisibleDataBounds applies range restriction, but otherwise can only return full data range): ++ bool checkPointVisibility = !mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey(); ++ ++ // check data validity if flag set: ++#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it; ++ for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it) ++ { ++ if (QCP::isInvalidData(it->errorMinus, it->errorPlus)) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at index" << it-mDataContainer->constBegin() << "invalid." << "Plottable name:" << name(); ++ } ++#endif ++ ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ // loop over and draw segments of unselected/selected data: ++ QList selectedSegments, unselectedSegments, allSegments; ++ getDataSegments(selectedSegments, unselectedSegments); ++ allSegments << unselectedSegments << selectedSegments; ++ QVector backbones, whiskers; ++ for (int i=0; i= unselectedSegments.size(); ++ if (isSelectedSegment && mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->applyPen(painter); ++ else ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ if (painter->pen().capStyle() == Qt::SquareCap) ++ { ++ QPen capFixPen(painter->pen()); ++ capFixPen.setCapStyle(Qt::FlatCap); ++ painter->setPen(capFixPen); ++ } ++ backbones.clear(); ++ whiskers.clear(); ++ for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (!checkPointVisibility || errorBarVisible(it-mDataContainer->constBegin())) ++ getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers); ++ } ++ painter->drawLines(backbones); ++ painter->drawLines(whiskers); ++ } ++ ++ // draw other selection decoration that isn't just line/scatter pens and brushes: ++ if (mSelectionDecorator) ++ mSelectionDecorator->drawDecoration(painter, selection()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPErrorBars::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const ++{ ++ applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(painter); ++ painter->setPen(mPen); ++ if (mErrorType == etValueError && mValueAxis && mValueAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x(), rect.top()+2, rect.center().x(), rect.bottom()-1)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x()-4, rect.top()+2, rect.center().x()+4, rect.top()+2)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.center().x()-4, rect.bottom()-1, rect.center().x()+4, rect.bottom()-1)); ++ } else ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left()+2, rect.center().y(), rect.right()-2, rect.center().y())); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.left()+2, rect.center().y()-4, rect.left()+2, rect.center().y()+4)); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(rect.right()-2, rect.center().y()-4, rect.right()-2, rect.center().y()+4)); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPErrorBars::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain) const ++{ ++ if (!mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ foundRange = false; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++ ++ QCPRange range; ++ bool haveLower = false; ++ bool haveUpper = false; ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it; ++ for (it = mDataContainer->constBegin(); it != mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++it) ++ { ++ if (mErrorType == etValueError) ++ { ++ // error bar doesn't extend in key dimension (except whisker but we ignore that here), so only use data point center ++ const double current = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()); ++ if (qIsNaN(current)) continue; ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } else // mErrorType == etKeyError ++ { ++ const double dataKey = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()); ++ if (qIsNaN(dataKey)) continue; ++ // plus error: ++ double current = dataKey + (qIsNaN(it->errorPlus) ? 0 : it->errorPlus); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ // minus error: ++ current = dataKey - (qIsNaN(it->errorMinus) ? 0 : it->errorMinus); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (haveUpper && !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = range.upper; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } else if (haveLower && !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = range.lower; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper; ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QCPRange QCPErrorBars::getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) const ++{ ++ if (!mDataPlottable) ++ { ++ foundRange = false; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++ ++ QCPRange range; ++ const bool restrictKeyRange = inKeyRange != QCPRange(); ++ bool haveLower = false; ++ bool haveUpper = false; ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey() && restrictKeyRange) ++ { ++ itBegin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+findBegin(inKeyRange.lower); ++ itEnd = mDataContainer->constBegin()+findEnd(inKeyRange.upper); ++ } ++ for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (restrictKeyRange) ++ { ++ const double dataKey = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()); ++ if (dataKey < inKeyRange.lower || dataKey > inKeyRange.upper) ++ continue; ++ } ++ if (mErrorType == etValueError) ++ { ++ const double dataValue = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()); ++ if (qIsNaN(dataValue)) continue; ++ // plus error: ++ double current = dataValue + (qIsNaN(it->errorPlus) ? 0 : it->errorPlus); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ // minus error: ++ current = dataValue - (qIsNaN(it->errorMinus) ? 0 : it->errorMinus); ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } else // mErrorType == etKeyError ++ { ++ // error bar doesn't extend in value dimension (except whisker but we ignore that here), so only use data point center ++ const double current = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainValue(it-mDataContainer->constBegin()); ++ if (qIsNaN(current)) continue; ++ if (inSignDomain == QCP::sdBoth || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdNegative && current < 0) || (inSignDomain == QCP::sdPositive && current > 0)) ++ { ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (haveUpper && !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = range.upper; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } else if (haveLower && !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = range.lower; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper; ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Calculates the lines that make up the error bar belonging to the data point \a it. ++ ++ The resulting lines are added to \a backbones and \a whiskers. The vectors are not cleared, so ++ calling this method with different \a it but the same \a backbones and \a whiskers allows to ++ accumulate lines for multiple data points. ++ ++ This method assumes that \a it is a valid iterator within the bounds of this \ref QCPErrorBars ++ instance and within the bounds of the associated data plottable. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::getErrorBarLines(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it, QVector &backbones, QVector &whiskers) const ++{ ++ if (!mDataPlottable) return; ++ ++ int index = it-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ QPointF centerPixel = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index); ++ if (qIsNaN(centerPixel.x()) || qIsNaN(centerPixel.y())) ++ return; ++ QCPAxis *errorAxis = mErrorType == etValueError ? mValueAxis : mKeyAxis; ++ QCPAxis *orthoAxis = mErrorType == etValueError ? mKeyAxis : mValueAxis; ++ const double centerErrorAxisPixel = errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y(); ++ const double centerOrthoAxisPixel = orthoAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y(); ++ const double centerErrorAxisCoord = errorAxis->pixelToCoord(centerErrorAxisPixel); // depending on plottable, this might be different from just mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataMainKey/Value ++ const double symbolGap = mSymbolGap*0.5*errorAxis->pixelOrientation(); ++ // plus error: ++ double errorStart, errorEnd; ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->errorPlus)) ++ { ++ errorStart = centerErrorAxisPixel+symbolGap; ++ errorEnd = errorAxis->coordToPixel(centerErrorAxisCoord+it->errorPlus); ++ if (errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ if ((errorStart > errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed()) ++ backbones.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd)); ++ whiskers.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd)); ++ } else ++ { ++ if ((errorStart < errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed()) ++ backbones.append(QLineF(errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel)); ++ whiskers.append(QLineF(errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5)); ++ } ++ } ++ // minus error: ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->errorMinus)) ++ { ++ errorStart = centerErrorAxisPixel-symbolGap; ++ errorEnd = errorAxis->coordToPixel(centerErrorAxisCoord-it->errorMinus); ++ if (errorAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical) ++ { ++ if ((errorStart < errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed()) ++ backbones.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd)); ++ whiskers.append(QLineF(centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd)); ++ } else ++ { ++ if ((errorStart > errorEnd) != errorAxis->rangeReversed()) ++ backbones.append(QLineF(errorStart, centerOrthoAxisPixel, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel)); ++ whiskers.append(QLineF(errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5, errorEnd, centerOrthoAxisPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5)); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ This method outputs the currently visible data range via \a begin and \a end. The returned range ++ will also never exceed \a rangeRestriction. ++ ++ Since error bars with type \ref etKeyError may extend to arbitrarily positive and negative key ++ coordinates relative to their data point key, this method checks all outer error bars whether ++ they truly don't reach into the visible portion of the axis rect, by calling \ref ++ errorBarVisible. On the other hand error bars with type \ref etValueError that are associated ++ with data plottables whose sort key is equal to the main key (see \ref qcpdatacontainer-datatype ++ "QCPDataContainer DataType") can be handled very efficiently by finding the visible range of ++ error bars through binary search (\ref QCPPlottableInterface1D::findBegin and \ref ++ QCPPlottableInterface1D::findEnd). ++ ++ If the plottable's sort key is not equal to the main key, this method returns the full data ++ range, only restricted by \a rangeRestriction. Drawing optimization then has to be done on a ++ point-by-point basis in the \ref draw method. ++*/ ++void QCPErrorBars::getVisibleDataBounds(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const ++{ ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data(); ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis = mValueAxis.data(); ++ if (!keyAxis || !valueAxis) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis"; ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ begin = end; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!mDataPlottable || rangeRestriction.isEmpty()) ++ { ++ end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ begin = end; ++ return; ++ } ++ if (!mDataPlottable->interface1D()->sortKeyIsMainKey()) ++ { ++ // if the sort key isn't the main key, it's not possible to find a contiguous range of visible ++ // data points, so this method then only applies the range restriction and otherwise returns ++ // the full data range. Visibility checks must be done on a per-datapoin-basis during drawing ++ QCPDataRange dataRange(0, mDataContainer->size()); ++ dataRange = dataRange.bounded(rangeRestriction); ++ begin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.begin(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.end(); ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ // get visible data range via interface from data plottable, and then restrict to available error data points: ++ const int n = qMin(mDataContainer->size(), mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataCount()); ++ int beginIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findBegin(keyAxis->range().lower); ++ int endIndex = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->findEnd(keyAxis->range().upper); ++ int i = beginIndex; ++ while (i > 0 && i < n && i > rangeRestriction.begin()) ++ { ++ if (errorBarVisible(i)) ++ beginIndex = i; ++ --i; ++ } ++ i = endIndex; ++ while (i >= 0 && i < n && i < rangeRestriction.end()) ++ { ++ if (errorBarVisible(i)) ++ endIndex = i+1; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ QCPDataRange dataRange(beginIndex, endIndex); ++ dataRange = dataRange.bounded(rangeRestriction.bounded(QCPDataRange(0, mDataContainer->size()))); ++ begin = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.begin(); ++ end = mDataContainer->constBegin()+dataRange.end(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Calculates the minimum distance in pixels the error bars' representation has from the given \a ++ pixelPoint. This is used to determine whether the error bar was clicked or not, e.g. in \ref ++ selectTest. The closest data point to \a pixelPoint is returned in \a closestData. ++*/ ++double QCPErrorBars::pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const ++{ ++ closestData = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (!mDataPlottable || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1.0; ++ ++ QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator begin, end; ++ getVisibleDataBounds(begin, end, QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())); ++ ++ // calculate minimum distances to error backbones (whiskers are ignored for speed) and find closestData iterator: ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ QVector backbones, whiskers; ++ for (QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ getErrorBarLines(it, backbones, whiskers); ++ for (int i=0; i &selectedSegments, QList &unselectedSegments) const ++{ ++ selectedSegments.clear(); ++ unselectedSegments.clear(); ++ if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // stWhole selection type draws the entire plottable with selected style if mSelection isn't empty ++ { ++ if (selected()) ++ selectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()); ++ else ++ unselectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()); ++ } else ++ { ++ QCPDataSelection sel(selection()); ++ sel.simplify(); ++ selectedSegments = sel.dataRanges(); ++ unselectedSegments = sel.inverse(QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())).dataRanges(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns whether the error bar at the specified \a index is visible within the current key axis ++ range. ++ ++ This method assumes for performance reasons without checking that the key axis, the value axis, ++ and the data plottable (\ref setDataPlottable) are not zero and that \a index is within valid ++ bounds of this \ref QCPErrorBars instance and the bounds of the data plottable. ++*/ ++bool QCPErrorBars::errorBarVisible(int index) const ++{ ++ QPointF centerPixel = mDataPlottable->interface1D()->dataPixelPosition(index); ++ const double centerKeyPixel = mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? centerPixel.x() : centerPixel.y(); ++ if (qIsNaN(centerKeyPixel)) ++ return false; ++ ++ double keyMin, keyMax; ++ if (mErrorType == etKeyError) ++ { ++ const double centerKey = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel); ++ const double errorPlus = mDataContainer->at(index).errorPlus; ++ const double errorMinus = mDataContainer->at(index).errorMinus; ++ keyMax = centerKey+(qIsNaN(errorPlus) ? 0 : errorPlus); ++ keyMin = centerKey-(qIsNaN(errorMinus) ? 0 : errorMinus); ++ } else // mErrorType == etValueError ++ { ++ keyMax = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel+mWhiskerWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ keyMin = mKeyAxis->pixelToCoord(centerKeyPixel-mWhiskerWidth*0.5*mKeyAxis->pixelOrientation()); ++ } ++ return ((keyMax > mKeyAxis->range().lower) && (keyMin < mKeyAxis->range().upper)); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns whether \a line intersects (or is contained in) \a pixelRect. ++ ++ \a line is assumed to be either perfectly horizontal or perfectly vertical, as is the case for ++ error bar lines. ++*/ ++bool QCPErrorBars::rectIntersectsLine(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QLineF &line) const ++{ ++ if (pixelRect.left() > line.x1() && pixelRect.left() > line.x2()) ++ return false; ++ else if (pixelRect.right() < line.x1() && pixelRect.right() < line.x2()) ++ return false; ++ else if (pixelRect.top() > line.y1() && pixelRect.top() > line.y2()) ++ return false; ++ else if (pixelRect.bottom() < line.y1() && pixelRect.bottom() < line.y2()) ++ return false; ++ else ++ return true; ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-straightline.cpp', size 7592 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemStraightLine ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemStraightLine ++ \brief A straight line that spans infinitely in both directions ++ ++ \image html QCPItemStraightLine.png "Straight line example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a point1 and \a point2, which define the straight line. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a straight line item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemStraightLine::QCPItemStraightLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ point1(createPosition(QLatin1String("point1"))), ++ point2(createPosition(QLatin1String("point2"))) ++{ ++ point1->setCoords(0, 0); ++ point2->setCoords(1, 1); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemStraightLine::~QCPItemStraightLine() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemStraightLine::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemStraightLine::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemStraightLine::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ return QCPVector2D(pos).distanceToStraightLine(point1->pixelPosition(), point2->pixelPosition()-point1->pixelPosition()); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemStraightLine::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QCPVector2D start(point1->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D end(point2->pixelPosition()); ++ // get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect: ++ double clipPad = mainPen().widthF(); ++ QLineF line = getRectClippedStraightLine(start, end-start, clipRect().adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad)); ++ // paint visible segment, if existent: ++ if (!line.isNull()) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->drawLine(line); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the section of the straight line defined by \a base and direction vector \a ++ vec, that is visible in the specified \a rect. ++ ++ This is a helper function for \ref draw. ++*/ ++QLineF QCPItemStraightLine::getRectClippedStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &base, const QCPVector2D &vec, const QRect &rect) const ++{ ++ double bx, by; ++ double gamma; ++ QLineF result; ++ if (vec.x() == 0 && vec.y() == 0) ++ return result; ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull(vec.x())) // line is vertical ++ { ++ // check top of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width()) ++ result.setLine(bx+gamma, rect.top(), bx+gamma, rect.bottom()); // no need to check bottom because we know line is vertical ++ } else if (qFuzzyIsNull(vec.y())) // line is horizontal ++ { ++ // check left of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height()) ++ result.setLine(rect.left(), by+gamma, rect.right(), by+gamma); // no need to check right because we know line is horizontal ++ } else // line is skewed ++ { ++ QList pointVectors; ++ // check top of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by)); ++ // check bottom of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.bottom(); ++ gamma = base.x()-bx + (by-base.y())*vec.x()/vec.y(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by)); ++ // check left of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma)); ++ // check right of rect: ++ bx = rect.right(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ gamma = base.y()-by + (bx-base.x())*vec.y()/vec.x(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma)); ++ ++ // evaluate points: ++ if (pointVectors.size() == 2) ++ { ++ result.setPoints(pointVectors.at(0).toPointF(), pointVectors.at(1).toPointF()); ++ } else if (pointVectors.size() > 2) ++ { ++ // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance: ++ double distSqrMax = 0; ++ QCPVector2D pv1, pv2; ++ for (int i=0; i distSqrMax) ++ { ++ pv1 = pointVectors.at(i); ++ pv2 = pointVectors.at(k); ++ distSqrMax = distSqr; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ result.setPoints(pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF()); ++ } ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the ++ item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemStraightLine::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-straightline.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-line.cpp', size 8498 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemLine ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemLine ++ \brief A line from one point to another ++ ++ \image html QCPItemLine.png "Line example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the line. ++ ++ With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles, e.g. to create an arrow. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a line item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemLine::QCPItemLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ start(createPosition(QLatin1String("start"))), ++ end(createPosition(QLatin1String("end"))) ++{ ++ start->setCoords(0, 0); ++ end->setCoords(1, 1); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemLine::~QCPItemLine() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemLine::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemLine::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end position. ++ ++ Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify ++ a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode ++ ++ \see setTail ++*/ ++void QCPItemLine::setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head) ++{ ++ mHead = head; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start position. ++ ++ Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify ++ a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode ++ ++ \see setHead ++*/ ++void QCPItemLine::setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail) ++{ ++ mTail = tail; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemLine::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ return qSqrt(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(start->pixelPosition(), end->pixelPosition())); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemLine::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QCPVector2D startVec(start->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D endVec(end->pixelPosition()); ++ if (qFuzzyIsNull((startVec-endVec).lengthSquared())) ++ return; ++ // get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect: ++ double clipPad = qMax(mHead.boundingDistance(), mTail.boundingDistance()); ++ clipPad = qMax(clipPad, (double)mainPen().widthF()); ++ QLineF line = getRectClippedLine(startVec, endVec, clipRect().adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad)); ++ // paint visible segment, if existent: ++ if (!line.isNull()) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->drawLine(line); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::SolidPattern); ++ if (mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ mTail.draw(painter, startVec, startVec-endVec); ++ if (mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ mHead.draw(painter, endVec, endVec-startVec); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the section of the line defined by \a start and \a end, that is visible in the specified ++ \a rect. ++ ++ This is a helper function for \ref draw. ++*/ ++QLineF QCPItemLine::getRectClippedLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end, const QRect &rect) const ++{ ++ bool containsStart = rect.contains(start.x(), start.y()); ++ bool containsEnd = rect.contains(end.x(), end.y()); ++ if (containsStart && containsEnd) ++ return QLineF(start.toPointF(), end.toPointF()); ++ ++ QCPVector2D base = start; ++ QCPVector2D vec = end-start; ++ double bx, by; ++ double gamma, mu; ++ QLineF result; ++ QList pointVectors; ++ ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vec.y())) // line is not horizontal ++ { ++ // check top of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ mu = (by-base.y())/vec.y(); ++ if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1) ++ { ++ gamma = base.x()-bx + mu*vec.x(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by)); ++ } ++ // check bottom of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.bottom(); ++ mu = (by-base.y())/vec.y(); ++ if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1) ++ { ++ gamma = base.x()-bx + mu*vec.x(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx+gamma, by)); ++ } ++ } ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(vec.x())) // line is not vertical ++ { ++ // check left of rect: ++ bx = rect.left(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ mu = (bx-base.x())/vec.x(); ++ if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1) ++ { ++ gamma = base.y()-by + mu*vec.y(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma)); ++ } ++ // check right of rect: ++ bx = rect.right(); ++ by = rect.top(); ++ mu = (bx-base.x())/vec.x(); ++ if (mu >= 0 && mu <= 1) ++ { ++ gamma = base.y()-by + mu*vec.y(); ++ if (gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height()) ++ pointVectors.append(QCPVector2D(bx, by+gamma)); ++ } ++ } ++ ++ if (containsStart) ++ pointVectors.append(start); ++ if (containsEnd) ++ pointVectors.append(end); ++ ++ // evaluate points: ++ if (pointVectors.size() == 2) ++ { ++ result.setPoints(pointVectors.at(0).toPointF(), pointVectors.at(1).toPointF()); ++ } else if (pointVectors.size() > 2) ++ { ++ // line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there. single out the point pair with greatest distance: ++ double distSqrMax = 0; ++ QCPVector2D pv1, pv2; ++ for (int i=0; i distSqrMax) ++ { ++ pv1 = pointVectors.at(i); ++ pv2 = pointVectors.at(k); ++ distSqrMax = distSqr; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ result.setPoints(pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF()); ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the ++ item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemLine::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-line.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-curve.cpp', size 7159 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemCurve ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemCurve ++ \brief A curved line from one point to another ++ ++ \image html QCPItemCurve.png "Curve example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has four positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the line, and two ++ control points which define the direction the line exits from the start and the direction from ++ which it approaches the end: \a startDir and \a endDir. ++ ++ With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles, e.g. to create an ++ arrow. ++ ++ Often it is desirable for the control points to stay at fixed relative positions to the start/end ++ point. This can be achieved by setting the parent anchor e.g. of \a startDir simply to \a start, ++ and then specify the desired pixel offset with QCPItemPosition::setCoords on \a startDir. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a curve item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemCurve::QCPItemCurve(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ start(createPosition(QLatin1String("start"))), ++ startDir(createPosition(QLatin1String("startDir"))), ++ endDir(createPosition(QLatin1String("endDir"))), ++ end(createPosition(QLatin1String("end"))) ++{ ++ start->setCoords(0, 0); ++ startDir->setCoords(0.5, 0); ++ endDir->setCoords(0, 0.5); ++ end->setCoords(1, 1); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemCurve::~QCPItemCurve() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemCurve::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemCurve::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end position. ++ ++ Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify ++ a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode ++ ++ \see setTail ++*/ ++void QCPItemCurve::setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head) ++{ ++ mHead = head; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start position. ++ ++ Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly specify ++ a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode ++ ++ \see setHead ++*/ ++void QCPItemCurve::setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail) ++{ ++ mTail = tail; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemCurve::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QPointF startVec(start->pixelPosition()); ++ QPointF startDirVec(startDir->pixelPosition()); ++ QPointF endDirVec(endDir->pixelPosition()); ++ QPointF endVec(end->pixelPosition()); ++ ++ QPainterPath cubicPath(startVec); ++ cubicPath.cubicTo(startDirVec, endDirVec, endVec); ++ ++ QPolygonF polygon = cubicPath.toSubpathPolygons().first(); ++ QCPVector2D p(pos); ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ for (int i=1; ipixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D startDirVec(startDir->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D endDirVec(endDir->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D endVec(end->pixelPosition()); ++ if ((endVec-startVec).length() > 1e10) // too large curves cause crash ++ return; ++ ++ QPainterPath cubicPath(startVec.toPointF()); ++ cubicPath.cubicTo(startDirVec.toPointF(), endDirVec.toPointF(), endVec.toPointF()); ++ ++ // paint visible segment, if existent: ++ QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF()); ++ QRect cubicRect = cubicPath.controlPointRect().toRect(); ++ if (cubicRect.isEmpty()) // may happen when start and end exactly on same x or y position ++ cubicRect.adjust(0, 0, 1, 1); ++ if (clip.intersects(cubicRect)) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->drawPath(cubicPath); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::SolidPattern); ++ if (mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ mTail.draw(painter, startVec, M_PI-cubicPath.angleAtPercent(0)/180.0*M_PI); ++ if (mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone) ++ mHead.draw(painter, endVec, -cubicPath.angleAtPercent(1)/180.0*M_PI); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the ++ item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemCurve::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-curve.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-rect.cpp', size 6479 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemRect ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemRect ++ \brief A rectangle ++ ++ \image html QCPItemRect.png "Rectangle example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rectangle. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a rectangle item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemRect::QCPItemRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))), ++ bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))), ++ top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)), ++ topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)), ++ right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)), ++ bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)), ++ bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)), ++ left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)) ++{ ++ topLeft->setCoords(0, 1); ++ bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue,2)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++} ++ ++QCPItemRect::~QCPItemRect() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen, setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemRect::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemRect::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle. To disable filling, set \a brush to ++ Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setSelectedBrush, setPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemRect::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle when selected. To disable filling, set \a ++ brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemRect::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mSelectedBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemRect::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition()).normalized(); ++ bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0; ++ return rectDistance(rect, pos, filledRect); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemRect::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition(); ++ QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition(); ++ if (p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint()) ++ return; ++ QRectF rect = QRectF(p1, p2).normalized(); ++ double clipPad = mainPen().widthF(); ++ QRectF boundingRect = rect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad); ++ if (boundingRect.intersects(clipRect())) // only draw if bounding rect of rect item is visible in cliprect ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->setBrush(mainBrush()); ++ painter->drawRect(rect); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPItemRect::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition()); ++ switch (anchorId) ++ { ++ case aiTop: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5; ++ case aiTopRight: return rect.topRight(); ++ case aiRight: return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottom: return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottomLeft: return rect.bottomLeft(); ++ case aiLeft: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5; ++ } ++ ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemRect::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item ++ is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is. ++*/ ++QBrush QCPItemRect::mainBrush() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-rect.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-text.cpp', size 13338 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemText ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemText ++ \brief A text label ++ ++ \image html QCPItemText.png "Text example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ Its position is defined by the member \a position and the setting of \ref setPositionAlignment. ++ The latter controls which part of the text rect shall be aligned with \a position. ++ ++ The text alignment itself (i.e. left, center, right) can be controlled with \ref ++ setTextAlignment. ++ ++ The text may be rotated around the \a position point with \ref setRotation. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a text item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemText::QCPItemText(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ position(createPosition(QLatin1String("position"))), ++ topLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topLeft"), aiTopLeft)), ++ top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)), ++ topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)), ++ right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)), ++ bottomRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomRight"), aiBottomRight)), ++ bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)), ++ bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)), ++ left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)), ++ mText(QLatin1String("text")), ++ mPositionAlignment(Qt::AlignCenter), ++ mTextAlignment(Qt::AlignTop|Qt::AlignHCenter), ++ mRotation(0) ++{ ++ position->setCoords(0, 0); ++ ++ setPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ setSelectedPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setColor(Qt::black); ++ setSelectedColor(Qt::blue); ++} ++ ++QCPItemText::~QCPItemText() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color of the text. ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the color of the text that will be used when the item is selected. ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setSelectedColor(const QColor &color) ++{ ++ mSelectedColor = color; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text. To disable the ++ border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen. ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen, setBrush, setPadding ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text, when the item is ++ selected. To disable the border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text. To disable the ++ background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setSelectedBrush, setPen, setPadding ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text, when the item is selected. To disable the ++ background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mSelectedBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font of the text. ++ ++ \see setSelectedFont, setColor ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the font of the text that will be used when the item is selected. ++ ++ \see setFont ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setSelectedFont(const QFont &font) ++{ ++ mSelectedFont = font; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the text that will be displayed. Multi-line texts are supported by inserting a line break ++ character, e.g. '\n'. ++ ++ \see setFont, setColor, setTextAlignment ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setText(const QString &text) ++{ ++ mText = text; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets which point of the text rect shall be aligned with \a position. ++ ++ Examples: ++ \li If \a alignment is Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignTop, the text will be positioned such ++ that the top of the text rect will be horizontally centered on \a position. ++ \li If \a alignment is Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignBottom, \a position will indicate the ++ bottom left corner of the text rect. ++ ++ If you want to control the alignment of (multi-lined) text within the text rect, use \ref ++ setTextAlignment. ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setPositionAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment) ++{ ++ mPositionAlignment = alignment; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Controls how (multi-lined) text is aligned inside the text rect (typically Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignCenter or Qt::AlignRight). ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setTextAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment) ++{ ++ mTextAlignment = alignment; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the angle in degrees by which the text (and the text rectangle, if visible) will be rotated ++ around \a position. ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setRotation(double degrees) ++{ ++ mRotation = degrees; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the distance between the border of the text rectangle and the text. The appearance (and ++ visibility) of the text rectangle can be controlled with \ref setPen and \ref setBrush. ++*/ ++void QCPItemText::setPadding(const QMargins &padding) ++{ ++ mPadding = padding; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemText::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ // The rect may be rotated, so we transform the actual clicked pos to the rotated ++ // coordinate system, so we can use the normal rectDistance function for non-rotated rects: ++ QPointF positionPixels(position->pixelPosition()); ++ QTransform inputTransform; ++ inputTransform.translate(positionPixels.x(), positionPixels.y()); ++ inputTransform.rotate(-mRotation); ++ inputTransform.translate(-positionPixels.x(), -positionPixels.y()); ++ QPointF rotatedPos = inputTransform.map(pos); ++ QFontMetrics fontMetrics(mFont); ++ QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText); ++ QRect textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom()); ++ QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(positionPixels, textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment); ++ textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint()); ++ ++ return rectDistance(textBoxRect, rotatedPos, true); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemText::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QPointF pos(position->pixelPosition()); ++ QTransform transform = painter->transform(); ++ transform.translate(pos.x(), pos.y()); ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(mRotation)) ++ transform.rotate(mRotation); ++ painter->setFont(mainFont()); ++ QRect textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText); ++ QRect textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom()); ++ QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(QPointF(0, 0), textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation ++ textRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint()+QPoint(mPadding.left(), mPadding.top())); ++ textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint()); ++ double clipPad = mainPen().widthF(); ++ QRect boundingRect = textBoxRect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad); ++ if (transform.mapRect(boundingRect).intersects(painter->transform().mapRect(clipRect()))) ++ { ++ painter->setTransform(transform); ++ if ((mainBrush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && mainBrush().color().alpha() != 0) || ++ (mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0)) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->setBrush(mainBrush()); ++ painter->drawRect(textBoxRect); ++ } ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ painter->setPen(QPen(mainColor())); ++ painter->drawText(textRect, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText); ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPItemText::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ // get actual rect points (pretty much copied from draw function): ++ QPointF pos(position->pixelPosition()); ++ QTransform transform; ++ transform.translate(pos.x(), pos.y()); ++ if (!qFuzzyIsNull(mRotation)) ++ transform.rotate(mRotation); ++ QFontMetrics fontMetrics(mainFont()); ++ QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect(0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip|mTextAlignment, mText); ++ QRectF textBoxRect = textRect.adjusted(-mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom()); ++ QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint(QPointF(0, 0), textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation ++ textBoxRect.moveTopLeft(textPos.toPoint()); ++ QPolygonF rectPoly = transform.map(QPolygonF(textBoxRect)); ++ ++ switch (anchorId) ++ { ++ case aiTopLeft: return rectPoly.at(0); ++ case aiTop: return (rectPoly.at(0)+rectPoly.at(1))*0.5; ++ case aiTopRight: return rectPoly.at(1); ++ case aiRight: return (rectPoly.at(1)+rectPoly.at(2))*0.5; ++ case aiBottomRight: return rectPoly.at(2); ++ case aiBottom: return (rectPoly.at(2)+rectPoly.at(3))*0.5; ++ case aiBottomLeft: return rectPoly.at(3); ++ case aiLeft: return (rectPoly.at(3)+rectPoly.at(0))*0.5; ++ } ++ ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the point that must be given to the QPainter::drawText function (which expects the top ++ left point of the text rect), according to the position \a pos, the text bounding box \a rect and ++ the requested \a positionAlignment. ++ ++ For example, if \a positionAlignment is Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignBottom the returned point ++ will be shifted upward by the height of \a rect, starting from \a pos. So if the text is finally ++ drawn at that point, the lower left corner of the resulting text rect is at \a pos. ++*/ ++QPointF QCPItemText::getTextDrawPoint(const QPointF &pos, const QRectF &rect, Qt::Alignment positionAlignment) const ++{ ++ if (positionAlignment == 0 || positionAlignment == (Qt::AlignLeft|Qt::AlignTop)) ++ return pos; ++ ++ QPointF result = pos; // start at top left ++ if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignHCenter)) ++ result.rx() -= rect.width()/2.0; ++ else if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignRight)) ++ result.rx() -= rect.width(); ++ if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignVCenter)) ++ result.ry() -= rect.height()/2.0; ++ else if (positionAlignment.testFlag(Qt::AlignBottom)) ++ result.ry() -= rect.height(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the font that should be used for drawing text. Returns mFont when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedFont when it is. ++*/ ++QFont QCPItemText::mainFont() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the color that should be used for drawing text. Returns mColor when the item is not ++ selected and mSelectedColor when it is. ++*/ ++QColor QCPItemText::mainColor() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedColor : mColor; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemText::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item ++ is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is. ++*/ ++QBrush QCPItemText::mainBrush() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-text.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-ellipse.cpp', size 7863 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemEllipse ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemEllipse ++ \brief An ellipse ++ ++ \image html QCPItemEllipse.png "Ellipse example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rect the ellipse will be drawn in. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates an ellipse item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemEllipse::QCPItemEllipse(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))), ++ bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))), ++ topLeftRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topLeftRim"), aiTopLeftRim)), ++ top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)), ++ topRightRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRightRim"), aiTopRightRim)), ++ right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)), ++ bottomRightRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomRightRim"), aiBottomRightRim)), ++ bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)), ++ bottomLeftRim(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeftRim"), aiBottomLeftRim)), ++ left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)), ++ center(createAnchor(QLatin1String("center"), aiCenter)) ++{ ++ topLeft->setCoords(0, 1); ++ bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)); ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++} ++ ++QCPItemEllipse::~QCPItemEllipse() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen, setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemEllipse::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse. To disable filling, set \a brush to ++ Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setSelectedBrush, setPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemEllipse::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse when selected. To disable filling, set \a ++ brush to Qt::NoBrush. ++ ++ \see setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mSelectedBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemEllipse::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition(); ++ QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition(); ++ QPointF center((p1+p2)/2.0); ++ double a = qAbs(p1.x()-p2.x())/2.0; ++ double b = qAbs(p1.y()-p2.y())/2.0; ++ double x = pos.x()-center.x(); ++ double y = pos.y()-center.y(); ++ ++ // distance to border: ++ double c = 1.0/qSqrt(x*x/(a*a)+y*y/(b*b)); ++ double result = qAbs(c-1)*qSqrt(x*x+y*y); ++ // filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit: ++ if (result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0) ++ { ++ if (x*x/(a*a) + y*y/(b*b) <= 1) ++ result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemEllipse::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition(); ++ QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition(); ++ if (p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint()) ++ return; ++ QRectF ellipseRect = QRectF(p1, p2).normalized(); ++ QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF()); ++ if (ellipseRect.intersects(clip)) // only draw if bounding rect of ellipse is visible in cliprect ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->setBrush(mainBrush()); ++#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS ++ try // drawEllipse sometimes throws exceptions if ellipse is too big ++ { ++#endif ++ painter->drawEllipse(ellipseRect); ++#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS ++ } catch (...) ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item too large for memory, setting invisible"; ++ setVisible(false); ++ } ++#endif ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPItemEllipse::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ QRectF rect = QRectF(topLeft->pixelPosition(), bottomRight->pixelPosition()); ++ switch (anchorId) ++ { ++ case aiTopLeftRim: return rect.center()+(rect.topLeft()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2); ++ case aiTop: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5; ++ case aiTopRightRim: return rect.center()+(rect.topRight()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2); ++ case aiRight: return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottomRightRim: return rect.center()+(rect.bottomRight()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2); ++ case aiBottom: return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottomLeftRim: return rect.center()+(rect.bottomLeft()-rect.center())*1/qSqrt(2); ++ case aiLeft: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5; ++ case aiCenter: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ } ++ ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemEllipse::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item ++ is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is. ++*/ ++QBrush QCPItemEllipse::mainBrush() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-ellipse.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-pixmap.cpp', size 10615 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemPixmap ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemPixmap ++ \brief An arbitrary pixmap ++ ++ \image html QCPItemPixmap.png "Pixmap example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rectangle the pixmap will ++ be drawn in. Depending on the scale setting (\ref setScaled), the pixmap will be either scaled to ++ fit the rectangle or be drawn aligned to the topLeft position. ++ ++ If scaling is enabled and \a topLeft is further to the bottom/right than \a bottomRight (as shown ++ on the right side of the example image), the pixmap will be flipped in the respective ++ orientations. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a rectangle item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemPixmap::QCPItemPixmap(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ topLeft(createPosition(QLatin1String("topLeft"))), ++ bottomRight(createPosition(QLatin1String("bottomRight"))), ++ top(createAnchor(QLatin1String("top"), aiTop)), ++ topRight(createAnchor(QLatin1String("topRight"), aiTopRight)), ++ right(createAnchor(QLatin1String("right"), aiRight)), ++ bottom(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottom"), aiBottom)), ++ bottomLeft(createAnchor(QLatin1String("bottomLeft"), aiBottomLeft)), ++ left(createAnchor(QLatin1String("left"), aiLeft)), ++ mScaled(false), ++ mScaledPixmapInvalidated(true), ++ mAspectRatioMode(Qt::KeepAspectRatio), ++ mTransformationMode(Qt::SmoothTransformation) ++{ ++ topLeft->setCoords(0, 1); ++ bottomRight->setCoords(1, 0); ++ ++ setPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemPixmap::~QCPItemPixmap() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pixmap that will be displayed. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPixmap::setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap) ++{ ++ mPixmap = pixmap; ++ mScaledPixmapInvalidated = true; ++ if (mPixmap.isNull()) ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "pixmap is null"; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the pixmap will be scaled to fit the rectangle defined by the \a topLeft and \a ++ bottomRight positions. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPixmap::setScaled(bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode, Qt::TransformationMode transformationMode) ++{ ++ mScaled = scaled; ++ mAspectRatioMode = aspectRatioMode; ++ mTransformationMode = transformationMode; ++ mScaledPixmapInvalidated = true; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap. ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen, setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemPixmap::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemPixmap::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemPixmap::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ return rectDistance(getFinalRect(), pos, true); ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemPixmap::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ bool flipHorz = false; ++ bool flipVert = false; ++ QRect rect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert); ++ double clipPad = mainPen().style() == Qt::NoPen ? 0 : mainPen().widthF(); ++ QRect boundingRect = rect.adjusted(-clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad); ++ if (boundingRect.intersects(clipRect())) ++ { ++ updateScaledPixmap(rect, flipHorz, flipVert); ++ painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), mScaled ? mScaledPixmap : mPixmap); ++ QPen pen = mainPen(); ++ if (pen.style() != Qt::NoPen) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(pen); ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ painter->drawRect(rect); ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPItemPixmap::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ bool flipHorz; ++ bool flipVert; ++ QRect rect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert); ++ // we actually want denormal rects (negative width/height) here, so restore ++ // the flipped state: ++ if (flipHorz) ++ rect.adjust(rect.width(), 0, -rect.width(), 0); ++ if (flipVert) ++ rect.adjust(0, rect.height(), 0, -rect.height()); ++ ++ switch (anchorId) ++ { ++ case aiTop: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.topRight())*0.5; ++ case aiTopRight: return rect.topRight(); ++ case aiRight: return (rect.topRight()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottom: return (rect.bottomLeft()+rect.bottomRight())*0.5; ++ case aiBottomLeft: return rect.bottomLeft(); ++ case aiLeft: return (rect.topLeft()+rect.bottomLeft())*0.5;; ++ } ++ ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Creates the buffered scaled image (\a mScaledPixmap) to fit the specified \a finalRect. The ++ parameters \a flipHorz and \a flipVert control whether the resulting image shall be flipped ++ horizontally or vertically. (This is used when \a topLeft is further to the bottom/right than \a ++ bottomRight.) ++ ++ This function only creates the scaled pixmap when the buffered pixmap has a different size than ++ the expected result, so calling this function repeatedly, e.g. in the \ref draw function, does ++ not cause expensive rescaling every time. ++ ++ If scaling is disabled, sets mScaledPixmap to a null QPixmap. ++*/ ++void QCPItemPixmap::updateScaledPixmap(QRect finalRect, bool flipHorz, bool flipVert) ++{ ++ if (mPixmap.isNull()) ++ return; ++ ++ if (mScaled) ++ { ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ double devicePixelRatio = mPixmap.devicePixelRatio(); ++#else ++ double devicePixelRatio = 1.0; ++#endif ++ if (finalRect.isNull()) ++ finalRect = getFinalRect(&flipHorz, &flipVert); ++ if (mScaledPixmapInvalidated || finalRect.size() != mScaledPixmap.size()/devicePixelRatio) ++ { ++ mScaledPixmap = mPixmap.scaled(finalRect.size()*devicePixelRatio, mAspectRatioMode, mTransformationMode); ++ if (flipHorz || flipVert) ++ mScaledPixmap = QPixmap::fromImage(mScaledPixmap.toImage().mirrored(flipHorz, flipVert)); ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ mScaledPixmap.setDevicePixelRatio(devicePixelRatio); ++#endif ++ } ++ } else if (!mScaledPixmap.isNull()) ++ mScaledPixmap = QPixmap(); ++ mScaledPixmapInvalidated = false; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the final (tight) rect the pixmap is drawn in, depending on the current item positions ++ and scaling settings. ++ ++ The output parameters \a flippedHorz and \a flippedVert return whether the pixmap should be drawn ++ flipped horizontally or vertically in the returned rect. (The returned rect itself is always ++ normalized, i.e. the top left corner of the rect is actually further to the top/left than the ++ bottom right corner). This is the case when the item position \a topLeft is further to the ++ bottom/right than \a bottomRight. ++ ++ If scaling is disabled, returns a rect with size of the original pixmap and the top left corner ++ aligned with the item position \a topLeft. The position \a bottomRight is ignored. ++*/ ++QRect QCPItemPixmap::getFinalRect(bool *flippedHorz, bool *flippedVert) const ++{ ++ QRect result; ++ bool flipHorz = false; ++ bool flipVert = false; ++ QPoint p1 = topLeft->pixelPosition().toPoint(); ++ QPoint p2 = bottomRight->pixelPosition().toPoint(); ++ if (p1 == p2) ++ return QRect(p1, QSize(0, 0)); ++ if (mScaled) ++ { ++ QSize newSize = QSize(p2.x()-p1.x(), p2.y()-p1.y()); ++ QPoint topLeft = p1; ++ if (newSize.width() < 0) ++ { ++ flipHorz = true; ++ newSize.rwidth() *= -1; ++ topLeft.setX(p2.x()); ++ } ++ if (newSize.height() < 0) ++ { ++ flipVert = true; ++ newSize.rheight() *= -1; ++ topLeft.setY(p2.y()); ++ } ++ QSize scaledSize = mPixmap.size(); ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ scaledSize /= mPixmap.devicePixelRatio(); ++ scaledSize.scale(newSize*mPixmap.devicePixelRatio(), mAspectRatioMode); ++#else ++ scaledSize.scale(newSize, mAspectRatioMode); ++#endif ++ result = QRect(topLeft, scaledSize); ++ } else ++ { ++#ifdef QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++ result = QRect(p1, mPixmap.size()/mPixmap.devicePixelRatio()); ++#else ++ result = QRect(p1, mPixmap.size()); ++#endif ++ } ++ if (flippedHorz) ++ *flippedHorz = flipHorz; ++ if (flippedVert) ++ *flippedVert = flipVert; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemPixmap::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-pixmap.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-tracer.cpp', size 14624 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemTracer ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemTracer ++ \brief Item that sticks to QCPGraph data points ++ ++ \image html QCPItemTracer.png "Tracer example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ The tracer can be connected with a QCPGraph via \ref setGraph. Then it will automatically adopt ++ the coordinate axes of the graph and update its \a position to be on the graph's data. This means ++ the key stays controllable via \ref setGraphKey, but the value will follow the graph data. If a ++ QCPGraph is connected, note that setting the coordinates of the tracer item directly via \a ++ position will have no effect because they will be overridden in the next redraw (this is when the ++ coordinate update happens). ++ ++ If the specified key in \ref setGraphKey is outside the key bounds of the graph, the tracer will ++ stay at the corresponding end of the graph. ++ ++ With \ref setInterpolating you may specify whether the tracer may only stay exactly on data ++ points or whether it interpolates data points linearly, if given a key that lies between two data ++ points of the graph. ++ ++ The tracer has different visual styles, see \ref setStyle. It is also possible to make the tracer ++ have no own visual appearance (set the style to \ref tsNone), and just connect other item ++ positions to the tracer \a position (used as an anchor) via \ref ++ QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor. ++ ++ \note The tracer position is only automatically updated upon redraws. So when the data of the ++ graph changes and immediately afterwards (without a redraw) the position coordinates of the ++ tracer are retrieved, they will not reflect the updated data of the graph. In this case \ref ++ updatePosition must be called manually, prior to reading the tracer coordinates. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a tracer item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemTracer::QCPItemTracer(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ position(createPosition(QLatin1String("position"))), ++ mSize(6), ++ mStyle(tsCrosshair), ++ mGraph(0), ++ mGraphKey(0), ++ mInterpolating(false) ++{ ++ position->setCoords(0, 0); ++ ++ setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setSelectedBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemTracer::~QCPItemTracer() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen, setBrush ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer ++ ++ \see setSelectedBrush, setPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer, when selected. ++ ++ \see setBrush, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush) ++{ ++ mSelectedBrush = brush; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the size of the tracer in pixels, if the style supports setting a size (e.g. \ref tsSquare ++ does, \ref tsCrosshair does not). ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setSize(double size) ++{ ++ mSize = size; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the style/visual appearance of the tracer. ++ ++ If you only want to use the tracer \a position as an anchor for other items, set \a style to ++ \ref tsNone. ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setStyle(QCPItemTracer::TracerStyle style) ++{ ++ mStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the QCPGraph this tracer sticks to. The tracer \a position will be set to type ++ QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords and the axes will be set to the axes of \a graph. ++ ++ To free the tracer from any graph, set \a graph to 0. The tracer \a position can then be placed ++ freely like any other item position. This is the state the tracer will assume when its graph gets ++ deleted while still attached to it. ++ ++ \see setGraphKey ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setGraph(QCPGraph *graph) ++{ ++ if (graph) ++ { ++ if (graph->parentPlot() == mParentPlot) ++ { ++ position->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords); ++ position->setAxes(graph->keyAxis(), graph->valueAxis()); ++ mGraph = graph; ++ updatePosition(); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph isn't in same QCustomPlot instance as this item"; ++ } else ++ { ++ mGraph = 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the key of the graph's data point the tracer will be positioned at. This is the only free ++ coordinate of a tracer when attached to a graph. ++ ++ Depending on \ref setInterpolating, the tracer will be either positioned on the data point ++ closest to \a key, or will stay exactly at \a key and interpolate the value linearly. ++ ++ \see setGraph, setInterpolating ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setGraphKey(double key) ++{ ++ mGraphKey = key; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the value of the graph's data points shall be interpolated, when positioning the ++ tracer. ++ ++ If \a enabled is set to false and a key is given with \ref setGraphKey, the tracer is placed on ++ the data point of the graph which is closest to the key, but which is not necessarily exactly ++ there. If \a enabled is true, the tracer will be positioned exactly at the specified key, and ++ the appropriate value will be interpolated from the graph's data points linearly. ++ ++ \see setGraph, setGraphKey ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::setInterpolating(bool enabled) ++{ ++ mInterpolating = enabled; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemTracer::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QPointF center(position->pixelPosition()); ++ double w = mSize/2.0; ++ QRect clip = clipRect(); ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case tsNone: return -1; ++ case tsPlus: ++ { ++ if (clipRect().intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ return qSqrt(qMin(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(center+QPointF(-w, 0), center+QPointF(w, 0)), ++ QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(center+QPointF(0, -w), center+QPointF(0, w)))); ++ break; ++ } ++ case tsCrosshair: ++ { ++ return qSqrt(qMin(QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(clip.left(), center.y()), QCPVector2D(clip.right(), center.y())), ++ QCPVector2D(pos).distanceSquaredToLine(QCPVector2D(center.x(), clip.top()), QCPVector2D(center.x(), clip.bottom())))); ++ } ++ case tsCircle: ++ { ++ if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ { ++ // distance to border: ++ double centerDist = QCPVector2D(center-pos).length(); ++ double circleLine = w; ++ double result = qAbs(centerDist-circleLine); ++ // filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit: ++ if (result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0) ++ { ++ if (centerDist <= circleLine) ++ result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()*0.99; ++ } ++ return result; ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case tsSquare: ++ { ++ if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ { ++ QRectF rect = QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)); ++ bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0; ++ return rectDistance(rect, pos, filledRect); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemTracer::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ updatePosition(); ++ if (mStyle == tsNone) ++ return; ++ ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ painter->setBrush(mainBrush()); ++ QPointF center(position->pixelPosition()); ++ double w = mSize/2.0; ++ QRect clip = clipRect(); ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case tsNone: return; ++ case tsPlus: ++ { ++ if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ { ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(center+QPointF(-w, 0), center+QPointF(w, 0))); ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(center+QPointF(0, -w), center+QPointF(0, w))); ++ } ++ break; ++ } ++ case tsCrosshair: ++ { ++ if (center.y() > clip.top() && center.y() < clip.bottom()) ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(clip.left(), center.y(), clip.right(), center.y())); ++ if (center.x() > clip.left() && center.x() < clip.right()) ++ painter->drawLine(QLineF(center.x(), clip.top(), center.x(), clip.bottom())); ++ break; ++ } ++ case tsCircle: ++ { ++ if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ painter->drawEllipse(center, w, w); ++ break; ++ } ++ case tsSquare: ++ { ++ if (clip.intersects(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w)).toRect())) ++ painter->drawRect(QRectF(center-QPointF(w, w), center+QPointF(w, w))); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ If the tracer is connected with a graph (\ref setGraph), this function updates the tracer's \a ++ position to reside on the graph data, depending on the configured key (\ref setGraphKey). ++ ++ It is called automatically on every redraw and normally doesn't need to be called manually. One ++ exception is when you want to read the tracer coordinates via \a position and are not sure that ++ the graph's data (or the tracer key with \ref setGraphKey) hasn't changed since the last redraw. ++ In that situation, call this function before accessing \a position, to make sure you don't get ++ out-of-date coordinates. ++ ++ If there is no graph set on this tracer, this function does nothing. ++*/ ++void QCPItemTracer::updatePosition() ++{ ++ if (mGraph) ++ { ++ if (mParentPlot->hasPlottable(mGraph)) ++ { ++ if (mGraph->data()->size() > 1) ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator first = mGraph->data()->constBegin(); ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator last = mGraph->data()->constEnd()-1; ++ if (mGraphKey <= first->key) ++ position->setCoords(first->key, first->value); ++ else if (mGraphKey >= last->key) ++ position->setCoords(last->key, last->value); ++ else ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->findBegin(mGraphKey); ++ if (it != mGraph->data()->constEnd()) // mGraphKey is not exactly on last iterator, but somewhere between iterators ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator prevIt = it; ++ ++it; // won't advance to constEnd because we handled that case (mGraphKey >= last->key) before ++ if (mInterpolating) ++ { ++ // interpolate between iterators around mGraphKey: ++ double slope = 0; ++ if (!qFuzzyCompare((double)it->key, (double)prevIt->key)) ++ slope = (it->value-prevIt->value)/(it->key-prevIt->key); ++ position->setCoords(mGraphKey, (mGraphKey-prevIt->key)*slope+prevIt->value); ++ } else ++ { ++ // find iterator with key closest to mGraphKey: ++ if (mGraphKey < (prevIt->key+it->key)*0.5) ++ position->setCoords(prevIt->key, prevIt->value); ++ else ++ position->setCoords(it->key, it->value); ++ } ++ } else // mGraphKey is exactly on last iterator (should actually be caught when comparing first/last keys, but this is a failsafe for fp uncertainty) ++ position->setCoords(it->key, it->value); ++ } ++ } else if (mGraph->data()->size() == 1) ++ { ++ QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->constBegin(); ++ position->setCoords(it->key, it->value); ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph has no data"; ++ } else ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph not contained in QCustomPlot instance (anymore)"; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the item is not selected ++ and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemTracer::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns mBrush when the item ++ is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is. ++*/ ++QBrush QCPItemTracer::mainBrush() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-tracer.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-bracket.cpp', size 10687 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPItemBracket ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPItemBracket ++ \brief A bracket for referencing/highlighting certain parts in the plot. ++ ++ \image html QCPItemBracket.png "Bracket example. Blue dotted circles are anchors, solid blue discs are positions." ++ ++ It has two positions, \a left and \a right, which define the span of the bracket. If \a left is ++ actually farther to the left than \a right, the bracket is opened to the bottom, as shown in the ++ example image. ++ ++ The bracket supports multiple styles via \ref setStyle. The length, i.e. how far the bracket ++ stretches away from the embraced span, can be controlled with \ref setLength. ++ ++ \image html QCPItemBracket-length.png ++
Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for styles \ref ++ bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for reference.
++ ++ It provides an anchor \a center, to allow connection of other items, e.g. an arrow (QCPItemLine ++ or QCPItemCurve) or a text label (QCPItemText), to the bracket. ++*/ ++ ++/*! ++ Creates a bracket item and sets default values. ++ ++ The created item is automatically registered with \a parentPlot. This QCustomPlot instance takes ++ ownership of the item, so do not delete it manually but use QCustomPlot::removeItem() instead. ++*/ ++QCPItemBracket::QCPItemBracket(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) : ++ QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot), ++ left(createPosition(QLatin1String("left"))), ++ right(createPosition(QLatin1String("right"))), ++ center(createAnchor(QLatin1String("center"), aiCenter)), ++ mLength(8), ++ mStyle(bsCalligraphic) ++{ ++ left->setCoords(0, 0); ++ right->setCoords(1, 1); ++ ++ setPen(QPen(Qt::black)); ++ setSelectedPen(QPen(Qt::blue, 2)); ++} ++ ++QCPItemBracket::~QCPItemBracket() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket. ++ ++ Note that when the style is \ref bsCalligraphic, only the color will be taken from the pen, the ++ stroke and width are ignored. To change the apparent stroke width of a calligraphic bracket, use ++ \ref setLength, which has a similar effect. ++ ++ \see setSelectedPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemBracket::setPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket when selected ++ ++ \see setPen, setSelected ++*/ ++void QCPItemBracket::setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen) ++{ ++ mSelectedPen = pen; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the \a length in pixels how far the bracket extends in the direction towards the embraced ++ span of the bracket (i.e. perpendicular to the left-right-direction) ++ ++ \image html QCPItemBracket-length.png ++
Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for styles \ref ++ bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for reference.
++*/ ++void QCPItemBracket::setLength(double length) ++{ ++ mLength = length; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets the style of the bracket, i.e. the shape/visual appearance. ++ ++ \see setPen ++*/ ++void QCPItemBracket::setStyle(QCPItemBracket::BracketStyle style) ++{ ++ mStyle = style; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++double QCPItemBracket::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ Q_UNUSED(details) ++ if (onlySelectable && !mSelectable) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QCPVector2D p(pos); ++ QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition()); ++ if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint()) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5; ++ QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength; ++ QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec; ++ ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case QCPItemBracket::bsSquare: ++ case QCPItemBracket::bsRound: ++ { ++ double a = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec, centerVec+widthVec); ++ double b = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec, centerVec-widthVec); ++ double c = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec, centerVec+widthVec); ++ return qSqrt(qMin(qMin(a, b), c)); ++ } ++ case QCPItemBracket::bsCurly: ++ case QCPItemBracket::bsCalligraphic: ++ { ++ double a = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15, centerVec+lengthVec*0.3); ++ double b = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec*0.7, centerVec-widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15); ++ double c = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15, centerVec+lengthVec*0.3); ++ double d = p.distanceSquaredToLine(centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec*0.7, centerVec+widthVec*0.75+lengthVec*0.15); ++ return qSqrt(qMin(qMin(a, b), qMin(c, d))); ++ } ++ } ++ return -1; ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++void QCPItemBracket::draw(QCPPainter *painter) ++{ ++ QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition()); ++ if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint()) ++ return; ++ ++ QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5; ++ QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength; ++ QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec; ++ ++ QPolygon boundingPoly; ++ boundingPoly << leftVec.toPoint() << rightVec.toPoint() ++ << (rightVec-lengthVec).toPoint() << (leftVec-lengthVec).toPoint(); ++ QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted(-mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF()); ++ if (clip.intersects(boundingPoly.boundingRect())) ++ { ++ painter->setPen(mainPen()); ++ switch (mStyle) ++ { ++ case bsSquare: ++ { ++ painter->drawLine((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec).toPointF()); ++ painter->drawLine((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ painter->drawLine((centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsRound: ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ QPainterPath path; ++ path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ painter->drawPath(path); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsCurly: ++ { ++ painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush); ++ QPainterPath path; ++ path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec+0.4*widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec-0.4*widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ painter->drawPath(path); ++ break; ++ } ++ case bsCalligraphic: ++ { ++ painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen); ++ painter->setBrush(QBrush(mainPen().color())); ++ QPainterPath path; ++ path.moveTo((centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec+0.4*widthVec+0.8*lengthVec).toPointF(), centerVec.toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec-0.4*widthVec+0.8*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.8).toPointF(), (centerVec-widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec-widthVec-lengthVec*0.5).toPointF(), (centerVec-0.2*widthVec+1.2*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+lengthVec*0.2).toPointF()); ++ path.cubicTo((centerVec+0.2*widthVec+1.2*lengthVec).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec-lengthVec*0.5).toPointF(), (centerVec+widthVec+lengthVec).toPointF()); ++ ++ painter->drawPath(path); ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++/* inherits documentation from base class */ ++QPointF QCPItemBracket::anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const ++{ ++ QCPVector2D leftVec(left->pixelPosition()); ++ QCPVector2D rightVec(right->pixelPosition()); ++ if (leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint()) ++ return leftVec.toPointF(); ++ ++ QCPVector2D widthVec = (rightVec-leftVec)*0.5; ++ QCPVector2D lengthVec = widthVec.perpendicular().normalized()*mLength; ++ QCPVector2D centerVec = (rightVec+leftVec)*0.5-lengthVec; ++ ++ switch (anchorId) ++ { ++ case aiCenter: ++ return centerVec.toPointF(); ++ } ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId; ++ return QPointF(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the ++ item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is. ++*/ ++QPen QCPItemBracket::mainPen() const ++{ ++ return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen; ++} ++/* end of 'src/items/item-bracket.cpp' */ ++ ++ +diff --git a/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.h b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.h +new file mode 100644 +index 0000000..0a71418 +--- /dev/null ++++ b/tools/thermal_monitor/qcustomplot/qcustomplot.h +@@ -0,0 +1,6628 @@ ++/*************************************************************************** ++** ** ++** QCustomPlot, an easy to use, modern plotting widget for Qt ** ++** Copyright (C) 2011-2016 Emanuel Eichhammer ** ++** ** ++** This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify ** ++** it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by ** ++** the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or ** ++** (at your option) any later version. ** ++** ** ++** This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, ** ++** but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of ** ++** MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the ** ++** GNU General Public License for more details. ** ++** ** ++** You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License ** ++** along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. ** ++** ** ++**************************************************************************** ++** Author: Emanuel Eichhammer ** ++** Website/Contact: http://www.qcustomplot.com/ ** ++** Date: 13.09.16 ** ++** Version: 2.0.0-beta ** ++****************************************************************************/ ++ ++#ifndef QCUSTOMPLOT_H ++#define QCUSTOMPLOT_H ++ ++#include ++ ++// some Qt version/configuration dependent macros to include or exclude certain code paths: ++#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_OPENGL ++# if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) ++# define QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++# else ++# define QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++# endif ++# if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 3, 0) ++# define QCP_OPENGL_OFFSCREENSURFACE ++# endif ++#endif ++ ++#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 4, 0) ++ #define QCP_DEVICEPIXELRATIO_SUPPORTED ++#endif ++ ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#include ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++# include ++# include ++# ifdef QCP_OPENGL_OFFSCREENSURFACE ++# include ++# else ++# include ++# endif ++#endif ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++# include ++#endif ++#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK(5, 0, 0) ++# include ++# include ++# include ++# include ++#else ++# include ++# include ++# include ++#endif ++ ++class QCPPainter; ++class QCustomPlot; ++class QCPLayerable; ++class QCPLayoutElement; ++class QCPLayout; ++class QCPAxis; ++class QCPAxisRect; ++class QCPAxisPainterPrivate; ++class QCPAbstractPlottable; ++class QCPGraph; ++class QCPAbstractItem; ++class QCPPlottableInterface1D; ++class QCPLegend; ++class QCPItemPosition; ++class QCPLayer; ++class QCPAbstractLegendItem; ++class QCPSelectionRect; ++class QCPColorMap; ++class QCPColorScale; ++class QCPBars; ++ ++/* including file 'src/global.h', size 16131 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++// decl definitions for shared library compilation/usage: ++#if defined(QCUSTOMPLOT_COMPILE_LIBRARY) ++# define QCP_LIB_DECL Q_DECL_EXPORT ++#elif defined(QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_LIBRARY) ++# define QCP_LIB_DECL Q_DECL_IMPORT ++#else ++# define QCP_LIB_DECL ++#endif ++ ++// define empty macro for Q_DECL_OVERRIDE if it doesn't exist (Qt < 5) ++#ifndef Q_DECL_OVERRIDE ++# define Q_DECL_OVERRIDE ++#endif ++ ++/*! ++ The QCP Namespace contains general enums, QFlags and functions used throughout the QCustomPlot ++ library. ++ ++ It provides QMetaObject-based reflection of its enums and flags via \a QCP::staticMetaObject. ++*/ ++#ifndef Q_MOC_RUN ++namespace QCP { ++#else ++class QCP { // when in moc-run, make it look like a class, so we get Q_GADGET, Q_ENUMS/Q_FLAGS features in namespace ++ Q_GADGET ++ Q_ENUMS(ExportPen) ++ Q_ENUMS(ResolutionUnit) ++ Q_ENUMS(SignDomain) ++ Q_ENUMS(MarginSide) ++ Q_FLAGS(MarginSides) ++ Q_ENUMS(AntialiasedElement) ++ Q_FLAGS(AntialiasedElements) ++ Q_ENUMS(PlottingHint) ++ Q_FLAGS(PlottingHints) ++ Q_ENUMS(Interaction) ++ Q_FLAGS(Interactions) ++ Q_ENUMS(SelectionRectMode) ++ Q_ENUMS(SelectionType) ++public: ++#endif ++ ++/*! ++ Defines the different units in which the image resolution can be specified in the export ++ functions. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::savePng, QCustomPlot::saveJpg, QCustomPlot::saveBmp, QCustomPlot::saveRastered ++*/ ++enum ResolutionUnit { ruDotsPerMeter ///< Resolution is given in dots per meter (dpm) ++ ,ruDotsPerCentimeter ///< Resolution is given in dots per centimeter (dpcm) ++ ,ruDotsPerInch ///< Resolution is given in dots per inch (DPI/PPI) ++ }; ++ ++/*! ++ Defines how cosmetic pens (pens with numerical width 0) are handled during export. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::savePdf ++*/ ++enum ExportPen { epNoCosmetic ///< Cosmetic pens are converted to pens with pixel width 1 when exporting ++ ,epAllowCosmetic ///< Cosmetic pens are exported normally (e.g. in PDF exports, cosmetic pens always appear as 1 pixel on screen, independent of viewer zoom level) ++ }; ++ ++/*! ++ Represents negative and positive sign domain, e.g. for passing to \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::getKeyRange and \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::getValueRange. ++ ++ This is primarily needed when working with logarithmic axis scales, since only one of the sign ++ domains can be visible at a time. ++*/ ++enum SignDomain { sdNegative ///< The negative sign domain, i.e. numbers smaller than zero ++ ,sdBoth ///< Both sign domains, including zero, i.e. all numbers ++ ,sdPositive ///< The positive sign domain, i.e. numbers greater than zero ++ }; ++ ++/*! ++ Defines the sides of a rectangular entity to which margins can be applied. ++ ++ \see QCPLayoutElement::setAutoMargins, QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins ++*/ ++enum MarginSide { msLeft = 0x01 ///< 0x01 left margin ++ ,msRight = 0x02 ///< 0x02 right margin ++ ,msTop = 0x04 ///< 0x04 top margin ++ ,msBottom = 0x08 ///< 0x08 bottom margin ++ ,msAll = 0xFF ///< 0xFF all margins ++ ,msNone = 0x00 ///< 0x00 no margin ++ }; ++Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(MarginSides, MarginSide) ++ ++/*! ++ Defines what objects of a plot can be forcibly drawn antialiased/not antialiased. If an object is ++ neither forcibly drawn antialiased nor forcibly drawn not antialiased, it is up to the respective ++ element how it is drawn. Typically it provides a \a setAntialiased function for this. ++ ++ \c AntialiasedElements is a flag of or-combined elements of this enum type. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements, QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements ++*/ ++enum AntialiasedElement { aeAxes = 0x0001 ///< 0x0001 Axis base line and tick marks ++ ,aeGrid = 0x0002 ///< 0x0002 Grid lines ++ ,aeSubGrid = 0x0004 ///< 0x0004 Sub grid lines ++ ,aeLegend = 0x0008 ///< 0x0008 Legend box ++ ,aeLegendItems = 0x0010 ///< 0x0010 Legend items ++ ,aePlottables = 0x0020 ///< 0x0020 Main lines of plottables ++ ,aeItems = 0x0040 ///< 0x0040 Main lines of items ++ ,aeScatters = 0x0080 ///< 0x0080 Scatter symbols of plottables (excluding scatter symbols of type ssPixmap) ++ ,aeFills = 0x0100 ///< 0x0100 Borders of fills (e.g. under or between graphs) ++ ,aeZeroLine = 0x0200 ///< 0x0200 Zero-lines, see \ref QCPGrid::setZeroLinePen ++ ,aeOther = 0x8000 ///< 0x8000 Other elements that don't fit into any of the existing categories ++ ,aeAll = 0xFFFF ///< 0xFFFF All elements ++ ,aeNone = 0x0000 ///< 0x0000 No elements ++ }; ++Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(AntialiasedElements, AntialiasedElement) ++ ++/*! ++ Defines plotting hints that control various aspects of the quality and speed of plotting. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints ++*/ ++enum PlottingHint { phNone = 0x000 ///< 0x000 No hints are set ++ ,phFastPolylines = 0x001 ///< 0x001 Graph/Curve lines are drawn with a faster method. This reduces the quality especially of the line segment ++ ///< joins, thus is most effective for pen sizes larger than 1. It is only used for solid line pens. ++ ,phImmediateRefresh = 0x002 ///< 0x002 causes an immediate repaint() instead of a soft update() when QCustomPlot::replot() is called with parameter \ref QCustomPlot::rpRefreshHint. ++ ///< This is set by default to prevent the plot from freezing on fast consecutive replots (e.g. user drags ranges with mouse). ++ ,phCacheLabels = 0x004 ///< 0x004 axis (tick) labels will be cached as pixmaps, increasing replot performance. ++ }; ++Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(PlottingHints, PlottingHint) ++ ++/*! ++ Defines the mouse interactions possible with QCustomPlot. ++ ++ \c Interactions is a flag of or-combined elements of this enum type. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setInteractions ++*/ ++enum Interaction { iRangeDrag = 0x001 ///< 0x001 Axis ranges are draggable (see \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes) ++ ,iRangeZoom = 0x002 ///< 0x002 Axis ranges are zoomable with the mouse wheel (see \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes) ++ ,iMultiSelect = 0x004 ///< 0x004 The user can select multiple objects by holding the modifier set by \ref QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier while clicking ++ ,iSelectPlottables = 0x008 ///< 0x008 Plottables are selectable (e.g. graphs, curves, bars,... see QCPAbstractPlottable) ++ ,iSelectAxes = 0x010 ///< 0x010 Axes are selectable (or parts of them, see QCPAxis::setSelectableParts) ++ ,iSelectLegend = 0x020 ///< 0x020 Legends are selectable (or their child items, see QCPLegend::setSelectableParts) ++ ,iSelectItems = 0x040 ///< 0x040 Items are selectable (Rectangles, Arrows, Textitems, etc. see \ref QCPAbstractItem) ++ ,iSelectOther = 0x080 ///< 0x080 All other objects are selectable (e.g. your own derived layerables, other layout elements,...) ++ }; ++Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(Interactions, Interaction) ++ ++/*! ++ Defines the behaviour of the selection rect. ++ ++ \see QCustomPlot::setSelectionRectMode, QCustomPlot::selectionRect, QCPSelectionRect ++*/ ++enum SelectionRectMode { srmNone ///< The selection rect is disabled, and all mouse events are forwarded to the underlying objects, e.g. for axis range dragging ++ ,srmZoom ///< When dragging the mouse, a selection rect becomes active. Upon releasing, the axes that are currently set as range zoom axes (\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes) will have their ranges zoomed accordingly. ++ ,srmSelect ///< When dragging the mouse, a selection rect becomes active. Upon releasing, plottable data points that were within the selection rect are selected, if the plottable's selectability setting permits. (See \ref dataselection "data selection mechanism" for details.) ++ ,srmCustom ///< When dragging the mouse, a selection rect becomes active. It is the programmer's responsibility to connect according slots to the selection rect's signals (e.g. \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted) in order to process the user interaction. ++ }; ++ ++/*! ++ Defines the different ways a plottable can be selected. These images show the effect of the ++ different selection types, when the indicated selection rect was dragged: ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
\image html selectiontype-none.png stNone\image html selectiontype-whole.png stWhole\image html selectiontype-singledata.png stSingleData\image html selectiontype-datarange.png stDataRange\image html selectiontype-multipledataranges.png stMultipleDataRanges
++
++ ++ \see QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable, QCPDataSelection::enforceType ++*/ ++enum SelectionType { stNone ///< The plottable is not selectable ++ ,stWhole ///< Selection behaves like \ref stMultipleDataRanges, but if there are any data points selected, the entire plottable is drawn as selected. ++ ,stSingleData ///< One individual data point can be selected at a time ++ ,stDataRange ///< Multiple contiguous data points (a data range) can be selected ++ ,stMultipleDataRanges ///< Any combination of data points/ranges can be selected ++ }; ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns whether the specified \a value is considered an invalid data value for plottables (i.e. ++ is \e nan or \e +/-inf). This function is used to check data validity upon replots, when the ++ compiler flag \c QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA is set. ++*/ ++inline bool isInvalidData(double value) ++{ ++ return qIsNaN(value) || qIsInf(value); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ \overload ++ ++ Checks two arguments instead of one. ++*/ ++inline bool isInvalidData(double value1, double value2) ++{ ++ return isInvalidData(value1) || isInvalidData(value2); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Sets the specified \a side of \a margins to \a value ++ ++ \see getMarginValue ++*/ ++inline void setMarginValue(QMargins &margins, QCP::MarginSide side, int value) ++{ ++ switch (side) ++ { ++ case QCP::msLeft: margins.setLeft(value); break; ++ case QCP::msRight: margins.setRight(value); break; ++ case QCP::msTop: margins.setTop(value); break; ++ case QCP::msBottom: margins.setBottom(value); break; ++ case QCP::msAll: margins = QMargins(value, value, value, value); break; ++ default: break; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Returns the value of the specified \a side of \a margins. If \a side is \ref QCP::msNone or ++ \ref QCP::msAll, returns 0. ++ ++ \see setMarginValue ++*/ ++inline int getMarginValue(const QMargins &margins, QCP::MarginSide side) ++{ ++ switch (side) ++ { ++ case QCP::msLeft: return margins.left(); ++ case QCP::msRight: return margins.right(); ++ case QCP::msTop: return margins.top(); ++ case QCP::msBottom: return margins.bottom(); ++ default: break; ++ } ++ return 0; ++} ++ ++ ++extern const QMetaObject staticMetaObject; // in moc-run we create a static meta object for QCP "fake" object. This line is the link to it via QCP::staticMetaObject in normal operation as namespace ++ ++} // end of namespace QCP ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCP::AntialiasedElements) ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCP::PlottingHints) ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCP::MarginSides) ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCP::Interactions) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::ExportPen) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::ResolutionUnit) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::SignDomain) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::MarginSide) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::AntialiasedElement) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::PlottingHint) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::Interaction) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::SelectionRectMode) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCP::SelectionType) ++ ++/* end of 'src/global.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/vector2d.h', size 4928 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPVector2D ++{ ++public: ++ QCPVector2D(); ++ QCPVector2D(double x, double y); ++ QCPVector2D(const QPoint &point); ++ QCPVector2D(const QPointF &point); ++ ++ // getters: ++ double x() const { return mX; } ++ double y() const { return mY; } ++ double &rx() { return mX; } ++ double &ry() { return mY; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setX(double x) { mX = x; } ++ void setY(double y) { mY = y; } ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ double length() const { return qSqrt(mX*mX+mY*mY); } ++ double lengthSquared() const { return mX*mX+mY*mY; } ++ QPoint toPoint() const { return QPoint(mX, mY); } ++ QPointF toPointF() const { return QPointF(mX, mY); } ++ ++ bool isNull() const { return qIsNull(mX) && qIsNull(mY); } ++ void normalize(); ++ QCPVector2D normalized() const; ++ QCPVector2D perpendicular() const { return QCPVector2D(-mY, mX); } ++ double dot(const QCPVector2D &vec) const { return mX*vec.mX+mY*vec.mY; } ++ double distanceSquaredToLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end) const; ++ double distanceSquaredToLine(const QLineF &line) const; ++ double distanceToStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &base, const QCPVector2D &direction) const; ++ ++ QCPVector2D &operator*=(double factor); ++ QCPVector2D &operator/=(double divisor); ++ QCPVector2D &operator+=(const QCPVector2D &vector); ++ QCPVector2D &operator-=(const QCPVector2D &vector); ++ ++private: ++ // property members: ++ double mX, mY; ++ ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator*(double factor, const QCPVector2D &vec); ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator*(const QCPVector2D &vec, double factor); ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator/(const QCPVector2D &vec, double divisor); ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator+(const QCPVector2D &vec1, const QCPVector2D &vec2); ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator-(const QCPVector2D &vec1, const QCPVector2D &vec2); ++ friend inline const QCPVector2D operator-(const QCPVector2D &vec); ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPVector2D, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++ ++inline const QCPVector2D operator*(double factor, const QCPVector2D &vec) { return QCPVector2D(vec.mX*factor, vec.mY*factor); } ++inline const QCPVector2D operator*(const QCPVector2D &vec, double factor) { return QCPVector2D(vec.mX*factor, vec.mY*factor); } ++inline const QCPVector2D operator/(const QCPVector2D &vec, double divisor) { return QCPVector2D(vec.mX/divisor, vec.mY/divisor); } ++inline const QCPVector2D operator+(const QCPVector2D &vec1, const QCPVector2D &vec2) { return QCPVector2D(vec1.mX+vec2.mX, vec1.mY+vec2.mY); } ++inline const QCPVector2D operator-(const QCPVector2D &vec1, const QCPVector2D &vec2) { return QCPVector2D(vec1.mX-vec2.mX, vec1.mY-vec2.mY); } ++inline const QCPVector2D operator-(const QCPVector2D &vec) { return QCPVector2D(-vec.mX, -vec.mY); } ++ ++/*! \relates QCPVector2D ++ ++ Prints \a vec in a human readable format to the qDebug output. ++*/ ++inline QDebug operator<< (QDebug d, const QCPVector2D &vec) ++{ ++ d.nospace() << "QCPVector2D(" << vec.x() << ", " << vec.y() << ")"; ++ return d.space(); ++} ++ ++/* end of 'src/vector2d.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/painter.h', size 4035 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPainter : public QPainter ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines special modes the painter can operate in. They disable or enable certain subsets of features/fixes/workarounds, ++ depending on whether they are wanted on the respective output device. ++ */ ++ enum PainterMode { pmDefault = 0x00 ///< 0x00 Default mode for painting on screen devices ++ ,pmVectorized = 0x01 ///< 0x01 Mode for vectorized painting (e.g. PDF export). For example, this prevents some antialiasing fixes. ++ ,pmNoCaching = 0x02 ///< 0x02 Mode for all sorts of exports (e.g. PNG, PDF,...). For example, this prevents using cached pixmap labels ++ ,pmNonCosmetic = 0x04 ///< 0x04 Turns pen widths 0 to 1, i.e. disables cosmetic pens. (A cosmetic pen is always drawn with width 1 pixel in the vector image/pdf viewer, independent of zoom.) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(PainterMode) ++ Q_FLAGS(PainterModes) ++ Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(PainterModes, PainterMode) ++ ++ QCPPainter(); ++ explicit QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device); ++ ++ // getters: ++ bool antialiasing() const { return testRenderHint(QPainter::Antialiasing); } ++ PainterModes modes() const { return mModes; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setAntialiasing(bool enabled); ++ void setMode(PainterMode mode, bool enabled=true); ++ void setModes(PainterModes modes); ++ ++ // methods hiding non-virtual base class functions (QPainter bug workarounds): ++ bool begin(QPaintDevice *device); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setPen(const QColor &color); ++ void setPen(Qt::PenStyle penStyle); ++ void drawLine(const QLineF &line); ++ void drawLine(const QPointF &p1, const QPointF &p2) {drawLine(QLineF(p1, p2));} ++ void save(); ++ void restore(); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void makeNonCosmetic(); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ PainterModes mModes; ++ bool mIsAntialiasing; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QStack mAntialiasingStack; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCPPainter::PainterModes) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPPainter::PainterMode) ++ ++/* end of 'src/painter.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/paintbuffer.h', size 4958 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio); ++ virtual ~QCPAbstractPaintBuffer(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QSize size() const { return mSize; } ++ bool invalidated() const { return mInvalidated; } ++ double devicePixelRatio() const { return mDevicePixelRatio; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setSize(const QSize &size); ++ void setInvalidated(bool invalidated=true); ++ void setDevicePixelRatio(double ratio); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPPainter *startPainting() = 0; ++ virtual void donePainting() {} ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0; ++ virtual void clear(const QColor &color) = 0; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QSize mSize; ++ double mDevicePixelRatio; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ bool mInvalidated; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void reallocateBuffer() = 0; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPaintBufferPixmap : public QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPPaintBufferPixmap(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio); ++ virtual ~QCPPaintBufferPixmap(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPPainter *startPainting() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ void clear(const QColor &color) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // non-property members: ++ QPixmap mBuffer; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void reallocateBuffer() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++ ++ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer : public QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, int multisamples); ++ virtual ~QCPPaintBufferGlPbuffer(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPPainter *startPainting() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ void clear(const QColor &color) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // non-property members: ++ QGLPixelBuffer *mGlPBuffer; ++ int mMultisamples; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void reallocateBuffer() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++#endif // QCP_OPENGL_PBUFFER ++ ++ ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPaintBufferGlFbo : public QCPAbstractPaintBuffer ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(const QSize &size, double devicePixelRatio, QWeakPointer glContext, QWeakPointer glPaintDevice); ++ virtual ~QCPPaintBufferGlFbo(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPPainter *startPainting() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void donePainting() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ void clear(const QColor &color) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // non-property members: ++ QWeakPointer mGlContext; ++ QWeakPointer mGlPaintDevice; ++ QOpenGLFramebufferObject *mGlFrameBuffer; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void reallocateBuffer() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++#endif // QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++ ++/* end of 'src/paintbuffer.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layer.h', size 6885 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayer : public QObject ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCustomPlot* parentPlot READ parentPlot) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString name READ name) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int index READ index) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QList children READ children) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool visible READ visible WRITE setVisible) ++ Q_PROPERTY(LayerMode mode READ mode WRITE setMode) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines the different rendering modes of a layer. Depending on the mode, certain layers can be ++ replotted individually, without the need to replot (possibly complex) layerables on other ++ layers. ++ ++ \see setMode ++ */ ++ enum LayerMode { lmLogical ///< Layer is used only for rendering order, and shares paint buffer with all other adjacent logical layers. ++ ,lmBuffered ///< Layer has its own paint buffer and may be replotted individually (see \ref replot). ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(LayerMode) ++ ++ QCPLayer(QCustomPlot* parentPlot, const QString &layerName); ++ virtual ~QCPLayer(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCustomPlot *parentPlot() const { return mParentPlot; } ++ QString name() const { return mName; } ++ int index() const { return mIndex; } ++ QList children() const { return mChildren; } ++ bool visible() const { return mVisible; } ++ LayerMode mode() const { return mMode; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setVisible(bool visible); ++ void setMode(LayerMode mode); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void replot(); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ QString mName; ++ int mIndex; ++ QList mChildren; ++ bool mVisible; ++ LayerMode mMode; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QWeakPointer mPaintBuffer; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void draw(QCPPainter *painter); ++ void drawToPaintBuffer(); ++ void addChild(QCPLayerable *layerable, bool prepend); ++ void removeChild(QCPLayerable *layerable); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayer) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLayerable; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLayer::LayerMode) ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayerable : public QObject ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool visible READ visible WRITE setVisible) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCustomPlot* parentPlot READ parentPlot) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLayerable* parentLayerable READ parentLayerable) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLayer* layer READ layer WRITE setLayer NOTIFY layerChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool antialiased READ antialiased WRITE setAntialiased) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ QCPLayerable(QCustomPlot *plot, QString targetLayer=QString(), QCPLayerable *parentLayerable=0); ++ virtual ~QCPLayerable(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ bool visible() const { return mVisible; } ++ QCustomPlot *parentPlot() const { return mParentPlot; } ++ QCPLayerable *parentLayerable() const { return mParentLayerable.data(); } ++ QCPLayer *layer() const { return mLayer; } ++ bool antialiased() const { return mAntialiased; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setVisible(bool on); ++ Q_SLOT bool setLayer(QCPLayer *layer); ++ bool setLayer(const QString &layerName); ++ void setAntialiased(bool enabled); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const; ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ bool realVisibility() const; ++ ++signals: ++ void layerChanged(QCPLayer *newLayer); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ bool mVisible; ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ QPointer mParentLayerable; ++ QCPLayer *mLayer; ++ bool mAntialiased; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const; ++ virtual QRect clipRect() const; ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) = 0; ++ // selection events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged); ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged); ++ // low-level mouse events: ++ virtual void mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details); ++ virtual void mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos); ++ virtual void mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos); ++ virtual void mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details); ++ virtual void wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void initializeParentPlot(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ void setParentLayerable(QCPLayerable* parentLayerable); ++ bool moveToLayer(QCPLayer *layer, bool prepend); ++ void applyAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter, bool localAntialiased, QCP::AntialiasedElement overrideElement) const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayerable) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLayer; ++ friend class QCPAxisRect; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/layer.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/range.h', size 5280 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPRange ++{ ++public: ++ double lower, upper; ++ ++ QCPRange(); ++ QCPRange(double lower, double upper); ++ ++ bool operator==(const QCPRange& other) const { return lower == other.lower && upper == other.upper; } ++ bool operator!=(const QCPRange& other) const { return !(*this == other); } ++ ++ QCPRange &operator+=(const double& value) { lower+=value; upper+=value; return *this; } ++ QCPRange &operator-=(const double& value) { lower-=value; upper-=value; return *this; } ++ QCPRange &operator*=(const double& value) { lower*=value; upper*=value; return *this; } ++ QCPRange &operator/=(const double& value) { lower/=value; upper/=value; return *this; } ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator+(const QCPRange&, double); ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator+(double, const QCPRange&); ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator-(const QCPRange& range, double value); ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator*(const QCPRange& range, double value); ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator*(double value, const QCPRange& range); ++ friend inline const QCPRange operator/(const QCPRange& range, double value); ++ ++ double size() const { return upper-lower; } ++ double center() const { return (upper+lower)*0.5; } ++ void normalize() { if (lower > upper) qSwap(lower, upper); } ++ void expand(const QCPRange &otherRange); ++ void expand(double includeCoord); ++ QCPRange expanded(const QCPRange &otherRange) const; ++ QCPRange expanded(double includeCoord) const; ++ QCPRange bounded(double lowerBound, double upperBound) const; ++ QCPRange sanitizedForLogScale() const; ++ QCPRange sanitizedForLinScale() const; ++ bool contains(double value) const { return value >= lower && value <= upper; } ++ ++ static bool validRange(double lower, double upper); ++ static bool validRange(const QCPRange &range); ++ static const double minRange; ++ static const double maxRange; ++ ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPRange, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++ ++/*! \relates QCPRange ++ ++ Prints \a range in a human readable format to the qDebug output. ++*/ ++inline QDebug operator<< (QDebug d, const QCPRange &range) ++{ ++ d.nospace() << "QCPRange(" << range.lower << ", " << range.upper << ")"; ++ return d.space(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds \a value to both boundaries of the range. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator+(const QCPRange& range, double value) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result += value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds \a value to both boundaries of the range. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator+(double value, const QCPRange& range) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result += value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Subtracts \a value from both boundaries of the range. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator-(const QCPRange& range, double value) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result -= value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Multiplies both boundaries of the range by \a value. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator*(const QCPRange& range, double value) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result *= value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Multiplies both boundaries of the range by \a value. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator*(double value, const QCPRange& range) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result *= value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Divides both boundaries of the range by \a value. ++*/ ++inline const QCPRange operator/(const QCPRange& range, double value) ++{ ++ QCPRange result(range); ++ result /= value; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/range.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/selection.h', size 8579 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPDataRange ++{ ++public: ++ QCPDataRange(); ++ QCPDataRange(int begin, int end); ++ ++ bool operator==(const QCPDataRange& other) const { return mBegin == other.mBegin && mEnd == other.mEnd; } ++ bool operator!=(const QCPDataRange& other) const { return !(*this == other); } ++ ++ // getters: ++ int begin() const { return mBegin; } ++ int end() const { return mEnd; } ++ int size() const { return mEnd-mBegin; } ++ int length() const { return size(); } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setBegin(int begin) { mBegin = begin; } ++ void setEnd(int end) { mEnd = end; } ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ bool isValid() const { return (mEnd >= mBegin) && (mBegin >= 0); } ++ bool isEmpty() const { return length() == 0; } ++ QCPDataRange bounded(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ QCPDataRange expanded(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ QCPDataRange intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ QCPDataRange adjusted(int changeBegin, int changeEnd) const { return QCPDataRange(mBegin+changeBegin, mEnd+changeEnd); } ++ bool intersects(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ bool contains(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ ++private: ++ // property members: ++ int mBegin, mEnd; ++ ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPDataRange, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPDataSelection ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPDataSelection(); ++ explicit QCPDataSelection(const QCPDataRange &range); ++ ++ bool operator==(const QCPDataSelection& other) const; ++ bool operator!=(const QCPDataSelection& other) const { return !(*this == other); } ++ QCPDataSelection &operator+=(const QCPDataSelection& other); ++ QCPDataSelection &operator+=(const QCPDataRange& other); ++ QCPDataSelection &operator-=(const QCPDataSelection& other); ++ QCPDataSelection &operator-=(const QCPDataRange& other); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataSelection& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataSelection& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataRange& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataRange& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataSelection& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataSelection& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataRange& b); ++ friend inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataRange& b); ++ ++ // getters: ++ int dataRangeCount() const { return mDataRanges.size(); } ++ int dataPointCount() const; ++ QCPDataRange dataRange(int index=0) const; ++ QList dataRanges() const { return mDataRanges; } ++ QCPDataRange span() const; ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addDataRange(const QCPDataRange &dataRange, bool simplify=true); ++ void clear(); ++ bool isEmpty() const { return mDataRanges.isEmpty(); } ++ void simplify(); ++ void enforceType(QCP::SelectionType type); ++ bool contains(const QCPDataSelection &other) const; ++ QCPDataSelection intersection(const QCPDataRange &other) const; ++ QCPDataSelection intersection(const QCPDataSelection &other) const; ++ QCPDataSelection inverse(const QCPDataRange &outerRange) const; ++ ++private: ++ // property members: ++ QList mDataRanges; ++ ++ inline static bool lessThanDataRangeBegin(const QCPDataRange &a, const QCPDataRange &b) { return a.begin() < b.begin(); } ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPDataSelection) ++ ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points in \a a joined with the data points in \a b. ++ The resulting data selection is already simplified (see \ref QCPDataSelection::simplify). ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataSelection& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result += b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points in \a a joined with the data points in \a b. ++ The resulting data selection is already simplified (see \ref QCPDataSelection::simplify). ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataSelection& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result += b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points in \a a joined with the data points in \a b. ++ The resulting data selection is already simplified (see \ref QCPDataSelection::simplify). ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataRange& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result += b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points in \a a joined with the data points in \a b. ++ The resulting data selection is already simplified (see \ref QCPDataSelection::simplify). ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator+(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataRange& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result += b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points which are in \a a but not in \a b. ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataSelection& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result -= b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points which are in \a a but not in \a b. ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataSelection& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result -= b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points which are in \a a but not in \a b. ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataSelection& a, const QCPDataRange& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result -= b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Return a \ref QCPDataSelection with the data points which are in \a a but not in \a b. ++*/ ++inline const QCPDataSelection operator-(const QCPDataRange& a, const QCPDataRange& b) ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result(a); ++ result -= b; ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! \relates QCPDataRange ++ ++ Prints \a dataRange in a human readable format to the qDebug output. ++*/ ++inline QDebug operator<< (QDebug d, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) ++{ ++ d.nospace() << "[" << dataRange.begin() << ".." << dataRange.end()-1 << "]"; ++ return d.space(); ++} ++ ++/*! \relates QCPDataSelection ++ ++ Prints \a selection in a human readable format to the qDebug output. ++*/ ++inline QDebug operator<< (QDebug d, const QCPDataSelection &selection) ++{ ++ d.nospace() << "QCPDataSelection("; ++ for (int i=0; i elements(QCP::MarginSide side) const { return mChildren.value(side); } ++ bool isEmpty() const; ++ void clear(); ++ ++protected: ++ // non-property members: ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ QHash > mChildren; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual int commonMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) const; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void addChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element); ++ void removeChild(QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement *element); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPMarginGroup) ++ ++ friend class QCPLayoutElement; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayoutElement : public QCPLayerable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLayout* layout READ layout) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QRect rect READ rect) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QRect outerRect READ outerRect WRITE setOuterRect) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QMargins margins READ margins WRITE setMargins) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QMargins minimumMargins READ minimumMargins WRITE setMinimumMargins) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QSize minimumSize READ minimumSize WRITE setMinimumSize) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QSize maximumSize READ maximumSize WRITE setMaximumSize) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the phases of the update process, that happens just before a replot. At each phase, ++ \ref update is called with the according UpdatePhase value. ++ */ ++ enum UpdatePhase { upPreparation ///< Phase used for any type of preparation that needs to be done before margin calculation and layout ++ ,upMargins ///< Phase in which the margins are calculated and set ++ ,upLayout ///< Final phase in which the layout system places the rects of the elements ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(UpdatePhase) ++ ++ explicit QCPLayoutElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot=0); ++ virtual ~QCPLayoutElement(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCPLayout *layout() const { return mParentLayout; } ++ QRect rect() const { return mRect; } ++ QRect outerRect() const { return mOuterRect; } ++ QMargins margins() const { return mMargins; } ++ QMargins minimumMargins() const { return mMinimumMargins; } ++ QCP::MarginSides autoMargins() const { return mAutoMargins; } ++ QSize minimumSize() const { return mMinimumSize; } ++ QSize maximumSize() const { return mMaximumSize; } ++ QCPMarginGroup *marginGroup(QCP::MarginSide side) const { return mMarginGroups.value(side, (QCPMarginGroup*)0); } ++ QHash marginGroups() const { return mMarginGroups; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setOuterRect(const QRect &rect); ++ void setMargins(const QMargins &margins); ++ void setMinimumMargins(const QMargins &margins); ++ void setAutoMargins(QCP::MarginSides sides); ++ void setMinimumSize(const QSize &size); ++ void setMinimumSize(int width, int height); ++ void setMaximumSize(const QSize &size); ++ void setMaximumSize(int width, int height); ++ void setMarginGroup(QCP::MarginSides sides, QCPMarginGroup *group); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void update(UpdatePhase phase); ++ virtual QSize minimumSizeHint() const; ++ virtual QSize maximumSizeHint() const; ++ virtual QList elements(bool recursive) const; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPLayout *mParentLayout; ++ QSize mMinimumSize, mMaximumSize; ++ QRect mRect, mOuterRect; ++ QMargins mMargins, mMinimumMargins; ++ QCP::MarginSides mAutoMargins; ++ QHash mMarginGroups; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual int calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side); ++ virtual void layoutChanged(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE { Q_UNUSED(painter) } ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE { Q_UNUSED(painter) } ++ virtual void parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayoutElement) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLayout; ++ friend class QCPMarginGroup; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLayoutElement::UpdatePhase) ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayout : public QCPLayoutElement ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++public: ++ explicit QCPLayout(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void update(UpdatePhase phase) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QList elements(bool recursive) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual int elementCount() const = 0; ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* elementAt(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* takeAt(int index) = 0; ++ virtual bool take(QCPLayoutElement* element) = 0; ++ virtual void simplify(); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ bool removeAt(int index); ++ bool remove(QCPLayoutElement* element); ++ void clear(); ++ ++protected: ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void updateLayout(); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void sizeConstraintsChanged() const; ++ void adoptElement(QCPLayoutElement *el); ++ void releaseElement(QCPLayoutElement *el); ++ QVector getSectionSizes(QVector maxSizes, QVector minSizes, QVector stretchFactors, int totalSize) const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayout) ++ friend class QCPLayoutElement; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayoutGrid : public QCPLayout ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(int rowCount READ rowCount) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int columnCount READ columnCount) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QList columnStretchFactors READ columnStretchFactors WRITE setColumnStretchFactors) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QList rowStretchFactors READ rowStretchFactors WRITE setRowStretchFactors) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int columnSpacing READ columnSpacing WRITE setColumnSpacing) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int rowSpacing READ rowSpacing WRITE setRowSpacing) ++ Q_PROPERTY(FillOrder fillOrder READ fillOrder WRITE setFillOrder) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int wrap READ wrap WRITE setWrap) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines in which direction the grid is filled when using \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement*). ++ The column/row at which wrapping into the next row/column occurs can be specified with \ref ++ setWrap. ++ ++ \see setFillOrder ++ */ ++ enum FillOrder { foRowsFirst ///< Rows are filled first, and a new element is wrapped to the next column if the row count would exceed \ref setWrap. ++ ,foColumnsFirst ///< Columns are filled first, and a new element is wrapped to the next row if the column count would exceed \ref setWrap. ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(FillOrder) ++ ++ explicit QCPLayoutGrid(); ++ virtual ~QCPLayoutGrid(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ int rowCount() const { return mElements.size(); } ++ int columnCount() const { return mElements.size() > 0 ? mElements.first().size() : 0; } ++ QList columnStretchFactors() const { return mColumnStretchFactors; } ++ QList rowStretchFactors() const { return mRowStretchFactors; } ++ int columnSpacing() const { return mColumnSpacing; } ++ int rowSpacing() const { return mRowSpacing; } ++ int wrap() const { return mWrap; } ++ FillOrder fillOrder() const { return mFillOrder; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setColumnStretchFactor(int column, double factor); ++ void setColumnStretchFactors(const QList &factors); ++ void setRowStretchFactor(int row, double factor); ++ void setRowStretchFactors(const QList &factors); ++ void setColumnSpacing(int pixels); ++ void setRowSpacing(int pixels); ++ void setWrap(int count); ++ void setFillOrder(FillOrder order, bool rearrange=true); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void updateLayout() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int elementCount() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE { return rowCount()*columnCount(); } ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* elementAt(int index) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* takeAt(int index) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual bool take(QCPLayoutElement* element) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QList elements(bool recursive) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void simplify() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize minimumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize maximumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QCPLayoutElement *element(int row, int column) const; ++ bool addElement(int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement *element); ++ bool addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element); ++ bool hasElement(int row, int column); ++ void expandTo(int newRowCount, int newColumnCount); ++ void insertRow(int newIndex); ++ void insertColumn(int newIndex); ++ int rowColToIndex(int row, int column) const; ++ void indexToRowCol(int index, int &row, int &column) const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QList > mElements; ++ QList mColumnStretchFactors; ++ QList mRowStretchFactors; ++ int mColumnSpacing, mRowSpacing; ++ int mWrap; ++ FillOrder mFillOrder; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getMinimumRowColSizes(QVector *minColWidths, QVector *minRowHeights) const; ++ void getMaximumRowColSizes(QVector *maxColWidths, QVector *maxRowHeights) const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayoutGrid) ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLayoutGrid::FillOrder) ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLayoutInset : public QCPLayout ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how the placement and sizing is handled for a certain element in a QCPLayoutInset. ++ */ ++ enum InsetPlacement { ipFree ///< The element may be positioned/sized arbitrarily, see \ref setInsetRect ++ ,ipBorderAligned ///< The element is aligned to one of the layout sides, see \ref setInsetAlignment ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(InsetPlacement) ++ ++ explicit QCPLayoutInset(); ++ virtual ~QCPLayoutInset(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ InsetPlacement insetPlacement(int index) const; ++ Qt::Alignment insetAlignment(int index) const; ++ QRectF insetRect(int index) const; ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setInsetPlacement(int index, InsetPlacement placement); ++ void setInsetAlignment(int index, Qt::Alignment alignment); ++ void setInsetRect(int index, const QRectF &rect); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void updateLayout() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int elementCount() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* elementAt(int index) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPLayoutElement* takeAt(int index) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual bool take(QCPLayoutElement* element) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void simplify() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE {} ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment); ++ void addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QList mElements; ++ QList mInsetPlacement; ++ QList mInsetAlignment; ++ QList mInsetRect; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLayoutInset) ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement) ++ ++/* end of 'src/layout.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/lineending.h', size 4426 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLineEnding ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the type of ending decoration for line-like items, e.g. an arrow. ++ ++ \image html QCPLineEnding.png ++ ++ The width and length of these decorations can be controlled with the functions \ref setWidth ++ and \ref setLength. Some decorations like \ref esDisc, \ref esSquare, \ref esDiamond and \ref esBar only ++ support a width, the length property is ignored. ++ ++ \see QCPItemLine::setHead, QCPItemLine::setTail, QCPItemCurve::setHead, QCPItemCurve::setTail, QCPAxis::setLowerEnding, QCPAxis::setUpperEnding ++ */ ++ enum EndingStyle { esNone ///< No ending decoration ++ ,esFlatArrow ///< A filled arrow head with a straight/flat back (a triangle) ++ ,esSpikeArrow ///< A filled arrow head with an indented back ++ ,esLineArrow ///< A non-filled arrow head with open back ++ ,esDisc ///< A filled circle ++ ,esSquare ///< A filled square ++ ,esDiamond ///< A filled diamond (45 degrees rotated square) ++ ,esBar ///< A bar perpendicular to the line ++ ,esHalfBar ///< A bar perpendicular to the line, pointing out to only one side (to which side can be changed with \ref setInverted) ++ ,esSkewedBar ///< A bar that is skewed (skew controllable via \ref setLength) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(EndingStyle) ++ ++ QCPLineEnding(); ++ QCPLineEnding(EndingStyle style, double width=8, double length=10, bool inverted=false); ++ ++ // getters: ++ EndingStyle style() const { return mStyle; } ++ double width() const { return mWidth; } ++ double length() const { return mLength; } ++ bool inverted() const { return mInverted; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setStyle(EndingStyle style); ++ void setWidth(double width); ++ void setLength(double length); ++ void setInverted(bool inverted); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ double boundingDistance() const; ++ double realLength() const; ++ void draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, const QCPVector2D &dir) const; ++ void draw(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPVector2D &pos, double angle) const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ EndingStyle mStyle; ++ double mWidth, mLength; ++ bool mInverted; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPLineEnding, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/lineending.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axisticker.h', size 4177 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the strategies that the axis ticker may follow when choosing the size of the tick step. ++ ++ \see setTickStepStrategy ++ */ ++ enum TickStepStrategy ++ { ++ tssReadability ///< A nicely readable tick step is prioritized over matching the requested number of ticks (see \ref setTickCount) ++ ,tssMeetTickCount ///< Less readable tick steps are allowed which in turn facilitates getting closer to the requested tick count ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(TickStepStrategy) ++ ++ QCPAxisTicker(); ++ virtual ~QCPAxisTicker(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ TickStepStrategy tickStepStrategy() const { return mTickStepStrategy; } ++ int tickCount() const { return mTickCount; } ++ double tickOrigin() const { return mTickOrigin; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setTickStepStrategy(TickStepStrategy strategy); ++ void setTickCount(int count); ++ void setTickOrigin(double origin); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void generate(const QCPRange &range, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision, QVector &ticks, QVector *subTicks, QVector *tickLabels); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ TickStepStrategy mTickStepStrategy; ++ int mTickCount; ++ double mTickOrigin; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range); ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep); ++ virtual QString getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision); ++ virtual QVector createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range); ++ virtual QVector createSubTickVector(int subTickCount, const QVector &ticks); ++ virtual QVector createLabelVector(const QVector &ticks, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void trimTicks(const QCPRange &range, QVector &ticks, bool keepOneOutlier) const; ++ double pickClosest(double target, const QVector &candidates) const; ++ double getMantissa(double input, double *magnitude=0) const; ++ double cleanMantissa(double input) const; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxisTicker::TickStepStrategy) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QSharedPointer) ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axisticker.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.h', size 3289 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerDateTime : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++public: ++ QCPAxisTickerDateTime(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString dateTimeFormat() const { return mDateTimeFormat; } ++ Qt::TimeSpec dateTimeSpec() const { return mDateTimeSpec; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setDateTimeFormat(const QString &format); ++ void setDateTimeSpec(Qt::TimeSpec spec); ++ void setTickOrigin(double origin); // hides base class method but calls baseclass implementation ("using" throws off IDEs and doxygen) ++ void setTickOrigin(const QDateTime &origin); ++ ++ // static methods: ++ static QDateTime keyToDateTime(double key); ++ static double dateTimeToKey(const QDateTime dateTime); ++ static double dateTimeToKey(const QDate date); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mDateTimeFormat; ++ Qt::TimeSpec mDateTimeSpec; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ enum DateStrategy {dsNone, dsUniformTimeInDay, dsUniformDayInMonth} mDateStrategy; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QString getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QVector createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerdatetime.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertime.h', size 3288 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerTime : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the logical units in which fractions of time spans can be expressed. ++ ++ \see setFieldWidth, setTimeFormat ++ */ ++ enum TimeUnit { tuMilliseconds ++ ,tuSeconds ++ ,tuMinutes ++ ,tuHours ++ ,tuDays ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(TimeUnit) ++ ++ QCPAxisTickerTime(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString timeFormat() const { return mTimeFormat; } ++ int fieldWidth(TimeUnit unit) const { return mFieldWidth.value(unit); } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setTimeFormat(const QString &format); ++ void setFieldWidth(TimeUnit unit, int width); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mTimeFormat; ++ QHash mFieldWidth; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ TimeUnit mSmallestUnit, mBiggestUnit; ++ QHash mFormatPattern; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QString getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void replaceUnit(QString &text, TimeUnit unit, int value) const; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxisTickerTime::TimeUnit) ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertime.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.h', size 3308 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerFixed : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how the axis ticker may modify the specified tick step (\ref setTickStep) in order to ++ control the number of ticks in the axis range. ++ ++ \see setScaleStrategy ++ */ ++ enum ScaleStrategy { ssNone ///< Modifications are not allowed, the specified tick step is absolutely fixed. This might cause a high tick density and overlapping labels if the axis range is zoomed out. ++ ,ssMultiples ///< An integer multiple of the specified tick step is allowed. The used factor follows the base class properties of \ref setTickStepStrategy and \ref setTickCount. ++ ,ssPowers ///< An integer power of the specified tick step is allowed. ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ScaleStrategy) ++ ++ QCPAxisTickerFixed(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ double tickStep() const { return mTickStep; } ++ ScaleStrategy scaleStrategy() const { return mScaleStrategy; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setTickStep(double step); ++ void setScaleStrategy(ScaleStrategy strategy); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ double mTickStep; ++ ScaleStrategy mScaleStrategy; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxisTickerFixed::ScaleStrategy) ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerfixed.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickertext.h', size 3085 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerText : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++public: ++ QCPAxisTickerText(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QMap &ticks() { return mTicks; } ++ int subTickCount() const { return mSubTickCount; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setTicks(const QMap &ticks); ++ void setTicks(const QVector &positions, const QVector labels); ++ void setSubTickCount(int subTicks); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void clear(); ++ void addTick(double position, QString label); ++ void addTicks(const QMap &ticks); ++ void addTicks(const QVector &positions, const QVector &labels); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QMap mTicks; ++ int mSubTickCount; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QString getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QVector createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickertext.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerpi.h', size 3911 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerPi : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how fractions should be displayed in tick labels. ++ ++ \see setFractionStyle ++ */ ++ enum FractionStyle { fsFloatingPoint ///< Fractions are displayed as regular decimal floating point numbers, e.g. "0.25" or "0.125". ++ ,fsAsciiFractions ///< Fractions are written as rationals using ASCII characters only, e.g. "1/4" or "1/8" ++ ,fsUnicodeFractions ///< Fractions are written using sub- and superscript UTF-8 digits and the fraction symbol. ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(FractionStyle) ++ ++ QCPAxisTickerPi(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString piSymbol() const { return mPiSymbol; } ++ double piValue() const { return mPiValue; } ++ bool periodicity() const { return mPeriodicity; } ++ FractionStyle fractionStyle() const { return mFractionStyle; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setPiSymbol(QString symbol); ++ void setPiValue(double pi); ++ void setPeriodicity(int multiplesOfPi); ++ void setFractionStyle(FractionStyle style); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mPiSymbol; ++ double mPiValue; ++ int mPeriodicity; ++ FractionStyle mFractionStyle; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ double mPiTickStep; // size of one tick step in units of mPiValue ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QString getTickLabel(double tick, const QLocale &locale, QChar formatChar, int precision) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void simplifyFraction(int &numerator, int &denominator) const; ++ QString fractionToString(int numerator, int denominator) const; ++ QString unicodeFraction(int numerator, int denominator) const; ++ QString unicodeSuperscript(int number) const; ++ QString unicodeSubscript(int number) const; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxisTickerPi::FractionStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerpi.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axistickerlog.h', size 2663 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisTickerLog : public QCPAxisTicker ++{ ++public: ++ QCPAxisTickerLog(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ double logBase() const { return mLogBase; } ++ int subTickCount() const { return mSubTickCount; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setLogBase(double base); ++ void setSubTickCount(int subTicks); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ double mLogBase; ++ int mSubTickCount; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ double mLogBaseLnInv; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double getTickStep(const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int getSubTickCount(double tickStep) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QVector createTickVector(double tickStep, const QCPRange &range) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axistickerlog.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/axis/axis.h', size 20230 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPGrid :public QCPLayerable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool subGridVisible READ subGridVisible WRITE setSubGridVisible) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool antialiasedSubGrid READ antialiasedSubGrid WRITE setAntialiasedSubGrid) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool antialiasedZeroLine READ antialiasedZeroLine WRITE setAntialiasedZeroLine) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen subGridPen READ subGridPen WRITE setSubGridPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen zeroLinePen READ zeroLinePen WRITE setZeroLinePen) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPGrid(QCPAxis *parentAxis); ++ ++ // getters: ++ bool subGridVisible() const { return mSubGridVisible; } ++ bool antialiasedSubGrid() const { return mAntialiasedSubGrid; } ++ bool antialiasedZeroLine() const { return mAntialiasedZeroLine; } ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen subGridPen() const { return mSubGridPen; } ++ QPen zeroLinePen() const { return mZeroLinePen; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setSubGridVisible(bool visible); ++ void setAntialiasedSubGrid(bool enabled); ++ void setAntialiasedZeroLine(bool enabled); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSubGridPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setZeroLinePen(const QPen &pen); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ bool mSubGridVisible; ++ bool mAntialiasedSubGrid, mAntialiasedZeroLine; ++ QPen mPen, mSubGridPen, mZeroLinePen; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QCPAxis *mParentAxis; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void drawGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ void drawSubGridLines(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ ++ friend class QCPAxis; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxis : public QCPLayerable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(AxisType axisType READ axisType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxisRect* axisRect READ axisRect) ++ Q_PROPERTY(ScaleType scaleType READ scaleType WRITE setScaleType NOTIFY scaleTypeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPRange range READ range WRITE setRange NOTIFY rangeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool rangeReversed READ rangeReversed WRITE setRangeReversed) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QSharedPointer ticker READ ticker WRITE setTicker) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool ticks READ ticks WRITE setTicks) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool tickLabels READ tickLabels WRITE setTickLabels) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int tickLabelPadding READ tickLabelPadding WRITE setTickLabelPadding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont tickLabelFont READ tickLabelFont WRITE setTickLabelFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor tickLabelColor READ tickLabelColor WRITE setTickLabelColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double tickLabelRotation READ tickLabelRotation WRITE setTickLabelRotation) ++ Q_PROPERTY(LabelSide tickLabelSide READ tickLabelSide WRITE setTickLabelSide) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString numberFormat READ numberFormat WRITE setNumberFormat) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int numberPrecision READ numberPrecision WRITE setNumberPrecision) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QVector tickVector READ tickVector) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QVector tickVectorLabels READ tickVectorLabels) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int tickLengthIn READ tickLengthIn WRITE setTickLengthIn) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int tickLengthOut READ tickLengthOut WRITE setTickLengthOut) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool subTicks READ subTicks WRITE setSubTicks) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int subTickLengthIn READ subTickLengthIn WRITE setSubTickLengthIn) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int subTickLengthOut READ subTickLengthOut WRITE setSubTickLengthOut) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen basePen READ basePen WRITE setBasePen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen tickPen READ tickPen WRITE setTickPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen subTickPen READ subTickPen WRITE setSubTickPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont labelFont READ labelFont WRITE setLabelFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor labelColor READ labelColor WRITE setLabelColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString label READ label WRITE setLabel) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int labelPadding READ labelPadding WRITE setLabelPadding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int padding READ padding WRITE setPadding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int offset READ offset WRITE setOffset) ++ Q_PROPERTY(SelectableParts selectedParts READ selectedParts WRITE setSelectedParts NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(SelectableParts selectableParts READ selectableParts WRITE setSelectableParts NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedTickLabelFont READ selectedTickLabelFont WRITE setSelectedTickLabelFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedLabelFont READ selectedLabelFont WRITE setSelectedLabelFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedTickLabelColor READ selectedTickLabelColor WRITE setSelectedTickLabelColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedLabelColor READ selectedLabelColor WRITE setSelectedLabelColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedBasePen READ selectedBasePen WRITE setSelectedBasePen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedTickPen READ selectedTickPen WRITE setSelectedTickPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedSubTickPen READ selectedSubTickPen WRITE setSelectedSubTickPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding lowerEnding READ lowerEnding WRITE setLowerEnding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding upperEnding READ upperEnding WRITE setUpperEnding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPGrid* grid READ grid) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines at which side of the axis rect the axis will appear. This also affects how the tick ++ marks are drawn, on which side the labels are placed etc. ++ */ ++ enum AxisType { atLeft = 0x01 ///< 0x01 Axis is vertical and on the left side of the axis rect ++ ,atRight = 0x02 ///< 0x02 Axis is vertical and on the right side of the axis rect ++ ,atTop = 0x04 ///< 0x04 Axis is horizontal and on the top side of the axis rect ++ ,atBottom = 0x08 ///< 0x08 Axis is horizontal and on the bottom side of the axis rect ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(AxisType) ++ Q_FLAGS(AxisTypes) ++ Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(AxisTypes, AxisType) ++ /*! ++ Defines on which side of the axis the tick labels (numbers) shall appear. ++ ++ \see setTickLabelSide ++ */ ++ enum LabelSide { lsInside ///< Tick labels will be displayed inside the axis rect and clipped to the inner axis rect ++ ,lsOutside ///< Tick labels will be displayed outside the axis rect ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(LabelSide) ++ /*! ++ Defines the scale of an axis. ++ \see setScaleType ++ */ ++ enum ScaleType { stLinear ///< Linear scaling ++ ,stLogarithmic ///< Logarithmic scaling with correspondingly transformed axis coordinates (possibly also \ref setTicker to a \ref QCPAxisTickerLog instance). ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ScaleType) ++ /*! ++ Defines the selectable parts of an axis. ++ \see setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts ++ */ ++ enum SelectablePart { spNone = 0 ///< None of the selectable parts ++ ,spAxis = 0x001 ///< The axis backbone and tick marks ++ ,spTickLabels = 0x002 ///< Tick labels (numbers) of this axis (as a whole, not individually) ++ ,spAxisLabel = 0x004 ///< The axis label ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(SelectablePart) ++ Q_FLAGS(SelectableParts) ++ Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(SelectableParts, SelectablePart) ++ ++ explicit QCPAxis(QCPAxisRect *parent, AxisType type); ++ virtual ~QCPAxis(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ AxisType axisType() const { return mAxisType; } ++ QCPAxisRect *axisRect() const { return mAxisRect; } ++ ScaleType scaleType() const { return mScaleType; } ++ const QCPRange range() const { return mRange; } ++ bool rangeReversed() const { return mRangeReversed; } ++ QSharedPointer ticker() const { return mTicker; } ++ bool ticks() const { return mTicks; } ++ bool tickLabels() const { return mTickLabels; } ++ int tickLabelPadding() const; ++ QFont tickLabelFont() const { return mTickLabelFont; } ++ QColor tickLabelColor() const { return mTickLabelColor; } ++ double tickLabelRotation() const; ++ LabelSide tickLabelSide() const; ++ QString numberFormat() const; ++ int numberPrecision() const { return mNumberPrecision; } ++ QVector tickVector() const { return mTickVector; } ++ QVector tickVectorLabels() const { return mTickVectorLabels; } ++ int tickLengthIn() const; ++ int tickLengthOut() const; ++ bool subTicks() const { return mSubTicks; } ++ int subTickLengthIn() const; ++ int subTickLengthOut() const; ++ QPen basePen() const { return mBasePen; } ++ QPen tickPen() const { return mTickPen; } ++ QPen subTickPen() const { return mSubTickPen; } ++ QFont labelFont() const { return mLabelFont; } ++ QColor labelColor() const { return mLabelColor; } ++ QString label() const { return mLabel; } ++ int labelPadding() const; ++ int padding() const { return mPadding; } ++ int offset() const; ++ SelectableParts selectedParts() const { return mSelectedParts; } ++ SelectableParts selectableParts() const { return mSelectableParts; } ++ QFont selectedTickLabelFont() const { return mSelectedTickLabelFont; } ++ QFont selectedLabelFont() const { return mSelectedLabelFont; } ++ QColor selectedTickLabelColor() const { return mSelectedTickLabelColor; } ++ QColor selectedLabelColor() const { return mSelectedLabelColor; } ++ QPen selectedBasePen() const { return mSelectedBasePen; } ++ QPen selectedTickPen() const { return mSelectedTickPen; } ++ QPen selectedSubTickPen() const { return mSelectedSubTickPen; } ++ QCPLineEnding lowerEnding() const; ++ QCPLineEnding upperEnding() const; ++ QCPGrid *grid() const { return mGrid; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ Q_SLOT void setScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType type); ++ Q_SLOT void setRange(const QCPRange &range); ++ void setRange(double lower, double upper); ++ void setRange(double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment); ++ void setRangeLower(double lower); ++ void setRangeUpper(double upper); ++ void setRangeReversed(bool reversed); ++ void setTicker(QSharedPointer ticker); ++ void setTicks(bool show); ++ void setTickLabels(bool show); ++ void setTickLabelPadding(int padding); ++ void setTickLabelFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setTickLabelColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setTickLabelRotation(double degrees); ++ void setTickLabelSide(LabelSide side); ++ void setNumberFormat(const QString &formatCode); ++ void setNumberPrecision(int precision); ++ void setTickLength(int inside, int outside=0); ++ void setTickLengthIn(int inside); ++ void setTickLengthOut(int outside); ++ void setSubTicks(bool show); ++ void setSubTickLength(int inside, int outside=0); ++ void setSubTickLengthIn(int inside); ++ void setSubTickLengthOut(int outside); ++ void setBasePen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setTickPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSubTickPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setLabelFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setLabelColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setLabel(const QString &str); ++ void setLabelPadding(int padding); ++ void setPadding(int padding); ++ void setOffset(int offset); ++ void setSelectedTickLabelFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedLabelFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedTickLabelColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setSelectedLabelColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setSelectedBasePen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedTickPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedSubTickPen(const QPen &pen); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectableParts(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &selectableParts); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectedParts(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &selectedParts); ++ void setLowerEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending); ++ void setUpperEnding(const QCPLineEnding &ending); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return mOrientation; } ++ int pixelOrientation() const { return rangeReversed() != (orientation()==Qt::Vertical) ? -1 : 1; } ++ void moveRange(double diff); ++ void scaleRange(double factor); ++ void scaleRange(double factor, double center); ++ void setScaleRatio(const QCPAxis *otherAxis, double ratio=1.0); ++ void rescale(bool onlyVisiblePlottables=false); ++ double pixelToCoord(double value) const; ++ double coordToPixel(double value) const; ++ SelectablePart getPartAt(const QPointF &pos) const; ++ QList plottables() const; ++ QList graphs() const; ++ QList items() const; ++ ++ static AxisType marginSideToAxisType(QCP::MarginSide side); ++ static Qt::Orientation orientation(AxisType type) { return type==atBottom||type==atTop ? Qt::Horizontal : Qt::Vertical; } ++ static AxisType opposite(AxisType type); ++ ++signals: ++ void rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange); ++ void rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange, const QCPRange &oldRange); ++ void scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ void selectionChanged(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &parts); ++ void selectableChanged(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &parts); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ // axis base: ++ AxisType mAxisType; ++ QCPAxisRect *mAxisRect; ++ //int mOffset; // in QCPAxisPainter ++ int mPadding; ++ Qt::Orientation mOrientation; ++ SelectableParts mSelectableParts, mSelectedParts; ++ QPen mBasePen, mSelectedBasePen; ++ //QCPLineEnding mLowerEnding, mUpperEnding; // in QCPAxisPainter ++ // axis label: ++ //int mLabelPadding; // in QCPAxisPainter ++ QString mLabel; ++ QFont mLabelFont, mSelectedLabelFont; ++ QColor mLabelColor, mSelectedLabelColor; ++ // tick labels: ++ //int mTickLabelPadding; // in QCPAxisPainter ++ bool mTickLabels; ++ //double mTickLabelRotation; // in QCPAxisPainter ++ QFont mTickLabelFont, mSelectedTickLabelFont; ++ QColor mTickLabelColor, mSelectedTickLabelColor; ++ int mNumberPrecision; ++ QLatin1Char mNumberFormatChar; ++ bool mNumberBeautifulPowers; ++ //bool mNumberMultiplyCross; // QCPAxisPainter ++ // ticks and subticks: ++ bool mTicks; ++ bool mSubTicks; ++ //int mTickLengthIn, mTickLengthOut, mSubTickLengthIn, mSubTickLengthOut; // QCPAxisPainter ++ QPen mTickPen, mSelectedTickPen; ++ QPen mSubTickPen, mSelectedSubTickPen; ++ // scale and range: ++ QCPRange mRange; ++ bool mRangeReversed; ++ ScaleType mScaleType; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QCPGrid *mGrid; ++ QCPAxisPainterPrivate *mAxisPainter; ++ QSharedPointer mTicker; ++ QVector mTickVector; ++ QVector mTickVectorLabels; ++ QVector mSubTickVector; ++ bool mCachedMarginValid; ++ int mCachedMargin; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual int calculateMargin(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void setupTickVectors(); ++ QPen getBasePen() const; ++ QPen getTickPen() const; ++ QPen getSubTickPen() const; ++ QFont getTickLabelFont() const; ++ QFont getLabelFont() const; ++ QColor getTickLabelColor() const; ++ QColor getLabelColor() const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAxis) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPGrid; ++ friend class QCPAxisRect; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCPAxis::SelectableParts) ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCPAxis::AxisTypes) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxis::AxisType) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxis::LabelSide) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxis::ScaleType) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPAxis::SelectablePart) ++ ++ ++class QCPAxisPainterPrivate ++{ ++public: ++ explicit QCPAxisPainterPrivate(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPAxisPainterPrivate(); ++ ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter); ++ virtual int size() const; ++ void clearCache(); ++ ++ QRect axisSelectionBox() const { return mAxisSelectionBox; } ++ QRect tickLabelsSelectionBox() const { return mTickLabelsSelectionBox; } ++ QRect labelSelectionBox() const { return mLabelSelectionBox; } ++ ++ // public property members: ++ QCPAxis::AxisType type; ++ QPen basePen; ++ QCPLineEnding lowerEnding, upperEnding; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ int labelPadding; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ QFont labelFont; ++ QColor labelColor; ++ QString label; ++ int tickLabelPadding; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ double tickLabelRotation; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ QCPAxis::LabelSide tickLabelSide; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ bool substituteExponent; ++ bool numberMultiplyCross; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ int tickLengthIn, tickLengthOut, subTickLengthIn, subTickLengthOut; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ QPen tickPen, subTickPen; ++ QFont tickLabelFont; ++ QColor tickLabelColor; ++ QRect axisRect, viewportRect; ++ double offset; // directly accessed by QCPAxis setters/getters ++ bool abbreviateDecimalPowers; ++ bool reversedEndings; ++ ++ QVector subTickPositions; ++ QVector tickPositions; ++ QVector tickLabels; ++ ++protected: ++ struct CachedLabel ++ { ++ QPointF offset; ++ QPixmap pixmap; ++ }; ++ struct TickLabelData ++ { ++ QString basePart, expPart, suffixPart; ++ QRect baseBounds, expBounds, suffixBounds, totalBounds, rotatedTotalBounds; ++ QFont baseFont, expFont; ++ }; ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ QByteArray mLabelParameterHash; // to determine whether mLabelCache needs to be cleared due to changed parameters ++ QCache mLabelCache; ++ QRect mAxisSelectionBox, mTickLabelsSelectionBox, mLabelSelectionBox; ++ ++ virtual QByteArray generateLabelParameterHash() const; ++ ++ virtual void placeTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double position, int distanceToAxis, const QString &text, QSize *tickLabelsSize); ++ virtual void drawTickLabel(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y, const TickLabelData &labelData) const; ++ virtual TickLabelData getTickLabelData(const QFont &font, const QString &text) const; ++ virtual QPointF getTickLabelDrawOffset(const TickLabelData &labelData) const; ++ virtual void getMaxTickLabelSize(const QFont &font, const QString &text, QSize *tickLabelsSize) const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/axis/axis.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/scatterstyle.h', size 7275 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPScatterStyle ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Represents the various properties of a scatter style instance. For example, this enum is used ++ to specify which properties of \ref QCPSelectionDecorator::setScatterStyle will be used when ++ highlighting selected data points. ++ ++ Specific scatter properties can be transferred between \ref QCPScatterStyle instances via \ref ++ setFromOther. ++ */ ++ enum ScatterProperty { spNone = 0x00 ///< 0x00 None ++ ,spPen = 0x01 ///< 0x01 The pen property, see \ref setPen ++ ,spBrush = 0x02 ///< 0x02 The brush property, see \ref setBrush ++ ,spSize = 0x04 ///< 0x04 The size property, see \ref setSize ++ ,spShape = 0x08 ///< 0x08 The shape property, see \ref setShape ++ ,spAll = 0xFF ///< 0xFF All properties ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ScatterProperty) ++ Q_FLAGS(ScatterProperties) ++ Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(ScatterProperties, ScatterProperty) ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines the shape used for scatter points. ++ ++ On plottables/items that draw scatters, the sizes of these visualizations (with exception of ++ \ref ssDot and \ref ssPixmap) can be controlled with the \ref setSize function. Scatters are ++ drawn with the pen and brush specified with \ref setPen and \ref setBrush. ++ */ ++ enum ScatterShape { ssNone ///< no scatter symbols are drawn (e.g. in QCPGraph, data only represented with lines) ++ ,ssDot ///< \enumimage{ssDot.png} a single pixel (use \ref ssDisc or \ref ssCircle if you want a round shape with a certain radius) ++ ,ssCross ///< \enumimage{ssCross.png} a cross ++ ,ssPlus ///< \enumimage{ssPlus.png} a plus ++ ,ssCircle ///< \enumimage{ssCircle.png} a circle ++ ,ssDisc ///< \enumimage{ssDisc.png} a circle which is filled with the pen's color (not the brush as with ssCircle) ++ ,ssSquare ///< \enumimage{ssSquare.png} a square ++ ,ssDiamond ///< \enumimage{ssDiamond.png} a diamond ++ ,ssStar ///< \enumimage{ssStar.png} a star with eight arms, i.e. a combination of cross and plus ++ ,ssTriangle ///< \enumimage{ssTriangle.png} an equilateral triangle, standing on baseline ++ ,ssTriangleInverted ///< \enumimage{ssTriangleInverted.png} an equilateral triangle, standing on corner ++ ,ssCrossSquare ///< \enumimage{ssCrossSquare.png} a square with a cross inside ++ ,ssPlusSquare ///< \enumimage{ssPlusSquare.png} a square with a plus inside ++ ,ssCrossCircle ///< \enumimage{ssCrossCircle.png} a circle with a cross inside ++ ,ssPlusCircle ///< \enumimage{ssPlusCircle.png} a circle with a plus inside ++ ,ssPeace ///< \enumimage{ssPeace.png} a circle, with one vertical and two downward diagonal lines ++ ,ssPixmap ///< a custom pixmap specified by \ref setPixmap, centered on the data point coordinates ++ ,ssCustom ///< custom painter operations are performed per scatter (As QPainterPath, see \ref setCustomPath) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ScatterShape) ++ ++ QCPScatterStyle(); ++ QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size=6); ++ QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, double size); ++ QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor &fill, double size); ++ QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush, double size); ++ QCPScatterStyle(const QPixmap &pixmap); ++ QCPScatterStyle(const QPainterPath &customPath, const QPen &pen, const QBrush &brush=Qt::NoBrush, double size=6); ++ ++ // getters: ++ double size() const { return mSize; } ++ ScatterShape shape() const { return mShape; } ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QPixmap pixmap() const { return mPixmap; } ++ QPainterPath customPath() const { return mCustomPath; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setFromOther(const QCPScatterStyle &other, ScatterProperties properties); ++ void setSize(double size); ++ void setShape(ScatterShape shape); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap); ++ void setCustomPath(const QPainterPath &customPath); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ bool isNone() const { return mShape == ssNone; } ++ bool isPenDefined() const { return mPenDefined; } ++ void undefinePen(); ++ void applyTo(QCPPainter *painter, const QPen &defaultPen) const; ++ void drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, const QPointF &pos) const; ++ void drawShape(QCPPainter *painter, double x, double y) const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ double mSize; ++ ScatterShape mShape; ++ QPen mPen; ++ QBrush mBrush; ++ QPixmap mPixmap; ++ QPainterPath mCustomPath; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ bool mPenDefined; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPScatterStyle, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperty) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPScatterStyle::ScatterShape) ++ ++/* end of 'src/scatterstyle.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/datacontainer.h', size 4535 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++/*! \relates QCPDataContainer ++ Returns whether the sort key of \a a is less than the sort key of \a b. ++ ++ \see QCPDataContainer::sort ++*/ ++template ++inline bool qcpLessThanSortKey(const DataType &a, const DataType &b) { return a.sortKey() < b.sortKey(); } ++ ++template ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPDataContainer ++{ ++public: ++ typedef typename QVector::const_iterator const_iterator; ++ typedef typename QVector::iterator iterator; ++ ++ QCPDataContainer(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ int size() const { return mData.size()-mPreallocSize; } ++ bool isEmpty() const { return size() == 0; } ++ bool autoSqueeze() const { return mAutoSqueeze; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setAutoSqueeze(bool enabled); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void set(const QCPDataContainer &data); ++ void set(const QVector &data, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void add(const QCPDataContainer &data); ++ void add(const QVector &data, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void add(const DataType &data); ++ void removeBefore(double sortKey); ++ void removeAfter(double sortKey); ++ void remove(double sortKeyFrom, double sortKeyTo); ++ void remove(double sortKey); ++ void clear(); ++ void sort(); ++ void squeeze(bool preAllocation=true, bool postAllocation=true); ++ ++ const_iterator constBegin() const { return mData.constBegin()+mPreallocSize; } ++ const_iterator constEnd() const { return mData.constEnd(); } ++ iterator begin() { return mData.begin()+mPreallocSize; } ++ iterator end() { return mData.end(); } ++ const_iterator findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ const_iterator findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ const_iterator at(int index) const { return constBegin()+qBound(0, index, size()); } ++ QCPRange keyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain signDomain=QCP::sdBoth); ++ QCPRange valueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain signDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()); ++ QCPDataRange dataRange() const { return QCPDataRange(0, size()); } ++ void limitIteratorsToDataRange(const_iterator &begin, const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ bool mAutoSqueeze; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QVector mData; ++ int mPreallocSize; ++ int mPreallocIteration; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void preallocateGrow(int minimumPreallocSize); ++ void performAutoSqueeze(); ++}; ++ ++// include implementation in header since it is a class template: ++ ++/* including file 'src/datacontainer.cpp', size 31224 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPDataContainer ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPDataContainer ++ \brief The generic data container for one-dimensional plottables ++ ++ This class template provides a fast container for data storage of one-dimensional data. The data ++ type is specified as template parameter (called \a DataType in the following) and must provide ++ some methods as described in the \ref qcpdatacontainer-datatype "next section". ++ ++ The data is stored in a sorted fashion, which allows very quick lookups by the sorted key as well ++ as retrieval of ranges (see \ref findBegin, \ref findEnd, \ref keyRange) using binary search. The ++ container uses a preallocation and a postallocation scheme, such that appending and prepending ++ data (with respect to the sort key) is very fast and minimizes reallocations. If data is added ++ which needs to be inserted between existing keys, the merge usually can be done quickly too, ++ using the fact that existing data is always sorted. The user can further improve performance by ++ specifying that added data is already itself sorted by key, if he can guarantee that this is the ++ case (see for example \ref add(const QVector &data, bool alreadySorted)). ++ ++ The data can be accessed with the provided const iterators (\ref constBegin, \ref constEnd). If ++ it is necessary to alter existing data in-place, the non-const iterators can be used (\ref begin, ++ \ref end). Changing data members that are not the sort key (for most data types called \a key) is ++ safe from the container's perspective. ++ ++ Great care must be taken however if the sort key is modified through the non-const iterators. For ++ performance reasons, the iterators don't automatically cause a re-sorting upon their ++ manipulation. It is thus the responsibility of the user to leave the container in a sorted state ++ when finished with the data manipulation, before calling any other methods on the container. A ++ complete re-sort (e.g. after finishing all sort key manipulation) can be done by calling \ref ++ sort. Failing to do so can not be detected by the container efficiently and will cause both ++ rendering artifacts and potential data loss. ++ ++ Implementing one-dimensional plottables that make use of a \ref QCPDataContainer is usually ++ done by subclassing from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D "QCPAbstractPlottable1D", which ++ introduces an according \a mDataContainer member and some convenience methods. ++ ++ \section qcpdatacontainer-datatype Requirements for the DataType template parameter ++ ++ The template parameter DataType is the type of the stored data points. It must be ++ trivially copyable and have the following public methods, preferably inline: ++ ++ \li double sortKey() const\n Returns the member variable of this data point that is the ++ sort key, defining the ordering in the container. Often this variable is simply called \a key. ++ ++ \li static DataType fromSortKey(double sortKey)\n Returns a new instance of the data ++ type initialized with its sort key set to \a sortKey. ++ ++ \li static bool sortKeyIsMainKey()\n Returns true if the sort key is equal to the main ++ key (see method \c mainKey below). For most plottables this is the case. It is not the case for ++ example for \ref QCPCurve, which uses \a t as sort key and \a key as main key. This is the reason ++ why QCPCurve unlike QCPGraph can display parametric curves with loops. ++ ++ \li double mainKey() const\n Returns the variable of this data point considered the main ++ key. This is commonly the variable that is used as the coordinate of this data point on the key ++ axis of the plottable. This method is used for example when determining the automatic axis ++ rescaling of key axes (\ref QCPAxis::rescale). ++ ++ \li double mainValue() const\n Returns the variable of this data point considered the ++ main value. This is commonly the variable that is used as the coordinate of this data point on ++ the value axis of the plottable. ++ ++ \li QCPRange valueRange() const\n Returns the range this data point spans in the value ++ axis coordinate. If the data is single-valued (e.g. QCPGraphData), this is simply a range with ++ both lower and upper set to the main data point value. However if the data points can represent ++ multiple values at once (e.g QCPFinancialData with its \a high, \a low, \a open and \a close ++ values at each \a key) this method should return the range those values span. This method is used ++ for example when determining the automatic axis rescaling of value axes (\ref ++ QCPAxis::rescale). ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn int QCPDataContainer::size() const ++ ++ Returns the number of data points in the container. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn bool QCPDataContainer::isEmpty() const ++ ++ Returns whether this container holds no data points. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataContainer::const_iterator QCPDataContainer::constBegin() const ++ ++ Returns a const iterator to the first data point in this container. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataContainer::const_iterator QCPDataContainer::constEnd() const ++ ++ Returns a const iterator to the element past the last data point in this container. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataContainer::iterator QCPDataContainer::begin() const ++ ++ Returns a non-const iterator to the first data point in this container. ++ ++ You can manipulate the data points in-place through the non-const iterators, but great care must ++ be taken when manipulating the sort key of a data point, see \ref sort, or the detailed ++ description of this class. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataContainer::iterator QCPDataContainer::end() const ++ ++ Returns a non-const iterator to the element past the last data point in this container. ++ ++ You can manipulate the data points in-place through the non-const iterators, but great care must ++ be taken when manipulating the sort key of a data point, see \ref sort, or the detailed ++ description of this class. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataContainer::const_iterator QCPDataContainer::at(int index) const ++ ++ Returns a const iterator to the element with the specified \a index. If \a index points beyond ++ the available elements in this container, returns \ref constEnd, i.e. an iterator past the last ++ valid element. ++ ++ You can use this method to easily obtain iterators from a \ref QCPDataRange, see the \ref ++ dataselection-accessing "data selection page" for an example. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPDataRange QCPDataContainer::dataRange() const ++ ++ Returns a \ref QCPDataRange encompassing the entire data set of this container. This means the ++ begin index of the returned range is 0, and the end index is \ref size. ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Constructs a QCPDataContainer used for plottable classes that represent a series of key-sorted ++ data ++*/ ++template ++QCPDataContainer::QCPDataContainer() : ++ mAutoSqueeze(true), ++ mPreallocSize(0), ++ mPreallocIteration(0) ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Sets whether the container automatically decides when to release memory from its post- and ++ preallocation pools when data points are removed. By default this is enabled and for typical ++ applications shouldn't be changed. ++ ++ If auto squeeze is disabled, you can manually decide when to release pre-/postallocation with ++ \ref squeeze. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::setAutoSqueeze(bool enabled) ++{ ++ if (mAutoSqueeze != enabled) ++ { ++ mAutoSqueeze = enabled; ++ if (mAutoSqueeze) ++ performAutoSqueeze(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data in this container with the provided \a data. ++ ++ \see add, remove ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::set(const QCPDataContainer &data) ++{ ++ clear(); ++ add(data); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Replaces the current data in this container with the provided \a data ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the data points in \a data have ascending order with respect to the ++ DataType's sort key, set \a alreadySorted to true to avoid an unnecessary sorting run. ++ ++ \see add, remove ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::set(const QVector &data, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ mData = data; ++ mPreallocSize = 0; ++ mPreallocIteration = 0; ++ if (!alreadySorted) ++ sort(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided \a data to the current data in this container. ++ ++ \see set, remove ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::add(const QCPDataContainer &data) ++{ ++ if (data.isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ ++ const int n = data.size(); ++ const int oldSize = size(); ++ ++ if (oldSize > 0 && !qcpLessThanSortKey(*constBegin(), *(data.constEnd()-1))) // prepend if new data keys are all smaller than or equal to existing ones ++ { ++ if (mPreallocSize < n) ++ preallocateGrow(n); ++ mPreallocSize -= n; ++ std::copy(data.constBegin(), data.constEnd(), begin()); ++ } else // don't need to prepend, so append and merge if necessary ++ { ++ mData.resize(mData.size()+n); ++ std::copy(data.constBegin(), data.constEnd(), end()-n); ++ if (oldSize > 0 && !qcpLessThanSortKey(*(constEnd()-n-1), *(constEnd()-n))) // if appended range keys aren't all greater than existing ones, merge the two partitions ++ std::inplace_merge(begin(), end()-n, end(), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Adds the provided data points in \a data to the current data. ++ ++ If you can guarantee that the data points in \a data have ascending order with respect to the ++ DataType's sort key, set \a alreadySorted to true to avoid an unnecessary sorting run. ++ ++ \see set, remove ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::add(const QVector &data, bool alreadySorted) ++{ ++ if (data.isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ { ++ set(data, alreadySorted); ++ return; ++ } ++ ++ const int n = data.size(); ++ const int oldSize = size(); ++ ++ if (alreadySorted && oldSize > 0 && !qcpLessThanSortKey(*constBegin(), *(data.constEnd()-1))) // prepend if new data is sorted and keys are all smaller than or equal to existing ones ++ { ++ if (mPreallocSize < n) ++ preallocateGrow(n); ++ mPreallocSize -= n; ++ std::copy(data.constBegin(), data.constEnd(), begin()); ++ } else // don't need to prepend, so append and then sort and merge if necessary ++ { ++ mData.resize(mData.size()+n); ++ std::copy(data.constBegin(), data.constEnd(), end()-n); ++ if (!alreadySorted) // sort appended subrange if it wasn't already sorted ++ std::sort(end()-n, end(), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ if (oldSize > 0 && !qcpLessThanSortKey(*(constEnd()-n-1), *(constEnd()-n))) // if appended range keys aren't all greater than existing ones, merge the two partitions ++ std::inplace_merge(begin(), end()-n, end(), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Adds the provided single data point to the current data. ++ ++ \see remove ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::add(const DataType &data) ++{ ++ if (isEmpty() || !qcpLessThanSortKey(data, *(constEnd()-1))) // quickly handle appends if new data key is greater or equal to existing ones ++ { ++ mData.append(data); ++ } else if (qcpLessThanSortKey(data, *constBegin())) // quickly handle prepends using preallocated space ++ { ++ if (mPreallocSize < 1) ++ preallocateGrow(1); ++ --mPreallocSize; ++ *begin() = data; ++ } else // handle inserts, maintaining sorted keys ++ { ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator insertionPoint = std::lower_bound(begin(), end(), data, qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ mData.insert(insertionPoint, data); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all data points with (sort-)keys smaller than or equal to \a sortKey. ++ ++ \see removeAfter, remove, clear ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::removeBefore(double sortKey) ++{ ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator it = begin(); ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator itEnd = std::lower_bound(begin(), end(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKey), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ mPreallocSize += itEnd-it; // don't actually delete, just add it to the preallocated block (if it gets too large, squeeze will take care of it) ++ if (mAutoSqueeze) ++ performAutoSqueeze(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all data points with (sort-)keys greater than or equal to \a sortKey. ++ ++ \see removeBefore, remove, clear ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::removeAfter(double sortKey) ++{ ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator it = std::upper_bound(begin(), end(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKey), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator itEnd = end(); ++ mData.erase(it, itEnd); // typically adds it to the postallocated block ++ if (mAutoSqueeze) ++ performAutoSqueeze(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all data points with (sort-)keys between \a sortKeyFrom and \a sortKeyTo. if \a ++ sortKeyFrom is greater or equal to \a sortKeyTo, the function does nothing. To remove a single ++ data point with known (sort-)key, use \ref remove(double sortKey). ++ ++ \see removeBefore, removeAfter, clear ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::remove(double sortKeyFrom, double sortKeyTo) ++{ ++ if (sortKeyFrom >= sortKeyTo || isEmpty()) ++ return; ++ ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator it = std::lower_bound(begin(), end(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKeyFrom), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator itEnd = std::upper_bound(it, end(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKeyTo), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ mData.erase(it, itEnd); ++ if (mAutoSqueeze) ++ performAutoSqueeze(); ++} ++ ++/*! \overload ++ ++ Removes a single data point at \a sortKey. If the position is not known with absolute (binary) ++ precision, consider using \ref remove(double sortKeyFrom, double sortKeyTo) with a small ++ fuzziness interval around the suspected position, depending on the precision with which the ++ (sort-)key is known. ++ ++ \see removeBefore, removeAfter, clear ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::remove(double sortKey) ++{ ++ QCPDataContainer::iterator it = std::lower_bound(begin(), end(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKey), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ if (it != end() && it->sortKey() == sortKey) ++ { ++ if (it == begin()) ++ ++mPreallocSize; // don't actually delete, just add it to the preallocated block (if it gets too large, squeeze will take care of it) ++ else ++ mData.erase(it); ++ } ++ if (mAutoSqueeze) ++ performAutoSqueeze(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Removes all data points. ++ ++ \see remove, removeAfter, removeBefore ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::clear() ++{ ++ mData.clear(); ++ mPreallocIteration = 0; ++ mPreallocSize = 0; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Re-sorts all data points in the container by their sort key. ++ ++ When setting, adding or removing points using the QCPDataContainer interface (\ref set, \ref add, ++ \ref remove, etc.), the container makes sure to always stay in a sorted state such that a full ++ resort is never necessary. However, if you choose to directly manipulate the sort key on data ++ points by accessing and modifying it through the non-const iterators (\ref begin, \ref end), it ++ is your responsibility to bring the container back into a sorted state before any other methods ++ are called on it. This can be achieved by calling this method immediately after finishing the ++ sort key manipulation. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::sort() ++{ ++ std::sort(begin(), end(), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Frees all unused memory that is currently in the preallocation and postallocation pools. ++ ++ Note that QCPDataContainer automatically decides whether squeezing is necessary, if \ref ++ setAutoSqueeze is left enabled. It should thus not be necessary to use this method for typical ++ applications. ++ ++ The parameters \a preAllocation and \a postAllocation control whether pre- and/or post allocation ++ should be freed, respectively. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::squeeze(bool preAllocation, bool postAllocation) ++{ ++ if (preAllocation) ++ { ++ if (mPreallocSize > 0) ++ { ++ std::copy(begin(), end(), mData.begin()); ++ mData.resize(size()); ++ mPreallocSize = 0; ++ } ++ mPreallocIteration = 0; ++ } ++ if (postAllocation) ++ mData.squeeze(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns an iterator to the data point with a (sort-)key that is equal to, just below, or just ++ above \a sortKey. If \a expandedRange is true, the data point just below \a sortKey will be ++ considered, otherwise the one just above. ++ ++ This can be used in conjunction with \ref findEnd to iterate over data points within a given key ++ range, including or excluding the bounding data points that are just beyond the specified range. ++ ++ If \a expandedRange is true but there are no data points below \a sortKey, \ref constBegin is ++ returned. ++ ++ If the container is empty, returns \ref constEnd. ++ ++ \see findEnd, QCPPlottableInterface1D::findBegin ++*/ ++template ++typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator QCPDataContainer::findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ return constEnd(); ++ ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = std::lower_bound(constBegin(), constEnd(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKey), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ if (expandedRange && it != constBegin()) // also covers it == constEnd case, and we know --constEnd is valid because mData isn't empty ++ --it; ++ return it; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns an iterator to the element after the data point with a (sort-)key that is equal to, just ++ above or just below \a sortKey. If \a expandedRange is true, the data point just above \a sortKey ++ will be considered, otherwise the one just below. ++ ++ This can be used in conjunction with \ref findBegin to iterate over data points within a given ++ key range, including the bounding data points that are just below and above the specified range. ++ ++ If \a expandedRange is true but there are no data points above \a sortKey, \ref constEnd is ++ returned. ++ ++ If the container is empty, \ref constEnd is returned. ++ ++ \see findBegin, QCPPlottableInterface1D::findEnd ++*/ ++template ++typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator QCPDataContainer::findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ return constEnd(); ++ ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = std::upper_bound(constBegin(), constEnd(), DataType::fromSortKey(sortKey), qcpLessThanSortKey); ++ if (expandedRange && it != constEnd()) ++ ++it; ++ return it; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the range encompassed by the (main-)key coordinate of all data points. The output ++ parameter \a foundRange indicates whether a sensible range was found. If this is false, you ++ should not use the returned QCPRange (e.g. the data container is empty or all points have the ++ same key). ++ ++ Use \a signDomain to control which sign of the key coordinates should be considered. This is ++ relevant e.g. for logarithmic plots which can mathematically only display one sign domain at a ++ time. ++ ++ If the DataType reports that its main key is equal to the sort key (\a sortKeyIsMainKey), as is ++ the case for most plottables, this method uses this fact and finds the range very quickly. ++ ++ \see valueRange ++*/ ++template ++QCPRange QCPDataContainer::keyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain signDomain) ++{ ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ { ++ foundRange = false; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++ QCPRange range; ++ bool haveLower = false; ++ bool haveUpper = false; ++ double current; ++ ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = constBegin(); ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = constEnd(); ++ if (signDomain == QCP::sdBoth) // range may be anywhere ++ { ++ if (DataType::sortKeyIsMainKey()) // if DataType is sorted by main key (e.g. QCPGraph, but not QCPCurve), use faster algorithm by finding just first and last key with non-NaN value ++ { ++ while (it != itEnd) // find first non-nan going up from left ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->mainValue())) ++ { ++ range.lower = it->mainKey(); ++ haveLower = true; ++ break; ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ it = itEnd; ++ while (it != constBegin()) // find first non-nan going down from right ++ { ++ --it; ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->mainValue())) ++ { ++ range.upper = it->mainKey(); ++ haveUpper = true; ++ break; ++ } ++ } ++ } else // DataType is not sorted by main key, go through all data points and accordingly expand range ++ { ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->mainValue())) ++ { ++ current = it->mainKey(); ++ if (current < range.lower || !haveLower) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if (current > range.upper || !haveUpper) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ } ++ } else if (signDomain == QCP::sdNegative) // range may only be in the negative sign domain ++ { ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->mainValue())) ++ { ++ current = it->mainKey(); ++ if ((current < range.lower || !haveLower) && current < 0) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if ((current > range.upper || !haveUpper) && current < 0) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ } else if (signDomain == QCP::sdPositive) // range may only be in the positive sign domain ++ { ++ while (it != itEnd) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(it->mainValue())) ++ { ++ current = it->mainKey(); ++ if ((current < range.lower || !haveLower) && current > 0) ++ { ++ range.lower = current; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if ((current > range.upper || !haveUpper) && current > 0) ++ { ++ range.upper = current; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ ++it; ++ } ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper; ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Returns the range encompassed by the value coordinates of the data points in the specified key ++ range (\a inKeyRange), using the full \a DataType::valueRange reported by the data points. The ++ output parameter \a foundRange indicates whether a sensible range was found. If this is false, ++ you should not use the returned QCPRange (e.g. the data container is empty or all points have the ++ same value). ++ ++ If \a inKeyRange has both lower and upper bound set to zero (is equal to QCPRange()), ++ all data points are considered, without any restriction on the keys. ++ ++ Use \a signDomain to control which sign of the value coordinates should be considered. This is ++ relevant e.g. for logarithmic plots which can mathematically only display one sign domain at a ++ time. ++ ++ \see keyRange ++*/ ++template ++QCPRange QCPDataContainer::valueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain signDomain, const QCPRange &inKeyRange) ++{ ++ if (isEmpty()) ++ { ++ foundRange = false; ++ return QCPRange(); ++ } ++ QCPRange range; ++ const bool restrictKeyRange = inKeyRange != QCPRange(); ++ bool haveLower = false; ++ bool haveUpper = false; ++ QCPRange current; ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator itBegin = constBegin(); ++ QCPDataContainer::const_iterator itEnd = constEnd(); ++ if (DataType::sortKeyIsMainKey() && restrictKeyRange) ++ { ++ itBegin = findBegin(inKeyRange.lower); ++ itEnd = findEnd(inKeyRange.upper); ++ } ++ if (signDomain == QCP::sdBoth) // range may be anywhere ++ { ++ for (QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (restrictKeyRange && (it->mainKey() < inKeyRange.lower || it->mainKey() > inKeyRange.upper)) ++ continue; ++ current = it->valueRange(); ++ if ((current.lower < range.lower || !haveLower) && !qIsNaN(current.lower)) ++ { ++ range.lower = current.lower; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if ((current.upper > range.upper || !haveUpper) && !qIsNaN(current.upper)) ++ { ++ range.upper = current.upper; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } else if (signDomain == QCP::sdNegative) // range may only be in the negative sign domain ++ { ++ for (QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (restrictKeyRange && (it->mainKey() < inKeyRange.lower || it->mainKey() > inKeyRange.upper)) ++ continue; ++ current = it->valueRange(); ++ if ((current.lower < range.lower || !haveLower) && current.lower < 0 && !qIsNaN(current.lower)) ++ { ++ range.lower = current.lower; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if ((current.upper > range.upper || !haveUpper) && current.upper < 0 && !qIsNaN(current.upper)) ++ { ++ range.upper = current.upper; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } else if (signDomain == QCP::sdPositive) // range may only be in the positive sign domain ++ { ++ for (QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = itBegin; it != itEnd; ++it) ++ { ++ if (restrictKeyRange && (it->mainKey() < inKeyRange.lower || it->mainKey() > inKeyRange.upper)) ++ continue; ++ current = it->valueRange(); ++ if ((current.lower < range.lower || !haveLower) && current.lower > 0 && !qIsNaN(current.lower)) ++ { ++ range.lower = current.lower; ++ haveLower = true; ++ } ++ if ((current.upper > range.upper || !haveUpper) && current.upper > 0 && !qIsNaN(current.upper)) ++ { ++ range.upper = current.upper; ++ haveUpper = true; ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ ++ foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper; ++ return range; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Makes sure \a begin and \a end mark a data range that is both within the bounds of this data ++ container's data, as well as within the specified \a dataRange. ++ ++ This function doesn't require for \a dataRange to be within the bounds of this data container's ++ valid range. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::limitIteratorsToDataRange(const_iterator &begin, const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const ++{ ++ QCPDataRange iteratorRange(begin-constBegin(), end-constBegin()); ++ iteratorRange = iteratorRange.bounded(dataRange.bounded(this->dataRange())); ++ begin = constBegin()+iteratorRange.begin(); ++ end = constBegin()+iteratorRange.end(); ++} ++ ++/*! \internal ++ ++ Increases the preallocation pool to have a size of at least \a minimumPreallocSize. Depending on ++ the preallocation history, the container will grow by more than requested, to speed up future ++ consecutive size increases. ++ ++ if \a minimumPreallocSize is smaller than or equal to the current preallocation pool size, this ++ method does nothing. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPDataContainer::preallocateGrow(int minimumPreallocSize) ++{ ++ if (minimumPreallocSize <= mPreallocSize) ++ return; ++ ++ int newPreallocSize = minimumPreallocSize; ++ newPreallocSize += (1u< ++void QCPDataContainer::performAutoSqueeze() ++{ ++ const int totalAlloc = mData.capacity(); ++ const int postAllocSize = totalAlloc-mData.size(); ++ const int usedSize = size(); ++ bool shrinkPostAllocation = false; ++ bool shrinkPreAllocation = false; ++ if (totalAlloc > 650000) // if allocation is larger, shrink earlier with respect to total used size ++ { ++ shrinkPostAllocation = postAllocSize > usedSize*1.5; // QVector grow strategy is 2^n for static data. Watch out not to oscillate! ++ shrinkPreAllocation = mPreallocSize*10 > usedSize; ++ } else if (totalAlloc > 1000) // below 10 MiB raw data be generous with preallocated memory, below 1k points don't even bother ++ { ++ shrinkPostAllocation = postAllocSize > usedSize*5; ++ shrinkPreAllocation = mPreallocSize > usedSize*1.5; // preallocation can grow into postallocation, so can be smaller ++ } ++ ++ if (shrinkPreAllocation || shrinkPostAllocation) ++ squeeze(shrinkPreAllocation, shrinkPostAllocation); ++} ++/* end of 'src/datacontainer.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/datacontainer.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottable.h', size 8312 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPSelectionDecorator ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ QCPSelectionDecorator(); ++ virtual ~QCPSelectionDecorator(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QCPScatterStyle scatterStyle() const { return mScatterStyle; } ++ QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties usedScatterProperties() const { return mUsedScatterProperties; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &scatterStyle, QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties usedProperties=QCPScatterStyle::spPen); ++ void setUsedScatterProperties(const QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties &properties); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void applyPen(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ void applyBrush(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ QCPScatterStyle getFinalScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &unselectedStyle) const; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void copyFrom(const QCPSelectionDecorator *other); ++ virtual void drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen; ++ QBrush mBrush; ++ QCPScatterStyle mScatterStyle; ++ QCPScatterStyle::ScatterProperties mUsedScatterProperties; ++ // non-property members: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *mPlottable; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual bool registerWithPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPSelectionDecorator) ++ friend class QCPAbstractPlottable; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPSelectionDecorator*) ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAbstractPlottable : public QCPLayerable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString name READ name WRITE setName) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool antialiasedFill READ antialiasedFill WRITE setAntialiasedFill) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool antialiasedScatters READ antialiasedScatters WRITE setAntialiasedScatters) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxis* keyAxis READ keyAxis WRITE setKeyAxis) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxis* valueAxis READ valueAxis WRITE setValueAxis) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCP::SelectionType selectable READ selectable WRITE setSelectable NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPDataSelection selection READ selection WRITE setSelection NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPSelectionDecorator* selectionDecorator READ selectionDecorator WRITE setSelectionDecorator) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPAbstractPlottable(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString name() const { return mName; } ++ bool antialiasedFill() const { return mAntialiasedFill; } ++ bool antialiasedScatters() const { return mAntialiasedScatters; } ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis() const { return mKeyAxis.data(); } ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis() const { return mValueAxis.data(); } ++ QCP::SelectionType selectable() const { return mSelectable; } ++ bool selected() const { return !mSelection.isEmpty(); } ++ QCPDataSelection selection() const { return mSelection; } ++ QCPSelectionDecorator *selectionDecorator() const { return mSelectionDecorator; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setName(const QString &name); ++ void setAntialiasedFill(bool enabled); ++ void setAntialiasedScatters(bool enabled); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setKeyAxis(QCPAxis *axis); ++ void setValueAxis(QCPAxis *axis); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectable(QCP::SelectionType selectable); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelection(QCPDataSelection selection); ++ void setSelectionDecorator(QCPSelectionDecorator *decorator); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const = 0; ++ virtual QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1D() { return 0; } ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const = 0; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const = 0; ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void coordsToPixels(double key, double value, double &x, double &y) const; ++ const QPointF coordsToPixels(double key, double value) const; ++ void pixelsToCoords(double x, double y, double &key, double &value) const; ++ void pixelsToCoords(const QPointF &pixelPos, double &key, double &value) const; ++ void rescaleAxes(bool onlyEnlarge=false) const; ++ void rescaleKeyAxis(bool onlyEnlarge=false) const; ++ void rescaleValueAxis(bool onlyEnlarge=false, bool inKeyRange=false) const; ++ bool addToLegend(QCPLegend *legend); ++ bool addToLegend(); ++ bool removeFromLegend(QCPLegend *legend) const; ++ bool removeFromLegend() const; ++ ++signals: ++ void selectionChanged(bool selected); ++ void selectionChanged(const QCPDataSelection &selection); ++ void selectableChanged(QCP::SelectionType selectable); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mName; ++ bool mAntialiasedFill, mAntialiasedScatters; ++ QPen mPen; ++ QBrush mBrush; ++ QPointer mKeyAxis, mValueAxis; ++ QCP::SelectionType mSelectable; ++ QCPDataSelection mSelection; ++ QCPSelectionDecorator *mSelectionDecorator; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QRect clipRect() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE = 0; ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const = 0; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void applyFillAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ void applyScattersAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAbstractPlottable) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPAxis; ++ friend class QCPPlottableLegendItem; ++}; ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottable.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/item.h', size 9368 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemAnchor ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ QCPItemAnchor(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name, int anchorId=-1); ++ virtual ~QCPItemAnchor(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString name() const { return mName; } ++ virtual QPointF pixelPosition() const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mName; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ QCPAbstractItem *mParentItem; ++ int mAnchorId; ++ QSet mChildrenX, mChildrenY; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPItemPosition *toQCPItemPosition() { return 0; } ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void addChildX(QCPItemPosition* pos); // called from pos when this anchor is set as parent ++ void removeChildX(QCPItemPosition *pos); // called from pos when its parent anchor is reset or pos deleted ++ void addChildY(QCPItemPosition* pos); // called from pos when this anchor is set as parent ++ void removeChildY(QCPItemPosition *pos); // called from pos when its parent anchor is reset or pos deleted ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPItemAnchor) ++ ++ friend class QCPItemPosition; ++}; ++ ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemPosition : public QCPItemAnchor ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the ways an item position can be specified. Thus it defines what the numbers passed to ++ \ref setCoords actually mean. ++ ++ \see setType ++ */ ++ enum PositionType { ptAbsolute ///< Static positioning in pixels, starting from the top left corner of the viewport/widget. ++ ,ptViewportRatio ///< Static positioning given by a fraction of the viewport size. For example, if you call setCoords(0, 0), the position will be at the top ++ ///< left corner of the viewport/widget. setCoords(1, 1) will be at the bottom right corner, setCoords(0.5, 0) will be horizontally centered and ++ ///< vertically at the top of the viewport/widget, etc. ++ ,ptAxisRectRatio ///< Static positioning given by a fraction of the axis rect size (see \ref setAxisRect). For example, if you call setCoords(0, 0), the position will be at the top ++ ///< left corner of the axis rect. setCoords(1, 1) will be at the bottom right corner, setCoords(0.5, 0) will be horizontally centered and ++ ///< vertically at the top of the axis rect, etc. You can also go beyond the axis rect by providing negative coordinates or coordinates larger than 1. ++ ,ptPlotCoords ///< Dynamic positioning at a plot coordinate defined by two axes (see \ref setAxes). ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(PositionType) ++ ++ QCPItemPosition(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, QCPAbstractItem *parentItem, const QString &name); ++ virtual ~QCPItemPosition(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ PositionType type() const { return typeX(); } ++ PositionType typeX() const { return mPositionTypeX; } ++ PositionType typeY() const { return mPositionTypeY; } ++ QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor() const { return parentAnchorX(); } ++ QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchorX() const { return mParentAnchorX; } ++ QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchorY() const { return mParentAnchorY; } ++ double key() const { return mKey; } ++ double value() const { return mValue; } ++ QPointF coords() const { return QPointF(mKey, mValue); } ++ QCPAxis *keyAxis() const { return mKeyAxis.data(); } ++ QCPAxis *valueAxis() const { return mValueAxis.data(); } ++ QCPAxisRect *axisRect() const; ++ virtual QPointF pixelPosition() const; ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setType(PositionType type); ++ void setTypeX(PositionType type); ++ void setTypeY(PositionType type); ++ bool setParentAnchor(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition=false); ++ bool setParentAnchorX(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition=false); ++ bool setParentAnchorY(QCPItemAnchor *parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition=false); ++ void setCoords(double key, double value); ++ void setCoords(const QPointF &coords); ++ void setAxes(QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis); ++ void setAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *axisRect); ++ void setPixelPosition(const QPointF &pixelPosition); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ PositionType mPositionTypeX, mPositionTypeY; ++ QPointer mKeyAxis, mValueAxis; ++ QPointer mAxisRect; ++ double mKey, mValue; ++ QCPItemAnchor *mParentAnchorX, *mParentAnchorY; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPItemPosition *toQCPItemPosition() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE { return this; } ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPItemPosition) ++ ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPItemPosition::PositionType) ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAbstractItem : public QCPLayerable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool clipToAxisRect READ clipToAxisRect WRITE setClipToAxisRect) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxisRect* clipAxisRect READ clipAxisRect WRITE setClipAxisRect) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selectable READ selectable WRITE setSelectable NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selected READ selected WRITE setSelected NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPAbstractItem(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPAbstractItem(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ bool clipToAxisRect() const { return mClipToAxisRect; } ++ QCPAxisRect *clipAxisRect() const; ++ bool selectable() const { return mSelectable; } ++ bool selected() const { return mSelected; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setClipToAxisRect(bool clip); ++ void setClipAxisRect(QCPAxisRect *rect); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectable(bool selectable); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelected(bool selected); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE = 0; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QList positions() const { return mPositions; } ++ QList anchors() const { return mAnchors; } ++ QCPItemPosition *position(const QString &name) const; ++ QCPItemAnchor *anchor(const QString &name) const; ++ bool hasAnchor(const QString &name) const; ++ ++signals: ++ void selectionChanged(bool selected); ++ void selectableChanged(bool selectable); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ bool mClipToAxisRect; ++ QPointer mClipAxisRect; ++ QList mPositions; ++ QList mAnchors; ++ bool mSelectable, mSelected; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QRect clipRect() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE = 0; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ double rectDistance(const QRectF &rect, const QPointF &pos, bool filledRect) const; ++ QCPItemPosition *createPosition(const QString &name); ++ QCPItemAnchor *createAnchor(const QString &name, int anchorId); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAbstractItem) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPItemAnchor; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/item.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/core.h', size 14797 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCustomPlot : public QWidget ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QRect viewport READ viewport WRITE setViewport) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPixmap background READ background WRITE setBackground) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool backgroundScaled READ backgroundScaled WRITE setBackgroundScaled) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::AspectRatioMode backgroundScaledMode READ backgroundScaledMode WRITE setBackgroundScaledMode) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLayoutGrid* plotLayout READ plotLayout) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool autoAddPlottableToLegend READ autoAddPlottableToLegend WRITE setAutoAddPlottableToLegend) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int selectionTolerance READ selectionTolerance WRITE setSelectionTolerance) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool noAntialiasingOnDrag READ noAntialiasingOnDrag WRITE setNoAntialiasingOnDrag) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::KeyboardModifier multiSelectModifier READ multiSelectModifier WRITE setMultiSelectModifier) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool openGl READ openGl WRITE setOpenGl) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how a layer should be inserted relative to an other layer. ++ ++ \see addLayer, moveLayer ++ */ ++ enum LayerInsertMode { limBelow ///< Layer is inserted below other layer ++ ,limAbove ///< Layer is inserted above other layer ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(LayerInsertMode) ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines with what timing the QCustomPlot surface is refreshed after a replot. ++ ++ \see replot ++ */ ++ enum RefreshPriority { rpImmediateRefresh ///< Replots immediately and repaints the widget immediately by calling QWidget::repaint() after the replot ++ ,rpQueuedRefresh ///< Replots immediately, but queues the widget repaint, by calling QWidget::update() after the replot. This way multiple redundant widget repaints can be avoided. ++ ,rpRefreshHint ///< Whether to use immediate or queued refresh depends on whether the plotting hint \ref QCP::phImmediateRefresh is set, see \ref setPlottingHints. ++ ,rpQueuedReplot ///< Queues the entire replot for the next event loop iteration. This way multiple redundant replots can be avoided. The actual replot is then done with \ref rpRefreshHint priority. ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(RefreshPriority) ++ ++ explicit QCustomPlot(QWidget *parent = 0); ++ virtual ~QCustomPlot(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QRect viewport() const { return mViewport; } ++ double bufferDevicePixelRatio() const { return mBufferDevicePixelRatio; } ++ QPixmap background() const { return mBackgroundPixmap; } ++ bool backgroundScaled() const { return mBackgroundScaled; } ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode backgroundScaledMode() const { return mBackgroundScaledMode; } ++ QCPLayoutGrid *plotLayout() const { return mPlotLayout; } ++ QCP::AntialiasedElements antialiasedElements() const { return mAntialiasedElements; } ++ QCP::AntialiasedElements notAntialiasedElements() const { return mNotAntialiasedElements; } ++ bool autoAddPlottableToLegend() const { return mAutoAddPlottableToLegend; } ++ const QCP::Interactions interactions() const { return mInteractions; } ++ int selectionTolerance() const { return mSelectionTolerance; } ++ bool noAntialiasingOnDrag() const { return mNoAntialiasingOnDrag; } ++ QCP::PlottingHints plottingHints() const { return mPlottingHints; } ++ Qt::KeyboardModifier multiSelectModifier() const { return mMultiSelectModifier; } ++ QCP::SelectionRectMode selectionRectMode() const { return mSelectionRectMode; } ++ QCPSelectionRect *selectionRect() const { return mSelectionRect; } ++ bool openGl() const { return mOpenGl; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setViewport(const QRect &rect); ++ void setBufferDevicePixelRatio(double ratio); ++ void setBackground(const QPixmap &pm); ++ void setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode=Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding); ++ void setBackground(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled); ++ void setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode); ++ void setAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements &antialiasedElements); ++ void setAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement antialiasedElement, bool enabled=true); ++ void setNotAntialiasedElements(const QCP::AntialiasedElements ¬AntialiasedElements); ++ void setNotAntialiasedElement(QCP::AntialiasedElement notAntialiasedElement, bool enabled=true); ++ void setAutoAddPlottableToLegend(bool on); ++ void setInteractions(const QCP::Interactions &interactions); ++ void setInteraction(const QCP::Interaction &interaction, bool enabled=true); ++ void setSelectionTolerance(int pixels); ++ void setNoAntialiasingOnDrag(bool enabled); ++ void setPlottingHints(const QCP::PlottingHints &hints); ++ void setPlottingHint(QCP::PlottingHint hint, bool enabled=true); ++ void setMultiSelectModifier(Qt::KeyboardModifier modifier); ++ void setSelectionRectMode(QCP::SelectionRectMode mode); ++ void setSelectionRect(QCPSelectionRect *selectionRect); ++ void setOpenGl(bool enabled, int multisampling=16); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ // plottable interface: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable(int index); ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable(); ++ bool removePlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable); ++ bool removePlottable(int index); ++ int clearPlottables(); ++ int plottableCount() const; ++ QList selectedPlottables() const; ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *plottableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable=false) const; ++ bool hasPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const; ++ ++ // specialized interface for QCPGraph: ++ QCPGraph *graph(int index) const; ++ QCPGraph *graph() const; ++ QCPGraph *addGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis=0, QCPAxis *valueAxis=0); ++ bool removeGraph(QCPGraph *graph); ++ bool removeGraph(int index); ++ int clearGraphs(); ++ int graphCount() const; ++ QList selectedGraphs() const; ++ ++ // item interface: ++ QCPAbstractItem *item(int index) const; ++ QCPAbstractItem *item() const; ++ bool removeItem(QCPAbstractItem *item); ++ bool removeItem(int index); ++ int clearItems(); ++ int itemCount() const; ++ QList selectedItems() const; ++ QCPAbstractItem *itemAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable=false) const; ++ bool hasItem(QCPAbstractItem *item) const; ++ ++ // layer interface: ++ QCPLayer *layer(const QString &name) const; ++ QCPLayer *layer(int index) const; ++ QCPLayer *currentLayer() const; ++ bool setCurrentLayer(const QString &name); ++ bool setCurrentLayer(QCPLayer *layer); ++ int layerCount() const; ++ bool addLayer(const QString &name, QCPLayer *otherLayer=0, LayerInsertMode insertMode=limAbove); ++ bool removeLayer(QCPLayer *layer); ++ bool moveLayer(QCPLayer *layer, QCPLayer *otherLayer, LayerInsertMode insertMode=limAbove); ++ ++ // axis rect/layout interface: ++ int axisRectCount() const; ++ QCPAxisRect* axisRect(int index=0) const; ++ QList axisRects() const; ++ QCPLayoutElement* layoutElementAt(const QPointF &pos) const; ++ QCPAxisRect* axisRectAt(const QPointF &pos) const; ++ Q_SLOT void rescaleAxes(bool onlyVisiblePlottables=false); ++ ++ QList selectedAxes() const; ++ QList selectedLegends() const; ++ Q_SLOT void deselectAll(); ++ ++ bool savePdf(const QString &fileName, int width=0, int height=0, QCP::ExportPen exportPen=QCP::epAllowCosmetic, const QString &pdfCreator=QString(), const QString &pdfTitle=QString()); ++ bool savePng(const QString &fileName, int width=0, int height=0, double scale=1.0, int quality=-1, int resolution=96, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit=QCP::ruDotsPerInch); ++ bool saveJpg(const QString &fileName, int width=0, int height=0, double scale=1.0, int quality=-1, int resolution=96, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit=QCP::ruDotsPerInch); ++ bool saveBmp(const QString &fileName, int width=0, int height=0, double scale=1.0, int resolution=96, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit=QCP::ruDotsPerInch); ++ bool saveRastered(const QString &fileName, int width, int height, double scale, const char *format, int quality=-1, int resolution=96, QCP::ResolutionUnit resolutionUnit=QCP::ruDotsPerInch); ++ QPixmap toPixmap(int width=0, int height=0, double scale=1.0); ++ void toPainter(QCPPainter *painter, int width=0, int height=0); ++ Q_SLOT void replot(QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority refreshPriority=QCustomPlot::rpRefreshHint); ++ ++ QCPAxis *xAxis, *yAxis, *xAxis2, *yAxis2; ++ QCPLegend *legend; ++ ++signals: ++ void mouseDoubleClick(QMouseEvent *event); ++ void mousePress(QMouseEvent *event); ++ void mouseMove(QMouseEvent *event); ++ void mouseRelease(QMouseEvent *event); ++ void mouseWheel(QWheelEvent *event); ++ ++ void plottableClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void plottableDoubleClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable, int dataIndex, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void itemClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void itemDoubleClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void axisClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void axisDoubleClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void legendClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event); ++ void legendDoubleClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event); ++ ++ void selectionChangedByUser(); ++ void beforeReplot(); ++ void afterReplot(); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QRect mViewport; ++ double mBufferDevicePixelRatio; ++ QCPLayoutGrid *mPlotLayout; ++ bool mAutoAddPlottableToLegend; ++ QList mPlottables; ++ QList mGraphs; // extra list of plottables also in mPlottables that are of type QCPGraph ++ QList mItems; ++ QList mLayers; ++ QCP::AntialiasedElements mAntialiasedElements, mNotAntialiasedElements; ++ QCP::Interactions mInteractions; ++ int mSelectionTolerance; ++ bool mNoAntialiasingOnDrag; ++ QBrush mBackgroundBrush; ++ QPixmap mBackgroundPixmap; ++ QPixmap mScaledBackgroundPixmap; ++ bool mBackgroundScaled; ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode mBackgroundScaledMode; ++ QCPLayer *mCurrentLayer; ++ QCP::PlottingHints mPlottingHints; ++ Qt::KeyboardModifier mMultiSelectModifier; ++ QCP::SelectionRectMode mSelectionRectMode; ++ QCPSelectionRect *mSelectionRect; ++ bool mOpenGl; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QList > mPaintBuffers; ++ QPoint mMousePressPos; ++ bool mMouseHasMoved; ++ QPointer mMouseEventLayerable; ++ QVariant mMouseEventLayerableDetails; ++ bool mReplotting; ++ bool mReplotQueued; ++ int mOpenGlMultisamples; ++ QCP::AntialiasedElements mOpenGlAntialiasedElementsBackup; ++ bool mOpenGlCacheLabelsBackup; ++#ifdef QCP_OPENGL_FBO ++ QSharedPointer mGlContext; ++ QSharedPointer mGlSurface; ++ QSharedPointer mGlPaintDevice; ++#endif ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QSize minimumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize sizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void paintEvent(QPaintEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void resizeEvent(QResizeEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter); ++ virtual void updateLayout(); ++ virtual void axisRemoved(QCPAxis *axis); ++ virtual void legendRemoved(QCPLegend *legend); ++ Q_SLOT virtual void processRectSelection(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event); ++ Q_SLOT virtual void processRectZoom(QRect rect, QMouseEvent *event); ++ Q_SLOT virtual void processPointSelection(QMouseEvent *event); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ bool registerPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable); ++ bool registerGraph(QCPGraph *graph); ++ bool registerItem(QCPAbstractItem* item); ++ void updateLayerIndices() const; ++ QCPLayerable *layerableAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *selectionDetails=0) const; ++ QList layerableListAt(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QList *selectionDetails=0) const; ++ void drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter); ++ void setupPaintBuffers(); ++ QCPAbstractPaintBuffer *createPaintBuffer(); ++ bool hasInvalidatedPaintBuffers(); ++ bool setupOpenGl(); ++ void freeOpenGl(); ++ ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++ friend class QCPAxis; ++ friend class QCPLayer; ++ friend class QCPAxisRect; ++ friend class QCPAbstractPlottable; ++ friend class QCPGraph; ++ friend class QCPAbstractItem; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority) ++ ++/* end of 'src/core.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottable1d.h', size 4250 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPlottableInterface1D ++{ ++public: ++ // introduced pure virtual methods: ++ virtual int dataCount() const = 0; ++ virtual double dataMainKey(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual double dataSortKey(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual double dataMainValue(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual QCPRange dataValueRange(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual QPointF dataPixelPosition(int index) const = 0; ++ virtual bool sortKeyIsMainKey() const = 0; ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const = 0; ++ virtual int findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const = 0; ++ virtual int findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const = 0; ++}; ++ ++template ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAbstractPlottable1D : public QCPAbstractPlottable, public QCPPlottableInterface1D ++{ ++ // No Q_OBJECT macro due to template class ++ ++public: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable1D(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPAbstractPlottable1D(); ++ ++ // virtual methods of 1d plottable interface: ++ virtual int dataCount() const; ++ virtual double dataMainKey(int index) const; ++ virtual double dataSortKey(int index) const; ++ virtual double dataMainValue(int index) const; ++ virtual QCPRange dataValueRange(int index) const; ++ virtual QPointF dataPixelPosition(int index) const; ++ virtual bool sortKeyIsMainKey() const; ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const; ++ virtual int findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ virtual int findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ ++ // virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const; ++ virtual QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1D() { return this; } ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QSharedPointer > mDataContainer; ++ ++ // helpers for subclasses: ++ void getDataSegments(QList &selectedSegments, QList &unselectedSegments) const; ++ void drawPolyline(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lineData) const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAbstractPlottable1D) ++ ++}; ++ ++// include implementation in header since it is a class template: ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottable1d.cpp', size 22240 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPPlottableInterface1D ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPPlottableInterface1D ++ \brief Defines an abstract interface for one-dimensional plottables ++ ++ This class contains only pure virtual methods which define a common interface to the data ++ of one-dimensional plottables. ++ ++ For example, it is implemented by the template class \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D (the preferred ++ base class for one-dimensional plottables). So if you use that template class as base class of ++ your one-dimensional plottable, you won't have to care about implementing the 1d interface ++ yourself. ++ ++ If your plottable doesn't derive from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable1D but still wants to provide a 1d ++ interface (e.g. like \ref QCPErrorBars does), you should inherit from both \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable and \ref QCPPlottableInterface1D and accordingly reimplement the pure ++ virtual methods of the 1d interface, matching your data container. Also, reimplement \ref ++ QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D to return the \c this pointer. ++ ++ If you have a \ref QCPAbstractPlottable pointer, you can check whether it implements this ++ interface by calling \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::interface1D and testing it for a non-zero return ++ value. If it indeed implements this interface, you may use it to access the plottable's data ++ without needing to know the exact type of the plottable or its data point type. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual int QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataCount() const = 0; ++ ++ Returns the number of data points of the plottable. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPDataSelection QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const = 0; ++ ++ Returns a data selection containing all the data points of this plottable which are contained (or ++ hit by) \a rect. This is used mainly in the selection rect interaction for data selection (\ref ++ dataselection "data selection mechanism"). ++ ++ If \a onlySelectable is true, an empty QCPDataSelection is returned if this plottable is not ++ selectable (i.e. if \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable is \ref QCP::stNone). ++ ++ \note \a rect must be a normalized rect (positive or zero width and height). This is especially ++ important when using the rect of \ref QCPSelectionRect::accepted, which is not necessarily ++ normalized. Use QRect::normalized() when passing a rect which might not be normalized. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual double QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataMainKey(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the main key of the data point at the given \a index. ++ ++ What the main key is, is defined by the plottable's data type. See the \ref ++ qcpdatacontainer-datatype "QCPDataContainer DataType" documentation for details about this naming ++ convention. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual double QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataSortKey(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the sort key of the data point at the given \a index. ++ ++ What the sort key is, is defined by the plottable's data type. See the \ref ++ qcpdatacontainer-datatype "QCPDataContainer DataType" documentation for details about this naming ++ convention. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual double QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataMainValue(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the main value of the data point at the given \a index. ++ ++ What the main value is, is defined by the plottable's data type. See the \ref ++ qcpdatacontainer-datatype "QCPDataContainer DataType" documentation for details about this naming ++ convention. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QCPRange QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataValueRange(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the value range of the data point at the given \a index. ++ ++ What the value range is, is defined by the plottable's data type. See the \ref ++ qcpdatacontainer-datatype "QCPDataContainer DataType" documentation for details about this naming ++ convention. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual QPointF QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataPixelPosition(int index) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the pixel position on the widget surface at which the data point at the given \a index ++ appears. ++ ++ Usually this corresponds to the point of \ref dataMainKey/\ref dataMainValue, in pixel ++ coordinates. However, depending on the plottable, this might be a different apparent position ++ than just a coord-to-pixel transform of those values. For example, \ref QCPBars apparent data ++ values can be shifted depending on their stacking, bar grouping or configured base value. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual bool QCPPlottableInterface1D::sortKeyIsMainKey() const = 0 ++ ++ Returns whether the sort key (\ref dataSortKey) is identical to the main key (\ref dataMainKey). ++ ++ What the sort and main keys are, is defined by the plottable's data type. See the \ref ++ qcpdatacontainer-datatype "QCPDataContainer DataType" documentation for details about this naming ++ convention. ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual int QCPPlottableInterface1D::findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the index of the data point with a (sort-)key that is equal to, just below, or just above ++ \a sortKey. If \a expandedRange is true, the data point just below \a sortKey will be considered, ++ otherwise the one just above. ++ ++ This can be used in conjunction with \ref findEnd to iterate over data points within a given key ++ range, including or excluding the bounding data points that are just beyond the specified range. ++ ++ If \a expandedRange is true but there are no data points below \a sortKey, 0 is returned. ++ ++ If the container is empty, returns 0 (in that case, \ref findEnd will also return 0, so a loop ++ using these methods will not iterate over the index 0). ++ ++ \see findEnd, QCPDataContainer::findBegin ++*/ ++ ++/*! \fn virtual int QCPPlottableInterface1D::findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const = 0 ++ ++ Returns the index one after the data point with a (sort-)key that is equal to, just above, or ++ just below \a sortKey. If \a expandedRange is true, the data point just above \a sortKey will be ++ considered, otherwise the one just below. ++ ++ This can be used in conjunction with \ref findBegin to iterate over data points within a given ++ key range, including the bounding data points that are just below and above the specified range. ++ ++ If \a expandedRange is true but there are no data points above \a sortKey, the index just above the ++ highest data point is returned. ++ ++ If the container is empty, returns 0. ++ ++ \see findBegin, QCPDataContainer::findEnd ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */ ++ ++ ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++//////////////////// QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ++ ++/*! \class QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++ \brief A template base class for plottables with one-dimensional data ++ ++ This template class derives from \ref QCPAbstractPlottable and from the abstract interface \ref ++ QCPPlottableInterface1D. It serves as a base class for all one-dimensional data (i.e. data with ++ one key dimension), such as \ref QCPGraph and QCPCurve. ++ ++ The template parameter \a DataType is the type of the data points of this plottable (e.g. \ref ++ QCPGraphData or \ref QCPCurveData). The main purpose of this base class is to provide the member ++ \a mDataContainer (a shared pointer to a \ref QCPDataContainer "QCPDataContainer") and ++ implement the according virtual methods of the \ref QCPPlottableInterface1D, such that most ++ subclassed plottables don't need to worry about this anymore. ++ ++ Further, it provides a convenience method for retrieving selected/unselected data segments via ++ \ref getDataSegments. This is useful when subclasses implement their \ref draw method and need to ++ draw selected segments with a different pen/brush than unselected segments (also see \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecorator). ++ ++ This class implements basic functionality of \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::selectTest and \ref ++ QCPPlottableInterface1D::selectTestRect, assuming point-like data points, based on the 1D data ++ interface. In spite of that, most plottable subclasses will want to reimplement those methods ++ again, to provide a more accurate hit test based on their specific data visualization geometry. ++*/ ++ ++/* start documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! \fn QCPPlottableInterface1D *QCPAbstractPlottable1D::interface1D() ++ ++ Returns a \ref QCPPlottableInterface1D pointer to this plottable, providing access to its 1D ++ interface. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++ ++/* end documentation of inline functions */ ++ ++/*! ++ Forwards \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis to the \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::QCPAbstractPlottable ++ "QCPAbstractPlottable" constructor and allocates the \a mDataContainer. ++*/ ++template ++QCPAbstractPlottable1D::QCPAbstractPlottable1D(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis) : ++ QCPAbstractPlottable(keyAxis, valueAxis), ++ mDataContainer(new QCPDataContainer) ++{ ++} ++ ++template ++QCPAbstractPlottable1D::~QCPAbstractPlottable1D() ++{ ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataCount ++*/ ++template ++int QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataCount() const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->size(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataMainKey ++*/ ++template ++double QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataMainKey(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ return (mDataContainer->constBegin()+index)->mainKey(); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataSortKey ++*/ ++template ++double QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataSortKey(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ return (mDataContainer->constBegin()+index)->sortKey(); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataMainValue ++*/ ++template ++double QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataMainValue(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ return (mDataContainer->constBegin()+index)->mainValue(); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return 0; ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataValueRange ++*/ ++template ++QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataValueRange(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ return (mDataContainer->constBegin()+index)->valueRange(); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return QCPRange(0, 0); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::dataPixelPosition ++*/ ++template ++QPointF QCPAbstractPlottable1D::dataPixelPosition(int index) const ++{ ++ if (index >= 0 && index < mDataContainer->size()) ++ { ++ const typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it = mDataContainer->constBegin()+index; ++ return coordsToPixels(it->mainKey(), it->mainValue()); ++ } else ++ { ++ qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Index out of bounds" << index; ++ return QPointF(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::sortKeyIsMainKey ++*/ ++template ++bool QCPAbstractPlottable1D::sortKeyIsMainKey() const ++{ ++ return DataType::sortKeyIsMainKey(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Implements a rect-selection algorithm assuming the data (accessed via the 1D data interface) is ++ point-like. Most subclasses will want to reimplement this method again, to provide a more ++ accurate hit test based on the true data visualization geometry. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++template ++QCPDataSelection QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const ++{ ++ QCPDataSelection result; ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return result; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return result; ++ ++ // convert rect given in pixels to ranges given in plot coordinates: ++ double key1, value1, key2, value2; ++ pixelsToCoords(rect.topLeft(), key1, value1); ++ pixelsToCoords(rect.bottomRight(), key2, value2); ++ QCPRange keyRange(key1, key2); // QCPRange normalizes internally so we don't have to care about whether key1 < key2 ++ QCPRange valueRange(value1, value2); ++ typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (DataType::sortKeyIsMainKey()) // we can assume that data is sorted by main key, so can reduce the searched key interval: ++ { ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(keyRange.lower, false); ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(keyRange.upper, false); ++ } ++ if (begin == end) ++ return result; ++ ++ int currentSegmentBegin = -1; // -1 means we're currently not in a segment that's contained in rect ++ for (typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ if (currentSegmentBegin == -1) ++ { ++ if (valueRange.contains(it->mainValue()) && keyRange.contains(it->mainKey())) // start segment ++ currentSegmentBegin = it-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ } else if (!valueRange.contains(it->mainValue()) || !keyRange.contains(it->mainKey())) // segment just ended ++ { ++ result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(currentSegmentBegin, it-mDataContainer->constBegin()), false); ++ currentSegmentBegin = -1; ++ } ++ } ++ // process potential last segment: ++ if (currentSegmentBegin != -1) ++ result.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(currentSegmentBegin, end-mDataContainer->constBegin()), false); ++ ++ result.simplify(); ++ return result; ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::findBegin ++*/ ++template ++int QCPAbstractPlottable1D::findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->findBegin(sortKey, expandedRange)-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ \copydoc QCPPlottableInterface1D::findEnd ++*/ ++template ++int QCPAbstractPlottable1D::findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange) const ++{ ++ return mDataContainer->findEnd(sortKey, expandedRange)-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Implements a point-selection algorithm assuming the data (accessed via the 1D data interface) is ++ point-like. Most subclasses will want to reimplement this method again, to provide a more ++ accurate hit test based on the true data visualization geometry. ++ ++ \seebaseclassmethod ++*/ ++template ++double QCPAbstractPlottable1D::selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details) const ++{ ++ if ((onlySelectable && mSelectable == QCP::stNone) || mDataContainer->isEmpty()) ++ return -1; ++ if (!mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis) ++ return -1; ++ ++ QCPDataSelection selectionResult; ++ double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits::max(); ++ int minDistIndex = mDataContainer->size(); ++ ++ typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator begin = mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator end = mDataContainer->constEnd(); ++ if (DataType::sortKeyIsMainKey()) // we can assume that data is sorted by main key, so can reduce the searched key interval: ++ { ++ // determine which key range comes into question, taking selection tolerance around pos into account: ++ double posKeyMin, posKeyMax, dummy; ++ pixelsToCoords(pos-QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMin, dummy); ++ pixelsToCoords(pos+QPointF(mParentPlot->selectionTolerance(), mParentPlot->selectionTolerance()), posKeyMax, dummy); ++ if (posKeyMin > posKeyMax) ++ qSwap(posKeyMin, posKeyMax); ++ begin = mDataContainer->findBegin(posKeyMin, true); ++ end = mDataContainer->findEnd(posKeyMax, true); ++ } ++ if (begin == end) ++ return -1; ++ QCPRange keyRange(mKeyAxis->range()); ++ QCPRange valueRange(mValueAxis->range()); ++ for (typename QCPDataContainer::const_iterator it=begin; it!=end; ++it) ++ { ++ const double mainKey = it->mainKey(); ++ const double mainValue = it->mainValue(); ++ if (keyRange.contains(mainKey) && valueRange.contains(mainValue)) // make sure data point is inside visible range, for speedup in cases where sort key isn't main key and we iterate over all points ++ { ++ const double currentDistSqr = QCPVector2D(coordsToPixels(mainKey, mainValue)-pos).lengthSquared(); ++ if (currentDistSqr < minDistSqr) ++ { ++ minDistSqr = currentDistSqr; ++ minDistIndex = it-mDataContainer->constBegin(); ++ } ++ } ++ } ++ if (minDistIndex != mDataContainer->size()) ++ selectionResult.addDataRange(QCPDataRange(minDistIndex, minDistIndex+1), false); ++ ++ selectionResult.simplify(); ++ if (details) ++ details->setValue(selectionResult); ++ return qSqrt(minDistSqr); ++} ++ ++/*! ++ Splits all data into selected and unselected segments and outputs them via \a selectedSegments ++ and \a unselectedSegments, respectively. ++ ++ This is useful when subclasses implement their \ref draw method and need to draw selected ++ segments with a different pen/brush than unselected segments (also see \ref ++ QCPSelectionDecorator). ++ ++ \see setSelection ++*/ ++template ++void QCPAbstractPlottable1D::getDataSegments(QList &selectedSegments, QList &unselectedSegments) const ++{ ++ selectedSegments.clear(); ++ unselectedSegments.clear(); ++ if (mSelectable == QCP::stWhole) // stWhole selection type draws the entire plottable with selected style if mSelection isn't empty ++ { ++ if (selected()) ++ selectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()); ++ else ++ unselectedSegments << QCPDataRange(0, dataCount()); ++ } else ++ { ++ QCPDataSelection sel(selection()); ++ sel.simplify(); ++ selectedSegments = sel.dataRanges(); ++ unselectedSegments = sel.inverse(QCPDataRange(0, dataCount())).dataRanges(); ++ } ++} ++ ++/*! ++ A helper method which draws a line with the passed \a painter, according to the pixel data in \a ++ lineData. NaN points create gaps in the line, as expected from QCustomPlot's plottables (this is ++ the main difference to QPainter's regular drawPolyline, which handles NaNs by lagging or ++ crashing). ++ ++ Further it uses a faster line drawing technique based on \ref QCPPainter::drawLine rather than \c ++ QPainter::drawPolyline if the configured \ref QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints() and \a painter ++ style allows. ++*/ ++template ++void QCPAbstractPlottable1D::drawPolyline(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lineData) const ++{ ++ // if drawing solid line and not in PDF, use much faster line drawing instead of polyline: ++ if (mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag(QCP::phFastPolylines) && ++ painter->pen().style() == Qt::SolidLine && ++ !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmVectorized) && ++ !painter->modes().testFlag(QCPPainter::pmNoCaching)) ++ { ++ int i = 0; ++ bool lastIsNan = false; ++ const int lineDataSize = lineData.size(); ++ while (i < lineDataSize && (qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) || qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x()))) // make sure first point is not NaN ++ ++i; ++ ++i; // because drawing works in 1 point retrospect ++ while (i < lineDataSize) ++ { ++ if (!qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) && !qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x())) // NaNs create a gap in the line ++ { ++ if (!lastIsNan) ++ painter->drawLine(lineData.at(i-1), lineData.at(i)); ++ else ++ lastIsNan = false; ++ } else ++ lastIsNan = true; ++ ++i; ++ } ++ } else ++ { ++ int segmentStart = 0; ++ int i = 0; ++ const int lineDataSize = lineData.size(); ++ while (i < lineDataSize) ++ { ++ if (qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).y()) || qIsNaN(lineData.at(i).x()) || qIsInf(lineData.at(i).y())) // NaNs create a gap in the line. Also filter Infs which make drawPolyline block ++ { ++ painter->drawPolyline(lineData.constData()+segmentStart, i-segmentStart); // i, because we don't want to include the current NaN point ++ segmentStart = i+1; ++ } ++ ++i; ++ } ++ // draw last segment: ++ painter->drawPolyline(lineData.constData()+segmentStart, lineDataSize-segmentStart); ++ } ++} ++/* end of 'src/plottable1d.cpp' */ ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottable1d.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/colorgradient.h', size 6243 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPColorGradient ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the color spaces in which color interpolation between gradient stops can be performed. ++ ++ \see setColorInterpolation ++ */ ++ enum ColorInterpolation { ciRGB ///< Color channels red, green and blue are linearly interpolated ++ ,ciHSV ///< Color channels hue, saturation and value are linearly interpolated (The hue is interpolated over the shortest angle distance) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ColorInterpolation) ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines the available presets that can be loaded with \ref loadPreset. See the documentation ++ there for an image of the presets. ++ */ ++ enum GradientPreset { gpGrayscale ///< Continuous lightness from black to white (suited for non-biased data representation) ++ ,gpHot ///< Continuous lightness from black over fiery colors to white (suited for non-biased data representation) ++ ,gpCold ///< Continuous lightness from black over icey colors to white (suited for non-biased data representation) ++ ,gpNight ///< Continuous lightness from black over weak blueish colors to white (suited for non-biased data representation) ++ ,gpCandy ///< Blue over pink to white ++ ,gpGeography ///< Colors suitable to represent different elevations on geographical maps ++ ,gpIon ///< Half hue spectrum from black over purple to blue and finally green (creates banding illusion but allows more precise magnitude estimates) ++ ,gpThermal ///< Colors suitable for thermal imaging, ranging from dark blue over purple to orange, yellow and white ++ ,gpPolar ///< Colors suitable to emphasize polarity around the center, with blue for negative, black in the middle and red for positive values ++ ,gpSpectrum ///< An approximation of the visible light spectrum (creates banding illusion but allows more precise magnitude estimates) ++ ,gpJet ///< Hue variation similar to a spectrum, often used in numerical visualization (creates banding illusion but allows more precise magnitude estimates) ++ ,gpHues ///< Full hue cycle, with highest and lowest color red (suitable for periodic data, such as angles and phases, see \ref setPeriodic) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(GradientPreset) ++ ++ QCPColorGradient(); ++ QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset); ++ bool operator==(const QCPColorGradient &other) const; ++ bool operator!=(const QCPColorGradient &other) const { return !(*this == other); } ++ ++ // getters: ++ int levelCount() const { return mLevelCount; } ++ QMap colorStops() const { return mColorStops; } ++ ColorInterpolation colorInterpolation() const { return mColorInterpolation; } ++ bool periodic() const { return mPeriodic; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setLevelCount(int n); ++ void setColorStops(const QMap &colorStops); ++ void setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color); ++ void setColorInterpolation(ColorInterpolation interpolation); ++ void setPeriodic(bool enabled); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void colorize(const double *data, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor=1, bool logarithmic=false); ++ void colorize(const double *data, const unsigned char *alpha, const QCPRange &range, QRgb *scanLine, int n, int dataIndexFactor=1, bool logarithmic=false); ++ QRgb color(double position, const QCPRange &range, bool logarithmic=false); ++ void loadPreset(GradientPreset preset); ++ void clearColorStops(); ++ QCPColorGradient inverted() const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ int mLevelCount; ++ QMap mColorStops; ++ ColorInterpolation mColorInterpolation; ++ bool mPeriodic; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QVector mColorBuffer; // have colors premultiplied with alpha (for usage with QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied) ++ bool mColorBufferInvalidated; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ bool stopsUseAlpha() const; ++ void updateColorBuffer(); ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPColorGradient::ColorInterpolation) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPColorGradient::GradientPreset) ++ ++/* end of 'src/colorgradient.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.h', size 4426 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket : public QCPSelectionDecorator ++{ ++ Q_GADGET ++public: ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines which shape is drawn at the boundaries of selected data ranges. ++ ++ Some of the bracket styles further allow specifying a height and/or width, see \ref ++ setBracketHeight and \ref setBracketWidth. ++ */ ++ enum BracketStyle { bsSquareBracket ///< A square bracket is drawn. ++ ,bsHalfEllipse ///< A half ellipse is drawn. The size of the ellipse is given by the bracket width/height properties. ++ ,bsEllipse ///< An ellipse is drawn. The size of the ellipse is given by the bracket width/height properties. ++ ,bsPlus ///< A plus is drawn. ++ ,bsUserStyle ///< Start custom bracket styles at this index when subclassing and reimplementing \ref drawBracket. ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(BracketStyle) ++ ++ QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket(); ++ virtual ~QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen bracketPen() const { return mBracketPen; } ++ QBrush bracketBrush() const { return mBracketBrush; } ++ int bracketWidth() const { return mBracketWidth; } ++ int bracketHeight() const { return mBracketHeight; } ++ BracketStyle bracketStyle() const { return mBracketStyle; } ++ bool tangentToData() const { return mTangentToData; } ++ int tangentAverage() const { return mTangentAverage; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setBracketPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBracketBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setBracketWidth(int width); ++ void setBracketHeight(int height); ++ void setBracketStyle(BracketStyle style); ++ void setTangentToData(bool enabled); ++ void setTangentAverage(int pointCount); ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawBracket(QCPPainter *painter, int direction) const; ++ ++ // virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawDecoration(QCPPainter *painter, QCPDataSelection selection); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mBracketPen; ++ QBrush mBracketBrush; ++ int mBracketWidth; ++ int mBracketHeight; ++ BracketStyle mBracketStyle; ++ bool mTangentToData; ++ int mTangentAverage; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ double getTangentAngle(const QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d, int dataIndex, int direction) const; ++ QPointF getPixelCoordinates(const QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1d, int dataIndex) const; ++ ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPSelectionDecoratorBracket::BracketStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/selectiondecorator-bracket.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.h', size 7528 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAxisRect : public QCPLayoutElement ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPixmap background READ background WRITE setBackground) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool backgroundScaled READ backgroundScaled WRITE setBackgroundScaled) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::AspectRatioMode backgroundScaledMode READ backgroundScaledMode WRITE setBackgroundScaledMode) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::Orientations rangeDrag READ rangeDrag WRITE setRangeDrag) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::Orientations rangeZoom READ rangeZoom WRITE setRangeZoom) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPAxisRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, bool setupDefaultAxes=true); ++ virtual ~QCPAxisRect(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPixmap background() const { return mBackgroundPixmap; } ++ QBrush backgroundBrush() const { return mBackgroundBrush; } ++ bool backgroundScaled() const { return mBackgroundScaled; } ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode backgroundScaledMode() const { return mBackgroundScaledMode; } ++ Qt::Orientations rangeDrag() const { return mRangeDrag; } ++ Qt::Orientations rangeZoom() const { return mRangeZoom; } ++ QCPAxis *rangeDragAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation); ++ QCPAxis *rangeZoomAxis(Qt::Orientation orientation); ++ QList rangeDragAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation); ++ QList rangeZoomAxes(Qt::Orientation orientation); ++ double rangeZoomFactor(Qt::Orientation orientation); ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setBackground(const QPixmap &pm); ++ void setBackground(const QPixmap &pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode=Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding); ++ void setBackground(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setBackgroundScaled(bool scaled); ++ void setBackgroundScaledMode(Qt::AspectRatioMode mode); ++ void setRangeDrag(Qt::Orientations orientations); ++ void setRangeZoom(Qt::Orientations orientations); ++ void setRangeDragAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical); ++ void setRangeDragAxes(QList axes); ++ void setRangeDragAxes(QList horizontal, QList vertical); ++ void setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical); ++ void setRangeZoomAxes(QList axes); ++ void setRangeZoomAxes(QList horizontal, QList vertical); ++ void setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor); ++ void setRangeZoomFactor(double factor); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ int axisCount(QCPAxis::AxisType type) const; ++ QCPAxis *axis(QCPAxis::AxisType type, int index=0) const; ++ QList axes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types) const; ++ QList axes() const; ++ QCPAxis *addAxis(QCPAxis::AxisType type, QCPAxis *axis=0); ++ QList addAxes(QCPAxis::AxisTypes types); ++ bool removeAxis(QCPAxis *axis); ++ QCPLayoutInset *insetLayout() const { return mInsetLayout; } ++ ++ void zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect); ++ void zoom(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QList &affectedAxes); ++ void setupFullAxesBox(bool connectRanges=false); ++ QList plottables() const; ++ QList graphs() const; ++ QList items() const; ++ ++ // read-only interface imitating a QRect: ++ int left() const { return mRect.left(); } ++ int right() const { return mRect.right(); } ++ int top() const { return mRect.top(); } ++ int bottom() const { return mRect.bottom(); } ++ int width() const { return mRect.width(); } ++ int height() const { return mRect.height(); } ++ QSize size() const { return mRect.size(); } ++ QPoint topLeft() const { return mRect.topLeft(); } ++ QPoint topRight() const { return mRect.topRight(); } ++ QPoint bottomLeft() const { return mRect.bottomLeft(); } ++ QPoint bottomRight() const { return mRect.bottomRight(); } ++ QPoint center() const { return mRect.center(); } ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void update(UpdatePhase phase) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QList elements(bool recursive) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QBrush mBackgroundBrush; ++ QPixmap mBackgroundPixmap; ++ QPixmap mScaledBackgroundPixmap; ++ bool mBackgroundScaled; ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode mBackgroundScaledMode; ++ QCPLayoutInset *mInsetLayout; ++ Qt::Orientations mRangeDrag, mRangeZoom; ++ QList > mRangeDragHorzAxis, mRangeDragVertAxis; ++ QList > mRangeZoomHorzAxis, mRangeZoomVertAxis; ++ double mRangeZoomFactorHorz, mRangeZoomFactorVert; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QList mDragStartHorzRange, mDragStartVertRange; ++ QCP::AntialiasedElements mAADragBackup, mNotAADragBackup; ++ QPoint mDragStart; ++ bool mDragging; ++ QHash > mAxes; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual int calculateAutoMargin(QCP::MarginSide side) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void layoutChanged() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void drawBackground(QCPPainter *painter); ++ void updateAxesOffset(QCPAxis::AxisType type); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAxisRect) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++}; ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-axisrect.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.h', size 10392 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPAbstractLegendItem : public QCPLayoutElement ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLegend* parentLegend READ parentLegend) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont font READ font WRITE setFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor textColor READ textColor WRITE setTextColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedFont READ selectedFont WRITE setSelectedFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedTextColor READ selectedTextColor WRITE setSelectedTextColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selectable READ selectable WRITE setSelectable NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selected READ selected WRITE setSelected NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPAbstractLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCPLegend *parentLegend() const { return mParentLegend; } ++ QFont font() const { return mFont; } ++ QColor textColor() const { return mTextColor; } ++ QFont selectedFont() const { return mSelectedFont; } ++ QColor selectedTextColor() const { return mSelectedTextColor; } ++ bool selectable() const { return mSelectable; } ++ bool selected() const { return mSelected; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setSelectedFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectable(bool selectable); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelected(bool selected); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++signals: ++ void selectionChanged(bool selected); ++ void selectableChanged(bool selectable); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPLegend *mParentLegend; ++ QFont mFont; ++ QColor mTextColor; ++ QFont mSelectedFont; ++ QColor mSelectedTextColor; ++ bool mSelectable, mSelected; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QRect clipRect() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE = 0; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPAbstractLegendItem) ++ ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPPlottableLegendItem : public QCPAbstractLegendItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++public: ++ QCPPlottableLegendItem(QCPLegend *parent, QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable() { return mPlottable; } ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *mPlottable; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize minimumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen getIconBorderPen() const; ++ QColor getTextColor() const; ++ QFont getFont() const; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPLegend : public QCPLayoutGrid ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen borderPen READ borderPen WRITE setBorderPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont font READ font WRITE setFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor textColor READ textColor WRITE setTextColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QSize iconSize READ iconSize WRITE setIconSize) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int iconTextPadding READ iconTextPadding WRITE setIconTextPadding) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen iconBorderPen READ iconBorderPen WRITE setIconBorderPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(SelectableParts selectableParts READ selectableParts WRITE setSelectableParts NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(SelectableParts selectedParts READ selectedParts WRITE setSelectedParts NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedBorderPen READ selectedBorderPen WRITE setSelectedBorderPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedIconBorderPen READ selectedIconBorderPen WRITE setSelectedIconBorderPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush selectedBrush READ selectedBrush WRITE setSelectedBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedFont READ selectedFont WRITE setSelectedFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedTextColor READ selectedTextColor WRITE setSelectedTextColor) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the selectable parts of a legend ++ ++ \see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts ++ */ ++ enum SelectablePart { spNone = 0x000 ///< 0x000 None ++ ,spLegendBox = 0x001 ///< 0x001 The legend box (frame) ++ ,spItems = 0x002 ///< 0x002 Legend items individually (see \ref selectedItems) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(SelectablePart) ++ Q_FLAGS(SelectableParts) ++ Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(SelectableParts, SelectablePart) ++ ++ explicit QCPLegend(); ++ virtual ~QCPLegend(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen borderPen() const { return mBorderPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QFont font() const { return mFont; } ++ QColor textColor() const { return mTextColor; } ++ QSize iconSize() const { return mIconSize; } ++ int iconTextPadding() const { return mIconTextPadding; } ++ QPen iconBorderPen() const { return mIconBorderPen; } ++ SelectableParts selectableParts() const { return mSelectableParts; } ++ SelectableParts selectedParts() const; ++ QPen selectedBorderPen() const { return mSelectedBorderPen; } ++ QPen selectedIconBorderPen() const { return mSelectedIconBorderPen; } ++ QBrush selectedBrush() const { return mSelectedBrush; } ++ QFont selectedFont() const { return mSelectedFont; } ++ QColor selectedTextColor() const { return mSelectedTextColor; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setBorderPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setIconSize(const QSize &size); ++ void setIconSize(int width, int height); ++ void setIconTextPadding(int padding); ++ void setIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectableParts(const SelectableParts &selectableParts); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectedParts(const SelectableParts &selectedParts); ++ void setSelectedBorderPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedIconBorderPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSelectedFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QCPAbstractLegendItem *item(int index) const; ++ QCPPlottableLegendItem *itemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const; ++ int itemCount() const; ++ bool hasItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item) const; ++ bool hasItemWithPlottable(const QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable) const; ++ bool addItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item); ++ bool removeItem(int index); ++ bool removeItem(QCPAbstractLegendItem *item); ++ void clearItems(); ++ QList selectedItems() const; ++ ++signals: ++ void selectionChanged(QCPLegend::SelectableParts parts); ++ void selectableChanged(QCPLegend::SelectableParts parts); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mBorderPen, mIconBorderPen; ++ QBrush mBrush; ++ QFont mFont; ++ QColor mTextColor; ++ QSize mIconSize; ++ int mIconTextPadding; ++ SelectableParts mSelectedParts, mSelectableParts; ++ QPen mSelectedBorderPen, mSelectedIconBorderPen; ++ QBrush mSelectedBrush; ++ QFont mSelectedFont; ++ QColor mSelectedTextColor; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void parentPlotInitialized(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCP::Interaction selectionCategory() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen getBorderPen() const; ++ QBrush getBrush() const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPLegend) ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPAbstractLegendItem; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_OPERATORS_FOR_FLAGS(QCPLegend::SelectableParts) ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPLegend::SelectablePart) ++ ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-legend.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.h', size 5343 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPTextElement : public QCPLayoutElement ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString text READ text WRITE setText) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont font READ font WRITE setFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor textColor READ textColor WRITE setTextColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedFont READ selectedFont WRITE setSelectedFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedTextColor READ selectedTextColor WRITE setSelectedTextColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selectable READ selectable WRITE setSelectable NOTIFY selectableChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool selected READ selected WRITE setSelected NOTIFY selectionChanged) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text); ++ QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, double pointSize); ++ QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QString &fontFamily, double pointSize); ++ QCPTextElement(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text, const QFont &font); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QString text() const { return mText; } ++ int textFlags() const { return mTextFlags; } ++ QFont font() const { return mFont; } ++ QColor textColor() const { return mTextColor; } ++ QFont selectedFont() const { return mSelectedFont; } ++ QColor selectedTextColor() const { return mSelectedTextColor; } ++ bool selectable() const { return mSelectable; } ++ bool selected() const { return mSelected; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setText(const QString &text); ++ void setTextFlags(int flags); ++ void setFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setSelectedFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedTextColor(const QColor &color); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelectable(bool selectable); ++ Q_SLOT void setSelected(bool selected); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++signals: ++ void selectionChanged(bool selected); ++ void selectableChanged(bool selectable); ++ void clicked(QMouseEvent *event); ++ void doubleClicked(QMouseEvent *event); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QString mText; ++ int mTextFlags; ++ QFont mFont; ++ QColor mTextColor; ++ QFont mSelectedFont; ++ QColor mSelectedTextColor; ++ QRect mTextBoundingRect; ++ bool mSelectable, mSelected; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize minimumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QSize maximumSizeHint() const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void selectEvent(QMouseEvent *event, bool additive, const QVariant &details, bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void deselectEvent(bool *selectionStateChanged) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QFont mainFont() const; ++ QColor mainTextColor() const; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPTextElement) ++}; ++ ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-textelement.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.h', size 5907 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++ ++class QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate : public QCPAxisRect ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++public: ++ explicit QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate(QCPColorScale *parentColorScale); ++protected: ++ QCPColorScale *mParentColorScale; ++ QImage mGradientImage; ++ bool mGradientImageInvalidated; ++ // re-using some methods of QCPAxisRect to make them available to friend class QCPColorScale ++ using QCPAxisRect::calculateAutoMargin; ++ using QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent; ++ using QCPAxisRect::mouseMoveEvent; ++ using QCPAxisRect::mouseReleaseEvent; ++ using QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent; ++ using QCPAxisRect::update; ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter); ++ void updateGradientImage(); ++ Q_SLOT void axisSelectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectedParts); ++ Q_SLOT void axisSelectableChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectableParts); ++ friend class QCPColorScale; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPColorScale : public QCPLayoutElement ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxis::AxisType type READ type WRITE setType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPRange dataRange READ dataRange WRITE setDataRange NOTIFY dataRangeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxis::ScaleType dataScaleType READ dataScaleType WRITE setDataScaleType NOTIFY dataScaleTypeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPColorGradient gradient READ gradient WRITE setGradient NOTIFY gradientChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString label READ label WRITE setLabel) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int barWidth READ barWidth WRITE setBarWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool rangeDrag READ rangeDrag WRITE setRangeDrag) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool rangeZoom READ rangeZoom WRITE setRangeZoom) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPColorScale(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPColorScale(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCPAxis *axis() const { return mColorAxis.data(); } ++ QCPAxis::AxisType type() const { return mType; } ++ QCPRange dataRange() const { return mDataRange; } ++ QCPAxis::ScaleType dataScaleType() const { return mDataScaleType; } ++ QCPColorGradient gradient() const { return mGradient; } ++ QString label() const; ++ int barWidth () const { return mBarWidth; } ++ bool rangeDrag() const; ++ bool rangeZoom() const; ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setType(QCPAxis::AxisType type); ++ Q_SLOT void setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange); ++ Q_SLOT void setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ Q_SLOT void setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient); ++ void setLabel(const QString &str); ++ void setBarWidth(int width); ++ void setRangeDrag(bool enabled); ++ void setRangeZoom(bool enabled); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ QList colorMaps() const; ++ void rescaleDataRange(bool onlyVisibleMaps); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void update(UpdatePhase phase) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++signals: ++ void dataRangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange); ++ void dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ void gradientChanged(const QCPColorGradient &newGradient); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPAxis::AxisType mType; ++ QCPRange mDataRange; ++ QCPAxis::ScaleType mDataScaleType; ++ QCPColorGradient mGradient; ++ int mBarWidth; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QPointer mAxisRect; ++ QPointer mColorAxis; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter *painter) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ // events: ++ virtual void mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QVariant &details) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event, const QPointF &startPos) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPColorScale) ++ ++ friend class QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate; ++}; ++ ++ ++/* end of 'src/layoutelements/layoutelement-colorscale.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.h', size 8826 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPGraphData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPGraphData(); ++ QCPGraphData(double key, double value); ++ ++ inline double sortKey() const { return key; } ++ inline static QCPGraphData fromSortKey(double sortKey) { return QCPGraphData(sortKey, 0); } ++ inline static bool sortKeyIsMainKey() { return true; } ++ ++ inline double mainKey() const { return key; } ++ inline double mainValue() const { return value; } ++ ++ inline QCPRange valueRange() const { return QCPRange(value, value); } ++ ++ double key, value; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPGraphData, Q_PRIMITIVE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPGraphDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPGraphData points. The data is stored sorted by \a key. ++ ++ This template instantiation is the container in which QCPGraph holds its data. For details about ++ the generic container, see the documentation of the class template \ref QCPDataContainer. ++ ++ \see QCPGraphData, QCPGraph::setData ++*/ ++typedef QCPDataContainer QCPGraphDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPGraph : public QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(LineStyle lineStyle READ lineStyle WRITE setLineStyle) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPScatterStyle scatterStyle READ scatterStyle WRITE setScatterStyle) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int scatterSkip READ scatterSkip WRITE setScatterSkip) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPGraph* channelFillGraph READ channelFillGraph WRITE setChannelFillGraph) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool adaptiveSampling READ adaptiveSampling WRITE setAdaptiveSampling) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how the graph's line is represented visually in the plot. The line is drawn with the ++ current pen of the graph (\ref setPen). ++ \see setLineStyle ++ */ ++ enum LineStyle { lsNone ///< data points are not connected with any lines (e.g. data only represented ++ ///< with symbols according to the scatter style, see \ref setScatterStyle) ++ ,lsLine ///< data points are connected by a straight line ++ ,lsStepLeft ///< line is drawn as steps where the step height is the value of the left data point ++ ,lsStepRight ///< line is drawn as steps where the step height is the value of the right data point ++ ,lsStepCenter ///< line is drawn as steps where the step is in between two data points ++ ,lsImpulse ///< each data point is represented by a line parallel to the value axis, which reaches from the data point to the zero-value-line ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(LineStyle) ++ ++ explicit QCPGraph(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPGraph(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ LineStyle lineStyle() const { return mLineStyle; } ++ QCPScatterStyle scatterStyle() const { return mScatterStyle; } ++ int scatterSkip() const { return mScatterSkip; } ++ QCPGraph *channelFillGraph() const { return mChannelFillGraph.data(); } ++ bool adaptiveSampling() const { return mAdaptiveSampling; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void setLineStyle(LineStyle ls); ++ void setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style); ++ void setScatterSkip(int skip); ++ void setChannelFillGraph(QCPGraph *targetGraph); ++ void setAdaptiveSampling(bool enabled); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void addData(double key, double value); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ LineStyle mLineStyle; ++ QCPScatterStyle mScatterStyle; ++ int mScatterSkip; ++ QPointer mChannelFillGraph; ++ bool mAdaptiveSampling; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawFill(QCPPainter *painter, QVector *lines) const; ++ virtual void drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &scatters, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const; ++ virtual void drawLinePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lines) const; ++ virtual void drawImpulsePlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lines) const; ++ ++ virtual void getOptimizedLineData(QVector *lineData, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const; ++ virtual void getOptimizedScatterData(QVector *scatterData, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator end) const; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getVisibleDataBounds(QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const; ++ void getLines(QVector *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const; ++ void getScatters(QVector *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange) const; ++ QVector dataToLines(const QVector &data) const; ++ QVector dataToStepLeftLines(const QVector &data) const; ++ QVector dataToStepRightLines(const QVector &data) const; ++ QVector dataToStepCenterLines(const QVector &data) const; ++ QVector dataToImpulseLines(const QVector &data) const; ++ void addFillBasePoints(QVector *lines) const; ++ void removeFillBasePoints(QVector *lines) const; ++ QPointF lowerFillBasePoint(double lowerKey) const; ++ QPointF upperFillBasePoint(double upperKey) const; ++ const QPolygonF getChannelFillPolygon(const QVector *lines) const; ++ int findIndexBelowX(const QVector *data, double x) const; ++ int findIndexAboveX(const QVector *data, double x) const; ++ int findIndexBelowY(const QVector *data, double y) const; ++ int findIndexAboveY(const QVector *data, double y) const; ++ double pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPGraphDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPGraph::LineStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-graph.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-curve.h', size 7409 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPCurveData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPCurveData(); ++ QCPCurveData(double t, double key, double value); ++ ++ inline double sortKey() const { return t; } ++ inline static QCPCurveData fromSortKey(double sortKey) { return QCPCurveData(sortKey, 0, 0); } ++ inline static bool sortKeyIsMainKey() { return false; } ++ ++ inline double mainKey() const { return key; } ++ inline double mainValue() const { return value; } ++ ++ inline QCPRange valueRange() const { return QCPRange(value, value); } ++ ++ double t, key, value; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPCurveData, Q_PRIMITIVE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPCurveDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPCurveData points. The data is stored sorted by \a t, so the \a ++ sortKey() (returning \a t) is different from \a mainKey() (returning \a key). ++ ++ This template instantiation is the container in which QCPCurve holds its data. For details about ++ the generic container, see the documentation of the class template \ref QCPDataContainer. ++ ++ \see QCPCurveData, QCPCurve::setData ++*/ ++typedef QCPDataContainer QCPCurveDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPCurve : public QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPScatterStyle scatterStyle READ scatterStyle WRITE setScatterStyle) ++ Q_PROPERTY(int scatterSkip READ scatterSkip WRITE setScatterSkip) ++ Q_PROPERTY(LineStyle lineStyle READ lineStyle WRITE setLineStyle) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines how the curve's line is represented visually in the plot. The line is drawn with the ++ current pen of the curve (\ref setPen). ++ \see setLineStyle ++ */ ++ enum LineStyle { lsNone ///< No line is drawn between data points (e.g. only scatters) ++ ,lsLine ///< Data points are connected with a straight line ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(LineStyle) ++ ++ explicit QCPCurve(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPCurve(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ QCPScatterStyle scatterStyle() const { return mScatterStyle; } ++ int scatterSkip() const { return mScatterSkip; } ++ LineStyle lineStyle() const { return mLineStyle; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &t, const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values); ++ void setScatterStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style); ++ void setScatterSkip(int skip); ++ void setLineStyle(LineStyle style); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &t, const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values); ++ void addData(double t, double key, double value); ++ void addData(double key, double value); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPScatterStyle mScatterStyle; ++ int mScatterSkip; ++ LineStyle mLineStyle; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawCurveLine(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &lines) const; ++ virtual void drawScatterPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QVector &points, const QCPScatterStyle &style) const; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getCurveLines(QVector *lines, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double penWidth) const; ++ void getScatters(QVector *scatters, const QCPDataRange &dataRange, double scatterWidth) const; ++ int getRegion(double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const; ++ QPointF getOptimizedPoint(int prevRegion, double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const; ++ QVector getOptimizedCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin) const; ++ bool mayTraverse(int prevRegion, int currentRegion) const; ++ bool getTraverse(double prevKey, double prevValue, double key, double value, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QPointF &crossA, QPointF &crossB) const; ++ void getTraverseCornerPoints(int prevRegion, int currentRegion, double keyMin, double valueMax, double keyMax, double valueMin, QVector &beforeTraverse, QVector &afterTraverse) const; ++ double pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPCurveDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPCurve::LineStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-curve.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-bars.h', size 8924 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPBarsGroup : public QObject ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(SpacingType spacingType READ spacingType WRITE setSpacingType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double spacing READ spacing WRITE setSpacing) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the ways the spacing between bars in the group can be specified. Thus it defines what ++ the number passed to \ref setSpacing actually means. ++ ++ \see setSpacingType, setSpacing ++ */ ++ enum SpacingType { stAbsolute ///< Bar spacing is in absolute pixels ++ ,stAxisRectRatio ///< Bar spacing is given by a fraction of the axis rect size ++ ,stPlotCoords ///< Bar spacing is in key coordinates and thus scales with the key axis range ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(SpacingType) ++ ++ QCPBarsGroup(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPBarsGroup(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ SpacingType spacingType() const { return mSpacingType; } ++ double spacing() const { return mSpacing; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setSpacingType(SpacingType spacingType); ++ void setSpacing(double spacing); ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QList bars() const { return mBars; } ++ QCPBars* bars(int index) const; ++ int size() const { return mBars.size(); } ++ bool isEmpty() const { return mBars.isEmpty(); } ++ void clear(); ++ bool contains(QCPBars *bars) const { return mBars.contains(bars); } ++ void append(QCPBars *bars); ++ void insert(int i, QCPBars *bars); ++ void remove(QCPBars *bars); ++ ++protected: ++ // non-property members: ++ QCustomPlot *mParentPlot; ++ SpacingType mSpacingType; ++ double mSpacing; ++ QList mBars; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void registerBars(QCPBars *bars); ++ void unregisterBars(QCPBars *bars); ++ ++ // virtual methods: ++ double keyPixelOffset(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord); ++ double getPixelSpacing(const QCPBars *bars, double keyCoord); ++ ++private: ++ Q_DISABLE_COPY(QCPBarsGroup) ++ ++ friend class QCPBars; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPBarsGroup::SpacingType) ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPBarsData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPBarsData(); ++ QCPBarsData(double key, double value); ++ ++ inline double sortKey() const { return key; } ++ inline static QCPBarsData fromSortKey(double sortKey) { return QCPBarsData(sortKey, 0); } ++ inline static bool sortKeyIsMainKey() { return true; } ++ ++ inline double mainKey() const { return key; } ++ inline double mainValue() const { return value; } ++ ++ inline QCPRange valueRange() const { return QCPRange(value, value); } // note that bar base value isn't held in each QCPBarsData and thus can't/shouldn't be returned here ++ ++ double key, value; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPBarsData, Q_PRIMITIVE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPBarsDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPBarsData points. The data is stored sorted by \a key. ++ ++ This template instantiation is the container in which QCPBars holds its data. For details about ++ the generic container, see the documentation of the class template \ref QCPDataContainer. ++ ++ \see QCPBarsData, QCPBars::setData ++*/ ++typedef QCPDataContainer QCPBarsDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPBars : public QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(double width READ width WRITE setWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(WidthType widthType READ widthType WRITE setWidthType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPBarsGroup* barsGroup READ barsGroup WRITE setBarsGroup) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double baseValue READ baseValue WRITE setBaseValue) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double stackingGap READ stackingGap WRITE setStackingGap) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPBars* barBelow READ barBelow) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPBars* barAbove READ barAbove) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the ways the width of the bar can be specified. Thus it defines what the number passed ++ to \ref setWidth actually means. ++ ++ \see setWidthType, setWidth ++ */ ++ enum WidthType { wtAbsolute ///< Bar width is in absolute pixels ++ ,wtAxisRectRatio ///< Bar width is given by a fraction of the axis rect size ++ ,wtPlotCoords ///< Bar width is in key coordinates and thus scales with the key axis range ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(WidthType) ++ ++ explicit QCPBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPBars(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ double width() const { return mWidth; } ++ WidthType widthType() const { return mWidthType; } ++ QCPBarsGroup *barsGroup() const { return mBarsGroup; } ++ double baseValue() const { return mBaseValue; } ++ double stackingGap() const { return mStackingGap; } ++ QCPBars *barBelow() const { return mBarBelow.data(); } ++ QCPBars *barAbove() const { return mBarAbove.data(); } ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void setWidth(double width); ++ void setWidthType(WidthType widthType); ++ void setBarsGroup(QCPBarsGroup *barsGroup); ++ void setBaseValue(double baseValue); ++ void setStackingGap(double pixels); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &values, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void addData(double key, double value); ++ void moveBelow(QCPBars *bars); ++ void moveAbove(QCPBars *bars); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF dataPixelPosition(int index) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ double mWidth; ++ WidthType mWidthType; ++ QCPBarsGroup *mBarsGroup; ++ double mBaseValue; ++ double mStackingGap; ++ QPointer mBarBelow, mBarAbove; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getVisibleDataBounds(QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const; ++ QRectF getBarRect(double key, double value) const; ++ void getPixelWidth(double key, double &lower, double &upper) const; ++ double getStackedBaseValue(double key, bool positive) const; ++ static void connectBars(QCPBars* lower, QCPBars* upper); ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++ friend class QCPBarsGroup; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPBars::WidthType) ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-bars.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.h', size 7516 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPStatisticalBoxData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPStatisticalBoxData(); ++ QCPStatisticalBoxData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector& outliers=QVector()); ++ ++ inline double sortKey() const { return key; } ++ inline static QCPStatisticalBoxData fromSortKey(double sortKey) { return QCPStatisticalBoxData(sortKey, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0); } ++ inline static bool sortKeyIsMainKey() { return true; } ++ ++ inline double mainKey() const { return key; } ++ inline double mainValue() const { return median; } ++ ++ inline QCPRange valueRange() const ++ { ++ QCPRange result(minimum, maximum); ++ for (QVector::const_iterator it = outliers.constBegin(); it != outliers.constEnd(); ++it) ++ result.expand(*it); ++ return result; ++ } ++ ++ double key, minimum, lowerQuartile, median, upperQuartile, maximum; ++ QVector outliers; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPStatisticalBoxData, Q_MOVABLE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPStatisticalBoxData points. The data is stored sorted by \a key. ++ ++ This template instantiation is the container in which QCPStatisticalBox holds its data. For ++ details about the generic container, see the documentation of the class template \ref ++ QCPDataContainer. ++ ++ \see QCPStatisticalBoxData, QCPStatisticalBox::setData ++*/ ++typedef QCPDataContainer QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPStatisticalBox : public QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(double width READ width WRITE setWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double whiskerWidth READ whiskerWidth WRITE setWhiskerWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen whiskerPen READ whiskerPen WRITE setWhiskerPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen whiskerBarPen READ whiskerBarPen WRITE setWhiskerBarPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool whiskerAntialiased READ whiskerAntialiased WRITE setWhiskerAntialiased) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen medianPen READ medianPen WRITE setMedianPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPScatterStyle outlierStyle READ outlierStyle WRITE setOutlierStyle) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPStatisticalBox(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ double width() const { return mWidth; } ++ double whiskerWidth() const { return mWhiskerWidth; } ++ QPen whiskerPen() const { return mWhiskerPen; } ++ QPen whiskerBarPen() const { return mWhiskerBarPen; } ++ bool whiskerAntialiased() const { return mWhiskerAntialiased; } ++ QPen medianPen() const { return mMedianPen; } ++ QCPScatterStyle outlierStyle() const { return mOutlierStyle; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &minimum, const QVector &lowerQuartile, const QVector &median, const QVector &upperQuartile, const QVector &maximum, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void setWidth(double width); ++ void setWhiskerWidth(double width); ++ void setWhiskerPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setWhiskerBarPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setWhiskerAntialiased(bool enabled); ++ void setMedianPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setOutlierStyle(const QCPScatterStyle &style); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &minimum, const QVector &lowerQuartile, const QVector &median, const QVector &upperQuartile, const QVector &maximum, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void addData(double key, double minimum, double lowerQuartile, double median, double upperQuartile, double maximum, const QVector &outliers=QVector()); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ double mWidth; ++ double mWhiskerWidth; ++ QPen mWhiskerPen, mWhiskerBarPen; ++ bool mWhiskerAntialiased; ++ QPen mMedianPen; ++ QCPScatterStyle mOutlierStyle; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void drawStatisticalBox(QCPPainter *painter, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it, const QCPScatterStyle &outlierStyle) const; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getVisibleDataBounds(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const; ++ QRectF getQuartileBox(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const; ++ QVector getWhiskerBackboneLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const; ++ QVector getWhiskerBarLines(QCPStatisticalBoxDataContainer::const_iterator it) const; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-statisticalbox.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.h', size 7070 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPColorMapData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPColorMapData(int keySize, int valueSize, const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange); ++ ~QCPColorMapData(); ++ QCPColorMapData(const QCPColorMapData &other); ++ QCPColorMapData &operator=(const QCPColorMapData &other); ++ ++ // getters: ++ int keySize() const { return mKeySize; } ++ int valueSize() const { return mValueSize; } ++ QCPRange keyRange() const { return mKeyRange; } ++ QCPRange valueRange() const { return mValueRange; } ++ QCPRange dataBounds() const { return mDataBounds; } ++ double data(double key, double value); ++ double cell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex); ++ unsigned char alpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex); ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setSize(int keySize, int valueSize); ++ void setKeySize(int keySize); ++ void setValueSize(int valueSize); ++ void setRange(const QCPRange &keyRange, const QCPRange &valueRange); ++ void setKeyRange(const QCPRange &keyRange); ++ void setValueRange(const QCPRange &valueRange); ++ void setData(double key, double value, double z); ++ void setCell(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double z); ++ void setAlpha(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, unsigned char alpha); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void recalculateDataBounds(); ++ void clear(); ++ void clearAlpha(); ++ void fill(double z); ++ void fillAlpha(unsigned char alpha); ++ bool isEmpty() const { return mIsEmpty; } ++ void coordToCell(double key, double value, int *keyIndex, int *valueIndex) const; ++ void cellToCoord(int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double *key, double *value) const; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ int mKeySize, mValueSize; ++ QCPRange mKeyRange, mValueRange; ++ bool mIsEmpty; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ double *mData; ++ unsigned char *mAlpha; ++ QCPRange mDataBounds; ++ bool mDataModified; ++ ++ bool createAlpha(bool initializeOpaque=true); ++ ++ friend class QCPColorMap; ++}; ++ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPColorMap : public QCPAbstractPlottable ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPRange dataRange READ dataRange WRITE setDataRange NOTIFY dataRangeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAxis::ScaleType dataScaleType READ dataScaleType WRITE setDataScaleType NOTIFY dataScaleTypeChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPColorGradient gradient READ gradient WRITE setGradient NOTIFY gradientChanged) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool interpolate READ interpolate WRITE setInterpolate) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool tightBoundary READ tightBoundary WRITE setTightBoundary) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPColorScale* colorScale READ colorScale WRITE setColorScale) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPColorMap(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPColorMap(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QCPColorMapData *data() const { return mMapData; } ++ QCPRange dataRange() const { return mDataRange; } ++ QCPAxis::ScaleType dataScaleType() const { return mDataScaleType; } ++ bool interpolate() const { return mInterpolate; } ++ bool tightBoundary() const { return mTightBoundary; } ++ QCPColorGradient gradient() const { return mGradient; } ++ QCPColorScale *colorScale() const { return mColorScale.data(); } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QCPColorMapData *data, bool copy=false); ++ Q_SLOT void setDataRange(const QCPRange &dataRange); ++ Q_SLOT void setDataScaleType(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ Q_SLOT void setGradient(const QCPColorGradient &gradient); ++ void setInterpolate(bool enabled); ++ void setTightBoundary(bool enabled); ++ void setColorScale(QCPColorScale *colorScale); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void rescaleDataRange(bool recalculateDataBounds=false); ++ Q_SLOT void updateLegendIcon(Qt::TransformationMode transformMode=Qt::SmoothTransformation, const QSize &thumbSize=QSize(32, 18)); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++signals: ++ void dataRangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange); ++ void dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType); ++ void gradientChanged(const QCPColorGradient &newGradient); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QCPRange mDataRange; ++ QCPAxis::ScaleType mDataScaleType; ++ QCPColorMapData *mMapData; ++ QCPColorGradient mGradient; ++ bool mInterpolate; ++ bool mTightBoundary; ++ QPointer mColorScale; ++ ++ // non-property members: ++ QImage mMapImage, mUndersampledMapImage; ++ QPixmap mLegendIcon; ++ bool mMapImageInvalidated; ++ ++ // introduced virtual methods: ++ virtual void updateMapImage(); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-colormap.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.h', size 8622 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPFinancialData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPFinancialData(); ++ QCPFinancialData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close); ++ ++ inline double sortKey() const { return key; } ++ inline static QCPFinancialData fromSortKey(double sortKey) { return QCPFinancialData(sortKey, 0, 0, 0, 0); } ++ inline static bool sortKeyIsMainKey() { return true; } ++ ++ inline double mainKey() const { return key; } ++ inline double mainValue() const { return open; } ++ ++ inline QCPRange valueRange() const { return QCPRange(low, high); } // open and close must lie between low and high, so we don't need to check them ++ ++ double key, open, high, low, close; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPFinancialData, Q_PRIMITIVE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPFinancialDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPFinancialData points. The data is stored sorted by \a key. ++ ++ This template instantiation is the container in which QCPFinancial holds its data. For details ++ about the generic container, see the documentation of the class template \ref QCPDataContainer. ++ ++ \see QCPFinancialData, QCPFinancial::setData ++*/ ++typedef QCPDataContainer QCPFinancialDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPFinancial : public QCPAbstractPlottable1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(ChartStyle chartStyle READ chartStyle WRITE setChartStyle) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double width READ width WRITE setWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(WidthType widthType READ widthType WRITE setWidthType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool twoColored READ twoColored WRITE setTwoColored) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brushPositive READ brushPositive WRITE setBrushPositive) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brushNegative READ brushNegative WRITE setBrushNegative) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen penPositive READ penPositive WRITE setPenPositive) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen penNegative READ penNegative WRITE setPenNegative) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the ways the width of the financial bar can be specified. Thus it defines what the ++ number passed to \ref setWidth actually means. ++ ++ \see setWidthType, setWidth ++ */ ++ enum WidthType { wtAbsolute ///< width is in absolute pixels ++ ,wtAxisRectRatio ///< width is given by a fraction of the axis rect size ++ ,wtPlotCoords ///< width is in key coordinates and thus scales with the key axis range ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(WidthType) ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines the possible representations of OHLC data in the plot. ++ ++ \see setChartStyle ++ */ ++ enum ChartStyle { csOhlc ///< Open-High-Low-Close bar representation ++ ,csCandlestick ///< Candlestick representation ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ChartStyle) ++ ++ explicit QCPFinancial(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPFinancial(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ ChartStyle chartStyle() const { return mChartStyle; } ++ double width() const { return mWidth; } ++ WidthType widthType() const { return mWidthType; } ++ bool twoColored() const { return mTwoColored; } ++ QBrush brushPositive() const { return mBrushPositive; } ++ QBrush brushNegative() const { return mBrushNegative; } ++ QPen penPositive() const { return mPenPositive; } ++ QPen penNegative() const { return mPenNegative; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &open, const QVector &high, const QVector &low, const QVector &close, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void setChartStyle(ChartStyle style); ++ void setWidth(double width); ++ void setWidthType(WidthType widthType); ++ void setTwoColored(bool twoColored); ++ void setBrushPositive(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setBrushNegative(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setPenPositive(const QPen &pen); ++ void setPenNegative(const QPen &pen); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &keys, const QVector &open, const QVector &high, const QVector &low, const QVector &close, bool alreadySorted=false); ++ void addData(double key, double open, double high, double low, double close); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // static methods: ++ static QCPFinancialDataContainer timeSeriesToOhlc(const QVector &time, const QVector &value, double timeBinSize, double timeBinOffset = 0); ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ ChartStyle mChartStyle; ++ double mWidth; ++ WidthType mWidthType; ++ bool mTwoColored; ++ QBrush mBrushPositive, mBrushNegative; ++ QPen mPenPositive, mPenNegative; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void drawOhlcPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected); ++ void drawCandlestickPlot(QCPPainter *painter, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, bool isSelected); ++ double getPixelWidth(double key, double keyPixel) const; ++ double ohlcSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const; ++ double candlestickSelectTest(const QPointF &pos, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, const QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &closestDataPoint) const; ++ void getVisibleDataBounds(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator &end) const; ++ QRectF selectionHitBox(QCPFinancialDataContainer::const_iterator it) const; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPFinancial::ChartStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-financial.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.h', size 7567 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPErrorBarsData ++{ ++public: ++ QCPErrorBarsData(); ++ explicit QCPErrorBarsData(double error); ++ QCPErrorBarsData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus); ++ ++ double errorMinus, errorPlus; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_TYPEINFO(QCPErrorBarsData, Q_PRIMITIVE_TYPE); ++ ++ ++/*! \typedef QCPErrorBarsDataContainer ++ ++ Container for storing \ref QCPErrorBarsData points. It is a typedef for QVector<\ref ++ QCPErrorBarsData>. ++ ++ This is the container in which \ref QCPErrorBars holds its data. Unlike most other data ++ containers for plottables, it is not based on \ref QCPDataContainer. This is because the error ++ bars plottable is special in that it doesn't store its own key and value coordinate per error ++ bar. It adopts the key and value from the plottable to which the error bars shall be applied ++ (\ref QCPErrorBars::setDataPlottable). So the stored \ref QCPErrorBarsData doesn't need a ++ sortable key, but merely an index (as \c QVector provides), which maps one-to-one to the indices ++ of the other plottable's data. ++ ++ \see QCPErrorBarsData, QCPErrorBars::setData ++*/ ++typedef QVector QCPErrorBarsDataContainer; ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPErrorBars : public QCPAbstractPlottable, public QCPPlottableInterface1D ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QSharedPointer data READ data WRITE setData) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPAbstractPlottable* dataPlottable READ dataPlottable WRITE setDataPlottable) ++ Q_PROPERTY(ErrorType errorType READ errorType WRITE setErrorType) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double whiskerWidth READ whiskerWidth WRITE setWhiskerWidth) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double symbolGap READ symbolGap WRITE setSymbolGap) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ ++ /*! ++ Defines in which orientation the error bars shall appear. If your data needs both error ++ dimensions, create two \ref QCPErrorBars with different \ref ErrorType. ++ ++ \see setErrorType ++ */ ++ enum ErrorType { etKeyError ///< The errors are for the key dimension (bars appear parallel to the key axis) ++ ,etValueError ///< The errors are for the value dimension (bars appear parallel to the value axis) ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(ErrorType) ++ ++ explicit QCPErrorBars(QCPAxis *keyAxis, QCPAxis *valueAxis); ++ virtual ~QCPErrorBars(); ++ // getters: ++ QSharedPointer data() const { return mDataContainer; } ++ QCPAbstractPlottable *dataPlottable() const { return mDataPlottable.data(); } ++ ErrorType errorType() const { return mErrorType; } ++ double whiskerWidth() const { return mWhiskerWidth; } ++ double symbolGap() const { return mSymbolGap; } ++ ++ // setters: ++ void setData(QSharedPointer data); ++ void setData(const QVector &error); ++ void setData(const QVector &errorMinus, const QVector &errorPlus); ++ void setDataPlottable(QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable); ++ void setErrorType(ErrorType type); ++ void setWhiskerWidth(double pixels); ++ void setSymbolGap(double pixels); ++ ++ // non-property methods: ++ void addData(const QVector &error); ++ void addData(const QVector &errorMinus, const QVector &errorPlus); ++ void addData(double error); ++ void addData(double errorMinus, double errorPlus); ++ ++ // virtual methods of 1d plottable interface: ++ virtual int dataCount() const; ++ virtual double dataMainKey(int index) const; ++ virtual double dataSortKey(int index) const; ++ virtual double dataMainValue(int index) const; ++ virtual QCPRange dataValueRange(int index) const; ++ virtual QPointF dataPixelPosition(int index) const; ++ virtual bool sortKeyIsMainKey() const; ++ virtual QCPDataSelection selectTestRect(const QRectF &rect, bool onlySelectable) const; ++ virtual int findBegin(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ virtual int findEnd(double sortKey, bool expandedRange=true) const; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPPlottableInterface1D *interface1D() Q_DECL_OVERRIDE { return this; } ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QSharedPointer mDataContainer; ++ QPointer mDataPlottable; ++ ErrorType mErrorType; ++ double mWhiskerWidth; ++ double mSymbolGap; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual void drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const QRectF &rect) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QCPRange getValueRange(bool &foundRange, QCP::SignDomain inSignDomain=QCP::sdBoth, const QCPRange &inKeyRange=QCPRange()) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void getErrorBarLines(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator it, QVector &backbones, QVector &whiskers) const; ++ void getVisibleDataBounds(QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &begin, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &end, const QCPDataRange &rangeRestriction) const; ++ double pointDistance(const QPointF &pixelPoint, QCPErrorBarsDataContainer::const_iterator &closestData) const; ++ // helpers: ++ void getDataSegments(QList &selectedSegments, QList &unselectedSegments) const; ++ bool errorBarVisible(int index) const; ++ bool rectIntersectsLine(const QRectF &pixelRect, const QLineF &line) const; ++ ++ friend class QCustomPlot; ++ friend class QCPLegend; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/plottables/plottable-errorbar.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-straightline.h', size 3117 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemStraightLine : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemStraightLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemStraightLine(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const point1; ++ QCPItemPosition * const point2; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QLineF getRectClippedStraightLine(const QCPVector2D &point1, const QCPVector2D &vec, const QRect &rect) const; ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-straightline.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-line.h', size 3407 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemLine : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding head READ head WRITE setHead) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding tail READ tail WRITE setTail) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemLine(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemLine(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QCPLineEnding head() const { return mHead; } ++ QCPLineEnding tail() const { return mTail; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head); ++ void setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const start; ++ QCPItemPosition * const end; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QCPLineEnding mHead, mTail; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QLineF getRectClippedLine(const QCPVector2D &start, const QCPVector2D &end, const QRect &rect) const; ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-line.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-curve.h', size 3379 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemCurve : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding head READ head WRITE setHead) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPLineEnding tail READ tail WRITE setTail) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemCurve(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemCurve(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QCPLineEnding head() const { return mHead; } ++ QCPLineEnding tail() const { return mTail; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setHead(const QCPLineEnding &head); ++ void setTail(const QCPLineEnding &tail); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const start; ++ QCPItemPosition * const startDir; ++ QCPItemPosition * const endDir; ++ QCPItemPosition * const end; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QCPLineEnding mHead, mTail; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-curve.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-rect.h', size 3688 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemRect : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush selectedBrush READ selectedBrush WRITE setSelectedBrush) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemRect(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemRect(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QBrush selectedBrush() const { return mSelectedBrush; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const topLeft; ++ QCPItemPosition * const bottomRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const top; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const right; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottom; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomLeft; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const left; ++ ++protected: ++ enum AnchorIndex {aiTop, aiTopRight, aiRight, aiBottom, aiBottomLeft, aiLeft}; ++ ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QBrush mBrush, mSelectedBrush; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++ QBrush mainBrush() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-rect.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-text.h', size 5554 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemText : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor color READ color WRITE setColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QColor selectedColor READ selectedColor WRITE setSelectedColor) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush selectedBrush READ selectedBrush WRITE setSelectedBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont font READ font WRITE setFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QFont selectedFont READ selectedFont WRITE setSelectedFont) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QString text READ text WRITE setText) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::Alignment positionAlignment READ positionAlignment WRITE setPositionAlignment) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::Alignment textAlignment READ textAlignment WRITE setTextAlignment) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double rotation READ rotation WRITE setRotation) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QMargins padding READ padding WRITE setPadding) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemText(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemText(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QColor color() const { return mColor; } ++ QColor selectedColor() const { return mSelectedColor; } ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QBrush selectedBrush() const { return mSelectedBrush; } ++ QFont font() const { return mFont; } ++ QFont selectedFont() const { return mSelectedFont; } ++ QString text() const { return mText; } ++ Qt::Alignment positionAlignment() const { return mPositionAlignment; } ++ Qt::Alignment textAlignment() const { return mTextAlignment; } ++ double rotation() const { return mRotation; } ++ QMargins padding() const { return mPadding; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setSelectedColor(const QColor &color); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setSelectedFont(const QFont &font); ++ void setText(const QString &text); ++ void setPositionAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment); ++ void setTextAlignment(Qt::Alignment alignment); ++ void setRotation(double degrees); ++ void setPadding(const QMargins &padding); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const position; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topLeft; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const top; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const right; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottom; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomLeft; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const left; ++ ++protected: ++ enum AnchorIndex {aiTopLeft, aiTop, aiTopRight, aiRight, aiBottomRight, aiBottom, aiBottomLeft, aiLeft}; ++ ++ // property members: ++ QColor mColor, mSelectedColor; ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QBrush mBrush, mSelectedBrush; ++ QFont mFont, mSelectedFont; ++ QString mText; ++ Qt::Alignment mPositionAlignment; ++ Qt::Alignment mTextAlignment; ++ double mRotation; ++ QMargins mPadding; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPointF getTextDrawPoint(const QPointF &pos, const QRectF &rect, Qt::Alignment positionAlignment) const; ++ QFont mainFont() const; ++ QColor mainColor() const; ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++ QBrush mainBrush() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-text.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-ellipse.h', size 3868 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemEllipse : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush selectedBrush READ selectedBrush WRITE setSelectedBrush) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemEllipse(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemEllipse(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QBrush selectedBrush() const { return mSelectedBrush; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const topLeft; ++ QCPItemPosition * const bottomRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topLeftRim; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const top; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topRightRim; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const right; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomRightRim; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottom; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomLeftRim; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const left; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const center; ++ ++protected: ++ enum AnchorIndex {aiTopLeftRim, aiTop, aiTopRightRim, aiRight, aiBottomRightRim, aiBottom, aiBottomLeftRim, aiLeft, aiCenter}; ++ ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QBrush mBrush, mSelectedBrush; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++ QBrush mainBrush() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-ellipse.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-pixmap.h', size 4373 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemPixmap : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPixmap pixmap READ pixmap WRITE setPixmap) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool scaled READ scaled WRITE setScaled) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode READ aspectRatioMode) ++ Q_PROPERTY(Qt::TransformationMode transformationMode READ transformationMode) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ explicit QCPItemPixmap(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemPixmap(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPixmap pixmap() const { return mPixmap; } ++ bool scaled() const { return mScaled; } ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode() const { return mAspectRatioMode; } ++ Qt::TransformationMode transformationMode() const { return mTransformationMode; } ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap); ++ void setScaled(bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode=Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::TransformationMode transformationMode=Qt::SmoothTransformation); ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const topLeft; ++ QCPItemPosition * const bottomRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const top; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const topRight; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const right; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottom; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const bottomLeft; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const left; ++ ++protected: ++ enum AnchorIndex {aiTop, aiTopRight, aiRight, aiBottom, aiBottomLeft, aiLeft}; ++ ++ // property members: ++ QPixmap mPixmap; ++ QPixmap mScaledPixmap; ++ bool mScaled; ++ bool mScaledPixmapInvalidated; ++ Qt::AspectRatioMode mAspectRatioMode; ++ Qt::TransformationMode mTransformationMode; ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void updateScaledPixmap(QRect finalRect=QRect(), bool flipHorz=false, bool flipVert=false); ++ QRect getFinalRect(bool *flippedHorz=0, bool *flippedVert=0) const; ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++}; ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-pixmap.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-tracer.h', size 4762 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemTracer : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush brush READ brush WRITE setBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QBrush selectedBrush READ selectedBrush WRITE setSelectedBrush) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double size READ size WRITE setSize) ++ Q_PROPERTY(TracerStyle style READ style WRITE setStyle) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QCPGraph* graph READ graph WRITE setGraph) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double graphKey READ graphKey WRITE setGraphKey) ++ Q_PROPERTY(bool interpolating READ interpolating WRITE setInterpolating) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ The different visual appearances a tracer item can have. Some styles size may be controlled with \ref setSize. ++ ++ \see setStyle ++ */ ++ enum TracerStyle { tsNone ///< The tracer is not visible ++ ,tsPlus ///< A plus shaped crosshair with limited size ++ ,tsCrosshair ///< A plus shaped crosshair which spans the complete axis rect ++ ,tsCircle ///< A circle ++ ,tsSquare ///< A square ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(TracerStyle) ++ ++ explicit QCPItemTracer(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemTracer(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ QBrush brush() const { return mBrush; } ++ QBrush selectedBrush() const { return mSelectedBrush; } ++ double size() const { return mSize; } ++ TracerStyle style() const { return mStyle; } ++ QCPGraph *graph() const { return mGraph; } ++ double graphKey() const { return mGraphKey; } ++ bool interpolating() const { return mInterpolating; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSelectedBrush(const QBrush &brush); ++ void setSize(double size); ++ void setStyle(TracerStyle style); ++ void setGraph(QCPGraph *graph); ++ void setGraphKey(double key); ++ void setInterpolating(bool enabled); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ void updatePosition(); ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const position; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ QBrush mBrush, mSelectedBrush; ++ double mSize; ++ TracerStyle mStyle; ++ QCPGraph *mGraph; ++ double mGraphKey; ++ bool mInterpolating; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++ QBrush mainBrush() const; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPItemTracer::TracerStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-tracer.h' */ ++ ++ ++/* including file 'src/items/item-bracket.h', size 3969 */ ++/* commit 633339dadc92cb10c58ef3556b55570685fafb99 2016-09-13 23:54:56 +0200 */ ++ ++class QCP_LIB_DECL QCPItemBracket : public QCPAbstractItem ++{ ++ Q_OBJECT ++ /// \cond INCLUDE_QPROPERTIES ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen pen READ pen WRITE setPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(QPen selectedPen READ selectedPen WRITE setSelectedPen) ++ Q_PROPERTY(double length READ length WRITE setLength) ++ Q_PROPERTY(BracketStyle style READ style WRITE setStyle) ++ /// \endcond ++public: ++ /*! ++ Defines the various visual shapes of the bracket item. The appearance can be further modified ++ by \ref setLength and \ref setPen. ++ ++ \see setStyle ++ */ ++ enum BracketStyle { bsSquare ///< A brace with angled edges ++ ,bsRound ///< A brace with round edges ++ ,bsCurly ///< A curly brace ++ ,bsCalligraphic ///< A curly brace with varying stroke width giving a calligraphic impression ++ }; ++ Q_ENUMS(BracketStyle) ++ ++ explicit QCPItemBracket(QCustomPlot *parentPlot); ++ virtual ~QCPItemBracket(); ++ ++ // getters: ++ QPen pen() const { return mPen; } ++ QPen selectedPen() const { return mSelectedPen; } ++ double length() const { return mLength; } ++ BracketStyle style() const { return mStyle; } ++ ++ // setters; ++ void setPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setSelectedPen(const QPen &pen); ++ void setLength(double length); ++ void setStyle(BracketStyle style); ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual double selectTest(const QPointF &pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant *details=0) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ QCPItemPosition * const left; ++ QCPItemPosition * const right; ++ QCPItemAnchor * const center; ++ ++protected: ++ // property members: ++ enum AnchorIndex {aiCenter}; ++ QPen mPen, mSelectedPen; ++ double mLength; ++ BracketStyle mStyle; ++ ++ // reimplemented virtual methods: ++ virtual void draw(QCPPainter *painter) Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ virtual QPointF anchorPixelPosition(int anchorId) const Q_DECL_OVERRIDE; ++ ++ // non-virtual methods: ++ QPen mainPen() const; ++}; ++Q_DECLARE_METATYPE(QCPItemBracket::BracketStyle) ++ ++/* end of 'src/items/item-bracket.h' */ ++ ++ ++#endif // QCUSTOMPLOT_H ++ diff --git a/SPECS/thermald.spec b/SPECS/thermald.spec index fef2853..50ef931 100644 --- a/SPECS/thermald.spec +++ b/SPECS/thermald.spec @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ Name: thermald -Version: 2.4.6 -Release: 2%{?dist} +Version: 2.5 +Release: 3%{?dist} Summary: Thermal Management daemon # thd_cdev_modem.{cpp,h} is currently GPLv2 only @@ -39,6 +39,10 @@ Requires(pre): shadow-utils %{?systemd_requires} +# Upstream removed the internal copy of qcustomplot, add it back as we don't have it in RHEL. +# The alternative would be removing the GUI package +Patch9000: qcustomplot.patch + %description %{name} monitors and controls platform temperature. @@ -247,6 +251,18 @@ exit 0 %changelog +* Mon Jul 25 2022 Benjamin Berg - 2.5-3 +- Accept 2.5 as package version + Related: #2040081 + +* Mon Jul 25 2022 Benjamin Berg - 2.5-2 +- Fix version test script + Related: #2040081 + +* Fri Jul 22 2022 Benjamin Berg - 2.5-1 +- Update to 2.5 + Resolves: #2040081 + * Tue Aug 10 2021 Mohan Boddu - 2.4.6-2 - Rebuilt for IMA sigs, glibc 2.34, aarch64 flags Related: rhbz#1991688